JP6722136B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine, and a spinning machine (slot machine).

Gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction in which the game balls fall in the game area of the game board, as well as winning openings, starting openings, and variable winning openings that allow the game balls to win. It is common. When a game ball is won in these, the player is given a privilege such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Also, some of these game consoles have a display means.

JP 2008-200302 A

However, the conventional game console has room for improvement in the display means.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a display means.

The gaming table of the present invention for solving the above-mentioned object,
A gaming table having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icon is a second hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first animation using a certain display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second animation using the certain display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”),
The first animation is an animation that may change any of the displayed hold icons to the second hold icon,
The second animation is an animation that changes any of the displayed hold icons to the second hold icon,
The first display is a display that may be displayed during the period when the decorative pattern variable display is not performed,
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period in which the hold icon is not displayed,
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a display means.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 3 is an external view of the same pachinko machine seen from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front. 6 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) It shows an example of a stop display symbol of a universal figure. (A) is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit main processing, and (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. (B) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. 6C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. (D) is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400. 7A is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. (B) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. (C) is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. It is a figure showing an example of button production in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production which entangled the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a flow chart showing the execution timing regarding the effect involving the operation means A and the effect involving the operation means B. It is a flow chart showing the execution timing about the production which involved the operation means. It is a figure showing an example of meter production in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the meter production shown in FIG. 14 in steps. It is a figure showing an example of making a big hit by performing meter production in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the meter production shown in FIG. 16 in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|generation by the change ball icon cI demonstrated using FIG. 16 in steps. It is a figure for explaining in detail various kinds of meter displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the rank-up production for which whether the meter display changes changes in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 20 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 21 in steps. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of re-lottery that may be continued from FIG. 22 (41). It is a figure which shows an example of the mini game which graduates whether a meter display appears in stages. It is a figure which shows the example which a big hit is decided by the said change, when a meter display becomes a full state between steps. It is a figure which shows the example in which a meter display is displayed in a reservation frame in steps. It is a figure which shows in stages the example which acquires and stocks a mini item when the meter of a meter display becomes full. It is a figure which shows an example in which a plurality of items are stocked in one full meter display step by step. It is a figure which shows an example in which the meter display of a full state may be carried over to the next symbol variation display step by step. It is a figure which shows in stages the example which is digested without being stocked, even if an item appears when the meter display is full. It is a figure which shows two meter displays, and shows an example in which both disappear, in steps. It is a figure which shows two meter displays, and shows stepwise the example which only one disappears. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 32 in steps. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which display is started in a state where the increase type meter display is accumulated halfway. It is a figure which shows an example of the meter production by the meter display which shows a numerical value in steps. It is a figure which shows the example which changes the numerical type meter display shown in FIG. 35 according to operation of an operation means in steps. It is a figure showing an example of the production different from the meter production explained so far in stages. It is a figure which shows an example in case an error generate|occur|produces while displaying meter display in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the error display ER1 shown in FIG. 38 in steps. It is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. FIG. 38 is an external perspective view of the slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special figure 2, (c) is a decorative pattern An example is shown, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display design of a general figure. (A) is a flowchart of the main controller power-on process, (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. It is a flowchart of a main control unit main loop process. 7 is a flowchart of main controller timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure state update process. (A) is a flowchart of special figure related lottery processing, and (b) is a flowchart of special figure per lottery processing. It is a flowchart of the process during symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of a special figure display confirmation weight process. (A) is a flowchart of the hit start weight process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special electric power releasing process. It is a flowchart of a special electric wire operation process. It is a flowchart of special electric power combination control processing. (A) is a figure explaining the content of a special electricity combination operation pattern data table, (b) is a figure explaining the content of a special electricity combination operation data table. It is a flowchart of a special electric vehicle remaining ball detection processing. It is a flowchart of a special electric power operation end processing. It is a flowchart of a hit end display weight process. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit/miss determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetching process. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special figures 1 and special figures 2. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process, (d) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part image control process. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st example of composition of production device 206, and (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd example of composition of production device 206. It is a figure explaining an example of production which can be applied in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 69 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 70 in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the content of the customization which can be performed with the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of an option menu screen in a state where the member service is not used. It is a figure which shows an example which calls an option menu screen, a volume adjustment window, and a brightness adjustment window from a demo screen. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. FIG. 78 is a view illustrating a sequel to the example illustrated in FIG. 77. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows the other modification. (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen, and (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen. It is a transition diagram of a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a model customization screen. It is the figure which shows one example of the production which uses the fluctuation icon. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the change production of the hold icon and the change production of the variable icon by the navigation character YM. FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating a sequel to the example illustrated in FIG. 88 and modified examples thereof. It is the figure which shows the production example where the reservation framework becomes temporarily invisible. It is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a modification example or the like shown in FIG. 91. An example of an effect in which an effect of a button holding icon is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example which has the period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the example which has the period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed. An example of an effect in which a navigation character YM is entwined with a decorative pattern of a general figure is shown. It is a figure which shows the example which a change notice display is standby-displayed. It is the figure which shows the production example which uses the reservation frame which differs from the reservation frame which is explained so far. It is a figure which shows the example which the icon I1 of the treasure box used until now as the icon of a change alert notification appears as a hold icon. An example of an effect in which a navigation effect YM is entwined with a meter effect is shown. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. An example of effect in which a telop effect is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67(b). FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67(b). FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67(b). It is a figure which shows an example of the production which entwined the navigation character YM by the production|generation apparatus 206 in which the 2nd display device was provided below the decorative pattern display device 208 (1st display device). It is a figure showing an example when other productions are performed during execution of the productions selected by the player. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 6 is a table summarizing music that can be output from the speaker 120. FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the music selection described with reference to FIG. 111 is performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is the figure which shows one example of the production by the production device 206 which shows in Figure 67 (b). It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which the reservation frame which the player selected is changed. It is a figure which shows the modification etc. of the example shown in FIG. It is the figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine which is set to automatic button mode. It is a figure which shows the continuation etc. of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an overlapping relationship between a display of a ball removal notification that is notified when a plate full tank error occurs and each of the other displays of the brightness adjustment window BW. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the ball-out notification. It is a figure which shows the example in which several types of error displays are displayed. 6 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is a figure showing an example of an error which can be detected by payout control section 600 of pachinko machine 100. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100. It is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. FIG. 38 is an external perspective view of the slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure showing various notice icons and various notice displays. It is a figure which shows the icon for mini games. It is a figure which shows a hold icon and a change icon. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which the notice icon is stocked by winning the mini game B, and the notice display is displayed by using the stocked notice icon to change the display mode of the variable icon. It is the figure which shows the continuation of the production example which is shown in Figure 132 in stages, and the figure which shows the deformation example of that production example. It is a figure which shows the 3rd modification-the 6th modification of the example of an effect of Drawing 132 (a1)-Drawing 133 (a40). It is a figure which shows the 7th modification-10th modification of the production example of FIG. 132 (a1)-FIG. 133 (a40). It is a figure showing other modification of the example of an effect of Drawing 132 (a1)-Drawing 133 (a40). A plurality of notice icons are stocked by winning in the mini game B, and a notice display is displayed by using a plurality of the notice icons that have been stocked, and the display mode of the variable icons is changed step by step. It is a figure. It is a figure showing a modification of the example of an effect shown in Drawing 137, and an example of an effect of mini game A of a Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice. It is a figure showing the continuation of the example of production of mini-game A of the announcement of Yoshimune treasure step by step. It is a figure which shows the middle of the 1st modification of the production example of Drawing 138 (u 1)-Drawing 139 (u 38)-the 3rd modification. It is a figure showing the continuation of the 3rd modification of the example of production of Drawing 138 (u 1)-Drawing 139 (u 38), and the middle of the 4th modification-5th modification. It is a figure showing the continuation of the 5th modification of the example of production of Drawing 138 (u1)-Drawing 139 (e 38), and the example of production in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of effect|action which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted, and the modification of the example of effect. It is a figure showing in stages an example of an effect in which a notice display YH of a button appears from a notice icon YI. It is the figure which shows the production example where the execution frequency of button production is stocked gradually. It is the figure which shows the continuation of the production example where the execution frequency of button production is stocked, and other production examples. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect|action which the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon YI can be known before the release. It is a figure which shows in stages an example of production in which one stocked notice icon is used multiple times. It is a figure showing a continuation of an example in which a plurality of the same type of notice display YH are released from the same stocked notice icon YI, and other effect examples. It is a figure which shows an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI were stocked step by step. It is a figure which shows the example which the notice icon YI emitted from the notice icon YI is used in multiple times in the state which can be understood from before release. It is a figure which shows the example of production etc. which continue from FIG. It is a figure showing the continuation of the example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked. It is a figure showing an example of a roulette effect for a notice icon stock in steps. It is a diagram showing another effect using the roulette RLT for advance notice icon stock, and an example of effect accompanied by button operation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example in which the display mode of the “button” notice icon YI changes in accordance with a button operation, and another example. It is a figure showing the example of production which continues from Drawing 156, and the example which displays the same notice icon in a plurality of modes. It is a figure which shows the example of production etc. by the structure which the display means is arrange|positioned under the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L. It is the figure which shows the production example which uses the 2nd decorative design display 208M and the 3rd decorative design display 208N which are shown in Figure 3 and the like. It is a figure which shows in stages an example of an effect using the display of the icon change notice shown in FIG. 131(b). It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of an effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production example shown in FIG. It is a figure showing the continuation of the example in which the silhouette notice of the hold icon is being executed, and other effect examples. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted while failing to be promoted in the middle of a plurality of fluctuations. It is a figure showing the continuation of the example in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted via the meter effect, and other effect examples. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 131(b), and other effect examples. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which combined the display of a certain type of hold icon and an icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the other production example using the icon of a bomber system as a display of an icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the example etc. of various notices regarding the display of an icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the example of a combination of the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L and another display means. It is the figure which shows the production example which uses the 2nd decorative design display 208M and the 3rd decorative design display 208N which are shown in Figure 3 and the like. It is a figure which roughly shows seven example productions in which various icons and displays are used.

Hereinafter, a ball game machine (including an enclosed type) such as a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The term "enclosed type" as used herein refers to an enclosed game machine or the like that circulates and uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 3) as an external structure. .. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store. The main body 104, which is called an inner frame, is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 and serves as a vertical rectangular game machine base body. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed, and is configured in the shape of a frame so that the inside thereof is closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Note that the frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting unit, and in the present specification, a lamp using a light source as an LED is also called a lamp, and a lamp that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is called a lamp. That is, a device that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting unit.

A game area 124 (see FIG. 3) is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a door opening sensor 609 (see FIG. 4) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

Further, the front frame door 106 is provided with a transmissive unit 190. The transmissive unit 190 includes a transmissive unit 191 different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmissive unit 191 is rotatable in the front-rear direction about a drive shaft (not shown) provided in the lower portion. A light emitting diode (LED) is built in the transmissive unit 190. The transmissive part 191 of the transmissive part unit 190 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. The transparent portion 191 functions as an operating unit (button) and also corresponds to an example of a movable unit.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by a player's operation, and an opportunity button lamp 138 that causes the opportunity button 136 to emit light. And The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of an operating unit. The chance button 136 is also an example of a movable means, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is at the initial position. As will be described later in detail, the chance button 136 can execute the forward/backward movement. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 has a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided on the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching device (not shown) that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod. And a launch mallet. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls having an opening opening upward, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150 and at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The payout device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and inside thereof, a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) are provided. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high signal or the low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through the discharge port 152a and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play the game. The ball to the person.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the overall game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 including 168, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that configures a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and power is supplied to various electric gaming devices. A power supply board including a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supply and a power supply switch 178 for turning on and off the power supply by an operation of a game shop clerk, and an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating 182 and a CR interface 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are arranged.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called right-handed game board. On this game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, the strength of launching a game ball is changed by a player's operation, so that a universal figure starting port 228 and a second special figure starting port 232 to be described later, It can be divided into one special figure starting port 230. Specifically, with respect to the game area 124, by arranging the game nail 238 and the like, the game ball rolling in the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special figure starting port 230 is the second. It is difficult or impossible to enter the special figure starting port 232, and conversely, the game ball that rolls in the second area (the right side in the game area) provided with the second special figure starting opening 232. It is configured that it is difficult or impossible to enter the ball into the 1 special figure starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 equipped with a right-handed game board, but can be widely applied to a pachinko machine equipped with a general game board.

A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, three decorative pattern display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative pattern display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative pattern display devices, the second decorative pattern display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the first decoration The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be a sub display device, and a second decorative symbol display device. The width of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the width direction, and the height is also shorter. However, the display screen of each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N should be smaller than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the length and height in the width direction are shown in FIG. It is not limited to the embodiment. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 has its right end portion overlapped with the front side of the left end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and also the third decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 208N, the left end side portion thereof overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 may be the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The position of the third decorative symbol display 208N shown in FIG. 3 may be the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not partially overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the position deviates from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position apart from the left side toward the left side). Also, the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (right side from the first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position apart from each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the directions in which they come in contact with and separate from each other along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Note that the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily variable display of the decorative symbols for each display device, and are named for convenience. Note that it does not limit the interpretation of the display device. Further, these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) are summarized as effect display means, and the effect display means is the decorative pattern. It is also possible to display the variable display of, or to display a plurality of types of effect. Further, the number of decorative symbol display devices is not limited, and the decorative symbol display device may be a pachinko machine having only one or a pachinko machine having only two decorative symbol display devices. It may be a pachinko machine provided with three or more. Further, the positional relationship between the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is not limited to the positional relationship shown in FIG.

In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. .. The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end portion of the light guide plate, and the light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if For example, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut in a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the region where the light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the light irradiation plate. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Below the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to M, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, the first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high accuracy middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol". The rendering device 206 will be described later.

The three decorative pattern display devices 208L to 208M are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and are configured by liquid crystal display devices (Liquid Crystal Display) here. The display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be seen by being divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display The area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix. Other display devices including a display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

The public figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is composed of 7-segment LEDs here. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are constituted by 7-segment LEDs here. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative design displayed on the first decorative design display device 208L is a design representing the design displayed on the first special design display device 212 or the second special design display device 214 in a form that enhances the effect, The first decorative symbol display device 208L is also a type of symbol display means.

The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure variation games (details will be described later), and here, the universal figure variation games are retained up to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and here, a predetermined number of special figure variation games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is hard to occur to a high probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

In addition, around the effect device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting port 228, a first special figure starting port 230, a second special figure starting port 232, A central variable winning port 234 and a right variable winning port 235 are arranged.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (when winning in the general winning opening 226). Then, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. Hereinafter, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "loan ball". Sometimes called "ball (gaming ball)".

The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and here, 1 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged. For this reason, it is expected that the game ball will enter by hitting the universal figure starting port 228 to the right. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

Only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball. Along with discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of itself does not change.

Only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the universal figure starting port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and it is expected that the player will enter the ball by hitting it to the right. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (den Chu). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning the prize in the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the closed state of the pair of blade members 2321 is an opening/closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and stops the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times to the second special figure starting port 232. The ball can be entered (the prize winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is the state where the winning is easy. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball). It is a variable starting area in which the easiness of entering a game ball is variable and changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. With the pair of blade members 2321 open, of the game balls that have entered the game region 124, the second special region that is the variable starting region is more than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230, which is the fixed starting region. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or less than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with two variable winning openings. A central variable winning port 234 (corresponding to a first variable winning port) provided in the center of the game board 200 is arranged below the first special figure starting port 230. In addition, the right side variable winning a prize mouth 235 which is provided on the right side of the game board 200 (equivalent to the second variable winning a prize mouth) is arranged under the 2nd special figure starting mouth 232, the ball hits by hitting right There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a winning opening and door members 2341 and 351 which can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 may be called an attacker. The central variable winning opening 234 maintains the closed state until the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the non-electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state changes between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right side variable winning a prize mouth 235 maintains the closed state until the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the electric power support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state change between the open state and the closed state. repeat. That is, each of the variable winning openings 234, 235 has a predetermined first open/closed state (here, closed state) and a second open/closed state (here, opened) in which the game ball is easier to win than the first open/closed state. It is a variable winning means capable of changing the open/closed state from one to the other of the (state), and when the special symbol variation game is won in the non-electric support state and the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the big hit symbol. The door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation game is won in the electric support state and the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right side variable winning a prize port 235 has a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. In any of the variable winning a prize ports 234 and 235, the closed state does not necessarily have to be a completely closed state, and even if it is slightly open, it may be a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter. .. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are used as prize balls. Discharge to 126. It should be noted that both the ball entering the central variable winning port 234 and the ball entering the right variable winning port 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

According to the arrangement of the universal figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235 described above, in the electric support state, the right Strike is a way for the player to win, and in the non-electric power support state, left-handed is a way for the player to win.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the operating handle of the player, and launches the rod 146. And the launching mallet 148 allows the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launches into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize holes (general prize hole 226, central variable prize hole 234, right variable). The winning opening 235) or the starting opening (first special drawing starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232) is won, or no winning opening or starting opening is given, or the universal drawing starting opening 228 is used. It just reaches the outlet 240.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball. Further, on the back side of the rendering device 206, the above-mentioned three decorative pattern display devices 208L to 208N are arranged. That is, in the rendering device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a nail or the like of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to make it easier to enter.

In a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely opened (fully open state), the player can visually recognize a part or all of the display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, which decorative symbol is the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is possible to shield only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify. Further, in a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed (fully closed state), the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Shield all of. Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are the effect display means, are the shielding means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the effect movable means.

In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged and can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general officer 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

The chance button 136 that can execute the forward/backward movement and the transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction are also a kind of effect moving means.

Furthermore, as a production movable means, a family crest accessory 224E (see FIG. 14 and the like) not shown here is prepared. The family crest monument 224E is arranged at an initial position below the first decorative pattern display device 208L. When the crest monument 224E starts the operation, it rises from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side). In the initial position, the family coat emblem 224E is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the state in which the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps from the front side. Further, the family crest monument 224E has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

<Control part>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. It may be composed of one circuit board, or the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be. Therefore, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are respectively controlled by the control unit (for example, the main control unit (300), the first sub-control unit (400), and the second sub-control unit (500). )), or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) together can be regarded as the control means, and the main control unit 300 can be used as the first control means. One that combines the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 can also be regarded as the second control means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and a temporary data A RAM 308 for storing the data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. .. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (two random number value generation circuits are built in this circuit. And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each starting opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and door opening such as front frame door opening sensor and inner frame opening sensor. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined circuit. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a symbol display device, for example, the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210. For controlling the display of the drive circuit 326 and various status display sections 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.). Various solenoids 332 that open and close the drive circuit 330 and predetermined movable members such as the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234, the door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235, and the like. Is connected to a drive circuit 334 for controlling the.

The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two additional methods for the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a seed of a random number to perform an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number.

The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value by using white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the value thus obtained as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. ..

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and the latched value is built in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in the random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random number generating circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Value is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random value storage register incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318 and corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to pachinko the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is provided with the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 send and receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always sends the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 sends error information. Both can communicate in both directions. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub control unit 400, various effect data, and the like. Is connected to the ROM 406 in which is stored.

Further, in the basic circuit 402, the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), the drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and the second decorative pattern. A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and a position detection sensor 430 for detecting the current positions of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. A detection signal from the detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 has been pressed, the position detection sensor 430, the detection unit 710 of the chance button 136, and the operation key unit sensor 425 for detecting the operation of the operation key unit 181. Based on a signal from the CPU 404 and a sensor circuit 428 for outputting to the basic circuit 402, a display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to display three decorative symbols. A VDP 434 (video display processor) that displays an image on each of the devices 208L to 208N is connected.

Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, and an image display. A ROM 506 that stores data and the like is provided.

In addition, the basic circuit 502 is provided with various movable means (a chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing/retreating operation, a transparent portion 191, which can be rotated in the front-rear direction, a Yashiro actor 224Fa, a general actor 224Fb, a family crest actor 224E). Based on a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control, various movable means sensors 424 for detecting current positions of various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E, and detection signals from various movable means sensors 424. The sensor circuit 518 which outputs to the circuit 502 is connected. Further, in the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game underframe lamp 542, A serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the image display of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, and the second sub-control unit 500 controls various movable means 136, 191. 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E are controlled, but the second sub-control unit 500 performs image display control of each of the three decorative pattern display devices 208L to 208L, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs various movable means 136 and. 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E may be controlled, or one of the sub-control units may perform both controls.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, the display control of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG. 1 is also performed by the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500.

<Payout controller, launch controller, power controller>
Next, the payout controller 600, the launch controller 630, and the power controller 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

Further, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 transmits a door opening command to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, the payout control unit 600 sends an error command to the main control unit 300.

Regarding the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without passing through the payout control unit 600, or the payout control unit 600 may be used as a relay board. Then, the door opening sensor 609 may transmit a door opening command to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to predetermined components (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). Here, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 sends the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path. For example, the main controller 300 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply controller 660. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a voltage after the predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first sub control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, etc.) and devices. The first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and devices. The payout controller 600, the main controller 300, and the first sub controller 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply controller 660 almost at the same time. The payout control unit 600 may be configured such that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both or at least one of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400. The main controller 300 may be configured such that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply controller 660 earlier than both or at least one of the payout controller 600 and the first sub controller 400. The first sub control unit 400 may be configured such that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both or at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

Further, the second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost at the same time as the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 controls the power supply control unit 660 to supply a predetermined voltage earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be. The second sub control unit 500 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

In the island facility provided in the gaming machine installation branch, the 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and the pachinko machine 100 is supplied with a 24V AC current. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply controller 660 of the main controller 300. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit, and the direct current of 12V is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and then the predetermined voltage (5V). The DC current of () is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the DC current converted to a voltage of 12V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the activation signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I/O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the 12V supply current drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line connecting the power supply control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and flowing a DC current of 12V, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. Equivalent to. The low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. Further, the power management unit 660 may output the input 24V AC current as it is, or may convert it into a 36V DC current and output it. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 may be supplied with a current having an operating voltage (here, 5 V) via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

Further, the activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the DC current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 upon power-on reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Furthermore, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake, or a voltage drop due to lightning strike, fraudulent activity, or the like. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the WDT 3141 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value. The start signal from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 via a common signal line, but may be input via dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

In the case of a momentary power failure in which the power supply is cut off and immediately restored, that is, in the case of automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a power failure voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 resets Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core and the internal register of the CPU 304 are initialized. Then, the security check process is executed. In the security check process, whether or not the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct is recalculated. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time or a time obtained by adding a random time randomly selected to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, the main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and the game control is started. On the other hand, also when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core and the internal register of the CPU 304 are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. After that, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 5(a) to (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are The types of special maps and public maps that are stopped and displayed will be described. FIG. 5(a) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

The special game 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special drawing starting hole 230, and the ball has entered the second special drawing starting port 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting opening sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats "lighting up of 7 segments" and "variation display of special figure 2" which repeats lighting of one segment in the center. To do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of symbol variable display. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special symbol 2. Further, after that, a fixed display for maintaining the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec) is performed.

Therefore, from the start of "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of special figure 1 and the confirmation display is completed, or the special figure after starting "variable display of special figure 2" The stop display of the stop symbol mode of 2 and the end of the confirmation display correspond to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the variable display of symbols may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 5A, ten types of special symbols from “special symbol A” to “special symbol J” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variable display. In FIG. 5A, the white parts in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

"Special drawing A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design, and "Special drawing B" is a 15R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game and the 15R jackpot game, both shift to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a universal figure high probability state, and the state of not transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a universal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special drawing A" is the special symbol high probability general figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "Special map B" is the special symbol low probability general figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is relatively large.

“Special map C” is a 2R jackpot design called sudden change, and is in a special map high probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing C" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing A" which is 15R. "Special drawing D" is a 2R jackpot design called suddenly shorter working hours, and is in a special probability low probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing D" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing B" which is 15R.

“Special map E” is a 2R jackpot pattern called hidden probability change, and is a special map high probability general figure low probability state. "Special map F" is a 2R jackpot design that is suddenly called normal, and is in a special map low probability general map low probability state. These “special map E” and “special map F” are both 2R and are in a state where they do not shift to the time saving state.

"Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol and "Special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit without 2R time reduction. That is, the "special drawing G" and the "special drawing H" are in the same state as the "special drawing F", but the effects displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are different between the two, and even in the same state, " By providing "special map G", "special map H" and "special map F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

In addition, "special figure I" is the first off symbol, "special figure J" is the second off symbol, the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is also provided with a symbol other than the "special symbol A" as a 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 kinds of decorative patterns, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first special opening start sensor 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 232 has won a ball, that is, the first special opening starting sensor 230 has detected that the ball has entered, or On the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L In each symbol display area of the symbol display area 208c, "decoration 1"→"decoration 2"→"decoration 3"→... "decoration 9"→"decoration 10"→"decoration 1"→... Switch the display with "Fluctuating display of decorative pattern". In the variable display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol changes at high speed (scroll display) for each symbol display area at the beginning. And when notifying the 15R jackpot of "special drawing B", a symbol combination in which three identical decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration" 1" and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "special drawing A", a pattern combination in which three same odd decorative patterns are lined up (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") , Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, "special drawing E" 2R big hit called hidden probability change, "special drawing F" suddenly called 2R big hit, or "special drawing G" first small hit, "special drawing H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying a 2R jackpot called "special figure C" suddenly changed or a 2R jackpot called "special figure D" suddenly shortened, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is displayed. Stop display.

On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “special drawing I” and the second deviation of “special drawing J”, stop symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 3B in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and/or the third decorative symbol display device 208N may display the fifth symbol. The fifth symbol is a display of a decorative symbol smaller than the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. For example, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 5(b) may be a reduced size, or the display pattern may be different from the display pattern of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 5(b). Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and/or the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also a kind of symbol display means. The fifth symbol may be displayed in an area outside the symbol display areas 208a to 208c even in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Furthermore, the four symbols may be displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M. The fourth symbol is a display of a decorative symbol indicating that the symbol is in variable display or stopped.

FIG. 5(c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two kinds of stop display modes of the public figure, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public symbol B" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the full lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is won, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portions in the drawing show the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments to be turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, a counter for generating a random number initial value for a special symbol at the time of a big hit, a random number counter for determining a special symbol at the time of a big hit, and a random number for a small hit at the time of a big hit Random counter initial value generation counter for special figure determination, small figure special figure determination counter, random number special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, random special figure determination random number counter and special figure timer Each counter of the random number counter for number determination is provided. Further, in the RAM 308, for each special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of holdings, a big hit determination random value, a big hit special figure determination random value, a small hit special figure determination random value, a loss special figure determination. A random number value for use, a result of prior judgment on acceptance, a result of prior judgment on special figure, a result of judgment on acceptance, a result of decision on special figure and a result of decision on special figure timer are stored. Further, in the RAM 308, the special storage storage unit is divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the winning/disapproval determination (lottery) can be suspended. It is prepared. The reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 has a random number value for determining the special figure 1 big hit, a random value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of big hit, a random number value for determining the special figure 1 at small hit, and a random value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of losing. The four random number values of 1 are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one by one in the winning order (holding order). In addition, in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2, the random number value for determining the special figure 2 big hit, the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of big hit, the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of small hit, and the special figure 2 at the time of losing The four random number values of the random number values are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one by one in the winning order (holding order).

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which this activation signal is input, resets and starts by a reset interrupt and executes the main processing main processing shown in FIG. 6A in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

In step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, first, as the initial setting 1, a stack initial value setting (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, an interrupt mask setting, an initial setting of the I/O 310, and various types stored in the RAM 308. Initial setting of variables, operation permission to WDT 314, setting of initial values, and the like are performed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value. Next, the counter value of the WDT 314 is cleared and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (this process will be referred to as WDT process hereinafter). In the initialization process of step S101 subsequent to the WDT process, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338, the power supply management unit 660, the main control unit via the second sub control unit 500. When the voltage value of the power supply supplied to 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to the WDT process, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the initial stage is performed. Perform setting 2. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines the period for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, at a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, (1) Outputting a clear signal from the sub control unit 400), setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

Next, in step S103, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process here, three initial values for generating the initial values of the random number counter for determining the special map at the time of big hit, the random number counter for determining the special map at the time of small hit, and the random number counter for determining the special map at loss Update the value generation counter. After completion of the basic random number initial value updating process, the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, effect random number updating processing is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a random number counter for determining a timer number for a special figure and a random number for determining a general figure. Generate a random number for use. In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After this effect random number updating process is completed, interrupt permission is set and the process returns to step S103.

The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105, except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period (for example, 4 ms).

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, once in about 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle. At the time of starting the timer interrupt processing, the values of the registers of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area, or the WDT 314 is periodically (for example, about once every 2 ms which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt). ) Do a restart.

First, in step S201, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various sphere detection sensors are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence/absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 performs various operations. The data is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. ), the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

Further, in this step S201, the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the present detection signal storage area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, when the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a present detection signal). Information) indicating that the general winning opening 226, the central variable winning opening 234, the right variable winning opening 235, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or It is determined that the start port 228 has been passed. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence/absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process is branched to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning in the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main controller 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a single winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

In the basic random number initial value updating process (step S203), the values of the counters for generating various random number counter initial values are updated within the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number updating process (step S205), the values of various random number counters are updated. The value is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and for example, each time the random number counter for determining special figure 1 for big hit makes one round, the value of the generation counter is set in the random number counter for determining special figure 1 for big hit. The other random number counters are similarly processed.

In step S207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time to change/stop display the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time to change/stop display the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, the special figure 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time for measuring the time to change/stop display the symbol on the second special figure display device 214 , Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period and the like are updated.

Then, a winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the winning determination process (step S209), first, when the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 are won, the prizes provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the sphere number storage area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize sphere number storage area.

Next, in this winning determination process, there is a prize in the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232, and the number of pending special figure variation games is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). If, the predetermined start information is stored. That is, if the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, a big hit determination random number value and various special figure determination random number values are stored. The big hit determination random number value is a value obtained by processing the value acquired from the random value storage register of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4 (for example, the acquired value+the value of the R register+1). On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a value obtained by processing the software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software random number value+R register value+1). A combination of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the starting information deriving unit. Various random number values (starting information) are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the special figure holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. This special figure reservation storage unit has a predetermined upper limit (four in this case) of starting information derived based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232. It corresponds to an example of the starting information storage means capable of storing up to. At this time, various random number values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the values stored in the temporary area may be stored in the reserved storage unit of the special figure. In this case, the temporary area is started. The information storage means may be used, or the reserved storage portion and the temporary area of the special figure may be used as the start information storage means. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved special maps stored in the RAM 308, and increases the number of reserved special maps by 1. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

In addition, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, and the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the universal figure winning anomaly at that timing is detected. The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in the random number storage area provided in the RAM 308, which is different from that for special figures, as the random number value for universal figure winning as starting information.

Further, in this winning determination process, a predetermined ball detection sensor is used to move to the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the general figure starting port 228, the central variable winning port 234, or the right variable winning port 235. When a winning (ball entry) is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, and the center variable. The winning acceptance information indicating whether or not there is a winning (ball entry) at the winning opening 234 and the right-sided variable winning opening 235 is set.

Whether the starting information is the special figure or the starting information is the general figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the starting information is not stored and the process proceeds to step S211.

When this winning determination process (step S209) is completed, the prefetch process is called. In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings has increased from the prefetching process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of reservations so far (the number of reservations at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which will be referred to as the old number of reservations), and the CPU 304 The number of reservations at the time of executing the prefetch processing of this time that has passed the winning determination processing (step S209) is compared with the number of old reservations, and it is determined whether the number of reservations is increasing. If the number of reservations has not increased, this prefetching process ends without prefetching the start information. On the other hand, if the number of holdings is increasing, the increase of the random number value for special figure 1 big hit determination in the holding storage section of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the special value is stored in the holding storage section of the special figure 2. Figure 2 Pre-read the increase in the random number for jackpot determination. In the prefetching here, only the increment is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. It should be noted that the prefetch here means that the start information is read before the success/failure determination (main lottery). ) May be used in the sense of reading.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is in a control state of either a special figure low probability state in which the probability of winning a big hit is relatively low or a relatively high special figure high probability state. It is called that the special map is in high probability state. A probability change flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the probability variation graph is set to ON, the special figure high probability state (during probability variation) is set, and when the probability variation graph is set to OFF, the special figure low probability state is set.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a win/fail pre-determination table used in the prefetching process. In this win/fail pre-determination table, random number ranges are defined separately for the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value is finished, this time, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit judgment random value or special figure 2 big hit judgment random value is judged beforehand. It is determined to which random number range in the usage table it belongs. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the pre-reading random number value for special figure 1 big hit judgment or random value for special figure 2 big hit judgment is within a predetermined numerical range. Sometimes, the result of prior determination of win/fail is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is other than that, the result of prior determination of win/fail is pre-determined as "miss". Even in the special figure-related processing (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B) described later, the special figure variation game win/loss determination is performed again using the win/loss determination table having the same content as the win/loss pre-determination table. The determination result here is only the result of the preliminary determination.

In the case where the result of the prior determination is “big hit”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of big hit in the reserved storage section of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserved storage section of the special figure 2. Pre-read the random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of big hit. When the result of prior determination of win/fail is “Small hit”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of small hit in the reserved storage section of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the reserved storage of the special figure 2 is stored. Pre-read the random number value for determining Toku-zu 2 at the time of small hit in the department. If the result of prior determination is "miss", the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of loss in the reserved storage section of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is read in advance, or in the reserved storage section of the special figure 2. Pre-read the random number value for determining Toku-zu 2 when lost. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a special figure preliminary determination table used in the prefetch process is also stored. In the special figure pre-determination table, a random number range corresponding to each of the 10 types of stop symbol modes (“special figure A” to “special figure J”) shown in FIG. Depending on which random number range the figure-determining random number value belongs to, a special figure prior determination result (which stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 5A is stopped and displayed) is obtained. Note that the special figure determination result here is also a result of preliminary determination, and the determination of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure is performed again in the special figure-related processing (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B) described later. ..

The pre-reading of the start-up information and the pre-determination using the pre-read start-up information described above are executed before the success/failure determination (main lottery) of the special figure-related processing (S213) described later. The main control unit 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first starting information pre-reading means, and the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value and various kinds The main control unit 300 that pre-reads the random number value for determining Toku-zu 2 corresponds to an example of a second starting information pre-reading unit. Further, the main control unit 300 that performs pre-judgment based on the random numbers for special figure 1 big hit determination and various random numbers for determining special figure 1 corresponds to an example of the first pre-judging means, and for special figure 2 big hit decision. The main control unit 300 that performs the preliminary determination based on the random number value and various random number values for determining the special figure 2 corresponds to an example of the second preliminary determination unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a pre-reading information temporary storage unit for special figure 1 divided into areas for each hold, and a pre-reading information temporary storage section for special figure 2 similarly divided into areas for each hold. Has been. The information indicating the special figure preliminary determination result (which is also the information indicating the special figure and hereinafter referred to as prefetch information) is stored in the corresponding pending area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit.

If the number of reservations has not increased, the prefetch information "no reservation" is stored in the corresponding reservation area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Further, in the prefetching process, when the big hit game is being played, and when the current control state is the electric power support state (the time saving flag is in the on state), the prefetching of the starting information of Toku-zu 1 or the preliminary determination is performed. However, in these cases, “undetermined” information indicating that the pre-determination of the stop symbol based on the pre-read start information of the special figure 1 is not performed is the corresponding reserved area of the pre-read information temporary storage unit. Remember. That is, based on the fact that the pair of blade members 2321 is not provided in the starting port (the first special figure starting port 230 where the state is a fixed starting region), it is acquired during the big hit game and during the electric support. The pre-determination based on the started information is not performed, and the pre-determination result is not notified (prefetching notice). By doing so, the fairness of the player is secured. Note that the pre-reading of the starting information itself is not performed, but the pre-reading may be performed and the pre-determination and the result notification (pre-reading notice) may not be performed. Furthermore, the pre-reading and the pre-determination are performed, but the pre-determination result is obtained. The notification (prefetch notice) may not be performed.

In the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, the universal figure related process is performed following the winning determination process of step S209 (step S211). In the general-university-drawing related process, first, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the general-universal figure is performed as the general-university-state update process. For example, in the processing in the middle of the universal figure fluctuation display (the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off, and the lighting control is controlled. To do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

In the processing at the timing when the universal figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the hit symbol (the universal symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol (7B LED shown in FIG. 5C) is controlled to turn on/off the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 so as to have one of the display modes. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general-drawing-related process here. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the general-purpose stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fixed display of either one of the winning symbol and the lost symbol. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the hit symbol that is confirmed and displayed is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the universal figure variation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the open period to the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening/closing, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a loss, the universal figure loss flag is turned on. When the universal figure loss flag is on, even in the universal figure state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set.

Subsequently, in this public figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the general figure variation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the public figure that is being held When the number of variable games is 1 or more, the result of the universal figure variable game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. If the winning judgment is made, and if the winning is won, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected to change the display of the public figure on the public figure display device 210, and the variable display time is stored in the general figure change time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure change display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure pending count storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

In the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure related process (step S213) is performed following the general figure related process of step S211 described above. In this special figure-related processing, first, the special figure state update processing for special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed, and then the special figure state update processing for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update Process). The special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update processing in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 The lighting and extinguishing drive control is performed by repeatedly turning off the light. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the general command rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), in the special figure-related lottery processing described later. Based on the special figure determination result (stop figure mode of the special figure), the 7 segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is controlled to be turned on/off, and the special figure 2 is being stopped and displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings that indicate that. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214, 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), sudden shortening symbol (special symbol) Figure D), hidden probability variation pattern (special figure E), suddenly normal symbol (special figure F), first small hit symbol (special figure G), second small hit symbol (special figure H), first lost symbol (special figure) Figure I), and the fixed display of any one of the first lost symbol (special diagram J). After that, the information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special FIG. 2 variable game. Further, when a value is set in the electric support frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the shortened time count, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability fluctuation is not occurring, the time saving flag is turned off. Further, the time saving flag is turned off even during a big hit game (during a special game state) or a small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the non-electric power support state (first entry rate control state) in the big hit game state and the small hit game state (during special game state).

In addition, in addition to the predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation stop setting transmission processing is to be executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S215) which will be described later, the transmission information storage area is additionally stored, and a symbol for stopping the variable display is displayed. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the figure is the special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described below, and then the process ends.

In addition, the jackpot flag is also prepared in the RAM 308, and if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 operating in the setting area, a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, an image for notifying the player to start the big hit game is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. The information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for waiting for a certain period. Also, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect start setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect production period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235 detects a winning number of game balls of a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls)) The central variable winning opening 234 door member 2341 or the right variable winning opening 235 door member A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 351 in an open state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening/closing the 2351, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. To do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command special winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234 or the right side A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 351 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2351 of the variable winning port 235 for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) and is provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state updating process which is started at the timing when the opening/closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a big hit. Production in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by while the image for informing the player that the game is finished is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Set the information indicating the waiting period.

As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open/closed state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235 during the big hit game state (during the special game state). It corresponds to an example of a variable winning control means for controlling. The opening/closing pattern of the door members 2341, 351 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the opening/closing pattern according to the winning/deciding judgment of the special figure variation game from the ROM 306. get.

Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON at the same time as the end of the big hit game based on the stop symbol mode represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON when the special map determination result is “special map A” or “special map C” in the special map lottery process described later. .. If the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probable change flag and the probable change flag are set to ON. Further, when the special figure determination result is "special figure B" or "special figure D", only the time saving flag of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is set to ON, and the electricity support frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set the power support frequency to 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 controls the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry (entry rate) of the game ball into the second special figure starting port 232 (variable starting area) is controlled to the first This corresponds to an example of an entry rate changing unit that changes between a non-electric support state that is the entry rate control state and an electric support state that is the second entry rate control state.

Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special area 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, the RAM 308 also has a loss flag, and if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the loss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), The special region 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process shifts to the next process.

When the special figure 2 state update processing is completed, the special figure 1 state update processing is performed. In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, description thereof will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process described above is completed, the special figure related lottery process is performed this time. In the special figure-related lottery process, first, the process for the special diagram 2 (special diagram 2 related lottery process) is performed, and then the process for the special diagram 1 (special diagram 1-related lottery process) is performed. In this way, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the same timing (the winning determination process in the main control unit timer interrupt process started at a predetermined trigger). When the starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 in S209) and the starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second special figure starting port 232. Or, if the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied. Even if there is, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the big hit determination of the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and the prize is given to the second special figure starting port 232. The notification of the result of the lottery based on the priority information is performed prior to the notification of the result of the lottery based on the winning of the winning in the first special map starting port 230, and the start information and the special map of the special map 1 are used as the start information that the lottery is not performed. When only the starting information of Toku-zu 1 among the starting information of No. 2 remains, and the starting information of Toku-zu 2 is newly stored, based on the newly stored starting information of Toku-zu 2 The notification of the result of the lottery is performed prior to the notification of the result of the lottery based on the start information of the special diagram 1 that has already been stored. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing-related lottery process corresponds to an example of a lottery unit (win/win determination unit).

In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the lottery (judgment) is determined, the special figure to be stopped and displayed, and the timer number are decided. First, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined hit/miss determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is performing the special figure change display or the stop display, and if any of them is being displayed, the main control unit timer interrupt processing is executed. If none of the displays are displayed, it is judged whether it is set during special figure operation or non-special figure operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, main controller timer interrupt processing Returning to step S3, if the special figure is set to be inactive, it means that the hit/absence determination prohibition condition has not been satisfied, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined hit/miss determination condition is satisfied. The determination here refers to the pending storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308, and determines whether or not the number of pending special figure 2 variable games is greater than zero. If the number of holdings is 0, the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process, and if it is 1 or more, it means that the predetermined win/fail judgment condition is satisfied.

If a predetermined hit/miss determination condition is satisfied, one set of random numbers (starting information stored in the past in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 (random number for special figure 2 big hit determination) , The random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of big hit, the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at time of the small hit, and the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at loss, and the start information (random A set of numerical values) from the currently stored area to the adjacent area. That is, if the starting information stored in the earliest is taken out from the reserved storage unit of special figure 2, and if the starting information is stored in the reserved storage section of special figure 2, the Nth oldest starting information is reserved in special figure 2. This is set as the (N-1)th oldest starting information in the storage unit. Further, the number of reservations stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by 1. One set of random number values from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (random number value for special figure 2 big hit determination, random value for special figure 2 determination during big hit, random number value for special figure 2 determination during small hit, and when lost) The main control unit 300 that performs the process of extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of a second start information acquisition unit.

Next, a win/fail judgment process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a win/loss determination table. The content of the win/loss determination table is the same as the content of the win/loss pre-determination table described above. In this win/loss determination process, the random change value for special figure 2 jackpot determination is stored in the win/failure determination table in accordance with the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state) by referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308. “Big hit”, “small hit”, or “miss” is derived as the result of the hit/miss determination based on which of the random number ranges. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning the big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Derivation of “big hit”, “small hit”, or “miss” corresponds to the win/loss determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the win/loss determination process here is the lottery means (win/win determination means). Corresponds to an example. Further, the “big hit” corresponds to an example of a specific hit/miss judgment result.

When the execution of the hit determination processing is completed, the process proceeds to the symbol determination processing of the special figure. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table. The contents of the special figure determination table are the same as the contents of the special figure preliminary determination table described above. In the symbol determination process of this special figure, when the winning/decision result is "big hit", based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number value for special figure 2 determination at the time of big hit belongs to, The special figure determination result is decided to be one of "special figure A" to "special figure F". In addition, when the winning/deciding result is “small hit”, the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number for special figure 2 determination during small hit belongs to. It is decided to be "Special drawing G" or "Special drawing H". Further, when the winning/disapproval decision result is “miss”, the special figure determination result is determined to be “special” based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of losing belongs. Determined as "I" or "Special J". The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the symbol determination process of the special figure corresponds to an example of the symbol determination means.

In the variation time determination process subsequent to the symbol determination process of the special diagram, the variation display period in the variation stop display of the special diagram is determined. In this variation time determination process, the timer number determination random number is acquired from the timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the random number for determining the timer number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure variation, but it may be the timing of acquiring the start information. A table for timer number determination is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each special figure determination result. The timer number, the second special figure display device 214 or the first special figure display device 212, the time from the start of the variation of the symbol to the display of the stop symbol representing the result of the winning/disapproval determination, that is, the special symbol is variably displayed. Although it represents a variation table period (special figure variation time), it may be a variation table period of a decorative pattern.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 2 seconds, which is an ultra-shortened special figure fluctuation time, and timer 2 is 5 seconds, which is the special figure fluctuation stop period, which is the shortened special figure fluctuation time. It means that Note that the determination of the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure variation. The timer 3 has a special figure fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In timers 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 3 is no reach.

The timer 4 represents that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 12 seconds, and when the timer 4 is determined, the normal reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The normal reach is generally a stop display (strictly, a temporary stop) of a decorative symbol having the same two symbol display regions (for example, the left and right symbol display regions 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) (first stop and second stop are performed. ), that the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is in a variably displayed state, that is, the variably displayed symbol display area is a specific symbol (stopped symbol display area) It is a state in which a predetermined combination of big hit symbols is stopped and displayed if stop display (third stop or final stop) is performed. The timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 40 seconds, the timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and the timer 7 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, the super reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Super reach is a version of normal reach that has special effects such as variable display added to improve the effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, the special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The special fluctuation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, etc. When the timer 8 is determined, the full rotation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It The probability that the timer 8 is selected is much lower than the probability that the other timers are selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to the premier reach.

It should be noted that the simple reach means a variation pattern of a decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special variation.

This reach means that the result of the hit/nozzle judgment (main lottery) in the special figure-related process becomes a specific hit/no hit judgment result (a predetermined result with a high player's advantage) after the hit/no hit judgment. This is a notice effect that is given to the player in advance before the result of the hit/miss determination is notified, and whether or not to reach is determined after the hit/miss determination.

In the variable time determination process here, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined according to which random number range the acquired random number for timer number determination corresponds to the special figure determination result. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number according to the number of holdings, the number of holdings of the current special figure 2 as well as the random number for determining the timer number is used. Based on this, the timer number may be determined.

The timer number representing the special figure variation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

Before the special drawing lottery-related processing is executed (for example, the winning determination processing S209 described above), a special drawing preliminary determination result is obtained from a plurality of types of timer selection tables including one or more period information timer numbers. It is also possible to select one type of timer selection table on the basis of a predetermined random number lottery based on this, or to determine the timer number from the timer selection table here. Also in determining the timer number here, a lottery may be performed using a dedicated random number (for example, a random number for determining the timer number), or the timer number may be uniquely determined without performing the lottery. .. Further, the timer selection table may be selected in this special figure lottery related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be caused to select the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the timer selection table.

When the variable time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special figure 2 related lottery process ends.

Next, in the special figure-related processing, special figure 1-related lottery processing is performed. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” having the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 related lottery process is replaced with “special figure 1”, the description thereof will be omitted. Omit it.

As described above, the special figure-related processing (step S213) in the main controller timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 6B is completed, and the command setting transmission processing (step S215) is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The scheduled output information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are commands. Type (for example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, prize effect start command, finish effect start command, number-of-rounds designation command, big winning opening opening command, big winning opening closing command, power recovery command, RAM Clear command, special figure hold increase command, general figure hold increase command, and other information that can specify the type of command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag), and the information indicating the timer number. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, including the information indicating the special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), the information indicating the control state, and the like, in the case of the winning effect start command and the end effect start command In the case of the command for designating the number of rounds per hit, the information indicating the control condition, the number of hits per round, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and winning at the central variable winning port 234. The presence or absence of a prize, the presence or absence of a prize in the right side variable winning a prize mouth 235, and the like are included.

Further, in the above-described general command rotation start setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308 is information indicating a special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating a control state, information indicating a timer number, and a hold. The information indicating the number of the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game that is being performed is set. In the above-described general command rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating a special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating a control state, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission processing, the command data includes information indicating the special figure determination result, information indicating the control state, the number of pending first special figure variation games or second special figure variation games, etc. Is set. The winning effect start command here corresponds to the big hit game start command. In the above-mentioned general command end effect setting transmission process, in the command data, effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the three decorative pattern display devices 208L to 208N, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, Information indicating the control state, information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which are withheld, etc. is set. Upon receiving the end effect start command, the first sub control unit 400 transmits the end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500, which has received the end effect control command, displays an image for notifying the player that the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the jackpot game, will be ended on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Then, the big hit game ends. The end effect start command here corresponds to a big hit game end command. In the above-mentioned general command special winning opening opening setting transmission processing, as the command data of the special winning opening opening command, information indicating the number of hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, and the like is set. .. In the above-described general command special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, as the command data of the special winning opening closing command, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, the first special figure fluctuation game being held. Alternatively, information indicating the number of second special figure variation games and the like is set.

Further, in this step S215, a general command special figure pending increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure pending increase command, control state Is set, and information indicating a stop symbol of special figure 1 or special figure 2 that has been preliminarily determined (special figure predetermination result) is set.

Further, in this step S215, general command universal figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command hold increase process, the command data of the hold increase command is set with information indicating the control state. Further, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub control unit 400, as a command related to a general figure, a general figure fluctuation start command indicating that the variable display of the general figure has started (does). In addition, from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, a universal figure variation stop command indicating that the variable display of the universal figure has stopped (does), and the pair of blade members 2321 have started (executed). It is also possible to transmit an electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the contents of effect control based on the information of the command data. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the winning rounds are completed based on the number of winning rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

Further, in this command setting transmission processing, the command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, and strobe information is set in bit 7 (when set, data is set) and power-on information is set in bit 6. (When it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate the data after encryption processing. The number of payout requests is shown.

Next, in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In this external output signal setting processing, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S201 described above are read to monitor the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence of a lower tray full tank error, and open the front frame door. When an error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Further, various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control opening/closing of the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234 and the right variable winning port 235, and via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display parts 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310.

When the device monitoring process in step S219 ends, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A. Before returning, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is returned to each original register. Set and set interrupt permission. In addition, before recovery, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on, and if the low voltage signal is on (when power interruption is detected), it returns to the state at the time of power interruption at power recovery. A specific variable or stack pointer for saving is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, an electric power interruption process such as initialization of an input/output port is performed, and then the main control unit main process is resumed. Good.

<Process of the first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. It should be noted that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

First, in step S301 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. The effect described below, which involves the operating means, is also controlled by this effect control process. That is, when the symbol variation start command including the information on the variation time of the symbol is received, whether or not to execute the effect involving the operation means is determined in this effect control process in accordance with the length of the variable time. When it is decided by the lottery process and executed, the effect data is read from the ROM 406. Image display control in each of the three decorative pattern display devices 208L to 208N is executed in step S313 in accordance with the effect data read here, and the movable means control is performed by the second sub control unit 500 in the effect read here. A control command corresponding to the data is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub control unit 500 in step S713 described below.

In step S311, the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 is detected via the sensor circuit 428 to determine whether the chance button 136 has been pressed. As a result of the determination here, when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected, the process of changing the effect data updated in step S309 into the effect data according to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, or the pressing of the chance button 136. If the operation is valid, a process of preparing effect data corresponding to an operation acceptance effect described later is performed.

In step S313, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to sound source IC 416, this instruction is output to sound source IC 416. In step S317, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S319, if there is an operation command (moving command or rotation command) to the second decorative symbol display device 208M or/and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the effect data read in step S309, this The instruction is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S321, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 (for example, a control command related to various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E). The setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S303. When the door opening command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, the door opening command is set to be output to the second sub control unit in step S321.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle.

In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, and the effect random number updating process is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for you. In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates) etc. are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for is input. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 11C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

First, in step S701 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S701. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 508 is initialized.

In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command is received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

In step S709, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step S713, the movable means control process is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable means control process here, various movable means (a chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing/retreating operation, a transparent portion 191 rotatable in the front-rear direction, and a vertically movable Yashiro accessory which are movable in the forward/backward direction are transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. 224Fa, general actor 224Fb, and likewise a vertically movable family crest 224E), when a control command is received, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed to perform various moving means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E. Each operation control is performed.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the second sub control unit 500 when the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400 is detected. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle. Run with.

In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 of the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number updating process and the like are performed.

Next, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the button effect step by step. In FIG. 9, time elapses in the order of the alphabets written in parentheses (the same applies to the subsequent figures unless otherwise specified). Note that the time intervals between the alphabets written in parentheses and the alphabets written next in parentheses may be equal or different in one figure. , And different intervals may be mixed (the same applies to subsequent figures).

In FIG. 9, out of the three decorative symbol display devices 208208L to 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are omitted and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9, a variable icon display area 208e is provided in the center of the effect display area 208d, and a hold icon display area 208f is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 208e. Is provided. A frame-shaped image indicating the position of the variable icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the variable icon display area 208e. This frame-shaped image is always displayed, but when the display conditions are satisfied (for example, when the fluctuation icon is not displayed in the fluctuation icon display area or when the fluctuation icon is displayed in the opposite direction, the reach effect is displayed). It may be displayed only when it is not displayed). Note that only one of the variable icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

One or more hold icons can be displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. Four reservation icons h1 to h4 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9(a). All of these four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed as black circles, and the white circle display with a dotted line indicates that the hold icons are not displayed. The hold icon is an icon that indicates that the start of the symbol variation display of the special map or the start of the success/failure determination of the special figure is suspended, and the number of the hold icons displayed is basically the special figure variation game. It is the same as the number of reservations. However, there may be a timing before and after the hold is exhausted, in which the number of displayed hold icons does not represent the number of hold. The hold icons include the hold icon of special map 1 and the hold icon of special map 2, and the hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to provide display areas for both icons. In addition, the hold icon can give a pre-reading notice as to whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. As the animation related to the hold icon, for example, an increase animation that is executed when a new hold icon is displayed due to an increase in hold, and the order of the hold changes due to the completion of the previous hold, A moving animation that is executed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, a position on the left), a change animation that is executed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the look-ahead result, and the hold is digested. Deletion animation executed when the hold icon of the priority side special map is increased in the priority variator when the hold icon of the non-priority side special map is saved is saved. Etc. In addition to the above animation, a standby animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the above animation (for example, a period during which there is no increase/decrease in the pending status or the pending icon does not change) and that can be executed overlapping with the above animation There is. An example of this standby animation is an animation that is performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repeated animation of a constant length animation). Note that each animation of increase, move, change, deletion, save, and standby of the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

One variable icon can be displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. A star-shaped variation icon c is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9B. The variation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, which is displayed after the suspension of the special figure variation game is started, in other words, an icon relating to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time when the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon is started. More precisely, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the variable icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a variable icon, or the variable icon moves. May be. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. This variable icon is displayed with a display size different from the hold icon (a display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may facilitate the identification of the variable icon and the hold icon, but they may have the same size. The variable icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can give a notice about whether or not the change is appropriate (a notice of the change) depending on its display mode, and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the hit/miss result of the special figure change game is held. The erasing timing may be before, at the same timing, or after the timing at which the result of the variation is notified.

As an animation related to both the hold icon and the variable icon, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 208f and having the earliest timing of start winning is the variable icon display area 208e when the hold is exhausted. There is a moving animation for moving as a variable icon and a changing animation for changing from the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the variable icon. These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the variable icon are the same, execution of the change animation can be omitted.

As the animation related to the variable icon, a standby animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game, an erasing animation executed when the variable icon is erased after the special figure variable game is finished, a variable icon There is a change animation or the like that is executed when the display mode of is changed midway. These animations may be combined with each other and run at the same time. Also, the standby animation of the variable icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation.

Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9, the fourth symbol 2081 of special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of special figure 2 are displayed at the upper right. The fourth design 2081 of special figure 1 is a round display, and the fourth design 2082 of special figure 2 is a quadrangle display. In each of the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, gray represents that the pattern is changing, black represents that the big hit symbol is stopped (fixed display), and white represents that the lost symbol is stopped (fixed display). It means that. These fourth designs 2081 and 2082 are also a kind of decorative designs.

Further, in FIG. 9, in addition to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a first special symbol reservation lamp 218, and a second special symbol reservation lamp 220. It is shown.

In addition, in FIG. 9, a chance button 136 is also shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9, a white display indicates a white lighting state or a non-lighting state of the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136, and a hatched display indicates the chance button lamp 138. Indicates the red lighting state. When the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red, the chance button 136 is pressed down. Note that the hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. Further, although “lighting” is used here, it may be “flashing” (hereinafter the same).

The background image of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 is a background image of a castle town. When the background image is the background image of the castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is in the castle town mode among the effect modes prepared in plural types. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

In FIG. 9(a), the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 both display the lost stop symbols (confirmed display), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is disjointed. A certain "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1" is displayed. In addition, both the fourth design 2081 of special figure 1 and the fourth design 2082 of special figure 2 are white display during stop. Four of the first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9(a) are lit, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays four black circle holding icons which are the holding display of the special diagram 1. However, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area 208e.

In FIG. 9B, the variable display of the special symbols is started on the first special symbol display device 212, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is also started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the update of the decorative symbol (variable display) is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, only three first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9B are lit, and three holding icons (holding icons h1 to h3) in the holding icon display area 208f of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ) Is displayed, and a variable icon c having a star shape is displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. This is because among the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 10A, the hold icon h1 having the earliest timing of the start winning prize becomes the change icon, and the change icon is displayed from the hold icon display area 208f. This is the result of moving to the area 208e. Furthermore, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a circular display is changed to a changing display (gray).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9C, the reach effect is started. Up to now, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, is reduced in the left corner and is in the reach state by the numeral 3. ..

In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button production here is a production that tells the development of super reach. Further, the button effect may be an effect for fortune-telling the type of developing super reach. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9D, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 and the operation of the chance button 136 are provided in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An arrow display 136b and a character display of "press" as a promotion display for prompting (pressing), and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period (operation valid period) in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. Are displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display showing the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG. 9(d) starts to light up in red and prompts its depression.

In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, but operates (presses) the chance button 136 after a short time (see FIG. 9(f)). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136, which has been lit in red until then, is switched to lighting in white or turned off.

When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a cut-in notice indicating whether or not it is likely to develop into a super reach. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9(g), the display “CHANCE” is interrupted so as to overlap the background image, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. doing. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9(h), the letters Super Reach A are displayed, indicating that the effect of Super Reach A is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is from the beginning to the end, and the effect display of the super reach A is also performed in the background of the castle town. Further, when the effect display of the super reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and are invisible. On the other hand, the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, and the frame-shaped image indicating the positions of the variable icon c and the variable icon display area 208e continue to be displayed. The fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, the variable icon c, and the frame-shaped image may be erased to make them invisible. Super reach A is not a big hit confirmed super reach, but just because it has evolved into super reach A does not necessarily mean a big hit. In addition, even if the display that is expected to develop into "CHANCE" is displayed, it does not necessarily mean that the super reach is started. There are also cases. Further, the display of “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 9G may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. May be

On the other hand, in FIG. 9(g′) showing another example continued from FIG. 9(f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), “sorry” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and then, As shown in the figure (h'), the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not develop into a super reach, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a missing decorative symbol of "decoration 3"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3". The combination is stopped. Even if the message "sorry" is displayed, there may be a big hit due to the reverse effect.

Although the operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, the operation outside the operation valid period is finally treated as an invalid operation, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state within the operation valid period of the pachinko machine 100 is a state (operation valid state) in which execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated. However, the operation of the chance button 136 may not always be accepted, but may be accepted only during the acceptance period.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining in detail the operating means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a chance button 136 capable of executing an advancing/retreating operation and a transparent portion 191 rotatable in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 10A shows that, like the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the chance button 136 and the transparent portion 191 are in their respective initial positions. That is, the chance button 136 does not project, and the transmissive portion 191 is also substantially parallel to the transparent plate member 118. The chance button 136 can be operated (pressed) even at the initial position, and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked. The chance button 136 may vibrate, and can vibrate even in the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or an effect sound. The chance button 136 may be one that can vibrate only at the pushed position.

FIG. 10B shows a state in which the transmissive portion 191 rotates from an initial position around a drive shaft (not shown) provided in the lower portion and is inclined forward. The drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. The transmissive part 191 rotates forward while the LED built in the transmissive part unit 190 lights up or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or effect sound. The transmission part 191 may also vibrate, and can vibrate even in the initial position. Further, even in the state of being inclined forward as shown in FIG. In addition, the transmission part 191 may rotate in small increments in the front-rear direction as strong vibration with a large vibration swing. Even when the transmissive part 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmissive part unit 190 can be turned on or blink, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or an effect sound. The state (second state) of the transmissive portion 191 shown in FIG. 10B is closer to the player than the state (first state) in the initial position shown in FIG. 10A, The player can operate the transparent portion 191 by pushing the transparent portion 191 toward the initial position, and the transparent portion 191 corresponds to an example of an operating unit. Even when the transmissive part 191 is operated and pushed in, the LED incorporated in the transmissive part unit 190 lights up or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or a performance sound. The transmissive part 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

FIG. 10C shows the chance button 136 starting to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 lights or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or effect sound. Further, FIG. 7D shows that the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can also be stopped at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum advance position. Therefore, it is possible to advance in multiple stages. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can also vibrate, and vibrates laterally or vertically in the advanced (protruding) state. Also at this time, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or an effect sound. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can be operated so as to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pushed in, the chance button lamp 138 lights or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. Further, the chance button 136 may be one which is simply pushed down in the advanced state and is automatically retracted toward the initial position.

The vibration of the chance button 136 and the vibration of the transmissive portion 191 may be a function that appears only in a certain set state. For example, it may be a function that is exhibited by a setting by a player's effect customization function or a switch setting on the side of a game store clerk. That is, depending on the setting state, it may not vibrate at all or may vibrate only partially.

FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an effect involving the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

Here, as the operation means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. 10 will be described as the operation means A, and the transparent portion 191 will be described as the operation means B. Comparing the operating means A and the operating means B here, the operating means B is an operating means larger than the operating means A (an operating means having a large operating surface), and the operating means A can be operated even at the initial position, but the operation is performed. Although there is a difference that the means B is inoperable in the initial position, the operation means B and the operation means A may be reversed, or both may be operation means of the same size. It may be an operation means that can be operated together, or an operation means that cannot be operated together. It should be noted that only one of the plurality of types of examples of the operation means listed here may be applied, the plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. Good.

Further, the operation means described as the transparent portion 191 in the following description can be replaced with other operation means such as a second chance button provided separately from the chance button 136.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the effect involving the operation of the operation means B (transmission part 191) is a big hit rather than the effect involving the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Has high expectations. Further, although the function A has both, the function B has only the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at the operating position and a function of shining. Examples of the function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating even in the initial position. As shown in FIG. 11A, the operating means B is inferior in number of functions to the operating means A.

However, as shown in FIG. 11B, both may have the same number of functions. That is, the function B was provided only in the operation means A, but the operation means B may be provided with the function C. An example of the function C is a function of performing strong vibration.

Note that the operating means A and the operating means B may have the same number of functions.

FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a part of the effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is “liquid crystal”, the operation data in the Yatsushiro Actor 224Fa, the general actor 224Fb, and the family crest 224E is “movable means”, and the voice output data from the speaker 120 is “voice”. “Sound”, the frame lamp 122, the LEDs, and the light emission data of various built-in lamps are displayed as “LED”, and the vibration data of the operating means A is displayed as “Vibe”. "..." in the figure represents omission of data. Direction No. The data of "Vibe" in 1 is "E0", and this "E0" represents that no vibration occurs. Direction No. The data of "Vibe" in 2 is "E1", and this "E1" represents that the operating means A is vibrated before operating the operating means A (chance button 136). Direction No. The effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED” in 2 become effect data after the operation of the operation means A, and the operation means A vibrating before the operation is operated. Then, the effect after the operation is started in accordance with each of these effect data. Direction No. The data of "Vibe" in 3 is "E2", and this "E2" represents that the operating means A is vibrated after the operating means A (chance button 136) is operated. Direction No. The effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED” in 3 are effect data after the operation of the operation means A. Direction No. 2 data and effect No. The data of No. 3 may be called even when the operation unit B (transparent unit 191) is operated. This is because, as the effect data after the operation of the operation means B, each effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED” can be used in some cases. In this case, after the operating means B is operated, the effect No. 2 data or effect No. The effect according to the effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED” in the data of No. 3 is started, and the operation means A vibrates according to the data of “E1” or “E2”. That is, the effect No. The data 2 includes data (E1) for vibrating the operating means A before operating the operating means A, and other data such as "liquid crystal" is data after operating the operating means A, but the operating means B Operation of No. When the data of No. 2 is read, the data of "Vibe" is also executed after the operation of the operation means B in accordance with other data such as "liquid crystal". In addition, the production No. 2 data and effect No. 3 is different from the data of 3 at least in the data of “liquid crystal” such as “A1” and “A2”, and when the data of “liquid crystal” of “A1” is used after the operation means B is operated. Is a production number. Not the data of No. 3 but the effect No. It is necessary to read 2 data.

The effect data regarding the operation means B may also be called up when the operation means A is operated, and after the operation means A is operated, “liquid crystal”, “movable means” in the effect data regarding the operation means B, The effect according to the effect data of "sound" and "LED" is started, and the operating means B vibrates according to the data of "vibrate". However, the effect data regarding the operating means B may not be called even when the operating means A is operated.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the execution timings regarding the effect involving the operation means A and the effect involving the operation means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12, time elapses from left to right in the figure. In the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, the “operation means B-related effect” and the operation means B which are started in response to the operation of the operation means B (transmission unit 191) are operated in order from the top. When the operation means B related effect is started, the “operation means B operation effective state”, the “operation means B operation” indicating that the operation means B is operated, and the operation means A (chance button 136) are displayed. "Operation means A-related effect" started in response to an operation, "operation means A operation effective state" in which operation means A-related effect is started when operation means A is operated, operation means A is operated The “operation means A operation” indicating that is shown. The "operation means B-related effect" includes effects in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and also includes effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. The "operation means A-related effect" includes effects in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and also includes effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. However, the "operation means A-related effect" may indicate only that the operation means A itself vibrates. It should be noted that during the "operation means B operation enabled state", there may or may not be a notification prompting to operate the operation means B. Even during the "operation means A operation enabled state", the operation is performed. In some cases, the notification for prompting the user to operate the means A (operation promotion notification) is performed, and in other cases, the notification is not performed. If these notifications are given, the player can know that the operation is in an effective state, but if not given, each operation means becomes a so-called back button.

In the example shown in FIG. 12A, the operation means B is not operated in the operation means B operation enabled state, but the operation means B related effect is started at the same time when the operation means B operation enabled state ends. In this way, the "operation means B-related effect" may be started even if the operation means B is not operated. The "operation means B-related effect" may be an effect that is always started even if the operation means B is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means B-related effect” may be changed depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect is started at the same time when the operation means B-related effect is started without passing through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without the operation means A being operated. .. In this way, the "operation means A-related effect" may be started even if the operation means A is not operated. The "operation means A-related effect" may also be an effect that is always started even if the operation means A is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means A-related effect” may be changed depending on whether or not the operation means A is operated. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same, and, for example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

In the example shown in FIG. 12B, when the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation valid state and the operation means B is operated, the operation means B operation effective state is changed to the execution of the operation means B related effect. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect is started at the same time when the operation means B-related effect is started without the “operation means A operation valid state” and without the operation means A being operated. Has been done. Also in this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same, and, for example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 12C, when the operating means B is operated and the operating means B is operated during the operating means B operation valid state, the operating means B operation valid state is changed to the execution of the operating means B related effect. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect is started at the same time when the operation means B-related effect is started without the “operation means A operation valid state” and without the operation means A being operated. Has been done. In the example shown in FIG. 12C, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect is longer than the execution period of the operation means A-related effect, and for example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the operation means. The vibration of the A (chance button 136) is started at the same time, but the vibration of the operating means A ends first, and after the vibration of the operating means A ends, the vibration of the operating means B ends.

The start times may be the same, and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B-related effect. Alternatively, the start timing is different, the operation means B-related effect starts first, then the operation means A-related effect starts, the operation means A-related effect ends first, and then the operation means B-related effect ends. May be. On the contrary, even if the operation means A-related effect starts first, then the operation means B-related effect starts, the operation means B-related effect ends first, and then the operation means A-related effect ends. Good. Further, the end timing may be the same, the operation means B-related effect starts first, then the operation means A-related effect starts, and the operation means B-related effect and the operation means A-related effect end together. Alternatively, on the contrary, the operation means A-related effect may be started first, then the operation means B-related effect may be started, and the operation means A-related effect and the operation means B-related effect may be ended together. ..

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 12A, when the operation means B related effect is executed without operating the operation means B, for example, the operation means B related effect is the operation means B operation effective. As long as the operation unit B is operated from the start of the state until the first time elapses, the operation unit B-related effect may be executed longer as the operation unit B is operated at an earlier stage. become able to.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the effect involving the operation means. The arrows in each of FIGS. 13A to 13C represent the vibration period of the operating means A.

The example shown in FIG. 13A is an example during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and when the operation means B is operated in a state where the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission part 191) is being performed, the operation is performed. The vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, and the judge effect is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like. The judge effect here is a judge effect for a big hit, and corresponds to an example of the first effect. This first effect is a notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Further, the first effect is not the notice effect related to the operation means A (chance button 136). When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect is ended, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of this fluctuation display. Eventually, the shaking fluctuation display ends, and the combination of the three decorative patterns is confirmed and displayed.

Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13(a), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the three decorative symbols is displayed because the variation time of the entire decorative symbol is already determined. Is shortened, and the vibration of the operation means A is continued until just before the end of the shortened swing fluctuation display execution period.

As shown in FIG. 13A, before the notification of the result regarding the profit of the player such as the confirmation display, the effect such as the vibration of the operation means A is finished so that the player can concentrate on the notification of the result regarding the profit. I have to.

The example shown in FIG. 13B is an example during a big hit game, and when the operation means B is operated in a state where the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission part 191) is being performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and the judge effect is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like. The judge in the judge production here is a judge linked to whether or not to shift to the probability changing state. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect is ended, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is informed that the specific winning opening (for example, the V winning opening) is aimed at in the next round. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the notification execution period. Eventually, the next round will be started, and it will be informed again that a specific winning opening (for example, a V winning opening) is aimed.

Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13B, when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the maximum allowable time for one round has already been determined, so the specific winning opening is aimed at in the next round. The execution period for informing the fact is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until just before the end of the reduced execution period for the informing.

As described above, the effect involving the operation means is executed even during the big hit game. In addition, the number of rounds in which the specific winning opening should be aimed is limited, and if the specific winning opening can be won in that round, the state changes to the probability changing state after the jackpot game is over. Therefore, the round that should aim for the specific winning opening is an important round that leads to the profit of the player, and before the round that leads to the profit of the player is started, the effect such as the vibration of the operation means A is finished, and the player I am able to concentrate on aiming for a specific winning hole.

In addition, the example shown in FIG. 13A and the example shown in FIG. 13B are examples in which the vibration period of the operating means A remains constant even if the operating timing of the operating means B changes.

The example shown in FIG. 13(c) is an example of a pseudo continuous effect during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission part 191) is being performed. Then, the vibration of the operating means A (chance button 136) is started, and the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like. The vibration of the operation means A is continued until the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol is completed, and the vibration of the operation means A is simultaneously ended when the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol is completed. Then, the next pseudo variation display is started, the number of pseudo repetitions becomes the n-th time, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is performed even in the n-th pseudo variation display.

Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the period of stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. The vibration of the operating means A ends at the same time when the stop display of the shortened pseudo continuous symbols ends.

The example shown in FIG. 13C is an example in which when the operation timing of the operation means B changes, the vibration period of the operation means A also changes.

In summary including the above description, the operation means A can vibrate at least during the period when the judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being executed. Further, the operation means A may be capable of vibrating during at least a part of the period during which the judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being executed. For example, the vibration may be ended at the same time when the judgment effect is ended, the vibration may be continued even when the judgment effect is ended, or the vibration may be ended before the judgment effect is ended. Further, the vibration period in which the operating means A vibrates may be constant or may vary depending on whether or not the operating means B is operated and the operation timing.

The upper example shown in FIG. 13D is an example in which the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means A. The final judge effect is a judge as to whether or not it will be a big hit in the variable display during the variable display of the decorative pattern, or a judge showing the end in the reach effect (reach effect at the final stage such as strong SP reach). There is. In this upper example,
The period during which the operating means A is vibrating is a period during which the operation of the operating means A is treated as valid, and when the operating means A is operated, the vibration ends and the final judge effect is started. Therefore, if the operation of the operating means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect becomes longer, and the period during which the operating means A is vibrating becomes longer. Further, even when the operation means A is not operated, the final judge effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a constant period length.

On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 13D, the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means B, and the vibration of the operation means A is also started. Therefore, the start timing of the vibration of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judgment effect are the same, and the period length between them is zero. However, the period during which the operating means A is vibrating can be secured for a certain period. The final judge effect here also corresponds to an example of the first effect, and is a notice effect not using the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136), and is not a notice effect related to the operation means A (chance button 136).

While the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means B, the vibration of the operation means A is started by operating the operation means A after the operation of the operation means B. If the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judge effect and the vibration start timing of the operation means A becomes longer, and the period in which the operation means A is vibrating becomes longer, as in the example of FIG.

Next, the meter effect will be described.

FIG. 14: is a figure which shows an example of meter production in steps.

In FIG. 14(1), a first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown in the center, a second decorative symbol display device 208M is shown on the left side, and a third decorative symbol display device 208N is shown on the right side.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E, which is not shown in FIG. 3, is shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the family crest monument 224E shown in FIG. 14A corresponds to the initial position. The front-rear relationship (positional relationship in the depth direction) between the family crest product 224E and the three decorative pattern display devices 208L to 208N is that the family crest product 224E is the most front side, and the first decorative pattern display device 208L is the most. On the rear side, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged between the family crest monument 224E and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 14, a variable display pattern (special figure) executed on the first special figure display device 212 (see FIG. 1 and the like) and a second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 1 and the like), which are not shown in FIG. A variable display symbol (special figure) corresponding to the first symbol. Also, a variable display symbol (general symbol) executed in the universal symbol display device 210 (not shown) (see FIG. 1, etc.) corresponds to the second symbol. Then, the variable design decorative symbol executed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. That is, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 5B, which is variably displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, corresponds to the third symbol pd3. The third symbol pd3 is an effect symbol in which the decoration of the first symbol (not shown) is enhanced. The first symbol is display-controlled by the main control unit 300, and the third symbol pd3 is display-controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500. As described above, on the side of the sub control units 400 and 500, the timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined period. Therefore, in the first symbol and the third symbol pd3, at least a time lag occurs for a predetermined period of the timer interrupt process on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500, but when the first symbol starts the variable display, the third symbol The symbol pd3 also starts variable display, and when the first symbol is stopped, the third symbol pd3 is also stopped. Hereinafter, although it demonstrates using the 3rd design pd3 and it demonstrates based on the 3rd design pd3, it is the same even if it replaces the 3rd design pd3 with the 1st design.

In FIG. 14, the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general 224Fb are shown above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is shown on the right side of the general officer object 224F. The fourth symbol pd4 has a square display and a circle display. The square display corresponds to Toku-zu 1 and the circle display corresponds to Toku-zu 2. Regardless of whether it is a square display or a circle display, the gray display indicates that the lost stop design is being displayed on the special figure display device (212, 214), and the black display is the special figure display device. (212, 214) indicates that the big hit stop symbol is being displayed, and the white display indicates that the symbol variation is being displayed on the special symbol display device (212, 214). The fourth symbol pd4 may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or may be the third decorative symbol display. It may be displayed on the device 208N, or may be displayed on other display means or dedicated display means. It should be noted that it may be possible to distinguish between the variable display and the stop display by lighting an LED lamp or the like on the board. Further, in the upper portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, a mini decorative symbol that is a reduced display of the third symbol pd3 is shown, and this mini decorative symbol corresponds to the fifth symbol pd5. The fifth symbol pd5 may have a different display mode from the third symbol pd3, and is smaller than the size of the third symbol pd3, has a different display position, or is smaller and has a different display position. Good. The fifth symbol pd5 also performs variable display and stop display, and similarly to the fourth symbol pd4, plays a role of easily displaying during variable display and stop display of the third symbol pd3. Therefore, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are synchronized with each other. A plurality of the third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed. In addition, the third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 both correspond to decorative symbols in a broad sense.

The state shown in FIG. 14(1) is a stop display of a combination of the decorative symbols that are missing, both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is a gray square display and a gray circle display, indicating that both Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 are stopped and displayed.

Further, a holding frame UI is shown in the effect display area 208d of the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 14(1). The holding frame UI can be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area, and can also be viewed as a user interface that provides various kinds of information to the player. Further, in the hold frame UI, a variable icon display area is arranged in the center, a hold icon display area is arranged on the left side thereof, and an effect display area is arranged on the right side thereof. In the hold icon display area, four stages hs1 to hs4 corresponding to the maximum number of hold balls in special figure 1 or special figure 2 are prepared, and one hold icon is displayed for each stage. In addition, a stage corresponding to the total number (for example, eight) of the reserved balls in the special diagram 1 and the reserved balls in the special diagram 2 may be prepared. In the variable icon display area, a stage cs that is higher and larger than the four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the hold icon display area is prepared, and the variable icon is displayed on this stage cs. Further, the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 14(1) is provided with a base icon UIb extending in the left-right direction and having a pattern of vertical stripes. The stages cs prepared in the variable icon display area can also be regarded as stage icons displayed by overlapping the base icons UIb from the front side. Further, the tutorial display ts is displayed in the effect display area shown in FIG. 14(1). This tutorial display ts can also be viewed as a tutorial icon that overlaps the base icon UIb from the front side.

One hold icon h1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. 14(1), and it is informed that the number of holds of the current special figure is one. That is, the hold icons are displayed for the number of reserved balls in the special figure, and the older the winning timing is, the closer to the center (right side) it is displayed. The hold icon (first hold icon) h1 for the first hold shown in FIG. 14(1) is a hold icon for the special figure 1 and is displayed in a red display mode that is a display mode of the prefetching notice. In addition to the white display mode, which is the default display mode, various display modes are prepared for the hold icon. For each display mode, the jackpot expectation (reliability level) in the pattern variation display corresponding to the hold is provided. ) Represents. However, even in a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high, it is not always the big hit in the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold, and it may be lost. That is, as the expectation of the big hit is higher, the big hit symbol aspect is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the first symbol. Further, after the hold icon starts to be displayed in the look-ahead notice mode, or is displayed in the default display mode, the timing of changing to the look-ahead notice mode is at the start of fluctuation, during change, at stop, and when the look-ahead target is held. The time of winning is raised.

Further, on the stage cs in the variable icon display area shown in FIG. 14A, the variable icon c in the white display mode which is the default display mode is displayed. In FIG. 14(1), as described above, both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also stopped and displayed, but in FIG. 14(1), stopped and displayed. This is the state immediately after the change, and the change icon c does not disappear and still remains. In FIG. 14(2), the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the variable icon c disappears.

In addition, a numerical display hn of the number of holdings is displayed in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 14(1). The numerical display hn of the number of holdings here indicates that the number of holdings of special figure 1 is "1" and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is "0". Further, a mini character display (hereinafter referred to as "mini character") is displayed on the third decorative pattern display device 208N. This mini character is a display (so-called constant display) that is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol pd3 (decorative symbol) is displayed in a variable manner or in a stopped state, and is displayed over multiple variable display of the third symbol pd3. It In the example shown in FIG. 14, the display of the lord's character cd, who is the main character, is displayed on the display stage ss. The posture of the lord's character cd shown in FIG. 14(1) is the initial posture.

Further, an information display section ST1 is provided in the lower portion of the display screen of the left second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 14(1). In the example shown in FIG. 14, the name of the background stage is displayed on the information display portion ST1. Here, it is a castle town stage, the information display portion ST1 displays "castle town", and the townscapes of the castle town are commonly displayed in the background of the three decorative pattern display devices 208L to 208N. In the information display portion ST1, the effect mode may be displayed, the current control state (for example, probability change) may be displayed, the prefetching notice may be displayed, and the pattern currently being performed. A notice (normal notice) for the variable display may be displayed.

Further, in FIG. 14A, the speaker 120 is shown in the left corner, and the chance button 136 (corresponding to the first operation means) is also shown in the lower left. A second chance button 137 (corresponding to a second operation means) is also shown on the right side of the chance button 136. The second chance button 137 may be the OK button 181b of the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1 or may be an operation means newly provided separately from the chance button 136.

The display positions, sizes, and display numbers of various displays described with reference to FIG. 14 are not limited to those described here, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed with priority over other displays. For example, when the movable means such as the family crest part 224E, the Yatsushiro part 224Fa, and the general part 224Fb overlap the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 from the front side, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fourth symbol pd4 from the beginning. A plurality of five symbols pd5 may be displayed, or the display position may be changed according to the movement of the movable means.

As shown in FIG. 14(2), the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, and after the variable icon c disappears, in FIG. 14(3), the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 14(2). The variable display of the symbols is started based on the hold. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 14(3), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, and the variable display of the fifth symbol pd5 is also started. The third symbol pd3 is a low-speed fluctuation because the variable display has just started. The thick, white and short arrows represent low-speed fluctuations (hereinafter the same). During low-speed fluctuation, it may be possible to recognize the changing pattern. The first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 14(2) moves to the stage cs in the variable icon display area, and the variable icon c in a red display mode is displayed on the stage cs. Here, the display mode (red) of the icon when it was the hold icon and the display mode (red) of the icon after it became the variable icon match. The display mode of the variation icon represents the expectation (reliability) of the big hit in the symbol variation display being displayed. That is, the normal notice is executed according to the display mode of the variable icon. Even in the display mode in which the expectation of the big hit is high, the big change is not always caused in the symbol variation display being displayed, and there may be a loss. In FIG. 14(3), the hold icon disappears, and the numerical display hn of the number of holds displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side is “0” for both Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. In addition, in the fourth symbol pd4 shown in FIG. 14C, the display of the square corresponding to Toku-zu 1 has changed from gray to white, which indicates that the Toku-zu 1 is being displayed in a variable manner. It should be noted that, in FIG. 14(3) in which the symbol variable display is started, the display content of the tutorial display ts is not changed.

The third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 14(4) is fluctuating at high speed. White thin and long arrows indicate high-speed fluctuations (hereinafter the same). At high speed fluctuations, it becomes difficult to recognize the changing pattern. In FIG. 14(4), a meter display appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display position of the meter display is above the third symbol pd3, but the display position is not limited to this position. The display size of the meter display is larger than the hold icon and larger than the variable icon c, but the display size is not limited to this size. Further, the appearance timing of the meter display is, in addition to the time when the third symbol pd3 changes at high speed, at the time of starting the symbol variation, when the movement of the variation icon c is completed, when winning the prize at the special figure starting port (when increasing the hold), At the time of the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-reading notice at the time of winning), when a certain production is successful, at the first stop of the third symbol pd3, at the temporary stop of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo continuous production. Alternatively, it is possible to list continuation (at the start of re-variation), start of the reach state, start of the super reach, during super reach, and the like. That is, the appearance timings of the meter display may be all of the above-listed ones. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied. When the meter display appears, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed to the display content related to the meter display. In the meter display shown in FIG. 14(4), the meter frame mf is white, and is hereinafter referred to as a white meter display MW. The white meter display MW corresponds to an example of the first meter display. The meter display includes an increasing type, a decreasing type, and an increasing/decreasing type. The meter display in the example shown in FIG. 14 is of an increasing type, which is provided with five scales and becomes full at the sixth stage. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 14(4) is started to be displayed in an empty state (state where the meter is 0). This empty state corresponds to an example of the first state.

In FIG. 14(5), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed variation to low-speed variation, and in the same figure (6), the variation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here The decoration 7") becomes recognizable. Further, in FIG. 14(6), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from the high speed variation to the low speed variation. And in the same figure (7) following FIG. 14 (6), the left symbol is temporarily stopped, and swing fluctuation is started (first stop). Also, at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol, or at the timing before and after the temporary stop, the meter-up item UpI appears. This meter-raising item UpI corresponds to the first mini-item or the first mini-icon (hereinafter the same), and the display position of this meter-raising item UpI is a decorative pattern that is swinging (temporarily stopped). Although the position overlaps from the front side, the display position is not limited to this position. Further, the display size of the meter rising item UpI is smaller than the swinging fluctuation (temporarily stopped) decorative pattern, but the display size is not limited to this size. Furthermore, the appearance timing of the meter rising item UpI is, in addition to the timing of the first stop, when the third symbol pd3 changes rapidly, when the symbol variation starts, when the variation icon c finishes moving, to the special symbol starting opening. At the time of winning (at the time of holding increase), at the start of pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-reading notice at the time of winning), when a certain production is successful, at the time of temporary stop or continuation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo continuous production. Time (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state, at the start of the super reach, during the super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, the appearance timings of the meter-increasing item UpI may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied. The meter increase item UpI is an item for increasing the meter displayed on the meter. The meter increase item UpI shown in FIG. 14(7) is white, but as will be described later, a plurality of kinds of meter increase items UpI are prepared, and the increase rate of the meter differs depending on the type.

In FIG. 14(8), the movement animation of the meter-raising item UpI is started, and the meter-raising item UpI displayed at the position overlapping the swinging fluctuation (temporary stop) from the front side is displayed on the white meter display MW. Move from the front side to the overlapping position. In FIG. 14(9), the fluctuation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here, "decoration 6") can be recognized. Further, the meter-up item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased (increased) by one scale. The color of the meter that increases or decreases is a color different from the meter frame mf (here, blue), but may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing when this meter rising item UpI disappears, that is, the timing of the meter increase is the timing of the second stop, when the third symbol pd3 changes at high speed, when the symbol variation starts, when the movement of the variation icon c is completed, the special figure At the time of winning the prize at the starting opening (when increasing the number of holdings), at the time of starting the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-reading notice at the time of winning), when a certain production is successful, in the pseudo continuous production, the third symbol pd3 is provisional. When stopped or continued (at the time of re-variation start), at the start of the reach state, at the start of the super-reach, during the super-reach, etc. can be listed. That is, the timing of increasing the meter may be all of the above-listed timings. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied.

In FIG. 14(10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is temporarily stopped, the swing fluctuation is started (second stop), and the second meter rising item UpI appears. The display position of the second meter rise item UpI is a position overlapping from the front side with the right symbol that started the swing fluctuation (temporary stop). In FIG. 14(11), the moving animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI also moves to the position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 14(12), the meter-up item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is again raised (increased) by one scale. This means that the meter of the white meter display MW has risen to the second scale.

In FIG. 14 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol, which has continued to change at high speed with the third symbol pd3, becomes slow, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 14(14), the pseudo continuous symbol swings (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continue”). "-"Decoration 6") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo continuous effect is started. In FIG. 14(15), the cut-in display of the pseudo continuous effect is performed so as to overlap the entire third symbol pd3 from the front side. In the cut-in display here, the protagonist, Tonosama, appeared, and the line "Still still" is displayed, which fuels the possibility that re-change will start. In FIG. 14(16), the cut-in display disappears, and the state in which the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”-“decoration 6”) is temporarily stopped is displayed again and is temporarily stopped. The character display of “×2”, which is the number of times of continuation, is displayed so as to partially overlap the left pattern. In FIG. 14 (17), re-fluctuation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo continuous effect is started, and each of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol starts high-speed variation. In FIG. 14(18), the character display of “×2”, which is the continuous number display, is reduced and displayed in the lower left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 15: is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the meter production shown in FIG. 14 in steps.

In FIG. 15(19) continued from FIG. 14(18), while the three symbols of the third symbol pd3 continue to change at high speed, the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side starts the notice that the mini item appears. .. That is, the treasure box icon gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 15(20), the closed treasure box icon I1 is displayed on the information display portion ST1. This treasure box icon I1 becomes a notice icon for the appearance of the mini item. In FIG. 15 (21), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, and the meter-up item UpI appears in the treasure box. Here, a white meter-up item UpI has appeared.

It should be noted that the treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 15(20) does not open and disappears while it is closed, or nothing appears when opened, or an item different from the meter-up item UpI (for example, a question mark item). Items marked with a cross or items marked with disappointment, etc.) may appear. That is, even if the treasure box icon I1 is displayed, a false notice may be given as a notice that the mini item appears.

Next, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI appearing on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 18 (22), the moving meter rising item UpI is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it seems that the left half of the meter rising item UpI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right half thereof is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M interferes with the view of a part of the meter rising item UpI.

In FIG. 15 (23), the meter-up item UpI reaches the white meter display MW and is displayed so as to overlap the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 15(24), the meter-up item UpI disappears, the meter of the white meter display MW further rises by one scale, and the white meter display MW has risen by three scales.

It should be noted that when the meter increase item UpI is displayed, the meter may be increased, but the meter may not be increased in some cases. For example, the meter rise item UpI may disappear without reaching the meter display, or the meter may not rise even if it reaches.

In FIG. 15 (25), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 are changed at low speed, and in FIG. 15 (26), the reach state is entered. That is, the "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the swing fluctuation is started. From the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 15 (26), the sound of "reach" is output. In FIG. 15 (27), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to change at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes slower, and in the same figure (28) that follows, the left symbol that has fluctuated is the first decorative symbol display device. Moved to the upper left corner of 208L, the right symbol that was also swinging, moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 15 (29 ), it has evolved into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background screen of the castle town has changed to a swordsman visit screen. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the top. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are still the background screen of the castle town, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N still displays the display of the lord's character cd on the display stage ss. The information display portion ST1 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. However, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the treasure box icon I1 disappears.

In addition, when the super reach effect is developed, the hold frame UI disappears and the tutorial display ts disappears. Further, although the hold icon did not remain here, if the hold icon remains, the hold icon also disappears. However, only the variable icon c corresponding to the currently changing symbol is continuously displayed. However, the variable icon c may also disappear together. Alternatively, when the hold icon remains, the display of the hold icon may be continued. Further, the tutorial display ts may be continuously displayed, and further, the hold frame UI may be continuously displayed.

In FIG. 15(30), the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are all switched to the background of the wilderness, the display of the information display portion ST1 disappears from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display. The display of the display stage ss and the lord's character cd has disappeared from the device 208N. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the numerical display hn of the number of holdings is still displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, a lord's character and a swordsman character are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15(30), and a duel scene between the two is started. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the upper part here.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15(31), the white meter display MW is enlarged and displayed, and the lord's character and the swordsman character are hidden by the enlarged white meter display MW. The enlarged white meter display MW shown in (31) of FIG. 15 is a state in which the meter has accumulated up to three scales (corresponding to an example of the second state). Also, the word "power up" is displayed to announce that the main character will power up as much as the meter has accumulated. 15(32) to (33), the meter is used, the white meter display MW is decreasing, and in FIG. 15(33), the state becomes 0 (corresponding to an example of the first state). I'm back. In FIG. 15 (34 ), the white meter display MW that has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a green aura icon OI 1 is added behind the character of the hero's lord. The color of the aura icon OI1 indicates the degree of expectation of a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display. For example, a green aura icon has a higher expectation of a big hit than a blue aura icon, a red aura icon has a higher expectation of a big hit than a green aura icon, and a golden aura icon has a great jackpot richness, The rainbow-colored aura icon that changes to seven colors has the highest expectation of a big hit, and corresponds to a level higher than the big hit concentration (for example, a big hit confirmation).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (35), the scene after the lord's character and the swordsman's character have made a slash is displayed, and in the same figure (36), the scene where the lord's character is lost. Is displayed, and “decoration 3” different from the “decoration 4” displayed in the upper left corner or the upper right corner is largely displayed as a middle pattern. After that, the variable display of the symbols ends, and the third decorative pattern pd3 of "decoration 4"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second decorative symbol display device. On 208M, the fifth symbol pd3 of "decoration 4"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. The super-reach production here was a Hazure super-reach production.

The example shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 explained above is an example in which the white meter display MW does not change from an empty state (state where the meter is 0) to a full tank state, and finally the big hit symbol is not definitely displayed. Become.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which a meter effect is performed and a big hit occurs.

Hereinafter, description will be made focusing on the differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 14 to 15, and redundant description may be omitted.

Similarly to the state shown in FIG. 14(1), the state shown in FIG. 16(1) is also the stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols with the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. However, here, it is a combination of "decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6". Further, the first hold icon (first hold icon) h1 shown in FIG. 16(1) is a hold icon for the special figure 1 and is displayed in a green display mode which is a display mode of the prefetching notice. There is. The green display mode has a lower jackpot expectation than the red display mode.

In FIG. 16(2), the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, and after the change icon c disappears, in FIG. 16(3), the first hold icon h1 of special FIG. 1 shown in FIG. The variable display based on the symbol is started. On the stage cs in the variable icon display area shown in FIG. 16C, the variable icon c in a green display mode is displayed.

In FIG. 16(4), the white meter display MW appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 16(4) is also of the increase type, and the display is started in an empty state (state where the meter is 0).

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 16(5), the line "Ikuzo" is displayed on the display of the lord's character cd. The display of the line "Ikuzo" also corresponds to the notice that the mini item appears. In FIG. 16(6), the changed ball icon cI appears, and the lord's character cd carries the changed ball icon cI. In FIG. 16(7), the lord's character cd throws the changed ball icon cI, and a moving animation of the changed ball icon cI is displayed. In FIG. 16(7), the changed ball icon cI is moved from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 16(8), the changed ball icon cI is the white meter display MW. The white meter display MW is displayed so as to be overlapped from the front side. The changed ball icon cI shown in FIG. 16(8) has a changed display mode, and an effect display ed1 is added. In FIG. 16(9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 has been added disappears, and the white meter display MW is changed to the red meter display MR while remaining in an empty state (state where the meter is 0). That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced by the red meter display MR. The effect shown in FIGS. 16(6) to 16(8) in which the lord's character cd continues to appear corresponds to an example of the meter change effect. The red meter display MR corresponds to an example of the fourth meter display. The red meter display MR has a higher rank (for example, a lower appearance rate) than the white meter display MW, and the meter change effect shown in FIGS. 16(6) to (8) is a kind of rank-up effect. Equivalent to. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16(9) is also empty (the meter is 0). In addition, the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 16(9) outputs a sound effect for notifying a change in the meter display.

In FIG. 16 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed variation to low-speed variation, and in FIG. 16 (11), the variation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here The decoration 7") becomes recognizable. Further, the lord's character cd displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has returned to the initial posture. In FIG. 16 (11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. Then, in FIG. 16(12), the left symbol is temporarily stopped, and swing fluctuation is started (first stop). Also, as in FIG. 14(7), a white meter-up item UpI appears at the same time as, or before and after the temporary stop of the left symbol. In FIG. 16(13), similarly to FIG. 14(8), the moving animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI moves to a position overlapping the red meter display MR from the front side. In FIG. 16(14), the meter-up item UpI disappears, and the meter on the red meter display MR is immediately raised (increased) by three scales. This means that the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16 is more likely to accumulate meters than the white meter display MW shown in FIG. In other words, the probability that the red meter display RM displayed in the empty state changes to the full state is higher than the probability that the white meter display MW displayed in the empty state changes to the full state. Is configured to be. This is because the state change amount (increase amount by one meter increase item UpI) in the red meter display MR is more than the one state change amount in the white meter display MW (increase amount by one meter increase item UpI). There are many people. Note that the color of the meter itself that increases and decreases is a color different from the red color of the meter frame mf (again, blue), but may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing at which the meter-up item UpI disappears, that is, the timing at which the meter is increased is the same as the timing described variously in FIG. Further, in FIG. 16 (14), the fluctuation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 starts to become slow, and in FIG. 16 (15), the fluctuation of the right symbol becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here, "decoration" 7”) becomes recognizable, and eventually, the reach state is entered. In FIG. 16 (16), the reach state is reached, and the second meter-up item UpI appears so as to overlap the right pattern from the front side. In FIG. 16(17), the moving animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI also moves to a position overlapping the red meter display MR from the front side. In FIG. 16(18), the meter-up item UpI disappears, the meter of the red meter display MR again rises (increases) by three scales, and the red meter display MR is in a full state. Note that the "reach" sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 16(18) in which the meter increasing item UpI has disappeared and the effect of increasing the red meter display MR has ended.

FIG. 17: is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the meter production shown in FIG. 16 in steps.

In FIG. 17 (19) continued from FIG. 16 (18), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that continued to change at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes slower, and in the same figure (20) that follows, the left symbol that was swinging and fluctuating , The first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the upper left corner, and the right pattern that is also swinging is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 17(21), it has evolved into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and in the same manner as in FIG. 14(29), the hold frame UI disappears and the castle town disappears in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It has changed from the background screen of to the screen of Swordsman. However, the red meter display MR in the full state is still displayed on the upper part. The super reach effect here is, as shown in FIG. 17 (22), the background of only the first decorative symbol display device 208l among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N is switched to the background of the wilderness, and the second decorative symbol. The backgrounds of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are still the background of the castle town, and further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the fifth symbol pd5 and the information display portion ST1 remains. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the display stage ss and the display of the lord's character cd remain. Further, the red meter display MR in the full state is still displayed at the upper part here. The super reach effect shown in FIG. 15 may be similar to the super reach effect shown in FIG. 17, or conversely, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 17 is similar to the super reach effect shown in FIG. May be

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 17 (23), the red meter display MR in a full state is enlarged and displayed, and the lord's character and the swordsman character are hidden by the enlarged red meter display MR. There is. Also, the word "power up" is displayed to announce that the main character will power up as much as the meter has accumulated. Here, because the meter is full, the power of the lord will greatly increase and win, that is, the expectation of a big hit will be high. From (24) to (25) of FIG. 17, the meter is used, the red meter display MR decreases, and after the fifth state, the state of 0 in FIG. It corresponds to an example of the state). In FIG. 17 (26), the red meter display MR that has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a gold aura icon OI2 is added behind the character of the hero's lord. As described above, the color of the aura icon OI2 corresponds to a color that suggests a big hit density in the currently displayed pattern variation display. The color of the aura icon OI2 may be a rainbow color corresponding to a level further above the big hit density (for example, big hit confirmation).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 17 (27), the scene after the lord's character and the swordsman's character slashed each other is displayed, and in the figure (28), the scene where the lord's character has won. Is displayed, and the same "decoration 7" as the "decoration 7" displayed in the upper left corner or the upper right corner is displayed large as a middle pattern. Then, in FIG. 17 (29), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are displayed in a shaking motion, and in FIG. pd3 is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the big hit with probability variation has been won.

The example shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 described above is an example in which the red meter display MR changes from an empty state (state where the meter is 0) to a full tank state, and finally the big hit symbol is definitely displayed. become. When the red meter display MR changes from the empty state to the full tank state, the jackpot pattern finally becomes larger than when the red meter display MR remains empty and does not change to the full tank state. It is easy to confirm and display. Further, in the red meter display MR, when the empty state is changed to the full tank state, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the empty state is not changed to the full tank state. Further, the super reach effect described with reference to FIG. 17 corresponds to an example of a notice display that is started when the red meter display MR changes to the full state.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing, step by step, a modified example of the effect produced by the changing ball icon cI described with reference to FIG.

18(1) to FIG. 18(6) are the same as FIGS. 16(1) to 16(6). In FIG. 18(7), the lord's character cd throws the change ball icon cI and changes. A moving animation of the ball icon cI is displayed. In FIG. 18(7), the changed ball icon cI is moving from the third decorative symbol display device 208N toward the variable icon c on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 18(8), the changed ball icon cI. The icon cI hits the variable icon c, and the variable icon c is displayed so as to partially overlap from the front side. In addition, the changing ball icon cI shown in FIG. 18(8) has a changed display mode, and an effect display ed2 is added. The effect display ed2 here is the same effect display as the effect display ed1 when the meter display is hit as shown in FIG. 16(8), but may be a different effect display. In FIG. 18(9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed2 is added disappears, and the change icon c that has been green until now changes to red. The red variation icon has a higher probability of a big hit in the displayed symbol variation display than the green variation icon, and is ranked higher here. The rank may be lowered by the changing ball icon cI. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 18, the changing ball icon cI changes the display mode of the variable icon c, but the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining in detail various types of meter displays. The meter display described with reference to FIG. 19 is of an increasing type.

The meter display shown in FIGS. 19(a) to (f) is equivalent to an example of the white meter display MW (first meter display shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 and FIGS. 16(4) to (8). ). That is, the meter frame mf is a white meter display. The white meter display MW is a default meter display. Further, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19A is an empty state (state where the meter is 0), and corresponds to an example of the first state. Further, in FIG. 19A, a white meter-up item UpI is also shown. The meter increase item UpI is an item in which the increase rate of the meter changes depending on the type of meter display, and the white meter increase item UpI is an item that increases the meter of the meter display by the first amount.

FIG. 19B shows a state in which the meter of the white meter display MW which has been empty is raised by one scale by the white meter-up item UpI shown in FIG. 19A. The white meter increase item UpI is an item that is increased by one scale with respect to the white meter display MW. The state of the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19B corresponds to an example of the second state which is a state between the full tank state and the empty state.

FIG. 19C shows a blue meter-up item UpIb of the same color as the color of the increasing/decreasing meter itself. The blue meter-up item UpIb is an item for increasing the meter in the meter display by the second amount.

FIG. 19D shows a state (second state) in which the meter of the white meter display MW that has been empty is raised by two scales by the blue meter-up item UpIb shown in FIG. 19C. Has been done. The blue meter-up item UpIb is an item that is increased by two scales with respect to the white meter display MW.

In FIG. 19E, a red meter-up item UpIr is shown. The red meter-up item UpIr is an item for increasing the meter indicated by the meter by a third amount.

FIG. 19F shows a state (second state) in which the meter of the white meter display MW which has been in an empty state is raised by 4 scales by the red meter-up item UpIr shown in FIG. 19E. Has been done. The red meter-up item UpIr is an item that is increased by four scales with respect to the white meter display MW.

In addition, a gold meter rise item may be displayed. The meter of the white meter display MW that was empty is in a state where it is raised by 5 scales (second state) or is in a full state (states where it is raised by 6 scales) due to the gold meter rise item. .. In this way, the rate of rise of the meter may not be constant, but may change depending on the lottery result or the like.

The meter display shown in FIGS. 19(g) to 19(l) is the red meter display MR (corresponding to an example of the fourth meter display) shown in FIGS. 16(9) to 16(18). That is, the meter frame mf is a red meter display. The red meter display MR has more meter storage than the white meter display MW. In the increase type meter display, the closer to full the tank is, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit is. Therefore, the expectation (reliability) of the big hit is higher when the red meter display MR is displayed than when the white meter display MW is displayed. The higher the expectation of a big hit, the easier it is to finalize and display the big hit symbol aspect in the first symbol. Further, the expectation for winning the advantageous jackpot may be higher when the red meter display MR is displayed than when the white meter display MW is displayed. The advantageous big hit mentioned here is, for example, a big hit with a certainty change or a big hit with a large number of rounds with a ball.

19(g) shows a default white meter-raising item UpI, and FIG. 19(h) shows that the meter of the red meter display MR, which was in an empty state, is the white meter-raising item. A state (fifth state) in which the scale is increased by 3 scales at once by UpI is shown. The white meter-up item UpI is an item for increasing the red meter display MR by three scales.

In FIG. 19(i), a blue meter increasing item UpIb is shown, and in FIG. 19(j), the meter of the red meter display MR which is in an empty state is changed by the blue meter increasing item UpIb. It shows a state in which the scale has risen by 6 scales at a stroke, that is, a state in which the tank is full (sixth state). The blue meter-up item UpIb is an item for increasing the red meter display MR by 6 scales (all scales).

As described above, in the state in which the red meter display MR is displayed, the rate of meter increase by the meter increase item UpI is three times that in the state in which the white meter display MW is displayed.

In FIG. 19(k), a green meter-up item UpIm is shown. The green meter-up item UpIm is an item for increasing the red meter display MR by 9 scales. In the meter display, when the tank is full, the remaining scale (overflowed scale) may be invalidated. However, in order to handle the excess scale effectively, the empty meter display is additionally displayed. To be done. The type of meter display additionally displayed may be the same as the type of meter display in a full tank state, or may be upgraded. That is, in FIG. 19(l), a red meter display MR of the same type as the meter display type in the full tank state is additionally displayed below the meter display in the full tank state. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 19(l), a meter display in which the meter frame mf is gold may be displayed below the red meter display MR in a full state. The additionally displayed red meter display MR shown in FIG. 19(l) has risen to three scales corresponding to the extra scale.

The meter display shown in FIG. 19(m) and FIG. 19(n) is a rainbow meter display MN in which the meter frame mf is a rainbow color. This rainbow meter display MN also corresponds to an example of the fourth meter display. In the state where the rainbow meter display MN is displayed, the rainbow meter display MN is always full, no matter what color of the meter rise item is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 19(m), even if the rainbow meter display MN is in an empty state and the meter-up item UpI is white, the rainbow meter display MN is full as shown in FIG. 19(n). It becomes tongue. In such a rainbow meter display MN, if the meter rises, it will always be in a full tank state, and furthermore, a big hit will be confirmed.

However, in the rainbow meter display MN, even if there is an extra graduation (overflow graduation) when the tank is full, a big hit is determined, so that a new meter as shown in FIG. The additional display is not displayed and the extra scale is invalidated.

It should be noted that when one meter-up item is displayed regardless of the color, the meter-up item may always be raised by the same scale (for example, one scale). In this case, the color of the meter rising item is the expectation of a big hit.

Also, although the appearance timing of the meter rising item has been described above, supplementing here, the meter rising item is a temporary change of the decorative pattern during the pattern change that is a big hit, during long time fluctuation, before super reach or during super reach. It may be easy to appear when stopped.

The meter display described above may be a big notice (so-called normal notice) in the symbol variation display (variation) that is being displayed when the meter display starts to be displayed, or is started after the variation. It may be a big notice (prefetch notice) in the variable display of symbols. That is, in the above case, the expectation degree of the big hit may be the expectation degree of the big hit in the fluctuation, or the expectation degree of the big hit in the symbol fluctuation display started thereafter.

Further, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 19(a) to 19(f), the red meter display MR shown in FIGS. 19(g) to 19(l), and FIGS. 19(m) and 19(n). The rainbow meter display MN shown in () may have different display sizes as well as different display sizes in addition to different colors of the meter frame mf. Further, in the white meter display MW, the red meter display MR, and the rainbow meter display MN, the colors of the meters themselves may be different so that all the colors are different.

Furthermore, when viewed in one meter display, the first state is the state in which the meter frame is white and empty, as shown in FIG. 19A, etc., and FIG. 19B, FIG. 19D, or FIG. An intermediate state shown in (f) in which the meter frame is white and is neither empty nor full is the second state, and the state in which the meter frame is white and full is the third state, which is not shown in FIG. 19(g) and the like, the meter frame is red and the empty state is the fourth state, and the meter frame is red, and the intermediate state is neither empty nor full, as shown in FIG. 19(h). Is the fifth state, and the state where the meter frame is red and the tank is full is the sixth state, as shown in FIG.

Hereinafter, the description of the meter effect will be continued, but the description of items overlapping the items described above may be omitted.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of a rank-up effect in which the meter display changes.

The state shown in FIG. 20(1) is a stop display of a combination of the decorative symbols that are missing, both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. However, here, it is a combination of "decoration 5"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 3". In this state, there is no suspension of the special figure, and the first symbol pd1 continues the stop display until the special figure starting ports 230 and 232 are won. Further, a white meter display MW is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 20(1). The white meter display MW here is an empty state. The white meter display MW continues to be displayed from the stage before FIG. 20(1), and may be already displayed across a plurality of fluctuations.

In FIG. 20(2), there is one ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and in the same figure (3), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. Then, on the stage cs in the variable icon display area, the display of the variable icon c in the white display mode, which is the default display mode, is started. Even when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the white meter display MW in an empty state is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the white meter display MW in this empty state is displayed. Continues until FIG. 20 (18).

Even in FIG. 20(4), which is in the process of changing the symbol of the special figure 1, there is one ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and in the first stage hs1 of the hold icon display area shown in the same figure (5), The display of the hold icon (the first hold icon h1 of special figure 1) in the white display mode, which is the default display mode, is started. Further, also in FIG. 20(6), there is one ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and the prefetch advance notice display mode is displayed on the second stage hs2 of the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 20(7). The display of the green hold icon (the second hold icon h2 in Toku-zu 1) has been started.

In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 20(8), "decoration 7"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of decorative symbols of lost symbols, is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative symbols of the symbols is definitely displayed, and the variable icon c in the white display mode disappears from the stage cs in the variable icon display area. 20(1) and FIG. 20(8) to FIG. 20(9), the white meter display MW continues to be displayed even during the period during the stop display of the third symbol pd3 (including the confirmed display). Therefore, the meter display may always be displayed. That is, the meter display may be displayed across a plurality of variable displays in the third symbol pd3.

In FIG. 20(10), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 by the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first hold icon h1 that is the default display mode is started, and the first hold icon h1 changes to the change icon c. doing. The variable icon c shown in FIG. 20(10) is a default display mode similar to the display mode for the hold icon. 20(9), the hold icon, which is the second hold icon h2 in the display mode of the prefetching notice, shifts to the display mode as it is, and becomes the first hold icon h1 in FIG. 20(10). There is.

In FIG. 20(11), a rank-up effect for telling whether the meter display changes is started, and a gradually changing icon I2 appears from the left end of the left second decorative design display device 208M, and in FIG. 20(12), information The change icon I2 is displayed on the display portion ST1. The change icon I2 is marked with the character "unusual".

In the third decorative design display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 20(13), the lord's character cd draws a bow, and in the first decorative design display device 208L shown in FIG. 13(13), the tutorial display ts is "arrow. If it hits, it has been changed to.

In FIG. 20(14), the lord's character cd shoots an arrow, and the arrow icon representing the shot arrow is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and on the left second decorative symbol display device 208M. You are flying toward the displayed change icon I2. In FIG. 20(15), the icon of the flying arrow is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it seems that the left half of the arrow icon is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the right half is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M interferes, and part of the arrow icon cannot be seen.

In FIG. 20(16), the arrow icon hits the change icon I2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 17(17), the hit arrow icon disappears and the change icon is changed. The display mode of I2 is changed, and an effect display ed3 is added. The effect display ed3 here is also an effect display similar to the effect display ed1 shown in FIG. 16(8), but different effect displays such as different colors may be used. In addition, the lord's character cd displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a different pose, but has a different posture from the initial posture. In FIG. 20 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is white. It is displayed so as to overlap the meter display MW from the front side.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 20 step by step.

In FIG. 21 (19) continued from FIG. 20 (18), the white meter display MW changes to the red meter display MR while the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added disappears and remains empty (the meter is 0). Is changing. That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced by the red meter display MR. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 21 (19) is also in an empty state (state in which the meter is 0). In the rank-up effect described above, the meter display succeeds in increasing the rank from the white meter display MW to the red meter display MR, but it may fail. For example, an icon different from the change icon I2 (for example, an icon with a question mark) appears, and the lord's character cd disappears without drawing a bow, or the arrow of a bowed one. Even if the icon does not hit, the icon disappears, and even if the arrow icon hits, the icon disappears without adding the effect display, even if the effect display is added, up to the white meter display MW There may be a case where the icon disappears without moving and the meter display remains the white meter display MW without any change. Similarly, even with the change icon I2, the lord's character cd does not draw a bow, the arrow icon does not hit, the effect display is not added, or the white meter display MW does not move. Then, the change icon I2 may disappear and the meter display may remain the white meter display MW without any change. In addition, even if the effect display ed3 and the added change icon I2 or the non-added change icon I2 overlap the white meter display MW from the front side, the meter display itself does not rank up, but the meter may rise. Or, on the contrary, the meter may never rise. Further, the meter display itself may be downgraded (for example, the red meter display MR is changed to the white meter display MW).

In FIG. 21(20), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols with the defect of "decoration 5"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Character cd has returned to the initial posture. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, which shows the deviation of the special figure 1. In FIG. 21 (21), the fixed display of the combination of the missing decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is confirmed, and the variable icon c disappears. The red meter display MR continues to be displayed even during the period in which the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed or confirmed. The red meter display MR here is in an empty state.

In FIG. 21 (22), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 21 (21) is started, and the low speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. In addition, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed according to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is related to the meter display. In FIG. 21 (23), the third symbol pd3 starts changing at high speed, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. 24 (24), a notice that a mini item appears is started. That is, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 15, the treasure box icon gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 21(25), the closed treasure box icon is displayed on the information display portion ST1. I1 is displayed. In FIG. 21 (26), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, and a white meter-up item UpI appears in the treasure box.

Next, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI appearing on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the red meter display MR displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 21(27), the moving meter rising item UpI is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 21(28), the meter rising item UpI is red. It is displayed so as to overlap the meter display MR from the front side. In FIG. 21 (29), the meter-up item UpI disappears, and in the red meter display MR in which the meter is more likely to accumulate than the white meter display MW, the meter is immediately raised by three scales.

In FIG. 21 (30), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 are changed at low speed, and in FIG. 21 (31), the reach state is entered. That is, the "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the swing fluctuation is started. In the subsequent FIG. 21 (32), the swinging left symbol moves to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the swinging right symbol also moves to the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to a corner. Then, in FIG. 21 (33), like the example shown in FIG. 15, the super reach effect (swordsman reach effect) is developed, and in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the background screen of the castle town is changed to a swordsman visit screen. Is changing. However, the red meter display MR is still displayed in a state where three scales are accumulated.

In FIG. 21 (34), the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are all switched to the wilderness background, and the lord's character and the swordsman character are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The duel scene has started. Note that the red meter display MR is still displayed in a state in which three scales have been accumulated.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 21 (35), the red meter display MR is enlarged and displayed as it is in a state where it corresponds to three scales (corresponding to an example of the fifth state). Also, the word "power up" is displayed to announce that the main character will power up as much as the meter has accumulated.

It should be noted that there may be a case where the meter of the white meter display MW rises between FIG. 20(3) and FIG. 20(10) before the meter display changes.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step.

21(36) to 22(37), the meter is used, and the red meter display MR decreases, and in FIG. 22(37), the state becomes 0 (corresponding to an example of the fourth state). I'm back. In FIG. 22 (38), the red meter display MR that has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a gold aura icon OI2 that suggests a big hit concentration is added behind the character of the hero's lord.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 22 (39), the scene after the lord's character and the swordsman's character have made a slash is displayed, and in the figure (40), the scene where the lord's character has won. Is displayed, and the same "decoration 4" as the "decoration 4" displayed in the upper left corner or the upper right corner is largely displayed as a middle pattern. Then, in FIG. 22(41), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” are displayed in a shaking motion, and in FIG. 22(42), those three third symbols pd3 are displayed. pd3 is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the big hit with time saving (electricity support) has been won.

In the example shown in FIG. 15 and the examples shown in FIGS. 21 to 22, the meter display is in the state of accumulating the same three scales, but in the example shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this example of the red meter display MR, the jackpot super reach effect is produced. In this way, the expectation of a big hit also changes in the meter display itself (here, the meter frame mf), in addition to the accumulation of the meter. In other words, if the accumulation of the meters (including the empty state) is the same, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the red meter display MR than in the white meter display MW.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the re-lottery that may be continued from FIG. 22 (41).

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the red meter display MR, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the white meter display MW, is displayed, and the red meter display MR is not in an empty state but in a state where three scales are accumulated. .. Therefore, the expectation to win the advantageous big hit is high, and the re-lottery may be performed as shown in FIG. In other words, a big hit (for example, a big hit with a certainty change or a large number of rounds with a ball coming out) is more advantageous when the red meter display MR has accumulated three ticks than the white meter indication MW has accumulated three ticks. The expectation to do is high.

Here, from the state shown in FIG. 22(41) in which three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” are all displayed in shaking motion, FIG. As shown, the button effect is started in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The button effect here is a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136, an arrow display 136b and a character display of “press”, and a chance button 136 as a promotion display that prompts the user to operate (press) the chance button 136. The remaining period meter display 136c, which is a display related to the period during which the operation is accepted as valid (operation valid period), is displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display showing the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. The button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also illuminated in red to prompt the user to press it.

In FIGS. 23 (43 ′) to (44 ′), the chance button 136 is not pressed, the operation valid period decreases, and the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing of (45 ′). When the chance button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 23 (46'), the swing display of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" is changed to "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-" The display changes to the swing display of "decoration 7", and the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed in FIG. There is. In other words, it has been promoted from a jackpot with reduced working hours (electric support) to a jackpot with a certainty change.

Even when the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation valid period, the shaking display of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is displayed as “decoration 7”-“decoration” after the operation valid period has elapsed. "7"-"decoration 7" changes to a shaking display, is confirmed, and is promoted to a jackpot with probability variation.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of a mini game in which whether or not the meter display appears appears.

In FIG. 24(1), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is finished, and the combination of the missing decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. .. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, which shows the deviation of the special figure 1. In FIG. 24(2), the fixed display of the combination of the missing decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is confirmed and the variable icon c disappears.

In FIG. 24(3), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 24(2) is started, and the low speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. In addition, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in response to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content regarding the mini game such as “win against drinking compared” is displayed. In FIG. 24(4), the third symbol pd3 has started high speed fluctuation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 24(5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, and the background image, which used to be the townscape of the castle town until now, changes to the background image of the mini game comparing drinking with the grandfather. doing. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 continues to be displayed. In FIG. 24(6), an explanation display that the sword dance meter (meter display) is displayed when the lord wins the mini game in the mini game is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L of the background image of the mini game. In FIG. (7), a mini game for drinking and drinking has started. In FIG. 24(8), the lord's victory in the mini game is notified, and in FIG. 24(9), it is displayed that the sword dance meter has been acquired.

In FIG. 24(10), the effect display ed4 is displayed together with the sword dance meter on the display of the third symbol pd3 on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, it is difficult to visually recognize what color the sword dance meter is displayed by the effect display ed4. In addition, in this specification, "difficult to visually recognize" means that it is relatively difficult to visually recognize as compared with the states before and after that. In FIG. 24(11), the effect display ed4 disappears and the white meter display MW, which is a sword dance meter, is clearly displayed.

In addition, when the Tonosama is defeated in the mini game, the sword dance meter is not displayed. The effect by the mini game described with reference to FIG. 24 also corresponds to the acquisition effect of the meter display.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example in which a big hit is determined by the fluctuation when the meter display is in a full state.

25(1) to FIG. 25(9) are the same as FIGS. 14(1) to 14(9), and in FIG. 25(10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is temporarily stopped, The swing fluctuation has started (second stop), and the golden meter-up item UpIg has appeared. As described above, the gold meter increase item UpIg increases the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 or 6 scales. In FIG. 25(10), the white meter display MW accumulated for one scale is displayed, and the appearance of the gold-colored meter-up item UpIg means that the big hit is confirmed in the variation. That is, when the meter-raising item where the meter is easy to accumulate (gold here or red shown in FIG. 19E) appears, it is more likely that the meter-increasing item (for example, white) where the meter is less likely to accumulate is a big hit. Expectations are high. In FIG. 25(11), the gold-colored meter-up item UpIg moves to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 25 (12), the gold meter up item UpIg disappears and the meter of the white meter display MW is full. In case of 6 ticks increase, one tick is left over, but the big hit has been decided by the change and the next change will be after the big hit game, so the remaining one tick is until the next change. It cannot be carried over and is invalidated. In addition, the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 25 (12) outputs the sound "Congratulations". The voice output here corresponds to a big hit notification sound that informs that the meter is full and the big hit is confirmed.

In FIG. 25 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to change at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and the middle symbol (here, "decoration 7") can be recognized. Then, in FIG. 25(14), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are displayed in a shaking motion, and in FIG. 25(15), those three third symbols are shown. pd3 is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the big hit with probability variation has been won.

The example shown in FIG. 25 described above is an example in which the white meter display MW changes from an empty state (state where the meter is 0) to a full tank state, and finally the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. The case where the white meter display MW changes from the empty state to the full tank state is finally a big hit symbol than the case where the white meter display MW remains empty and does not change to the full tank state Is easy to confirm. Further, also in the white meter display MW, the case where the empty state has changed to the full tank state is better than the case where the empty state has not changed to the full tank state as in the examples shown in FIGS. 14 and 15. Even in the end, it is easy to finalize and display the jackpot pattern.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which the meter display is displayed in the holding frame.

The holding frame UI′ shown in FIG. 26 is also provided with a base icon UIb′ that has a pattern of vertical stripes and extends to the left and right. However, the base icon UIb′ shown in FIG. 26 is the base icon UIb shown in FIG. Taller than. Further, in the effect display area provided on the right side of the holding frame UI′ shown in FIG. 26, an empty white meter display MW is displayed instead of the tutorial display ts. This white meter display MW is completely in the holding frame UI′ and is integrated with the holding frame UI′ because the base icon UIb′ shown in FIG. 26 is high, but the meter display shows the holding frame UI′. It suffices if a part of it is in UI'. In other words, the meter display may be partially or entirely overlapped with the hold frame UI′, and the hold frame UI′ corresponds to an example of the hold display region in a broad sense, and also corresponds to an example of the icon display region. Equivalent to. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 26, the meter display is always displayed in the hold frame UI'. That is, the meter display is also displayed during the period when the hold frame UI' is displayed, and the meter display also disappears when the hold frame UI' disappears. However, the tutorial display ts is always displayed, and the meter display may be displayed in place of the tutorial display ts only during the meter presentation.

In FIG. 26(1), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is finished, and the combination of the missing decorative symbols of "decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" is stopped and displayed. .. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, which shows the deviation of the special figure 1. In FIG. 26(2), the fixed display of the combination of lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is confirmed and the variable icon c disappears.

In FIG. 26(3), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. Then, the third symbol pd3 has started high-speed fluctuation. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 26(5), the dialogue "Ikuzo" is displayed on the display of the character cd of the lord, and the mini item appearance notice is given. In FIG. 26(6), a white meter increase item UpI appears, and the lord's character cd is in charge of the meter increase item UpI. In FIG. 26(7), the lord's character cd throws the meter rising item UpI, and the meter rising item UpI is displayed above the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI'. The meter-up item UpI shown in FIG. 26(7) does not overlap the white meter display MW and only partially overlaps the base icon UIb′. All may be displayed so as to overlap.

In FIG. 26(8), the meter-up item UpI disappears, and the white meter display MW is changed to a state in which one scale is stored. In the central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 26(9), a tutorial display such as "Continue with full meter" is displayed.

In FIG. 26 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed variation to low-speed variation, and in the same figure (11), the variation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here The decoration 7") becomes recognizable. Further, in FIG. 26(11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. Then, in FIG. 26(12), the left symbol is temporarily stopped, and swing fluctuation is started (first stop). Also, at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol, or at the timing before and after the temporary stop, the gold meter up item UpIg appears. In FIG. 26(13), the moving animation of the golden meter rising item UpIg is started, and the golden meter rising item UpIg moves to above the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI′. In FIG. 26 (14), the fluctuation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is further reduced, and the right symbol (here, "decoration 6") can be recognized. In addition, the gold meter up item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW rises (increases) all at once.

In FIG. 26 (15), the fluctuation of the middle symbol, which has continued to change at high speed with the third symbol pd3, becomes slow, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 26 (16), the pseudo continuous symbol swings (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continue”). "-"Decoration 6") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo continuous effect is started. In FIG. 26(17), similar to FIG. 14(15), the cut-in display of the pseudo continuous effect is performed so as to overlap the entire third symbol pd3 from the front side. In FIG. 26 (18), the cut-in display disappears, re-fluctuation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo continuous production is started, and the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol each start a low-speed variation, and the left symbol The character display of “×2”, which is a display of the number of times of continuation, is displayed so as to partially overlap with. The white meter display MW which has been in the full state continues to be displayed until the re-change is started, but the white meter display MW returns to the empty state in response to the start of the re-change. Then, after the pseudo-relational effect is continued, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the currently displayed symbol variation display.

In the pseudo continuous effect described with reference to FIG. 26, the meter display (in this case, the white meter display MW, but other meter display (for example, red meter display MR)) may be full. This corresponds to an example of a notice display that starts to be displayed when it changes.

The white meter display MW may continue to be displayed in the full state until the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the white meter display MW in the full state may be displayed only until the pseudo stop of the pseudo continuous symbol in FIG. 26 (16) (start of the pseudo continuous effect), and may return to the empty state.

In addition, regarding the timing when the meter display returns to the empty state, it is the symbol fluctuation display (including the symbol fluctuation display of the notice when the meter display is a normal notice) when the meter display is started, or the meter display If is a pre-reading notice, it is a symbol variation display one before the design variation display of the pre-reading notice target, or in the symbol variation display of the pre-reading notice target, at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed, it is empty. You may return to the state of. For example, in each of the above-described variable display of symbols, the empty state may be returned when the symbols are stopped without being filled up. That is, the second state may return to the first state, or the fifth state may return to the fourth state. Further, in the second state or the fifth state, it may be configured to always return to an empty state at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. Alternatively, even in the third state or the sixth state, it may be configured to always return to the empty state at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. In addition, the meter display returns to the empty state, and the display of the empty state may be continued only after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and there is no subsequent hold, and the next symbol variation display starts immediately. If not, the meter display may disappear but may continue to be displayed in an empty state. Further, when there is a subsequent hold and the next symbol variation display is started immediately, the meter display may continue to be displayed in an empty state.

Further, the white meter display MW may be changed to the red meter display MR in the holding frame UI′, or the red meter display MR may be displayed from the beginning.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of acquiring and stocking mini-items when the meter in the meter display is full.

27(1) to 27(6) are the same as FIGS. 14(1) to 14(6), and in FIG. 27(7), the left symbol (here, "decoration 7") is temporarily stopped. , Swing fluctuation has started (first stop). Further, a red meter-up item UpIr appears at the same time as, or before and after the temporary stop of the left symbol. The red meter-up item UpIr is displayed at a position overlapping the left pattern from the front side.

In FIG. 27(8), the moving animation of the red meter-raising item UpIr is started, and the red meter-raising item UpIr moves to a position overlapping the empty white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 27(9), the fluctuation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here, "decoration 7") can be recognized. Also, the red meter-up item UpIr has disappeared, and the meter on the white meter display MW has risen (increased) by four scales.

In FIG. 27(10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is temporarily stopped, swinging fluctuation is started (second stop), and the reach state is formed. In addition, a gold meter-up item UpIg appears at the same time as, or before and after the reach state is formed. In FIG. 27(11), the gold-colored meter-up item UpIg moves to a position where it overlaps the white meter display MW, which has been accumulated for four scales, from the front side. In FIG. 27 (12), the gold meter up item UpIg disappears and the meter of the white meter display MW is full. The golden meter increase item UpIg here is an item for increasing the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 scales. If the white meter display MW has accumulated 4 scales, 3 scales are left over (scale overflow). However, in FIG. 27 (12), the remaining scale is not displayed at all, and in FIG. 27 (13), the mini item of the mini item is displayed at the right end of the white meter display MW in the full state. A pseudo-announcement item NI, which is a kind, appears, and the character display of "GET" is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol or the like which is temporarily stopped in the third symbol pd3 from the front side. The pseudo-reminder item NI is an icon for notifying that the pseudo rendition will be started thereafter, and the character display of "GET" is a character display indicating that the pseudo-reminder item NI has been acquired.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 27(14), the "decoration 7" is in the reach state. In the reach state, the white meter display MW that had been full until then changes to an empty state, the character display of "GET" disappears, and the pseudo-repeated notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M. And is displayed on the information display portion ST1. The second decorative symbol display device 208M functions as a means for displaying the stocked icon, which means that the pseudo-announcement item NI has been stocked.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 27(15), the white meter display MW in the empty state is added with three graduations, which are the graduations left over previously. That is, the display of the overflowed state when the tank is full is started at this timing. The opportunity to raise the white meter display MW remains after this.

The white meter display MW in FIGS. 27(12) to 27(15) described above is not downgraded, but the portion that is in a full state is replaced with the pseudo-announcement item NI, and the remaining portion is left. Is displayed again.

In FIG. 27 (16), the pseudo-repeated notice item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to change at high speed, and the pseudo-repeated notice item NI is digested. Further, the character display of "activate" is displayed below the pseudo-reminder item NI displayed at the position of the middle symbol. The character display of "activate" is a character display indicating that the pseudo-reminder item NI has been activated, and the pseudo-reproduction is started immediately thereafter.

In FIG. 27 (17), the middle symbol, which has continued to change at high speed with the third symbol pd3, fluctuates (temporarily stops). The middle symbol here is a pseudo continuous symbol ("continuation"), and the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation"-"decoration 6") is in a temporarily stopped state, and the pseudo-reproduction is started. To be done.

In the example described above, when the meter display is in a full state, various mini items appear without being limited to the pseudo-repeated notice item NI, and the appeared mini items can be stocked. If the appearing mini item is an item related to a big hit (for example, a pseudo-announcement item NI), a full meter display corresponds to a higher expectation of a big hit, and Eventually, the jackpot pattern is likely to be confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which a plurality of items are stocked in one full meter display.

28(1) to FIG. 28(6) are the same as FIGS. 14(1) to 14(6), and in FIG. 28(7), the left symbol (here, “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. , Swing fluctuation has started (first stop). Also, at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol, or at the timing before and after the temporary stop, two meter increasing items of a red meter increasing item UpIr and a blue meter increasing item UpIb appear. That is, a plurality of meter-increasing items appear at the same time.

In FIG. 28(8), the movement animation of the two meter-raising items is started, and the red meter-raising item UpIr and the blue meter-raising item UpIb are both moved to a position overlapping the empty white meter display MW from the front side. To do. As described above with reference to FIG. 19, the red meter increase item UpIr is an item for increasing the meter of the white meter display MW by 4 scales, and the blue meter increase item UpIb is an item for increasing by 2 scales. is there. In FIG. 28(9), the meter-up item of both the red meter-up item UpIr and the blue meter-up item UpIb disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW which has been empty until now is the red meter-up item. UpIr is increased by 4 scales, blue meter increase item UpIb is increased by 2 scales, and the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 28(9) is in a full state.

In FIG. 28(10), at the right end of the white meter display MW in the full state, two pseudo-repeated notice items NI, which are a type of mini item, appear, and "decoration 7" of the right symbol that is temporarily stopped, etc. One character display of "GET" is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the example shown in FIG. 27, the white meter display MW is full with one red meter increase item UpIr, but in this example, there are two red meter increase items UpIr and blue meter increase items UpIb. The white meter display MW was full with the meter rising item. Whether the red meter-up item UpIr or the blue meter-up item UpIb, the meter has a higher rate of increase than the default white meter-up item UpI. The red meter-up item UpIr and the blue meter-up item UpIb are higher. It can be said that it is an item that can easily store meters. From this, it can be said that it is more likely that a plurality of items can be stocked when a meter-raising item that easily accumulates meters appears. The red meter display MR may have a higher possibility of stocking a plurality of items than the white meter display MW.

With the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 28(11), the white meter display MW that had been in a full tank until then changes to an empty state, and the character display of "GET" disappears. One pseudo consecutive notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and two pseudo consecutive notice items NI are stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28(12), the white meter display MW in an empty state is still displayed, and the opportunity to raise the white meter display MW still remains after this, but When there is no chance, or conversely when the big hit is confirmed, the white meter display MW may be erased when it becomes empty, or may be erased after returning to the empty state. Further, one of the two pseudo-repeated notice items NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol which continues to change at high speed, and under the pseudo-repeated notice item NI is " The word "Activate" is displayed. At the timing of FIG. 28 (12), first, one pseudo-repeated notice item NI is digested, and one temporary stop and the start of re-fluctuation are performed for the entire third symbol pd3. Then, the second pseudo-announcement item NI that is stocked causes the second temporary stop and the start of the re-change.

Note that among the items stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, there are items that can be carried over to the next symbol variation display (for example, items of prefetch notice system), but they cannot be carried over and are currently performed. There is also an item (for example, the pseudo-announcement item NI) that is consumed during the symbol variation display.

Also, as in the example shown in FIG. 28, a plurality of items may be stocked with one meter full, but conversely, items may not be stocked even when the meter is full. May be. For example, when the white meter display MW is filled up with the white meter-raising item UpI, the pseudo-reminder item NI itself does not appear, or even if it appears, it is not stocked.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing stepwise an example in which the meter display in the full tank state may be carried over to the next symbol variation display.

29(1) to 29(8) are the same as FIGS. 28(1) to 28(8), and in FIG. 28(9), the fluctuation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is slow. Then, the right pattern (here, "decoration 1") can be recognized. Further, both the meter-up items of the red meter-up item UpIr and the blue meter-up item UpIb disappear, and the meter of the white meter display MW which has been empty until now becomes full in the example of FIG. 29 as well. Has become. However, as shown in FIG. 29(10), in this example, items such as the pseudo-repeated notice item NI do not appear, and the white meter display MW is kept full. Further, in the third symbol pd3, "decoration 1" different from the left symbol of "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped on the right symbol, and swing fluctuation is started. That is, the reach state is not entered as in the example shown in FIG. Further, in FIG. 29(10), the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in response to the white meter display MW being full, and the display content is related to the prefetch notice such as “next chance”. ..

In FIG. 29(11), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to change at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and the middle symbol (here, "decoration 1") can be recognized. Then, in FIG. 29(12), three third symbols pd3 of "decoration 7"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1" are displayed in a shaking motion. This combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1" is the chance opportunity, and in FIG. 29 (13), the first ornamental pattern display device 208L according to the swing display (temporary stop) of the chance eye. The flash pattern fd is emitted by the transparent light guide plate arranged on the front side of the. Instead of the light guide plate, a flash symbol may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 29(14), the third symbol pd3 of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, showing the deviation of the special figure 1. In FIG. 29(15), the third symbol pd3 of the chance eye is confirmed and displayed, and the change icon c disappears. In addition, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed again in response to the confirmation display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content suggesting a chance item such as “the arrangement of 711”. Even if the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed, and further confirmed, the white meter display MW in the full tank state is still displayed. In FIG. 29 (16), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in (15) of the same figure, that is, the next symbol variation display is started, and the low speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. Has been done. The white meter display MW in the full tank state continues to be displayed in the full tank state even when the next symbol fluctuation display is started, and is displayed across the continuous symbol fluctuation display. The white meter display MW in the full tank state in FIGS. 29(9) to 15(15) corresponds to a look-ahead notice, and the white meter display MW in the full tank state in FIG. 29(16) corresponds to a normal notice.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which even if an item appears when the meter display is full, the item is not stocked but consumed.

30(1) to 30(6) are the same as FIGS. 14(1) to 14(6). In FIG. 30(7), the left symbol (here, "decoration 7") is temporarily stopped. , Swing fluctuation has started (first stop). Also, at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol, or at the timing before and after the temporary stop, the gold meter up item UpIg appears. This gold-colored meter-up item UpIg is displayed at a position overlapping the left pattern from the front side.

In FIG. 30(8), the moving animation of the golden meter rising item UpIg is started, and the golden meter rising item UpIg moves to a position where it overlaps the empty white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 30 (9), the fluctuation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here, "decoration 7") can be recognized. Further, the gold meter up item UpIg disappears and the meter of the white meter display MW is in a full state.

In FIG. 30(10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is temporarily stopped, swing fluctuation is started (second stop), and the reach state is formed. In addition, at the same time as the reach state is formed or before and after the reach state, an operation means advance notice display icon 136I, which is a type of mini item, appears at the right end of the white meter display MW in the full state, and the third symbol pd3 is displayed. Among them, the character display of "GET" is displayed so as to overlap the right pattern which is temporarily stopped from the front side. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon for notifying that the production of the operation means notice (for example, button notice) will be started thereafter, and the character display of "GET" has acquired the operation means notice display icon 136I. It is a character display showing that. The operation means advance notice display icon 136I is an icon imitating the operation means (here, the chance button 136), and the operation means advance notice display icon 136I shown in FIG. 30(10) is a white icon. The white color here means that no change occurs even if the operation means is operated. That is, an effect (for example, a notice effect, etc.) corresponding to the operation of the operation means is not started. Therefore, it can be said that the operation of the operation means is not accepted, or that the operation is invalidated because it is accepted. In the following description, it is assumed that the operation of the operation means is invalid because the operation of the operation means is not accepted and the operation is invalidated because the operation is accepted. The color indicates that the operation of is invalid.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 30(11), the white meter display MW that had been in a full tank until then changes to an empty state, and the character display of "GET" disappears and continues. In FIG. 12 (12), the operation means advance notice display icon 136I displayed at the right end of the white meter display MW moves to the position of the middle symbol that is changing at high speed to change the display mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 30(13), the button effect is started in the middle symbol. Also in the button effect here, as in the button effect shown in FIG. 23, the button image 136a, the arrow display 136b as the promotion display, the character display "press", and the remaining period meter display 136c are one set. Is displayed. Further, red is a color that prompts the user to operate the operating means, the button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 is also illuminated in red and prompts the user to press it.

In FIG. 30(14), the chance button 136 is not pressed and the operation valid period is reduced, but the chance button 136 is pressed at the next timing of FIG. 30(15). In response to the pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 30(16), the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed so as to overlap the third symbol pd3 from the front side. This character display usually corresponds to a notice.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 30 described above, the item acquired by full meter is used immediately. That is, the acquired item is used without moving to a decorative symbol display device different from the decorative symbol display device whose display is started. Further, it is used during the symbol variation display which is being performed when the display is started. However, it may be possible to stock the operation means notice display icon 136I in a white display until the operation valid period of the operation means arrives, and in some cases, it may be stocked until the next symbol variation display. Good.

Even if the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation valid period, the character display "Gekiatsu" is displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed, and the normal notice is given.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which two meter displays are displayed and both of them disappear.

In FIG. 31(1), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols with the defect of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. The four symbols pd4 are also displayed as gray squares and gray circles, showing the loss of special figure 1. In FIG. 31(2), the fixed display of the combination of missing decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variable icon c disappears.

In FIG. 31(3), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 31B is started, and the low speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. As shown in FIG. 31(4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, after the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, in the upper left of the third symbol pd3, an empty white meter display MW (for example, , Corresponding to an example of the first meter display) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 31(5), an empty white meter display MW (e.g., corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display) is displayed at the upper right of the third symbol pd3. Although the two white meter displays MW are started to be displayed separately here, the two white meter displays MW may be started to be displayed together.

In FIG. 31(7), a red meter increase item UpIr appears in the left pattern of the “decoration 7” that has been temporarily stopped, and in FIG. 31(8), a red meter increase item UpIr is displayed on the left white meter display MW. Move from the front side to the overlapping position. In FIG. 31(9), the red meter increase item UpIr disappears, and only the meter on the left white meter display MW has increased by 4 scales.

In FIG. 31(10), a golden meter rising item UpIg appears in the right pattern of the “decoration 7” that has been temporarily stopped, and in FIG. 31(11), the golden meter rising item UpIg is on the right white meter display MW. Move from the front side to the overlapping position. In FIG. 31(12), the gold meter up item UpIg disappears, and only the meter on the right white meter display MW is moved up by 5 scales.

In FIG. 31 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to change at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and in FIG. 31 (14), the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 31(15), the pseudo continuous symbol is shaken and fluctuated (temporarily stopped), and the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped from the front side. Three white meter-up items UpI are displayed. As shown in FIG. 31(16), two of these three white meter-up items UpI move to the left white meter display MW, and the other one moves to the right white meter display MW meter.

In each of the two white meter displays MW shown in FIG. 31(17), the meter is increased by the moved meter increase item UpI. That is, the white meter display MW on the left side is raised by 2 scales to be in a full state, and the white meter display MW on the right side is moved by 1 scales to be in a full state. Further, when the tank is full, the chance-up item CUI appears in the white meter display MW on the left side and the character display of “GET” is displayed, and the swordsman reach item RI is displayed in the white meter display MW on the right side. As it appears, the character display of "GET" is displayed. The chance-up item CUI that appeared in the white meter display MW on the left is an icon that shows that the expectation of a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display has increased, and the swordsman reach item that appeared in the white meter display MW on the right. The RI is an icon that gives notice that the swordsman reach, which is a kind of super reach production, will be developed in the variable display of symbols that is currently being performed.

In FIG. 31(18), each of the two white meter displays MW that are in a full state disappears, the character display of each “GET” disappears, and the chance up item CUI, the swordsman reach item RI, and the second decorative pattern. It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It should be noted that each of the two white meter displays MW that have been in a full tank state may be changed to an empty state without being erased, but in the case where it is confirmed that a big hit will occur in the currently displayed symbol variation display. As shown in FIG. 31(18), the meter display may be turned off.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one of them disappears.

In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 32(1), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of decorative symbols of lost symbols, is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative symbols of the symbols is definitely displayed, and the variable icon c in the white display mode disappears from the stage cs in the variable icon display area.

In FIG. 32(3), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 by the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first hold icon h1 that is the default display mode is started, and the first hold icon h1 changes to the change icon c. doing. The variable icon c shown in FIG. 32(3) is a default display mode similar to the display mode for the hold icon. 32(2), the hold icon, which is the second hold icon h2 in the display mode of the prefetching notice, shifts to the display mode as it is, and becomes the first hold icon h1 in FIG. 32(3). There is.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(4), after the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, in the upper left of the third symbol pd3, an empty white meter display MW (for example, the first (Corresponding to an example of the meter display of) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 32(5), an empty white meter display MW (e.g., an example of a fourth meter display) is displayed at the upper right of the third symbol pd3.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 32(6), the line "Ikuzo" is displayed on the display of the character cd of the lord, and the mini item appearance notice is given. In FIG. 32(7), the changed ball icon cI appears, and the lord's character cd carries the changed ball icon cI. In FIG. 32(8), the lord's character cd throws the changed ball icon cI, and in FIG. 32(9), the changed ball icon cI hits the right white meter display MW, and the right white meter display MW is displayed. It is displayed on the right edge so as to overlap from the front side. The changed ball icon cI shown in FIG. 32(9) has a changed display mode, and an effect display ed1 is added. At the right end of the white meter display MW on the right side, the change ball icon cI additionally displayed with the effect display ed1 is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There is. In FIG. 32(10), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 has been added disappears, and only the white meter display MW on the right side changes to the red meter display MR with the empty state (state where the meter is 0). There is. That is, it corresponds to an example in which the fourth meter display changes from the first state to the fourth state. Note that a plurality of meter displays MW may change simultaneously. That is, according to this example, the white meter display MW on the left side may be changed to the red meter display MR together with the white meter display MW on the right side in an empty state (state where the meter is 0).

In FIG. 32 (11), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 32 (12), the left symbol temporarily stops and swing fluctuation starts (first). Stop). Further, at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol, or at the timing before and after that, the blue meter-up item UpIb appears. That is, one blue meter-up item UpIb is displayed so as to overlap the left pattern of “decoration 7” from the front side.

In FIG. 32 (13), the split animation of the blue meter rising item UpIb is started, and one blue meter rising item UpIb splits into two, and the white meter display MW in the empty state on the left side and the right side A blue meter-up item UpIb is displayed on each red meter display MR in an empty state. As described above, the blue meter increase item UpIb is an item that increases the white meter display MW by 2 scales and increases the red meter display MR by 6 scales. In FIG. 32(14), the left and right blue meter-up items UpIb disappear, and the meter on the left-hand white meter display MW has risen only by two scales, whereas the meter on the right-hand red meter display MR has It has risen to full tank at once. Then, the swordsman reach item RI appears and the character display of "GET" is displayed on the red meter display MR on the right side when the tank is full. No item appears in the white meter display MW on the left side that has not reached the full tank state.

In FIG. 32 (17), of the two meter displays, only the red meter display MR on the right side, which was in a full state, disappears, the character display of “GET” also disappears, and the swordsman reach item RI is the second decorative pattern. It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, in FIG. 32(17), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, showing the deviation of the special figure 1. In FIG. 32 (18), the third symbol pd3 is confirmed and displayed, and the change icon c disappears. After all, the stocked swordsman reach item RI was not used in the symbol variation display at the time of appearance. Therefore, the swordsman reach item RI here corresponds to a look-ahead icon that announces that the next symbol variation display will develop into a swordsman reach, which is a type of super reach production.

FIG. 33: is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 32 in steps.

In FIG. 33(19) continued from FIG. 32(18), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the red first suspension icon h1 which is the look-ahead notice mode of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 32(18) is started, and The low speed fluctuation is started in the three symbols pd3. The variable icon c is also displayed in a red display mode and normally functions as a notice. In addition, the left side white meter display MW shown in FIG. 32(18), which has accumulated up to two graduations, is still displayed even when a new symbol variation display is started, and has been carried over to the next symbol variation display. become. That is, in the state in which the meter has accumulated, it means that the symbol display is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 33 (20), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 33 (21), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. 33 (22), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here, "decoration 7") can be recognized, and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also fluctuates from high speed variation to low speed variation. Has changed to.

In FIG. 33 (23), the left symbol is temporarily stopped, and swing fluctuation is started (first stop). Also, at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol, or at the timing before and after the temporary stop, a white meter-up item UpI appears.

In FIG. 33(24), the moving animation of the white meter rising item UpI is started, and the white meter rising item UpI moves to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 33(25), the white meter-up item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is moved up by one scale. Further, at the timing of FIG. 33 (25 ), the reach state is entered, and the sound “reach” is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 33 (25 ).

In FIG. 33 (26) after entering the reach state in this way, the swordsman reach item RI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M is activated, and the character display "activate" is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is displayed. In FIG. 33 (27), the swinging left symbol moves to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the swinging right symbol also moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to. The white meter display MW displayed on the upper left also moves to the center position. Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (28 ), it has developed into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background screen of the castle town has changed to a screen of swordsman visit. From the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 33 (28), the swordsman reach item RI has disappeared. The swordsman reach production started in this way is the same as the swordsman reach production shown in FIG. 17 (22) and subsequent details, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted, but here, the white meter display MW has accumulated up to only three divisions. Despite this, in FIG. 33 (33), a golden aura icon OI2 is added behind the lord's character. In the example shown in FIG. 15, when the power is increased from the white meter display MW that has accumulated up to 3 divisions, the green aura icon OI1 is shown as shown in FIG. 15 (34), but this is shown in FIG. In the example, if multiple meter displays were displayed in the previous symbol variation display, it would be easier to hit big compared to the case where only one meter display was displayed, and the color of the aura icon would also be a color with high expectation of big hit. It becomes easy to become. Even when a plurality of meter displays are displayed, a meter display different from the white meter display MW (for example, a red meter display MR) is displayed rather than the default white meter display MW alone. Is more likely to be a big hit, and the color of the aura icon is also likely to have a higher expectation of a big hit.

Until now, all the meter displays were of the increase type, and the display was started in the empty state (when the meter was 0), but the meter display is between the empty state and the full state. The display may start in the state (2nd state or 5th state).

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which display is started in a state where the increase type meter display is accumulated halfway.

In FIG. 34(1), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is finished, and the combination of the missing decorative symbols of "decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" is stopped and displayed. .. In FIG. 34(2), the fixed display of the combination of the missing decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is confirmed and the variable icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, which shows the deviation of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 34(3), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 34B is started, and the low speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. In addition, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in response to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and here, the tutorial display ts scrolls with a character string such as “When the meter appears with a little accumulated”. Is displayed.

In FIG. 34(4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and the white meter display MW is displayed on the third symbol pd3 in a state where the white meter display MW is accumulated from the beginning to the middle. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 34(4) is a state in which one scale is stored, and corresponds to an example of the second state. Further, in accordance with the appearance of the meter display in the state where the meters are accumulated halfway, the sound of "chance" is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 34(4).

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 34(5), the line "Ikuzo" is displayed on the display of the character cd of the lord, and the mini-item appearance notice is given. In FIG. 34(6), a golden meter increasing item UpIg appears, and the lord's character cd is in charge of the golden meter increasing item UpIg. In FIG. 34(7), the lord's character cd throws the gold meter-up item UpIg, and the gold meter-up item UpIg is located between the first decorative pattern display device 208L and the third decorative pattern display device 208N. ing. In FIG. 34(8), the gold meter up item UpIg hits the white meter display MW and is displayed so as to overlap the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 34(9), the gold-colored meter-up item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW changes from the state in which one scale is stored to the full state. Since the gold meter up item UpIg is an item that raises the meter by at least 5 scales, when the display is started in a state where the meter display is accumulated halfway, when the gold meter up item UpIg appears, The meter is full.

In the white meter display MW, the big hit symbol is finally settled when the half-filled state changes to the full tank state than when the half-filled state does not change to the full tank state Easy to display. Further, in the case of the white meter display MW, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally displayed in a finalized manner when the display is started in a state where the white meter display MW is partially accumulated than when the display is started in an empty state. The same applies to the red meter display MR.

In addition, in the state where the meter is accumulated halfway (second state), the rate of increase of the meter by the item for increasing the meter is increased. For example, the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item may be doubled as compared with the state where the meter is 0 (first state).

Up to now, the bar type (gauge type) meter display has been described, but the meter display may be a display showing a numerical value.

FIG. 35: is a figure which shows an example of the meter production|generation by the meter display which shows a numerical value in steps.

In FIG. 35(1), the third symbol pd3 is changing at high speed, and the tutorial display ts has a display content such as "when the meter is red". A white numeric type meter display DW appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 35(2), and a sound effect (appearance) appears from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 35(2) in accordance with its appearance. Sound) is being output. The white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 35(2) corresponds to an example of the first meter display, and the state is a state where the numerical value is 00%, and this state is an example of the first state. Equivalent to. Further, in FIG. 35(2), the tutorial display ts is changed and the display content is such as "when the meter reaches MAX".

In FIG. 35(3), the Yatsushiro 224Fa, which is one of the movable means, falls from above the first decorative pattern display device 208L. In response to the operation of the movable means, as shown in FIG. 35(4), a white meter-up item UpI appears. However, the falling Yatsushiro 224Fa is located in front of the white meter-raising item UpI, and part of the white meter-raising item UpI is relatively difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 35(5), the white meter-up item UpI moves downward, the overlap with the fallen Yashiro Yakuhin 224Fa is eliminated, and the visibility of the meter-up item UpI is improved. In FIG. 35(6), the Yashiro Yakuhin 224Fa rises and returns to the initial position, and the moving animation of the white meter-up item UpI is started. The white meter rising item UpI moves to a position overlapping the white numerical type meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M from the front side. The white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 35(6) is located between the first decorative pattern display device 208L and the second decorative pattern display device 208M, and the white meter rising item shown in FIG. UpI is displayed at a position overlapping the white numeric type meter display DW. The numerical display of the white numerical type meter display DW shown in FIG. 35(7) is temporarily difficult to visually recognize due to the white meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 35(8), the white meter increase item UpI disappears, the visibility of the numerical display of the white numerical type meter display DW is restored, and the numerical display rises from 00% until then to 10%. There is. The state of the white numeric type meter display DW that is performing 10% numerical value display shown in FIG. 35(8) corresponds to an example of the second state.

In FIG. 35(9), the general officer object 224Fb falls from above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. According to the operation of the general character object 224Fb, which is a movable means, as shown in FIG. 35(10), the changed ball icon cI appears at the position behind the general character object 224Fb, and Part of the change ball icon cI is relatively difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 35(11), the changed ball icon cI moves downward, the overlap with the falling general officer object 224Fb is eliminated, and the visibility of the changed ball icon cI is improved. In FIG. 35(12), the general character object 224Fb rises and returns to the initial position, and the changed ball icon cI moves to a position overlapping the white numerical type meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M from the front side. doing. In FIG. 35(13), the change ball icon cI disappears, and the white numerical type meter display DW until then is changed to the red numerical type meter display DR (corresponding to an example of the fourth meter display). That is, the meter displays of different types are replaced. The change of the meter display here is not made by the accumulated numerical value but is made by the change effect (here, the effect using the change ball icon cI). Further, the rate of increase of the numerical value changes depending on the relationship between the color of the numerical type meter display and the color of the meter-increasing item, that is, the relationship between the type of numerical type meter display and the type of item, as in the description using FIG. To do.

In FIG. 35(14), there is one ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and the first hold icon h1 of special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1 of the hold icon display area shown in the same figure (15). Should be displayed. However, in FIG. 35(15), the green meter-up item UpIm is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h1, which makes it difficult to confirm the existence of the first hold icon h1. .. In FIG. 35(16), the green meter-up item UpIm moves to a position overlapping the red numerical meter display DR from the front side, and the first white hs1 shown in FIG. The existence of the hold icon h1 can be confirmed. The hold icon may be displayed on the near side of the meter-raising item.

The appearance of the meter-raising item here is triggered by the winning of the first special map starting port 230, but it may be triggered by the winning of the universal figure starting port accompanied by the prize ball, or accompanied by the prize ball. Regardless of whether or not it is possible to pass the game ball of the universal figure starting gate as a trigger, or to win a prize at the second special figure starting port 232 (Den Chu), or only there is a prize ball. It may be triggered by winning in the general winning opening 226, or may be triggered by entering a ball in the production outlet.

In addition, when the meter display is displayed, an item (not limited to the meter-raising item, for example, a chance-up item, for example, when a prize or a ball is thrown into the special figure starting ports 230, 232, etc., than when it is not displayed. CUI and swordsman reach item RI) are likely to appear.

In FIG. 35(17), the green meter-up item UpIm has disappeared, and the numerical display of the red numerical-type meter display DR has risen from the previous 10% to MAX. This MAX is a display showing 100%, for example. The state of the red numerical type meter display DW shown in FIG. 35(17) corresponds to an example of the sixth state.

In the meter effect shown in FIG. 35, when the numerical type meter display is in the MAX display state, as shown in FIG. 35(18), the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed so as to overlap the numerical type meter display from the front side. .. The character display of "Gekiatsu" may be a display showing that the big hit in the variation is rich or the big hit is confirmed.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which the numerical type meter display shown in FIG. 35 changes in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

FIG. 36(1) shows that the third symbol pd3 is changing at high speed, and in FIG. 36(2), there is one ball entering the first special map starting port 230, and the hold shown in FIG. 36(3). On the first stage hs1 of the icon display area, the display of the first hold icon h1 of Toku-zu 1 has started. In the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 36(3), a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 is displayed in red urging an operation on a white round icon. That is, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is a so-called button hold display mode. Further, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to prompt the operation, and in FIG. 36(4), the chance button 136 is operated.

In FIG. 36(5), the white numerical type meter display DW is changed to the red numerical type meter display DR in response to the operation of the chance button 136. On the other hand, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is such that the button image 136a disappears and only the white round icon, that is, the default display mode. Here, when the chance button 136 is actually operated, the first hold icon h1 does not change to the display mode of the prefetch notice even though the first hold icon h1 is in the button hold display mode. , The meter display has been replaced with a different type of meter display. This is an effect that gives a notice of a big hit in the variation, and in the case of a pre-reading notice that gives notice of a big hit after the next change, the first hold icon h1 may change to a display mode of the pre-reading notice. The numerical type meter display can also be used as a pre-reading notice (for example, carry-over to the next change after the MAX display).

As described above, when the meter display is displayed, the button-holding icon is more likely to be displayed when a prize or a ball enters the special figure starting ports 230, 232 or the like than when it is not displayed.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect different from the meter effect described so far.

In FIG. 37, like the meter display explained so far, the display shows a certain amount or number, but here, instead of the meter, the number of appearances of the character is used. The display using the number of appearances of this character corresponds to an example of the first meter display or an example of the fourth meter display.

In FIG. 37(1), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 ends, and the combination of the missing decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. .. In FIG. 37(2), the fixed display of the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost in the third symbol pd3 is confirmed, and the variable icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, which shows the deviation of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 37(3), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 37B is started, and the low speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. In addition, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in response to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is “when the character appears”. In FIG. 37(4), the third symbol pd3 has started high speed fluctuation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37(5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, and the background image, which used to be the townscape of the castle town until now, also disappears, below the character display such as "Chance for all". The silhouettes of the four characters are displayed in a row horizontally. In the state shown in FIG. 37(5), no character display is displayed, and it corresponds to an empty state (state where the meter is 0) in the meter display, that is, the first state or the fourth state. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 37(6), the character display cd1 of Princess Chibi appears at the right end of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the character display changes to “3 more people”. In FIG. 37(7), a grandfather character display cd2 appears at the left end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to "2 more people". In FIG. 37(8), a princess character display cd3 appears on the left side of the Chibi princess character display cd1, and the character display changes to "1 more person". The state shown in FIG. 37(6), the state shown in FIG. 37(7), and the state shown in FIG. 37(8) respectively correspond to the second state or the fifth state.

In the example shown in FIG. 37, when three people are gathered, as shown in FIG. 37(9), the character display of “failure” is displayed, all the members cannot be assembled, and the first decorative pattern shown in FIG. The display device 208L returns to the background image of the castle town, and the display of the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is resumed. Then, in FIG. 37(11), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols with the loss of "decoration 5"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. ing. In FIG. 37(12), the fixed display of the combination of the decorative symbols that are missing in the third symbol pd3 is confirmed, and the variable icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, which shows the deviation of the special figure 1.

Note that the color of the silhouette of the character is normally gray, but when the remaining one is left, the silhouette of the remaining one character may be displayed in red. In this case, the set of all four is confirmed, and the display of the red silhouette corresponds to a notice of success. The state in which all four persons gather corresponds to the full state in the meter display, that is, the third state or the sixth state. In this example in which the characters are gathered, when all four are gathered, the expectation of the big hit is very high, and it may be a big hit concentration or a level higher than the big hit concentration (for example, big hit confirmation). In addition, even if all four people do not gather, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be given to some extent without making it a “failure”, and even if only three people gather, a big hit may occur due to the fluctuation. It may be good, and there may be a big hit in the symbol variation display started after the variation.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which an error occurs during the display of the meter display.

38(1) to FIG. 38(4) are the same as FIGS. 32(1) to 32(4), and in FIG. 38(5), a plate full tank error occurs, and this is shown in FIG. An error display ER1 such as "Please remove the ball" is displayed in the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (immediately above the third symbol pd3). Due to this error display ER1, the right half or more of the empty white meter display MW displayed at the upper left of the third symbol pd3 is hidden. That is, a part of the error display ER1 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the white meter display MW from the front side. It should be noted that at least part (for example, all may be displayed) of the error display ER1 may be displayed so as to overlap with at least part (for example, all) of the white meter display MW from the front side. Further, the error display ER1 may be a display having transparency, and may be overlapped with the meter display or the like from the front side, or the overlapped portion may be seen through.

Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 38(6), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high speed variation to low velocity variation, and in the same figure (7), the left symbol temporarily stops. , The swing fluctuation has started (first stop), but a part of the error display ER1 is displayed overlapping a part of the left symbol (here, “decoration 7”) that is temporarily stopped from the front side. In addition, at least one part (for example, all may be sufficient) of the error display ER1 may be overlapped and displayed from at least one part (for example, all may be) of a decorative design from the front side. In this way, the error display ER1 is displayed with priority over the meter display, and is displayed with priority over the third symbol pd3.

Further, in FIG. 38(7), the red meter-up item UpIr is displayed so as to overlap the left pattern of the third pattern pd3 from the front side, and in FIG. 38(8), the red meter-up item UpIr is displayed. Has moved to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps with part of the red meter-up item UpIr from the front side. In FIG. 38(9), the red meter-up item UpIr should have disappeared and the meter of the white meter display MW should have risen by four scales, but the error display ER1 hides more than the right half of the white meter display MW. It is not possible to confirm how much the meter has risen because it has been discharged. However, from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 38(9), one note is increased by one scale, and four notes are output here. In addition, the accumulation condition (increased condition) of the meter is not limited to the output sound from the speaker 120, but can be notified by a light emission mode of a light emitting means such as a lamp or a frame lamp around the decorative symbol display device.

In FIG. 38(10), the fluctuation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and in FIG. 38(11), the right symbol is temporarily stopped, and swing fluctuation starts (second stop), 2 The white meter-up item UpI, which is the second meter-up item, appears so as to overlap the right pattern from the front side. This white meter-up item UpI has also moved to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side, as shown in FIG. 38(12). However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps with the part of the white meter-up item UpI from the front side. In FIG. 38(13), the white meter increase item UpI should disappear, and the meter of the white meter display MW should have increased by one scale, but since the error display ER1 still overlaps, how far the meter has increased Although it cannot be confirmed whether or not this is done, the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 38(13).

In FIG. 38(14), the white meter increase item UpI appears without the mini item appearance notice shown in FIG. 26(5), and the lord's character cd is in charge of the meter increase item UpI. In FIG. 38(15), the lord's character cd should throw the white meter rising item UpI, and the white meter rising item UpI should hit the white meter display MW and be displayed above the white meter display MW. However, since the error display ER1 overlaps, it is difficult to check the white meter-up item UpI. In FIG. 38(16), the white meter display MW should have increased by one more scale due to the white meter increase item UpI, but since the error display ER1 still overlaps, how much the meter has increased Although it cannot be confirmed, one note sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 38(16). Although not shown in the figure, the white meter display MW, a part of which is shown in FIG. 38(16), is in a full tank state, and the full tank notification sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 38(17). It is being output.

In FIG. 38 (18), at the right end of the white meter display MW in a full state, a pseudo-repeated notice item NI, which is a type of mini item, appears, and at the position of the middle symbol that continues high-speed fluctuation among the third symbols pd3. Although the character display of “GET” is displayed, the error display ER1 overlaps the character display of the pseudo-reminder item NI and the character display of “GET”, and it is difficult to recognize that the pseudo-reminder item NI has been acquired. ..

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the error display ER1 shown in FIG.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 39(19) continued from FIG. 38(18), the character display of "GET" disappears, and the pseudo-repeated notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, The second decorative symbol display device 208M is stocked. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 39(20), the white meter display MW that has been in a full tank until then changes to an empty state. The white meter display MW continues to be displayed in an empty state. In FIG. 39(21), the pseudo-repeated notice item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol which continues to change at high speed, and the pseudo-repeated notice item NI is digested. In the pseudo-announcement item NI that has moved to the position of the symbol, the error display ER1 overlaps from the front side, and it is difficult to visually recognize it. In FIG. 39 (22), the fluctuation of the middle symbol, which has continued to change at high speed with the third symbol pd3, becomes slow, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 39 (23), the pseudo continuous symbol swings (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continue”). "-"Decoration 1") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo continuous effect is started. The error display ER1 also overlaps the pseudo continuous symbol ("continuation") from the front side, and the error display ER1 is preferentially displayed over the pseudo continuous symbol.

In FIG. 39(24), the error display ER1 is still displayed, and in this example, it means that the ball removal operation has not been performed until the end. That is, when the ball removing operation is performed, the error display ER1 such as "Please remove the ball" is automatically hidden. In other words, if the error is resolved, the error display ER1 will automatically disappear.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, since the player cannot visually check the state of the meter display (for example, the storage condition), the player is concerned about the state of the meter display. In some cases, by displaying the error display ER1 over the meter display, the ball removal operation may be performed earlier. Further, since it is easy for the player to collect the meter display, it is easy for the player's line of sight to gather at all times. By displaying the error display ER1 over the meter display, the error display ER1 can be easily noticed. Also effective.

Further, in this example, a prize winning error more serious than the plate full error occurs, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 39(24) has a display size larger than the display size of the error display ER1. Then, the error display ER2 for notifying the occurrence of the prize winning error is displayed. The error display ER2 overlaps the error display ER1 from the front side in addition to the third symbol pd3, and is displayed with priority over the third symbol pd3 and the error display ER1. By superimposing another error display ER2 on the error display ER1, it may be possible to inform that a serious error has occurred. It should be noted that the error displays do not necessarily have to overlap with each other, and in some cases, the larger the error size, the better the serious error. In addition, as an example of the serious error mentioned here, an error detected by the main control unit 300 or the payout control unit 600, an error that cannot be eliminated unless a clerk is called, an error display is automatically displayed even if the error is eliminated. You can enumerate errors that are not hidden (not disappear) in. That is, all of the above-listed items may be used as the serious error. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied. Alternatively, the serious error occurs as described above in the list shown in FIG. 124 described later. That is, the most significant error is the magnetic (magnet) sensing error. On the contrary, as an example of a slight error, an error detected by the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500, an error that can be resolved by the player only, an error display is displayed when the error is resolved. You can enumerate errors that are automatically hidden (disappeared). That is, as the minor error, all of those listed above may be used. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied. Further, among the minor errors, there may be an error in which the meter display is preferentially displayed or the third symbol pd3 is preferentially displayed.

The error display in FIGS. 38 and 39 is the same as the display of various errors described in FIGS. 124 to 126 described later. In particular, the notification content described as “liquid crystal display” in the “mode” in FIG. 126, which describes the notification mode of error notification of various errors, can be replaced with the error display in FIGS. 38 and 39.

Note that in the present specification, a statement that "a certain display overlaps another display from the front side" is replaced with a description that "at least a part of a certain display overlaps at least a part of another display from the front side". All of one display may overlap all other displays from the front side, all of one display may partially overlap another display from the front side, A part may overlap all other displays from the front side, or a part of a certain display may overlap a part of another display from the front side. Further, in the present specification, the description that "a certain display overlaps another display from the front side" can be read in reverse, that is, "the other display overlaps a display from the front side".

In the above description, the meter display is of the increase type in which the display showing a certain amount or number only increases, but it may be of the increase/decrease type in which the display showing a certain amount or number is increased or decreased. Of course, it may be a reduction type in which the display of a certain amount or number is only reduced.

The meter display includes a white meter display MW, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN shown in FIG. 19 and the like, a white numerical type meter display DW and a red numerical type meter display DR shown in FIGS. Although the display using the number of appearances of the character shown in 37 has been described, the display is not limited to these, and the display may be such that the needle indicates a certain amount or number, or the display using the number of displayed figures or symbols. Good.

Further, although the red meter display MR changes from the white meter display MW, the display of the red meter display MR itself may be independently started instead of the change from the white meter display MW. On the contrary, the red meter display MR may be a meter display that is not displayed unless it changes from the white meter display MW.

In addition, the red meter display MR may change in a state where the white meter display MW is accumulated halfway, the meter of the white meter display MW may be taken over, and the display may be started in a state where the white meter display MW is accumulated halfway. Alternatively, the display of the red meter display MR itself, which has been accumulated halfway, may be independently started. In these cases, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the case where the display is started in the state of being accumulated halfway than in the case where the display is started in the empty state.

Further, in the case where the red meter display MR is partially accumulated, the final jackpot symbol may be easier to be finalized and displayed than when the white meter display MW is partially accumulated.

In the above description, it is easy to say that "... The statement is that "it is easier to win a jackpot that is more advantageous than a jackpot that is unfavorable." It can be replaced with a statement to that effect.

Although the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (ball game machine) has been described in detail above, the gaming table of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) can be used. It can also be applied to a rotating-game machine (slot machine) used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described above is a pachinko machine (1 type+1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1, 2, 3, 3 types, 1+2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot or ball) More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the reel is rotated by operating the start lever, the winning combination is internally determined by internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, a winning combination is achieved, and when a winning combination is achieved, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) in which a player is given a privilege. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are launched into the game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the enclosed balls are won in a predetermined entry area. It may be an enclosed ball type gaming table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has been awarded to the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won a prize to the game area again.

As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of gaming machines, and will be described more specifically below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 40 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 40, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium shot from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 is discharged from the game area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, ball rental, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

FIG. 41 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001, three reels (the left reel 1010, the middle reel 1011 and the right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 41) are stored, and It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, each symbol is printed on a belt-shaped member at an equal number of intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by attaching the belt-shaped member to a predetermined circular tubular frame material. .. The symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 by the player, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012, a backlight (not shown in FIG. 41) for illuminating each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each design so that the individual designs can be uniformly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012 inside the slot machine 1000. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotation direction of the symbol on the reel is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that shows the pay line 1014 that is activated. The winning line to be activated is predetermined according to the number of medals bet as the game medium. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one bet on a medal is bet, the horizontal pay line on the middle row is valid, and when two bets are placed on a medal, an upper horizontal pay line and a lower horizontal pay line are added. When 3 coins are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines to which the rightward winning line and the rightward winning line are added are valid as winning lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one bet is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right line. Five lines of the downward winning line and the rightward winning line may be valid as the winning line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp for informing that the game medal can be inserted by the player. The re-play lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (there is no need to insert medals) when a re-play, which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a production lamp.

The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted, one when the bet button 1031 is pressed, two are inserted, and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three pieces are put in. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, a game start notification is given to inform that the game can be started. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

The medal slot 1034 is a slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, and an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display device 1026 is a display device for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of paid-out medals during a bonus game) by numerical values. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination.

The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which one of a plurality of types of winning combinations has been won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively disadvantageous state.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing the medal when the inserted medal is jammed to remove the medal. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and bets that have been bet, and discharging from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for raising the game. A rendering device 1080 is arranged above the front door 1002. This effect device 1080 is provided with a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and left doors 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated in the figure) disposed behind the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and the left doors 1063b are opened horizontally outside in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed on the front surface of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side) has a structure that appears. It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device need not be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effect images and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. It may be a display device or the like. In addition, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole of the display screen is visible to the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but it may be a square flat surface. It is also possible to provide a decoration (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks odd. Further, the display screen may have a curved surface.

In the slot machine 1000 described above, as the operating means, bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., as well as the operating key unit 1090 (an example of the first operating means and the third operating means) ) And effect button 1091 (an example of a second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, the display panel 1070 displaying the title of the device and the like can project toward the front side. A light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 41 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can be pushed in and functions as an operating unit (button) like the transmitting unit 191, and an example of the operating unit (for example, the first unit). It corresponds to one example of one operation means) and also corresponds to an example of movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
A gaming machine provided with a display means [for example, only a first decorative symbol display device 208L or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N],
The display means includes a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 and the like, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, a white numerical type meter display DW shown in FIGS. Numerical meter display DR, display using the number of appearances of characters shown in FIG. 37, etc.],
One of the plurality of kinds of meter displays is a first meter display [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 or the like, a left meter display shown in FIG. 31(4) to FIG. 32(4) to (18), or the white numeric type meter display DW] shown in FIGS. 35 and 36.
One of the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 19 or the like, a right meter display shown in FIG. 31(5) to FIG. 32(5) to FIG. 15(15), the meter display DR on the red side shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, or the display using the number of appearances of the character shown in FIG. 37]. ,
The first meter display is a display that may change from a first state [for example, an empty state (state where the meter is 0)] to a third state [for example, a full state],
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from a fourth state [for example, an empty state (state where the meter is 0)] to a sixth state [for example, a full state],
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state than when the first meter display remains in the first state and does not change to the third state [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 25 or the example shown in FIG. 31], it is easier to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state than when the fourth meter display remains in the fourth state and does not change to the sixth state [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 or the example shown in FIG. 32], the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Here, the first meter display may be an analog type meter display or a digital type meter display. The fourth meter display may be an analog meter display or a digital meter display. Further, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be meter displays having different display modes. Further, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may have a period in which they are simultaneously displayed. That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be displays that are always displayed at the same time, or may be displays that may be displayed at the same time. Alternatively, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be separately displayed without the period.

The display unit may be a unit that always displays a plurality of types of meter displays. Further, the first meter display may be a display that always changes from the first state to the third state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display that always changes from the fourth state to the sixth state.

Also,
``The fourth meter display displayed in the fourth state is the sixth meter display rather than the probability that the first meter display displayed in the first state changes to the third state. Is configured to have a higher probability of changing to the state of
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the one-time state change amount in the fourth meter display may be larger than the one-time state change amount in the first meter display.

Further, when the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, than when the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state. In the end, the jackpot pattern may be easily displayed in a finalized manner.

Also,
“The first meter display is a display that is present when the display is started in the first state [for example, the case of FIG. 16(4)],
The fourth meter display is a display obtained by changing the first meter display in the first state [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16(9)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

That is, the fourth meter display is a display that may be started in the fourth state, from the first meter display of the first state to the fourth state of the fourth state. No. 1 may be displayed, or the first meter display in the first state may be changed to the fourth meter display in the fifth state.

In addition, there is no case where the first meter display in the third state changes to the fourth meter display, but the first meter display in the second state changes to the fourth meter display. If you do, you may.

The first meter display may be a display that is always started in the first state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display which is always started in the fourth state. Further, when changing from the first meter display to the fourth meter display, it is sure to change from the first meter display in the first state to the fourth meter display in the fourth state. Alternatively, the first meter display in the first state may be changed to the fourth meter display in the fifth state without fail.

Also,
"The fourth effect may be started in the state where the first meter display in the first state is displayed,
The fourth effect is an effect of changing the first meter display to the fourth meter display [for example, a meter using the changing ball icon cI shown in FIGS. 16(6) to 16(8)). Change production],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth effect may be a so-called rank-up effect. More specifically, it may be an operation means effect (button effect), and the first meter display may be changed to the fourth meter display in response to an operation of the operation means.

In addition, the fourth effect may be necessarily started in a state where the first meter display in the first state is displayed.

Here, further, the first meter display is a display that is terminated by the fourth effect, and the fourth meter display is a display that is started by the fourth effect. Good. That is, the first meter display disappears, and the display of the fourth meter display is started. For example, the first effect is started in a state where the first meter display in the first state is displayed, and when the first effect ends, the first meter display disappears and the first meter display disappears. The display of the four meter display may be started.

Also,
"The fourth effect is an effect using a fourth character,
When the fourth character is displayed over a plurality of consecutive variable display of decorative symbols by the display means [for example, FIG. 16(1) and FIG. 16(2), FIG. ] Is a certain character [for example, the lord's character cd],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the “variable display of the decorative pattern” means that the variable display of the decorative pattern is being displayed, and includes the display of the variable display when the variable display is started again with the stop display interposed. Further, it is possible to regard one change from the start of variable display to the fixed display. Further, "to straddle" means to interpose a period (variation stop period) of stop display of a decorative pattern. Further, the fourth character may be a character that is continuously displayed while the variable display of the decorative pattern is being displayed, or may be a character that disappears once in the middle. Further, during the display of the stop display of the decorative pattern, it may be a character that is continuously displayed, a character that disappears once in the middle, or it may continue to disappear while the stop display is displayed. It may be an existing character.

The fourth character may be a character that is always displayed over continuous variable display of the decorative symbols.

Also,
“The first meter display may be displayed while the display of the decorative pattern is stopped by the display means [for example, FIG. 20(1) or FIG. 20(8) to FIG. ) White meter display in )],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first meter display may be a display that may be started during the display of the stop display of the decorative pattern, or may be displayed during the display of the variable display of the decorative pattern. The display may be continued until the stop display is displayed.

The first meter display may be a display that is always displayed during the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Here, further, the first meter display is a display that may change the state during the display of the variable display of the decorative pattern by the display means, and the fourth meter display is the display of the decorative pattern by the display means. The display may change during the display of the variable display. Incidentally, the first meter display may be a display that always changes state during display of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the fourth meter display is always displayed during display of the variable display of the decorative pattern. It may be a display whose state changes.

Further, the fourth meter display is a display which may be started during the display of the variable display of the decorative pattern by the display means, and the fourth meter display is a display of the decorative pattern by the display means. When the display is started during the display of the variable display, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished, the big hit symbol may be more likely to be stopped and displayed than the lost symbol. That is, in the fourth meter display, the display is started during the display of the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, than in the display of the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the lost design is stopped. Cheap. The fourth meter display may be a display that is always started during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol when the display is started.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern a plurality of times,
The variable display of one decorative pattern among the plurality of variable display of decorative patterns is the variable display of the first decorative pattern [for example, the variable display stopped and displayed in FIG. 20(1)],
The variable display of one decorative pattern among the multiple variable display of decorative patterns is the variable display of the second decorative pattern [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 20(3) to 20(9)],
The variable display of one decorative pattern among the multiple variable display of decorative patterns is the variable display of the fourth decorative pattern [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 20(10) to 21(21)],
The variable display of one decorative pattern among the multiple variable display of decorative patterns is a variable display of the fifth decorative pattern [for example, variable display of FIGS. 21(22) to 22(42)],
The variable display of the first decorative pattern and the variable display of the second decorative pattern are continuous variable display of decorative patterns,
The first meter display is in a different state between the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the variable display of the second decorative symbol [for example, it is an empty state at the timing of FIG. 20(1). On the other hand, if the meter rises at the timing of FIG. 20(7)]
The variable display of the fourth decorative pattern and the variable display of the fifth decorative pattern are continuous variable display of decorative patterns,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol [for example, it is empty at the timing of FIG. 21 (19). In contrast, the meter is rising at the timing of FIG. 21 (29)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, after the variable display of the first decorative pattern is finished, the variable display of the second decorative pattern is started, and after the variable display of the second decorative pattern is finished, the fourth decorative pattern The variable display is started, and after the variable display of the fourth decorative design is finished, the variable display of the fifth decorative design is started and the variable display of the fifth decorative design is finished, and then the sixth display. The variable display of the decorative pattern may be started. In this case, when the variable display of the fifth decorative pattern ends, the big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed, or when the variable display of the sixth decorative symbol ends, the big hit symbol stops. It may be displayed.

Incidentally, the first meter display may be a display in which the state is always different between the variable display of the first decorative design and the variable display of the second decorative design, and the fourth meter display is, The variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol may be in different states.

Also,
“The fourth meter display is a display which is started to be displayed in the fourth state [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16(9) or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

As described above, the fourth state may be an empty state.

By doing so, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation for the change to the sixth state (for example, full meter) from the time when the meter appears or changes.

The fourth meter display may be a display that may be started in the fourth state, or may be a display that is always started in the fourth state. ..

Also,
[The fourth meter display is from the fourth state [for example, an empty state shown in FIG. 16(9)] to a fifth state [for example, a state where three scales shown in FIG. 16(14) are accumulated]. The display may change to
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 16(18)],
The fourth meter display is a display that may be started in the fourth state [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16(9) or the like],
The fourth meter display is a display that may be started in the fifth state,
The fourth meter display, than when the display is started in the fourth state, when the display is started in the fifth state, final jackpot symbol is likely to be finalized display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth meter display is more likely to change to the sixth state when the display is started in the fifth state than when the display is started in the fourth state. It may be an aspect.

Further, the fourth meter display may be a display that may not be started in the fifth state, or may be a display that may be started in the fifth state. Good.

Further, the fifth state may be a state that represents a fifth amount or number, the fifth amount or number of the fourth amount or number and the sixth amount or number It may be an amount or a number in between.

Note that the fourth meter display may be a display that is always started in the fourth state, or may be a display that always changes from the fourth state to a fifth state, Further, it may be a display that always changes from the fifth state to the sixth state. Alternatively, the fourth meter display may be a display whose display is always started in the fifth state, or may be a display which always changes from the fifth state to the sixth state. ..

Also,
“The first meter display is from the first state [for example, an empty state shown in FIG. 25(4)] to a second state [for example, a state in which one scale shown in FIG. 25(9) is accumulated]. The display may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 25(12)],
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the first state [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 25(4) or the like],
The first meter display is a display that may be started in the second state [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 34(4)],
The first meter display, than when the display is started in the first state, when the display is started in the second state, final jackpot symbol is likely to be finalized display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first meter display is more likely to change to the third state when the display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state. It may be an aspect.

Further, the first meter display may be a display that may not be started in the third state, or may be a display that may be started in the third state. Good.

Further, the second state may be a state representing a second amount or number, the second amount or number of the first amount or number and the third amount or number of It may be an amount or a number in between.

The first meter display may be a display that is always started in the first state, or may be a display that always changes from the first state to the second state, Further, it may be a display that always changes from the second state to the third state. Alternatively, the first meter display may be a display whose display is always started in the second state, or may be a display which always changes from the second state to the third state. ..

Also,
“The first meter display is from the first state [for example, an empty state shown in FIG. 25(4)] to a second state [for example, a state in which one scale shown in FIG. 25(9) is accumulated]. The display may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 25(12)],
The fourth meter display changes from the fourth state [for example, an empty state shown in FIG. 16(9)] to a fifth state [for example, a state in which three scales shown in FIG. 16(14) are accumulated]. It is a display that may change,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 16(18)],
Compared to the case where the first meter display is in the second state, the case where the fourth meter display is in the fifth state is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed as a jackpot symbol.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first meter display may be a display that may be started in the first state, and the first meter display may be displayed in the second state. May be displayed, the fourth meter display may be a display that may be started in the fourth state, the fourth meter display is The display may be started in the fifth state.

Further, the case where the display of the fourth meter display is started in the fifth state is finally a big hit, as compared with the case where the display of the first meter display is started in the second state. The symbols may be easily displayed in a fixed manner.

Here, the display start patterns of the first meter display are summarized. The first meter display is a display that is started in the first state and may change to the second state, the display is started in the first state, and the second state It is a display that may change to the third state via, and a display that may start in the first state and may change to the third state, and that is displayed in the second state. Is a display that may be changed to the third state, the display is started in the first state, the fourth state, the fifth state, and the sixth state. Display that may change to the fourth state, display may start in the fourth state, display may change to the fifth state, display may start in the fourth state, Is a display that may change to a state of, the display is started in the fourth state, and may change to the sixth state through the fifth state, and the fifth state The display is started at and the display may change to the sixth state. The same applies to the display start pattern of the fourth meter display.

The display may not be started in the fourth state and changed to the first state. Further, the display may be started in the second state and may not be changed to the first state.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
In the first meter display, the first icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter-up item UpIb shown in FIG. 19(c)] is displayed a first number of times [for example, three times], thereby It is a display that changes from the first state to the third state,
In the fourth meter display, by displaying the first icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter-up item UpIb shown in FIG. 19(i)] a fourth number of times [for example, once], It is a display that changes from a fourth state to the sixth state,
The fourth number is a number less than the first number,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

That is, the fact that the state changes with a small number of times means that there is a large amount of change per time.

Also,
“The first meter display is a display that may be started by a first effect [for example, an effect by the mini game shown in FIG. 24],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first effect may be the acquisition effect of the first meter display.

The first meter display may be a display that is always started by the first effect.

Also,
“The display means can display a hold icon [eg, the first hold icon h1, the second hold icon h2, etc.] according to the number of hold balls in the hold display area [eg, hold frame UI′ shown in FIG. 26]. Means,
The first meter display is a display in which a part or all overlaps with the hold display area,
The fourth meter display is a display in which a part or all overlaps with the reserved display area,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display area may be an icon display area. Further, for example, the first meter display is a display that is displayed integrally with the hold display area, and the fourth meter display is also a display that is displayed integrally with the hold display area. It may be.

The display means may be means for always displaying a hold icon corresponding to the number of hold balls in the hold display area. The display means may be means for always displaying the hold icon in the hold display area when displaying the hold icon.

Also,
“One of the plurality of types of meter displays is a seventh meter display [for example, a rainbow meter display MN shown in FIGS. 19(m) and (n)],
When the seventh meter display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

That is, when the seventh meter display is displayed, the big hit may be rich. Further, when the seventh meter display changes from the seventh state [for example, empty state] to the ninth state [for example, full state], even if the jackpot symbol is finally definitely displayed, Good. Further, the seventh meter display may be a display that always changes from the seventh state to the ninth state.

When the first meter display changes to the third state, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display means when the first meter display changes to the third state In the case where the big hit symbol is definitely displayed and the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state, it is displayed on the display means when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. In the variable display of the decorative pattern, the jackpot pattern may be finally definitely displayed.

When the seventh meter display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be finally definitely displayed.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display,
The notice display is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state [for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 26],
The notice display is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state [for example, super reach effect shown in FIG. 17].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, as the above-mentioned notice display, a pseudo continuous production display, a display related to operation means, a notice display about a big hit (a normal notice display or a pre-read notice display), a notice display about a production (for example, super reach production), etc. are listed. You can That is, the notice display may be all of the ones listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a pseudo continuous effect display, and the pseudo continuous effect display may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state. The pseudo continuous effect display may be a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. Here, the pseudo continuous effect display may be a display which is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the pseudo continuous effect display is the fourth meter. It may be a display that is always started when the display changes to the sixth state.

Note that the advance notice display may be a display that is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the advance notice display may be the fourth meter display with the sixth state. The display may be such that the display is always started when the state changes.

Here, again, the operating means is provided at a position where the player can operate, the display means is a means capable of displaying an operating means related display, and the operating means related display is a display related to the operating means. The operation means-related display is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means-related display is the fourth meter display. May be a display which may be started when is changed to the sixth state. The display related to the operating means may be a display imitating the operating means, or a display prompting to operate the operating means (operation promoting display), or operation of the operating means. It may be a display relating to the effective period (more specifically, a display of the remaining period of the operation effective period (remaining period display)) or a display reminiscent of the operating means, or these displays. Or a display including at least one of these displays. Further, the operation means-related display may be a display which is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means-related display is the fourth meter display. May be a display which is always started when is changed to the sixth state.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a normal notice display, and the normal notice display is a variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display means when the display of the normal notice display is started. In the above, the normal notice display is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the normal notice display is the first notice display. The display may start when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. Here, the normal notice display may be, for example, a super reach effect display. Further, the normal notice display may be a display which is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the normal notice display is the fourth meter display. The display may be such that the display is always started when changing to the sixth state.

Also,
“The first state in the first meter display is a state representing a first amount or number [for example, an empty state or vice versa, a full state],
The third state in the first meter display is a state representing a third quantity or number [for example, a full state or vice versa, an empty state],
The fourth state in the fourth meter display is a state that represents a fourth quantity or number [for example, an empty state or vice versa, a full state],
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a state indicating a sixth quantity or number [eg, a full state or vice versa, an empty state],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first amount or number and the third amount or number are different amounts or numbers, and the fourth amount or number and the sixth amount or number are different amounts or numbers. May be.

Further, the third amount or number is less than the first amount or number, or the sixth amount or number is less than the fourth amount or number, or It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is a case where the first meter display decreases, and the fourth meter display is the The case of changing from the fourth state to the sixth state is a case where the fourth meter display decreases.

Further, the third amount or number is more than the first amount or number is an amount or number, the sixth amount or number is more than the fourth amount or number or It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is a case where the first meter display increases, and the fourth meter display is the The case of changing from the fourth state to the sixth state is a case where the fourth meter display increases.

Further, the first state is a full state, the third state is an empty state, the fourth state is a full state, the sixth state is an empty state. Or, on the contrary, the first state is an empty state, the third state is a full state, the fourth state is an empty state, the sixth state The state may be full.

Furthermore, when the first meter display changes from the fourth state [for example, the meter frame is red and empty] to the sixth state [for example, the meter frame is red and full] Yes, in the case where the fourth meter display changes from the first state [for example, the meter frame is white and empty] to the third state [for example, the meter frame is white and full] is there.

Also,
"The first meter display and the fourth meter display are partially [for example, only the meter frame mf] or different in all colors [for example, white and red, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display are distinguished by the different colors. Note that the colors may be different continuously. Alternatively, the colors may be different only for a certain period. That is, the color may change, as long as it is different between the first state and the fourth state, or different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, it suffices if the second state and the fifth state described later are different. Further, it is sufficient that the colors when the display is started are different from each other. Alternatively, the colors when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

Further, the first meter display includes a frame display and an increase/decrease display that increases/decreases within the frame display, and the fourth meter display includes a frame display and increases/decreases within the frame display. The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be different only in the color of the frame display, or only the color of the increase/decrease display may be different. The colors of both the frame display and the increase/decrease display may be different. The frame display may be circular or rectangular, and the shape is not limited.

Note that the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be partially different in color.

Also,
"The first meter display and the fourth meter display have different sizes,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by different sizes (display sizes). The sizes may be continuously different. Alternatively, the sizes may be different only within a certain period. That is, the size may be changed, and may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or may be different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, it suffices if the second state and the fifth state described later are different. Further, it is sufficient that the sizes when the display is started are different from each other. Alternatively, the sizes when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

Also,
[Display positions of the first meter display and the fourth meter display are different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by different display positions. The display position may be continuously different. Alternatively, the display position may be different only within a certain period. That is, the display position may change, and may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or may be different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, it suffices if the second state and the fifth state described later are different. Further, the display positions at the time when the display is started may be different from each other. Alternatively, the display positions when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

The "meter display" in the above description may be replaced with "display showing a certain amount or number", "first meter display" is "first display", and "fourth meter display" is " It may be replaced with "fourth display".

The following is a supplementary description including the ones described so far.

(Appendix 1)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
One of the plurality of types of meter display is a first meter display,
One of the plurality of types of meter display is a fourth meter display,
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of states,
One of the states of the plurality of types in the first meter display is a first state,
One of the states of the plurality of types in the first meter display is a third state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One of the states of the plurality of types in the fourth meter display is a fourth state,
One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a sixth state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state,
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, than when the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state. , The expectation of a big hit is high,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state. , Expectation of big hit is high,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
In the game table described in Appendix 1,
The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is more than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state. high,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The gaming machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative design,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative design is stopped,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
The fourth meter display is a display started in the fourth state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
One of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the first state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the second state,
The first meter display has a higher expectation of a big hit when the display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
Of the plurality of types of display, one display is the first icon,
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state by displaying the first icon the first number of times,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the first icon is displayed a second number of times, changing from the fourth state to the sixth state,
The second number is a number less than the first number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
One of the plurality of displays is a big hit display,
The third state in the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the third state is displayed,
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the big hit display is displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the sixth state is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 7,
The second state of the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the second state is displayed,
The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the fifth state is displayed,
When the fifth state is displayed rather than the second state, the jackpot display is more likely to be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a pseudo-relational effect,
The pseudo-announcement is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The pseudo-announcement is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 9,
One display of the plurality of types of display is an operation promotion display of the operation means,
The operation prompting display is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The operation prompting display is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 10,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects,
One of the multiple types of effects is a certain effect,
The certain effect is an effect in which the big hit display is likely to be displayed in the variation of the decorative pattern in which the certain effect is displayed,
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state,
A game table characterized by that.

It should be noted that what is described as a variable display of a decorative pattern above may be a variable display of a design (more specifically, a special drawing), and a description that is displayed as a stop display of a decorative pattern means that the design (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

Further, in the above, "may be" may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", etc. It may be replaced with "always do ○○".

Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of each of the embodiments, the examples, the modified examples, the various examples, and the supplementary notes described above, the constituent requirements of the other embodiments, the examples, and the It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, additional notes, and the like. That is, as long as there is no factor that hinders application, constituent elements included only in the description of the embodiment, the example, the modification, the various examples, the supplementary notes, etc. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, and supplementary notes, it is established as one cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 128, another game table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) applicable to the present invention will be described in detail. 42 to 128 are basically used only in the description with reference to FIGS. 42 to 128, and even if the duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIG. In the description using FIG. 128, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 42 to 128 are given priority.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 42. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage tray door 108, and a launch. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store. A speaker 120 (a low-pitched speaker that outputs bass) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, it is in an electrically connected state (the main body 104 and the outer frame 102). Is provided with a pair of floating connectors, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are in a connected state), and a state in which sound can be output from the speaker 120 is set. Become.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertically rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A store clerk of the store (gaming store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and to be opened/closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game shop can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (high-pitched speaker that outputs high sound) and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Has been. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, a device using an LED as a light source is also called a lamp, and a light emitting device such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube may be called a lamp, and a device emitting light is an example of a light emitting means. Equivalent to.

The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pressing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage dish which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage dish opened. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 to be launched into the game area 124, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 44) by the player's operation, and an opportunity button 136 built in the opportunity button 136. A chance button lamp 138 for emitting a light, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit. A return operation button 142 and a ball lending display section (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is filled with a game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided. The operation key unit 137 is provided with up and down keys, such as an up key and a down key, and left and right keys, such as a left key and a right key, as a cross key, and an enter key at the center of the cross key. There is. A cancel key is also arranged below the cross key on the right side. Note that the pachinko machine 100 does not include the door 108 with a ball storage dish, and the front frame door 106 has an upper dish 126, a lower dish 128, a ball removal button 130, a ball ejection lever 132, a ball firing handle 134, a chance button 136, a chance button. All or a part of the lamp 138, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball lending display section, the lower plate full tank detection sensor, and the operation key unit 137 may be provided.

The front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown), and the front frame door 106 (which may include the ball storage tray door 108) is open to the main body 104. Also, if the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, the rendering means (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122, and the chance) provided in the front frame door 106. Button lamp 138. Production by the production movable body when the front frame door 106 is provided), display on the ball lending display section, chance button 136, ball lending operation button 140, return operation button 142 and The operation key unit 137 is operated and the lower tray full tank detection sensor can be operated.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the power supply board case 184 accommodating the power supply board 182 configuring the power supply control unit 660 described later is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102, the front frame door 106 (with a ball storage tray). The door 108 may be included), and the game board 200 is configured such that a power supply voltage is supplied from the main body 104.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. This launching device 110 sends a game ball to the game area 124 of the game board at every elapse of a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the player continuously operates the ball firing handle 134. It is fired toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means. The ball firing handle 134 is a firing stop switch (not shown) that invalidates the firing (emission) of the game ball accompanying the operation of the ball firing handle 134, and that the player touches the ball firing handle 134. And a touch sensor capable of detecting. It should be noted that a right hit button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 in the operated state may be provided. Further, when the touch sensor detects that the ball firing handle 134 is in the operated state from the non-operated state during the display of the demo screen, a dedicated effect may be performed. .. For example, the effect display by the display unit, the effect sound by the sound output unit, the light emission effect by various decorative LEDs and the light guide plate, and the effect movable body (provided on the game board or the frame) can be mentioned. Rendering may be performed by four types of rendering means, or may be performed by one or more types of rendering means. Further, even if the same type of effect means, there may be an effect means for performing the exclusive effect and an effect means for not performing the exclusive effect. (For example, the production movable body of the frame performs a dedicated production, but the production movable body of the game board does not perform a dedicated production, or the production movable body A of the game board performs a dedicated production, but the production movable body B of the game board. There is no special effect, etc. This example can be applied to other effect means.)
The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is omitted in FIG. 42, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

43 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 42 as viewed from the back side.

A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150, which has an opening opening upward, on the upper rear surface of the main body 104 of the pachinko machine 100. And a tank rail 154 for guiding a ball falling through a communication hole formed at the bottom of the container to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in rear view.

The payout device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and inside thereof, a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) are provided. The dispensing device 152 is provided in the main body 104, is detachable from the main body 104, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined amount. Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a game value (gaming ball) of an amount according to the grant condition is granted (paid out) to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 which constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 45) for performing control processing of the whole game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 400 (see FIG. 45) that performs the control process related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board 400. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 45) that performs control processing relating to effects, and a payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to paying out game balls ( 45) and a payout board case 172 accommodating a payout board 170 having an error canceling switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game shop clerk, and a launch control unit 630 (FIG. 45) for performing control processing relating to launching a game ball. (See FIG. 45) and a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 45) that supplies power to various electric amusement machines, and a power switch that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk. 178 and a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and signals of the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. A CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving is provided. The main board case 158 containing the main board 156, the first sub-board case 162 containing the first sub-board 160, and the second sub-board case 166 containing the second sub-board 164 are the game board 200. A power supply provided on the back surface of the power supply including a payout board case 172 containing a payout board 170 equipped with an error release switch 168, a launch board case 176 containing a launch board 174, a power switch 178 and a RAM clear switch 180. A power supply board case 184 for housing the board 182 and a CR interface section 186 are provided in the main body 104.

FIG. 44 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the approximate center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

The public figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is a design representing the design displayed on the first special design display device 212 or the second special design display device 214 in a form that enhances the effect. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of a predetermined first variable game (a detailed figure variable game which will be described later in detail) that is being held, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of variable figure games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

The 1st special figure reservation lamp 218 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 220 are the lamps for showing the number of the predetermined 2nd fluctuation game which has been reserved (details fluctuation game which details are mentioned later), this execution In the form, it is possible to suspend the special figure variation game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight if the first special figure and the second special figure are combined). The term "hold" here means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on start information described later.

The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying means) for making a notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability medium lamp 222 is configured to notify the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter not to notify the current symbol control state. There is. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but as the symbol control state here, it may be any of the normal state, the time saving state (electric power support state), and the probability variation state, and the state with the special symbol probability variation and It may be one of the states in which there is no special figure probability change.

It should be noted that in the present specification, description will be made using a word that refers to a state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) called a control state, but the term "control state" includes a concept of a so-called game state.

In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the effect device 206. ing.

In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the entry into the general winning openings 226 (in the general winning openings 226). When the prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 43 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 42 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player may be referred to as a "prize ball" and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental" as a consideration for a prize, and the "prize ball" and the "ball rental" are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 43 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls and the upper plate is used. Along with discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of itself does not change.

In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is arranged below the first special figure starting port 230. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (den Chu). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning the prize in the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the closed state of the pair of blade members 2321 is an opening/closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and stops the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times to the second special figure starting port 232. The ball can be entered (the prize winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is the state where the winning is easy. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball). It is a variable starting area in which the easiness of entering a game ball is variable and changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. With the pair of blade members 2321 open, of the game balls that have entered the game region 124, the second special region that is the variable starting region is more than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230, which is the fixed starting region. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or less than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In addition, although two of the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are provided in the present embodiment, three starting ports may be provided. Here, when there are three starting ports, two first special figure starting ports may be provided and one second special figure starting port may be provided, and conversely, there is one first special figure starting port. It may be provided and two second special figure starting ports may be provided. Further, when there is only one special figure display device, three starting ports may be configured to correspond to the same special figure display device. Further, four or more starting ports may be provided.

In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning port 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening with a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which the game ball can enter the variable winning opening more easily than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state in the variable winning port 234 of this embodiment is such that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning port 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player side until the door member 2341 becomes substantially vertical to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning a prize port 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly closed to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which it is completely closed. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 44 as long as the gaming ball passes or enters to win the gaming ball. When the special figure variation game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. Although only one variable winning port is provided in this embodiment, two variable winning ports may be provided. Here, when two variable winning openings are provided, while one of the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening is open, the other variable winning opening is always closed. However, both variable winning openings may be opened in some cases. Also, three or more variable winning openings may be provided.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

The balls contained in the upper plate 126 are supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the launch rod 146 and launch mallet 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or a starting opening. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or simply passing through universal figure starting port 228. To reach. An out sensor may be provided on the game board. The out sensor is a game ball that has passed the sensor of the winning opening (general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234), a game that has passed the sensor of the starting opening (first special drawing starting opening 230, second special opening 232). It is a sensor configured to be able to detect a ball and a game ball that has entered the outlet. The sensor may be configured to be able to detect only a part of the winning opening, the starting opening, and the out opening.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. .. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a game nail 238 or the like, and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and includes an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The production movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 to be visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portion of the holes in the lattice may be covered with a semitransparent lens body, and the rear The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes of the lattice is completely closed (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 is completely invisible. Good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 42, the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect movable member 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 44 correspond to the effect means, and among them, the decorative pattern display device 208. Corresponds to an example of the decorative pattern display means.

Further, on the game board 200, a specification sticker 290 showing the specifications of the game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

Next, the circuit configuration of the controller of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central portion of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 for controlling, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main sub-control unit according to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300. In addition, a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. There is.

First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, the number of times, etc., a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing, a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (two counters are built in this circuit). It is equipped with. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value within a range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each of the starting port, the winning port, and the variable winning port, and a lower plate full tank sensor. However, a sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 in the basic circuit 302, the random value generation circuit 318, and the like, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special figure display device 212 or the first special symbol display device 212. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the 2 special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the universal figure display device 210, and various status display sections 328 (for example, A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc., and a predetermined movable member, for example, an ordinary electric accessory. For controlling various solenoids 332 including a driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, a driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning a prize port 234 as a special electric accessory, and the like. The driving circuit 334 is connected to the driving circuit 334. Although the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are separately provided in this example, the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the value storage register. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special figure starting port 232, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is similarly set. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

Furthermore, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured to be unable to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300 from the first sub control unit 400. doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to send a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured to be unable to send a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times, and the like. The serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be included in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game underframe lamp 452. Then, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, and the like. The sensor circuit 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 is provided with various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the shielding device 246, the production movable body 224, and the like, and a button sensor 426 that detects pressing of various buttons forming the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137. The detection signal is output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time and the number of times, and a CPU 504. VDP (video display processor) 516 which reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the RAM 506 and generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 to display the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. And are equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is connected to a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 paid out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls indicating that the prize balls have been paid out, and paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. Ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout controller 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 has opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has opened, and the like. When they are open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies the balls from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110, based on the control signal that indicates the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to predetermined components (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 fires the main control unit 300 and the second sub control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 46A to 46D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described.

The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting mouth sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the ball enters the special opening 2 starting opening 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor has detected that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variation display of special figure 1" (special figure Fluctuating game). Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure fluctuation game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of variation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the variation time determined before the start of variation of the special figure 2 When, passes, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of special figure. The variable display of this special map may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

FIG. 46(a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. In FIG. 46(a), nine types of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing I" are shown. In FIG. 46(a), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“special figure A” to “special figure G”) are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special figure. "Special map A" is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, 15R probable big hit pattern that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special map B" is a 15R jackpot pattern. So, while 5 out of 15 rounds can be expected to win coins in the remaining rounds, it cannot be expected to win out balls in the remaining rounds. There is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) design that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special drawing D" is a 15R jackpot design, 8 out of 15 rounds. You can expect to win balls in one round, but you cannot expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB. You can expect to win balls in the rounds, but you can't expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 4R-RUB, "Special Figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot design, and "Special Figure G" is a 2R jackpot. It is a 2R certainty variation big hit symbol that is a latent probability variation or hidden probability variation that cannot be expected to be obtained in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that is produced by the player in such a manner as to make it difficult for the player to specify how long a round in which a win can be expected at the start of a big hit continues. It is a big hit that creates a form that encourages the player whether or not the round in which the winning of balls can be expected to continue will be continued when it becomes the eye or the ninth round).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not to be a special jackpot is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the regular jackpot and the probability jackpot is the difference in the probability of winning the jackpot in the next special figure variation game (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot). Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state with a low probability is special figure. This is called a low probability state. In addition, there is a case where the game is transferred to a time saving state (electric support state) after the big hit game is over. Here, the electric support state is a predetermined advantage that the player is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. The state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure (hereinafter, may be referred to as “probable probability variation”), and the state that is not a short period of time is referred to as low probability state of universal figure. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the "electric power support state" is a state where the general map is concerned, and the "time saving state" is a state where the special map is concerned or a state where the general map and the special figure are concerned. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric power support state and the universal figure high probability state. It is easier to win the universal figure variation game in the universal figure high probability state than in the universal figure low probability state (normal figure probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the universal figure fluctuation game is 1/100 in the universal figure low probability state (non-electric support state), while it increases to 99/100 in the universal figure high probability state (electric support state). Also, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the non-electric power support state (general figure variation short). For example, in the non-electric power support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric power support state. Further, in the electric power support state, the opening time in one time opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric power support state (electrical chewing open period extension). For example, in the non-electrically-supported state, the 0.5-second power-chu open period is extended to 2 seconds in the electrically-supported state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electrically supported state than in the non-electrically supported state (increase in the number of times of opening the electrically operated chew). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electrically supported state for each winning of the universal figure starting port 228 opens twice in the electrically supported state (2 seconds open and 1 second closed and 2 seconds again). Open). Due to the extension of the electric-chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric-chew opening, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric power support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, particularly in a big hit game, if a game ball is picked up by an electric chu with a small number of prize balls, and if the number of game balls to the variable winning port (attacker) 234 is reduced, the player may be disadvantaged. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric power support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure probabilistic change, the general figure short cut, the extension of the electric chew open period, and the increase of the number of the electric chew open are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage is high, and the player may be in the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric chew opening is performed to increase the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electrically-supported state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electrically-supported state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between the difficult winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and the easy winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in the easy winning state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed thereafter, until the next big hit game is started, the electric power support state (universal figure high probability state) ) Is maintained, and "Special map F" is stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed after that, the special support variable game is maintained for 100 times while the electric support state is maintained, and the 101st non-powered game is performed. Transition to support state (universal figure low probability state). On the other hand, when the big hit without the electric support (“special figure G”) is won, the electric support state does not shift after the big hit game ends.

In this way, in this embodiment, when "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when "special map F" is stopped and displayed, after the jackpot game is over, the control state becomes the special map low probability general figure high probability state. Further, when the "special map G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure low probability state after the jackpot game is over.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hitting game, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state shifts. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the end of the small hit game. "Special drawing H" shown in FIG. 46(a) is a small hitting design. In the present embodiment, the opening/closing mode (the number of times of opening and closing and the opening time) of the variable winning a prize port 234 in the small hit game and the opening/closing mode of the variable winning a prize port 234 in the big hit game to which the special character G is stopped and displayed (open) The number of times of opening and the time of opening are substantially the same, but they may be different, and for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the time of opening may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. “Special drawing I” is a lost design.

FIG. 46(b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 46(b), six types of special maps, “special map a” to “special map f”, are shown. Of these, five types of special maps are jackpot patterns (“special map a” to “special map”). Fig. e"). "Special drawing a" is a 15R big hit design, 15R probability variation big hit design that can expect to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "special drawing b" is a 15R big hit design, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to win balls in all of the rounds, and "Special Drawing c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and is expected to win balls in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that you can't expect to win out in the remaining rounds, and the "special map d" is a 15R jackpot design, and you can expect to win out in four of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a substantial 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a ball, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot design.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. “Special drawing f” is a lost design.

FIG. 46(c) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first starting opening sensor detects that a ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230 or the special opening 2 starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, or the special opening 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting orifice sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting orifice 232. In the pattern display area, "decoration 1"→"decoration 2"→"decoration 3"→... "decoration 9"→"decoration 10"→"decoration 1"→... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying substantially 5R probability variation big hit ("special drawing B"), 5R normal big hit ("special drawing F"), 2R normal big hit ("special drawing e"), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration" 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" A combination of ornamental patterns in which three ornamental patterns with the same numbers are arranged (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 1-decoration 1" Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop decoration "7". Furthermore, when notifying 15R-RUB, substance 8R-RUB, and substance 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols of the same number, and the middle symbol display area 208b is like a lord. A combination of decorative patterns that are decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 1-donor-decoration 1" or "decoration 4-donor-decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying a hidden probability change (“special map G”) that is a big hit of 2R or a small hit (“special map H”), “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying a lost symbol such as "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described above is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, disperse). Stop the display).

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed by the control of the first sub control unit 400.

FIG. 46(d) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a universal figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public symbol B" which is a deviating symbol. On the basis of the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal figure display device 210 causes all seven segments to light up and one segment in the center to light up. Repeated lighting "Public variable display" (Public variable game) is performed. Then, after the change time elapses, either one of the symbols "Public symbol A" which is a hit symbol and "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 46(d), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of the "variable display of the universal figure" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the universal figure may be referred to as the variable display of the universal figure.

Next, the main controller power-on process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 47(a) is a flowchart of the main controller power-on process, FIG. 47(b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and FIG. 47(c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

First, in step S101, the stack pointer is initialized. In this stack pointer initial setting, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304.

Succeedingly, in a step S102, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is turned on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (main value). In the example, it is determined whether the voltage is 9 V or higher. When the voltage value of the power source is less than the predetermined value (step S102: No), the wait is performed until the voltage value of the power source becomes the predetermined value or more, and when it becomes the predetermined value or more (step S102: Yes), It proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, internal register initialization is performed. In this internal register initial setting, the WDT 314 is activated, the RAM 308 is permitted to be accessed, a process of setting a numerical value that determines an execution cycle of a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in each register of the timer circuit 312, and the main control unit 300. After performing the initial setting of serial communication between the payout control unit 600 and the payout control unit 600, setting the maximum value of the hardware random number, and the like, the process proceeds to step S104.

In step S104, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is operated by a clerk of the game store or the like is ON (indicating that there is an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary) (step S104: Yes), the basic circuit 302 is initialized to the step S108. Then, the initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary) (step S104: No), the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and it is determined whether the power status information is information indicating suspend. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend (step S105: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and the initial startup process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the power status information is information indicating suspend (step S105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S106.

In step S106, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte configuration register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated check It is determined whether or not the result of the sum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal) (step S106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S107 to restore the state before the power failure. Execute the startup process. On the other hand, when the result of the checksum is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal) (step S106: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Then, the initial activation process described later is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 47(b), the return activation process will be described. When the recovery activation process is started, in step S201, initialization for recovery activation is performed. Specifically, the process of setting the information indicating "return start" in the power status information, the process of setting the magnetic detection abnormality flag to OFF, and the device error (the flag of the error due to the magnetic detection, the prize abnormality, etc.) The process of clearing, the process of clearing the previous device error status, the process of clearing the device error status for the security signal, etc. are performed.

Succeedingly, in a step S202, an address after the storage area initialized in the step S201 is set as an address for starting the RAM clear, and thereafter, the return activation processing is ended.

In addition, in the return activation process, for example, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer or register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and a power recovery command is set in this transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power-off state has been restored, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the sub-command transmission process in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later. ..

Next, the initial start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. When the initial start-up process is started, in step S301, a soft random number is initialized. Specifically, the initial settings of the soft random numbers used in the lottery for special maps and general maps.

Succeedingly, in a step S302, an address after the storage area initialized in the step S301 is set as an address for starting the RAM clear, and then the initial starting process is ended.

In addition, in the initial start-up process, for example, the setting of interrupt prohibition, the setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (this setting), etc. are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initial activation process of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in the command setting transmission process (step S405) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , To the first sub-control unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 47A, after the return activation process or the initial activation process is executed, a RAM clear process is performed in step SS109. In this RAM clear processing, the storage area of the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set as described above is cleared (initialized).

Succeedingly, in a step S110, sub-control related activation setting is performed. In this sub-control-related activation setting, the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 is set, and in the present embodiment, a sub-command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 three times. Therefore, the processing for setting the initial value of the sub control command continuous transmission counter stored in the RAM 308 is also performed.

In step S111, output port setting is performed. In this output port setting, symbol data, launch position designation signal, error status signal, prize ball signal, ordinary figure hit signal, ordinary electric accessory (2nd special figure starting port 232, electric chu) operating signal, ordinary figure operation Medium signal, easy-to-win state signal, special figure hit signal, special figure small hit signal (only for models with small hits), special figure changing middle signal, special figure changing time shortening status signal, special electric winning (variable winning Port 234, attacker) operating signal, condition device operating signal, role product continuous operation device operating signal, special winning opening solenoid signal, ordinary electric role product solenoid signal, pattern LED data, external terminal board signal etc. are set Set output ports. After finishing the process of step S111, the process proceeds to the main control unit main loop process. Here, the easy winning state may indicate a power support state.

Next, the main control unit main loop processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It is a flowchart of a main control unit main loop process.

When the main control unit 300 finishes executing the above-described main control power-on process, next, in step S401 of the main control unit main loop process for starting execution of this main control unit main loop process, interruption prohibition is performed. After setting, in step S402, the counter value of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted. In step S403, basic random number initial value update processing is performed (step S403). In the basic random number initial value updating process, a process of updating the initial value generating random number counter for generating the initial value of the special figure determining random number counter and the general figure determining random number counter is performed. For updating the random number counter for initial value generation, for example, assuming that the range of numerical values that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. To the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

After setting interrupt permission in step S404, subcommand transmission processing is performed in step S405). In this sub-command transmission process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and if there is a command to be transmitted, the process of transmitting the command is performed. In step S406, after performing the other determination random number update process, the process proceeds to step S407. In the other determination random number update processing, processing such as updating of the special figure variation time determination random number and the general figure variation time determination random number is performed.

In step S407, it is determined whether the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 9V), and if the voltage value is equal to or higher than the predetermined value (step S407). : Yes), the process returns to step S401 to continue the main control unit main loop processing, and when the value is less than the predetermined value (step S407: No), the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, the power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, the power supply status information is set to "suspend" after setting the interrupt prohibition. In addition, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a register having a 1-byte configuration having an initial value of 0, and a predetermined storage of the RAM 308 is calculated. Store in the area. After that, after setting the access to the RAM 308 is prohibited, the HALT state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the main controller timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S501, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

In steps S502 and S503, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S403 is updated, and then the random number counter for determining special figures to be used in the main control unit 300 is used. , The random number counter for determining the special figure fluctuation time and the random number counter for determining the general figure fluctuation period are updated. For example, if the range of numerical values that can be taken as a certain random value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random value, and 1 is added to the acquired value before the original Stored in the random number counter storage area of. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is a previously set initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, set in the random number counter, and the random number counter makes one round next time. In order to determine that, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 1 and a counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 2 may be separately provided.

In step S504, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function is being limited (whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated), and if the interrupt function is being limited (the first sub-control unit 400 is not activated). If (step S504: Yes), the process proceeds to step S519. If the interrupt function is not being limited (when the first sub control unit 400 is activated) (step S504: No), the process proceeds to step S505. move on. Here, that the interrupt function is being limited means that the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 set in step S110 of the power-on process is not 0, that is, in step S504, the first When it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the sub control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S505. When the bidirectional communication with the first sub-control unit 400 is possible, a command for confirming whether the first sub-control unit 400 is activated is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If the confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has started. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a specific error (in this embodiment, a magnetic detection error) is occurring. If a specific error is occurring (step S505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520. If the specific error is not occurring (step S505: No), the process proceeds to step S506.

In step S506, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the universal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for varying/stopping the symbol on the universal symbol display device 210, the time for varying/stopping the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for, the special symbol 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period for measuring the time to change/stop display the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214 , And updates various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S507, processing such as updating the input port status is performed. In this input port status update processing, etc., the special figure starting port (the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), the universal figure starting port 228, the out port 240 are input through the input port of the I/O 310. The presence/absence of a signal relating to a switch such as a variable winning port (attacker) 234 and a winning port (general winning port 226) is monitored and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. ), the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area. In addition, when it is determined that the winning in the starting opening and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area is erased because the winning is invalid.

Further, in step S508, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning a prize winning process, the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the information of the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the current detection signal recording area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence/absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S507, the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is continuously detected for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the input, it is determined that a prize has been won. If the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it may be determined that a prize has been won.

The ROM 306 of the main controller 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S507, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, there is a present detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the universal figure starting port 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won.

For example, when the information on the presence/absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process is branched to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning in the mouth 226.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a single winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

Further, in the winning a prize winning process of step S508, a winning a prize counter updating process is also performed. In this winning hole counter updating process, when there is a winning in the winning hole 226, the variable winning hole 234, the special figure 1 starting hole 230, and the special figure 2 starting hole 232, each winning hole in the RAM 308 or each starting hole. The value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each is read, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

In addition, in the winning opening winning process of step S508, a winning acceptance process is also performed. In the prize receiving process, whether or not the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232, the universal figure starting opening 228, and the variable winning opening 234 are matched with the winning determination pattern information is determined. Judgment is made using the judgment result. If there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is changed to the special figure 1 random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value as the special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

In addition, when there is a winning in the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is selected as the special figure 2 win. The value is acquired as a random number value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as the special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 and if the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value as the universal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When the variable winning port 234 is won, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 234. In addition, when the random number of the special figure is acquired, the special figure pre-reading process (whether the winning or failing, the pattern, and the pre-reading lottery of the variable time) are also performed. The special figure prefetching process will be described later in detail.

In step S509, winning-related error check processing is performed. In the prize-related error check process, a process for confirming and monitoring a prize-related abnormality and setting an abnormality according to the result of the process is performed. Some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S510, an out switch input update process is performed. In this out switch input update process, the number of gaming balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for presentation.

In step S511, serial command management processing is performed. In the serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. The command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 is a communication confirmation command (communication state with the payout control unit 600, which is transmitted after the activation waiting time of the first sub control unit 400 after the power is turned on. Confirmation, a command for notifying the activation method (initial activation, return activation) of the main control unit 300) and a prize ball number command for instructing the payout of the designated prize balls.

In addition, as the command that the main control unit 300 receives from the payout control unit 600, a communication confirmation return command (a response command indicating that the command from the main control unit 300 has been received by the payout control unit 600) or a test firing test signal is used. Command (award ball signal output request), a command including information on the occurrence status of a payout system error (including no error), and a prize ball payout operation status command (whether a prizeball payout is in operation/not in operation). There is a command to display or a display to indicate that the payout is in progress (LED is turned on/off) to the first sub-control unit 400).

Next, in step S512, a special figure state update process for special figures 1 and 2 is performed. The special figure state update process executes one of the following eight processes according to the process state of the special figure. The special figure status update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S513, general-university-state update processing is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the universal figure state update process in the middle of the universal figure variation display (the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the ordinary symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

Further, in the public figure state update processing at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be the display mode of the off symbol. ON/OFF control of 7-segment LED is performed.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general-picture state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the general-purpose stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fixed display of one of the winning symbol and the deviating symbol. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbols that are confirmed and displayed are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the universal figure variation game.

Further, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the open period to the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening/closing the 2232, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out, the universal figure out flag is turned on as described later. If the unillustrated flag is on, even in the unillustrated state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the unusual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S514 without doing anything.

Further, in step S513, a universal figure related lottery process is also performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unwinned by a random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the above random number storage area. The winning judgment is made, and in the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected to change the display of the public figure on the public figure display device 210, and the variable display time is stored in the general figure change time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure change display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure pending count storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

In step S514, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S507 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, and when the predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 is notified. Device information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted. Further, by driving various solenoids 332, controlling the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display via the display circuit 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S515, external output signal management processing is performed. In this external output signal management processing, processing for preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. In step S516, subcommand management processing is performed. In this sub-command management process, preparations are made for transmitting various commands to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information (subcommand) transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, and the bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a big hit start command, a big hit round number designation command, a power recovery command, Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) such as a RAM clear command that can specify the type of command.

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special symbol probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, etc. In the case of the fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag is included. In the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit round number, and the like are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234. Including presence or absence. In the present embodiment, when there is a winning in the variable winning a prize mouth 234, a special winning a prize winning command is set.

In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery processing, and the special figure 2 related lottery processing stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are selected. It sets the information indicating the timer number, the number of the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game that is held, and the like. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, output to the decorative pattern display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game underframe lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. The control information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the information indicating the number of the first special figure variation games or the second special figure variation games that are held, etc. are set.

In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308 is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game underframe lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. The effect control information to be performed, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the information indicating the number of the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game that are held, etc. are set. In the above-described special winning opening opening setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set information indicating the number. In the above-described special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set information indicating the number. Further, in this step S516, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the contents of effect control based on the information of the command data.

In step S517, a display display setting process is performed. In this indicator display setting process, the display (LED lighting pattern) such as "holding ball number, symbol combination", state (in electric support or non-electric support), right-handed state, etc. Performs processing such as setting the output data. In step S518, output management processing is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting the control signal set in each process to the solenoid or the LED, a process of transmitting the prepared command to the first sub-control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

In step S519, wait processing for waiting for sub-control activation is performed. In this sub-control activation wait wait process, the activation wait counter of the sub-control is decremented by 1 and the activation wait counter becomes 0 in order to wait until the first sub-control unit 400 is activated and becomes ready for communication. If so, prepare to send a predetermined command. As the predetermined command, any one or more of a power-on command and a command related to the payout control unit 600 (for example, a command indicating that all errors are released, a lower plate full tank error occurrence condition) A command indicating that there is an error, an error indicating that a payout number insufficient error has occurred, a main control communication error command (command indicating that communication with the payout control unit 600 is in an abnormal state), a CR unit unconnection error Is a generation state command, a firing position command (a command for informing the firing position according to the state), and the like.

In step S520, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S501 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the processing returns to the main control unit main loop processing. ..

Next, the special figure state update process (step S512) in the main controller timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the special figure state update processing.

In step S601, the special figure processing state address is acquired/saved, and in the next step S602, processing corresponding to the value indicated by the special figure processing state stored in the RAM 308 is executed. Specifically, here, based on the value indicated by the special figure processing state, the special figure-related lottery processing shown in FIG. 51(a), the symbol changing process shown in FIG. 52, and the special figure shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later. Display confirmation weight processing, hit start weight processing shown in FIG. 54(a), special electric power combination operation processing shown in FIG. 55, special electric power remaining ball detection processing shown in FIG. 58, special electric power operation end processing shown in FIG. 59, and FIG. Either one of the hit end display weight processing shown is executed.

In step S603, the prize winning status is set to ON. Further, in step S604, the state change of the special figure processing state is determined, and in the next step S605, it is determined whether or not there is a state change of the special figure processing state (change in the value indicated by the special figure processing state), and the special figure processing is performed. When there is no state change (when the value indicated by the special figure processing state has not changed) (step S605: No), the special figure state update processing is terminated and there is a change in the special figure processing state. When (the value indicated by the special figure processing state has changed) (step S605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the "variation waiting state". If it is (step S606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if it is not (step S606). : No), and proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether or not the special drawing processing state is set to the "hit start display wait state". If the result is true (step S607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if not, ( Step S607: No), and the special figure state update process is terminated.

In step S608, a subcommand transmission request is set (in the present embodiment, after setting a game state command transmission request including a special figure and a general figure game state, a launch position including information on whether the player is right-handed or not. After setting the command transmission request), the special figure status update processing is terminated. Note that the order of subcommand transmission requests is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or a plurality of command transmission requests may be collectively performed in one process.

Subsequently, the special figure state updating process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51A is a flowchart of the special figure related lottery process executed in the special figure state updating process.

This special figure related lottery process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates the "variation waiting state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process.

In step S701 of the special figure related lottery process, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S702, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 2 reserved sphere number is 0, In the case of (when there is no suspension of special figure 2 variable game) (step S702: Yes), the process proceeds to step S703, and when it is other than 0 (when there is suspension of special figure 2 variable game) (step S702: No), the process proceeds to step S705 to execute the process related to Toku-zu 2.

In step S703, the special figure 1 reserved sphere number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S704, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 1 reserved sphere number is 0. If there is no suspension of the variation game (step S704: Yes), the special figure related lottery processing is terminated, and if it is other than 0 (if there is a suspension of the variation game of the special figure 1) (step S704: No). , To proceed to step S705 in order to execute the processing relating to Toku-zu 1.

In step S705, when the process related to Toku-zu 2 is executed, the value of the special-drawing 2 reserved sphere number stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by 1, and when the process related to Toku-zu 1 is executed, the value is stored in the RAM 308. The value of the stored special figure 1 number of reserved balls is subtracted by one. In step S706, special figure random number transfer processing is executed. In this special figure random number transfer process, when the process related to special figure 2 is executed, the random number values stored in the random number storage areas corresponding to the pending figures 2 to 4 of special figure 2 are changed from the pending figures 1 to 1 When shifting to the random number storage area corresponding to No. 3 and clearing the random number storage area corresponding to hold 4 of special figure 2 and executing the process related to special figure 1, it corresponds to hold 2 to 4 of special figure 1. The random number values stored in the random number storage area are shifted to the random number storage areas corresponding to the reservations 1 to 3 in the special figure 1, and the random number storage area corresponding to the reservation 4 in the special figure 1 is cleared. As described above, the gaming table (pachinko machine) in this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine. Further, each of the special maps 2 and 1 can store up to four reservations.

In step S707, a special drawing per lottery process is performed. As will be described later in detail, in the special drawing-based lottery process, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable game (or the special figure 1 variable game) is hit. In step S708, a display symbol lottery process is performed. In this display symbol lottery process, the special symbol 2 symbol determination table (or the special symbol 1 symbol determination table) is referred to, and the second special symbol is obtained based on the random number value and the result of the special symbol lottery process in step S707. The special figure display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special figure display device 212) is selected by lottery.

FIG. 62(a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determining table, and FIG. 62(b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determining table. In the case of determining the display symbol data of special figure 1 in the display symbol lottery process of step S708, the special symbol per lottery process of step S707 is referred to by referring to the special symbol 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 62(a). The display symbol data of the special figure 1 is selected based on the hit result of FIG. 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. In the present embodiment, when the hit/miss result of Toku-zu 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special maps A to G, and when the hit/no hit determination result of Toku-zu 1 is a small hit, Toku-zu H is selected, and when the hit/no-go result of Toku-zu 1 is missing, toku-zu I is selected.

Further, when determining the display symbol data of special figure 2 in the display symbol lottery process of step S708, the special symbol 2 lottery process of step S707 is referred to with reference to the special symbol 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 62(b). The display symbol data of the special drawing 2 is selected by lot based on the hit/miss result of the special drawing 2 and the numerical range of the random number value. In the present embodiment, when the hit/fail result of Toku-zu 2 is a big hit, any one of the Toku-zu a to Toku-e is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be displayed is determined, the symbol data displayed on the special symbol display device is set. The symbol data set here is acquired again in the display device display setting process (step S517) in the main controller timer interrupt process, and the control to display the special symbol display device is performed. After the symbol data is set, the determined symbol (symbol type information) is determined, and if the symbol is lost, this process ends.

When the determined symbol (symbol type information) is a symbol of a big hit or a small hit, the process of setting the data set to the end of the hit (the data setting process after the end of the hit) is performed. The post-hit data setting process is a process of setting the gaming state set after the hit according to the symbol determined by the lottery.

Returning to FIG. 51(a), in step S709, special figure variation time lottery processing is performed. In the special figure variation time lottery process, a variation time table (not shown) is referred to, and the success/failure result of special diagram 2 (or special diagram 1) by the lottery process per special diagram in step S707 and the numerical range of the random number value are used. After selecting the timer for the special map change time, the special map related lottery process is terminated.

<Special drawing per lottery process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 51B, the lottery process per special figure (step S707) will be described. FIG. 51B is a flowchart of the special figure-based lottery processing (step S707) in the special figure-related lottery processing.

In step S801 of the per-special-drawing lottery processing, the per-special-drawing lottery is performed with reference to the win/no determination table. In the present embodiment, the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are configured to perform the lottery per special drawing by using the same win/fail judgment table. You may prepare it.

FIG. 61(a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for win/loss determination, and FIG. 61(b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for win/loss determination. In the special figure per lottery process of step S801, when the winning/losing determination of the special drawing 1 is performed, in the case of a special drawing high probability state, the high probability table for winning/losing determination shown in FIG. In the case of the low probability state in FIG. 61, the low probability table for win/fail determination shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variation game, a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is selected as the hit/miss determination result.

Similarly, in the case of the special drawing per win/loss determination in the special drawing per lot drawing processing of step S801, in the case of the special drawing high probability state, the high probability table for win/loss determination shown in FIG. 61A is referred to. However, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the low probability table for success/failure determination shown in FIG. 61B is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variation game, a big hit or a loss is selected as the hit/miss determination result.

Returning to FIG. 51(b), in step S802, it is determined whether or not the win/no-judgment result (lottery result) of the special figure per lottery in step S801 is other than the “big hit” (step S802). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S803, and in the case of "big hit" (step S802: No), the process proceeds to step S804. In step S803, the special figure small hit lottery process is performed using the small hit determination table.

FIG. 61C is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. In the special figure small hitting lottery process of step S803, the special hitting determination table shown in FIG. 61(c) is referred to, and the special drawing is drawn based on the numerical range and the acquired random number value shown in the referred small hitting determination table. Select the result of the small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning/disapproving determination result (lottery result) of the special drawing per special drawing is the special drawing 1, the small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the winning/disapproving judgment result, and the loss is with a probability of 63536/65536. However, if the winning/disapproval determination result (lottery result) of the special drawing per special drawing is the special drawing 2, the small hit is not selected.

Returning to FIG. 51B, in step S804, the RAM 308 is determined based on the determination result (lottery result) of the special figure per lottery in step S801 and the determination result (lottery result) of the special figure small hit lottery in step S803. Information of any one of "big hit", "small hit" and "miss" is set in the hit/miss determination type stored in. In the next step S805, information indicating "during special figure change" is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the symbol changing process shown in FIG. 52 is called and executed.

In step S806, the value of the special figure determination random number stored in the RAM 308 is cleared, in the next step S807, a subcommand (special figure variation start command) transmission request is set, and in the next step S808, the special figure is specified. After setting the basic signal information (for testing) indicating that the fluctuation is 2 (or the special figure 1), the special figure per lottery process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the symbol variation process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the symbol changing process executed in the special figure state updating process. This symbol changing process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special image processing state indicates “during special image changing” in step 602 of the special image state updating process.

In step S901 of the symbol changing process, the special figure operation type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and the address of the RAM to be updated is calculated according to this special figure operation type. ..

In step S902, the special figure variation time timer set in step S709 of the special figure related lottery process is acquired by referring to the address destination calculated in step S901. Is this special figure variation time timer 0? Determine whether or not. As a result of the determination, if the timer for the special figure change time is 0 (when the set special figure change time has elapsed) (step S902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S905, and if it is not 0 (the set special figure change time) Has not elapsed) (step S902: No), the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the special figure display symbol. If it is not the update timing (step S903: Yes), the symbol changing process is ended, and if it is the update timing (step S903: No). ), and proceeds to step S904. In step S904, after the special symbol display symbol data is updated, the symbol changing process is ended.

By this update processing of special figure display symbol data, in the case of special figure 1, using the first special figure display device 212, all the seven segments are all lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. "Fluctuation display of special figure 1" is performed, and in the case of special figure 2, using the second special symbol display device 214, lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one segment in the center are repeated. The variable display of special figure 2" is performed.

In step S905, the special figure display symbol data selected in step S708 of the special figure related lottery process is acquired and set, and in the next step S906, information indicating "special figure display wait state" is set in the special figure processing state. To do. As a result, in the next step S602 of the special figure state update processing, the special figure display confirmation weight processing shown in FIG. 53 is called and executed.

In step S907, the display pattern update data is cleared, and in the next step S908, basic signal information (for testing) indicating that the fluctuation of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) is stopped is set, and the next step In S909, the symbol determination frequency information signal stored in the RAM 308 is set to ON to output the symbol determination frequency information signal from the external terminal board 349.

In step S910, a transmission request of a subcommand (special figure variation stop command) is set, and in the next step S911, the symbol type information stored in the RAM 308 (the symbol of special figure 1 shown in FIG. 46(a), or 46 (b) any of the symbols of the special map 2 shown in (b) is acquired, based on this symbol type information, after setting the special symbol display confirmation timer indicating the time to maintain the stop display of the special symbol, the symbol The changing process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the special figure display confirmation weight process executed in the special figure state updating process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the special figure display confirmation weight process executed in the special figure state updating process. This special figure display confirmation weight processing is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "special figure display wait state" in step S602 of the special figure state update processing. Is.

In step S1001 of the special figure display confirmation weight process, it is determined whether or not the special figure display confirmation timer set in step S911 of the symbol changing process is larger than 0, and if it is larger than 0 (the special figure display confirmation time If it has not elapsed (step S1001: Yes), the special figure display confirmation weight processing is ended, and if not (when the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1001: No), step S1002 Proceed to.

In step S1002, the symbol confirmation number information signal set in step S909 of the symbol variation process is cleared (set to OFF), and in the next step S1003, the special symbol variation time reduction status when the symbol is stopped (special symbol variation game). The state (in this embodiment, a status indicating a normal game state, a probability variation game state, or a time saving game state) is stored in the RAM 308 as a save special figure variation time reduction status described later.

In step S1004, the win/loss determination type set in step S804 of the special figure related lottery process is acquired, and in the next step S1005, it is determined whether or not the acquired win/loss determination type is “big hit”. As a result of this determination, if the win/loss determination type is “big hit” (step S1005: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010. If the win/loss determination type is other than “big hit” (step S1005: No), the process proceeds to step S1006. The process proceeds to update the time saving frequency of the special figure stored in the RAM 308 (reduces the time saving frequency by one).

In step S1007, the win/loss determination type set in step S804 of the special figure related lottery process is acquired, and in the next step S1008, it is determined whether or not the acquired win/loss determination type is “small hit”. As a result of this determination, if the win/loss determination type is "small hit" (step S1008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the win/loss determination type is other than "small hit" (step S1008: No), step In step S1009, information indicating the "variation waiting state" is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update processing, the special figure related lottery processing shown in FIG. 51A is called and executed.

In step S1010, basic signal information (for a test) indicating the special drawing acceptance/rejection type and symbol type is set, and in the next step S1011 the RAM is cleared in the designated range. Here, the winning/disapproval type, the number of times the special electric prize is activated, the number of winnings at the special winning opening (variable winning opening 234), the operation pattern of the special electric winning combination, the operating state of the special electric winning combination, the total number of winnings per winning, the flag relating to the winning abnormality of the large winning opening The information such as the winning end display timer type is cleared, and at the time of a big hit, the easy-to-win prize status and the special figure general status are further cleared.

In step S1012, information indicating "hit start display weight state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the hit start wait process shown in FIG. 54A is called and executed. In step S1013, the total number of winning prizes is set to 0, and in the next step S1014, a transmission request of a sub command (hit start command) is set.

In step S1015, the symbol type information is set, in step S1016, the hit start display timer corresponding to the symbol type information set in step S1015 is set, and in step S1017, the symbol type information set in step S1015 is set. After setting the other information signal setting types, the special figure display confirmation weight processing is ended.

Next, the hit start wait process executed in the special figure state update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54A is a flowchart of the hit start wait process executed in the special figure state update process. This hit start weight process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates the "hit start display wait state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. ..

In step S1101 of the hit start weight process, it is determined whether or not the hit start display timer set in step S1016 of the special figure display confirmation weight process is greater than 0. If not (step S1101: Yes), the hit start weight process is terminated, and if not (when the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1102.

In step S1102, after the special electric power releasing process which will be described later is executed, the hit start weight process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54(b), the special electric role releasing process (step S1102) in the hit start weight process will be described. FIG. 54B is a flowchart of the special electric power releasing process (step S1102) in the hit start weight process.

In step S1201 of the special electric role releasing process, information indicating the “special electric role operating state” is set in the special figure processing state. Thus, in step S602 of the next special figure state updating process, the special electric combination operating process shown in FIG. 55 is called and executed.

In step S1202, the value of the winning number of the special winning opening in RAM 308 (hereinafter, also referred to as “main control unit winning counter”) and the operating state of the special electricity combination are cleared, and in the next step S1203, the subcommand (special electricity Set the transmission request of the winning role release command). As a result, the first sub control unit 400 can recognize that the round has started. In step S1204, the symbol type information set in step S1015 of the special symbol display confirmation weight process is acquired, and in the next step S1205, the special electric wire combination movement pattern data table is set based on the acquired symbol type information. For example, as shown in FIGS. 57(a-1) to (a-3), the special electric combination operation pattern data tables are prepared by the number of types of special drawings of a big hit and a small hit. Note that FIG. 57 exemplarily shows only part of them. The special electric prize combination operation data table stores special electric combination operation data indicating an opening/closing pattern of the variable winning port 234 for each round. As shown in FIG. 57(b-1) to FIG. 57(b-3), the special electric combination operation data includes information (open timer pattern, closed timer pattern) indicating the open/closed state of the variable winning port 234 and the open state or One or a plurality of timer pattern data including information on the time for maintaining the closed state (special electric open/close timer) is stored. As a result, it is possible to give various variations to the opening/closing operation of the variable winning port 234 during one round.

For example, in the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the special map A, as shown in FIG. 57(a-1), the 1R to 15R eyes refer to the special electric hand combination operation data 1 shown in FIG. 57(b-1). Then, after the variable winning port 234 is opened for 29500 ms by the opening timer pattern 2, the variable winning port 234 is closed and the operation is controlled by the closing timer pattern 3.

Further, in the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the special map C, as shown in FIG. 57(a-2), in the 1R to 4R, 6R to 8R, and 10R to 15R While the data 1 is referred to and the above-described operation is performed, the opening/closing operation of the variable winning a prize port 234 is performed on the 5th and 9Rth with reference to the special electric prize combination operation data 4 shown in FIG. 57(b-3). Controlled. That is, in the 5th and 9th rounds, the variable winning a prize hole 234 is first opened by 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, and then the variable winning a prize hole 234 is kept closed for 2820 ms by the closing timer pattern 1 four times. After that, the variable winning opening 234 is opened for 17500 ms by the opening timer pattern 3, and then the variable winning opening 234 is controlled by the closing timer pattern 3 so that the operation ends.

Further, in the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the special figure E, as shown in FIG. 57(a-3), in the 1R to 4R eyes, the operation as described above is performed with reference to the special electric hand combination operation data 1 described above. On the other hand, in the 5th to 15th rounds, the opening/closing operation of the variable winning a prize port 234 is controlled with reference to the special electric winning combination operation data 2 shown in FIG. 57(b-2). That is, in the fifth to fifteenth Rs, the variable winning port 234 is first opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, then the variable winning port 234 is kept closed for 2820 ms by the closing timer pattern 1, and then the closing timer pattern is opened. By 3, the variable winning a prize port 234 is controlled so that the closed state is maintained as it is and the operation ends. Before the closing pattern timer 3 is set, another closing pattern timer (for example, the closing pattern timer 1 or the like) may be set.

In step S1206, the operation number (round number) of the special electric vehicle combination is acquired, and in the next step S1207, the operation number (round number) of the acquired special electric vehicle combination is updated. Subsequently, in step S1208, the special electricity combination operation data corresponding to the updated number of operations (round times) of the special electricity combination is read and the operation pattern of the special electricity combination is set. Then, in step S1209, special electric power combination control processing (details will be described later) is performed, and in the next step S1210, the special electric power combination opening processing is ended after clearing the special electric prize winning detection timer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the special electric wheel combination operating process executed in the special figure state updating process will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the special electric power combination operating process executed in the special figure state updating process. This special electric wire combination operating process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the “special electric wire operating state” in step S602 of the special figure state updating process.

In step S1301 of the electric power combination operation process, the maximum prize number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in step S1302, the prize number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In step S1303, the acquired maximum number of winnings is compared with the number of winnings, and it is determined whether or not the number of winnings is smaller than the maximum number of winnings. If it is smaller (number of winnings <maximum number of winnings) (step S1303). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S1304, and if not (the number of winnings>=the maximum number of winnings) (step S1303: No), the process proceeds to step S1308.

In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the special electricity combination opening/closing timer corresponding to the open timer pattern or the closing timer pattern being executed, which is set in step S1208 of the special electricity combination opening process, is greater than 0. If the open/close timer has not elapsed (step S1304: Yes), the special electric wire combination operation processing is ended, and if not (when the special electric wire combination open/close timer has elapsed) (step S1304: No), step S1305 Proceed to. In step S1305, special electric power combination control processing (details are described later) is performed, in the next step S1306, a special electric power combination opening/closing timer pattern is acquired, and in next step S1307, a closing timer pattern of the acquired special electric power combination opening/closing timer pattern. It is determined whether or not the special electric power combination is operating (whether or not the closing timer pattern is set in the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)).

As a result of the determination, when the special electric power combination is operating (when the closing timer pattern is not set to the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: Yes), the special electric power operation processing is ended, When the special electric power combination is not in operation (when the closing timer pattern is set to the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: No), the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, information indicating the "remaining sphere detection state" is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update processing, the special electric ball remaining ball detection processing shown in FIG. 58 is called and executed.

In step S1309, the special electricity role operating interval timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, in step S1310, other information signal transmission determination timers are cleared, and in step S1311, a subcommand (special winning opening closing command) transmission request is made. To set.

In step S1312, the special electric winning combination winning detection timer stored in the RAM 308 is set. Here, the special electric winning combination winning detection timer is a timer for effectively detecting a game ball remaining inside the special winning opening (variable winning opening 234) after closing the special winning opening (variable winning opening 234). Is. In step S1313, after setting the drive signal (big winning opening solenoid signal) for driving the solenoid (332) of the special winning opening (variable winning opening 234) to OFF, the special electric prize combination operation processing is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable winning port 234 changes to the difficult-to-enter state when the maximum number of winning game balls has passed the passing area after the easy-to-enter state. It functions as an example of a variable winning means.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the special electric vehicle combination control processing (steps S1209 and S1305) executed in the special electric vehicle combination opening processing and the special electric vehicle operation processing will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the special electric role controlling process executed in the special electric role releasing process and the special electric role operating process.

In step S1401, the special electricity combination control data stored in the ROM 306 is acquired. Specifically, the control data of the operation pattern to be executed this time among the operation patterns of the special electric combination to be executed, which is set by reading the special electric combination operation data in step S1208 of the special electric combination releasing process, is acquired. To do. For example, if the operation pattern of the special electric power combination shown in the special electric power combination operation data 1 is set and the round is started, the "open timer pattern 2" shown in "(1)" of FIG. 57(b-1). Will be obtained. Further, after the operation pattern shown in the control data shown in "(1)" of FIG. 57(b-1) is completed, the "closing timer shown in "(2)" of FIG. 57(b-1) is displayed. The control data of "Pattern 3" will be acquired.

Succeedingly, in a step S1402, based on the acquired control data of the operation pattern of the special electric power combination, opening/closing information indicating whether the variable winning port 234 is opened or closed is acquired. For example, in the case of the "opening timer pattern", data (opening information) for opening the variable winning a prize port 234 is acquired, and in the case of "closing timer pattern", data for closing the variable winning a prize port 234 (closing). Information).

Then, in step S1403, the opening/closing timer of the special electric wire combination is acquired based on the control data of the operation pattern of the special electric wire combination acquired in step S1401 and the opening/closing information acquired in step S1402. For example, when the "open timer pattern 2" is acquired and the open/close information is "open information", the open timer of 29500 ms is acquired. Further, when the “closing timer pattern 1” is acquired and the opening/closing information is “closing information”, the closing timer of 2820 ms is acquired.

In step S1404, information indicating acceptance is set in the special electric prize winning/non-approval state stored in the RAM 308. When the information indicating that the special electric prize winning/non-winning state is acceptable is set, it can be accepted that the game ball has passed through the ball detection sensor (count switch SW1 of the variable winning port 234) provided in the variable winning port. If the information indicating that the game cannot be accepted is set, the game ball will be invalid even if it passes through the ball detection sensor (count switch SW1) provided in the variable winning port. In step S1405, special electric power combination signal information (test signal) is set, and in step S1406, preparation for updating the special winning opening solenoid signal is performed. By this processing, preparation for driving the special winning opening solenoid is performed, and the drive signal is output in the output management processing (step S518) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. In step S1407, after setting the special electric role opening timer or the special electric role closing timer of the special electric role opening and closing timer, the special electric role control processing ends. That is, in this process, the open timer or the close timer acquired in step S1403 is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the special electric ball remaining ball detection processing executed in the special figure state update processing will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the special electricity role remaining ball detection processing executed in the special figure state update processing. The special electric ball remaining ball detection processing is processing that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "remaining ball detection state" in step S602 of the special figure state update processing. is there.

In step S1501 of the special electric role remaining ball detection processing, it is determined whether or not the special electric role operating interval timer set in step S1309 of the special electric role operating processing is operating. If not (step S1501: Yes), the special electric role remaining ball detection processing is ended, and if not (when the special electric role operating interval time has elapsed) (step S1501: No), go to step S1502. move on.

In step S1502, the special electric wire combination operation delay timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, and in step S1503, information indicating the "special electric wire combination operation end state" is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric combination operation end process shown in FIG. 59 is called and executed. That is, it becomes the state of the interval between rounds.

In step S1504, after the special electric power combination signal information (test signal) is cleared, the special electric power remaining ball detection processing ends. A subcommand transmission request (for example, an inter-round interval start command) may be set after clearing the special electric power combination signal information.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the special electric power combination operation ending process executed in the special figure state updating process will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the special electric power combination operation ending process executed in the special figure state updating process. This special electric wire combination operation ending process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the “special electric wire combination operation ending state” in step S602 of the special figure combination updating process. is there.

In step S1601 of the special electric role combination end processing, it is determined whether or not the special electric role combination delay timer set in step S1502 of the special electric role remaining ball detection processing is in operation, and if it is in operation (step S1601: Yes). ), the special electricity combination operation end process is ended, and if not (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, the symbol type information is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the special drawing hit type is a small hit. If it is a small hit (step S1602: Yes), the small hit is dealt with in step S1603. After acquiring the hit end display timer, the process proceeds to step S1608. On the other hand, when the special drawing hit type is not a small hit (step S1602: No), the process proceeds to step S1604, and a predetermined number is set as the maximum winning opening maximum number stored in the RAM 308. In step S1605, the maximum winning opening maximum opening number is compared with the special electric winning combination opening number, and it is determined whether the special electric winning combination opening number is less than the maximum winning opening maximum opening number, that is, whether the hit has not ended. .. If the hit has not ended (step S1605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1606 to execute the above-mentioned special electric power combination release processing, and ends the special electric power operation end processing. That is, the processing for starting the next round is performed. On the other hand, if the hit has ended (step S1605: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607.

In step S1607, the hit end display timer corresponding to the symbol type information is acquired, and in step S1608, the hit end display timer acquired in step S1603 or step S1607 is set. In step S1609, information indicating the "hit end display weight state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state updating process, the hit end display weight process shown in FIG. 60 is called and executed. In step S1610, after the transmission request of the sub command (hit end command) is set, the special electric power combination operation end processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the hit end display weight processing executed in the special figure state updating processing will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the hit end display weight process executed in the special figure state update process. The hit end display weight process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates the "hit end display wait state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. is there.

In step S1701 of the hit end display weight processing, it is determined whether or not the hit end display timer set in step S1608 of the special electric power combination operation end processing is in operation, and if it is in operation (step S1701: Yes), The hit end display weight process is ended, and if not (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, the symbol type information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is saved in the stack area, in step S1703, the basic signal information (for test) is cleared, and in step S1704, the special figure processing state is changed to "change". Information indicating "waiting state" is set. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update processing, the special figure related lottery processing shown in FIG. 51A is called and executed.

In step S1705 to step S1707, the display symbol data, the symbol type information, and the total winning number per winning are respectively cleared. In step S1708, the saved symbol type information is reset, and in step S1709, it is determined whether or not the small hit has ended. If the small hit has ended (step S1709: Yes), the hit end display weight process is executed. If it ends and ends in a case other than small hit (ends in big hit) (step S1709: NO), the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, the setting data (probability change, shortening time, hidden probability change) after completion of a hit is acquired, and in step S1711, data corresponding to the setting data after completion of a hit (probability change status (special figure probability status status, general figure probability status status)). , Time saving (Number of fluctuations for shortening special figure fluctuation time, number of fluctuations for fluctuation time correction, number of fluctuations for easy winning state), time saving status (status for shortening special figure fluctuation time, status for shortening general figure fluctuation time, open extension status), fluctuation time lottery After setting the state (information for determining the variation time lottery table and the like) and clearing the setting data after the end of the hit, the hit end display weight process is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 functions as an example of game control means capable of executing a big hit game.

Next, the special figure prefetching process in the winning a prize winning process of step S508 shown in FIG. 49 will be described.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special drawing prefetching process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special diagrams 1 and 2, and pre-determines the stop symbol before the winning/disapproval determining process, and the pre-determination result (special The prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 64A to 64C) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section for storing the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 and the number of special figure 1 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section are specified. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing one prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (first) is deleted and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted every time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading is decreased by one. Are processed so that the rank of the data of 1 is advanced by one. In addition, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the special figure 2 pre-reading result and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are stored. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number is provided. The special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section can store up to four pre-reading results in this example. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result having the highest rank is erased every time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading decreases by 1, and the remaining order of the special figure 2 pre-reading result data is deleted. Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread results having the lowest rank.

In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increased (step S508a). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is stored, for example, in the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and in the special figure 2 prefetched number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of prefetches. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the special figure 2 reserved number is larger than the special figure 2 preread number, and the special figure 2 reserved number is the special figure 2 preread number. If they are the same, it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the starting information of Toku-zu 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S508b, and when it is determined that the starting information of Toku-zu 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S508d.

In step S508b, the increased special figure 2 starting information (set of special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is added to the special figure 2 random value storage area before the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. Read ahead from. Then, by using the pre-read special figure 2 starting information, the win/fail judgment table shown in FIG. 61 and the special symbol determining table shown in FIG. 62, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game relating to the starting information is displayed. Predetermination is performed before the display symbol lottery process S708 in the special figure related lottery process shown in 51. It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used when determining whether or not it is true or false.

In step S508c subsequent to step S508b, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, it transfers to step S508d.

In step S508d, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage. The comparison is performed with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increased, the process proceeds to step S508e, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increased, the special figure prefetching process is ended and the main control unit is executed. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S508e, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. When it is determined that the non-electric power support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S508f, and when it is determined that the non-electric power support is not being performed (the power support is being performed (universal figure high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S508h. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric power support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading advance notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

In step S508f, the increased special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value) is stored in the special figure 1 random number storage area before the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. Read ahead from. Then, by using the pre-read special figure 1 starting information, the win/fail judgment table shown in FIG. 61, and the special symbol determining table shown in FIG. 62, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the starting information is displayed. Predetermination is performed before the display symbol lottery process S708 in the special figure related lottery process shown in 51. It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used when determining whether or not it is true or false.

In step S508g following step S508f, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first free area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

In step S508h, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 starting information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S405) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 63, the read-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2, and the read-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electrical support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special maps 1 and 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold, for example. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

FIG. 64 exemplifies a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 64A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 preread result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 64A, the special-reading 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of reserveable special-playing 1 variable games. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 64(a), the storage area "Hold 1" stores "special drawing I" (disappearance) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "Hold 2" stores stop symbol information "Special Figure I". "(Disappearance) is stored, "Special figure A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored as storage symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special figure I" is stored as storage symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Disappearance) is stored.

FIG. 64B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 64( b ), the special figure 2 prefetching result storage section has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of reserveable special figure 2 variable games. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 64(b), "special figure f" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbols are stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In FIG. 64(b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 64(c) shows an example of the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 during electronic support. As shown in FIG. 64(c), in the storage area "holding 1", "undetermined" information is stored instead of the stopped symbol information. Neither stop symbol information nor "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the judgment result and the special symbol variation time are pre-determined, and the information is stored in the pre-read result storage unit and is also stored in the first sub-control unit 400 as pre-read result information. Can be sent.

Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 65A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S4001 of FIG. 65(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S4001. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

In step S4003 following step S4001, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4005. .. In step S4005, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S4007, which follows step S4005, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S4009 following step S4007, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S4007, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

In step S4011, which follows step S4009, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S4009 is used as the effect data corresponding to the operation of the opportunity button 136 or the operation key unit 137 according to the detection result. Perform processing to change to.

In step S4013, which follows step S4011, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S4009 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, the command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S4015, which follows step S4013, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to the game board lamp 442 or the game underframe lamp 452 in the effect data read in step S4009, this command is sent to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table. It is output to the frame lamp drive circuit 450.

In step S4017 following step S4015, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when the effect data read in step S4009 includes an instruction to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S4019, which follows step S4017, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if the effect data read in step S4009 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output. After that, the process returns to step S4003.

FIG. 65B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects the strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S4031 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 65C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is set to a predetermined value when triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S4041 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S4003 of the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S4003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S4043 following step S4041, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub control unit main process (step S4019) and update process of other effect random number values. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 66A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S5001 of FIG. 66(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S5001. In this initialization processing, the initialization of the input/output port and the initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM (not shown) are performed.

In step S5003 following step S5001, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S5005. .. In step S5005, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S5007, which follows step S5005, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

In step S5009, which follows step S5007, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S5007, the effect data corresponding to this command (effect data by the decorative pattern display device 208) is read from a ROM (not shown), and the like, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S5011, which follows step S5009, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the effect data read in step S5009 includes a command to the VDP 516, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). After that, the process returns to step S5003.

FIG. 66B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S5031 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 66C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S5041 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S5003 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S5003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S5043 subsequent to step S5041, update processing of other effect random number values and the like are performed.

FIG. 66D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S5011 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S5051, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S5053 following step S5051, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S5053: Yes), the process proceeds to step S5055, If not (step S5053: No), it waits until the transfer end interrupt signal is input.

In step S5055, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S5051, the CPU 504 has information of image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates) etc. are instructed to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 sets a parameter according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S5057, which follows step S5055, a drawing instruction is issued. In response to this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S5059 subsequent to step S5057, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the image drawing end is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S5059: Yes), The process proceeds to step S5061; otherwise (step S5059: No), the input end interrupt signal is waited for.

In step S5061, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67. Here, FIG. 67(a) is a diagram illustrating a first configuration example of the rendering device 206, and FIG. 67(b) is a diagram illustrating a second configuration example of the rendering device 206.

In the production device 206 shown in FIG. 67(a), the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered by the decorative member configuring the production device 206, and a part thereof is not visible. .. The decorative member may be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative pattern display device 208 may be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, and the general figure holding lamp 216 are not shown. Omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The first UI unit 280 is provided with a variable icon display area on its left side, and a pedestal h0s is arranged in the variable icon display area. The variable icon h0 can be displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal h0s, and when the variable icon h0 is displayed, it notifies that the symbol variable is being displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 is not displayed when the symbol is fixedly displayed. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a lord's character is displayed. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a prefetch notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 has a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. Further, the navigation character YM does not have to be always displayed, and a specific notice or effect using the navigation character YM (for example, a look-ahead notice, a notice in the symbol variation display, or a symbol variation display held N times is accumulated. It may be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by a user setting. In FIG. 67(a), since four variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are reserved, four reservation icons h11, h12, h13, h14 are displayed in the reservation icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round unpatterned and white display mode), but they are displayed in accordance with the progress of the game. May change. As a result, the notice display and the prefetch notice display can be performed.

The variation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, which is displayed after the suspension of the special figure variation game is started, in other words, an icon relating to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time when the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon is started. To be more precise, when the first hold icon with the oldest winning prize moves from the hold icon display area to the variable icon display area, the moving icon is referred to as the variable icon, or even if the variable icon moves. Good. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. This variable icon is displayed with a display size different from the hold icon (a display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may facilitate the identification of the variable icon and the hold icon, but they may have the same size. The variable icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can give a notice about whether or not the change is appropriate (a notice of the change) depending on its display mode, and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the hit/miss result of the special figure change game is held. The erasing timing may be before, at the same timing, or after the timing at which the result of the variation is notified. The variable icon h0 may not be displayed.

In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a second decorative pattern (fifth pattern) smaller than the first decorative pattern is a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is stopped. The second decorative pattern may not be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and only the first decorative pattern may be displayed. Further, the second decorative design may not be displayed on the decorative design display device 208, but may be displayed on another effect display device (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative patterns in the second decorative pattern matches the combination of the decorative patterns in the first decorative pattern, but the combination of the decorative patterns in the first decorative pattern and the decoration in the second decorative pattern A part (1 or 2 of the decorative patterns) or all of the combinations of the patterns may be inconsistent. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second hold number display (here, “4” and “0”) of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Note that the special symbol display device 208 does not have to display the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2. In addition, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). Good. It should be noted that the second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special maps 1 and 2, or may display the hold numbers of both of the special maps 1 and 2. Good.

In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to the effect and the game state (normal game state, probability variation state, hidden probability variation state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a pre-reading notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display irrelevant to the judgment result. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain game state (any one or more of a normal game state, a certainty variation state, a hidden certainty variation state, a time saving state). In this case, it may change with a law (for example, background display A→background display B→background display C→background display A→... If it collapses, it may be announced as a big hit confirmation (premier announcement). The order may change randomly regardless of the order.

In addition, below the decorative pattern display device 208, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the production movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved vertically or rotated according to the production content. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 67(a), the family crest monument 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest part 224E is below the decorative pattern display device 208, but it can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the family crest monument 224E has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 208, one of the effect movable bodies, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga with the character "Large", and the second with the character "Board" are provided. The large-scale behavior auditors 224Gb, the third large-scale behavioral auditors 224Gc on which the characters "swing" are applied, and the fourth large-scale behavioral auditors 224Gd on which the characters "dance" are applied are arranged. Each of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd can rotate around the center and can move toward the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. ing. At this time, the 1st large board behavior part 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior part 224Gd are located in the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, and can be overlapped with the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208. .. In addition, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd internally have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED or the like, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

In addition, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a thousand box box accessory 224H, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. .. The thousand-box box accessory 224H is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryo box accessory 224H has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

A transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208, the family crest actor 224E, the first large board behavioral part 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral part 224Gd, and the thousand-box box part 224H. The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 67(a), the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of a region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

Further, in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol, for example, by the light emitting mode of the LED. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is drive-controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. While the symbol of the special figure is stopped, the LED is lit and displayed, but during the change of the symbol of the special figure, it is blinking or turned off. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is changing, and may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is stopped.

In the production device 206 shown in FIG. 67(b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative pattern display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative pattern display devices, the second decorative pattern display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the first decoration The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be a sub display device, and a second decorative symbol display device. 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the width direction, and the display area is slightly shorter in height. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right edge portion thereof overlaps the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has its left edge portion the first. 1 The decorative pattern display device 208N overlaps with the front surface side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the directions close to each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each configured to be slidable in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above do not have to be configured to be able to perform all, and any one operation or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to. Further, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the rendering operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the effect operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the effect operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different, for example, the number of effect operations that can be performed are different. Alternatively, the performance operation itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can be moved and rotated in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be moved in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to be able to perform an effect operation. Specifically, while the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a performance operation, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate, or Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. Further, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily variable display of the decorative symbol for each display device, and are named for convenience. Note that it does not limit the interpretation of the display device. Further, these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) are summarized as effect display means, and the effect display means is the decorative pattern. It is also possible to display the variable display of, or to display a plurality of types of effect. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front surface side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member that constitutes the rendering device 206, and a part thereof is not visible. The decoration member may be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative pattern display device 208L may be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, and the general figure holding lamp 216 are not shown. Omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, a variation icon h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal hs0, and notifies that the symbol variation display is being performed. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a lord's character is displayed. The second UI unit 281 has a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 67(b), since four variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h11, h12, h13, h14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In FIG. 67(b), the variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round unpatterned and white display mode), but the game progresses. Depending on the, the display mode may change. As a result, the notice display and the prefetch notice display can be performed.

In the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in a combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". The combination is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the second decorative design is displayed on the same decorative design display device as the first decorative design, but it may be displayed on a different decorative design display device. Further, the second decorative design may not be displayed on the first decorative design display device 208L, and only the first decorative design may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative patterns in the second decorative pattern matches the combination of the decorative patterns in the first decorative pattern, but the combination of the decorative patterns in the first decorative pattern and the decoration in the second decorative pattern A part (1 or 2 of the decorative patterns) or all of the combinations of the patterns may be inconsistent. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display region, but it may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Moreover, you may divide and display the 2nd hold|holding number display on the decoration design display device which is different in special figure 1 and special figure 2. In addition, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 does not need to be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be done. It should be noted that the second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special maps 1 and 2, or may display the hold numbers of both of the special maps 1 and 2. Good.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As the background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, probability variation state, hidden probability variation state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a pre-reading notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display irrelevant to the judgment result. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain game state (any one or more of a normal game state, a certainty variation state, a hidden certainty variation state, a time saving state). In this case, it may change with a law (for example, background display A→background display B→background display C→background display A→... If it collapses, it may be announced as a big hit confirmation (premier announcement). The order may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer circumference, but a frameless form may be used. Moreover, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate in the vertical direction according to the contents of the effect. .. In the example shown in FIG. 67(b), the family crest monument 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest monument 224E shown in FIG. 67(b) is the upper end of the family crest monument 224E. Although the portion is a position slightly overlapping the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned thousand-box box accessory 224H is arranged, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the contents of the effect. Senryo box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

The above-mentioned light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest actor 224E, and the thousand box actor 224H, and the player displays the display state of each decorative symbol display device through the light guide plate. The motion of each effect movable body can be visually confirmed.

Further, in FIG. 67(b), a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Next, an example of an effect using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67A or FIG. 67B will be described with reference to FIG. 68. Here, FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating an example of effects applicable in the present embodiment.

68(A1) to FIG. 68(A2), an operation mode of the production movable body in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 67(a) is shown. That is, when the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd and the Senryo box auditors 224H operate from the state shown in FIG. 68(A1), the mode shown in FIG. 68(A2) is obtained. Specifically, the first large board action character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd are first positioned until the characters “large”, “board”, “behavior”, and “mai” are at the positions facing the front. Each of them rotates, and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, the thousand-box box accessory 224H moves from the initial position to a position where it overlaps at approximately the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the thousand-box action product 224H is arranged on the front side of the first large-board action product 224Ga to the fourth large-board action product 224Gd, and the first large-board action product 224Ga to the fourth large-board action product 224Gd are the thousand-box action product. It is considered difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not overlapped with 224H. In addition, you may comprise so that the 1000-box box role object 224H may not overlap with the front surface side of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd. In addition, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the thousand-axle box auditors 224H and configured to overlap the thousand-robot box auditors 224H.

In FIG. 68(B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67(a), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 and various lamps may be reduced to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL more visible. ..

68(C1) to FIG. 68(C4), the operation mode of the production movable body in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 67(a) is shown. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 68(C1) to FIG. 68(C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as a production movable body is provided in place of the family crest 224E. The POV display 224I is also called a versa writer, is vertically movable, and is configured to be able to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but it can be set to any position. The POV display 280 has a lifting arm and an LED array rotatably attached to the tip of the lifting arm. The elevating arm can be moved up and down by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a line in the LED array, and the attitude extending in the horizontal direction is the initial attitude of the LED array. The LEDs provided in the LED array may be full-color LEDs or single-color LEDs. A motor is built in the tip of the elevating arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) performs one lighting control for each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array based on Versa data, which is a kind of effect data. To do. By doing so, the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs changes during the rotation of the LED array, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation locus of each LED, and a pattern is represented. Further, the POV display 224I is arranged on the front side of the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd and the thousand-box action product 224H. Can be set.

FIG. 68(C1) shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

In FIG. 68(C2), the POV display 224I shows a state in which the LED array is raised by the elevating arm, and the LED array is overlapped with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 substantially at the center. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is difficult to visually recognize the display screen as compared with the case where the POV display 224I does not overlap.

FIG. 68(C3) shows a state where the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array accelerates its rotation from low speed to high speed. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. Further, the rotating area of the LED array overlaps the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative pattern, and it is difficult to visually recognize them while the LED array is rotating.

In FIG. 68(C4), the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the characters “heat” are displayed, and the advance notice display or the prefetch advance notice display is shown. The image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the one described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. Further, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the emission brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced to improve the visibility of the image displayed on the POV display 224I. Good. Further, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the decorative pattern display device 208 may be displayed in the dark mode.

In FIG. 68(D1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67(b), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced, and the like. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made more visible.

68(E1) to FIG. 68(E2), a state in which the family crest actor 224E is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67(b) is shown. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(E1), the family crest monument 224E moves from the initial position to a raised position and overlaps the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM, The change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM are more difficult to visually recognize than when they do not overlap at least partially. Thereafter, as illustrated in FIG. 68(E2), the family crest monument 224E rotates in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest monument 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family coat emblem 224E may vibrate along with or instead of rotating. Alternatively, only the ascending may be performed, and the rotation and the vibration may not be performed. It should be noted that the production device 206 shown in FIG. 67(a) can also be applied.

In FIG. 68(F1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67(b), a state in which the thousand-box box accessory 224H is operating is shown. Specifically, it is shown that the thousand-box box accessory 224H is moving from the initial position to a position where it overlaps with the front surface side of substantially the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 68(F1), the first decorative design is made more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the first decorative design is in the non-overlapping state because the thousand-box box accessory 224H is overlapped. In this example of performance, when the Senryo box accessory 224H operates, the Senmon box accessory 224E does not operate so that the Senryo box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E do not interfere with each other. It should be noted that there may be a case where both the thousand-box box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E are in operation. In addition, when the Thousand Box Actor 224H operates, a retracting operation of further moving the family crest 224E may be performed.

In FIG. 68(G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67(b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A scroll display is also made. That is, with respect to the background image, an area that is not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides is configured to be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a result, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. It is possible to display the display. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M slides upward, The three decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

In FIG. 68(H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67(b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged to display the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. It is shown as being displayed across the devices 208N. That is, the left pattern of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the expanded first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and do not extend across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the enlarged first decorative symbol does not have to be displayed across two display devices, for example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Moreover, the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

68(I1) to FIG. 68(I2) show an operation mode of the production movable body in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 67(b). Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 68(I1) to 68(I2), the POV display 224I described above is provided in place of the family crest 224E. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 68(I1), the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

In FIG. 68 (I2), after the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to the position where the LED array overlaps with the front surface side of the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array rotates, and then the fixed rotation. It is shown that the speed is reached, the rotation speed is constant, and the word "heat" is displayed.

In FIG. 68 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67(b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is displayed. The background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281. That is, the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are performing different displays from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

68(K1) to 68(K4), an operation mode of the production movable body in production device 206 shown in FIG. 67(b) is shown. In the example shown in FIGS. 68(K1) to 68(K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is also visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

In FIG. 68(K1), a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the initial position is shown.

In FIG. 68 (K2), a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M are slidingly moved to positions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. Has been done. At this time, the displays of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scroll along with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display is made. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the images of the overlapping portions are adjusted according to the slide movement. By scrolling the display, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can perform a display with a sense of unity. As shown in FIG. 68(K2), the family crest monument 224E is moved downward from the initial position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the retracted position. Is becoming Here, as shown in FIG. 68(K2'), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without scrolling. Further, the family crest monument 224E may rotate at the initial position or may vibrate while the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating, It may vibrate while rotating.

68(K3) to FIG. 68(K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are close to each other, and the counterclockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that they are integrally rotating in the direction (CCW direction). In FIG. 68(K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shown rotated 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative pattern so that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N respectively match the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A display is displayed that rotates in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N about the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. Thereby, the player may rotate the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but the displayed image may not appear to rotate.

FIG. 68(L1) shows a modification of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67(a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 68 (L1), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative pattern display device 208 in place of the family crest monument 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative pattern display device 208. It overlaps at least part of the lower end. On the sub display device 208S, the respective displays in the above-mentioned first UI unit 280 and second UI unit 281 (holding frame) are displayed. That is, on the sub display device 208S, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. The display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani walks from the right side to the left side is shown, but a part of the character SBH overlaps with the sub display device 208S. It is made more difficult to visually recognize than when the display device 208S is not overlapped. Note that, as shown in FIG. 68 (L1'), a display image (background image, character SBH of the sabotani, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

In FIG. 68 (M1), the operation modes of the sub-display device 208S and the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd are shown. That is, the sub-display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position that is on the front side in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 1 large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the 4th large-board behavior auditors 224Gd rotate to the positions where the characters “large”, “board”, “behavior”, and “mai” are in front, and then the decorative symbol display device 208. Of the sub display device 208S that has moved to a position near the center of the front surface of the sub display device 208S. At this time, a cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, which shows that a predetermined notice effect or a look-ahead notice effect is being performed. ing.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72. Here, FIG. 69 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 70 is a step following the example of the effect shown in FIG. 69. 71 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 70, and FIG. 72 is a diagram showing stepwise about another example of the effect shown in FIG. 71. ..

In FIG. 69, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, a special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, a general symbol hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following, description will be made by applying the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67(a), but it is also possible to apply the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67(b). Further, in the following, illustrations of the family crest actor 224E, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, the thousand-box box auditors 224H, and the light guide plate IL are omitted.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 69(1), a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (coast background image) as shown in FIG. 67A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative design is also stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative design of the first decorative design in combination with the decorative design of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". The navigation character YM is displayed on the first UI portion 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 69(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable icon h0 is not displayed.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 69 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. In addition, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state.

On the second UI unit 281, a hold icon representing the hold of Toku-zu 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holding icons of special figure 1 and the second holding number display, and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is In addition to the number of holding lamps 220 turned on, the number of holding icons and the second holding number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon,.... In the second UI unit 281, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side have the older winning icons.

In FIG. 69(1), the two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed on the second UI unit 281, and both of the two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are in the default display mode. It is displayed in a (circular unpatterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon. 69(1), in order to make it easy to understand that the four UI icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the ID icons that are not actually displayed are indicated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 69(1), the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are sectioned by broken lines for ease of explanation, but the broken lines are not actually displayed.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 69 is the non-electric power support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chu and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon holding icon of the special drawing which is easier to win in special maps 1 and 2 is displayed, and the holding icon of the other special map is displayed. I try not to display it. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 69(1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281, and the hold icon of special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed and the hold icon of special figure 1 is not displayed. Note that the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is the variation start in the special symbol display device→the start or the extinction of the fourth symbol blinking→the start of the variation of the second decorative symbol→the start or deletion of the moving animation of the hold icon→the ornament Although it is performed in the order of starting the variation of the symbols, this order may be changed.

In FIG. 69(2), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon or decoration The pattern has not changed yet. In addition, the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may start simultaneously, or the variation display of the fourth symbol after the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 starts. May be started, or the symbol fluctuation in the first special symbol display device 212 may be started after the variable display of the fourth symbol is started.

In FIG. 69(3), the second hold number display is updated from 2 to 1, and a state in which the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started is shown. It should be noted that the update display of the second hold number display and the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol may be performed at the same time, or the change of the second decorative symbol after the update display of the second hold number indicator is performed. The display may be started, or the update display of the second hold number display may be performed after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 69(4), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement (decrease) animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves toward the pedestal hs0 of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time as the start, the hold icon located at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 67). .. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started.

In FIG. 69(5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 69(6), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the base hs0 of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11, is displayed as the first hold icon h11, and then changes the first decorative symbol. The display starts. In addition, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 until then may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon until then. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. Note that the end of the moving animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the end of the moving animation, or The movement animation may end after the variable display of one decorative pattern starts.

In FIG. 69(7), a state in which the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed is shown.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 69(8), it is shown that the navigation character YM gives a navigation character advance notice. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208, when the navigation character advance notice is started, a balloon with the letters "opportunity" displayed near the navigation character YM is displayed to inform that the expectation for a big hit is high.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 69(9), a state in which the conversation advance notice is started while the navigation character advance notice is being shown is shown. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Moreover, the conversation image CI1 of this lord is overlapped with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design is not overlapped. Further, in the navigator character notice, the balloon display is changed from the character display of "opportunity" to the character display of "no", and it is informed that the expectation for the jackpot is further increased. It should be noted that the timing at which the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “No”, or the display in the balloon after the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed. May be updated to “No”, or the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to “No”. Note that there may be a case where an effect (for example, “No”) that promotes from a previously displayed notice (for example, “opportunity”) to a later displayed notice (for example, “Extreme heat”) may not be performed. .. Further, the navigation character notice is not limited to the notice in the symbol variation display, but also the notice in advance, the notice indicating that a certain notice will be given, and the explanation display (various notices, game states, characters that appear in the effects of the pachinko machine 100). Or explanation of the stage of production, etc., also referred to as a tutorial display), etc. may be performed.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 69(10), the conversation announcement is updated and the navigation character announcement is also updated. In the conversation notice, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the grandfather's conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image for urging the chance button 136 to be pressed within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed by. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 69(10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the old conversation image CI2, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol. Sometimes you can. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the grandparent conversation image CI2 and the palace's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 69(10), the palace's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation is more than that in the case where the conversation image CI1 is not overlapped. It is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the image CI1. Further, in the navigation character notice, the balloon display is changed from the character display of "No" to the character display of "Extreme heat", and it is informed that the expectation for the big hit is considerably high. Further, the display of this balloon overlaps a part of the old conversation image CI2. Note that the timing at which the grandpa conversation image CI2 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "intense heat", or the timing at which the grandpa conversation image CI2 is displayed is displayed in the balloon. The display may be updated to "intense heat", or the old conversation image CI2 may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "intense heat". As described above, in this example of performance, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Also, when the conversation notice is updated, the lord's conversation image CI1 may not be displayed in a reduced size (for example, the display having the same size as that in FIG. 69(9) is displayed), and the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed. It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation image displayed first, and the conversation notice A, which has a high degree of expectation for a big hit when displayed, is the conversation image. It may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

Then, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 69(11). The player may sometimes be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the chance button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 69(11).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 69(12) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed after the operation valid period starts, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 69(13), the game is played. It is shown that the person is pressing the chance button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 69 (12), the navigation character advance notice has ended and the balloon display has been erased. When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 69(14), in the old conversation image CI2, the text "It's intense heat" is displayed instead of the operation promotion notification image. There are cases where This informs that the reliability of the big hit is considerably high. The notice character display such as "It's intense heat" may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed even when the time has passed.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 69(15), the state in which the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased and the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative pattern is easily visible. It is shown.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69(16), after "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 69(17), "decoration" is displayed on the right symbol. 7” is stopped and displayed, and the reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to produce that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 69(17) to 69(19), when the reach state is formed, the decorative pattern display device 208 performs the reach start animation. In the reach start animation in this production example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display for enlarging/reducing the left symbol and the right symbol is performed. It should be noted that an appropriate display mode can be adopted as the display mode of the animation at the start of reach. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by seeing this reach start animation.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 69(20) to (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved to the left and right, respectively, and displayed, and the first UI unit 280 changes The icon h0 is left behind and the frame is displayed below the display area, and the hold icons h11 to h14 (the hold icon h11 in the example shown in FIG. 69(20)) displayed on the second UI unit 281 are also framed out. .. The start of the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol and the start of the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be the same timing, or The frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started after the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is started, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the frame-out display of each image in is started, the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(22), the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-sized board action product 224Ga and the second large-sized board action product 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. Note that only a part or all of the first large-scale behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditors 224Gd may operate, and for example, the first large-scale behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Ga The reliability may be different depending on the number of the 4 large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operating. In addition, there may be cases where the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 69 (23 ), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light guide plate IL may not emit light. For example, there may be a case where both the operations of the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditor 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed, or the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior. There may be a case where only the accessory 224Gd is operated and the light guide plate IL does not emit light, or only the light guide plate IL emits light, and the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior There is a case where the operation of the object 224Gd is not performed, and there is a case where both the operation of the first large board action member 224Ga to the fourth large board action object 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il are not performed. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. 70(25), the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd are respectively initialized. Return to position. In addition, the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after the first large-scale behavior member 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior member 224Gd return to their initial positions, or the first large-scale behavior member 224Ga to the second large-scale behavior member 224Ga to The start of the movement of the four-large-board behavior accessory 224Gd to the initial position and the end of the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed at the same time. Here, in FIGS. 69(22) to (24), a series of effects performed by the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor 224Gd and the light guide plate IL is a series of effects. It may be configured so that a big hit is more likely to occur than in the case where no effect is performed.

FIG. 70 (26) shows the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 70(26), the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 70(27), the duel scene between the main character and the enemy swordsman. Animation is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, showing that the button effect is started. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (29), the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 70(30) shows that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 70(31), the player It is shown that the chance button 136 is pressed. When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed as shown in FIG. 70 (32), and a notice effect is given to inform that the reliability of the big hit is high. .. The lord's cut-in image CI3 overlaps the animation display of the duel scene, and is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the lord's cut-in image CI3 is not displayed. The cut-in image C13 of the lord may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 has been operated, or even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. It may be displayed.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (33), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is erased, and the animation display of the duel scene continues.

Thereafter, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, showing that the second button effect has started after the super reach was developed. ing. Then, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 70(35), the player can receive the operation of the chance button 136.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 70(36) shows that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 70(37), the player It is shown that the chance button 136 is pressed. It should be noted that the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button effect after developing to super reach. In this case, the operation reaches the super reach. The speed at which the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT decreases in the second button effect after the start may be faster than the speed in which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect after developing to super reach. Also, the operation valid period in the first button performance after developing to super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period in the second button performance after developing to super reach, or after developing to super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development to the super reach may have the same length.

When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 70 (38 ), the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the duel scene animation display to the effect image display, and at the same time, the first large board. The behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gd operate, and each overlaps on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left pattern and the right pattern of the effect image and the first decorative pattern are respectively overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, and the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object. It is considered to be difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. Note that only a part or all of the first large-scale behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditors 224Gd may operate, and for example, the first large-scale behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Ga The reliability may be different depending on the number of the 4 large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operating. The effect shown in FIG. 70 (38) may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 has been operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. It may be displayed in some cases. In addition, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd is performed. In addition, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral goods 224Gd are performed, the first large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth after the effect images are displayed. The operation of the large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd may be started, the effect image may be displayed after the operations of the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditor 224Gd are started, or the effect image may be displayed. And the operation of the first large-scale behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the effect display that causes a loss may be performed without the effect shown in FIG. 70 (38), and further, the effect display that causes a loss may be performed. You may make it display the revival effect after it is performed and perform the effect display that is a big hit. It should be noted that when the effect shown in FIG. 70 (38) is started, the displayed variable icon h0 is hidden, but it may be continuously displayed.

Then, in FIG. 70 (39), the thousand box accessory 224H operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the decoration symbol display device 208 and the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd. Is shown. Further, thereafter, FIG. 70 (40) shows that the light guide plate IL emits light. Note that the display of the effect image, the operations of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box cabinet auditors 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are not limited to those described above. Instead, it can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-box action product 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the division is not conducted.

FIG. 70(41) shows a state where the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (42), the thousand-box box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. Then, in FIG. 70(43), the effect image fades out, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(44), the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd respectively move toward the initial positions. Has started. At this time, the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarting while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also restarted.

Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 70 (46). In FIG. 70(46), the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 70(47), "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle pattern to notify that it is a big hit. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 71 (49), the first decorative pattern is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". The swing fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. It should be noted that the second decorative design is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left design, the middle design, and the right design. The background here may be a non-displayed background image, a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or the same background image as before the super reach is performed. In addition, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon may be displayed. Although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of special figure A. At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol is confirmed to stop, the swing fluctuation continues in the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 71 (51), the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively. Along with the stop display with the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays the symbols in a manner that the symbols have stopped.

After that, when the big hit game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control part 300 to the first sub control part 400, as shown in FIG. 71 (52), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit start effect is produced. The display will start. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", a "special bonus" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game is played. It has been reported to the person that the 15R probability variation big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (52), mini right hitting display for instructing right hitting is performed in the upper left corner of the display area. Note that the mini right-handed display may not be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71(53), after the right-hand hitting instruction screen for instructing the player to right-handed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 71(54), the first round is started. When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a round effect and displays "decoration 7" indicating a combination of decorative symbols when a big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen. Has been done. In addition, the mini right hitting display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the current round "1R" is displayed in the upper right corner. It should be noted that the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game or the total number of prize balls obtained during the continuous vacation may be displayed.

Then, when the big hit game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 71 (55), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the round effect display, and at the upper right corner of the display area, The current round "15R" is displayed.

FIG. 71 (56) shows that the big hit game is over and the big hit end effect display is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the big hit game this time is a big hit game started as a 15R probability variable big hit, after the big hit game ends, the game state becomes a special figure high probability general figure high probability state (probably changed state with electric support). Therefore, in the big hit end effect display, "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating that is displayed, and it is informed that the state shifts to the probability changing state with electric support.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (57), a display (attention display) is displayed to call attention to forgetting to take out the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 45). In addition, this warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the game state not being electric support is over, or regardless of the situation where the big hit is a big hit It may be displayed without fail when the game is over.

FIG. 71 (58) shows a state before the jackpot game is over, the state changes to the positive variation state with electric support, and the first symbol variation display is started. In the probability change state with electric support, the background image is the background image for the probability change state with electric support, and the decorative pattern is also a display mode different from the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state) .. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed in the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is a rectangular unpatterned and white display mode, and the display mode (shape here) is different from that of the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the player Can be discriminated from at a glance. The default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 may be the same. 71(58) to (63), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold that is not actually displayed is displayed. The icon is indicated by a broken line. In addition, in FIGS. 71 (58) to (63), the pending icon display area 282 in FIG. 2 is divided by a broken line to facilitate the description, but the broken line is actually displayed. Not done. Further, in the probability change state with power support, the holding icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed, but it may be displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (58), a mini right hit display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a character of "bonus ×○" indicating the number of consecutive holidays is displayed below it. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (58), since the first big hit game is over, a display of "bonus x 1" indicating that is displayed.

Then, after the variable display of the symbols on the first special symbol display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 71(59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71(60) instructs the player to strike right. Right-handed notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in a mode in which the characters "please right-hand" are displayed on the semitransparent strip image. The right-hand hit notification overlaps the decorative design, and the decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the decorative design does not overlap. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric sapo state that has transitioned after the first big hit game, but may also be displayed in the electric sapo state that has transitioned after the big hit game other than the first big hit game has finished. For example, it may be displayed every time the big hit game ends and the electric power support state is entered. Further, after shifting to the electric support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is left-handed. For example, it is detected that the player has won the first special figure starting port 230. In this case, it may be determined that the left-handed stroke has been performed and the right-handed stroke notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (60), the second hold number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (61) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the right-handing notification is displayed, the right-handing notification is hidden as shown in FIG. 71 (62). Note that the mini right-handed display continues to be performed.

In FIG. 71 (63), the state in which the symbol variable display of special figure 2 is suspended is four. That is, in the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, all four lamps are turned on to indicate that there are four special figure 2 holds, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 are held. Is displayed four times. Also, in the second hold number display, “4” is displayed, which indicates that the number of hold in the special figure 2 is four.

FIG. 72 (49a) shows another effect example following that of FIG. 70 (48). 69 to 70, the case where "decoration 7" is in the reach state and the middle pattern is "decoration 7" is described, but here, "decoration 6" is in the reach state. A case where "decoration 6" is displayed on the design will be described. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (49a), a state in which the first decorative pattern is swinging in a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is shown. It should be noted that the second decorative design is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left design, the middle design, and the right design. The background here may be a non-displayed background image, a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or the same background image as before the super reach is performed. In addition, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon may be displayed. Although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure B at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (50a). At the timing shown in FIG. 72 (50a), the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state of not receiving the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, and therefore has not determined to be the symbol fixed stop, The first decorative symbol continues to shake and fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still in the variable display.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 72 (51a), the decoration of the first decoration pattern and the second decoration pattern is "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", respectively. Along with the stop display in the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays the symbols in a manner that the symbols have stopped. By seeing this, the player may sometimes be able to recognize that either the actual 5R probability variation big hit, the 5R normal big hit, or the 2R normal big hit has been hit.

After that, when the big hit game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 72 (52a), the decoration symbol display device 208, the big hit start effect. The display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", a "bonus" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the player It is reported that the actual 5R probability variation big hit is either 5R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (52a), the mini right hit display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

FIG. 72 (38b) shows another effect example following that of FIG. 70 (37). FIG. 72 (38b) shows that the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that it is lost. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is restarted. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out and the animation display of the duel scene is restarted. Here, the main character loses to the enemy swordsman, then the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 71 (40b), the variable icon h0, the second hold number display and the second decorative pattern are displayed. It remains and is hidden.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 72(41b) to (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) are scrolled in from below the display area, and the holding icon is displayed. The navigation character YM is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation fluctuation is started in the combination of the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". It should be noted that the second decorative design is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left design, the middle design, and the right design.

After that, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of special figure I at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (43b). At the timing shown in FIG. 72 (43b), the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, and therefore has not determined that it is the symbol confirmation stop, The fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is continuously changed, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still in the variable display.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 72 (44b), the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", respectively. Along with the stop display in the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays the symbols in a manner that the symbols have stopped.

Subsequently, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (45b), the variable icon erasing animation is displayed. In the variable icon erasing animation display, the variable icon h0 gradually becomes smaller, and finally, as shown in FIG. 72(46b), the variable icon h0 disappears in an animation display. The variable icon deletion animation may be started before the special figure is stopped.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment can perform various customizations.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the contents of customization that can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the symbol variation display is not started even after a fixed time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the symbol variation display is stopped, the display shifts to the demonstration mode and the decorative symbol display device 208 It becomes a demo screen. In addition, from the stop of the symbol variation display of the special symbol to the shift to the demonstration mode, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the combination of the stopped symbols of the decorative symbols, and the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated. When operated, a special animation may be displayed. On the demo screen, a dedicated animation is displayed, or a combination of stop patterns of decorative patterns (when the decorative pattern is composed of images of characters and the like and character images (including numbers), images of characters and the like are displayed on the demo screen. Is displayed and the character image may not be displayed, or both the character image and the character image may be displayed), or a movie including the model title (note that the degree of expectation is High-quality notices and production introduction movies that introduce highly-reachable contents may be included), and there is also a period during which the menu icon, volume adjustment icon, and brightness adjustment icon are displayed. .. It should be noted that the demonstration mode may include a state in which a combination of stop display of decorative symbols is displayed.

When the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is operated while the menu icon, the volume adjustment icon, and the brightness adjustment icon are displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an option menu. Further, by operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 1, a volume control window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the volume of the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 1 etc. can be increased or decreased. Further, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137, a brightness adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, such as the game board lamp 442 and/or the game underframe lamp 452 shown in FIG. The light quantity of the LED can be increased or decreased. Here, the game board lamp 442 includes the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 67 and the like, but need not include it. If the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 are operated while the volume adjustment window is displayed, the brightness adjustment window is displayed. Conversely, if the brightness adjustment window is displayed, the operation key unit 137 is displayed. By operating the left and right keys of, the volume adjustment window is displayed.

As will be described later in detail, an icon for "returning to the demo screen" is prepared in the option menu, and if the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor on this icon, the screen returns to the demo screen. be able to. Further, when the variable display of special symbols is started, the option menu is automatically ended, and the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Furthermore, if there is no operation for a certain period (for example, 1 minute) with the option menu displayed, the screen automatically returns to the demo screen.

When the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, the volume is determined, the demo screen is returned from the volume adjustment window, and the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137. When the button is pressed, the amount of light is determined, and the demo screen is returned from the brightness adjustment window. Further, even if the chance button 136 is not pressed, the demo screen is automatically returned after a lapse of a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) after operating the left and right keys or the up and down keys. Further, when the variable display of special symbols is started, the volume adjustment window and the brightness adjustment window are also automatically disappeared here, and the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 73B is a diagram showing the structure of the option menu.

In the option menu, it is possible to roughly perform "effect customization", "character selection", "holding frame selection", "holding display selection", and "background display selection".

The “auto button mode” in the “production customization” may be the same response production as when operating the operation means such as the chance button 136 without operating the operation means such as the chance button 136. It is a mode. It should be noted that ON/OFF described in “Option” in FIG. 73B means setting/non-setting and valid/invalid. “Long-press automatic continuous hit” means that the operation means such as the chance button 136 is simply long-pressed, and high-speed pressing is repeated during the long-press operation (continuous hits are performed). ) It is a function to perform the same response effect as the time, and the speed of repeated hits can be selected. The “group notice” is a type of normal notice (preliminary notice of the fluctuation), and in this option menu, the player can select the reliability (expectation) of the big notice of the group notice. For example, there is a 100% confidence that the fluctuation that the group notice is displayed may be a big hit! ? However, if you want to increase the frequency that the group notice appears as a notice of the fluctuation, set the reliability to 50%, and set the frequency that the group notice appears as a notice of the fluctuation to 50% than when you set it. Although it is also low, if you want to be displayed in the fluctuation as a big hit rich (big hit confirmed) reliability 100%! ? Set to. The "winning sound notice" is a type of pre-reading notice when the number of holdings increases due to winning at the special map starting port. The winning sound notice may be a notice of the change. The back button means that the operation valid period of the operating means such as the chance button 136 has started and/or does not inform that the operation valid period of the operating means is in progress. When "Navi" is turned on (set), for example, the chance button lamp 138 lights up during the operation effective period of the operating means, or a character display such as "it may be good to operate the operating means" is displayed. Will be done. "No pre-reading notice" is not performed for all pre-reading notices other than the pre-reading notice by the display mode of the hold icon (for example, pre-reading notice by the movable means (effect movable body) or the pre-read notice display other than the hold icon by the display means) ( (Corresponding to "ON"). The “premier up” is a setting for increasing the appearance frequency of a big hit rich or big hit confirmed effect (corresponding to “ON”). “No change to hold” is a setting that does not give advance notice of advance due to the display mode of the hold icon (corresponding to “ON”). The "one-shot notification" is a specific notice about a big hit concentration or a big hit confirmation (for example, a production operation by a production movable body, a big hit rich (big hit confirmation) sound by a sound output means, a frame or a game board. Some or all of the decorative LED lights will be used to give notice.)

In addition, in the present specification, "big hit confirmation" means a symbol variation in which a big jackpot confirmation notice is displayed or a symbol variation of a lookahead target reservation when the relevant notice of big jackpot confirmation and/or prefetch notice notice is displayed. When the pre-reading notice for confirming the big hit is displayed, it indicates that the fluctuation or the hold of the pre-reading target is always the big hit (the same applies to the following description).

Further, in the present specification, "big hit concentration" means a state where the expectation for a big hit is high, and even if the notice of the big hit concentration and/or the notice of look-ahead notice is displayed, the notice of the big hit concentration is displayed. It is shown that even if a big hit rich pre-reading notice is displayed toward the design change or the design change of the pre-reading object held, it may be lost (same in the following description). Further, the jackpot concentration may indicate that the jackpot is confirmed (the same applies in the following description).

Furthermore, the description "hot" in the present specification is also a state where the expectation for a big hit is high, but even if the notice of hot and/or the notice of look-ahead notice is displayed, a design with a notice of hot is displayed. It indicates that even if a hot-reading advance notice is displayed for the fluctuation or the symbol fluctuation of the pre-reading target suspension (this also applies to the following description). In addition, "hot" may indicate that the expectation of the big hit is lower than that of the big hit, and "intense heat" may indicate that the big hit is concentrated or the big hit is confirmed (explained below. The same in.)

Further, the "Daitomo" described in FIG. 73(b) is a member service in which member registration is performed and access is made to the Web server through the Internet line, and the level (lv) can be obtained by accumulating experience values. Is a service that allows you to get various benefits according to your level. When the member service of "Daitomo" is executed, the pachinko machine 100 is set to the user mode. Some pachinko machines 100 have specifications that do not support the "Daitomo" member service. For models with specifications compatible with the "Ditemo" member service, if the user mode is set and the level of the Daitomo reaches the 15th level, the setting of the back button navigation is released as a kind of production customization. Further, in FIG. 73(b), the item described as "Daitomo setting" is opened only by performing member registration and setting the user mode. Therefore, even if the level is 0 at the time of joining Daitomo, the holding frame B can be used only by setting the user mode and selecting the holding frame. Here, the holding frame corresponds to a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 shown in FIG. 67 and the like. The “initial setting” means that the item is automatically selected when the user mode is not set. In addition, "Daitomo" can have an experience of membership before being officially registered as a member, and as a trial play, an experienced character can use the grandfather character in character selection.

Further, one of the above benefits of Daitomo is an item that cannot be selected unless the level of Daitomo is raised. That is, among the "character selection", "holding frame selection", "holding display selection", and "background display selection", the item for which the Daitomo level (lv) is displayed in the "opening condition" is the displayed level. It is an item that can be selected only after reaching (lv).

FIG. 74 is a transition diagram of the option menu screen when the member service is not used.

By operating the up key or down key of the operation key unit 137, the cursor moves up and down on the option menu screen displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. "Direction customization", "Character selection", "Holding frame selection", "Holding display selection", "Background display selection", "Initialization", "Return to demo screen" items are connected by an arrow Between the two, the cursor is moved by operating the up key or the down key of the operation key unit 137, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, a screen corresponding to the item displayed by the cursor is displayed. That is, if the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor is placed on the item “production customization”, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the production customization screen. If the cursor is moved to the item "return to demo screen" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the demo screen.

On the other hand, the "return" icon is displayed on each of the "production customization screen", "character selection screen", "holding frame selection screen", "holding display selection screen", "background display selection screen", and "initialization confirmation screen". Is displayed, and by moving the cursor to the icon of "return" and pressing the chance button 136, it is possible to return to the option menu screen. Alternatively, the user may be able to return to the option menu screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "return" icon.

Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212 and 214 and the variable display of the special figure is started, even if the option menu screen is displayed, the "production customization screen" is displayed. , "Character selection screen", "Holding frame selection screen", "Holding display selection screen", "Background display selection screen", "Initialization confirmation screen", it also shifts to the screen of variable display of decorative symbols.

Subsequently, the matters described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74 will be specifically described using a display example on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of calling the option menu screen, the volume adjustment window, and the brightness adjustment window from the demo screen. The example described here is an example of a pachinko machine 100 having a specification that does not support the "DAITOMO" member service, and the open condition of FIG. 73(b) is ignored, and any item is selected from the beginning. It is possible. In the following embodiments, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an icon showing the appearance of the cross key (up key, down key, left key, right key) of the operation key unit or an icon showing the appearance of the chance button. In this case, a colorless and non-patterned icon indicates an inoperable operating means, and an icon displayed in another mode (colored and/or patterned) indicates an operable operating means.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative patterns (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative pattern (third pattern) and the second decorative pattern (fifth pattern). The special variable symbol display is stopped. Furthermore, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number of special figure 1 and the hold number of special figure 2 are both zero. In other words, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display is not started after the stop symbol of the special symbol is confirmed and displayed. In this state, when a certain time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI shown in FIG. 75(1) is started. Even before the elapse of a certain period of time, the final display period of the special symbol stop symbol is ended, and the next symbol variable display is not started (for example, the special symbol stop symbol is fixed in the state where there is no hold. Immediately after the display period elapses, these icons MI, VI, BI may be displayed by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 or the cross key of the operation unit). In addition to the condition that a certain fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the special figure has ended, these icons MI, VI, BI may be displayed. Good. Alternatively, even if the display of these icons MI, VI, BI is started, even if the chance button 136 and the cross key of the operation key unit 137 are operated for a certain period (for example, 3 seconds), the option menu screen and the volume adjustment are performed. The window or the brightness adjustment window may not be displayed.

Further, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI may include a display (character display or image display) of the customized content. For example, in the case of the menu icon MI, character display or icon display for production customization, in the case of the volume adjustment icon VI, the gauge display showing the volume level, and in the brightness adjustment icon BI, the gauge display showing the light level. May be included. Further, the menu icon MI may include a large item display (for example, “character selection”) shown in FIG. 73(b), or may not be included as shown in FIG. 75(1). Good.

In FIG. 75(2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit is operated. The same applies even if the upper key 137u is operated. Although the cross key is lit in white in a non-operated state, the pressed key changes to red lighting, but the cross key may not be provided with a decorative lamp.

The operation of the down key 137d causes the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(3) to display the brightness adjustment window BW. The brightness adjustment window BW is displayed larger than the brightness adjustment icon BI, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(3), the menu icon MI disappears and the volume adjustment icon VI shifts to the position of the menu icon MI. The brightness adjustment window BW having a size about four times as large as the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the light amount of the LED for the game board lamp 442 and/or the game underframe lamp 452 can be adjusted in five stages, and the initial value is the brightest five levels.

In FIG. 75(4), the down key 137d is operated again, and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG.

In FIG. 75(6), the upper key 137u of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 75(7) has moved up one level and has returned to the 5th level. Even if the up key 137u is operated in the 5-level state, the light amount does not increase any more. Even if the down key 137d is operated in the 1-level state, the light amount does not decrease further. Further, if no operation is performed for a fixed period (for example, 10 seconds), the screen returns to the demo screen in which the three icons MI, VI, BI are displayed, but if the up key 137d or the down key 137u is operated, the fixed period The start count can be updated. That is, the period until returning to the demo screen can be extended. It should be noted that 0 level below 1 level may be settable. At this 0 level, the LED will remain off.

In FIG. 75(8), the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated. The same applies even when the left key 137l is operated.

By operating the right key, the volume control window VW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(9). The volume adjustment window VW is displayed larger than the volume adjustment icon VI, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(9), the volume adjustment window VW is on the menu icon MI side and is about four times the volume adjustment icon VI. Is enlarged and displayed, the menu icon MI disappears, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the volume from the speaker 120 can be adjusted in five stages, and the initial value is three levels of the intermediate volume.

In FIG. 75(10), the right key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again, and the volume adjustment window VW shown in (11) of FIG. Even if the right key is operated in the 5 loudest level, the volume does not increase further. In addition, even if the left key is operated in the 1-level state, the volume does not decrease further. If no operation is performed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), the screen returns to the demo screen on which the three icons MI, VI, BI are displayed, but if the left key or the right key is operated, the screen returns to the demo screen. The period can be extended. It should be noted that 0 level below 1 level may be settable. At the 0 level, the speaker 120 keeps muted.

Since a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the last operation, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(13) displays a demo screen on which three icons MI, VI, BI are displayed. I'm back.

In FIG. 75(14), the chance button 136 is operated and the chance button 136 is operated, so that the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(15) displays the option menu screen. Note that the chance button 136 emits red light when the built-in chance button lamp 138 is pressed, but it may be lit in red before it is pressed. In this option menu screen, all of the background display, the holding frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative design (third design), and the second decorative design (fifth design) disappear, and under the character display of "menu". , 7 kinds of icons such as a performance customization icon, a character selection icon, a holding frame selection icon, a holding display selection icon, a background display selection icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon for returning to the demo screen in order from the top in a vertical line. It is displayed. A cursor icon cs which can be moved up and down by the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 75(14), a cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top production customization icon, and the other production icons are displayed in white, whereas the production customization icon is lit in red. Further, on the option menu screen, the pattern of the operation means that can be used for the selection operation and the determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, in the operation key unit 137, the pattern of the cross key used for the selection operation and the pattern of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. Furthermore, the chance button 136 and the symbols of the cursor icon cs and the up/down keys 137u and 137d used for moving the cursor display among the cross keys are displayed in red. In addition, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136 in the determination operation, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

Here, although the option menu screen is not displayed even if the chance button 136 is operated during brightness adjustment or volume adjustment in FIGS. 75(2) to (12), it may be displayed. .. The initial position of the cursor icon cs at the start of displaying the option menu screen may be the top production customization icon, the return icon, or any other icon. Alternatively, it may be an icon of an item currently being customized.

In FIG. 75(16), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the production customization icon, and as shown in FIG. 75(17), the decorative pattern display device 208 has a production customization screen. Is displayed. A list of 5 lines is displayed on the production customization screen, and in the list, five items from the top of the display of the small items in the production customization shown in FIG. Button navigation”) and respective options (for example, “OFF ON”) are displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the list of 5 lines. Furthermore, below that, a confirmation icon for saving the setting changes, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, and an initialization icon for collectively returning the settings to the initial values are arranged horizontally in a row from the left side. ing. Further, in the production customization screen, a cursor display is used instead of the cursor icon. The initial position of the cursor display at the time of starting the production customization screen display is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen. The return icon for which the cursor display is displayed has a frame highlighted, and is further illuminated and displayed in red. Further, the currently set option among the displayed options is also displayed in red. For example, in the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 75(17), the auto button mode is not set (OFF). Further, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are also displayed at the lower right of the effect customization screen. In the effect customizing screen, all the keys 137u, d, l, r of the cross keys are displayed in red.

In FIG. 75(18), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item of the auto button mode. That is, in the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 75(19), the frame of the item in the auto button mode is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and a description of the auto button mode is displayed.

In FIG. 75(20), the right key 137r is operated in the state where the cursor display is displayed in the item of the auto button mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 75(21), the currently set option in the auto button mode changes to ON. That is, it was switched from OFF to ON. If the left key 137l is operated while the currently set option is OFF, the key operation is invalid, but the same result as when the right key 137r is operated may be obtained.

In FIG. 75(22), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item immediately below in the auto button mode (long press auto continuous hit). That is, in the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 75(23), the frame of the item of long press auto continuous hit is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and a description of this item is displayed. When the up key 137u is operated instead of the down key 137d, the cursor display moves to the confirm icon when the setting is changed, and moves to the return icon when the setting is not changed. However, the icon may be moved to the confirmation icon or may be moved to the return icon regardless of whether the setting is changed.

After that, the down key 137d is operated three times, and the cursor display moves to the back button navigation item at the bottom. That is, in the production customizing screen shown in FIG. 75(25), the frame of the item of the back button navigation is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and a description of this item is displayed.

In FIG. 75(26), the down key 137d is operated once more to update the list of five lines as shown in FIG. 75(27). The item of the button mode disappears, and the cursor display is moved to the newly added item, which is 06 in FIG. 73(b), without the pre-reading notice.

In FIG. 75(28), the down key 137d is further operated.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 75.

The list is updated in accordance with the operation of the down key 137d, and in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 76(29) following FIG. 75(28), the last small item of effect customization in FIG. 73(b), 09 The cursor is moved to the one-time notification item.

When the down key 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 76(30), the cursor display moves to the confirm icon and the confirm icon has a frame highlighted as shown in FIG. 76(31). , It is displayed in red.

In FIG. 76 (32a), the chance button 136 is operated as a determination operation, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (33a), the notification screen for notifying the completion of setting of effect customization is overlaid on the effect customization screen from the front side. Is displayed. Note that a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the effect customization settings are updated may be displayed. A return icon for returning to the option menu screen is displayed on the notification screen shown in FIG. 76 (33a), and the cursor display is displayed on the icon.

In FIG. 76(34), the chance button 136 is operated, and as shown in FIG. 76(35), the screen returns to the option menu screen.

The return icon on the notification screen shown in FIG. 76 (33a) may be an icon for returning to the effect customizing screen, and by operating the return icon arranged on the effect customizing screen, the option menu screen is displayed. You may be able to return.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is being displayed as shown in FIG. 76 (36) (see FIG. 76 (37)), FIG. ), the cursor icon cs that has been displayed in the production customization icon is moved down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon is red. Lights up.

In FIG. 76(39), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed in the character selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 76(40), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a character selection screen. Is displayed. A list of 5 lines is also displayed on the character selection screen, and in the list, 5 items (“01 Yoshimune” to “05 Hani”) from the top of the options displayed in the character selection shown in FIG. 73(b) are displayed. It is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the list of 5 lines. In FIG. 76(40), the cursor display is displayed in the item of Yoshimune, and the character pattern of the item for which the cursor display is displayed (here, the pattern of Yoshimune) is preview-displayed on the left side of the character selection screen. Has been done. Note that, as shown in 73(b), the initial setting for character selection is Yoshimune, but this initial setting itself may be omitted. Further, in the lower right of the character selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a cross-shaped key (up/down keys 137u, d only for red) used for selection operation, and a red chance used for determination operation. The design of the button 136 is also displayed.

The character set by the character selection here is always displayed, always appears at the time of production, and the appearance frequency becomes higher than other characters.

When the down key 137d is operated once as shown in FIG. 76(41), the cursor display moves to the grandfather of the item one below Yoshimune, as shown in FIG. 76(42). The design is previewed.

In FIG. 76(43), the down key 137d is operated five more times, and the list is updated in accordance with the operation of the down key 137d. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 76(44), the list shown in FIG. 73(b) is displayed. The cursor display is moved to the item of 07, which is the last option for character selection.

When the down key 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 76(45), as shown in FIG. 76(46), the cursor display moves to the return icon, and the return icon has a frame highlighted. , It is displayed in red.

Here, when the down key 137d, not the chance button 136, is operated only once (FIG. 76 (47)), the list is updated, and as shown in FIG. 76 (48), Yoshimune 01 Returning to the first list at the top, the cursor display is moved to that Yoshimune item. Then, in FIG. 76 (49 ), the chance button 136 is operated. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 76(50), an animation display indicating that the character is determined is displayed in the area where the preview display was performed. A confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) to confirm that the character settings are updated may be displayed, but in this example, an animation display indicating that the character is determined is displayed. When finished, the setting of the selected character is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 76 (51).

Even if the animation showing the determination of the character ends, the character selection screen is still displayed, and it is possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the back icon arranged on the character selection screen. Good.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 76 (52)), as shown in FIG. The cursor icon cs displayed on the selection icon moves down one position, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the holding frame selection icon, and the holding frame selection icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 76 (54 ), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the holding frame selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 76 (55 ), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the holding frame. A selection screen is displayed. A list of five lines is also displayed on the hold frame selection screen, and in the list, five items (“01 hold frame A” to “05” from the top of the options displayed in the hold frame selection shown in FIG. 73(b) are displayed. The hold frame E”) is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the list of 5 lines. In FIG. 76 (55), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the hold frame A, and the hold frame of the item for which the cursor display is displayed is the hold icon and the variable icon in the window on the left side of the hold frame selection screen. It is displayed with a preview. Note that, as shown in 73(b), the default setting of the holding frame selection is the holding frame A, but this initial setting itself may be deleted, or a dedicated holding that cannot be selected here. A frame may be prepared. Further, in the lower right of the hold frame selection screen, a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of the cross key used for the selection operation (up and down keys 137u, d only in red), and a red icon used for the determination operation are displayed. The pattern of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The holding frame set by the holding frame selection here is displayed as the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 in the lower portion of the decorative pattern display device 208.

In FIG. 76 (56), the down key 137d is operated once.

77 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 76.

In response to the single operation of the down key 137d shown in FIG. 76(56) continued from FIG. 76(55), the cursor display is 1 in the hold frame A in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77(57). The reserved frame B of the item below is moved, and the reserved frame B is preview-displayed in the left window.

In FIG. 77 (58 ), the decision operation is performed using the chance button 136. In the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 77 (59), when the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window in which the preview display is performed is generated and the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected hold frame is updated. Is automatically performed, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 77 (60). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the hold frame is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold frame selection screen remains as it is, and it may be possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the hold frame selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is being displayed (see FIG. 77 (61)), as shown in FIG. 77 (62), it is suspended until then. The cursor icon cs displayed on the frame selection icon moves down one position, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the hold display selection icon, and the hold display selection icon lights up in red. In this state, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 77 (63), the decoration pattern display device 208 displays a hold display selection screen. A list of five lines is also displayed on the hold display selection screen. In the list, five items (“01 icon A” to “05 icon” from the top of the options displayed in the hold display selection shown in FIG. 73(b) are displayed. E”) is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the list of 5 lines. In FIG. 77 (63), the cursor display is displayed in the item of icon A, and the icon of the item for which the cursor display is displayed is preview-displayed together with the hold frame in the window on the left side of the hold display selection screen. There is. Note that, as shown in 73(b), the initial setting of the hold display selection is the icon A, but this initial setting itself may be deleted, or a dedicated icon that cannot be selected here is displayed. You may prepare. Further, in the lower right of the hold display selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of the cross key used for selection operation (up and down keys 137u, d only red), and a red icon used for determination operation. The pattern of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The icon set by the hold display selection here is displayed as the hold icons h1 to h4 or the variable icon h0 on the hold frame UI.

After that, the down key 137d is operated twice, the cursor display moves to the icon C, and the icon C is preview-displayed in the left window. In this state, the decision operation by the chance button 136 is performed, and in the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 77(65), the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window in which the preview display is performed is generated again, and the effect display Ed1 is generated. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected icon is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 77 (66). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) for confirming that the icon setting is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold display selection screen may remain as it is, and it may be possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the hold display selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 77 (67)), as shown in FIG. 77 (68), it is suspended until then. The cursor icon cs displayed on the display selection icon moves down one position, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the background display selection icon, and the background display selection icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 77 (69), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the background display selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 77 (70), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the background. A selection screen is displayed. A list of 5 lines is also displayed on the background display selection screen, and all five options (“01 background A” to “05 background E”) in the background display selection shown in FIG. 73B are displayed on the list. Has been done. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the list of 5 lines. In FIG. 77 (70), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the background A, and the background of the item for which the cursor display is displayed is preview-displayed in the window on the left side of the background display selection screen. As shown in 73(b), the background display selection is initially set to the background A, but the initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated background that cannot be selected here may be set. You may prepare. Further, in the lower right of the background display selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a cross-shaped key (up and down keys 137u, d only in red) used for selection operation, and a red color used for determination operation are displayed. The pattern of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The background set by the background display selection here is displayed as the background display in the normal state in the decorative pattern display device 208. The background display in the normal state mentioned here does not include the background display in the prefetch mode, the background display as a notice of the big hit of the fluctuation, and the background display in the power support state. However, it may be included only in the background display in the electric power support state.

After that, the down key 137d is operated four times, the cursor display moves to the background E, and the background E (empty background) is preview-displayed in the left window. In this state, the decision operation is performed using the chance button 136, and the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window in which the preview display is being performed is generated again on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 77 (72). When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected background is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 77 (73). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the background setting is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the background display selection screen remains as it is, and it may be possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the background display selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated twice while the option menu screen is being displayed (see FIG. 77 (74a)), as shown in FIG. 77 (75), The cursor icon cs displayed on the hold display selection icon moves to the bottom, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the return icon for returning to the demo screen, and the return icon lights in red.

In FIG. 77 (76), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the return icon, and as shown in FIG. 77 (77), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a demo screen. To be done. The demo screen here reflects the customized results. That is, the background is changed to an empty background, the holding frame UI is different from the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 75(1), and in the frame RW at the upper right of the screen, it is set to ON by effect customization. The mode name (here, auto button mode) is displayed. When the two modes are set to ON, the customization numbers are displayed alternately in ascending order. For example, if the 01 auto button mode and the 05 back button navigation are turned on, the auto button mode and the back button navigation are displayed alternately in the frame RW in the upper right of the screen. It should be noted that when it is the same as the default setting, it may not be displayed in the frame RW, but may be the same or may be displayed. Further, when no setting is made, OFF may be displayed in the frame RW, or nothing may be displayed. In addition, the group notice of setting the reliability and the long-press automatic continuous hit for setting the speed of repeated hits may be set but not displayed in the frame RW. Further, the set mode may not be displayed in detail, but may be displayed only, for example, “during production customization”.

In FIG. 77 (79), a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp. 220 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are also shown. All of the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 shown in FIG. 77 (79) are being stopped and displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (79) are also in stop display, and the fourth symbol shown in FIG. 77 (79). The symbol display device 284 also represents the stop display. Further, all of the normal symbol holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, and the second special figure holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. 77 (79) are all turned off, and in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Even in the displayed second hold number display, the hold number of special figure 1 and the hold number of special figure 2 are both zero. Therefore, there is no hold, and the symbol variable display is not started after the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 77 (80), there is one ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 77 (80) has started the symbol variable display. However, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub control units 400 and 500 shown in FIG. 77 (80) are also decorative symbols. The variable display is not started, and the fourth symbol display device 284, which is also controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500, still displays the stop display. In addition, in the fourth symbol display device 284 shown in FIG. 77 (80), the black square represents that the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is being stopped, and the gray circle represents the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). Represents the stop display, the white square represents the variable display of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the white circle represents the variable display of the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (81), the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol starts variable display, and the second number of holdings displayed in the upper right corner portion. In the display, the reserved number of Toku-zu 1 is momentarily displayed as "1".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (82), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 which is displayed as "1" for a moment in the second holding number display is "0". It should be noted that the second reserved number display may not be displayed as "1" even for a moment since it is immediately consumed after the first special figure starting port 230 is won, and may be left as "0".

In FIG. 77 (83), the increase animation of the first hold icon h11 has started.

78 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 77.

In FIG. 78 (84) continued from FIG. 77 (83), the increase animation ends and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 78 (84) is an icon newly set in the hold display selection for production customization, and is displayed in the default display mode (diamond-shaped unpatterned and white display mode). There is.

In FIG. 78 (85), the variable display of the first decorative symbol has not been started yet, but after the start of the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and The deletion of three icons such as the brightness adjustment icon BI is started, and the display is transparent. Although the erasing here may be an animation tailoring, it does not necessarily have to be the erasing animation, and in FIG. 78 (86), the erasing of these three icons MI, VI, BI has been completed.

In FIG. 78 (87), the first hold icon h11 has started moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area, and in FIG. 78 (88), the movement of the first hold icon h11 has been completed. In the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area, the variable icon h0 having a default display mode (diamond-shaped unpatterned and white display mode) is displayed. Then, in FIG. 78 (89), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is finally started, and the first decorative symbol is changing slowly. In addition, in detail at the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, the left symbol starts the variable symbol display first, then the middle symbol starts the variable symbol display and the right symbol finally starts the variable symbol display. However, the order of the variable display start of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is not limited to this order, and these three left symbols, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may simultaneously start the variable display. Further, before the variable display of the first decorative pattern is started, an animation by the decorative pattern (for example, an animation in which the decorative pattern is once displayed large and then returns to the original size, an image and characters of the decorative pattern such as characters) are displayed. In the case of being composed of images (including numbers), an image of a character or the like may be animated before the first decorative symbol starts to change).

In FIG. 78 (91), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. Even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, if the left key 137l or the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated (see FIG. 78 (92)), FIG. 78 (93) As shown in, a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the hold frame UI. The volume display bar display VB is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), at least a part of the variable icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. .. When the left key 137l is operated while the volume adjusting bar display VB is displayed, the bar display is decreased by one level and the sound is reduced, and when the right key 137r is operated, the bar display is increased by one level and the sound is increased. , The volume can be adjusted.

In the present embodiment, only after the symbol variable display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, only the volume adjustment can be performed. Even if the volume can be adjusted at all times, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume may not be displayed. Moreover, even during the big hit game, only the volume adjustment can be performed at any time. However, it may be restricted for a certain period. For example, during a big hit game start effect, during an interval between rounds, during a big hit game end effect, during execution of super reach effect, during confirmation display of a symbol on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214, or for a decorative symbol. Result screen during confirmation display, during confirmation display of lost symbols, during confirmation display of big hit symbols, and at the end of electric support (time saving) state (for example, at the end of ST) (for example, the number of balls or/and The display may be restricted during the display of the screen for displaying the number of consecutive holidays or the like, or the period in which the left and right keys 137l and 137r are used for the effect. In addition, when the super reach effect is a game effect, it is regulated until the result of winning or losing is notified, and it may be adjustable thereafter, or it is adjusted after the three decorative symbols are aligned and the shaking display is started. This may be possible, or the entire period from the super reach effect to the stop display may be restricted.

In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started may be possible only in the special figure low accuracy normal figure low accuracy state. Also, after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, even if the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the light amount adjustment is impossible, but the light amount adjustment bar is used. The display may be displayed in the same manner as the bar display VB for volume adjustment so that the light amount can be adjusted, or the light amount can be adjusted without the bar display. Furthermore, even after the symbol variable display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, effect customization, character selection, etc. may be settable.

Moreover, when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated in a state where the volume adjustment icon VI and the like are disappeared, that is, while the symbol is changing, without displaying the volume display bar display VB as in the present embodiment, It may be possible to adjust the volume. The bar display VB for volume adjustment is configured to be erased if not operated for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), but when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated again before the certain period elapses. May be configured to be able to update the count start for the certain period (that is, to extend the period until returning to the demo screen). If the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated during the execution of the animation in which the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is erased by the start of the variation of the symbol, the erase animation is canceled midway and immediately. Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be erased, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed instead. Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be displayed again without canceling the deletion animation, or the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed after the deletion animation has been completed.

Further, even after the variable display of the symbols on the special figure display devices 212, 214 is started, the presence or absence of the display of the three icons MI, VI, BI is kept until the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Regardless, it may be possible to adjust the light amount, and it is also possible to set performance customization, character selection, and the like.

Further, even when the volume adjustment and/or the brightness adjustment can be performed during the pattern change, the adjustment bar display may not be displayed.

79: is a figure which shows the modification of the example demonstrated using FIG.

When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 79(32b) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 76(32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 79(33b1). The return icon is displayed with the frame highlighted and further illuminated in red. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 79 (33b2)), a confirmation screen asking whether to return to the option menu screen is displayed over the effect customization screen from the front side (FIG. 79 (33b3)). ). In this confirmation screen, a return icon for accepting the return to the option menu screen and a cancel icon for canceling the return to the option menu screen are displayed. In FIG. 79 (33b2), the cursor display is changed to the cancel icon. It is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (33b4-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the return icon (FIG. 79 (33b5-1), or when the cursor display is displayed in the cancel icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (33b4-2), the chance button 136 can be operated to return to the effect customizing screen (FIG. 79 (33b5-2)).

When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 79(32c) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 76(32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 79(33c1). Then, when the right key 137r is operated once more (FIG. 79 (33c2)), the cursor display moves to the initialization icon as shown in FIG. 79 (33c3). When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 79 (33c4)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize the effect customization is displayed over the effect customization screen from the front side (FIG. 79 (33c5)). )). In this confirmation screen, a "Yes icon" for accepting the initialization and a "No icon" for canceling the initialization are displayed. In FIG. 79 (33c5), the cursor display is "No icon". "Is displayed. Then, when the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 79 (33c6-1), the cursor display moves to "Yes icon" (FIG. 79 (33c7-1), and in this state, FIG. 79 (33c8-1)). When the chance button 136 is operated as shown in, initialization of effect customization is executed.In this initialization, all the settings made by the player in effect customization are returned to the initial values. It is possible to perform initialization even when it is not set, but it is also possible to disable it.When the initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is overlaid on the production customization screen from the front side. (FIG. 79 (33c9-1)) Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 79 (33c6-2)), the effect customizing screen in which the initialization is reflected is displayed. Although nothing was set, all the items are set to OFF, which is the initial value.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing another modification.

If the lower key 137d is operated only once as shown in FIG. 80 (74b1) instead of the twice operation of the lower key 137d shown in FIG. 77 (74a), as shown in FIG. 80 (74b2), The cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the initialization icon, and the initialization icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 80 (74b3), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the initialization icon, and as shown in FIG. 80 (74b4), all the settings are set in the decorative pattern display device 208. A confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize is displayed over the option menu screen from the front side. In this confirmation screen, a "Yes icon" for accepting the initialization and a "No icon" for canceling the initialization are displayed. In Fig. 80 (74b4), the cursor display is "No icon". "Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (74b5-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the “yes icon” (FIG. 80 (74b6-1), or the cursor display is displayed to the “no icon”). In this state, the chance button 136 can be operated as shown in FIG. 80 (74b5-2) to return to the option menu screen (FIG. 80 (74b6-2)).

When the chance button 136 is operated in the state where the cursor display is displayed in the “Yes icon” as shown in FIG. 80 (74b6-1) (FIG. 80 (74b7-1)), initialization of all settings is executed. It In the initialization here, everything set by the player is returned to the initial value. It should be noted that it is possible to perform initialization even when nothing is specifically set, but it may not be possible. When the initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is displayed on the option menu screen in an overlapping manner from the front side (FIG. 80 (74b8-1)). Then, when the chance button 136 is operated ((b) (74b9-1) in FIG. 80), the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in (b) (74b10-1) in FIG.

In addition, after the player has performed various customizations, if the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 or the ball firing handle 134 is not operated for a certain period (for example, 5 minutes) without returning to the option menu screen. May initialize various settings. Also, instead of the confirmation screen of FIG. 80 (74b6-1), the confirmation screen of FIG. 79 (33c5) may be displayed. Alternatively, the “yes icon” may be removed from the confirmation screen, and the initialization may be performed after a certain period of time has elapsed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Further, even if there is a “yes icon”, if there is no operation, it may be configured to be initialized after a certain period of time has elapsed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Alternatively, the initialization may be performed only when “Initialize” is selected on the confirmation screen (here, when the chance button 136 is operated while the cursor display is displayed on the “Yes icon”). ..

In addition, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment may be the same as the initialization, and further, the initialization setting of various settings and the initialization of the volume and/or the brightness may be performed at the same timing, One may be initialized before the other. Also, when initializing the volume and initializing the brightness at the same timing as the initializing settings for various settings, do not display the initialization confirmation screen for initializing the volume and initializing the brightness. Alternatively, a confirmation screen for initializing all settings, volume, and brightness may be displayed.

Further, a display for confirming whether to initialize the setting of effect customization may be automatically displayed during the symbol change. For example, if it is displayed once per 100 fluctuations, if it has been fluctuated a fixed number of times since it was last displayed, or if it has been fluctuated a fixed number of times since the fluctuation that was started first, it is always displayed. Alternatively, it may be displayed at random (for example, when the player wins in the display lottery).

80(I) to (V') are diagrams showing an example in which customization can be performed during the jackpot round.

In this example, for example, the player can select a song in the first round or the second round, reach a certain round after the second round, and customize from the next round. The certain round here is a round in which the V attacker can win the prize, and specifically, it is 5 rounds. In FIG. 80(I), the decorative design display device 208 of the fifth round is shown, and the letter V that fuels the winning of the V attacker is displayed. Further, the title of the music selected by the music selection is displayed at the lower left of the screen.

FIG. 80(II) is a period corresponding to the inter-round interval when the V attacker is closed. It should be noted that the decorative pattern display device 208 still displays 5 rounds even if the interval between rounds is between 5 rounds and 6 rounds. In addition, the attacker is closed, but the right-handed notification continues.

In FIG. 80(III), the attacker has started opening and the sixth round has started. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80(III), a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed. That is, in this example, the effect customization can be executed in the sixth round, which is the next round after the fifth round in which the V attacker can win. It should be noted that it may be executable only in the sixth round, or may be executable in multiple rounds after the sixth round.

In FIG. 80(IV), the chance button 136 is pressed, the effect design customization screen shown in FIG. 75 and the like is reduced, and a list of 5 lines is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 80(V). There is.

Also, in FIG. 80(V') shown as a modification of FIG. 80(V), a display regarding only one line (only one item) of the list of five lines (here, a display regarding the auto button mode) is displayed. There is. In this modification, all the production customizations can be changed by scrolling the items with the up/down keys 137u, 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON/OFF the items displayed with the left/right keys 137l, 137r. ..

Note that, in the example of FIG. 80(V) or the example of FIG. 80(V'), only some of the effect customization may be changeable.

In the example described above, customization can be performed from the next round of a certain round (for example, a round in which a V winning is performed with a so-called V confirmation machine). The customization is not limited to the V confirmation machine and may be performed from a certain round.

Further, the period during which the music can be selected during the big hit game cannot be customized, and the customization may be performed from the round in which the selected music is output. The music selection may be completed in the middle of the round, and the music selected in the middle of the round may be output. In this case, if the selected music is output even in the round in which the music is selected. , Customization can be done within the round.

In addition, the music may be determined at the end of the specific round, and in this case, customization can be performed after the end of the specific round. In detail, you may be able to customize at the same time as the end of a particular round, you may be able to customize from the start of the next round of a particular round, and between the particular round and the next round It may be possible to customize from an inter-round interval.

Further, customization may be feasible at any time during the jackpot round. Also, the customization may be executable at any time during the jackpot game. The big hit game here is a period from the start of the big hit to the end of the big hit, which includes a round.

It should be noted that, from the viewpoint of the main control unit 300, the period from the time when the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed until the first round is started means that the special electric accessory ( It is a period from when the attacker is turned on to when it is turned on, and includes a period in which the big hit game start effect is being executed. In addition, the display (for example, the display of the special bonus) that was displayed in the big hit game start effect may be continuously displayed even after the first round is started, but it is 1 round until the attacker starts the first opening. It is a period until the eyes start. Further, the confirmation display of the jackpot symbols is based on the confirmation display of the symbols on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214, not the confirmation display of the decorative symbols. Also, if the game machine is a right-handed notification before the attacker is released (for example, in the case of the first hit or special hit of special figure 1), the timing at which the right-handed notification is started is also a big hit symbol. It is included in the period from the time the final confirmation is displayed to the start of the first round.

During the period from the time when the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed until the start of the first round, the customization may not be performed, or the opposite may be performed.

In addition, customization may not be performed during the period from the end of the final round to the start of the symbol variation at the shortest. For example, customization may not be performed during the big hit end production.

Further, during the warning of forgetting to remove the prepaid card, customization may not be performed, or conversely, it may be performed.

In addition, customization may not be performed during a specific performance (for example, V winning performance, music selection, probability variation suggestion, etc.). Further, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed during a period in which performance selection (for example, music selection, performance mode selection, etc.) can be performed. Further, the customization may be configured not to be performed even during the execution period of the effect using the operation means used for the customization, or the customization may be restricted before the effect is started. By doing so, the regulation of customization functions as a notice of the production.

Further, contrary to the example shown in FIGS. 80(I) to (V′), customization may not be performed when a certain round is reached. For example, 1R to 14R can be customized, but 15R may not be customized. Alternatively, the customization can be performed up to 5R to 12R, but may not be possible after 13R.

Further, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed while the two-dimensional code is displayed. For example, when a two-dimensional code is displayed for a certain period of time during a big hit game, or when a two-dimensional code is displayed by the player's operation (for example, "press button to display two-dimensional code") When a two-dimensional code is issued by a button operation while being performed), customization may not be performed. On the other hand, on the contrary, the two-dimensional code may be configured to be customized even while being displayed. All or a part of the two-dimensional code and the display relating to customization may be displayed at a position where they overlap, or may be displayed at a position where they do not overlap. That is, part or all of the two-dimensional code may be displayed so as to overlap with part or all of the display relating to customization from the front side, and conversely, part or all of the display relating to customization may be displayed in two-dimensional form. It may be displayed so as to overlap a part or all of the code from the front side.

80(I) to (V'), the big hit performance of the pachinko machine provided with the variable winning opening having the probability variation area has been described, but the big hit of the pachinko machine having the variable winning opening having no probability variation area has been described. The present invention is also applicable to the big hits of so-called 1st and 2nd models in which the big hit starts when a V prize is won.

80(VI) to (VIII) are diagrams showing an example in which customization can be performed during symbol variation display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80(VI), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and three decorative symbols are rapidly changing. is there. Further, in the frame RW at the upper right of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 80(VI), it is displayed that the auto button mode is currently customized, and below that, effect customization is executed. A character display for notifying that it is possible and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed.

In FIG. 80(VII), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 80(VII), the frame RW at the upper right of the screen disappears, and instead, one line shown in FIG. 80(V′). A display related to only (only one item) (here, a display related to the auto button mode) is displayed. Also in this example, by scrolling the items with the up/down keys 137u, 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON/OFF of the displayed items with the left/right keys 137l, 137r, all the effect customization can be changed.

80 (IX) to FIG. 80 (XI) are diagrams showing another example in which customization can be performed during symbol variation display.

Also in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (IX), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and three decorative symbols are rapidly changing. is there. Further, in FIG. 80(IX), the second display device 208P is arranged on the decorative symbol display device 208 (corresponding to the first display device). The second display device 208P has a smaller display screen than the decorative pattern display device 208. The second display device 208P is arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 80 (IX) is in the initial position and can be moved up and down. The second display device 208P partially overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 even at the initial position, and when descending from the initial position, the degree of overlap with the decorative symbol display device 208 increases.

A model title is displayed on the second display device 208P, and a display RW' indicating that the auto button mode is currently customized is displayed so as to overlap the model title from the front side. .. Further, below the display RW', a character display notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed.

In FIG. 80(X), the chance button 136 is pressed, and on the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 80(XI), the entire screen is switched to the same screen as the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 75 or the like. Note that a part of the contents of the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 75 (for example, the customization display being executed) may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the remaining contents may be displayed on the second display device 208P. Further, the same screen as the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 75 or the like may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the second display device 208P. Further, the display using the second display device 208P is also applicable to the display regarding customization during the big hit game.

Note that the customization may be executed at any time during the variable display of symbols. For example, it may be configured so that customization can be performed even while the super reach effect is being displayed. Alternatively, on the contrary, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed while the super reach effect is displayed. The super-reach effect referred to here also includes an effect and a sign effect that are agitated until the judge effect such as a duel effect starts after reaching the reach state. For example, the effect of changing the display position of the left design and the right design of the decorative design which is assumed to enter the reach state and the production before the character display suggesting the development to the super reach are also included. Further, when switching from a judge effect such as a duel effect to a display screen of a decorative pattern, it is included in the super reach effect until it is switched to a display screen of a decorative pattern.

It should be noted that the effects of the fanned part and the omen effects may be customized or may not be customized. Further, customization may be performed after switching from the judge effect result display screen or the display of the judge effect to the decorative pattern display, or may not be performed in the opposite.

Further, customization may be performed even during the simultaneous production executed on a plurality of gaming machines, or conversely, it may not be possible during the simultaneous production. Further, during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, customization may be performed, or conversely, the customization may not be performed. Furthermore, during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, customization may be allowed only when the jackpot is finally won, or may not be reversed, and eventually the game is lost. Only in this case, the customization may be allowed or, on the contrary, the customization may not be allowed. Further, in the state of holding, the customization may be allowed or may not be allowed to be performed until the symbol variation display ends and the next symbol variation display starts. Further, during execution of a specific effect during symbol variation display (for example, in the prefetch mode), customization may be performed, or conversely, it may not be performed.

Further, when customization is performed during the symbol variation display, the setting change may be applied from the symbol variation display, or the setting change may be applied from the next symbol variation display. Good.

In addition, while the user mode (Daitomo) is being set, by the player's operation (eg, display with the chance button, switch with the arrow keys, etc.), the list of missions that have been achieved and the game history (the number of revolutions, the number of balls, the number of missions cleared) , The number of big hits in this play, the maximum number of consecutive villas in this play, etc.) can be displayed, or the user can change the character, background, hold frame, hold display, etc. It may have been done. Furthermore, while the user mode (Daitomo) is being set, a list of missions and game history that have been achieved by player operations (eg, display with the chance button, switch with the arrow keys, etc.) while setting the user mode (Daitomo) It is configured to be able to display (rotation speed, number of balls played, number of missions cleared, number of big hits in this play, maximum number of consecutive games in this play, etc.), character set by user, background, hold frame Alternatively, the hold display may be changed.

Further, when the mission is completed during the setting of the user mode, an icon notifying that the mission has been completed may be displayed.

Next, an example of the pachinko machine 100 having a specification compatible with the "DAITOMO" member service will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of this specification, the opening condition of FIG. 73(b) is adopted. A top menu is prepared for the pachinko machine 100 of this specification. This top menu can be called by operating the chance button 136 while the demo screen is displayed. It should be noted that the top menu may be able to be called only by operating the chance button 136 without going through the demo screen. Alternatively, the demo screen may be automatically switched and displayed without operating the chance button 136. Furthermore, the demo screen may be replaced with this top menu.

On the top menu, there are Daitomo icon, model customization icon, initialization icon, and return icon.

FIG. 81(1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen.

Also on the top menu screen displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the cursor is moved up and down by operating the up key 137u or the down key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Among the items of “DAITOMO”, “Model customization”, “Initialization”, and “Return to demo screen”, you can operate the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 to connect with each other connected by arrows. When the cursor moves and the chance button 136 is pressed, a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor is displayed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is moved to the item “DAITOMO” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the Daitomo screen. If the cursor is moved to the item “return to demo screen” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the demo screen.

On the other hand, a "return" icon is displayed on each of the "Daitomo screen", the "model customization screen", and the "initialization confirmation screen". Move the cursor to the "return" icon and press the chance button 136. Then, you can go back to the top menu screen. Alternatively, the user may be able to return to the top menu screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "return" icon.

Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212, 214 and the variable display of the special figure is started, even if the top menu screen is displayed, the "Daitomo screen", " Even on the "model customization screen" and the "initialization confirmation screen", the screen changes to the decorative pattern variable display screen.

FIG. 81(2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen.

The transition diagram of the model customizing screen shown in FIG. 81(2) is the same as the transition diagram of the option menu screen shown in FIG. 74 except for the "return to top menu" at the bottom and the "top menu screen" to the right of it. Therefore, redundant description will be omitted. If the cursor is moved to the item “return to top menu” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches from the model customization screen to the top menu screen.

FIG. 82 is a transition diagram of the Daitomo screen.

Also on the Daitomo screen, the cursor is moved up and down by operating the up key 137u or the down key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Among the items of “Trial play”, “Password input”, “Data save”, “Data clear”, “Quick start”, and “Return to top menu screen”, the operation key unit is connected between the items connected by the arrow. The cursor is moved by operating the up key or the down key of 137, and a screen corresponding to the item displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. That is, if the chance button 136 is pressed with the cursor on the item of “trial play”, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the trial play screen. From the trial play screen, the cursor is moved by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r and the chance button 136 is selected to move to a new registration screen or to start the trial play. You can go back to. Further, from the new registration screen, by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r and determining the chance button 136, it is possible to shift to the password input screen or return to the Daitomo screen. ..

When the cursor is moved to the item of “password input” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the password input screen. On the password input screen, the display is repeated until the correct password is entered, and if the entered password is correct, the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode is switched after a certain period of time.

When the cursor is moved to the item of “data storage” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data storage confirmation screen. In the data storage confirmation screen, if “Yes” is determined by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, r and determining the chance button 136, the screen moves to the two-dimensional code issuing screen. However, if “Yes” is determined in the same manner, a two-dimensional code is issued, and it is possible to shift to the demo screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set. On the other hand, whether the data storage confirmation screen or the two-dimensional code issuance screen is displayed, "No" is determined by the cursor movement by the selection operation of the cross keys 137u, d, l, r and the determination operation of the chance button 136. In this case, each display is repeated.

When the cursor is moved to the item of “data clear” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data clear confirmation screen.

If the cursor is moved to the item "quick start" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the quick start start screen. The quick start start screen switches to the demo screen set to Daitomo mode after a certain period of time.

On the other hand, a "return" icon is displayed on each of the "trial play screen", "password input screen", "data save confirmation screen", "data clear confirmation screen", and "quick start start screen", By moving the cursor to the "return" icon and pressing the chance button 136, it is possible to return to the Daitomo screen. Alternatively, it is possible to return to the Daitomo screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "return" icon.

Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212, 214 and the variable display of the special figure is started, even if the Daitomo screen is displayed, the "trial pre-screen" is displayed. Even if it is, etc., the screen shifts to a screen for variable display of decorative patterns.

The parenthesized reference numerals shown in FIG. 82 are associated with the parenthesized drawing numbers in FIG. 83.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen.

A top menu screen is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 83(a). On this top menu screen, all of the background display, the holding frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative design (third design), and the second decorative design (fifth design) disappear, and under the character display of "menu", Four types of icons, such as a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon for returning to the demo screen, are displayed in order from the top in a vertical column. In FIG. 82A, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the bottom return icon, and the other icons are displayed in white, whereas the return icon is lit in red. The initial position of the cursor icon cs when the display of the top menu screen is started is the return icon. Also on the top menu screen, the pattern of the cross key (only the up and down keys 137u and 137u are red) used for the selection operation and the pattern of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed at the lower right.

The screen displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 83(b1) is the chance button 136 with the cursor icon cs displayed on the Daitomo icon on the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83(a). It is a Daitomo screen displayed by being pressed. In this Daitomo screen, in order to return to the trial play icon, password input icon, data save icon, data clear icon, quick start icon, and top menu screen in the vertical line from top to bottom under the display of “Daitomo” Six types of icons such as the back icon of are displayed. Further, in FIG. 82(b1), the cursor display is displayed on the trial play icon at the top, and the trial play icon is highlighted in the frame and further lit in red. Moreover, the character of Yoshimune appears on the right side of the six types of icons arranged in a vertical line, and an explanation about the trial play is displayed. Further, below the display of the explanation, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u, d are red) and the design of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the trial play screen shown in FIG. 83(b1-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

On the trial play screen shown in FIG. 83(b1-1), options that can be selected by various customizations are displayed as benefits of the Daitomo membership experience. Below that display, underneath it is a confirmation icon to save the setting changes, a return icon to return to the Daitomo screen, a "start icon" to start trial play, a new registration to register as a new member. The icons are arranged horizontally in a row from the left side. The cursor display is displayed in the "start icon", and this position is the initial position. When the right key 137r is operated once in this state, the cursor display moves to the “new registration icon”, and when the decision operation is performed by pressing the sodoko chance button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays The new registration screen shown in FIG. 83(b1-2) is displayed.

On the new registration screen shown in FIG. 83(b1-2), a large two-dimensional code QR1 is displayed on the left side, and on the right side, the two-dimensional code QR1 is read by a communication terminal with a photographing function and the two-dimensional code QR1 is displayed. The text recommending that you access the website (Daitomo site) of the embedded URL and obtain the password from it is displayed. Below the display of the text, a password input icon and a return icon for returning to the Daitomo screen are displayed. In this example, the new registration screen is displayed via the trial play screen, but may be displayed without passing through the trial play screen. For example, if a new registration icon is provided on the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83(b1) in addition to the trial play icon and the new registration icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, FIG. The new registration screen shown in 2) may be displayed.

In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83(b2), the cursor display is displayed on the password input icon, and the explanation about the password input is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the password input screen shown in FIG. 83(b2-1) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

On the password input screen shown in FIG. 83(b2-1), an 8-digit password input area pw and, below it, a dial kw of alphabets, symbols, and numbers are displayed. The person who inputs the password moves the cursor (displayed in gray, T is being designated in FIG. 83(b2-1-1)) using the four-way controller 137u, d, l, r to move the character designated by the cursor. Is performed character by character according to the password acquired from the Daitomo site by the operation of inputting in the password input area pw by the decision operation by the chance button 136 (see FIG. 83 (b2-1-1)). Under the dial kw, a return icon for returning to the Daitomo screen, an erasing icon for erasing input characters in the password input area pw, and a completion icon indicating completion of password input are arranged in a horizontal row in order from the left side. Has been done.

When the password input operation is completed, the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor displayed on the completion icon. If the input of the password is incorrect, the input error window shown in FIG. 83(b2-1-2) is displayed, and when this window disappears, the password input operation can be performed again. The previously input password may be cleared from the password input area pw or may remain as it is. If the password input is correct, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the input completion window shown in FIG. 83(b2-1-3) for a certain period of time and then switches to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode. ..

In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83(b3), a cursor display is displayed on the data save icon, and an explanation about data save is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the data saving confirmation screen shown in FIG. 83(b3-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, if trial play or quick start is being performed, or if the password has not been entered, disable the data save icon from being selected or prevent this data save confirmation screen from being displayed. However, it may be selectable or displayable.

In the data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 83(b3-1), a “Yes” icon that acknowledges that the data will be saved and a “No” icon that the data will not be saved are displayed. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the two-dimensional code QR2 is generated and issued by the pachinko machine 100 (FIG. 83 (b3-2)). This two-dimensional code QR2 includes the URL of the Daitomo site, the player's ID, the current game history information (for example, the number of games, the number of balls played, the number of big hits, the number of consecutive games, the level of Daitomo mode, and experience). (Including values, mission achievement information, etc.) are embedded, and the two-dimensional code QR2 is read by a communication terminal with a photographing function, and the website (Daitomosite) of the URL embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2. ), the data will be saved on the Daitomo site server. An end icon is displayed in the lower right of the data storage confirmation screen. When the reading of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, the end icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated. Is displayed.

In FIG. 83 (b3-2-1), the end confirmation screen is displayed, and a “Yes” icon that acknowledges the end and a “No” icon that does not end are displayed. When the “YES” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches to the demo screen in which the die-tomo mode is not set.

The data embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2, such as the game history information of this time, may be deleted from the pachinko machine after the generation of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, and FIG. 83 (b3-2-1). May be deleted from the pachinko machine 100 at the stage when the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, or may not be deleted until data clear described later is performed.

In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83(b4), the cursor display is displayed on the data clear icon, and an explanation about the data clear is displayed on the right side. If the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 83(b4-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. If you are performing trial play or quick start, or if you have not entered the password, disable the data clear icon and prevent the data clear confirmation screen from being displayed. However, it may be selectable or displayable.

In the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 83(b4-1), a "Yes" icon for confirming that the data such as the game history information of this time is erased and a "No" icon for not erasing the data are displayed. There is. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the data is erased from the pachinko machine and the erase completion screen is displayed.

The erasing completion screen is displayed in FIG. 83 (b4-1-1). The erasing completion screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time, and the screen returns to the Daitomo screen.

In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83(b5), the cursor display is displayed on the quick start icon, and the explanation about the quick start is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the quick start start screen shown in FIG. 83(b5-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This quick start start screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time, and the decorative pattern display device 208 switches to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode.

In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83(b6), the cursor display is displayed on the return icon, and on the right side, the message of returning to the top menu screen is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches to the top menu screen.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a model customization screen.

When the second model customizing icon is selected from the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83(a) and the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the model customizing screen shown in FIG. 84(c). Is displayed. In this model customization screen, under the character display of "Model customization", a production customization icon, a character selection icon, a hold frame selection icon, a hold display selection icon, a background display selection icon, and an initialization are displayed in order from the top in a vertical line. Seven types of icons such as an icon and a return icon for returning to the top menu screen are displayed. A cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 84(c), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top production customization icon, and the other production icons are displayed in white, whereas the production customization icon is lit in red. In the model customization screen, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed at the lower right. Furthermore, the chance button 136 and the symbols of the cursor icon cs and the up/down keys 137u and 137d used for moving the cursor display among the cross keys are displayed in red. In addition, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136 in the determination operation, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

The effect customizing screen is displayed in FIG. 84(c1), but in the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 75(17), the options of the input sound notice and the back button navigation are not yet released. Be different. If the Daitomo password has not been input or the level that satisfies the opening condition has not been reached, the screen shown in FIG. 84(c1) appears.

Although the character selection screen is displayed in FIG. 84(c2), the character selection screen shown in FIG. 76(40) has all other options unreleased except for Yoshimune's option. The difference is that the choices are not even displayed as to what character they are. It should be noted that a part or all of the character image may be displayed even if it is an unreleased option, a silhouette image in the shape of a character may be displayed, and a display mode in which a selectable character is recognizable ( For example, a display including “Daitomo Lv.20: Princess is open” and the like may be displayed. Here, the display regarding the unreleased options is also applicable to other customized displays (in this example, the hold frame, the hold display, and the background display). If the Daitomo password has not been entered, the screen shown in FIG. 84(c2) appears. Only Yoshimune can be selected on this screen.

On the other hand, in the character selection screen shown in FIG. 84(c2'), since the password is input or the trial play is selected, the grandfather character can also be selected. However, after 03, it cannot be selected because it does not reach the level that satisfies the opening condition.

Although the reservation frame selection screen is displayed in FIG. 84(c3), the reservation frame selection screen shown in FIG. 76(55) is the same as the reservation frame A option except that the other options are not released yet. Yes, the other option is that it does not even show what the name of the holding frame is. If the Daitomo password has not been entered, the screen shown in FIG. 84(c3) appears. On this screen, only the hold frame A can be selected.

On the other hand, in the holding frame selection screen shown in FIG. 84(c3'), since the password is input, the holding frame B can also be selected. However, after 03, it cannot be selected because it does not reach the level that satisfies the opening condition.

Although the hold display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 84(c4), the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 77(63) has all other options unreleased except the option of icon A. , The other options are different in that they do not even show what the name of the pending display is. If the Daitomo password is not entered, the screen shown in FIG. 84(c4) appears. On this screen, only icon A can be selected.

On the other hand, in the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 84(c4'), since the password is input, the icon B can also be selected. However, here as well, after 03, it cannot be selected because it does not reach the level that satisfies the opening condition.

The background display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 84(c5), but the background display selection screen shown in FIG. The difference is that the other options don't even show what the background name is. If the Daitomo password is not entered, the screen shown in FIG. 84(c5) appears. On this screen, only the background A can be selected.

On the other hand, in the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 84(c5'), since the password is input, the background B can also be selected. However, here as well, after 03, it cannot be selected because it does not reach the level that satisfies the opening condition.

In FIG. 84(d1), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize all the settings is displayed. However, since it is the same as the confirmation screen shown in FIG. 80 (74b6-1), description thereof will be omitted. Also, although the initialization completion screen is displayed in FIG. 84(d2), the description is omitted because it is the same as the initialization completion screen shown in FIG. 80(74b8-1).

FIG. 84(e1) is a diagram showing an example of a demo screen set to the Daitomo mode.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84(e1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative patterns (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative pattern (third pattern) and the second decorative pattern (fifth pattern). The special variable symbol display is stopped. Furthermore, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number of special figure 1 and the hold number of special figure 2 are both zero. In other words, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display is not started after the stop symbol of the special symbol is confirmed and displayed. Further, below the second hold number display, the current level of the Daitomo mode (here, level 1) and the experience value (EXP) (here, 0) are displayed. That is, the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 84(e1) corresponds to, for example, the screen immediately after the new registration and transition to the demo screen.

Further, the corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 84(e1). For example, when Quick Start is set and this demo screen is displayed, the voice “Start Daitomo” is output, and when trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, “Trial” is displayed. When the voice "Start play" is output and the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed, the voice "Start Daitomo. Let's do our best today" is output. Note that different sound effects are output depending on whether the corresponding sound effect is started by the trial play, when the Daitomo is started by quick start, or when the password is entered. , The same sound effect may be output, and the same sound effect may be output in two cases. Further, the sound effect may change depending on the level of the Daitomo, the previous game situation, and the like. Further, when the demo screen shown in FIG. 84(e1) is returned to after the model customization, the sound effect may not be output, and a dedicated sound effect may be output. Further, an animation may be displayed together with the corresponding sound effect or in place of the corresponding sound effect. When the symbol variation start is started while the sound effect or animation is being performed, the corresponding sound effect or animation may be interrupted (cancelled) in the middle, or may be output to the end as it is.

In addition, if the quick start is set and this demo screen is displayed, the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, or if the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed. In the case of at least one of them, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83(a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 84(c) may not be called for a certain period, or the certain period may be set. The top menu screen shown in FIG. 83(a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 84(c) may be called up without waiting. Alternatively, in all of the above cases, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83(a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 84(c) may not be called for a certain period.

FIG. 84(e1-1) shows a state in which the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are additionally displayed after a certain period has elapsed since the demo screen shown in FIG. 84(e1) was displayed. FIG.

It should be noted that after the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83(a) is displayed, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are restricted from being additionally displayed for a certain period (for example, one minute). Good. Further, when the chance button 136 or the cross keys 137u, d, l, r is operated during this fixed period, the operation is invalidated. However, it may be valid in some cases.

In addition, even when the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are not displayed (for example, immediately after or shortly after the symbol variation display is stopped without a hold), the figure The volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown at 75 can be called. When the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW are called and there is no operation for a certain period of time, the screen may return to the screen shown in FIG. 84 (e1-1).

Further, when the stop symbol is displayed in a state where there is no hold, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are not displayed for a certain period, and the certain period is as shown in FIG. The model customization screen shown in) may not be called.

Further, even during a period in which the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83(a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 84(c) cannot be called, the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 75 should be called. May be possible.

Further, when switching between the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 75 and the screen shown in FIG. 84(e1-1), these windows VW and BW are also displayed on the screen shown in FIG. 84(e1-1). There is a state in which neither is displayed, and even in this state, the volume and brightness adjustment operations may or may not be executable.

FIG. 84(e2) is a diagram showing an example of a demo screen displayed via FIG. 83(b3-2-1) after the two-dimensional code is issued in FIG. 83(b3-2). As the output sound from the speaker 120, a voice saying "Thank you for your hard work" is output. Further, the output sound effect may be changed depending on the state before this demo screen is displayed.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using the variable icon.

Here, the variation icon h0 will be summarized once again. The variation icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, which is displayed after the suspension of the special figure variation game is started, in other words, an icon relating to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes the change icon h0 at the same time when the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon is started. More precisely, when the first hold icon h11 having the oldest winning prize moves from the hold icon display area HIS to the variable icon display area CIS, the moving icon is referred to as a variable icon, or the variable icon moves. You may. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area CIS is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. The variable icon h0 is displayed with a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from that of the hold icon h11. This may facilitate discrimination between the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11, but they may have the same size. The variable icon h0 may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon h11. The change icon h0 can give a notice about whether or not the change is valid (a notice of the change) depending on its display mode, and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon h0 can be regarded as an icon related to holding, and can be considered as a kind of holding icon in the sense that the notification of the result of winning or losing the special figure changing game is held. The erasing timing may be before, at the same timing, or after the timing at which the result of the variation is notified. Further, in addition to the default display mode (for example, a circular unpatterned and white display mode), a plurality of types of display modes of the variation icon h0 are prepared as normal advance notification display modes, and depending on the display mode, The jackpot reliability (expectation) is different. The higher the reliability of the jackpot, the easier it is to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern. In the following description, the degree of expectation of a big hit is represented by color. The default white color is when “no change” is selected in the effect lottery for the display mode of the variable icon h0. Although the default white fluctuation icon does not announce the expectation of the big hit, the expectation of the big hit may be announced (in that case, the color of the icon with the lowest expectation of the big hit). White blinking has the lowest expectation of a big hit (0% or 0% or more and less than 1%). As a color of the normal notice display mode, a so-called rainbow color (rainbow color) that changes from white flashing to blue, green, red, gold, and seven colors in ascending order of big hit expectation is displayed. The gold color is a big jackpot, and the iridescent one has a higher expectation of a jackpot than that. Note that this color relationship is the same for the color of the display mode of the pre-reading notice by the hold icon. Hereinafter, when the color is red or more, it means red, gold, or rainbow.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed in the central area. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative design (fifth design) is variably displayed. Further, a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the navigator character YM of the lord's character is displayed on the right base icon bIr in FIG. 85(A1). Various effects such as icons and mini-items are displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 85 (a1) is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variable displays. For example, the display is started at the same time as the start of a certain symbol variable display, and may be continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variable display, or may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. Further, the variable display of the symbol may be terminated and may be continuously displayed even during the display of the stop display, or may be temporarily disappeared or may not be seen. Then, during the display of the next symbol variation display that is started continuously, it may be displayed continuously, or may disappear temporarily or disappear. Alternatively, the display may be terminated during the display of the next symbol variable display. Further, there may be a case where it is displayed only in part or all of the entire period during which one symbol variable display is displayed, and may not be displayed during the next symbol variable display. The navigation character YM can be said to be a so-called constantly displayed character, but it does not have to be continuously displayed in any case. Furthermore, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display continues. Details of this point will be described later.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A1), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a default display mode (a circular unpatterned and white display mode). Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the default display mode (the circular unpatterned and white display mode).

In FIG. 85 (A2-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display corresponds to a notice indicating that another icon or the like may change when the change notice is displayed. Other icons include the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, and a decorative pattern. That is, the icon or the like that has been displayed before the display of the change notice display is to be changed. However, even if the display of the change notice display is started at the same time as the display of the change notice display or the display is started later, it may be changed. The player may or may not know what will be changed at the time when the display of the change notice display is started. There may also be suggestions on what to change. Furthermore, even if the change notice display is displayed, nothing may change depending on the change notice display, which may be a false notice. Further, the change notice display may be determined to have only one target object, or may be necessarily changed.

The treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 85 (a2-1) appears on the carpet icon I2. The icon I2 of the carpet is displayed only at the time of appearance, and when the icon I1 of the treasure box reaches the display position of the effect icon display area DIS, the icon I2 disappears or jumps out of the screen. As the appearance timing of the icon of this change notice display, when the first decorative pattern changes rapidly, at the start of the pattern change, when the moving of the change icon h0 is completed, and when the special figure start opening is won (when the hold is increased) At the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning, at the time of certain success, at the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation (at the time of re-variation start) in the pseudo continuous production, at the start of the reach state, super reach At the start, you can enumerate during super-reach. That is, the appearance timings of the change notice display icons may be all of the above-listed ones. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied. There may be a plurality of display modes of the treasure box icon I1. For example, the ease of change of the navigation character YM or the like may change depending on the display mode (size, color, animation difference) of the treasure box or the carpet. Good. Further, as for the effect display that is displayed only at the time of appearance or exit, like the icon I2 of the carpet, if the display mode is different from the normal display mode, the probability of changing is high, or a state advantageous for the player. The probability of changing the display mode to the display mode may increase. For example, the probability of changing to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit may be high. Further, the change notice display may be a display that changes only the navigation character, but in some cases, the effect display other than the navigation character (holding icon, change icon, notice display of the change, prefetch notice display, etc.) may be changed. It may be. In addition, among presentation displays other than the navigation character (holding icon, change icon, notice display of the change (timer notice, conversation notice, chance up meter, etc.), pre-read notice display (timer notice, pre-read mode background display, etc.) It is possible that the navigation character is not changed by one effect display, a plurality of effect displays, or a notice display that changes all effect displays, but the navigation character may be changed in some cases. Good. Further, the change notice display may be configured such that the navigation character is changed more often than the effect display other than the navigation character is changed, but conversely, the frequency of changing the navigation character is effect other than the navigation character. The frequency may be less than the frequency of changing the display, and the two frequencies may be performed at the same frequency. Here, the effect display (the effect display other than the navigation character and the navigation character) is displayed by the "notice of changing the effect display (change notification display, notification display that changes effect display other than the navigation character. Hereinafter, referred to as notice A)". When the effect display that is changed less frequently by the notice A is changed by the notice A, when the effect display changed by the notice A is changed by the notice A than when the effect display is changed by the notice A is changed. May or may not be configured so that a big hit can be easily made.

In FIG. 85 (A3-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 remains. This treasure box icon I1 is displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM. In FIG. 85 (A4-1), the display mode of the treasure box icon I1 changes. That is, the change animation is displayed, the treasure box is opened, and the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides part or all of the navigation character YM, which is clearer than before the smoke image appeared. It becomes difficult to see. When an icon other than the navigation character YM or the like is displayed, the smoke image may cover part or all of the display of the icon or the like other than the navigation character YM from the front side. In addition, the treasure chest may not be opened. Furthermore, another notice may be given even if the treasure box is opened. In FIG. 85 (A 5-1), the smoke image disappears and the display mode of the navigation character YM changes. That is, the dark blue (default color) kimono worn by the navi character YM has changed to a red kimono. The change of the kimono of the navi character YM into a red kimono may suggest that the change icon h0 is likely to change to red due to the change. It may be determined that the display mode of the navigation character YM changes at the time when the treasure box icon I1 is displayed. In addition to the red kimono, it may be changed to a gold kimono or a rainbow kimono. It may also blink white, change to blue, or change to green. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change corresponding to the color of the hold icon and/or the variable icon (for example, when green hold is displayed in hold 2, the navigation character YM is displayed in green). Change into a kimono). Here, in the case where the color of the navigation character corresponds to the color of the variable icon and/or the hold icon, and the display mode of the hold icon and/or the variable icon is changed in multiple ways, it is first consumed. May be configured so that the color of the hold icon or the variable icon that corresponds to the color of the navi character may correspond to the color of the hold icon that will be consumed later, and the color of the navi character, The color with high jackpot expectation may be displayed preferentially, and the color with low jackpot expectation may be displayed preferentially, regardless of the color of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon itself. May be displayed with a high pending or floating icon color, or with a low pending or floating icon color with a low jackpot expectation regardless of the color of the pending or floating icon itself. The colors of the pending icon and/or the variable icon that are being displayed may all be reflected in the color of the navigation character, and the color of the navigation character is displayed randomly from the colors of the pending icon and/or the varying icon that are changing. May be done. Further, next to the navigation character YM whose display mode has been changed, the icon I1 of the treasure box with the lid open is still displayed. The icon I1 of the treasure box may disappear at the same time as the smoke image appears, or may disappear together with the smoke image. The icon I1 of the treasure box disappears at the timing of FIG. 85 (A6-1), and only the navi character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Up to this point, the first decorative pattern continues to be displayed at high speed.

In FIG. 85 (A7), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and "decoration 7" is displayed in swing (temporary stop) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In addition, in the second decorative pattern, the temporary stop is not performed, and the three decorative patterns continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In FIG. 85 (a8), the background screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is changed to the background screen of the wilderness by developing into super reach production (swordsman reach production), and the temporarily stopped left design is the decorative pattern display device. Move to the upper left of 208, the right symbol that is also temporarily stopped moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the background screen h of the wilderness, a duel scene in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. Further, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bI1 of the hold icon display area HIS and the four stages hs1 to hs4 disappear, and the first hold icon h11 also disappears. Although the height of the pedestal in the variable icon display area CIS is low, the lowered pedestal hs0' is displayed and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on it. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navi character YM of a lord wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr. During the super reach effect, the entire hold frame UI may be hidden. That is, the pedestal hs0' in the variable icon display area CIS and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS may also be hidden. Further, during the super reach effect, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may also be hidden. Further, during the super reach effect, any one or two of the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 may be hidden. Further, during the super reach performance, all of the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 are hidden, and the hold frame UI (left base icon bIl, four stages hs1 to hs4, and pedestal hs0 (hs0')). , Right base icon bIr) may be displayed, or conversely, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the variation icon h0 may all be displayed and the hold frame UI may be hidden.

In FIG. 85(9), the navi character YM of the lord who has been standing facing the front until then turns to the variation icon h0, and changes into a pose in which the sword is pulled out. In FIG. 85 (a10), a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM of the lord, and in FIG. 85 (a11), the change icon h0 that was white until then changes to red. As described above, the variable icon in the red display mode has a considerably high expectation of a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variable display. In FIG. 85 (12), the lord's navigation character YM has returned to the posture of facing to the front. The lord's navigation character YM shown in FIG. 85 (12) is still in the display mode of the red kimono, but may return to the default display mode (display mode of the dark blue kimono).

In FIG. 85 (A13), although not shown, the button effect is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136. In the remaining time display meter, the gauge decreases as the operation valid period starts. After that, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, a cut-in image of the lord is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and a notice effect is given to inform that the reliability of the big hit is high. The lord's cut-in image overlaps the animation display of the duel scene, and it is considered difficult to visually recognize it compared to the case where the lord's cut-in image is not displayed. The cut-in image of the lord may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. It may be one that is done.

After that, in the decorative design display device 208, the cut-in image of the lord is erased, the animation display of the duel scene continues, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and the button production for the second time after developing to super reach. Is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, it becomes possible to accept the operation of the chance button 136 by the player.

In the remaining time display meter, the gauge decreases as the operation valid period starts. It should be noted that the operation valid period for the second button effect after developing to super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period for the first button effect after developing to super reach. In this case, the operation reaches super reach. After that, the speed at which the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the second button effect decreases may be faster than the speed in which the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the first button effect decreases after developing to super reach. Also, the operation valid period in the first button performance after developing to super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period in the second button performance after developing to super reach, or after developing to super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development to the super reach may have the same length.

When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and at the same time, the first large-board behavior accessory shown in FIG. 67(a). 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and each overlaps on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208. The left pattern and the right pattern of the effect image and the first decorative pattern are respectively overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, and the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object. It is considered to be difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. Note that only a part or all of the first large-scale behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditors 224Gd may operate, and for example, the first large-scale behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Ga The reliability may be different depending on the number of the 4 large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operating. The effect in which the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may be displayed even when the operation valid period elapses without the operation. In addition, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd is performed. In addition, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral goods 224Gd are performed, the first large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth after the effect images are displayed. The operation of the large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd may be started, the effect image may be displayed after the operations of the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditor 224Gd are started, or the effect image may be displayed. And the operation of the first large-scale behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, even if the effect display that causes the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd to operate is not performed and is lost. It is also possible to display the revival effect and perform the effect display that is a big hit after the effect display that causes a loss is performed. It should be noted that, when the effect in which the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate is started, the displayed variation icon h0 is hidden, but may be continuously displayed.

Thereafter, the thousand box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 67(a) moves and moves downward, and overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd. .. Further, thereafter, the light guide plate IL emits light. Note that the display of the effect image, the operations of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box cabinet auditors 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are not limited to those described above. Instead, it can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-box action product 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the division is not conducted.

After the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, the thousand box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, the effect image fades out, and subsequently, the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd start moving toward the respective initial positions. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also restarted.

Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 85 (A14-1). In FIG. 85 (A14-1), the scene after the swordsman and the swordsman slash each other is displayed.

The animation of the navigation character YM in FIGS. 85 (9) to (12) corresponds to the effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon h0 (hereinafter referred to as “change effect”). This change effect can be viewed as a part of the super reach effect, but can also be viewed as an effect different from the super reach effect that is started when the super reach effect is started. As the start timing of the change effect, in addition to the super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, at the start of the symbol change, when the movement of the change icon h0 is completed, and when the prize is given to the special figure starting port (pending) When increasing), at the start of pre-reading notice at the time of winning, when a certain production is successful, at the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation (at the start of re-fluctuation) in the pseudo continuous production, at the start of the reach state. , The start of super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, as the start timing of the change effect, all of the above-listed ones may be used. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied.

Also, the timing of the change icon h0 changes, in addition to the super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, at the start of the pattern change, when the change icon h0 has been moved, and the special symbol start opening is awarded. At the time of increase (holding increase), at the start of pre-reading notice at the time of winning, at the time of certain production success, at the first stop of the first decorative pattern, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo continuous production (at the time of re-variation start), reach The state start time, super reach start time, etc. can be listed. That is, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes may be all of the above-listed timings. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied. Furthermore, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes may overlap with the button effective period in the above-described button effect. It should be noted that the display mode of the variable icon may not be changed after a certain period of time during the super reach effect. The super reach production described here is also a competition production, including a button production, and is a kind of so-called final judge production in which either the main character or the enemy wins. The display mode of the variable icon may not be changed after the result of the final judge effect is displayed. In addition, when an animation for changing the display mode of the variable icon is performed by the navigation character YM, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed without fail, or there may be a failure. May be. That is, the change effect may be an effect that always changes the display mode of the variable icon h0, and a case where the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed (successful) and a case where it is not changed (failed). There may be

In addition, the change animation of the variable icon by the navigation character YM may not be performed in some cases. In that case, at the end of the super reach effect, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change after the end screen of the super reach effect and the screen on which the decorative pattern is displayed are switched by the wipe. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be returned to the default display mode (display mode of a dark blue kimono) after being switched by the wipe, and the navigation character YM may be used as a look-ahead notice of the next symbol variable display. The display mode as it is (the display mode of the red kimono) may be maintained.

In FIG. 85 (A15-1), a scene in which the enemy swordsman has fallen down and the main character, the lord, has won is displayed, and the lord's navigation character YM is also in a victory pose. However, the middle pattern is not displayed yet, and the middle pattern of "decoration 7" is displayed in the same figure (A16-1), but the red variable icon h0 is still displayed, and the second decoration The symbols are also being displayed in a variable manner. Moreover, at the stage of the same figure (A16-1), each of the first decorative symbols (left middle right symbol) is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation). In addition, in FIG. 85 (A15-1), an animation for a big hit by the hero's hall may be executed.

Here, it is possible to see up to FIG. 85 (A15-1) before the middle pattern is displayed as the super reach effect, but it seems that the middle pattern is displayed and the victory is decided for the time being (A16-1). ) Can be seen as a super reach production, or can be further advanced and seen as a super reach production until just before the stop display is performed. Further, as described above, the super reach effect here corresponds to an example of the final judge effect, and until the result of the final judge effect is finalized (for example, immediately before the stop display is performed), the super reach effect is being executed. Good.
After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and the swing fluctuation is started with the combination of the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". It should be noted that the second decorative design is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left design, the middle design, and the right design. The background here may be a non-displayed background image, a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or the same background image as before the super reach is performed. In addition, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon may be displayed. Although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) is displayed in the display mode of special figure A. Although the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed, the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state where it has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is determined that the symbol is confirmed to be stopped. Since it is not, the swing fluctuation continues in the first decorative design, and the second decorative design and the fourth design display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively, and On the four-symbol display device, the display is performed in a mode that the symbol has stopped.

After that, when the big hit game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the big hit start effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208.

During the super reach, both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Here, when the button effect, which is the final judge effect, is started, a part or all of the hold frame UI may be hidden or disappeared. For example, the right base icon bIr has been displayed until then, but the right base icon bIr may be hidden or disappeared when the final judge effect is started. Further, when the final judge effect is started, the variable icon h0 may be hidden or disappeared, or the navigation character YM may be hidden or disappeared. Both of the characters YM may be hidden or disappear. Further, when the hold icon is displayed until then, the hold icon may be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started. Further, other icons and mini-characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started, if they have been displayed until then.

As shown in FIG. 85 (A2-1) instead of FIG. 85 (A2-1), a balloon display such as “change!?” may be added to the lord's navigation character YM, or in FIG. As shown in 2-3), a balloon display such as "preparing for change" may be added. After that, returning to FIG. 85 (A3-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed. The balloon display of the navigation character YM corresponds to the notice effect (precursor effect) of the start of the change notice display. That is, it is a notice indicating that the navigation character itself may change, such as “change!?”, or the navigation character is about to change (“change preparing” is displayed, such as “preparing change”) It may be a notice indicating that the change will always occur within the specified fluctuation or after the fluctuation in which “Preparing for change” is displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 85 (A3-1) instead of FIG. 85 (A3-1), while the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, In some cases, the carpet icon I2 may appear and the treasure chest icon I1 may fly on the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change and corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

Also, as shown in FIG. 85 (A4-2) instead of FIG. 85 (A4-1), the smoke image may be red. Depending on the type of change animation in the change notice display, the manner and easiness of change of the navigation character YM may be announced in advance. In the case of FIG. 85 (A4-2), it is announced that the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a kimono of the same color as smoke. In addition, depending on the type of change animation in the change notice display, the degree of expectation of the change or the big hit in the hold may be announced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (A 5-2) instead of FIG. 85 (A 5-1), the color of the kimono of the navigation character YM may not change but the navigation character YM itself may become large. .. As described above, the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM may be a change in size or a change in shape (for example, a pose) in addition to the change in color. The color of the kimono of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 85 (A 5-2) may be dark blue (default color) or may be changed to red. A part of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 85 (A 5-2) overlaps a part of the treasure box icon I1 from the front side. In addition, a part of the navigation character YM may overlap the entire treasure box icon I1 from the front side. Alternatively, at least part of the treasure box icon I1 may overlap with at least part of the enlarged navigation character YM from the front side.

Further, as a probability of changing the variation icon h0, that is, a degree of expectation of a big hit, a larger display mode with a default color is higher than a smaller display mode with a default color, and a smaller display mode with a red color, The display size in red and larger may be higher. Further, as far as the size and the color are concerned, the color may be prioritized, and for example, the display mode in red and smaller may be higher than the display mode in which the default color is large. Alternatively, on the contrary, the size may be prioritized, and for example, the display mode in which the default color is large may be higher than the display mode in which the red color is small. Further, the size (display size) of the navigation character YM may be large or small, and may be a plurality of sizes such as an intermediate size.

When the navigation character YM is in the display mode wearing a red kimono, the change icon h0 changes to red, and when the navigation character YM is in the display mode wearing a gold kimono, the change icon h0 changes to gold and the rainbow. In the case of a display mode in which a colored kimono is worn, the change icon h0 may change to a rainbow color. Further, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the variation icon h0 may easily change to a color (red, gold, rainbow) whose expectation of a big hit is red or more. That is, if the change of the change icon h0 is successful, it may be determined that the color changes to red or more, or that the color itself changes to red or more. However, even when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the expectation of a big hit may change to a color below red (green, blue, white blinking, white). Further, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, which is a premier color, the color of the variable icon h0 may also be changed to rainbow. That is, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, it means that the direct display of the navigation character YM is a direct big hit, and the navigation character YM is in another color. When the display mode of wearing a kimono (for example, red) is changed, if the display mode of the variable icon changes, it is easy for the player to hit the big jackpot. It can be reported indirectly.

Further, the navigation character YM may change the variable icon h0 even when the display mode has not changed. Alternatively, the change icon h0 may be changed only when the display mode changes. Furthermore, the character of the main character is a so-called constantly displayed character, but the navigation character YM that changes the variable icon h0 may be a character that is displayed only when the variable icon h0 is changed. It may also be a character that is displayed only when giving a notice. Further, the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above may be used as the character that changes the variable icon h0, or only the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization is the variable icon. You may make it usable as a character which changes h0.

86 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 85.

As shown in FIG. 85 (A 6-1), through FIG. 86 (A 6-2-1) to FIG. 86 (A 6-2-3) and returning to FIG. The navigation character YM may change a plurality of times until the icon I1 of the treasure box, which is, is hidden. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 86 (A 6-2-1) is a red kimono, while the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 86 (A 6-2-2) is a gold kimono. Note that the treasure box icon I1 may disappear once and may be newly displayed. Further, the change notice display may be displayed over a plurality of changes. In this case, the treasure chest icon I1 repeats opening and closing.

Further, following FIG. 85 (A6-1), change animations as shown in FIGS. 86 (A6-3-1) to (A6-3-2) may be displayed. That is, the navigation character YM may be further promoted by a notice (here, the UFO icon UFI) different from the change notice display. In FIG. 86 (A 6-3-2) and subsequent FIG. (A 6-3-3 a), a gold beam is emitted from the flying UFO icon UFI toward the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono. As shown in FIG. 86 (A6-3-4a), the navigation character YM has changed to a display mode wearing a gold kimono. Alternatively, in FIG. 86 (A6-3-2) and subsequent FIG. (A6-3-3b), a gray beam from the flying UFO icon UFI is directed toward the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono. The navigation character YM is illuminated and becomes large while wearing the red kimono as shown in FIG. 86 (6-3-4b).

Although the promotion has been described here, there may be a case where the navigation character YM does not change even when the beam is irradiated (so-called failure pattern), or when the beam is irradiated, the default display mode, There may be a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn, or a case in which the size is reduced (when demoted).

Further, FIG. 86 (A14-2-1) may be displayed following FIG. 85 (A14-1), which is a scene after the swordsman and the swordsman slash each other in the super reach production. That is, as the middle symbol, "decoration 6" different from the left and right symbols ("decoration 7") is displayed large (swing display), and in the same figure (14-2-2), the left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol All the decorative symbols of the design are once displayed lighter than the normal darkness. Also, in the figure, a scene in which the lord has fallen is displayed. In FIG. 86 (A 14-2-3), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed in the normal darkness again, and in the same diagram (A 14-2-4), the wipe effect is displayed. Then, the effect scene (effect display) of the super reach is switched to the normal background (the background before the start of the super reach effect shown in FIG. 85 (1) and the like). In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 86 (a 14-2-5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily becomes a wipe display of the same color with no pattern. In this wipe display, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. The variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may also be displayed. In FIG. 86 (A14-2-6), the wipeout is performed, the background is returned to the normal background, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is also returned to the default display mode. The display mode of the navigation character YM may be returned to the default display mode at the start of the wipe effect (timing of FIG. 86 (A 14-2-4)). In FIG. 86 (A14-2-7), the wipe effect ends, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shakes and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of losses. There is. Further, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are also displayed. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 86 (14-2-7) remains in the red display mode, but may be returned to the default display mode, or even if the variable icon h0 itself is deleted. Good. On the other hand, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be the same as the display mode wearing a red kimono. In this example, the display that returns from the state where the display state of the navigation character changes to the default state cannot be visually recognized because the navigation character is hidden, but the display that returns from the state where the display state of the navigation character changes to the default state May be visible. (For example, a display in which the state in which the display mode of the navigation character is changed is switched to a default state, an animation display in which the state in which the display mode of the navigation character is changed is returned to the default state, and the like are included.)
At the time of wipeout (FIG. 86 (A 14-2-6) to FIG. 86 (A 14-2-7)), the variable icon h0 and/or the navigation character YM are displayed, but not displayed. In some cases, the revival effect may be more easily performed when it is displayed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, when it is displayed, the revival effect may be performed without fail, and when it is not displayed, the revival effect may or may not be performed.

Further, in FIG. 86 (A14-2-1) to FIG. 86 (A14-2-3), although a part of the holding frame UI (the pedestal hs0′ and the right base icon bIr) is displayed, the holding frame is displayed. The entire UI may be hidden, or only a part of the UI may be hidden. Further, the variable icon h0 may be hidden or the navigation character YM may be hidden. Alternatively, both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden. Further, when the hold icon has been displayed until then, the hold icon may also be hidden. Further, other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may be hidden if they have been displayed so far.

87 is a diagram showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 85.

Following FIG. 85 (A16-1), displays such as FIG. 87 (A16-2-1) to FIG. 87 (A16-2-2) may be performed. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (A16-2-2), the entire screen is beginning to become thin. After that, the screen may disappear once in the re-lottery effect, and the screen (screen of lord victory) shown in FIG. 87 (A 16-2-1) may be displayed again, or FIG. 85 (A 14-2-3). ) Screen (screen of defeat of lord) may be displayed, or a combination of decorative patterns (in the case of a combination of big hits or a loss of a normal pattern) in a normal background as shown in the same figure (a 16-2-3). A screen may be displayed in which (there may be a combination) is shaken.

Further, even on the screen that is re-displayed, the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are displayed, and if the display mode of the navigation character YM or/and the variable icon h0 is a red display mode, an advantageous jackpot determination (for example, a probability change A big hit or a big hit with a long number of rounds) may be confirmed. Alternatively, if the display mode has not changed, the advantageous jackpot is not confirmed, but if the display mode is promoted, the advantageous jackpot may be confirmed, or the display mode is a golden or iridescent premium. , The advantageous jackpot may be definite.

87(I1) to FIG. 87(I12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations and also functions as a prefetching notice.

In FIG. 87 (I1), a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes.

In FIG. 87 (B2), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 87 (I3), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted and the variable display of symbols is started. Even when the next symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed.

In FIG. 87 (I4-1), a change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started. In other words, the lord's navigation character YM, which had been standing upright to the front (initial posture), changes to the pose in which the sword is pulled out while facing the variable icon h0. In FIG. 87(15), a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM of the lord, but in FIG. 87(6), the display mode of the change icon h0 remains the default, and the change effect ends in failure. There is. In FIG. 87 (B7), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of decorative symbols that have been lost. The navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed again in the initial posture.

In FIG. 87 (B8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started again. Even when the third symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 87 (B9), the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is restarted. In FIG. 87 (11), the change icon h0 that was white until then has changed to red, and the normal notice has started. In FIG. 12B, the navigation character YM has returned to the initial posture with the display mode wearing a red kimono. After that, although not shown in the drawing, the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display currently performed.

Further, instead of FIG. 87 (YES 4-1), in FIG. 87 (YES 4-2-1), the navigation character YM moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the hold icon display area HIS during the variable display of symbols. In the same figure (I 4-2-2), the change animation for the hold icon is started. The movement of the navigation character YM may be an animation, or the display position may be momentarily switched. Further, when the navigation character YM goes out of the effect icon display area DIS, another display (for example, a business trip is displayed on the signboard at a position (initial position) where the navigation character YM was displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The icon display described as “medium”) may be displayed.

There may be a case where the change effect on the hold icon by the navigation character YM fails (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or conversely, even if it always succeeds (the display mode of the hold icon changes). Good. Also, the change effect may be performed only on the hold icon to be read ahead. For example, only when the number of holdings is 1, the first holding icon h11 may be targeted, or a plurality of holding icons (which may include a variable icon) may be targeted. Furthermore, the change effect on the hold icon by the navigation character YM may be performed any number of times until the display mode of the prefetch target hold changes (until it succeeds), or may not be performed again if it fails once. ..

Further, the change effect may be performed again for the hold icon whose display mode has once changed due to the change effect. This is not limited to the hold icon, and the same applies to the variable icon h0.

Furthermore, in the change effect for the variable icon h0, the navigation character YM may be moved from the effect icon display area DIS. Further, the navigation character YM may move within the effect icon display area DIS even if it does not go out of the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, the navigation character YM may be movable only within the holding frame UI, or may be movable outside the holding frame UI.

In this example, the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is performed every time from the next change after the change in which the color of the navigation character YM is red to the change of the prefetch target hold. There may be a change in which no change animation is performed between the change following the change in which the color of the navigation character YM is red and the change in the prefetch target. Further, a change animation may be performed even when the navigation character YM changes to red.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of the change effect of the hold icon and the change effect of the variable icon by the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 88 (1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes.

In FIG. 88 (U2), the effect icon (here, the UFO icon UFI) appears outside the holding frame UI and approaches the holding frame UI. The effect icon may appear in the hold frame UI. As shown in FIG. 88 (v3), a white beam is emitted from the UFO icon UFI toward the second holding icon h12, and the display mode of the second holding icon h12 is changed as shown in FIG. 88 (v4). , The default display mode is changed to a white flashing display mode. That is, promotion production has succeeded. There are multiple types of effect icons, and the success probability of promotion effect may change depending on the effect icon that appears. For example, when the first effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be surely successful, and when the second effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be 80% or more successful. When the third effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be less than 50% successful. In FIG. 88 (v 4), the UFO icon UFI has disappeared. In FIG. 88 (v 5), the three decorative symbols are in a temporary stop state. In FIG. 88 (6), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 88 (C7), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the same figure (C8), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 88 (v 9), the navigation character YM in the default display mode changes to a bow-drawing pose, and the promotion effect of the hold icon by the navigation character YM is started. The promotion effect here is also an animation display. In FIG. 88 (e), the arrow is fired, and the arrow flies over the variation icon h0, and in the same figure (e), it hits the first hold icon h11 which is a white blinking display mode, In FIG. 12C, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from blinking white to a blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. Note that the promotion effect here may also fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change) or, conversely, may always succeed (change the display mode of the hold icon). Further, only when the number of holdings is one, the first holding icon h11 may be targeted, or a plurality of holding icons (which may include variable icons) may be targeted. Furthermore, the promotion effect may be performed any number of times until the display mode changes (until it succeeds) with respect to the prefetch target suspension, or may not be performed again after one failure. Moreover, you may perform promotion production again with respect to the hold icon which the display mode changed once by promotion production. The promotion effect by the navigation character may be an effect that is displayed only for one of the hold icons even if a plurality of hold icons are displayed (that is, the position of the hold icon A moves as the number of hold decreases. However, the promotion effect is performed by the navigation character only for the hold icon A.), and the effect may be performed for a plurality of hold icons and/or variable icons displayed in the hold icon display area. .. In FIG. 88 (v13), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture, and in FIG. 88 (v14), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols that are missing. Has been done. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 88 (C15), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the same figure (C16), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed in the initial posture. The change icon h0 is an icon that has changed from the first hold icon h11 that has changed to the blue display mode in the promotion effect, and is also displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the blue display mode.

In FIG. 88 (u 17), the change icon treasure box icon I1 appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in FIG. 88 (u 18) the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box is displayed. Icon I1 of remains. In FIG. 88 (v 19), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, and the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides part or all of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM. Is clearly harder to see than before the smoke image appeared. In FIG. 88 (e 20-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. At the timing of FIG. 88 (e 21), the treasure box icon I1 disappears, and only the navi character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The color of the display mode of the navigation character YM represents the reliability (expectation) of the big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display. Alternatively, it may represent the ease of change (promotion) of the display mode of the variable icon. Further, although the hold icon is not displayed here, when the hold icon is displayed, it may indicate the easiness of change (promotion) of the display mode of the hold icon.

In FIG. 88 (e), the player enters the reach state, and in FIG. 88 (e), the super reach effect is developed. When developing to the super reach effect, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 in the hold icon display area HIS disappear, and when the hold icon remains, the hold icon also disappears. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (v), the right base icon bIr disappears, and the foot portion of the navi character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono disappears. Further, although the pedestal in the variable icon display area CIS is sinking, the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. In FIG. 88 (e25) during super reach, the navigation character YM disappears completely, and the variable icon h0 in a blue display mode is displayed on the lowered pedestal hs0'. Although the navigation character YM has disappeared here, it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 85. Further, both the pedestal hs0' and the variation icon h0 may disappear, or only one of them may disappear.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (27-1), as a continuation of the super reach effect, a duel scene in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed on the background screen h of the wilderness. .. Also here, both the pedestal hs0' and the variation icon h0 are displayed.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 88 and a modified example.

In FIG. 89 (29), all of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a lighter color than usual, and the scene in which the lord has fallen is displayed. Also here, both the pedestal hs0' and the variation icon h0 are displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (v30), the super reach effect ends, the display returns to the normal background, and the second decorative pattern and the second hold number display, the pedestal hs0′ and the variable icon h0 are displayed. There is. In FIG. 89 (31), the display of the left symbol and the right symbol is restored, and the pedestal that has been sunk until now begins to rise with the fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (32), the combination of decorative symbols is displayed in a shaking manner, and the holding frame UI is also redisplayed. The navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

In addition, in place of FIG. 88 (e 20-1), in FIG. 89 (e 20-2), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode wearing a premier iridescent kimono. In this case, since the display mode of the navigation character YM is iridescent regardless of the display mode (color) of the variable icon h0, the big hit is confirmed. The display mode of the variable icon may be changed to a display mode of red or more, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color. When the navigation character YM functions as a pre-reading notice, the display mode of the pre-reading target hold icon may be changed to a display mode of red or more, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color.

Also, in place of FIG. 88 (v 27-1 ), in FIG. 89 (v 27-2 ), the right base icon bIr is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and further, the navigation mode of the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. The character YM is displayed. The navigation character YM displayed here is displayed and does not have to do anything. Alternatively, the navigation character YM itself may promote its own display mode or change the display mode of the variable icon. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may be changed by another notice display.

Here, the notice by the effect icon (here, the UFO icon UFI) and/or the change notice display (here, the treasure box icon I1) is displayed before one decorative symbol (for example, the left symbol) is temporarily stopped. It is configured such that, after one decorative design is temporarily stopped, the effect icon and/or the change notice display is not used to give a notice, but one decorative design is temporarily stopped. The effect icon and/or the change notice display may be displayed after that. Although it is described as one decorative design, it may be a plurality of decorative designs or all decorative designs. Further, while the design (variable display by the special symbol display device) is completely stopped, the effect icon and/or the change notice display does not give a notice, but it may be done.

89(e1) to FIG. 89(e4-1) are examples in which the navigation character YM itself changes its own display mode.

In FIG. 89(e1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 89 (e2), the pose of the navigation character YM is changed and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 89 (e3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a gray smoke image, which makes it difficult to see. In the same figure (e4-1), the display mode changes to wearing a red kimono. ing.

Also, instead of FIG. 89 (e 3-1), in the same figure (e 3-2), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a red smoke image, and thereafter, the navigation character YM is in a red kimono. Changes to the display mode wearing. In this way, the change animation itself may give a notice of the display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes. Further, the red smoke image may be a notice display for announcing that the display mode will be changed to red or more if the change of the navigation character is successful, and it is determined that the display mode is changed to red or more. It may be a notice display.

Also, instead of FIG. 89 (e 3-1), in the same figure (e 3-3), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a rainbow-colored smoke image, and the variable display of the pattern currently being performed, or After that, the big hit is confirmed by the variable display of the symbols (the big hit may be rich). In this way, the change animation itself may give the advance notice or the advance notice. It should be noted that the rainbow-colored smoke image may be a notification that the change to the rainbow-colored display mode will be made if the change of the navigation character is successful. In this case, even if the rainbow-colored smoke image is displayed, It is not necessary that the pattern variation in which the smoke image of the color is displayed and/or the pending state is a big hit determination (may be a big hit density).

In addition, in FIG. 89 (e 4-2) instead of FIG. 89 (e 4-1), the navi character is changed to another navi character. Here, it has been changed to a princess navigation character. The type of changing character may be a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above, or may be only a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization.

Also, in FIG. 89 (e 4-2) instead of FIG. 89 (e 4-2), the navi character is changed to a navi character (for example, a bancho character) that cannot be selected by the player. It should be noted that the bancho navi character may be configured such that the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the change icon is easier to perform than the nav character YM, or the change and/or hold of the symbol in which the navi character has changed. It may be configured to have a high expectation of a big hit.

It should be noted that the navigation character of Hime (bancho) may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the variation icon may be performed more easily than the navigation character YM, and the variation of the symbol in which the navigation character has changed and It may be configured to have a high expectation of a big hit in the hold, or configured to easily (or inevitably) generate a notice and/or super reach effect that a princess (bancho) appears. It may be.

When the navigation character YM is changed to another navigation character, the navigation character YM may be changed to only a navigation character that the player can select, and the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character. It may be configured, and there may be both a case where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and a case where the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character. In both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and when the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character, the player selects the navigation character that is selectable by the player. The non-navi character may be configured such that the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the change icon is more likely to be performed, and the expectation of a change in the pattern in which the navigation character changes and/or a big hit in the hold is higher. It may be configured as follows. On the other hand, in both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and when the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character, the player plays more than the non-selectable navigation character. The navigation character that can be selected by the person may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the change icon can be performed more easily, and the change of the navigation character and/or the expectation of a big hit in the hold state It may be configured to be highly flexible.

Further, in FIG. 89 (e 4-1) instead of FIG. 89 (e 4-1), the character does not change, and the change effect of the character itself fails.

In this example, the navigation character YM itself changes the display mode of the navigation character YM by itself, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is not entangled. The display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes may be announced. For example, when the red treasure box icon I1 appears, it may be determined that the navigation character YM changes to red or a display mode of red or more.

Further, depending on the color of the icon I1 of the treasure box, the expectation level of the big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display or in the symbol variation display started thereafter may be announced. That is, the normal notice or the prefetch notice may be given depending on the color of the treasure box icon I1.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the holding frame is temporarily invisible.

The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (1). The navigation character YM in the initial posture shown in FIG. 90(1) has a default display mode. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes.

In FIG. 90(2), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third holding icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

In FIG. 90 (4), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed in the initial posture. The background of the sea is still displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (4).

In FIG. 90 (5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. On the decorative design display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative design has started, and the background of the sea is still displayed.

In FIG. 90 (6), a background change notice, which is a type of prefetch notice, is started. The target of the background change notice here (prefetch target suspension) is the suspension increased at the timing of FIG. 90(2) (second suspension at this timing). In the background change notice, a sliding door image appears from the left and right, and the entire sliding screen becomes a sliding door image due to the animation of closing the sliding door (see FIG. 90 (7)). Therefore, the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding doors and are invisible. Instead of the fusuma image, an image that overlaps the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and a part of the navigation character YM from the front side may appear. Alternatively, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM may be rendered such that no images overlap.

It should be noted that the background change notice may be started at the time of winning the prefetch target suspension (timing of FIG. 90(2)). In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but it is not limited to the next change, and it may be started before the change of the prefetch target suspension ends. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the prefetch target suspension.

In the background change notice, the appearance image (here, the image of the sliding door) may indicate the expectation of the jackpot of the prefetch target, or if the navigation character YM of the same color as the sliding door appears. , Functions as an advance notice that the navigation character YM changes, and corresponds to a change advance notice display. It may also function as a notice of the background itself, such as the case where the color of the fusuma is green and the background of the mountain changes. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

In FIG. 90(8), the sliding doors are opened, and the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM start to be seen. In FIG. 90(8), the sliding doors are completely opened and the sliding door images Disappeared. Due to the background change notice, the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 has changed to the night background. In addition, the navigation character YM after the background change has changed to a character that depends on the changed background. Here, the lord's character has changed to a robot character. In this example, one type of character corresponds to one type of background, but a plurality of types of characters may correspond to one type of background.

In FIG. 90 (11), the reach state is entered. In addition, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode between FIG. 90 (9-1) and FIG. 90 (11). Note that the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change from the default display mode to a red display mode when the reach state is entered. Although the hold frame UI is displayed, all hold icons h11 and h12 have disappeared. After that, it developed into super reach production, and changed to the background of the super reach production (here, the background of the wilderness). On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (13), the scene where the lord is defeated is displayed in the background of the wilderness. In addition, the navigation character YM of the robot overlaps with the fallen lord, making it difficult to see.

In FIG. 90 (14), the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the wipe display by the wipe-in. As shown in FIG. 90 (15), in the wipe display here, neither the variable icon h0 nor the navigation character YM disappears, and further, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display disappear, and the model title is displayed in the left corner. Is only displayed. In FIG. 90 (16), the wipeout is performed, the background returns to the background of the night, and the navigation character YM is also beginning to be seen.

In FIG. 90 (17), the wipe effect is finished, and the decorative symbol display device 208 swayingly displays the combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”. Further, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and the variable icon h0 in the red display mode and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed again.

In FIG. 90 (eighteen), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of lost characters.

After that, the first hold is exhausted, and after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the next symbol variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 90 (20-1). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started, and the symbol variation of the prefetch target suspension has ended, but the background remains the night background.

In FIG. 90 (21), the background change notice is restarted, the sliding door image appears from the left and right, and the sliding door is closed again, so that the entire display screen becomes a sliding door image (FIG. 90 (22)). reference). In FIG. 90 (23), the sliding doors are opened, and the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM start to be seen. In the same drawing (24), the sliding doors are completely opened and the sliding door images Disappeared. As shown in FIG. 90 (24), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 has returned to the background of the sea, and the navigation character YM has also returned to the lord's character.

In addition, in FIG. 90 (9-2) instead of FIG. 90 (9-1), the display mode of the navigation character YM of the robot is changed to a display mode different from the default. The display mode (for example, color, shape, size, etc.) of the background-dependent character may also change according to the reliability of the big hit. Alternatively, it may have changed originally.

It should be noted that the navigation character YM may change depending on the effect background regardless of the background of the prefetching notice. For example, when a coastal background, a castle town background, and a castle background appear in order, the navigation character YM may be changed depending on each background. Note that the appearance order of the plurality of types of backgrounds may be random. Also, when the player changes the effect mode, the navigation character YM may change depending on the background change. Also, a navigation character different from the navigation character depending on the effect background may be displayed. For example, when the navigation character A is displayed on the effect background A and the navigation character B is displayed on the effect background B, the navigation character B may be displayed on the effect background A. Here, when the navigation character that does not match the effect background is displayed, the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the variable icon is more easily performed than when the navigation character that matches the effect background is displayed. It may be configured such that the navigation character has a changed symbol variation and/or the expectation of a big hit in the hold is high (or a big hit is confirmed (may be a big hit rich)). It may be configured such that a notice that a navigation character that does not match the background appears and/or a super-reach effect occurs frequently (or always occurs).

On the contrary, the type of the navigation character YM may not change even if the background is changed, or may not change absolutely.

FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 91 (or 1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 91 (or 2-1), a speech balloon for calling a friend is additionally displayed on the navigation character YM. The display of the balloon corresponds to a notice made by the currently displayed navigator character YM that another character (grandpa or princess) will be displayed. In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 91 (or 3-1), in addition to the lord's navigation character YM, the display of the princess navigation character YM1 is added, and the princess is successfully called. The appearance of the princess character may be an animation display or may be a mode in which the character appears momentarily. In the case of an animation display, the smoke image may be an animation in which the character is not initially visible, or may be an animation that appears by walking from the right end of the screen. This princess navigation character YM1 is also a default display mode.

In FIG. 91 (or 4), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. Both the default navigator character YM and the princess navigator character YM1, which are default display modes, are displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 91 (or 5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the two navigation characters YM and YM1 are still displayed. In this way, the display of the plurality of navigation characters may span multiple variations. However, in the symbol variable display in which the navigation character YM1 has appeared, the navigation character YM1 that has appeared may disappear. Even in this case, the previously displayed navigation character (here, the lord's navigation character YM) is displayed over a plurality of variations.

In FIG. 91 (or 5), this time, a speech bubble of a word that calls a grandfather is additionally displayed on the two navigation characters YM and YM1, and the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 91 (or 6-1) is displayed. In addition to the two navigation characters YM and YM1, the display of the grandpa navigation character YM2 is added, and the grandpa is successfully called. In other words, this means that all three have been completed. In this production, the more the navigation characters gather, the higher the probability that the variation icon h0 will change, the higher the probability that the variation icon h0 will change to a premier color or a color close to the premier, and the higher the degree of expectation of a big hit in the variation. It may become higher or the expectation of a big hit after the next change may be higher. In addition, when all three people are gathered, the iridescent color of the premiere or the big hit may be decided. In FIG. 91 (or 7-1), the first decorative symbol is in a reach state in a state where all three are aligned, and “decoration 7” is shaken (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol.

Further, instead of FIG. 91 (or 2-1), in FIG. 91 (or 2-2-1), a notice other than the navigation character YM itself is given. That is, in FIG. 91 (or 2-1), the navigation character YM
However, in this example, the roulette display icon RI is additionally displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the roulette announcement is started. The roulette notice here may be dedicated to the notice of the appearance of another navigation character, or may be another notice (such as a notice of a pending change). In FIG. 91 (or 2-2), the princess character is displayed on the roulette display icon RI. After that, the navigator character YM1 of the princess may appear, but there may be a case where no navigator character appears (a so-called failure), or a different navigator character (for example, the grandpa navigator character YM2) is displayed. It may appear in some cases. Although the roulette display icon RI is configured so that the characters of the characters that have already appeared are not displayed, the characters of the characters that have already appeared may appear. In that case, a plurality of the same characters may be displayed according to the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, when the princess character is stopped and displayed three times on the roulette display icon RI, the navigation character of the princess is displayed. Depending on the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI, three characters may be displayed, and promotion effects of the characters that have already appeared may be performed (for example, the princess character is 3 on the roulette display icon RI). When the stop is displayed, the princess appears at the first time, the princess's kimono changes to red at the second time, and the princess's kimono changes to gold at the third time.)

Further, instead of FIG. 91 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 91 (or 3-2), no navigation character may appear and the operation may fail.

Also, instead of FIG. 91 (or 3-1), in FIG. 91 (or 3-3), the old navigation character YM2 appears instead of the princess navigation character YM1. In this way, the order of appearance is not fixed, and different animations may be performed depending on the navigation characters displayed next to each other. For example, in FIG. 91 (or 3-1), the navigator character YM of the lord thought that the navigator character YM1 of the princess came, but the navigator character YM2 of the grandpa came and an astonished animation was displayed. The grandfather may come before the princess in the premiere production. Depending on the order in which the characters appear, the changing probability of the change icon h0 changes, the probability of changing the color to a premier or a color close to the premier changes, the expectation of a big hit in the change, or a big hit after the next change. The expectations may change, or they may not be affected at all.

Further, instead of FIG. 91 (or 3-1), the display position may be predetermined by the character, as shown in FIG. 91 (or 3-4-1). That is, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 91 (or 3-4-1), the lord's navigation character YM is displayed at the left end, and the princess navigation character YM1 is displayed with one person left. Then, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 91 (or 3-4-3), a grand navigation character YM2 is displayed at a position separated by one person. Thus, even if the order of display positions (lord, grandfather, princess) is fixed, the order may be broken (lord, princess, grandfather). In this case, the premiere effect It may be (a big hit confirmation effect) or a big hit.

In addition, instead of FIG. 91 (or 3-1), as shown in the same figure (or 3-5-1), when the number of navigation characters increases, the increase is displayed in a character display (here, “Hime Stock” )), or by voice from a speaker, or by blinking a lamp or the like. In addition, in FIG. 91 (or 3-5-3), the fact that all members have gathered is notified by a character display. In addition, when all the members succeed, the character display is always "All members", but a different character display (for example, "Gekiatsu" or "All members reach") is displayed. In this case, it may be a premiere effect (big hit confirmation effect), a big hit rich, or a specific reach mode may be started without fail. Also here, together with the notification of the character display, or instead of the notification of the character display, the notification may be performed by voice from a speaker, or the notification may be performed by blinking a lamp or the like.

Further, instead of FIG. 91 (or 6-1), as shown in FIG. 91 (or 6-2), characters other than the lord, princess, and grandpa (here, a haniwa character YM3 simulating a cactus) are increased. In the case of winning, it may be a premiere effect (a big hit confirmation effect) or a big hit.

In addition, when "Grandpa" is displayed even though "Hime" is specified and called, it may be a premiere effect (big hit confirmation effect) or a big hit, and "Hime" is called. If the frequency of displaying the "grandpa" is higher than that of the old character, when the called character ("hime") appears, the jackpot may be concentrated (or the jackpot is confirmed). Further, depending on the display mode of the navigation character (lord in this example) that calls another navigation character, the other navigation character may easily appear (stock) or may be difficult to appear (stock). In addition, depending on the type of the navigation character that calls another navigation character, the other navigation character may easily appear (stock) or may be difficult to appear (stock). For example, it may be easier for another navi character to appear (stock) when the navi character of the princess calls it than the navi character of the lord. The characters that appear (stock) are not limited to different types of characters, and may be navigation characters of the same type. For example, a plurality of navigator characters YM of the lord may be displayed, or may be described as lord*3. In addition, even the same type of navigation characters may have different display modes (color, shape, pose, size). Furthermore, the effect performed after being displayed may differ depending on the character. For example, when an effect in which the character is emitted from the effect icon display area DIS is performed, the pseudo-relation effect starts when the lord is released, the hold is promoted when the princess is released, and the timer advance notice starts when the grandpa is released. .. Also, a plurality of characters may be released. Furthermore, when a plurality of characters are released at the same time, an effect different from the release of a single character may be performed. For example, when the lord and the princess are released at the same time, a pseudo continuous production that is hotter than the lord alone may be started.

92 is a diagram showing a modified example and the like shown in FIG. 91.

In FIG. 92 (1), the navigator character YM of the lord in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture, and to the right of that, the princess navigation character YM1 in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. ing. Further, on the right side of the princess navigation character YM1, a treasure box icon I1 of change notice display is displayed. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 92 (ki 2-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and only the navigator character YM1 of the princess among the navi character YM of the lord and the navi character YM1 of the princess has the smoke. It is wrapped in an image. That is, the smoke image does not reach the lord's navigation character YM. In FIG. 92 (Ki 4), the smoke image disappears and the princess navigation character YM1 changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono. In FIG. 92 (Ki 5), the treasure box icon I1 has disappeared.

In FIG. 92 (KI 2-1) instead of FIG. 92 (KI 2-1), the pose of the lord's navigation character YM is changed and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 92 (KI 2-2-2), the lord's navigation character YM causes a smoke image to appear, and only the princess navigation character YM1 is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 92 (KI 2-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the princess navigation character YM1 changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono. Moreover, the lord's navigation character YM has returned to the initial posture.

In FIG. 92 (KI 3-1) instead of FIG. 92 (KI 3-1), the smoke image that appears from the treasure box icon I1 is displayed for both the lord's navigation character YM and the princess navigation character YM1. It wraps the navigation character. Then, in FIG. 92 (Ki 3-2-2), the smoke image disappears, and both the lord's navigation character YM and the princess' navigation character YM1 are changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono. That is, the display mode of both of them has changed. Here, both of them change to the same color, but they may change to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, both of the smoke images may be wrapped, but only one may change and the other may remain the default.

When a plurality of navigation characters are displayed, one navigation character (for example, princess) may be promoted and the other navigation character (for example, Yoshimune) may not be promoted. Also, both navigation characters may be promoted. In that case, one of the characters (for example, princess) may be hotter than the other character (for example, Yoshimune) may be changed, and the expectation of the big hit may be the same. Also, it may be hotter when both characters change than when one character changes. Also, it may be hotter that one character changes than both characters change depending on the change mode. For example, a combination of the lord's navigation character YM in the default display mode and the princess's navigation character YM1 in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, and the lord's navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono and also the red mode With the combination of the princess navi character YM1 in the display mode wearing a kimono, the former combination may be easier to hit than the latter combination. Further, both characters may be changed without fail. In that case, the color may be changed to the same color or may be changed to a different color. Further, the meaning of the changed character may change depending on the changing character. For example, in the case of a navi character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the fluctuation is hot, and in the case of a navi character YM1 in a display mode wearing a red kimono, it is easy to develop into super reach. Good. Also, if it is the navi character YM of the lord in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, the big hit is confirmed, and if the navigation character YM of the princess in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono is the big hit with a certainty confirmation ( It may be an advantageous jackpot confirmation).

In this example, the navigation character YM is displayed when one navigation character is always displayed and another navigation character is newly called by the navigation character, or when a plurality of navigation characters are constantly displayed. The present embodiment can be applied to a case where one or a plurality of navigation characters are displayed at a specific timing because there is a period in which they are not displayed.

FIG. 92 (KU1-1) to FIG. 92 (KU7) show an example of effect in which button effects are entwined with the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 92 (KU1-1), the navigator character YM of the lord in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

The button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. The button display icon 136D is a display form of a balloon and corresponds to a notice given by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In FIG. 92 (3), the operation valid period is started, and in FIG. 92 (4), the remaining period meter is slightly decreased. In FIG. 92(5), the chance button 136 is operated, and in FIG. 92(6), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and the lord's character is visually recognized by the effect image. It's getting harder. In FIG. 92 (7), the navi character is changed to a lord's figure in a display mode wearing a red kimono.

Also in FIG. 92 (K 1-2-1), the navigator character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture, but the button display icon 136D is not displayed here. That is, when the back button effect is being performed and the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 92 (KU1-2-2), the opportunity button 136 is operated in the same figure (KU1-2-3). In response, the change animation of the navigation character YM has started. In this way, the display mode of the navigation character may change depending on the back button effect.

It should be noted that both the back button effect and the other button effect (with button display) may both change, the back button effect may be prioritized, and the other button effect may be prioritized. The same applies when the back buttons overlap.

Further, when the look-ahead button notice and the change button notice (normal notice) overlap, the look-ahead button notice may be prioritized, or the change button notice may be prioritized.

In addition, in FIG. 92 (2-1) instead of FIG. 92 (2-1), a button display icon 136D is not added to the navigation character YM, but a position away from the navigation character YM. The button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT are displayed at positions outside the effect icon display area DIS and outside the holding frame UI. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT here is a notice different from the notice given by the navigation character YM itself, and the display mode of the navigation character YM may also be changed by this different notice. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT may be always displayed or may be displayed before the start of the effective period.

FIG. 93 shows an example of effect in which the effect of the button holding icon is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 93 (C-3-1), the lord's navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 illustrated in FIG. 93(K-3-1) is a button hold icon, and the button image 136a is displayed on the white circle display. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 here is within the period of the fluctuation. When the chance button 136 is operated in Fig. 93 (1-3-2a), a smoke image of the effect appears as shown in (1-3-3a) in the same figure, and the smoke image causes the navigation image to navigate. Part or all of the character YM is hidden, which makes it more difficult to visually recognize it than before the smoke image appears. Here, the button image 136a displayed on the first hold icon h11 has been deleted, and the first hold icon h11 does not change (for example, change in display mode). That is, when the chance button 136 is displayed while the button holding icon is being displayed, the display mode of the first holding icon h11 is not changed, and the navigation character YM is changed. is there. It should be noted that the navigation character and/or the button holding icon itself does not change when the chance button 136 is operated outside the operation valid period. However, there may be a case where the state shifts to the later-described diagram (1-3-4) via the state shown in FIG. 93 (1-3-3a).

When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 93 (1-3-2a), the button image 136a disappears for the button holding icon as shown in (1-3-3b1) in FIG. The effect image may be applied to the first hold icon h11, and the change animation may be started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 93 (1-3-3b2), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from a white circle display mode to a blue circle display mode. It should be noted that there may be a case where the display mode of the white circle display remains (eventually, a pattern that failed). In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 93 (KU 1-3-2a), it is displayed in FIG. 93 (KU 1-3-3b2) without passing through the same figure (KU 1-3-3b1). As shown in the figure, the icon that was the button holding icon may change to a display mode of a blue circle display without a change animation.

Alternatively, as shown in (1-3-3b1) of FIG. 93, as shown in (1-3-4) of FIG. 93, although the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change and remains as a white circle, the navigation character The YM may change to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn. The change of the display mode of the navigation character YM here is not a change animation when it goes through FIG. 93 (1-3-3b1), but the display mode is switched instantaneously, and the display mode of FIG. In the case of passing through 3a), it is displayed after the change animation by the effect of the smoke image is executed. However, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed when the process goes through FIG. 93 (1-3-3b1). It should be noted that the change may occur immediately after the chance button 136 is operated, or the change may occur slightly later. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 93 (1-3-2a), it is shown in FIG. 93 (1-3-4) without passing through the same figure (1-3-3b1). As described above, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change.

In addition, even if the button hold icon is displayed, the chance button is not operated (Fig. 93 (1-3-2b1)) and the next variation is started (the variation of the first decorative symbol is still started). In the case where the variation of the second decorative symbol has not been started yet), the variation icon h0 may become the button holding icon, as shown in (1-3-2b2) in the figure. In this case, the button effect has been carried over to the next change, and if the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the button image 136a disappears as shown in FIG. 93 (1-3-2b3′). The white circle display on which the button image 136a was displayed may change to the display mode of the blue circle display (success pattern). When changing, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed. Although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, it may change. On the other hand, even if the chance button 136 is operated, with respect to the variable icon h0, the button image 136a disappears, but there is no change (for example, change in display mode) in the white circle display where the button image 136a was displayed. It may not occur. That is, it is a pattern in which the change effect from the button holding icon has failed. Although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change. Even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated and the next change is started, the button hold icon may not be changed. It may be configured to be automatically changed after the next change is started without operating the button.

Even if the button holding icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated (Fig. 93 (1-3-2b1)) and the next change is started, the same figure (1-3) is displayed. -2b2'), an effect image may be applied to the variable icon h0 and a change animation may be started. In this case, the process may shift to the previous Fig. 93 (K 1-3-2b3') or the process may shift to Fig. 93 (K 1-3-2b3).

The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 93 (-3-1) has the default display mode, but the same applies to the navigation character YM having the promoted display mode. That is, the second promotion is performed in FIG. 93 (1-3-4). When there are a plurality of hold icons, icons other than the button hold icon may be changed. Further, the holding icon that has already changed may be changed by operating the button when the button holding icon is displayed.

Further, when eight hold icons are displayed, for example, when N pieces are accumulated, the hold icons are changed to part or all of the button hold icons, and the hold icon, the variable icon, and the navigation character YM are changed according to the button operation. It may be configured to change. This is applicable even when only four hold icons are displayed.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example in which there is a period in which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94(K1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. The navigation symbol YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 94 (key 2), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased and the third holding icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

In FIG. 94 (3), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of decorative symbols that have been lost. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 94 (K4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. In addition, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 is changed to a blue display mode in response to the start of the symbol variable display. Even if the symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 94 (key 5-1), and in FIG. 94 (key 6-1) the smoke image disappears, and the lord's navigation character is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. YM is displayed. The lord's navigation character YM shown in FIG. 94 (key 6-1) is the default display mode. Here, the navigation character YM is a notice corresponding to the prefetch target suspension (prefetch notice and/or notice of the change).

The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning the prefetch target suspension (timing of FIG. 94 (2)). In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but it is not limited to the next change, and it may be started before the change of the prefetch target suspension ends. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed without fail if there is a prefetch target suspension, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won.

In FIG. 94 (K7), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM in the default display mode whose display is started during the symbol variable display stopped and displayed here is still displayed in the initial posture.

Next, the next symbol variation display is started, and in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 94 (key 9-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the advance notice display is displayed next to the navigation character YM in the default display mode. It is displayed. The navigation character YM has its display mode changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono by the same change animation as the change animation shown in FIG. 85 (a 4-1) (FIG. 94 (key 11)). In addition, even if the change animation is executed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the default display mode. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change without the treasure box icon I1 appearing. That is, the change notice display may not be displayed.

In FIG. 94 (key 13), the variation of the prefetch target suspension is started and the variation icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is also displayed during this change. Therefore, the navigation character YM was not initially displayed, but after being displayed, it is always displayed over a plurality of variations.

Note that the navigation character YM may disappear when the change of the prefetch target suspension that is currently being performed ends. In this case, the navigation character YM may disappear between the three symbols or the temporary stop (swing display) to the stop of the symbols in the change of the decorative symbols of the prefetch target suspension, or one or two decorative symbols. May disappear after a temporary stop (first stop or second stop).

Further, the navigation character YM may disappear at the timing of the stop display in FIG. 94 (key 7) and may not be displayed across the fluctuation.

Further, instead of FIG. 94 (KE 5-1), as shown in FIG. 94 (KE 5-2), the place where the navigation character YM is displayed is not limited to the effect icon display area DIS, and the hold icon. It may be displayed in the display area HIS. The navigation character YM may be displayed in a plurality of places, and may be displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Furthermore, the navigation character YM may execute different effects depending on the displayed position. For example, the hold icon may be changed when displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon may be changed when displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Further, the probability of changing the variable icon may be different depending on the display position, and thus the reliability of the big hit may be different. Note that the location where the navigation character YM is displayed may be only one display area (for example, the effect icon display area DIS, the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, etc.).

Further, as shown in FIG. 94 (KE 5-1) instead of FIG. 94 (KE 5-1), the navigation character YM is movable within the hold icon display area HIS (left base icon bIl). Then, when the hold icon is displayed, the front side of the hold icon may be moved. That is, it is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon from the front side.

On the other hand, the navigation character YM may move behind the hold icon, as shown in FIG. 94 (key 5-1), as shown in FIG. 94 (key 5-4). That is, this time, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap the navigation character YM from the front side.

The navigation character may perform animation to move a plurality of display areas (for example, effect icon display area DIS, hold icon display area HIS, variable icon display area CIS, etc.).

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example in which there is another period in which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (K 6-2-1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes.

After that, the hold digestion continues, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (key 6-2-3a), the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost is displayed in a shaking state in the state where there is no hold. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (K 6-2-4), the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a state where there is no hold. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed.

In FIG. 95 (K 6-2-6), in the state where there is no hold, there is a winning in the first special symbol starting opening 230, the symbol variable display is started, and the first decorative symbol has not yet started to vary. , The second decorative pattern has begun to change. At this point, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (K 6-2-7), an increase animation of the hold icon representing the already-held hold (holding of the changed pattern display that has been started) is displayed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 95 (key 6-2-7) is displayed lightly, and the erasing animation of the navigation character YM has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (K 6-2-8), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, and the hold icon h11 increased by the hold increase animation is displayed on the first stage hs1. There is. At this stage, the navigation character YM has completely disappeared. Note that, in reality, FIGS. 95 (ke 6-2-6) to (ke 6-2-8) in FIG. 95 (ke 6-2-8) are momentary events, but the deletion animation of the navigation character YM may be performed.

Although there is a time lag in the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM disappears at the start of symbol variable display from the state where there is no hold. The disappearance timing here may be before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, at the same time as the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol. May be after the start of. When the hold increase animation is performed, it may be before the start of the hold increase animation, at the same time as the start of the hold increase animation, or after the start of the hold increase animation. Good.

Further, instead of FIG. 95 (KE 6-2-3a), as shown in FIG. 95 (KE 6-2-3b1), a reach state may be entered, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is the reach state. It may be configured such that it does not change in some cases, or conversely, it may change during the reach state. Also, the display mode of the variable icon may be configured not to change during the reach state by the navigation character YM, or conversely, may change during the reach state.

In FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-3b2), the super reach production is developed, and in the same figure (Ke 6-2-3b3), a duel scene in which the lord and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. Also in FIG. 95 (K 6-2-3b3), the navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

Note that the navigation character YM may be configured such that the display mode may be promoted when the reach reaches the super reach, and conversely, the display mode may not be promoted when the reach reaches the normal reach. May be. On the contrary, even in the normal reach, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be promoted. For example, it may be promoted as a pre-reading notice after the next change. Further, when the "navi character promotion" symbol is stopped in the middle symbol during normal reach, the display mode is promoted. Further, the display mode may be promoted as a notice (normal notice) of the change.

After that, in FIG. 95 (K 6-2-3b4), the wipe effect and the like described with reference to FIG. 86 (A 14-2-4) to FIG. 86 (A 14-2-6) are executed, and FIG. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 6-2-3b5), "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loses, is shaken and displayed. The display mode of the navigation character YM remains the default display mode. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (key 6-2-3b6), "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loses, is stopped and displayed, and the navigation character YM also defaults. Is displayed as it is.

Fig. 95 (Ke 6-2-1) to (Ke 6-2-8), (Ke 6-2-3b1) to (Ke 6-2-3b6) are summarized, and the pattern change of the prefetch target suspension ends. , The navigation character displayed as a notice (prefetch notice and/or notice of the change) corresponding to the read ahead target hold is not hidden even when the hold becomes 0, and the next change is started. It has been erased. It should be noted that the navigation character is a pre-reading target pending before the fluctuation of the symbol ends (for example, before the decorative symbol becomes one or more temporary stop displays, at the same time as the temporary stop, or after the temporary stop, or the decorative symbol. All (three in this example: left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) are temporarily stopped before being temporarily stopped, and at the same time when temporarily stopped, then the symbols (special symbols) are stopped. It may be erased before), or after the symbol variation of the prefetch target suspension is completed (at the same time when the symbol (special figure) is stopped or after it is stopped).

FIG. 96 shows an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed.

In the holding frame UI of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96, the variable icon display area CIS is provided at the left end, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged. Further, a production icon display area DIS is provided at the right end. The hold icon display area HIS is located between the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS, and the base icon bIm extends. Eight stages are arranged on this base icon bIm, and a hold icon is displayed on each stage. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (ko a1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, the second hold number display shows that the hold number of special figure 1 is “3” and the hold number of special figure 2 is “2”, and five hold icons are displayed in total. There is. All of these five hold icons are default display modes.

In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 96, when there are five holds, the stage corresponding to the sixth hold is displayed in the same display mode (for example, white) as the first to fifth stages, and the seventh hold , The eighth stage hs7, hs8 are displayed in different display modes (for example, gray). Also, until the 3rd hold is accumulated, the 4th stage is white, the 5th and subsequent stages are gray, and when the 4th hold is accumulated, the 5th stage is white, and the 6th and later stages. Will turn gray. In this way, the display mode of the stage changes depending on the number of holdings, but the stage may always have the same display mode regardless of the number of holdings.

The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (ko a1).

In FIG. 96 (ko a2), the number of holdings of special figure 2 is increased by one, and the holding increase animation is performed in the same figure (ko a3), and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (ko a4), the holding icon is displayed. Is displayed. The added sixth hold icon h6 is also a default display mode. Further, the seventh stage hs7 changes to white, and the gray stage is the eighth stage hs8 only.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (ko a5), the navigation character YM in the default display mode appears, and a balloon saying "2 more are full" is added. The navigation character YM appears when the number of holdings is N or more (6 or more in this example).

In FIG. 96 (ko a6), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased by 1, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (ko a7), seven holding icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM of the default display mode is displayed. Is added a balloon saying "1 more is full". The added 7th hold icon h7 is also a default display mode. Further, the final eighth stage hs8 has also changed to white, and the gray stage has disappeared.

In FIG. 96 (ko a8), the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is increased by 1, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (ko a9), eight holding icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM of the default display mode is displayed. Has been added to the balloon "Full tank". The added 8th hold icon h8 is also a default display mode. In addition, in this example, the navigation character YM uses the balloon to give the notification about the number of holdings, but the notification may be omitted.

In this example, the navigation character YM may change when eight reservations are accumulated (when full). In FIG. 96 (ko a10), the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image, it does not always change and may not change. Further, the smoke image itself may not appear, and the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, when the hold is full, the navigation character YM may change without fail. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to change without fail when wrapped in a smoke image.

In FIG. 96 (ko a11), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and a balloon saying “The holding is hot” is added to the navigation character YM, and the prefetching notice is executed. .. The notice displayed in the balloon may be a notice of the change. Further, the degree of expectation of a big hit in the hold may be given in advance by a notice displayed in a balloon. Further, in the present example, the navigation character changes due to the symbol variation in which the holding is full, but the navigation character may be configured to change in the next variation of the symbol variation in which the holding is fully filled. Further, the navigation character may change for each symbol variation, and the variation of the navigation character may give a notice of the symbol variation.

The change of the navigation character YM is not limited to the color, but may be the display size, the pose, or the shape. Also, there may be a plurality of types of characters that appear, and the heat may differ depending on the character. For example, even if the navi character of Princess in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hotter than the navi character of the lord in the display mode wearing a red kimono, or the navigator character who is the leader is hotter than the navi character of the lord mode. Good.

FIG. 97 shows an example of effect in which a navigation character YM is entwined with a decorative design of a general figure.

In FIG. 97 (this b1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, a circled special figure 1 first hold icon h11, which represents the hold of special figure 1, is displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 1st hold icon h11 is a default display mode. Further, in FIG. 97 (this b1), although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the roulette display icon RI is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The roulette display icon RI here displays a variable display of a decorative pattern of a general figure, and as a result, in addition to “○” and “×”, “geki” as a big hit notice of the special map of the variation is displayed. "Atsu" is also included. In FIG. 97 (this b2), “◯” is displayed on the roulette display icon RI, which indicates that the general figure lottery has been won.

In FIG. 97 (this b3), the navigation character YM appears in the effect icon display area DIS. The navigation character YM is in the default display mode, and appears when the general figure lottery is won. In the succeeding FIG. 97 (step b4), since the general drawing lottery has been won, the electric Chu is opened, and the navigation character YM notifies that the electric Chu is being opened. In FIG. 97 (this b5-1), since the electric Chu is open, there is a winning following the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the number of reservations of special figure 2 increases up to four full tanks. In FIG. 97 (this b6-1), it is displayed in the second hold number display that the hold number of special figure 1 is “1” and the hold number of special figure 2 is “4”. Four diamond-shaped hold icons representing the 2 hold are displayed (special figure 2 first hold icon h21 to special figure 2 fourth hold icon h24). Note that all of the four special figure 2 hold icons h21 to h24 are default display modes. This pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed with priority over the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is changed to the special figure 1 It is displayed so as to overlap part of the hold icon of from the front side.

In (b7) of FIG. 97, the notification that the navi character YM is opening the power tube ends, and in (b8) of the following figure, since the opening time of the power tube ends, the roulette display icon RI itself disappears downward. Is going on. Note that the roulette display icon RI may be displayed until all of the pending symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed. In FIG. 97 (this b9), the roulette display icon RI has completely disappeared.

Thereafter, in FIG. 97 (this b11), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 97 (this b12), the suspension of the special figure 2 first hold icon h21 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (this b13), the variation icon of the special figure 2 is displayed. A diamond-shaped variation icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0.

In FIG. 97 (this b14), the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image, it does not always change and may not change. Further, the smoke image itself may not appear, and the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, when the hold is full, the navigation character YM may change without fail. The navigation character YM may be configured to always change when wrapped in a smoke image, or may not change even if wrapped in a smoke image.

In FIG. 97 (this b15-1), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and a balloon "This fluctuation is hot" is added to the navigation character YM, and a normal notice is given. There is. In addition, the advance notice is usually issued depending on the display mode of the navigation character YM.

Also, in place of FIG. 97 (this b15-1), in FIG. 97 (this b15-2-1), the navigation character YM is still in the default display mode, and the change effect has failed. The navigator character YM is provided with a balloon saying "This is a fluctuation."

After that, the reserved consumption of special figure 2 progresses, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (this b15-2-3), the variable display of the last special figure 2 is displayed. Here again, a balloon saying “This variation is” is added to the navigation character YM, and the effect by the navigation character YM is continued from the previous FIG. 97 (step b15-2-1). In FIG. 97 (this b15-2-4), a balloon saying “Farewell” is added to the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the effect by the navigation character YM is completed. The navigation character YM disappears from the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (this b15-2-5). When it is hot, the navigation character YM does not disappear, and the effect by the navigation character YM may continue, but on the contrary, the navigation character YM may always disappear. Even when the super reach effect is started between FIG. 97 (kob15-2-1) to FIG. 97 (kob15-2-4), the effect by the navigation character YM continues and the navigation character YM is displayed. The navigation character YM may end and the navigation character YM may disappear.

It should be noted that the navigation character YM described in FIGS. 97 (ko b1) to FIG. 97 (ko b15-1) and FIG. 97 (ko b15-2-1) to FIG. 97 (ko b15-2-4) has the fluctuation. Although only the advance notice is given and the advance notice is not given, the advance notice may be given in some cases.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example in which the change notice display is displayed on standby.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98(S1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 98(S1).

In FIG. 98 (S2), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third holding icon h13 and the fourth holding icon h14 are additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are also default display modes. Here, in this example, the hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 is the prefetch target hold.

In FIG. 98 (S3), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols that are lost. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 98 (Sa4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Even if the symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 98 (S5), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. The treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a notice display for changing the display mode of the navigation character YM, but in this example, the navigation character YM itself is not displayed. However, with the appearance of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display, it is informed (preliminary notice) that the navigation character YM may eventually appear. The treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display becomes a standby display until the navigation character YM appears. The standby display of the icon I1 of the treasure box is a display with the icon I2 of the carpet remaining on.

In FIG. 98 (seven), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of decorative symbols that have been lost. The navigation character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby display.

In FIG. 98 (Sa8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted and the variable display of symbols is started. Even when the symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby display.

In FIG. 98 (Sa 9-1), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby display.

In FIG. 98 (Sa 10-1), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. Even when the symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby display. In this way, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 may be performed over a plurality of variations.

A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 98 (Sa 11-1 ), and in FIG. 98 (Sa 12 ), the smoke image disappears and the lord's navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It is displayed. The lord's navigation character YM shown in FIG. 98 (Sa 12) is the default display mode. The smoke image here corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM appears. However, even if the smoke image is displayed, the navigation character YM does not always appear and may not appear. Further, the smoke image itself may not be displayed in some cases, or the smoke image may be always displayed. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to always appear when the smoke image is displayed.

The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target suspension (timing of FIG. 98(S2)). In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but it is not limited to the next change, and it may be started before the change of the prefetch target suspension ends. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed without fail if there is a prefetch target suspension, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won. In this example, the treasure box icon of the change notice display and the navigation character YM are the pre-reading notice made for the same pre-reading target hold (holding 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 shown in FIG. 98 (Sa2) in this example). However, the icon of the treasure box of the change notice display and the prefetch target suspension of the navigation character YM may be different.

In FIG. 98 (S12), when the lord's navigation character YM appears, thereafter, only the carpet icon I2 disappears, and the treasure box icon I1 remains in the effect icon display area DIS. That is, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display ends.

In FIG. 98 (Sa 14), the change of the prefetch target suspension has started. The change animation using the treasure box icon I1 is performed while the prefetch target is being changed. In FIG. 98 (Sa 15-1), the treasure box is opened, and a smoke image comes out from the inside to wrap around the navigator character YM of the lord. In FIG. 98 (S16), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the lord's navigation character YM is changed from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. The navigation character YM that has changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono functions as a notice (normal notice) of the change.

The change effect of the navigation character YM using the treasure box icon I1 may be started at the time of winning the prefetch target suspension (timing of FIG. 98(S2)). Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed without fail if there is a prefetch target suspension, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won.

Further, instead of FIG. 98 (Sa 10-1), in FIG. 98 (Sa 10-2-1), the lord's navigation character YM does not appear, but the icon I2 of the carpet disappears, and a treasure box of change notice display. The standby display of the icon I1 of has been completed. A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 98 (Sa 10-2-2). The smoke image here extends beyond the display position of the navigation character YM to the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM is displayed. The display position of YM and the variation icon h0 are covered from the front side by the smoke image. In FIG. 98 (Sa 10-2-3), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM does not appear, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to a red display mode. Here, the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change, or the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change. Alternatively, or conversely, the navigation character YM may not appear and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change.

Further, instead of FIG. 98 (Sa 11-1), in FIG. 98 (Sa 11-2), although the smoke image is displayed, the navigation character YM is not visible, and the carpet icon I2 disappears. The standby display of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display has ended. Thus, the timing of ending the standby display may be before the navigation character YM appears. Further, the timing of ending the standby display may be the same as the appearance of the navigation character YM. Further, it may be a timing of temporary stop of the decorative design, a timing of stop display of the decorative design, or a timing of starting change of the decorative design. Note that after the standby display of the change notice display is finished, the navigation character is not displayed for the same prefetch target hold, but even after the standby display of the change notice display is finished, the navigation character is displayed for the same prefetch target hold. There may be cases where there is a change (for example, a change following the change after the standby display has ended, or a change within the standby display has ended). Further, although the change notice display is not displayed for the same prefetch target hold even after the standby display of the change notice display is finished, the change notice display may be displayed again for the same prefetch target hold (for example, the standby display There is a change after the next change after the end of the change, and the change within the end of the waiting display is included).

Further, instead of FIG. 98 (Sa 13), in FIG. 13 (Sa 13-2-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM are displayed. 13-2-2), the treasure box does not open, the navigation character YM does not change, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and both the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Is gone. In this way, although the navigation character YM has appeared, nothing happens and both icons may disappear. In this case, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a false notice. Of the icons of the treasure box I1 and the navigation character YM, only the treasure box icon I1 may disappear, or only the navigation character YM may disappear. When both icons disappear, both icons may disappear at the same time, the treasure box icon I1 may disappear first, or the navigation character YM may disappear first.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example of effect using a holding frame different from the holding frame described so far.

The reservation frame UI shown in FIG. 99 (1) is a closed type that is spread over the entire effect display area 208d. That is, although the reservation frame UI and the constituent elements (pedestal hs0, etc.) described above are the same, in the state of FIG. 99 (1), it is the area of the reservation frame UI in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. , The other areas are firmly distinguished by the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, and the right frame UIf3, and the background of the sea is displayed in the other areas. Is not displayed. In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 99 (1), the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, the left base icon bIl, and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in white, and the hold frame UI is displayed. Are promoted by changing these colors.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Here, the holding frame UI is displayed in front of the first decorative pattern, and the lowermost end of the decorative pattern that changes at high speed is overlapped from the front side by the upper frame UIf2 of the holding frame UI. However, on the contrary, the decorative pattern may overlap the holding frame UI from the front side. Further, the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 99 (See 2-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2, and in FIG. 99 (See 3), only the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 becomes , Remains in the effect icon display area DIS. In FIG. 99 (4), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, and an icon in which the character display “frame promotion” is displayed appears from inside to notify (notice) the promotion of the hold frame UI. In FIG. 99 (5), the hold frame UI is promoted, and the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, the left base icon bIl, and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in red. Note that the hold frame UI may not be promoted even if the "frame promotion" icon appears. In addition, when the "frame promotion" icon appears, the hold frame UI may be always promoted.

Further, in place of FIG. 99 (shi 2-1), in FIG. 99 (shi 2-2-1), the lower half of the huge panda is displayed in the area where the background of the sea is displayed. By the lower half of this huge panda, the variable display of the first decorative pattern is overlapped from the front side. However, the second decorative design and the second number-of-holds display are displayed in front of the lower body of the panda. This huge panda is passing from top to bottom, and eventually enters the area of the holding frame UI, and part or all of the holding frame UI is overlapped from the front side by the huge panda. In the state shown in (2-2-2), only a part of each of the upper left and the upper right of the holding frame UI is not yet overlapped with the image of the panda, but the state shown in (2-2-3) in the figure. Then, the entire holding frame UI overlaps the image of the panda. The appearance of a huge panda that covers almost the entire screen is a kind of notice of change. Although the holding frame UI is entirely overlapped by the huge panda, the huge panda may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the entire holding frame UI.

FIG. 99 (and 2-2-4) shows one mode of the decorative pattern display device 208 after the huge panda has finished passing, and the first hold icon h11 changes to a blue display mode ( The navigation character YM has also changed (promoted) to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and the holding frame UI has also been promoted to red display. The display status of the variable icon may also be changed (promoted). Further, all or some of the left frame UIf1 and the like, the hold icon, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM may change. For example, only the left frame UIf1 and the like may be changed to red and the holding frame UI may be promoted. Alternatively, as will be described later, a change may occur outside the holding frame UI.

FIG. 99 (2-2-4') shows another aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the huge panda has passed, and in addition to the change in the holding frame UI, Changes have occurred outside the holding frame UI. That is, the level of the level display Lv attached to each of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is increased. When this level rises, the reach production becomes easier to start, the pseudo continuous production becomes easier to start, and the design mode is switched to a design that appears when the jackpot with a probability variation occurs. Further, when the reach effect is started in a state where this level is high, the expectation of a big hit becomes high. The background may change.

If the appearance of a huge panda is a big hit announcement, it may be displayed in front of the image of the panda so that the first decorative pattern may overlap the image of the passing panda from the front side or the big hit. Even with a notice, the first decorative pattern may be overlapped with the image of the passing panda.

Further, in place of FIG. 99 (shi 2-1), in FIG. 99 (shi 2-3-1), a sliding effect fusuma image is added to the holding frame UI, and FIG. The state shown in 1) is a state in which the sliding door image is fully closed (wipe-in state). On the other hand, the state shown in the figure (2-3-2) is a state in which the sliding door image is fully opened (wipe-out state).

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example in which the treasure box icon I1 that has been used as a change notice notification icon so far appears as a hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (s 1-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, a treasure box icon is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

In FIG. 100 (Su 2-1), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols that are missing. In FIG. 100 (Su ), the treasure box icon is displayed. The hold of the first hold icon h11 has been exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. The first holding icon h11 of the treasure box icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0 as the variation icon h0, but the treasure box icon is also displayed as the variation icon h0 here.

In FIG. 100 (4), the treasure box of the treasure box icon which is the variable icon h0 is opened, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and the smoke image is the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS from the front side. Cover and change animation is running. In FIG. 100 (5), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono. In this example, the navigation character YM is changed by the change icon h0. Although the smoke image corresponds to a change notice, the smoke image may not overlap the change icon h0 that is a change candidate, or the smoke image may not appear.

In addition, in place of FIG. 100 (Su 1-1), FIG. 100 (Su 1-2-1) also displays the second hold icon h12 in the default display mode. The second hold icon h12 is overlapped with the first hold icon h11 which is a treasure box icon. That is, at least a part of the holding icons having a relatively high jackpot expectation overlaps at least a part of the relatively low holding icons from the front side. At least a part of the hold icon in the prefetching notice mode may overlap with at least a part of the hold icon in the default display mode from the front side. Alternatively, irrespective of the expectation of the big hit, at least a part of the hold icon that is consumed first may overlap with at least a part of the hold icon that is consumed later from the front side. In FIG. 100 (1-2-2), the treasure box of the treasure box icon that is the first hold icon h11 is opened and the change animation is executed. That is, a smoke image appears and the smoke image overlaps the second hold icon h12. In FIG. 100 (S 1-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 in which the smoke images overlap is changed.

In addition, in FIG. 100 (Su 2-1) instead of FIG. 100 (Su 2-1), the treasure box of the treasure box icon that is the first hold icon h11 is opened and the change animation is executed. In the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and in FIG. 2 (2-2-2), the smoke image disappears and both the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Aspects are changing. Here, both are changed to the same red color, but they may be changed to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, both of the smoke images may be wrapped, but only one may change and the other may remain the default.

In addition, in FIG. 100 (Su 2-1) instead of FIG. 100 (Su 2-1), the treasure box of the icon of the treasure box that is the first hold icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is also executed here. However, in the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps only the change icon h0 of the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM. In FIG. 100 (2-3-2), the smoke image disappears and only the display mode of the variation icon h0 in which the smoke images overlap is changed.

It should be noted that the icons (holding icon, variable icon) and/or navigation characters that are not overlapped by the smoke image also include the icons (holding icon, variable icon) and/or navigation that are overlapped by the smoke image after the smoke image disappears. The display mode may change with the change of the display mode of the character (may be at the same time as the change of the display mode or after the change of the display mode).

FIG. 101 shows an example of an effect in which the navigation character YM is entwined with a meter effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (step 1-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and a white meter display MW having a white meter frame mf is displayed beside it. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 101 (step 1-1) is an empty state. When the meter display is full, the navigation character YM is promoted. Note that, by changing the display mode of the meter frame mf (for example, the color, the shape of the frame, etc.), it is possible to give an advance notice of the ease with which the meter is accumulated, or give a pre-reading notice and/or a notice of the change.

In FIG. 101 (Set 2), a temporary stop (first stop) of the left symbol in the first decorative symbol is performed, and “decoration 4” is displayed in a swinging manner. A white meter rising item UpI is added to the pattern of "decoration 4", and in FIG. 101 (step 3), the meter rising item UpI moves to the white meter display MW and becomes the white meter display MW. It is displayed overlapping. As shown in FIG. 101 (step 4), the meter-up item UpI that has moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is raised by one level. It should be noted that the meter rising item has a different meter rising degree depending on the color. The white meter increase item UpI raises the level of the white meter display MW by one level.

In FIG. 101 (SE4), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in the same drawing (SE5-1), the first hold icon h11 is displayed. Has been released, and the variable display of symbols has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 101 (step 7-1), the roulette display icon RI appears on the white meter display MW, and the roulette effect is started. The roulette effect here is always when something happens (when there is no loss) and when it does not happen (when there is no loss). Examples of something include a change in the hold icon, a normal notice (a notice of the change), and the like. Also, for example, if there is a character-based super-reach that includes Tono Super Reach, Hime Super Reach, and Grandpa Super Reach as one type of super reach, as an example of something above, the type of developing super reach (for example, There are also notices for character-based super reach, notices for specific super reach (for example, Tono super reach), and the like.

In FIG. 101 (SE8), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and in FIG. 101 (SE9), the blue meter rising item UpIb is moved to the white meter display MW and displayed in white. It is displayed overlapping the meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 101 (step 10), the blue meter-up item UpIb that has moved to the white meter display MW is captured (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is raised by two levels. The blue meter up item UpIb raises the white meter display MW by two levels. As a result, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 101 (step 10) has three levels.

In FIG. 101 (SE11), the symbol variable display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 101 (SE12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested and the variable display of patterns has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 101 (SE11), the symbol variable display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 101 (SE12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested and the variable display of patterns has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

A button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 101 (step 13). The button display icon 136D is a display form of a balloon and corresponds to a notice given by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A part of the button display icon 136D overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf). The button display icon 136D may overlap the entire meter display, or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

In FIG. 101 (step 14), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 101 (step 15), the remaining period meter is decreasing. In FIG. 101 (step 16), the chance button 136 is operated, and in FIG. 101 (step 17), the meter rise icon MUI as a response display is added to the navigation character YM in response to the operation of the chance button 136. The meter increase icon MUI is in the form of a balloon, and the meter increase icon MUI shown in FIG. 101 (step 17) displays a green meter increase item UpIm. The meter rise icon MUI also overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf), like the button display icon 136D. The meter rise icon MUI may overlap the entire meter display or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the valid operation period, the response display may be displayed or may not be displayed. In addition, the response display includes a display other than the meter rise icon MUI, and when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display is not displayed, but a specific effect (for example, display of the meter rise icon MUI). ) May be displayed as a response display only. Even if the response display is not displayed, the meter may be configured to increase, and the meter increases only when the response display is displayed, and the meter does not increase when the response display is not displayed. It may be configured as follows.

In FIG. 101 (step 18), the green meter-up item UpIm in the meter-up icon MUI has moved to the white meter display MW and is displayed overlapping the white meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 101 (step 19), the green meter-up item UpIm that has moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by 3 levels. The white meter display MW shown in (step 19) is full. In FIG. 101 (SE20-1), the white meter display MW is changed to the character display "promotion", and a change animation (not shown) is started. In FIG. 101 (SE21), the display mode of the navigation character YM is red. It has been changed (promoted) to the display mode wearing the kimono. The color of the kimono of the navigation character YM changed here coincides with the background color of the character display "promotion" shown in FIG. 101 (SE 20-1), and at the stage of FIG. 101 (SE 20-1). A display mode in which the navigation character YM changes is announced in advance. The change animation may be omitted. In addition, the white meter display shown in (21) in the figure has returned to an empty state, but it may remain full. Further, when the meter display is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change (promote) without fail, or may not change (promote) (failure).

Instead of FIG. 101 (step 1-1), as shown in (1-2-1) of FIG. 101, the meter display may not always be displayed. As shown in FIG. 101 (step 1-2-2), the meter increase item UpI may appear even when the meter display is not displayed. Also in this case, the meter increase item UpI moves to a fixed position in the effect icon display area DIS as shown in FIG. 101 (step 1-2-3). Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (step 1-2-4), the meter display (here, the white meter display MW) appears after the movement of the meter rising item UpI is completed. In this case, the appearance of the meter increase item UpI serves as a notice that the meter display is displayed. Further, the meter display may be displayed according to the appearance of the meter increase item UpI. For example, the meter-up item UpI may be displayed at the same time, or may be displayed at a timing between FIG. 101 (SE 1-2-2) and FIG. 101 (SE 1-2-3).

In FIG. 101 (step 1-2-5), the white meter display MW is increased by 1 level by the meter increase item UpI. In the example shown in FIG. 101, after the meter display is displayed, the meter always rises. However, even if the meter display is displayed, the meter may not rise (corresponding to false). Or, there may be a case where the meter rising item does not appear. Furthermore, the meter may not rise even if the meter rise item appears.

In addition, the meter display may be displayed from the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display in which the meter rising item appears. In this case, the meter display is a pre-reading notice that the meter may accumulate. become. Alternatively, the meter display may be displayed at the same time as the start of the symbol fluctuation display in which the meter rising item appears or during the symbol fluctuation, and in this case, the meter display may accumulate the meter within the fluctuation. It will be a notice that there is.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a modification of the example described with reference to FIG.

In place of FIG. 101 (SE 1-1), in FIG. 102 (SE 1-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in a state where there is no hold, and the white meter display MW in the empty state is It is displayed. While the white meter display MW displayed in FIG. 101 (SE1-1) is full at 6 levels, the white meter display MW displayed in FIG. 102 (SE1-3-1). The MW is full at level 5.

In FIG. 102 (step 1-3-3a), the meter rise icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM. In the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 102 (step 1-3-3a), a gold meter rise item UpIg is displayed. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 102 (step 1-3-4a) is filled up at once due to the gold meter-up item UpIg. After that, the animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be in an empty state or may remain stored. In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge mg) that increases in the meter frame mf is blue, but if it is in the accumulated state, even if the blue gauge is full. It is also possible that the gold gauge up item UpIg fills the tank at once, so that the gold gauge may be full.

On the other hand, also in FIG. 102 (step 1-3-3b), the meter increase icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM, and a rainbow-colored meter increase item UpIn is displayed here. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 102 (step 1-3-4b) is also filled up at once due to the iridescent meter-up item UpIn. After that, the animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be in an empty state or may remain stored. In addition, when it is in a state of being accumulated, it may be full with a blue gauge, or when it is full with a rainbow meter up item UpIn at once, it is full with a rainbow gauge. It may be in a tongue state.

White, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow items are available as meter-up items. Of these items, only the rainbow-colored meter-raising item UpIn and the gold-colored meter-raising item UpIg are items that can increase the meter by 5 levels at once. The white meter-raising item UpI is increased by 1 level, the blue meter-increasing item UpIb is increased by 2 levels, the green meter-increasing item UpIm is increased by 3 levels, and the red meter-increasing item UpIr is increased by 4 levels.

In addition, the rainbow-colored meter-up item UpIn also functions as a big hit confirmation notice. On the other hand, the gold meter up item UpIg does not have such a function. Therefore, when the meter is filled with one rainbow-colored meter-up item UpIn, when the meter is filled with one gold-colored meter-up item UpIn, or with other colors (white, blue, green, red) The meaning is different when the meter is filled up with a combination of items for increasing meters.

In the meter display, the colors of the meter itself (gauge) that increase in the meter frame mf are white, blue, green, and red meter increasing items, and when the meter rises or becomes full, It may be a blue gauge.

It should be noted that the color of the meter rising item may also have a function as a normal notice or a look-ahead notice. In addition, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be represented by a color.

In addition, the color of the meter rising item may be linked to the color of the display mode of the navigation character YM, or may be necessarily linked. For example, when a gold meter-up item UpIg appears, the navigation character YM is also likely to change to a display mode wearing a gold kimono, or it always changes, and vice versa, a display in which the navigation character YM wears a gold kimono. According to the aspect, the gold meter-up item UpIg may easily appear or may always appear.

Furthermore, the order of appearance of the meter-raising items and the combination of colors may function as a pre-reading notice or as a normal notice. Also, the order of appearance of the meter-raising items and the combination of colors may represent the degree of expectation of a big hit. On the contrary, the order of appearance of the meter-raising items and the combination of colors may be completely unrelated to the expectation of the big hit.

In addition, in this example, the meter is stored until it reaches 15 (the meter is full three times). It should be noted that in the meter display in which the tank is full at the 6th level in FIG. 101, the meter is accumulated until it reaches 18 (again, the meter is full 3 times). Here, when the meter overflows by displaying the meter increase item (for example, when the red Up icon is displayed when three meters are accumulated), the meter is set to 0 while promoting the navigation character. It is also possible to collect the amount that has not been accumulated. For example, when the red meter-up item UpIt is displayed when three meters are accumulated, the meter is filled up once, and the meter is further accumulated in two levels.

In addition, when the meter overflows in the state where the meter is full twice, the meter may be filled up and the portion which cannot be stored may be displayed on the meter. For example, the meter may be reset to 0 when the prefetch target variation or the variation has ended, or may remain displayed regardless of the prefetch target variation or the variation. In addition, you may cut off the portion that you have not accumulated. For example, when a meter is stored, the meter at that time may be in a state of 0, a full state, a special display, or a non-display of the meter. Good. Furthermore, it may be configured not to overflow. For example, when three have already been accumulated, only two white meter-up items UpI or one blue meter-up item UpIb is displayed.

In the example starting from FIG. 102 (SE1-4-1) instead of FIG. 101 (SE1-1), in FIG. 102 (SE1-4-2), a red beam is emitted from the flying UFO icon UFI. , Is illuminated toward the navigation character YM in the default display mode, and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono as shown in FIG. The balloon is attached. This “Up high accuracy medium” informs that the meter rising item is in a state where it is easy to accumulate.

Note that, depending on the display mode of the notice for changing the navigation character YM, the notification of “Up High Probability Medium” may occur or may necessarily occur. Further, when the navigation character YM changes, the notification of “Up High Probability Medium” may be always issued, or a plurality of types of effect display (preliminary display) including the notification of “Up High Probability Medium” may be performed. , The effect display including the notification of “Up High Probability Medium” may not be performed.

Further, the effect performed by the navigation character YM may be different depending on the display mode (color) of the navigation character YM. For example, in the case of the red navigation character YM, "Up high accuracy" is notified, in the case of the gold navigation character YM, the intense heat display is displayed, and in the case of the rainbow-colored navigation character YM, the iron plate display is displayed. May be done. The navigation characters YM having different display modes may give the same notice (the same type of notice).

In place of FIG. 101 (SE 5-1), in FIG. 102 (SE 5-2-1), the gauge of the white meter display MW blinks white at 1 level, and the kimono of the navigation character YM also blinks white. There is. After that, once the meter is full and returns to an empty state, in FIG. 102 (step 5-2-3), the display mode of the navigation character YM changes to the display mode wearing a green kimono, The gauge of the white meter display MW also changes to green and has risen to 3 levels. Then, after the meter is full again and the state returns to the empty state, in FIG. 102 (step 5-2-5), the display mode of the navigation character YM changes to the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. The gauge of the white meter display MW has also changed to rainbow color and is full. In this way, the meter storage condition and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be configured to match. Further, the color of the gauge and the color of the navigation character YM may correspond to each other.

It should be noted that, when all the meters are accumulated, a pattern in which a big hit is confirmed or a high expectation of a big hit and a pattern in which the meters are accumulated and released to perform an effect may be separately prepared. As an example of the latter, for example, when the meter is discharged when the level is accumulated up to 2 levels, a blue equivalent effect is performed, and when the meter is accumulated up to 4 levels, the red equivalent effect is generated. Is done.

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing another modification of the example described with reference to FIG.

In place of FIG. 101 (SE6-1), in FIG. 103 (SE6-2), the roulette display icon RI and the meter rise icon MUI are displayed on the white blinking meter display MW′ in which the meter frame mf blinks in white. Is displayed, but a part of the meter rise icon MUI overlaps a part of the roulette display icon RI from the front side, and the roulette display icon RI shown in FIG. It is more difficult to visually recognize as compared with the roulette display icon RI shown in 7-1). On the other hand, in the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 101 (step 7-1), a green meter rise item UpIm is displayed. The meter rising icon MUI may overlap the entire roulette display icon RI from the front side. On the contrary, at least a part of the meter rising icon MUI at least partially overlaps the roulette display icon RI from the front side. You can wrap it. As a priority order displayed on the front side, the icon added to the navigation character YM may be higher than the other icons. In this example, when there is a notice that the meter rising icon may be displayed, such as when the roulette display icon is being displayed, the meter rising icon is displayed by displaying the white blinking meter that blinks the meter frame in white. Although it is informed that there is a possibility that it will be displayed, even if there is a notice that the meter rising icon may be displayed, it may not be notified by the meter frame, It may be configured not to notify that the meter rising icon may be displayed. In addition, the advance notice notifying that the meter rising icon may be displayed may be given not only by the meter frame but also by another display or rendering means.

In place of FIG. 101 (SE7-1), in FIG. 103 (SE7-2), the blue meter-up item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI. However, it is difficult to visually recognize because the meter rise icon MUI still overlaps. In this way, the meter rise icons may overlap each other. When the meter rise icons overlap each other, the priority displayed on the front side may be the display order of the meter rise icons, the higher meter rise may be prioritized, or the meter rise may be higher. The lower one may be prioritized. Further, the navigator character YM does not overlap the meter rising icon from the front side, but may overlap.

In addition, in FIG. 103 (SE 7-3-1) instead of FIG. 101 (SE 7-1), an image up for notifying (notifying) that the meter rise icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI 'Is displayed. However, at this stage, it is unclear how many colors of the meter-raising icon will be displayed, and thereafter, the colors of the meter-raising icon will be displayed in the roulette display icon RI. In this way, when it is notified in the roulette effect that the meter rise icon is displayed although it is unknown what color it is, as shown in FIG. 103 (step 7-3-2), the roulette display icon RI is displayed. The effect display Ed1 to which the aura has been added is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the subsequent FIG. 103 (step 7-3-3), the effect display Ed1 changes, and the display is as if the blue meter rise icon is enlarged. At this stage, it is not known how many colors of the meter rise icon are displayed in the roulette display icon RI. At this stage, a blue meter-raising icon may also be displayed in the roulette display icon RI.

In FIG. 103 (step 7-3-4), the blue meter rise icon UpIb is an enlarged display of the blue meter rise icon that overlaps the roulette display icon RI, and the white blinking meter display MW. Moved to'and blinking white meter display MW' is displayed overlapping. Further, the roulette display icon RI fades out, the display becomes fainter, and gradually disappears. The color of the meter-raising item displayed in the roulette display icon RI may remain unknown. Thereafter, the blue meter-up item UpIb is fetched (stocked) in the white blinking meter display MW', and the white blinking meter display MW' is leveled up.

Note that the blue meter-up item UpIb may appear in the roulette display icon RI and be taken into the white blinking meter display MW'. In this case, in the roulette display icon RI, the blue meter-up item UpIb may be displayed before the effect display Ed1 is displayed, may be displayed at the same time as it is displayed, or may be displayed. It may be displayed after being displayed. Alternatively, in the roulette display icon RI, the blue meter-raising item UpIb may be displayed before the display of an enlarged blue meter-raising icon, or at the same time as the display. It may be displayed, or may be displayed after being displayed.

In place of FIG. 101 (SE-20-1), in FIG. 103 (SE-20-2-1), the white meter display MW in the full state is temporarily changed to the character display “stock”, and the empty state is displayed. When returning to the white meter display MW, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. In this example, although the meter is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change until the treasure box is opened, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is delayed. In addition, you may change the icon (holding icon, change icon) other than the navigation character or other effect display that changes only the display mode of the navigation character YM by opening the icon I1 of the treasure box.

As described above, the description about the meter display described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 39 can be applied to the description with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103. That is, all the descriptions including the statement that the rate of increase of the meter is different when the color of the meter frame is different can be applied. Alternatively, on the contrary, the items described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103 can be applied to the description with reference to FIGS. 14 to 39.

FIG. 104 shows an example of effect in which a telop effect is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (part 1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In FIG. 104 (part 2-1), the telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, the possibility that the navigation character YM may change is displayed in characters, which corresponds to an example of a change notice display. For example, a display such as "Navi character change highly accurate" or a character display such as "Navi character change highly accurate preparation" is flown from right to left on the screen. In addition to this, the telop display trp is plain and no characters are displayed, and the telop display indicates "○○ high accuracy medium", "XX&○○ high accuracy medium", "○○ high accuracy medium". There may be a case where the user is informed in advance that there is a possibility that "Preparing", "XX or XX high-precision preparing", "High-precision preparing", etc. may be displayed. Even if a plain telop display trp is displayed here, "○○ high-accuracy in progress", "XX & ○○ high-accuracy in progress", "○○ high-accuracy in preparation", "XX or ○○ high-accuracy in preparation" In some cases, "," "high-precision preparation in progress", etc. are not displayed. In addition, "○○ high-precision preparation in progress", "XX or XX high-precision preparation in progress", "high-precision preparation in progress", etc. are displayed, and there is a possibility that a high probability state will occur for the production displayed as a telop from now on. This may be notified in advance. "XX" and "XX" described here are various effects (for example, hold (hold icon and/or change icon) change, pseudo-repeated, advance notice with high-expected color, high expectation for big hit. The name of a notice (so-called gekiatsu notice) is shown.

Note that the high-probability state of the effect described here means that the notification that the high-probability state is notified by the telop display is the high-probability state that is notified by the telop rather than when the high-probability state is not notified by the telop display. This shows a state in which the frequency of the operation is high. That is, in FIG. 104 (So1) to (So14), (So-2-2), (So-2), and (So-2) in FIG. The symbol “” indicates a state in which the display mode of the navigation character is more likely to change than when the notification of “navigation character highly accurate” is not displayed on the telop display. Also, the "high-precision preparation" included in the above-mentioned "○○ high-precision preparation", "XX or XX high-precision preparation", "high-precision preparation", etc. will be notified by the telop display. The production being performed is in a high-probability state from now on (variation after the change that started displaying the telop containing "high-precision preparation" or the change that started displaying the telop containing "high-precision preparation" (Inside) (or a high probability state may occur).

In FIG. 104 (S3), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The telop display trp is displayed in front of the second decorative symbol, and the lower end of the second decorative symbol is overlapped from the front side by the telop display trp. However, conversely, the second decorative pattern may overlap the telop display trp from the front side.

In FIG. 104 (4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. After that, the lost symbols are stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 104 (6), the variable display of symbols is also started. The telop display trp is continuing.

In FIG. 104 (S7), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. In FIG. 104 (S8-1), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono. Even if the change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp continues. Thereafter, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 104 (10), the variable display of symbols is started, and the telop display trp is still continuing in FIG. 104 (11).

The navigation character YM may change when the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears, the change animation is started, the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 opens. In this case, it can be said that the display such as “Navi character change highly accurate” in the telop display trp indicates the appearance of the treasure box icon I1 or the start of the change animation.

In FIG. 104 (12), the change animation of the navigation character YM is restarted, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. In FIG. 104 (S13), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a gold kimono. Even if the second change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is continuing.

While the telop display trp is displayed, the change effect of the navigation character YM may be performed any number of times. However, if the navigation character YM changes once while the telop display trp is displayed, the navigation character YM changes thereafter. It may be configured not to.

In FIG. 104 (s 14 ), the reach state is entered, but the telop display trp is still continuing. As the timing at which the display of the telop display trp disappears, when the super reach is started (for example, FIG. 88 (e.g. 24)), when the decorative design is temporarily stopped (for example, at the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop) , Symbol stop character, start of next change, etc.

In the present example, the change effect is performed by the navigation character itself, but the navigation character may be changed by the change notice display, and the navigation character is changed only by the change notice display. Alternatively, the navigation character may be configured to perform only the change effect.

Further, in place of FIG. 104 (FIG. 2-1), as shown in FIG. 104 (FIG. 2-2), the telop display trp may be performed in upper and lower two stages. Then, different contents may be displayed in the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp.

In addition, in the telop display, the high-precision middle display may be displayed for other notices. As long as the same prefetch target is held, the display timing may be the same or one may be later than the other. In addition, when one telop display of “High accuracy middle” is displayed, the telop display may not be displayed or may be displayed for another prefetch target hold. In that case, a telop display regarding the same notice (for example, “Navi character high probability middle”) may be separately displayed, and the display period of the same telop display may be extended. Further, the display position of the telop display may be determined in the display start order, or the display position of each telop may be fixed.

Further, instead of FIG. 104 (s 2-1), the same content may be displayed in the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp as shown in the same figure (s 2-3). That is, the same telop display may be displayed multiple times. In some cases, it may be possible to appeal that the expectation of a big hit is higher when displaying a plurality of ones than when displaying only one. However, even if a plurality of images are displayed, the expectation level of the big hit may be the same as the case where only one is displayed. Further, displaying a plurality of the same telop displays may be repeated. That is, a plurality of telop displays having the same content may be displayed each time the display of the telop display is started.

Further, instead of FIG. 104 (S8-1), as shown in the same drawing (S8-2), when the navigation character YM is changed (one or more times), no further change is made. May be notified by a telop display trp. In this example, the character display of "completion" is displayed. However, even if this notification is made, the navigation character YM may further change.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67(b).

In FIG. 105 (1a-1), a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a third decorative symbol display device 208N are shown. It should be noted that the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 105 (1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of special figure 1 are accumulated, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are default display modes. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In FIG. 105 (ta 2a-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and “decoration 7” is displayed in shaking (temporary stop) on both the left symbol and the right symbol, and in the same figure (ta 3a), it is a supermarket. All the displays have disappeared from the first decorative symbol display device 208L after shifting to the reach effect. That is, the first decorative symbol, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 to h14, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are disappeared.

In FIG. 105 (4a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the image of the enemy swordsman on the entire screen. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays the reduced first decorative symbol, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM. The variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be displayed on different decorative symbol display devices.

In FIG. 105 (5a), the background of the wilderness that is the background display of the super reach effect is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a duel scene in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman face each other.

Here, instead of FIG. 105 (ta 1a-1), in FIG. 105 (ta 1a-2), a part of the holding frame UI is enlarged and displayed, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display are displayed. It is displayed across the device 208L. That is, the hold icon display area HIS is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon display area CIS is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. Further, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12 is enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the fourth hold icon h14 is enlarged and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third hold icon. h13 is enlarged and displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Since the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a frame surrounding the display screen, this frame interferes and divides the image displayed across.

Although the right base icon bIr is not displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N in which the navigation character YM is displayed in an enlarged manner, the right base icon bIr may also be displayed in an enlarged manner together with the navigation character YM.

Note that the display may not be enlarged as shown in FIG. 105 (1a-2), and may be across a plurality of display devices. For example, a pattern that is straddling from the beginning of display, a pattern that is moved from the original position and is straddled, a pattern that is displayed when the image changes, or an image that is enlarged and straddled is displayed. Pattern, and on the contrary, a pattern in which the image is reduced and displayed across the area. Further, when the image is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 105 (1a-2), the expectation of the big hit is high, the hold icon is easily changed, the change icon is easily changed, or the navigation character YM is used. May be easier to change. The navigation character YM may be displayed across a plurality of display devices. Here, in the case where the effect display is displayed across a plurality of display devices and the display device A in the front overlaps a part of the display area of the display device B, the display device B A part of the image displayed in the display area of the display apparatus B may be displayed in the display area overlapped by the display apparatus A in FIG.

As described above, the items described with reference to FIG. 105 (1a-2) can be applied to the effect examples described so far and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Further, in place of FIG. 105 (a1a-1), a part of the reservation frame UI is moved and displayed in the same figure (a1a-3). That is, the effect icon display area DIS is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the right base icon bIr is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The navigation character YM is also displayed on the right base icon bIr.

In this way, when the navigation character YM moves to another display device, the navigation character YM may be more likely to change, the expectation of a big hit may be higher, or another effect change (for example, hold). Change of icon or variable icon) may be facilitated. Also, depending on the destination of the navigation character YM, the ease of change of the navigation character YM, the high degree of expectation of a big hit, and the change of other effects (for example, change of a hold icon or a change icon) are possible. They may be different or may be the same with no effect. For example, the probability that the navigation character YM changes may be higher in the case of moving to the third decorative symbol display device 208N than in the case of moving to the second decorative symbol display device 208L. Although the movement of the navigation character YM has been described above, the same applies to the case where the hold icon moves to another display device or the variable icon moves to another display device.

In addition, in the example illustrated in FIG. 105 (1a-3), it can be seen that the holding frame Ui is divided (broken). That is, although the effect icon display area DIS is broken and moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be moved to another place of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 105 (1a-3) can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Also, instead of FIG. 105 (ta 1a-1), in FIG. 105 (ta 1a-4), the navigation character YM is split when it moves. That is, when moving from the first decorative symbol display device 208L to another display device, it is divided into two and is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This can be seen as an increase in the navigation character YM.

In this way, when the navigation character YM is divided (increased), the navigation character YM may be more likely to change, the expectation of a big hit may be higher, or other production changes (for example, a hold icon or It may be easier for the change icon to change).

Further, since the right base icon bIr is also displayed at the location where the navigation character YM is displayed, it can be said that the effect icon display area DIS is also divided (increase).

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 105 (1a-4) can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later. That is, also in the other effect examples, the navigation character YM may be divided (increase) in some cases, and may be necessarily divided (increase).

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67(b).

In FIG. 106 (1b), the background of the sea is displayed over the three decorative pattern display devices 208L to 208N. In the center first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 105 (1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of special figure 1 are accumulated, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are default display modes. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In FIG. 106 (2b), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image. Further, in the left and right second decorative symbol display devices 208M and third decorative symbol display devices 208N shown in FIG. 106 (2b), the background display of the sea disappears.

In FIG. 106 (3b), the smoke image disappears, the navigation character YM disappears from the effect icon display area DIS, and a signboard icon "searching" is displayed instead. Further, the same character (lord) YM' as the navigation character YM is displayed and running on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side where the background display of the sea disappears. Moreover, the character display "searching" is displayed on it. Similarly, a silhouette display slt is displayed together with the image of the question mark on the second decorative pattern display device 208M on the left side where the background display of the sea disappears.

The icon of the sign “Searching” may be a notification indicating that the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM is likely to succeed. Further, the probability of success is higher when the signboard color is blue than white, and the success probability is higher when the signboard color is red than blue. It should be noted that promotion may be confirmed as long as it is red. Further, this signboard may change in color, display characters, or the like, but may not change. In addition, a display mode in which the navigation character YM may change may be suggested depending on the display mode of the signboard. For example, if the signboard is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono.

In FIG. 106 (4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been in the fully open state (initial state) so far, are in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to approach each other. Coming in. It should be noted that this period corresponds to the period of the fan production.

In FIG. 106 (5b-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position and stop. Here, it moves to the position of the fully closed state (maximum movement position) in contact with each other and stops, but it may be the position before contact.

FIG. 106 (6b-1) is a diagram showing an example of the promotion success pattern, and in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the running character (lord) YM' poses with his thumb up, and above that. Is displayed with a character display indicating the level up. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to the actual display, and a thousand box is displayed. The display mode of the thousand boxes may indicate a display mode in which the navigation character YM may change. For example, if the thousand boxes are blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono. The color, the open/closed state, and the like of this thousand-box box may change, but may not change. In FIG. 106 (7b), the character (lord) YM' displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono.

Then, in FIG. 106 (8b), each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to be separated from each other, and returns to the initial state. .. When each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial state, a wipe effect is performed on each of the decorative symbol display devices 208M and N. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 106 (9b) are in the middle of wipe-in, and in FIG. 10 (10b), the wipe-in is completed and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, the wipe display in which only the model title is displayed is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 106 (10b), the smoke image is displayed at the position where the icon of the signboard has been displayed until then.

In the effect icon display area DIS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 106 (11b), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, wipeout is started. In this example, the wipe-in animation (an animation that closes from the left and right) and the wipe-out animation (an animation that opens from the inside to the outside) are different, but the same animation may be used. In FIG. 106 (12b), the wipeout is completed, and the background of the sea is displayed over the three decorative pattern display devices 208L to 208N. In addition, in one decorative symbol display device, the effect display displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices of this example may be performed. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and/or the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be replaced with one or a plurality of effect movable bodies that do not include a liquid crystal display device (for example, the effect movable body performs effect operation). And, there is a production that the navigation character is promoted.)

The change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 106 can be applied to the effect examples described so far and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67(b).

In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 107 (1a-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of special figure 1 are accumulated, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are default display modes. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In FIG. 107 (1a-3-2), a moving animation in which the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed. In this FIG. 107 (1a-3-2), the navigation character YM is located just between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Here, also, since there is a frame surrounding the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, this frame interferes and divides the navigation character YM displayed across the frame. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 107 (1a-3-3), the navigation character YM having the same display size as that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 107 (1a-3-2′), the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the third decorative symbol display device. In 208N, an example of enlarged display is shown. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 107 (1a-3-2′), only the right hand and the toes of the right foot of the navigation character YM are displayed, but the toes of the right hand and the right foot are enlarged and displayed. Therefore, the navigation character YM is immediately enlarged and displayed from the portion that has entered the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 107 (1a-3-3′), the navigation character YM having a display size larger than that when displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. .. In this way, when the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed, the navigation character YM may be more likely to change, the expectation of a big hit may be higher, and the like, than when it is not enlarged and displayed. The change of the effect (for example, change of the hold icon or the change icon) may be facilitated, or may be the same without any influence. Further, when the navigation character YM is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may or may not always be enlarged and displayed.

The moving animation of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 107 can be applied to the effect examples described so far and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Also, instead of FIG. 106 (8b), FIG. 107 (5b-2) shows a pattern in which the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM has failed. In FIG. 106 (4b), when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving toward each other and both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position. Is a failure. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N which are stopped on the way also return to the initial state, but the notification of change effect (elevation effect) failure is performed after returning to the initial state. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 107 (Fig. 5b-2), the character (lord) YM' is in a pose in which the character YM' faces backward and is depressed. It should be noted that the notification of failure may be started in the middle of returning to the initial state. Alternatively, the notification of failure may be started at a stage where the vehicle has stopped before reaching a certain position.

Further, if both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position, it may be a failure, but the navigation character YM may be promoted. Further, even if this change effect (promotion effect) fails, the navigation character YM may be promoted by another effect. This also applies to the effects described above, which are divided into success and failure.

Further, if the change effect (elevation effect) here fails, the navigation character YM will continue for the time being (for example, until the background display changes, or until the promotion failure to the end of N variations, The change may be restricted until the fluctuation of the prefetch target suspension related to the promotion failure ends).

Further, in place of FIG. 106 (6b-1), in FIG. 107 (6b-2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol are displayed up to a certain position (for example, the position in the fully closed state). Although the display device 208N has moved, a pattern in which the change effect (elevation effect) has failed is shown. Similarly to the above, the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 107 (6b-2) also displays a character (lord) YM' in a pose that looks backward and is depressed. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to an actual display, and a mandarin orange box is displayed there.

In this way, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the promotion effect may fail. On the contrary, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the navigation character YM may be promoted without fail. The navigation character YM may be promoted even in the state shown in FIG. 107 (6b-2), or conversely, in this state, the failure may be confirmed.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 in which the second display device is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device).

The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (1c). On the other hand, the background of the sea is not displayed on the second display device 208S provided below the decorative pattern display device 208 (first display device), and the hold frame UI is displayed on this second display device 208S. ing. That is, the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS are provided, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. In the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. The second display device 208S may be fixed or may be capable of moving up and down.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (1c), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed on the second display device 208S. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is also displayed on the second display device 208S.

On the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (2c), the sliding effect fusuma image is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 108 (3c), the sliding door image is fully closed (wiping-in state). Is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108(4), the wipeout starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108(5c), the fusuma image is fully opened (wipeout state). On the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (5c) where the wipe effect has ended, neither the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, nor the navigation character YM is displayed. The mini-game animation by is displayed. That is, due to the wipe effect, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are also hidden, and a change (promotion) in the display mode of the navigation character YM is bet (dividing) mini of golf. The game has started. In addition, even in the same mini game, there may be a mini game in which a successful super reach production is started. At the stage of FIG. 108 (ta 4c), it can be seen that the mini game is started on the second display device 208S, but it is not known what the bet (dividing) mini game is, and therefore, of the FIG. 108 (ta 5c). I don't know until the stage. Therefore, in some cases, at least the second display device 208S can be focused on until the description of the mini game (here, “If you enter the cup, you are promoted to Yoshimune”) is performed.

In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (6c-1), the cup-in is successful. When the cup-in is successful, the wipe effect is started again, and the sliding door image starts to close again in FIG. 108 (7c), and the state shown in FIG. 108 (8c) is that the sliding door image is fully closed (wiping-in state). is there. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108(9c), the wipeout starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108(10c), the fusuma image is fully opened (wipeout state). On the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (10c) that has been wiped out again, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are displayed. After the wipeout is completed in this way, the change animation of the navigation character YM is displayed on the second display device 208S (FIG. 108 (11c)). In the change animation here, the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image, and in FIG. 108 (12c), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM changes to the display mode of the red kimono.

Also, instead of FIG. 108 (6c-1), cup-in fails in the same (6c-2). In this way, when the mini game in which the change (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM is bet fails, the navigation character YM does not have to be promoted, but may be promoted. .. Also, as shown in FIG. 108 (6c-1), when the mini game is successful, the navigation character YM may be absolutely promoted, but may not be promoted.

It should be noted that when wiping out from FIG. 108 (8c), it may be a wipe effect that can suggest to the player the possibility that the navigation character YM will be promoted, or a display mode in which the navigation character YM changes. It may be a wipe effect that can be suggested.

Further, the navigation character YM may have already changed (promoted) at the time of wiping out in FIG. 108 (10c).

Further, the second display device 208S may perform the production operation during execution of the mini game. In addition, at the time of success (Fig. 108 (Fig. 6c-1) in this example), at the time of failure (Fig. 108 (Fig. 6c-2) in this example) and agitation (Fig. 108 (Fig. 5c) in this example). Different staging operations may be performed. In addition, instead of the second display device 208S, an effect operation by an effect movable body may be performed.

The mini game described with reference to FIG. 108 can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of a case where another effect is executed during execution of the effect selected by the player.

In the pachinko machine 100 in this description, the above-described customization setting is performed. That is, in the "character selection" shown in FIG. 73(b), "Copanda" of 07 is set, in the "holding frame selection", the "holding frame B" of 02 is set, and in the "holding display selection". The “icon C” of 03 is set, and the “background E” of 05 is set in the background display selection.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (a1), the holding frame UI of the holding frame B is displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, a co-panda is displayed as the navigation character YM. In addition, one hold of the special figure 1 has been accumulated, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (a1), the background of the background E (empty background) is displayed.

In FIG. 109 (aa2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 that is the default display mode of the icon C is displayed. The navigation character YM of Copanda is also displayed.

In FIG. 109 (a a3-1), the treasure box icon I1 of change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in FIG. 109 (a a4-1), the carpet icon I2. Disappears and the treasure chest icon I1 remains. In FIG. 109 (a5), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, and the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside. The smoke image hides part or all of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM. Is clearly harder to see than before the smoke image appeared. The change animation may be started by operating the chance button 136. In this case, the back button may be used or the operation promotion notification may be performed. In FIG. 109 (a6), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes from co-panda to bancho. The longest character in the navigation character YM is a character that cannot be selected by the player, as shown in FIG. 73(b). The player may change to a character that can be selected (for example, a grandfather, a princess, etc.), or the character may be changed to a character that cannot be selected by the player.

In FIG. 109 (A7), the treasure box icon I1 disappears, and in FIG. 109 (A8), the reach state is entered. The navigator character YM having the longest length shown in FIG. 109 (a8) is provided with a balloon icon of "NEXT" that suggests a pseudo continuous effect.

In FIG. 109 (aa9), the pseudo continuous pattern (the pattern of the lord's character) is temporarily stopped in the middle pattern of the first decorative pattern, and in the same figure (a10), the lord's character and the character "Continue" are displayed. A cut-in display consisting of and is displayed. In this embodiment, in this manner, the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby informing that the pseudo-relational is being executed. Here, the pseudo-relation is a variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol are executed plural times in the variable display of one special symbol. In the present embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo-repeating is executed, the larger the chance of being hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (a11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “×2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-relation is started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap the first decorative symbol. Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (a12), the display of “×2” is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

The navigator character YM having the longest length shown in FIG. 109 (aa13) is again provided with the balloon icon of "NEXT" that suggests the pseudo-relation effect, and there is still hope for the continuation of the pseudo-replication. After that, after the temporary stop display is performed 0 times, or once or a plurality of times, the player enters the reach state and further develops into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect). The background screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (Aa15) changes to the background of the wilderness, which is the background display of the swordsman reach production, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shows the main character and the enemy swordsman. The duel scenes facing each other are displayed. Further, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bI1 in the hold icon display area HIS and the four stages hs1 to hs4 are disappeared. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on it. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the longest navigation character YM is displayed on the right base icon bIr.

A balloon icon of “chance” that stirs a big hit is added to the bancho navi character YM shown in FIG. 109 (a16), and the bancho navigator character YM is performing a stirrup effect.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (aa18), the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other is displayed in the super reach production. Here, the lord is lying down, and as the middle symbol, left and right. The "decoration 6" different from the design ("decoration 7") is displayed in a large size (swing display). Although the height of the pedestal in the variable icon display area CIS is low, the lowered pedestal hs0' is displayed and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on it. In addition, the longest navigation character YM is still displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. After that, the wipe effect is started, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (aa19) is in the middle of the wipe-in, and in the figure (aa20), the wipe-in is completed, and subsequently the wipe-out is started, and the same. In the figure (a a21), while returning to the background of the background E (the sky background), the navigation character YM of the copanda is also beginning to be seen. In FIG. 109 (aa22), the wipe effect is finished, and the decorative symbol display device 208 swayingly displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of losses. The hold frame UI of the hold frame B is also displayed, and the variable icon h0, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is also displayed again. Further, a blue hold icon (prefetch hold icon) is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 89(e2) to 89(e4-1), the navigation character YM itself may change the display mode of itself. In this example, the change animation using the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is running out, but the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed by the effect using the treasure box icon I1. It may be easier for the player to finally shift to a state advantageous to the player, as compared with the case where the player changes without using the treasure box icon I1 (for example, the player himself changes). Here, the advantageous state includes a transition to a big hit game state, a transition to a big hit game state in which the number of balls is large, and a transition to a definite change state or an electric support state.

In this example, even if the hold icon increases while the hold icon is hidden, the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is hidden when the hold icon changes from hidden to visible. Look-ahead notice may be given. Note that if the number of holds increases while the hold icon is not displayed, the hold is consumed (until it is displayed in the variable icon display area, or until it is deleted from the variable icon display area. It may be configured to regulate the read-ahead notice and/or the notice of the change by the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold while the hold icon is not displayed, or the target of the change with the increased hold. It may be configured such that the pre-reading notice by the hold icon is regulated, and the pre-reading notice and/or the notice of the change may be given after the next change of the change in which the hold is increased.

In this example, while the pre-reading notice by the one hold icon is being executed, the pre-reading notice by the other hold icon may be given, but the pre-reading notice by the other hold icon may be made while the pre-reading notice is made by the one hold icon. , Until the hold corresponding to the one hold icon is exhausted (may be displayed in the variable icon display area or may be deleted from the variable icon display area) Good.

In this example, the navigation character selected by the player may give advance notice and/or look-ahead notice of the change, but the navigation character selected by the player gives notice of the change and/or look-ahead notice. You may not be discouraged. The tutorial display may be performed by the navigation character selected by the player (for example, the tutorial display is performed by a balloon icon), but the tutorial display is performed by the navigation character selected by the player. You may not be discouraged. Further, in this example, the navigation character and/or the look-ahead notice may be given by the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player, but the notice and/or the look-ahead notice may not be given. Further, the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the variable icon is easier to perform than the navigation character that can be selected by the player, or the navigation character changes. It may be configured to have a high expectation of a jackpot variation in the design and/or a pending big jackpot (or a jackpot confirmed (may be a jackpot rich)), a notice that the navigation character appears, and/or It may be configured so that the frequency of occurrence of the super reach effect is high (or always occurs).

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 109.

In place of FIG. 109 (aa3-1), in FIG. 110 (aa3-2), instead of the treasure box icon I1, a change notice display is performed by the light emission of the light guide plate IL. That is, the change of the navigation character YM may be announced by a different production means from the production means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) in which the navigation character YM is displayed.

Further, instead of FIG. 109 (aa3-1), in FIG. 110 (aa3-3), instead of the icon I1 of the treasure box, a change notice display is performed by the rendering operation of the movable means (here, the family crest part 224E). It is carried out. That is, the family crest monument 224E moves from the initial position to a position where it has risen, and overlaps the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM. Note that there is no hold icon here, but if there is a hold icon, it also overlaps the hold icon. After that, the family crest monument 224E rotates clockwise (see the arrow in the figure). The family crest monument 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family coat emblem 224E may vibrate along with or instead of rotating. Alternatively, only the ascending may be performed, and the rotation and the vibration may not be performed. Further, the navigation character YM may be changed during the overlap, or may be changed after the effect operation of the family crest product 224E is completed, that is, after the family crest product 224E returns to the initial position. Further, the easiness of change to the navigation character YM and the color of the display mode after the change may be notified by a light emission effect by the LED provided on the family crest monument 224E.

Further, instead of FIG. 109 (aa3-1), in FIG. 110 (aa3-4), a change notice display is performed by sound output from the speaker 120 instead of the treasure box icon I1. The change notice display may be performed by the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452.

Further, instead of FIG. 109 (a-a4-1), as shown in FIG. 110 (a-a-4-2), while the change notice display treasure box icon I1 is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, The icon I1 may fly on the carpet icon I2 and fly away. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change and corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

Also, instead of FIG. 109 (aa6-1), in FIG. 110 (aa6-2), the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change even though the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is opened. Also corresponds to the so-called failure pattern.

In addition, instead of FIG. 109 (aa6-1), in FIG. 110 (aa6-3), the co-panda navigation character YM is the same copanda, but the clothes of different colors (here, red clothes are red clothes). Of the navigation character YM and succeeded in the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM.

Further, instead of FIG. 109 (aa3-1), in FIG. 110 (ab1), as in the example shown in FIG. 108, the second display device 208S is provided below the decorative pattern display device 208 (first display device). Are arranged, and this second display device 208S is provided with a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS, and a pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. .. In the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM of Copanda is displayed. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (Ab1), a conversation notice is given by the notice of the grandfather character and the character display “Change in navigation character”, and the notice of change is displayed by this notice of conversation. It is being appreciated. That is, the change of the navigation character YM is announced by a production means (here, the decorative pattern display device 208) different from the production means (here, the second display device 208S) on which the navigation character YM is displayed. There is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 110 (Ab2), the navigation character YM has changed from copanda to a bancho, which is a character that cannot be selected by the player.

Further, instead of FIG. 109 (a2), the speaker 120 is shown in FIG. 110 (a1). Further, the volume level set by the player in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. 75(9) and the brightness (light amount) level set in the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 75(3) are set as the “user set value”. It is written on the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208. In this example, both are 3 levels. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 in this example, the volume and the brightness set by the player are forcibly changed at the time of execution to the effect and output from the speaker 120, or the game board lamp 442 or/and the game underframe. Since the LED such as the lamp 452 may emit light, it is written in the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 as “actual setting value”. This also applies to the following examples. In FIG. 110 (ac2), the speaker 120, which is a production means different from the production means in which there is a possibility of giving a "hot heat" notice, is notified that there is a possibility of giving a "hot heat". ing. The volume of the speaker 120 (actual setting value) at this time matches the user setting value. After that, in FIG. 110 (ac3), a notice of “intense heat” is executed, the characters “intense heat” are displayed in large size on the decorative pattern display device 208, and sound is output from the speaker 120 and the game board is used. The lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are emitting light. The volume (actual setting value) at the time of execution of the "heat" notice exceeds the user setting value and is level 5, and the luminance (actual setting value) also exceeds the user setting value and is level 5. That is, the output is made at a volume higher than the volume level set by the player, and light is emitted at a higher brightness than the brightness level set by the player. It should be noted that, during performance production, the volume and brightness may exceed the user-set value or may be forcedly below the user-set value (the same applies hereinafter). Further, the timing at which the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed is not limited to this example. For example, the brightness may change at the timing when the sound during the intense heat approach is output, or the sound during the intense heat approach may be changed. The volume and brightness may change while is output. In addition, when a certain effect is executed, only the volume out of the volume and the brightness may be output in excess of the user set value, or only the brightness may be emitted in excess of the user set value. There are also cases where both exceed.

It should be noted that the user settings of the volume and the brightness may be possible even on a game console that does not have the convenient volume adjustment window VW or the brightness adjustment window BW as described with reference to FIG. Any gaming machine that can set the volume and brightness can be used. Further, the technical idea here can be applied (hereinafter the same) even when the player can set (adjust) the resolution of the image, the hue of the image, and the like.

As described above, the various technical ideas described with reference to FIG. 110 can be applied to the effect examples described so far and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

FIG. 111 is a table summarizing songs that can be output from the speaker 120.

In the game console in the example here, the user may be able to select the music output from the speaker 120. The serial numbers 1 to 11 in the table of FIG. 111 are songs that can be selected by the user according to the number of consecutive big villas. For example, if the jackpot is not run for 15 consecutive nights, the song "Ohwa- Behavior" cannot be selected. Also, a plurality of songs may be selectable. For example, if 15 jackpots are played, all the songs with serial numbers 1 to 11 can be selected.

In addition, the song with the serial number 12 is a song that can be selected by operating the chance button 136 five times during the big hit start interval (during the big hit start performance), and when the back button navigation mode is set, the big hit. Guidance about operating the chance button 136 is notified during the start interval, but is not notified when the back button navigation mode is not set. The guidance may not be notified even when the back button navigation mode is set, or conversely, the guidance may be notified even when the back button navigation mode is not set.

The songs with serial numbers 13 and 14 are songs that can be selected on condition that a big hit is made in a specific reach. "Collaboration SP" here refers to a super-reach production in which multiple characters co-star (for example, a super-reach production in which Yoshimune and Panda co-star in a swordsman reach). The “big hit” is a big hit when the premier character “Kaede” appeared in the cut-in image during super reach.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an example in which the music selection described with reference to FIG. 111 is performed.

In FIG. 112 (1), it is a probability change state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state), and the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. The second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (1), and the hold number of special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of special figure 2 is also It is 3. Further, the pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, and in FIG. 112, only the holding icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2 are shown. All of these three hold icons h21 to h23 are default display modes. In addition, it is the third consecutive big hit. Further, in the song name display portion MN at the upper right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 112(1), the song name of the song currently output (here, the default “may be there”). Is displayed, and the music piece of the music title is output from the speaker 120. That is, the music output here is the music output in the probability changing state. Further, icons of up/down keys 137u, d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed on the left side of the song name display portion MN, and it is informed that the songs can be selected by operating the up/down keys 137u, d. A background screen of the universe is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the background screen of the universe is a background screen for the probability change state.

In FIG. 112 (a2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in FIG. 112 (a3), the music title of the music title display portion MN is changed to "mega giga summer". Since the music is output from the speaker 120 a little after the music selection operation (for example, 500 msec), there is a period in which the music name of the music name display portion MN and the music actually output from the speaker 120 are different. Note that the song name of the song name display portion MN and the song actually output from the speaker 120 may be configured to match. In FIG. 112 (a4), the song “Mega Giga Summer” is also output from the speaker 120. When the music is changed, the music is output from the beginning, but for example, when the timing or time when the music flows is determined by power-on or RTC (Real Time Clock) effect, or when the music is output last time. If it is, it may be output from the middle.

In FIG. 112 (a5), the number of holdings of the special drawing 2 increases, and the special 2 becomes full (the holding number display displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol event device 208 is updated to 4). , The display start of the fourth hold icon is slightly behind the display of the hold number display being updated to 4, and the fourth hold icon 24 in the display mode (blinking white) of the prefetch notice is displayed in FIG. Has been done. After that, three of the special maps 2 are reserved, and in FIG. 112 (a8), the symbols of the special maps 2 are stopped, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the missing decorative symbols. There is. In addition, the number of remaining reservations of special figure 2 is 1, and the 1st reservation icon h21 changes to the display mode of red.

In FIG. 112(A9), the last hold of special figure 2 is exhausted, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. Even in the state of FIG. 112 (a10), the selected song is still “mega giga summer”, and in FIG. 112 (a11), the bancho character C11 appears and the song change notice is given. The music change notice is a big hit notice including a production in which the music selected by the player is forcibly changed to another music, and may be a normal notice or may be applied to a look-ahead notice. .. In this example, since the song change notice is displayed, the jackpot confirmation (or the jackpot richness) is announced for the symbol variation for which the song change notice is displayed, but the symbol variation for which the song change notice is displayed is lost. There may be cases. For example, if "Todoroke DREAM", which is the theme song of the character that appeared, is successful (the expectation of the jackpot is high, or the jackpot is confirmed (the jackpot may be rich)). If "" is not output, it may be a failure, and the symbol variation on which the music change notice is displayed may be out of order. In addition, even when "Todoroke DREAM" is not output and the music change notice fails, it may be notified that the big hit has been confirmed by another effect (for example, revival effect). In addition, when the music change notice is displayed, the big hit is confirmed (or big hit rich) about the next change of the pattern change for which the music change notice is displayed / or the expectation of the big hit is larger than when a notice other than the music change notice is given A look-ahead notice may be made to announce that the degree is high. Further, even when the music change notice fails, it may be configured such that another effect (for example, a revival effect) is always notified that the big hit is confirmed. However, the music change notice may be a nuisance to the player in some cases, for example, the music selected by the player is forcibly replaced.Therefore, if the music change notice is started, it is a big hit. It may be confirmed.

A music change effect sound effect is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 112 (A12). Further, although the music of "Mega Giga Summer" output from the speaker 120 is not output, the music of "Mega Giga Summer" may be output. In addition, the bancho character C11 that appeared in the song change notice raises one hand, and the hand overlaps a part of the song name display portion MN.

In FIG. 112 (a13), the song title of the song title display portion MN is changed to “Distance”, but no song is output from the speaker 120. Even if the output of the song "Mega Giga Summer" is continuously output as it is in Fig. 112 (A11) in all or some of the periods in Fig. 112 (A12) to (A15-1). The output of “Distance” changed by the music change notice may be started from the speaker 120. Here, as shown in FIG. 111, “Distance” is not a song released next to “Mega Giga Summer” but a song different from “Todoroke DREAM”. However, “Distance” is the song immediately before “Todoroke DREAM” in the release order. In the song change notice here, such a song of "Distance" is put in between and finally "Todoroke DREAM" is output. In addition, at the stage of FIG. 112 (a13), “Tokeke DREAM” may be displayed in the song title display portion MN.

In FIG. 112 (a14), the music change effect sound effect is output again from the speaker 120, and the length character C11 is raising one hand. Although the song "Distance" is not output from the speaker 120 even after a certain period of time has elapsed since the song name in the song name display portion MN was changed to "Distance", it may be output.

In FIG. 112 (a15), the song name in the song name display portion MN is changed to "Todoroke DREAM", and the speaker 120 outputs the song change effect sound effect again. The song change notice may be successful at the stage when "Todoruke DREAM" is displayed on the song title display portion MN, and the speaker 120 outputs the song "Todoroke DREAM" in FIG. 112 (a16). That is, when "Todoroke DREAM" is displayed on the song title display portion MN, the song "Todoroke DREAM" is always output from the speaker 120. It should be noted that there may be a case in which even if "Roar DREAM" is displayed, the speaker 120 does not output the music of "Roar DREAM" and the operation fails.

Further, in this example, when the song change notice is displayed, "Roar DREAM" is always output, but the original "Mega Giga Summer" is displayed in the song name display area MN in FIG. 112 (A15). If it fails, it is a failure (disappearance), and thereafter, “mega giga summer” may be output from the speaker 120. Alternatively, when “Distance” is still displayed in the song title display portion MN at the timing of FIG. 112 (B15), it is also a failure (disconnection), and then “Distance” may be output from the speaker 120. The original “Mega Giga Summer” may be displayed on the song name display portion MN selected by the player, and the output of the song “Mega Giga Summer” may be started.

Depending on whether "Distance" is displayed or "Kimi no Kakera" to be released next to "Mega Giga Summer" is displayed in the song title display portion MN at the timing of FIG. 112 (a13), It may represent the degree of expectation of a jackpot for fluctuations and/or symbol fluctuations within a hold. That is, the expectation of a big hit may be higher when "Distance" is displayed than when "Kimi no Kakera" is displayed.

In addition, you may express the expectation degree of the big hit about the said fluctuation|variation and/or the fluctuation|variation of symbols in pending|holding by the frequency|count of the change of the music by a music change notice. For example, when the music is changed twice due to the music change notice, the change and/or the pending pattern change may be more likely to be hit big when the music is changed twice. .. Further, when the music changes a certain number of times (for example, 7 times) due to the music change notice, the fluctuation and/or the pattern fluctuation in the hold may be a big hit confirmation (or a big hit rich). On the contrary, if the music has changed a certain number of times (for example, once) due to the music change notice, the loss may be confirmed.

In addition, an animation of “Todoroke DREAM” is also displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (B16). Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (a19), “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of jackpot with probability variation, is swayingly displayed. In 20), the combination is confirmed and displayed. In this example, when the song change notice is displayed, the song is always changed to “Todoroke DREAM”, and then the song “Todoroke DREAM” is output from the speaker 120, and “Todoroke DREAM” is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. An animation (including lyrics display) is displayed, which is a big hit. Even if the music change notice is displayed and the music becomes "Roar DREAM", the music of "Roar DREAM" is output from the speaker 120 and/or "Roar DREAM" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The animation may not be displayed in some cases. That is, even if the music change notice is displayed and the music is changed to a specific music, it may be lost unless the effect display corresponding to the music is performed next time.

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 112.

The start screen of the big hit game is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (a21), the big hit start BGM is output from the speaker 120, and during the big hit start interval (during the big hit start performance is being performed). Is.

The timing of FIG. 113 (B22) is the timing immediately after the start of the first round. In the jackpot game production in this example, the first round and the second round are music selection periods. When the first round is started, the decorative pattern display device 208 automatically displays the music selection screen. Note that the music selection may be started by the player's will, and in this case, the music selection screen may be called by operating the chance button 136 or the like. Even during the music selection period, when the selection of the music ends, the music selection screen disappears and the round effect is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 also displays a display indicating that it is the first round (“1R”) and a display of the number of balls (number of prize balls) (0 pt).

A music release list GR is displayed on the music selection screen. Since we have achieved 4 consecutive villas in this big hit, "Kiseki no Universe" is newly added to the music release list GR and it is selectable. The "New" universe is displayed with the "New" mark. In this example, since the newly added music is displayed in the second row of the music release list GR, “may be there” and “mega giga summer” which have already been released. Is hidden. Here, the newly opened “space of miracle” is selected, and the chorus portion of “space of miracle” is output from the speaker 120. In the music release list GR, the above-mentioned "Roar DREAM" is not displayed, and "Roar DREAM" cannot be selected. However, when the production of "Roar DREAM" is executed, the "Roar DREAM" may be released. In this case, the display position of "Todoroke DREAM" in the music release list GR may be a position directly below the previously released song ("Kimi no Kakera") or the "Kiseki no I" that was released this time. It may be a position directly under the "universe". Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 113, since the release order is the sixth song, it may be at the position of the sixth song counting from the beginning song, but in this case, three question marks are displayed side by side. You will be pinched. In addition, when the production of "Todoroke DREAM" is executed, "Todoroke DREAM" among the songs released according to the number of consecutive holidays ("Kiseki no Universe") and "Todoroke DREAM" Only one song may be released, or both songs may be released.

In FIG. 113 (B24), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor csd is aligned with the display in which three question marks are arranged below the display of "space of miracle" in the music release list GR. The display with three question marks in a row is an unreleased display and the song title is unknown. That is, in the music release list GR, it is unknown what music will be released in the future. Note that at the timing of FIG. 113 (B24), the game ball has begun to win the attacker.

When the cursor csd is aligned with the display where three question marks are lined up, scrolling downward is automatically started (Fig. 113 (a25)), and the cursor csd goes to the end and "is there" at the beginning. Maybe". Note that instead of automatically scrolling downward, scrolling may be performed by the player's own operation. Further, instead of displaying three question marks side by side, the titles of songs scheduled to be released in the future may be displayed lightly. Alternatively, on the contrary, it is not necessary to notify that there is a song that is not released. That is, in the music release list GR, the display itself in which three question marks are arranged side by side may not be displayed, and only the released music title may be displayed.

Even in FIG. 113 (B27), the automatic scrolling has not ended, and the speaker 120 repeatedly outputs the hooked portion of “the universe of miracle”. In addition, during music selection, a part of each music (chorus part in this example) is output so as to loop, but it may not be looped. For example, after outputting for a certain period of time, the next music May be automatically transferred to, or the music may not be output until the next is selected. Further, all of the music pieces may be output from the beginning, or all of the music pieces from the middle (for example, the chorus portion) to the back may be output.

Also in FIG. 113 (B28), the automatic scrolling has not ended, and the cursor csd has not returned to the head "May be there", but from the speaker 120, instead of "the miracle universe," It may be there." The output of the chorus part has started. In addition, it may be configured such that the music "may be there" is not output until the cursor csd is placed at "may be there". FIG. 113(A30) shows that the cursor csd has reached the end of the music release list GR by automatic scrolling. In FIG. 113(A31), the cursor csd may be located at the top. I don't know," and the automatic scrolling has ended. Normally, the cursor csd corresponds to the display of the music from the speaker 120 after the cursor is placed on the display of the target music (may be at the same time as the alignment or before the alignment). Although the music is started to be output, "May be there" is being output during the automatic scrolling, so the music that was being output at the time of (a30) in FIG. 113 (B31) is output. The continuation of is output as it is. It should be noted that after the cursor csd is set to "may be there" (may be at the same time as being set or before it is set), "may be there" newly. May be newly started from the beginning of the chorus part of "may be there" (that is, the beginning of the song output by the music selection).

After that, the down key 137d is operated once, and the cursor csd is aligned with the display of "Mega Giga Summer" as shown in FIG. In this state, the chance button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 113 (B34), and "mega giga summer" is determined. In the music release list GR shown in FIG. 113 (a35), the display of the determined "mega giga summer" is displayed in red, and the speaker 120 outputs the music determination sound.

When the music is determined in this way, the music selection screen is switched to the round effect screen. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (a36) displays the second round effect screen, and the title "Mega Giga Summer" of the selected song is displayed at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208. Has been done. In addition, the music of “Mega Giga Summer” is output from the speaker 120. The selected song is output from the beginning when the round effect is started. When all the music is output from the beginning of the music as well as the chorus when selecting the music, the music may be output from the continuation at the start of the round effect.

Further, in place of FIG. 112 (B15-1), in FIG. 113 (B15-2-1), the song name “CREA” is displayed in the song name display portion MN of the decorative symbol display device 208. The song with this song name is a song not included in the table shown in FIG. That is, the music cannot be selected by the player. The song "CREA" is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 112 (B15-2-2), and the animation of the character "CREA" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The lyrics of the song "CREA" are also displayed. In this way, when a music that cannot be selected by the player comes to be output, the expectation of a big hit may be high or the big hit may be confirmed. However, it may include a case of losing. Further, in the subsequent music selection by the player, the music of "CREA" has been output once, and thus may be added as one of the selectable music in the music release list GR, or vice versa. , Adding may be prohibited. In addition, it may be selectable in the song selection during the big hit game, and may be unselectable in the song selection during the symbol change. On the contrary, it may not be selected in the song selection during the big hit game, and may be selected in the song selection during the symbol change. It may be possible.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of effects by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67(b).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (a1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, one hold of the special figure 1 is accumulated, and the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

Further, in FIG. 114, similar to FIG. 110 (ac1), “volume” and “user setting value” of “luminance” are written in the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208 of each figure, and “volume” is in the lower right. And "actual setting value" of "brightness". Further, the types of “BGM”, “SE (sound effect)”, and “light emission” among the effects that are actually executed are also described.

In FIG. 114 (a1), the symbol variation BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user setting value, and the gaming board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are in accordance with the symbol variation lamp pattern. It emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

In order to forcibly set the volume and the brightness to the actual set values, the effect control data itself may instruct to ignore the user set values and execute the values set by the effect data. The sub-control units 400 and 500 may perform self-management using a table in which effects that ignore values are summarized, or may be managed based on a command from the main control unit 300.

In FIG. 114 (a3), the left pattern, which has been temporarily stopped on the decorative pattern display device 208, has been developed to the super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), has moved to the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is also temporarily stopped. The right symbol that is present moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 114 (a3), the BGM for super-reach development is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are in accordance with the super-reach development lamp pattern. Emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

In FIG. 114 (a a4), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and respectively advance from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, to the decorative pattern display device 208. It overlaps from the front side. In this state, the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is shown on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In FIG. 114 (a4), the BGM disappears, and the sound effect during super reach development time role moving object is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value. According to the pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. In this way, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd and the auditors such as the light guide plate IL perform the directing operation, but the volume and the brightness remain at the user-set values.

It should be noted that the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd temporarily return to the initial positions at appropriate timings.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (a6) displays a scene after the main character and the enemy swordsman duel with each other on the background screen of the wilderness, and the swordsman and the swordsman slash each other. In FIG. 114 (a6), the BGM for super reach is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the lamp 442 for the game board and the lamp 452 for the game underframe according to the lamp pattern for the super reach, It emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (a7-1), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the button effect is started. In FIG. 114 (a8), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started, and in FIG. 114 (a9), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT has decreased, and thereafter, as shown in (a10) of the same figure. The chance button 136 is operated at a timing within the operation valid period. During this period (FIG. 114 (a7-1) to FIG. 114 (a11-1)), the super-reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user-set value, and the super-reach result agitation effect sound is generated. Is also output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the gaming board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value in accordance with the pattern variation lamp pattern. Note that the button effect may correspond to a suggestion that an effect in which the volume and brightness settings are changed may start.

In response to the chance button 136 being operated in FIG. 114 (Ua10), in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (Ua11-1), the effect image is displayed from the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other. The display is switched to Ed2. In FIG. 114 (wa11-1) in response to the operation of the chance button 136, BGM disappears, and the jackpot confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at five levels exceeding the user set value. In accordance with the lamp pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 also emit light with 5 levels of brightness exceeding the user set value. That is, both the volume and the brightness are forcibly increased.

Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the effect described in FIG. 114 (wa11-1) is executed. However, if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the lost symbol may be temporarily stopped and the revival effect may be performed.

In FIG. 114 (a a12), again, the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and each advances from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device. 208 overlaps from the front side. Then, in FIG. 114 (a13), the thousand-box box accessory 224H operates and moves downward from the initial position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. In (a14) of the same drawing, the light guide plate IL emits light again, and a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image is shown on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. During this period (FIG. 114 (wa12) to FIG. 114 (wa14)), similarly to FIG. 114 (wa11-1), the big hit confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at five levels exceeding the user set value. Then, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light at a brightness of five levels, which also exceeds the user set value, in accordance with the big hit confirmation lamp pattern.

Even if the accessory does not perform the production operation due to a failure or the like, the volume/luminance may be changed from the user set value, or in this case, the user set value may be left unchanged.

Also, the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the button image 136 is displayed, such as in FIG. 114 (a-7-1). That is, the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed before the effect of operating the accessory is performed. The change here is a notice (resultingly, a big hit notice) as a result of the button effect, and such a previous change may be treated as one of the big hit confirmation effects.

Further, here, the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed according to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect, but the operation of the accessory such as the thousand-box box accessory 224H is started or the movement of the accessory to the effect position is completed. The volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed according to the above, or the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed at a timing other than the operation timing of the accessory. Further, the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed a plurality of times by one symbol variation, and the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed only once at a maximum by one symbol variation. Further, here, the volume and the brightness are changed together, but only the volume may be changed, or only the brightness may be changed (the same applies hereafter).

114 (wa15), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the sub-control units 400 and 500 receive the command to return the thousand-carton box accessory 224H to the initial position. It starts moving toward and returns to the initial position. Here, the jackpot confirmation sound effect from the speaker 120 is lowered to the user set value, and the brightness of the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452, which are emitting light in accordance with the jackpot confirmation lamp pattern, also reaches the user set value. It has been lowered. This is returned to the user set value by the sub-control units 400 and 500 receiving the command to return the thousand-box box accessory 224H to the initial position.

Next, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (wa16), the effect image Ed2 fades out and becomes faint and gradually disappears. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (wa17), The display of the scene after the swordsmen cut off each other fades in. Further, at this timing, the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd start to return to the initial positions. In the meantime (FIG. 114 (a16) to FIG. 114 (a17)), as in the case of FIG. 114 (a15), the big hit confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at the volume set by the user. The game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452, which are emitting light according to the confirmation lamp pattern, are also emitting light at the brightness set by the user.

Note that the volume and/or the brightness change from the user-set value during the period in which the sound data and/or the light emission data is the same as in FIGS. 114 (a11-1) to (a17), and another sound data is generated. The volume and/or the brightness may be returned to the user-set value when the light emission data is switched to and/or the light emission data. Conversely, the volume and/or the brightness may change from the user-set value over the period in which the sound data and/or the light emission data is switched one or more times.

FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 114.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (a18), the display of the scene after the swordsman and the swordsman slashed together has been completely restored. Further, at this timing, the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd are stopped at the initial positions. In FIG. 115 (a a18), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are output according to the super reach win use lamp pattern. Emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. The timing at which the volume and the brightness return to their original values is not limited to the timing of FIG. 114 (a15) (the timing at which the character role (thousand box character role 224H) begins to return from the effect position toward the initial position), but this timing (background Display switching timing), a timing at which the victory of the duel scene is confirmed (timing of FIG. 115 (wa a19-1)), or a timing at which the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is stopped and displayed. May be

In FIG. 115 (a19-1), a scene in which the enemy swordsman has fallen down and the main character, Tono, has won is displayed, and the tongue's navigation character YM is also in a winning pose. In FIG. 115 (a19-1), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the voice of the main character, “Yatteze,” is the same as the user set value. The level is output from the speaker 120, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value in accordance with the super reach win use lamp pattern.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is stopped and displayed, and the confirmation display is performed.

Further, instead of FIG. 114 (Ua11-1), in FIG. 115 (Wa11-2), after the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. The display of the scene is switched to a display in which a symbol (“decoration 6”) different from the left and right symbols (“decoration 7”) is displayed as a large symbol (shaking display). This is a display indicating that the button effect has failed. At this time, the BGM for defeating the super reach is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the lamp 442 for the game board according to the ramp pattern for defeating the super reach. The gaming frame lamp 452 emits light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. As described above, the volume and/or the brightness do not have to be changed from the user set value when the rendering fails, or when the loss richness or the loss is confirmed, the volume and/or the brightness can be changed from the user set value. Good.

Further, in place of FIG. 114 (wa11-1), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (wa11-2') is the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (wa11-2). However, in this example, the volume is lower than the user set value and the brightness is also lower than the user set value. In this way, the volume and/or the brightness may be reduced when the rendering fails, or when the loss richness or the loss is confirmed. Further, the volume and/or the brightness may be lowered when the effect is successful or when the big hit is concentrated or the big hit is confirmed.

In place of FIG. 114 (Wa7-1), button effect is not started in FIG. 115 (Wa7-2-1), and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (Wa7-2-2), A magnified display of the main character's lord's character informs that he or she has won. As described above, even when the effect using the operation means such as the chance button 136 or the accessory (movable means) such as the thousand box accessory 224H is not involved, when the specific effect display is displayed, The volume and/or the brightness may be forcibly changed. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (a7-2-3), the display returns to the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other, and the volume and brightness also returned to the same level as the user set value. ing.

It should be noted that the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed depending on not only the accessory and the display but also the effect by another effect means. Examples of other presentation means here include a light guide plate IL, a versatile light (POV display), a light emitting means (for example, various lamps), a second display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device), and the like. The volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed in response to a winning of a winning opening (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, an attacker) or a passage through a specific gate. Furthermore, the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed even in the effect performed when the game ball enters the effect sensor.

Further, instead of FIG. 115 (wa a19-1), in the example continuing from the same drawing (wa a19-2-1), it is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the same FIG. The display of the scene where the protagonist's lord wins fades out as shown in the same figure (Wa19-2-3), and then, as shown in the same figure (Wa19-2-4), the first decorative pattern is A combination of decorative patterns "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is displayed in a swinging manner. In this example, after forcibly changing the volume and brightness in FIG. 114 (wa11-1), the state is continued up to FIG. 115 (wa19-2-3), and then returns to the user set value. That is, the state in which the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed is continued until the super reach effect is completed or until the same decorative pattern is lined up and three shaking displays are started. Further, it may be continued until the shaking display is completed. Further, the state in which the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed may be continued until the final judgment effect is finished.

Although the volume and/or the brightness is forcibly increased when the accessory is operated, the volume or the brightness may be decreased. Further, when the user setting value is the maximum value or the minimum value, the volume or/and the brightness may not change. Alternatively, the player may prepare a volume or brightness that cannot be set, and in this case, even if the value is changed to a value larger than the maximum value which is the user set value or a value smaller than the minimum value which is the user set value. Good.

Further, the brightness may increase and the volume may decrease, and conversely, the volume may increase and the brightness may decrease. Further, the brightness may change and the volume may not change, and conversely, the volume may change and the brightness may not change. Further, when the volume or brightness adjustment (setting) screen is displayed when the volume or brightness changes, the value set by the player may remain the same, or the value forcibly changed is displayed. May be. Also, the volume or brightness may be adjustable by the player when the volume or brightness changes, or may not be adjustable when the volume or brightness changes.

FIG. 114C is an example in which the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the display mode of the hold icon changes. In this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 has changed. Note that the display mode of the variable icon may change. It should be noted that there may be a change in the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon in which the volume or/and the brightness is not forcibly changed. For example, when the expectation of a big hit changes to a mode in which the expectation is not so high, the volume or/and the brightness may not be forcibly changed. For example, if the expectation of a big hit increases in the order of white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, and iridescent, the volume or/and brightness must be forcibly changed unless the change is greater than red. Good. Alternatively, conversely, when the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes, the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed.

FIG. 114 (c) is an example in which the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed when an effect (hot effect) with a high expectation of a big hit appears. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (c), the conversation notice surrounded by the red frame appears. The hot effect is an effect using red, gold, or iridescent, and in this case, the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed. The amount of change may be different for red (for example, 1 level up), for gold (for example, 2 level up), and for rainbow color (for example, up to the maximum level), or the same. It may be.

FIG. 114 (c) is an example in which the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the revival effect is started after the decorative pattern of the loss is temporarily stopped. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (d-2), the revival effect accompanied by the wipe effect is then executed. In this case, the volume or/and the brightness may be changed before the result display. That is, the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed at the same time when the revival effect is started.

FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an example in which the holding frame selected by the player is changed.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, the above-described customization setting is performed. That is, in “Character selection” shown in FIG. 73(b), “Copanda” of 07 is set, and in “Holding frame selection”, 04 “Holding frame D” to which the fusible image for wipe effect is added is displayed. The “holding display selection” is set to 03 “icon C”, and the background display selection is set to 05 “background E”.

In the description here, the color used in the rendering represents the high expectation of the big hit, and the expectation of the big hit increases in the order of white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow. For example, a color or the like as a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon may be used. Hereinafter, a color change in a direction in which the expectation of a big hit increases may be referred to as promotion. This also applies to the following description. Note that this can also be applied to the above description.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (d), the holding frame UI of the holding frame D is displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, a co-panda is displayed as the navigation character YM. In addition, one hold of the special figure 1 has been accumulated, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 116(d), the background of the background E (empty background) is displayed.

After that, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by two, and three holding icons h11 to h13 are displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208 in the stop display shown in FIG. 116 (D3). Here, the hold of the prefetching notice target is the hold of the second hold icon h12.

In FIG. 116 (4), one hold is exhausted and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (4), the first decorative pattern has not yet started to change, but the second decorative pattern has started to change. Further, the movement of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement of the hold icons h12 and h13 have not been started yet.

In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 116 (d), a moving animation of the first holding icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and a shift moving animation of the holding icons h12 and h13 have started, but the sliding effect fusuma sliding door is used. The image appears from the left and right. It should be noted that the animation for moving the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement animation for the hold icons h12 and h13 may not be performed during the appearance of the fusuma image for the wipe effect. In FIG. 116 (D6), the sliding door image is in a fully closed state (wipe-in state), and the holding frame UI is invisible. In FIG. 116 (D7), the first decorative symbol also starts variable display, and in FIG. 116 (D8), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed. In FIG. 116 (D8) also, the hold frame UI is in the wipe-in state).

In FIG. 116 (D9-1), the wipeout is started and the sliding effect sliding door image is starting to open. In FIG. 116 (D10), the sliding door image is in a fully opened state (wipeout state). In the wipe effect here, the holding frame is changed. That is, the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 116 (d) is a “hold frame R” different from the “hold frame D” selected by the player in the customization setting, and is surrounded by a red frame. It becomes a frame. The “holding frame R” is a holding frame that cannot be selected by the customization setting, but it may be selectable. In addition, the foot of the navigation character YM is invisible due to the red frame. The "holding frame R" is a holding frame having a function of notifying that the display mode of the holding icon is likely to change, and "Holding change!? Time" is beside the co-panda of the navigation character YM. Character display is displayed. It should be noted that the pre-reading notice target is put on hold by the first hold icon h11 because one hold has been exhausted in FIG. 116 (4). Here, the "hold change!? time" corresponds to the above-mentioned "high-probability state for effect".

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (D12), the bomber icon I3 appears from the right end and passes over the holding frame UI. The bomber icon I3 launches a missile toward the hold icon, and the missile hits the first hold icon h11, which is the hold of the prefetching notice target. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 hit by the missile changes, and the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 116 (d13) changes to the blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. Even if the bomber icon I3 appears, the missile is not fired, the missile does not hit any of the holding icons or the fluctuation icons, or the display mode does not change even if the missile hits. There may be. All of these correspond to the failure of promotion production.

In FIG. 116 (d 15), the reach state is reached, and in FIG. 16 (d 16), the pending change symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. There are red design and blue design for the pending change pattern. When the red pending change pattern is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the pending icon is elevated by two stages, and when the blue pending change pattern is temporarily stopped, the pending icon The display mode is promoted by one level. In FIG. 116 (D16), the red pending change pattern is temporarily stopped, and in FIG. 116 (D17), the pending change animation is started. That is, the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 116 (D17) is overlapped from the front side by the effect image Ed3, and in FIG. (D18), the effect image Ed3 disappears and the first hold icon h11 becomes The display mode has changed to red. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (D19), the middle pattern, which was a red pending change pattern until now, changes to "decoration 2", and "decoration 1"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 1". The combination of is variably displayed (temporarily stopped). In FIG. 116 (D20), the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed.

In FIG. 116 (D22), the red hold icon that has been the first hold icon 11 so far is moved to the pedestal hs0 and is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the red display mode. Even when the hold of the prefetching notice target is exhausted, the display of the characters "Hold change!? Time" continues to be displayed on the hold frame UI. In FIG. 116 (D23), a gold ray is emitted from the navigation character YM toward the variable icon h0, and in FIG. 116 (D24), the variable icon that has been red until now has changed to gold.

In FIG. 116 (D26), the reach state is reached, and in FIG. 116 (D28), the super reach effect is developed. In the super reach production, the sky background is switched to the wilderness background and the duel scene is displayed. In the super reach state, the hold frame UI is left on the pedestal hs0 and the rest is all gone, and the hold icon is also gone. However, the variation icon h0 has not disappeared, and the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0. The pedestal hs0 illustrated in FIG. 116 (d28) is the pedestal of the "holding frame D" before being changed by the wipe effect. That is, the original pedestal. However, it may be the pedestal of the "holding frame R" after being changed by the wipe effect. Further, the pedestal hs0 and the variation icon h0 may not be displayed during the super reach or the normal reach state (FIG. 116 (D26)). Further, the entire hold frame UI and the hold icon may not be displayed. Further, when the super reach effect is finished, the hidden frame UI, the hold icon, and the like that have been hidden may be displayed, and after the super reach effect is finished, the hold frame R is displayed and the next symbol variation. The holding frame D may be displayed from the start of the display.

In this example, the color of the frame of the holding frame UI remains red even when the reach state is reached, but if the color of the frame of the holding frame UI also changes, the big hit expectation level is increased. Good.

It should be noted that the holding frame (for example, "holding frame R") that is not selected by the player is more than that when the prefetch holding icon is displayed in the holding frame (for example, "holding frame D") selected by the player. When the look-ahead hold icon is displayed, it may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is finally displayed more easily in the symbol variation corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon, or the hold frame selected by the player. A case where the look-ahead hold icon is displayed in a hold frame (for example, "hold frame R") not selected by the player, as compared to the case where the read-ahead hold icon is displayed in (for example, "hold frame D") However, even if the same look-ahead hold icon is displayed, the jackpot pattern may be finally displayed easily in the symbol variation corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon.

FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG.

In FIG. 117 (D9-2-1) instead of FIG. 116 (D9-1), both the hold icon and the change icon have once changed to a special mode (character). Further, the navigation character YM has also changed to panda. In this example, thereafter, the display mode of each color reflects the expectation of the big hit. Here, the easiness of changing to a color with a high expectation of a big hit is determined by the mode of the character once displayed.

In FIG. 117 (D9-2-2), a mini game with the panda of the navigation character YM is played. The character that has won the mini game changes to a color icon (holding icon or variable icon) with a high expectation of a big hit. The grandpa character has a 50% chance of winning, the princess character has a 75% chance of winning, and the lord's character has a 100% chance of winning. A premium character may be provided in addition to the lord's character. The premier character changes to an icon of a color that confirms a big hit (rainbow color here).

In FIG. 117 (D9-2-3), a rock-paper-scissors game was played as a mini game, and all of them played rock-paper-scissors. As a result, both of the old characters lost, and the lord's character won. In addition, a plurality of characters may win.

In FIG. 117 (D9-2-4), the wipe effect is started again, and after the fusuma image shown in (D9-2-5) is completely closed (the wipe-in state), the wipeout is performed (the same figure). (D9-2-6)), in the holding frame UI shown in (D9-2-7) of the same figure, the second holding icon h12 is changed to a blue holding icon. Note that the hold frame UI remains “holding frame D”.

117(e1) to FIG. 117(e12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display are displayed across a plurality of fluctuations.

A decorative frame UI of the reserved frame D is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (e), and a co-panda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. In addition, two reservations of special figure 1 are accumulated, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12, which are the default display modes of the icon C, are displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (e1), the background of the background E (empty background) is displayed.

In FIG. 117 (e2), the number of the hold of special figure 1 is increased by 1 and the number of the third hold icons h13 is increased. Here, the hold of the prefetching notice target is the hold of the third hold icon h13. In FIG. 117 (e3), the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 117 (e4), one hold is exhausted, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. (e4). The variable display of the decorative pattern has started. In FIG. 117 (e5), the icon T1 of the treasure box of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS. In this example, the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display is displayed on standby. After that, one hold is exhausted, and the hold of the prefetching notice object becomes the hold of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 117 (e7), the combination of lost decorative patterns is stopped and displayed, and the treasure box icon I1 continues to be displayed in the effect icon display area DIS while remaining on the carpet icon I2.

In FIG. 117 (e9), the hold of the first hold icon h11, which is the hold of the pre-reading notice target, is exhausted, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (e9) starts the variable display of the decorative pattern. ing. In the effect icon display area DIS, the treasure box icon I1 is still displayed while remaining on the carpet icon I2, and this treasure box icon I1 is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. In FIG. 117 (e10), the carpet icon I2 disappears, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 ends, and the change animation starts. That is, in FIG. 117 (e11), the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is wide, a smoke image appears from the inside, and the navigation character YM is covered with the smoke image from the front side. In FIG. 117 (e12), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM of the copanda selected by the player in the above-described customization setting has changed to the navigation character YM of the length. The bancho navi character YM is a character that cannot be selected by the customization setting, but may be selectable.

In addition, in this example, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed in addition to the navigation character YM across the true symbol variation display such as the symbol variation display of the special figure. The navigation character YM and the change notice display may be displayed across the change. For example, the change notice display (the treasure box icon I1 and the carpet icon I2) is displayed due to the change, and the navigation character YM which is constantly displayed is changed due to the change notice display at the third pseudo-repeating time, or before the change. The change notice display (the treasure box icon I1 and the carpet icon I2) is displayed due to the change, the change notice display continues to be displayed until the second pseudo run, and the navigation character YM that is constantly displayed by the change notice display is displayed at the third pseudo run. May change.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of effects in the pachinko machine set to the automatic button mode.

The pachinko machine 100 in this example is set to the automatic button mode, and the upper right of the decorative pattern display device 208 indicates that the automatic button mode is set.

In FIG. 118(A1), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and on the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the background of the sea. In addition, one hold of the special figure 1 is accumulated, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode, is displayed. The navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS of the holding frame UI. A chance button 136 is shown at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208. The chance button shown in FIG. 118(A1) is normally lit in white. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 is always turned on even outside the chance button operation valid period, but the chance button lamp is always off outside the chance button operation valid period. May be

In FIG. 118(A2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, the variable display of symbols is started, and then the notice of conversation is started. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (A5-1), the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative pattern, and the grandfather character is displayed. At the same time, the old conversation image CI2 on which the button effect image is displayed is displayed. The button effect image is an image that prompts the chance button 136 to be pressed within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is configured. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 118 (A5-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the old conversation image CI2, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol. Sometimes you can. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the grandparent conversation image CI2 and the palace's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 118 (A5-1), the palace's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped. It is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the conversation image CI1. In this example, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the pal's conversation image CI1 may not be displayed in a reduced size, and the pal's conversation image CI1 may be deleted. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation image displayed first, and the conversation notice A, which has a high degree of expectation for a big hit when displayed, is the conversation image. It may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

After that, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 118 (A6). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the chance button 136 after the timing of FIG. 118(A6). The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 118(A6) starts blinking in white.

At the timing of FIG. 118(A7), the suspension of the special figure 1 increases. However, the hold icon is not yet displayed at this timing. In addition, the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced due to the lapse of time after the start of the operation valid period. In FIG. 118 (A8-1), the first hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon shown in FIG. 118 (A8-1) is a button hold icon, and a red button image 136a is displayed on a white circle display. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 118 (A8-1) changes to blue lighting and starts to vibrate according to the appearance of the button holding icon.

In FIG. 118 (A10), a certain period of time has passed since the operation valid period of the button effect in the conversation announcement was started. Then, the automatic button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, the old conversation image CI2 is updated as shown in FIG. 118 (A11), and "Summer vacation is still up" is displayed as a response display to the automatic button. The text display is displayed. Note that the button hold icon does not function in the automatic button mode, and the response display is not displayed unless the player actually operates the chance button 136. As shown in FIGS. 118(A12) to 118(A13), as an operation promoting mode for the button holding icon, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while lighting blue.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (A15), a combination of lost decorative patterns is stopped and displayed. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 118 (A15) has finished vibration, and has returned from blue lighting to normal white lighting. More specifically, at a certain timing in FIG. 118 (A14), the chance button 136 has finished vibrating and has returned to white lighting. This is because the operation valid period of the button hold icon has expired. The operation valid period of the button hold icon may be terminated, for example, when a predetermined valid period has elapsed, or the decorative design may be terminated by performing the first stop, or the decorative design The process may be ended when the confirmation display is performed. However, the first hold icon h11 is still in the display mode of the button hold icon. Then, in FIG. 118 (A16), the hold of the first hold icon h11 which is the button hold icon is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (A16), the second decorative symbol has started variably displaying, but the first decorative symbol has not yet started variably displaying, and the display mode of the button holding icon is changed. The first hold icon h11 is still displayed.

In FIG. 118(A17), the hold decrease animation is started, and the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the button hold icon starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, and in FIG. , A button suspension icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the display mode, and a change animation is started on the pedestal hs0 in the same figure (A19). In the same figure (A20), a change icon h0 in a blue display mode is displayed. It's changing.

FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 118 and the like.

Then, in FIG. 119 (A22), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 119 (A23), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed.

In this example, the automatic button mode is set all the time, but the chance button 136 was not operated by the time the fixed pattern change display changed to the button hold icon is confirmed regardless of the setting of the automatic button mode. In this case, the display mode automatically changes after the hold decrease animation. In other words, while the button hold icon is in the hold mode of the display mode, it changes to the hold icon of the blue display mode in response to the operation of the chance button 136, but when the hold decrease animation is started (the change icon h0 It can be seen that the change icon h0 is displayed, and the display mode does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136.

Also, the automatic button mode may be terminated by operating the chance button 136 during the automatic button mode. In that case, while the remaining period meter MT is displayed, the automatic button mode may not be terminated even if the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button is displayed even when the remaining period meter MT is displayed. The operation of 136 may terminate the auto button mode.

If the chance button 136 has not been operated, the variable icon h0 may be displayed in the same manner as the button hold icon, or may not be changed to the blue variable icon h0. You may change to the change icon h0 of the display mode of. Further, even if the chance button 136 ends the vibration and returns to white lighting, the operation valid period may not end. Furthermore, the fact that the change icon h0 in the blue display mode does not change when the chance button 136 is not operated is the same whether in the automatic button mode or in the non-auto button mode. However, it may be changed, and further, it may be changed in the auto button mode but not changed in the non-auto button mode, or vice versa.

Further, when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period in the state where the auto button mode is not set, as shown in FIG. The old conversation image CI2 is not updated. However, it may be updated.

Further, in place of FIG. 118 (A5-1), in FIG. 119 (Aa5-2-1), a button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Also, in FIG. 119 (Aa5-2-1), a meter display MW' is also displayed. The button display icon 136D is a notice that does not change unless the chance button 136 is operated, and may be a notice of the change. In FIG. 119 (Aa5-2-2), the button display icon 136D is displayed together with the grandpa conversation image CI2 on which the button effect image is displayed. As described above, since the automatic button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, the button display icon 136D shown in FIG. 119 (Aa5-2-2) overlaps with the notice that changes without button operation. There is.

119 (Aa5-3) instead of FIG. 118 (A5-1), a plurality of button effect images (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In this case, the chance button 136 needs to be operated a plurality of times, and the automatic button function does not have to work even in the case of an effect in which the chance button 136 needs to be operated a plurality of times. It should be noted that, if the operation is performed a specific number of times (for example, once), the auto button function may be activated for the remaining button effect images.

Further, instead of FIG. 118 (A5-1), in FIG. 119 (Aa5-4), a button effect image (button) is displayed on the second display device 208S arranged below the decorative pattern display device 208 (first display device). The image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In the example of FIG. 119 (Aa5-4), the number of the button effect image displayed on the second display device 208S is one, but one or a plurality of button effect images displayed on the second display device 208S are auto. The button function may not work.

Further, instead of FIG. 118 (A5-1), in FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 is informed to prompt continuous hitting of the chance button 136. In FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-2), the button repeated hit effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) and continuous hit meter RHM. .. The automatic button function does not work for the button repeated hit effect, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-2) starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting, prompting the operation. Eventually, in FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-5), the consecutive hit of the chance button 136 is started, the consecutive hit meter RHM shown in the same figure (Aa5-5-6) rises, and the response display is performed. In FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-5), continuous hitting of the chance button 136 is started, and a response display such as an increase in the continuous hit meter RHM is also displayed. However, the chance button 136 shown in (Aa5-5-6) of FIG. Vibration continues and blue lighting continues. In the examples so far, it is sufficient to operate the chance button 136 once, but in this example, since continuous hits are required, the vibration and blue lighting of the chance button 136 are continued. Note that, even in the case of long-pressing, since the operation of the chance button 136 becomes long as in the continuous hitting, the technical idea here can be applied. The timing of FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-7) is the moment when the operation valid period elapses and the remaining time display meter MT becomes zero. The vibration and blue lighting of the chance button 136 continue until the remaining time display meter MT becomes zero. After that, the chance button 136 immediately stops vibrating and returns to white lighting. The auto button function may be activated when the operation is performed once or more. In addition, in this example, the auto button function does not work, but the long press auto continuous hitting function is configured to work, so that the same response display as when performing the continuous hitting operation is displayed by performing long pressing for a certain period. However, if the auto button function does not work, the long press auto continuous hitting function may not work.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 118.

Instead of FIG. 118 (A8-1), in the example continuing from FIG. 120 (A8-2-1), after the operation valid period of the button holding icon has started, with respect to the button effect in the conversation notice. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated once before the automatic button function of 1. In this case, both the response effect of the button hold icon and the response effect of the button effect in the conversation notice are displayed. That is, the button holding icon is changed as the response effect of the button holding icon, and the old conversation image CI2 is updated as the response effect of the button effect in the conversation announcement. The change in the button holding icon corresponds to a pre-reading notice, and the update of the old conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice also corresponds to the pre-reading notice. The conversation notice may be a normal notice. Further, the change in the button change icon in FIG. 118(A20) corresponds to a normal notice.

In addition, you may make it display only the response production of the person whose auto button function does not work. That is, only the change animation of the button holding icon may be displayed, and the old conversation image CI2 may not be updated. Alternatively, on the contrary, only the response effect of the person who operates the auto button function may be displayed.

Further, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person who does not operate the auto button function may be displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person who operates the automatic button function may be displayed. On the contrary, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person who operates the automatic button function is displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person who does not operate the automatic button function is displayed. You may

Further, although the above description using FIG. 120 (A-8-2-1) to FIG. 120 (A-8-2-4) has been made while the auto button mode is set, the auto button mode is not set yet. The same is true for.

Also, instead of FIG. 118 (A8-1), in FIG. 120 (Aa8-3), the chance button 136 vibrates and emits light in a special color (here, blue) even when the automatic button mode is not set. Indicates. It should be noted that different notifications may be given when the auto button is not set and when the auto button is set.

In place of FIG. 118 (A8-1), in FIG. 120 (Aa8-3′), when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and emits a normal color (blinking white here). Here is an example.

Further, as another example, in FIG. 120 (Ab1), during the big hit game, the decorative symbol display device 208 is informed to urge continuous hitting of the chance button 136. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (Ab2), the button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) is displayed together with the display of the third round, but during the big hit game, the auto button function is displayed. May not be activated, or conversely, the auto button function may be activated.

FIG. 120 (Ba1-1) to FIG. 120 (Ba5) are diagrams showing an example of effect regarding the back button. When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 120 (Ba1-1), the effect by the navigation character YM is started. However, the chance button 136 is normally lit in white, does not vibrate, and the back button is not notified. In FIG. 120 (Ba2), the appearance of the button holding icon (first holding icon h11) in which the automatic button function does not work causes the chance button 136 to start vibrating and change to blue lighting to prompt the operation. In FIG. 120 (Ba3), the chance button 136 has been operated, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11, which was the button hold icon, has changed (see FIG. 120 (Ba1-5)).

120(Ba1-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120(Ba1-1), the only difference is that in FIG. 120(Ba1-2), the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. It changes to blue lighting, which means that the back button has been notified.

The remaining period meter MT, which represents the remaining period of the operation valid period described above, will be described in more detail. The description here can be applied to any of the effect examples in which the remaining period meter MT described above is displayed. The display mode of the remaining period meter MT is changed according to the passage of time (in this example, the reduced display is performed), and the display state is located behind the remaining time display region MT1 according to the passage of time. Is changed (in this example, an increase display is performed). Here, the display mode (for example, color or shape) of the remaining time display area MT1 and/or the elapsed time display area MT2 may be displayed in a special display mode different from the default display mode. For example, when the display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in red instead of the default color (blue in this example), or the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is red instead of the default color (white in this example). When it is displayed in. When the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in a special display mode, and when the remaining time display area MT1 is reduced and displayed as time passes, it is displayed in a special display mode as time passes. Since the area to be displayed is reduced, it may be possible to focus on the display unit (the decorative pattern display device 208 in this example). On the contrary, when the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed in a special display mode and the display area of the elapsed time display area MT2 is increased with the passage of time, Along with this, the area displayed in the special display mode increases, so that the player who wants to see the special display mode in the elapsed time display area MT2 does not immediately operate the operation means (such as the chance button 136 in this example). It may be possible to increase variations in how to enjoy the game and improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. The remaining time display area MT1 and/or the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed at the time when the remaining time meter is first displayed (in the remaining time display area MT1, the remaining time meter is first displayed. In the case of the elapsed time display area MT2, it may be the time when the remaining time display area MT1 decreases and the elapsed time display area MT2 becomes visible for the first time.) The display mode may be displayed, or may be configured to change from the default display mode to a special display mode when a certain period of time elapses after the operation valid period elapses.

Further, the navigation character YM explained so far will be further supplemented. The description here can be applied to any of the effect examples in which the navigation character YM described so far is displayed. First, the navigation character may be configured not to give various notices. Further, another navigation character (hereinafter, “navi character B”) may be displayed while the navigation character (hereinafter, “navi character A”) is being displayed. In that case, the navigation character A displayed earlier may be overlapped with the navigation character B displayed later, and conversely, the navigation character B displayed later may be displayed first. The displayed navigation character A may be overlapped, or the navigation character A and the navigation character B may be displayed at positions that do not overlap each other. For example, there is a case where the navigation character YM that is constantly displayed overlaps with one or a plurality of variations by a navigation character that gives advance notice and/or prefetch notice. Furthermore, the change notice display may be performed by performing the effect display indicating that the change notice display may be displayed by the navigation character.

FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the overlapping relationship between the display of the ball-out notification that is notified by the occurrence of the plate full error and the other displays of the brightness adjustment windows BW.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative patterns (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative pattern (third pattern) and the second decorative pattern (fifth pattern). The special variable symbol display is stopped. Furthermore, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number of special figure 1 and the hold number of special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no hold, and the design variable display is not started after the fixed display of the special symbols is confirmed, and the menu icon MI, so that the lower portion of the first decorative symbol overlaps from the front side. A volume adjustment icon VI and a brightness adjustment icon BI are displayed. In addition, a ball-out notification such as "Please remove the ball" is displayed at the bottom of the first decorative pattern so as to overlap from the front side. The display of the ball-out notification is a slightly transparent display, and when the display of the ball-out notification is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, the display on the back side becomes slightly visible. Hereinafter, what is displayed so as to overlap from the front side or what is displayed in the layer on the front side may be simply referred to as “overlap”. It should be noted that the display of the ball-out notification may be a display in which the display on the back side is completely invisible. Furthermore, a sound such as "please pull out the ball" is also output from the speaker 120.

The display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the upper left second decorative design and the upper right second hold number display, and does not overlap these displays. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as to never overlap with the second decorative symbol or/and the second held number display, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the display position of the frame RW at the upper right of the screen for notifying the current setting state, and the display does not overlap with this frame RW either. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the frame RW, or may overlap. Further, the display of the notification of the ball removal is displaced from the display position of the holding frame UI and does not overlap the holding UI. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the holding frame UI, or may overlap.

In FIG. 121 (α2), the lower key of the operation key unit is operated and the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed. Although the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed after the display of the notification of the ball removal, the display of the notification of the ball removal has priority, and the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed on a layer behind the display of the notification of the ball removal. It is displayed. That is, the display of the notification of removal of the ball overlaps the brightness adjustment window BW.

Eventually, the symbol variation display is started, the brightness adjustment window BW, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are also hidden, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α3), 1 The variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed. However, the ball removal operation is not yet performed, and the display of the ball removal notification is continued. Note that the same operation is performed when the bowl emptying operation is performed and the dish full tank error is once resolved, but the dish full tank error occurs again, and a new ball removal notification display is displayed. The display of the ball-out notification overlaps the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 121 (α3), the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated, and the bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the holding frame UI. The volume display bar display VB is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decorative symbol, at least a part of the variable icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. In the following description, when the volume display bar display VB is displayed, it is assumed that the left and right keys are operated each time the bar display VB is displayed. By operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit, it is possible to display the bar display for brightness adjustment, and this bar display for brightness adjustment is displayed at the same position as the bar display VB for volume adjustment. The following description of the volume display bar display VB can be applied to the brightness adjustment bar display. However, the bar display for brightness adjustment and the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed at the same time. Further, the bar display VB for volume adjustment or the bar display for brightness adjustment may be always displayed, or may be displayed only for a certain period. Also, the display may be possible only while operating the left and right keys or the up and down keys.

Further, the bar display VB for volume adjustment and the display of the ball-out notification are displayed at positions where they do not overlap. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the bar display VB for volume adjustment, or may overlap.

Further, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from both the hold icon and the variable icon in the display position and does not overlap these icons. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the hold icon and/or the variable icon, or may overlap. In addition, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the display of the navigation character YM and does not overlap the display of the navigation character YM. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the navigation character YM, or may overlap.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α4), the super reach effect is being performed, and the duel scene in the background of the wilderness is displayed. Here too, the display of the ball notification is displayed, the left pattern of "decoration 7" moved to the upper left, the right pattern of "decoration 7" moved to the upper right, and the display of the ball notification is overlapped. ing. Further, the display of the ball-out notification is also overlapped with the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness. Note that the volume can be adjusted even during the super reach, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α4). This bar display VB for volume adjustment also overlaps the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness.

The decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α5) displays the big hit game start screen, but the big hit start effect display here also overlaps the ball-out notification display. Further, even during the big hit game, the volume can be adjusted, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α5). The bar display VB for adjusting the volume also overlaps the big hit start effect display. On the other hand, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the right-handing suggestion display at the upper left of the screen (display different from the right-handing warning. This is equivalent to the mini right-handed display of FIG. 71(52)). It does not overlap the right-handed hint display. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as to never overlap with the right-handing suggestion display, or may overlap. The right-handed suggestion display may not be displayed on the big hit game start screen.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α6), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to right-handed is displayed. In this example, the right-handed instruction screen is the first big hit (the normal big hit state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) to the first big hit (first consecutive solitary) big hit. The 1st (1st consecutive villa) big hit from (special figure high-accuracy ordinary figure low probability) and the first (1st consecutive villa) big hit from sudden probability change (special figure high-accuracy general figure high-accuracy) Note that the latent probability variation state and/or sudden probability variation state described above refer only to the state that has transitioned from the normal state, excluding those that occurred in the probability variation state or the shortened state). However, a right hitting instruction screen may be displayed for each big hit. The right hitting instruction screen here overlaps the display of the notification of the ball removal, while the right hitting suggestion display does not overlap the display of the notification of the ball removal. In this example, the right-handing warning display (corresponding to the right-handing notification in FIG. 70 (60) described above and the liquid crystal display at the time of right-handing of the hitting warning in FIG. 126 described later) is displayed while the right-handing instruction screen is displayed. Although not performed, the right-handed warning display may be performed while the right-handed instruction screen is being displayed. Further, while the left-handing warning display (corresponding to the liquid crystal display at the time of left-handing of the hitting warning of FIG. 126 described later) is not displayed during the display of the right-handing instruction screen, it may be displayed. Further, although the right-handing suggestion display is performed while the right-handing instruction screen is being displayed, the right-handing suggestion display may not be performed while the right-handing instruction screen is being displayed.

In FIG. 121 (α7), the first round is started and the round effect is displayed. The display of the notification of removal of the ball and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap with the display of the round effect. It should be noted that the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the display of the number of rounds at the upper right of the screen, and does not overlap with the display of the number of rounds. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the number of rounds display, or may be displayed in some cases. Further, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the display of the number of discharged balls (0 pt) at the lower right of the screen, and does not overlap with the displayed number of discharged balls. The display of the notification of ball removal may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the number of discharged balls, or may be displayed in some cases.

In FIG. 121 (α8) of the fourth round, a promotion effect is suggested in the fifth round, which indicates whether or not there is a big chance that the second variable winning a prize opening will be open for a long time and it will be easy to pass V. As a result, a success effect indicating that the promotion effect has succeeded is being executed. That is, it is informed that it is a big hit game in which the probability variation transition condition is easily established. The display of the ball-out notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps the display of this successful effect. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α8), the display of the star "V chance GET" is also started. The display of the ball-out notification is different from the display of the "V chance GET" of this star mark, and does not overlap with this display. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the star "V chance GET", or may be overlapped.

In FIG. 121 (α9), the fifth round is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the fifth round of the big hit game and prompts the player to make a V pass in this round. The display "Aim for V" is displayed. As a result, it may be possible for the player to surely perform the V passage. The display of the ball-out notification overlaps with the display "Aim for V".

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (α10), there is a passage (V passage) of the game ball to the probability variation operation area in the second variable winning opening, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is informed that the probability variation acquisition has been confirmed. The display of "V" is large. That is, the display of "V", which is the notification that the probability variation acquisition has been confirmed, is displayed based on the fact that there is V passage. The display of the ball-out notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps the display of "V". Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (α10), the display of the star mark “V chance GET” may be hidden.

When the fifth round ends, the big hit game end effect is performed in a manner as shown in FIG. 121 (α11). In the above-mentioned big hit game, since the probability change transition condition is satisfied by passing V in the fifth round, while the symbol fluctuation display is displayed for a certain number of times after the end of the big hit game, the probability change state (special figure high probability general figure High probability state). Therefore, in the big hit game end effect, a display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating that the state changes to the probability changing state (probability changing effect) is performed. The display of the notification of removal of the ball and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap with the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush". It should be noted that the right hit suggestion display is also displayed in the end effect of the big hit game, but it may not be displayed.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α12), a prepaid card forgetting warning display (corresponding to the caution display of FIG. 71 (57) described above) is displayed. The display of the notification of the removal of the ball and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap the warning display for forgetting to remove the prepaid card. In the end effect of the prepaid card forgetting warning display, the right-handing suggestion display is displayed, but it may not be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α13), a display of the number of big hit condominiums (BONUS×3) is displayed immediately below the right hit suggestion notification on the upper left of the screen. Further, a music title display portion MN is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and up and down key icons of the operation key unit are displayed on the left side thereof. Further, the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

The display of the ball-out notification is different from the display of the number of big hits, and does not overlap with this display. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the number of big hits, or may overlap. In addition, the display of the ball-out notification is also displaced from the song title display portion MN, and does not overlap the song title display portion MN. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed on the song title display portion MN so as not to overlap, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the icon of the up/down key and does not overlap with the icon of the up/down key. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the icons of the up and down keys, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the second hold number display at the lower right of the screen, and does not overlap with the second hold number display. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the second hold number display, or may overlap.

Further, the volume display bar display VB shown in FIG. 121 (α13) overlaps a part of the hold icon, but may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap.

Further, in FIG. 121 (α14), the big hit game start screen is displayed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α15), the music selection screen shown in FIG. 113 is displayed. The display of the ball-out notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap with the music release list GR.

Further, in FIG. 121 (α16), the music selection is finished and the round effect is started. The song name of the currently selected song is displayed at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α16). The display of the ball-out notification is different from the display of the song title display and does not overlap with the song title display. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the music title display, or may overlap.

In addition, in FIG. 121 (α17) of the fourth round, the display “Aim for V with the next R” is displayed on the right side of the screen, and in FIG. 121 (α18) of the fifth round, “ The display "Aim for V" is displayed, and the display of the ball-out notification overlaps these displays displayed on the right side of the screen. Here, FIG. 121 (α17) may correspond to the end of the remaining ball detection period of the main control unit 300 at the end of the fourth round. In addition, FIG. 121 (α18) indicates the start of the fifth round, and may correspond to when the special electric power combination operating signal of the main control unit 300 changes from OFF to ON. In this case, the period between FIG. 121 (α17) and FIG. 121 (α18) corresponds to the period of the inter-round interval from the end of 4 rounds to the start of 5 rounds, and the signal indicating that the special electric power combination is operating of the main control unit 300 It will be the period from on to off.

Further, in FIG. 121 (α19), the display of “V” based on the V passage is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the display of the ball-out notification overlaps with the display of “V”. ing. However, the bar display VB for volume adjustment does not overlap with the display of "V".

It should be noted that FIG. 121 (α20) may be a state in which 5R is being executed and a certain period of time has elapsed after V passage, or at the end of 5 rounds (for example, the remaining ball detection period of the main control unit). (A period corresponding to the end).

After that, the jackpot game progresses up to 15 rounds (Fig. 121 (α21) to (23) in Fig. 121), and in Fig. 121 (α24), the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush" is displayed as in the same diagram (α11) ) Is displayed, and the bar display VB for displaying the notification of the removal of the ball and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap with the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush”. In FIG. 121 (α24), the jackpot end display period is started and displayed after the end of the inter-round interval.

Note that there is a time lag between the timing in the main control unit 300 and the actual timing because the command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 receives it, and various controls are performed.

Further, in FIG. 121, the previous round display is displayed as it is during the inter-round interval. For example, "5R" is displayed during the inter-round interval between the fifth round and the sixth round, but all or part of the round display may be hidden during the inter-round interval. For example, only R may be displayed and the number part may be hidden.

The same is true at the end of 15 rounds, and round display may be performed or non-display may be performed during the inter-round interval.

In this example, the right-handed warning display may be displayed during the big hit, but the left-handed warning display may not be displayed, but the left-handed warning display may be displayed. It may be configured so that the warning is not given.

The display of the ball-out notification is described above as an example, but the description here is not limited to the display of the ball-out notification, and other errors (for example, various errors listed in FIGS. 124 and 125). It can be applied to the display of the notification regarding.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a display example of the ball-out notification.

The display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 122(β) is such that the display behind the ball-out notification is completely invisible.

The display of the notification of removal of the ball shown in FIG. 122 (γ1) overlaps with the volume adjustment icon VI in addition to the brightness adjustment window BW. That is, the display of the notification of removal of the ball shown in FIG. 122 (γ1) overlaps a part of the brightness adjustment window BW and a part of the volume adjustment icon VI. It should be noted that the display of the notification of removal of the ball may overlap the entire brightness adjustment window BW or the entire volume adjustment icon VI. In addition, the display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 122 (γ1) is a slightly transparent display like the display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 121, and the display on the back side is slightly visible. However, it may be a display in which the display on the rear side is completely invisible, such as the display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 122(β).

The display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 122 (γ2) overlaps the bar display VB for volume adjustment displayed during the symbol variation display. The display of this ball-out notification does not overlap with the navigation character YM, but the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps with the navigation character YM. Also, the display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 122(γ1) may be a display in which the display on the back side is completely invisible, like the display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 122(β) (hereinafter ,the same.). Note that the display is not limited to the volume adjusting bar, but can be set by the player while the symbol is changing, and the display regarding the above-mentioned Daitomo (the above-described production customizing screen shown in (V) and (V′) in FIG. 75, etc. The list of missions achieved by the player's operation regardless of the variation status of the symbols while setting the song title display portion MN, the brightness adjusting bar, and the user mode (Daitomo) shown in FIG. 112 (1) etc. Display of game history (number of revolutions, number of balls, number of missions cleared, number of jackpots played this time, maximum number of consecutive games played this time, etc.), character or background set by user, hold frame, hold display, etc. It can also be applied to displays that can be set and changed.

The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 122 (γ3-1) overlaps each of the change icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM. Then, when the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated in the state shown in FIG. 122 (γ3-1), the volume display bar display VB is displayed. As shown in FIG. 122 (γ3-2), In the display of the ball-out notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment, the display of the ball-out notification is prioritized and displayed on the front side. Note that the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be prioritized and displayed on the front side. In any case, the volume display bar display VB also overlaps the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and may also overlap the hold icon h11.

In FIG. 122 (γ4), contrary to FIG. 122 (γ3-2), the ball-out notification display is overlapped with the volume display bar display VB.

In FIG. 122 (δ3-1), the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. In FIG. 122 (δ3-2), the navigation character YM jumps by animation to notify the removal of the ball. Is overlaid on the display. Here, the display of the notification of ball removal overlaps the navigation character YM, but the navigation character YM may overlap a part of the display of notification of ball removal. In addition, the navigation character YM may not perform animation such that it overlaps the whole or part of the display of the notification of ball removal. This technical idea can be applied to the display regarding other errors described later.

In FIG. 122(ε), the display of the ball-out notification does not have a frame display but is displayed only in characters.

FIG. 122 (ζ1) shows an example in which the display of the ball removal notification is composed of a character display and a peripheral image display 132G around the ball ejection lever 132 (see FIG. 1). By the peripheral image display 132G, a part of each of the first decorative symbol, the menu icon MI, the volume adjusting icon VI, and the brightness adjusting icon BI is overlapped.

In FIG. 122 (ζ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps with the same character display as the character display of “Aim for V” shown in FIG. 121 (α9) to hide the character display.

In FIG. 122 (ζ3), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the same display as the display of “Aim V at next R” on the right side shown in FIG. 121 (α17).

In FIG. 122 (η1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the character display of “Aim for V” and the display of the star mark “V chance GET”.

In FIG. 122 (η2), the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap the display of “Aim for V at the next R” displayed on the right side.

In FIG. 122 (θ1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the volume adjusting bar display VB and hides a part of the volume adjusting bar display VB. That is, in this example, only the entire gauge portion is hidden. However, the peripheral image display 132G may overlap all of the volume display bar display VB. Note that, in this example, the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap the character display of “Aim for V” and the display of the star “V chance GET”.

In FIG. 122 (θ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the entire gauge portion of the volume display bar display VB and a part of “Aim for V with the next R” on the right side.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example in which a plurality of types of error displays are displayed.

An example of errors A to E shown in FIG. 123 will be described later. The ball-out notification may or may not be included in these errors A to E.

In FIG. 123(ι1), the transparency display of the error A notification is displayed, and the warning sound of the error A notification is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 123(ι1'), an opaque display for reporting the error A is displayed.

In FIG. 123(ι2), the transparency display of the error A notification overlaps with each of the change icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM, as in FIG. 122(γ3-1). Is the same as the description in FIG. 122 (γ3-1).

In FIG. 123(ι3-1), a plurality of types of error displays (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. That is, a newly generated error is displayed below, and in this example, the first generated error is the error A. From the speaker 120, the latest warning sound of the error E is output. Note that the warning sounds may be output in the order of occurrence of all displayed errors.

In FIG. 123 (ι3-2), since the error E is eliminated, the transparency display of the error E notification disappears, and the warning sound of the error D is output from the speaker 120. That is, when the error that occurred last is canceled, the warning sound of the error that occurred before that is output.

In FIG. 123 (ι3-2'), the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps a part of a plurality of types of error displays (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification). Here, the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps the transparent display of the error E notification at the bottom, and the character display of the error E is hidden. It should be noted that a plurality of types of error displays may overlap the volume display bar display VB.

In FIG. 123 (ι4-1), when an error occurs in the order of error ABCDE, the error having the highest priority to be notified is displayed above, and the speaker 120 outputs the warning sound of the error having the highest priority. To be done. An error with a high priority is an error with a high degree of importance (for example, a serious error for a game store), and specifically, it may be the order of the list shown in FIG. In FIG. 123(ι4-1), the error B has the highest priority.

In FIG. 123(ι4-2), since the error B has been eliminated, the transparency display of the error B notification disappears, and the speaker 120 outputs the warning sound of the error E, which has been the second error so far.

In FIG. 123(ι5-1), an error A occurs, a transparency display of the error A notification is displayed, and a warning sound of the error A notification is output from the speaker 120. In this state, the error Z occurs. Error Z is an error to stop the game, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (ι5-2) is a blue screen, and all the displays except the display related to the error Z are not displayed. ing. The error to stop the game here is an error (for example, a magnetic (magnet) detection error) in which the main control unit 300 does not perform various lottery. That is, it is an error that the main control unit 300 cannot perform various lottery, or does not perform various lottery even if it is possible. The error displayed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 like the error Z is not limited to the error for stopping the game, but is, for example, an effect moving means error described later or an error for stopping the payout operation. Good. Further, although some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. 126 described later may be the error Z, conversely, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. 126 may be performed. May not be displayed in the display mode of the error Z. Further, when the main control unit 300 does not perform various kinds of lottery, commands are not transmitted to the sub control units 400 and 500, so that various kinds of lottery are not eventually performed on the sub control units 400 and 500.

In FIG. 123 (κ1), the position of the error display is changed. That is, at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, a plurality of types of error displays (error A notification to error E notification opaque display) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. The error display in FIG. 123(κ1) is a display in which the display behind the error display is completely invisible, but it is a slightly transparent display, and the display of the ball-out notification overlaps from the front side. When displayed on, the display on the back side may be slightly visible.

In FIG. 123 (κ2), the display of the ball-out notification is added in the state shown in FIG. 123 (κ1). Here, the ball-out notification error (plate full tank error) is not included in the plurality of types of errors (error A to error E), but is included in the plurality of types of error (error A to error E). Good. It should be noted that, instead of the error of the ball-out notification, an error that frequently occurs may be displayed separately from a plurality of types of errors (error A to error E).

Part of the error of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 123 (κ2) is overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end. It should be noted that all the ball-out notification errors may be overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

On the other hand, the ball-out notification error shown in FIG. 123(κ2) overlaps with a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

The error notification display regarding the control on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500 may be overlapped with the error notification display regarding the control of the main control unit 300, or vice versa. For example, the hitting warning display may be overlapped by the ball-out notification, or conversely, the ball warning notification may be overlapped by the hitting warning display. Further, both of the error notification displays regarding the control on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500 and the error notification display regarding the control of the main control unit 300 do not overlap with each other. May be.

In FIG. 123 (λ1-1), the symbol variation display is in progress, and the simultaneous production executed by a plurality of gaming machines is started in the middle of the symbol variation display. FIG. 123 (λ1-2) shows an example of the display screen of the simultaneous effect at the normal time (error has not occurred and before the first stop). As shown in FIG. 123 (λ1-2), in the normal time, the background display of the decorative symbol display device 208 replaces the background display of the simultaneous production. The volume display bar display VB may be displayed so as to overlap the background display of the simultaneous production. However, the reverse is also possible. Regarding the error display, there is an example shown in FIG. 123 (λ2′) described later, but the error display may be displayed so as to overlap the background display of the simultaneous production. However, the reverse is also possible.

FIG. 123(λ2) shows an example of a case where simultaneous production occurs during super reach production. During the super reach effect, the display of the simultaneous effect is displayed in the separate frame display section OFD in the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the player can enjoy the effect of the super reach and also see the simultaneous effect. be able to. If the gaming machine is equipped with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the display of simultaneous production is displayed on these display devices 208S, 208M, 208N. May be.

FIG. 123(λ2′) shows an example of a case where simultaneous production occurs during error notification display. Here, the situation in which the super reach production is being performed also overlaps, but it may be before the first stop of the decorative pattern, or in the normal reach state or the same. The display of the simultaneous production is displayed in the separate frame display portion OFD, and a plurality of types of error displays (transparency display of the error A notification to the error E notification) are displayed without changing before the simultaneous production occurs, and the separate frame display portion is displayed. The display of the simultaneous production in the OFD is overlapped with a plurality of types of error display.

The volume display bar display VB may be overlapped with the simultaneous effect display on the separate frame display section OFD. Alternatively, conversely, the volume adjustment bar display VB may be overlapped with the simultaneous effect display on the separate frame display section OFD.

Further, in the gaming table provided with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, those display devices 208S, 208M, 208N (hereinafter referred to as "second display means"). .) overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 or the first decorative symbol display device 208L (hereinafter, referred to as “first display device”), the first display according to the movement of the second display device. A part of the display on the means may be displayed on the second display means. In this case, the error display may be displayed on the second display means, or only the error display may not be displayed.

As described above, in the description using FIGS. 121 to 123, the word “error” and the word “warning” are used, but it is not necessary to distinguish between the two and it is possible to notify that an error has occurred. Alternatively, it may be a notification that an instruction has been issued to eliminate the error that has occurred. Further, the one described as an error may be set to have a higher priority than the one described as a warning.

<Error notification/Error detectable by main controller>
Next, an error that can be detected by the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100.

The errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example are a magnetic (magnet) detection error, a switch (sensor) non-connection error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch (sensor) level abnormality error, and a prize. Rate (general winning opening, starting opening 2 (electric Chu), special winning opening (attacker)) abnormal error, special winning opening discharge excess error, big winning opening excess prize error, shock abnormal error, solenoid abnormal error and the like.

The magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs when the magnetic detection signal changes from off to on in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and this state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms), and then the power is turned on again. It is an error that returns when you do. For switch (sensor) disconnection error, when the power is turned on (PW_WATCH signal is on), one of special Fig. 1, 2 start port, universal start port (gate), and attacker is not connected (harness is broken or connector is disconnected). This occurs when the state of (1) continues for a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms), and the unconnected device (Special Fig. 1 and 2 starting port, general figure starting port, attacker) is connected in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on). This error is returned when it is detected that The magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is an error that occurs when the magnetic field (radio wave) is detected by the magnetic field (radio wave) detection sensor.

The switch (sensor) level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a large jade is suspected. Among the prize-winning ratio abnormal errors, the error of the general winning opening is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the general winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226 shown in FIG. 3) is an abnormal value. The error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls are detected when the ordinary electric accessory (for example, the second special figure starting port 232 shown in FIG. 3) is not activated, and the error of the special winning opening. Is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the special winning opening (for example, the variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 3) is an abnormal value.

The special winning opening discharge excess error occurs when the number of discharges> the number of balls entered during the probability variation area valid period and outside the probability variation area validity period, and the next main control unit timer when the special winning opening discharge excess error occurs This error returns when interrupt processing occurs.

The prize winning excess error occurs when the number of balls entered is greater than the number of balls discharged after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special train combination operation interval timer is 0), and the number of balls received = number of balls discharged. It is an error that recovers when the power is turned on or when the power is turned on again. In the process of returning from the special winning opening winning excess error, the probability variation area related passage number is set to zero.

The impact abnormality error is a state in which the impact sensor level changes from OFF to ON while the switch power supply confirmation signal is OFF (=power supply is ON) and during the period of validity of the probability variation area (specific area), and the state is ON. This error occurs when it continues for a time (for example, 12 ms), and is returned when the level of the impact sensor changes from ON to OFF, or when it changes from the probability variation region valid period to outside the probability variation region valid period.

The solenoid abnormality error occurs when the photo sensor has not performed an operation of changing from OFF to ON or an operation of changing from ON to OFF even once during the probability variation period valid period. This error returns when timer interrupt processing occurs.

In this example, the uppermost stage (magnetic (magnet) detection error) in FIG. 124 is the highest priority error because the main control unit 300 is prohibited from operating (the game cannot be played). Although the error becomes lower, the other error may be the highest priority error, and the high priority may not be in the order of the list shown in FIG. Details of the error occurrence condition, the recovery condition, the detection operation in the main control unit 300, and the recovery operation in the main control unit 300 are as shown in FIG. In addition, "when the winning end display period ends" of the return condition of the winning rate abnormality error of the big winning opening (attacker) is when the end display period of the big hit or the small hit ends.

<Error that can be detected by the error notification/payout control unit>
Next, an error that can be detected by the payout controller 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the payout controller 600 of the pachinko machine 100.

As the errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the lower tray full tank error (lower plate full tank error, pan full tank error), the number of payouts insufficient error, the number of payouts switch error, the illegal payout error, and the excessive payout Error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (error when communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 cannot be received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example), CR unit not connected error, glass frame opening error In addition to the inner frame opening error and the door opening error, there are magnetic error error, external clock error error, magnetic field error error, switch level error error, switch disconnection error, shock sensor error, etc., which are not shown.

In addition, the condition of occurrence of each error, the return condition, the payout operation of the payout device 152, and the launch operation of the launch device 110 are as shown in FIG. 125(a). It should be noted that "stop." described in the item "stop firing" in the figure is synonymous with turning off the firing permission signal.

FIG. 125( b) is a diagram showing a combination of a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error, which are conditions for generating a door opening error. The door open error occurs when at least one of the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error has occurred, and becomes the released state when both the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error have released. It is an error.

<Error notification/other examples>
Note that the above-mentioned magnetic (magnet) detection error is other error (for example, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, switch non-connection error (error related to disconnection or disconnection of connector of device controlled by main control unit), shock abnormality error, The payout control communication error, the switch level error, the winning rate error, the door opening error, and the upper plate full error) may have higher priority, but may have the same priority.

Also, for example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error and an error of low priority occur simultaneously, if the output condition is met by the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error first, the operation for magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is performed. After the execution, the operation of the magnetic (magnet) detection error may be executed. In that case, the notification by the decorative symbol display device 208, the lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120 is all the devices (decorative symbol display device) that notify from the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error to the magnetic (magnet) detection error. 208, lamps 418, 532, 542, and speaker 120, etc.) may be switched (overwriting data) such that only one or more devices (eg, speaker 120) are overwritten and others One or more of the devices may continue to notify the user of the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error.

<Specific example of error notification/report mode>
Next, a specific example of a notification mode of error notification will be described using FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100.

The liquid crystal display described in FIG. 126 indicates an error display by the display means (the decorative pattern display device 208 in this example), and the character display described in “” is displayed. Here, the error display by the display means is configured to be displayed until the error is released, and to be hidden when the error is released. However, even after the error is released, the error is displayed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds). ) It may be configured to be displayed, or may be configured to be hidden after a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the error even if the error is not canceled. The display by the display means is not limited to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208, and may be an error display by lighting of a segment or various lamps, a light emission display by a light guide plate, or a POV display.

The sound effect described in FIG. 126 may be a notification by a sound output unit (speaker 120 in this example), and “” is repeatedly output as a sound. Here, the audio notification is configured to be repeatedly output until the error is released, but even if the error is not released, a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the error occurred. Then, the voice may be configured not to be output, or the voice may be configured to be output for a certain period (for example, 15 seconds) after the error is released.

The error illumination LED shown in FIG. 126 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (a position visible to the player), and is configured to be turned on only when an error related to payout occurs. However, it may be configured to turn on some or all of various errors related to the power supply, main control, and sub control (sub control), or may be configured to not turn on some or all of them. Good. Further, although the error illumination LED is not turned on in the warning regarding the sub-control (in this example, the impact warning and the hitting warning), it may be turned on. The error illumination LED may be in a constantly lit state, or may be turned off to notify that an error has occurred when an error occurs. The payout illumination LED described in FIG. 126 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (a position visible to the player), and is turned on while payout is being performed by the payout device 152. The light is turned off while the payout device 152 is not paying out. Further, although the payout illumination LED is turned on when a part of the payout error (in this example, the payout amount shortage error) occurs, the payout lighting LED may be turned on only during the period when the payout by the payout device 152 is being performed. It may be configured to turn on when an error relating to payout occurs. The decorative LED shown in FIG. 126 is the game board 200 or a frame (in this example, the frame lamp 122 of the front frame door 106. The main body 104 (inner frame) and/or the outer frame 102 is provided with the decorative LED. Lamp may be provided, or may be configured not to be provided), and emits light according to various effects. In addition, the decorative LED illustrated in FIG. 126 may stop the light emitting effect and light up in the light emitting pattern for the error even if the light emitting effect is performed when the error occurs. (As an example at the time of recovery, the light emission effect may be configured to proceed in another layer even during an error, and the light emission effect at the time of error recovery may be configured to be recovered when the error is recovered. May be configured not to perform the light emission effect until a timing at which it is easy to recover (for example, when a new light emission effect is started), or may be configured to recover from the effect data at the time when the error occurs. (Good) Here, the error notification by turning on the various LEDs is configured to turn on or blink until the error is cleared, and turn off when the error is cleared, but even after the error is cleared, It may be configured to turn on or blink for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), or to be turned off after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the error even if the error has not been cleared. May be.

The errors that can be detected by the pachinko machine 100 of this example are (1) an error related to payout (payout control unit 600), (2) an error related to a power supply (power supply control unit 660), and (3) main control (main control unit 300). And the like, and (4) warning regarding sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500). Each will be described below.

<Error notification/specific example of notification mode/error regarding payout>
First, the error related to payout will be described. Examples of the "error relating to payout (payout control unit 600)" in this example include a lower tray full tank error (hereinafter, also referred to as a full plate error), a glass frame opening error, an insufficient number of payout errors, an excessive payout error, an illegal payout error, The payout quantity switch error, the main control communication error, the CR unit non-connection error, the CR unit communication error, and the door opening error are listed. Here, the payout error display 7-segment LED is provided on the payout control board (payout board 170) and is visible only when the main body 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102 (transparent or highly transparent). It is visible through the payout substrate case 172 made of resin).

In this example, when a lower tray full tank error occurs, the number “2” is displayed on the light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Notifying by the light emitting means by displaying, notification by the display means (decoration pattern display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that lower tray full tank error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (In this example, the speaker 120) makes a notification (in this example, a sound effect is output indicating that a lower tray full tank error has occurred). In this example, in the pachinko machine 100 having the upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128, the case where the lower tray full tank error occurs when the lower plate 128 is full will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of a pachinko machine 100 having only the upper plate 126 (one storage plate), this error (plate full tank error) may occur when the upper plate 126 is full. ..

When a glass frame opening error occurs, the number “1” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and the second light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) notifies (in this example, a decorative LED ( Blinking of frame lamps and board lamps), notification by display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (in this example, display indicating that a glass frame opening error has occurred), and sound output means (this example) Then, the speaker 120) gives a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a glass frame opening error has occurred).

When a door opening error occurs, the numeral "1" is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). While displaying, the first light emitting means gives notification, and the second light emitting means (in this example, decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) gives notification (in this example, decorative LED (frame). (Blinking of a lamp or a panel lamp), a notification by a display unit (in this example, the decorative pattern display device 208) (in this example, a display indicating that a door opening error has occurred), and a sound output unit (in this example, The speaker 120) makes a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a door opening error has occurred).

Further, the notification of the door opening error may be a notification of the glass frame opening error, and a part of the notification mode of the glass frame opening error and the inner frame opening error (for example, the notification by the display means) is made different. The other notifications may be the same, or all the notification modes may be different. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the payout of the game balls may be interrupted, and the payout of the game balls may be continued when the inner frame is opened.

Further, when a payout amount shortage error occurs, the number “3” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed, the third light emitting means (LED for payout illumination in the present example) notifies (lighting LED for payout illumination in this example is turned on) by the third light emitting means. It should be noted that the notification mode of other error notifications related to payout, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 126.

<Error notification/specific example of notification mode/error relating to power supply>
Next, an error regarding the power supply will be described. The “error relating to the power supply (power supply control unit 660)” in this example includes blown fuse 1, blown fuse 2, and blown fuse 3. In this example, the error notification is not performed when an error related to the power supply occurs. The cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 126. Although an error relating to the power supply is not reported in this example, it may be reported by a display unit, a sound output unit, or various LEDs. Further, a power supply status confirmation LED may be provided on the power supply board. Here, the power supply status confirmation LED may be configured to be constantly turned on after the power is turned on and may be turned off when an error occurs. Conversely, the power supply status confirmation LED may be configured to be turned off after the power is turned on and an error is generated. It may be configured to be turned on.

<Error notification/specific example of notification mode/error relating to main control, etc.>
Next, an error relating to the main control and the like will be described. The “error relating to the main control (main control unit 300), etc.” in this example includes a magnetic (magnet) detection error, an external clock error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch level error, a switch disconnection error, and a shock error. Examples of the error include an error, a winning rate abnormality error, a special winning opening winning excess error, a special winning opening discharging excess error, and a solenoid error error (special winning opening error).

In this example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs, a notification is given by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp). Blinking), a display means (in this example, the decorative pattern display device 208) informs (in this example, display of a character indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred), and a sound output means ( In this example, the speaker 120) gives a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred).

Further, when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs, a notification is given by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)). Blinking of the lamp), notification by the display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (this example) Then, the speaker 120) gives a notification (in the present example, a sound effect indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred). When the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds have passed.

Further, when an impact abnormality error occurs, a notification is given by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) Blinking), notification by display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that an impact abnormality error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (speaker 120 in this example) A notification (in this example, the output of a sound effect indicating that an abnormal impact error has occurred) is performed. When the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds have passed.

Further, when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) (Flashing of the lamp), notification by the display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a special winning opening winning excess error has occurred), and sound output means (this example) Then, the speaker 120) makes a notification (in this example, a sound effect is output indicating that a special winning opening winning excess error has occurred).

Further, when the special winning opening discharge excess error occurs, the error notification is not performed. It should be noted that error notification (light emitting means (in this example, decoration LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) blinks (in this example, decoration LED (frame lamp or board lamp) blinks) and display means ( In this example, a notification by the decorative pattern display device 208) (in this example, display of a character indicating that a special winning opening discharge excess error has occurred) and a notification by sound output means (speaker 120 in this example) (this example) Then, a sound effect indicating that the special winning opening discharge excess error has occurred)) may be performed.

Further, when a solenoid abnormality error (special winning opening abnormality error) occurs, a notification is given by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED ( Blinking of frame lamps and board lamps), notification by display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that solenoid abnormal error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (book) In the example, the speaker 120) makes a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred). When the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds have passed.

It should be noted that the winning rate abnormality error is a general winning opening (general winning opening 226 in this example), starting opening 2 (second special figure starting opening 232 in this example) and large winning opening (variable winning opening in this example). 234) is configured to perform the same error notification, but different error notification may be performed depending on the winning opening where the error occurs. Further, as another error corresponding to the winning rate error, there is an abnormal winning error. An abnormal winning a prize error is a certain winning condition (for example, a general winning hole 226, a second special figure starting hole 232, a variable winning hole 234, etc.) under a certain specific condition (for example, when an N ball is fired, during a big hit). It is an error that occurs when a certain number or more of winnings are detected in other than (except during electric support (universal figure high accuracy state)). When an abnormal winning error occurs, the same gaming machine status, notification, and action as in the winning rate abnormal error may be used.

The error regarding the main control and the like may include a door opening error. In that case, when a door opening error occurs, notification by a light emitting means (in this example, decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) Blinking), notification by display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display indicating that a door opening error has occurred in this example), and notification by sound output means (speaker 120 in this example). (In this example, a sound effect indicating that a door opening error has occurred is output). Note that other error notification modes regarding main control and the like, causes of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and measures are as shown in FIG. 126.

<Error notification/specific example of notification mode/warning/error regarding sub-control>
Next, a warning/error related to sub-control will be described. Examples of the "warning/error relating to the sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500)" in this example include a shock warning, a hitting warning, and an effect moving means error. In this example, when a shock warning is issued, the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) gives a notification (in this example, a character indicating that the shock warning has been issued) is issued. Will not be notified.

In addition, when the hitting warning is generated, a notification (display of characters indicating that the hitting warning is generated in this example) by the display unit (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) and a sound output unit ( In this example, the speaker 120) gives a notification (in this example, a sound effect is output indicating that a hitting warning has occurred), but the light emitting means does not give a notification.

The production moving means error means various production moving means when the power is turned on (in this example, the production moving body 224, the shielding means 246, the family crest part 224E, the first large board behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior part 224Gd, and a thousand box. Effect moving means provided on the game board such as the accessory 224H (in this example, the front frame door 106. It may be provided on the main body 104 or the outer frame 102) Incidentally, the effect moving means is provided on the frame. If it is, the effect moving means of the frame is included, but it is not necessary to include it, and it is determined that there is an abnormality when the initial operation of (the effect moving means does not have to be provided in the frame) is performed. This is the error that occurs in some cases. The abnormality referred to here indicates a case where the initial operation is not normally performed, but, for example, a sensor (ON in the initial position) at the initial position of each effect movable means is in an OFF state. It may also indicate the case where it is not turned on even after performing the retry operation once or a plurality of times, or the case where it is determined that the sensor is kept in the ON state. Further, the initial operation may include all or any one or two of the home-return operation, the sensor check operation, and the full-stroke operation. Here, the return-to-origin operation is an operation of checking the state of the sensor at the initial position and returning only the production movable means in which the sensor at the initial position is OFF (not at the initial position) to the initial position. Further, the sensor check operation is an operation for confirming a failure of the sensor, and is an operation for performing the minimum operation of switching the sensor from ON to OFF. Further, the full stroke operation is an operation of moving to the maximum position at which the production movable means can operate and returning to the initial position. The origin return operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. (For example, the effect movable means that is not at the origin position is returned to the initial position and the full stroke operation is performed as it is.) Further, the sensor check operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. Further, the sensor check operation and/or the full stroke operation may be performed in a predetermined order after the origin return operation is performed for all the effect movable means. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the production movable body A→the production movable body B→the production movable body C, and the production movable body B is not at the initial position, the origins of the production movable bodies A to C are set. After the return operation is performed (apparently, the effect movable body B is operated), the sensor check operation and/or the full stroke operation are performed in the order of the effect movable body A, the effect movable body B, and the effect movable body C. Further, it may be configured such that after the initial operation is performed for the effect moving means that is not at the origin position, the initial operation is performed for the other effect movable means. (For example, in the case where the initial operation is performed in the order of the production movable body A, the production movable body B, and the production movable body C, and the sensor of the initial position of the production movable body B is OFF, the production movable body B is initially set. The operation is performed, and thereafter, the initial operation of the effect movable body A→the effect movable body C is performed.) When it is determined that the plurality of effect movable means are not in the initial positions, the effect movable means having a higher priority is first activated. It may be configured to perform an operation (origin return operation or initial operation including the origin return operation).

In addition, the production movable means error is caused by the production movable means having various circuits (for example, the drive circuit of FIG. 45) when the connector of the production movable means is not properly connected, the harness of the production movable means is broken, or the connector is damaged. (422, etc.) is an error that occurs even when not normally connected. It should be noted that "error related to connection failure (wiring failure) of production moving means" and "error that occurs when it is determined that there is an abnormality when performing initial operation of various production moving means when power is turned on" are separate errors. You may divide and notify.

Further, the effect movable means error is an error that may be displayed during the display of the returning display, which will be described later, but may not be displayed during the displaying of the returning display.

Note that the error relating to the sub-control may be displayed in the same display mode (display area, font size, color, image shape, display position, etc.) as the error relating to the main control or the payout, and a different display mode. An error display may be displayed with. Further, the warning regarding the sub-control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the sub-control, or may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning regarding the sub-control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the main control, or may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning regarding the sub-control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the payout control, but may be displayed in the same display mode.

Further, in the case of an error relating to sub-control (in this example, an effect moving means error), in addition to the error display by the display means, the decorative LED provided on the frame or the game board 200 may be turned on or blinking. The sound output means may be configured to notify the error, or both may be performed.

Further, the error notification regarding the sub liquid crystal may be configured such that a part or all of the error notification is ended by the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 136 (chance button)) by the player. (When a part of the error notification ends, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the effect moving means error occurs, the error display is displayed as it is, but the error notification by the sound output means ends, and the game is played. The blinking display by the decorative LED on the board is finished, part of the decorative LED on the frame is turned off, and the blinking by the other part continues, etc. By operating the operation means in this way, the error of the production means A It is conceivable that the notification continues, the error notification of the rendering means B ends, a part of the rendering means C ends, and another part continues as it is. The rendering means A to C are sound output means, display means, Applicable to decorative LEDs.)
When displaying the liquid crystal loading display when the power is turned on, the error display may not be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, or may be displayed. Here, the liquid crystal loading display is a display showing a state in which the data stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub control unit 500 is being read. When the reading of the data stored in the RON 506 of the second sub-control unit 500 is completed, the symbol stop display (the symbol stop display displayed between the demo screen or the symbol fluctuation display) or the returning display (preparing display) is displayed. It The display during recovery is a display that is displayed when the game control is restored during a symbol variation or a big hit, and if the symbol is varying, until the symbol stops (until the special symbol display confirmation timer becomes 0). If it is a big hit, it is displayed until the big hit ends (until the hit end display timer becomes 0). In addition, it may be configured to return from the returning display to the symbol changing display at a specific timing during the symbol changing (for example, start of super reach effect, temporary stop display of three decorative symbols, etc.). Further, various jackpot displays may be displayed from the returning display at a specific timing (for example, start or end of a specific round, start or end of jackpot start effect, start or end of jackpot end display) during jackpot. Here, while the returning display may be displayed, all or part of the above-mentioned error display may be displayed, but it is configured not to be displayed for all or part of the other error display. May be. Further, although all the above-mentioned error displays are not displayed during the display of the liquid crystal loading display, some or all of the error displays may be displayed during the display of the liquid crystal loading display. ..

The change effect display may be a change notice display.

When the display mode of the hold icon is selected as the icon A by the player, when the hold prefetching notice is started, the icon A is forcibly changed from the icon B to the icon G selectable by the player. Alternatively, the icon A may change to a form of an icon that cannot be selected by the player when the hold prefetching notice is started.

It should be noted that there may be provided a plurality of operating means relating to performance. Here, when the operation means A (for example, the chance button 136) and the operation means B (lever) are provided, an image prompting the operation of the operation means A (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means A or “operation means”). A character display such as "press A". Hereinafter, when "operation means image A" is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the operation means B (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means B or " A character display such as "press operation means B." Hereinafter, referred to as "operation means image B") may be configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed more easily than the case where it is displayed. The image regarding the operation means in which the jackpot pattern mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed may be reversed, and the ease with which the jackpot pattern mode is definitely displayed may not change. Here, the auto button function works for the operation means A, but the auto button function does not have to work for the operation means B, the operation means for which the auto button function works may be reversed, and the auto button for both operation means may be the same. The function may work, or the auto button function may not work for both operating means. Further, the display mode of the navigation character may be changed more easily when the operation means image B is displayed than when the operation means image A is displayed, but it may be the reverse. The success degree of the change in the display mode of the navigation character may not be different depending on the displayed operation means image. (That is, they may be the same.) Further, the display mode of the navigation character when the operation means image B is displayed is changed to a display mode in which the jackpot expectation is higher than when the operation means image A is displayed. It may be configured to be easy, but it may be reversed, and the display mode in which the navigation character is likely to change may not be different depending on the displayed operation means image. (That is, they may be the same.) Further, although the operation means image A is displayed more frequently than the operation means image B is displayed, it may be reversed or the same. .. In addition, an effect (promotion effect or demotion effect) in which the operation means image A changes to the operation means image B may be performed. Here, the period during which the operation means image A is promoted to the operation means image B may be outside the effective period of the operation effective period of the operation means A and before the operation effective period of the operation means B is started. It may be outside the valid operation period of A and during the valid period of operation of the operating means B, and is outside the valid period of the valid operating period of the operating means A and outside the valid valid period of the operating means B. Alternatively, it may be during the valid operation period of the operation means A and during the valid operation period of the operation means B. The same applies when the operation means image B is changed to the operation means image A. In the above description, the two operating means, the operating means A and the operating means B, have been described as an example, but the same applies to the case where there are three or more operating means.

It should be noted that the effects that can be selected by the player are the special figure starting port, the general figure starting port, the general winning opening and/or the effect gate (the prize ball is not performed even if the player enters the gate and is detected by the sensor, only the effect is produced. It may increase according to the points obtained by passing through the gate (which is performed). Here, the number of points obtained by passing and the effect to be acquired may have a one-to-one relationship, and when the point obtained by passing becomes a specific point, for example, in the decorative pattern display device 208. It may be configured such that “display for performing an effect for lottery of an effect to be acquired from now on (gacha effect)” is performed and an effect won by the effect lottery by the first sub-control unit 400 is acquired.

It should be noted that the player may be configured to be able to switch between displaying and hiding the navigation character by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). The display/non-display of the navigator character may be always possible, or may be possible only while the navigator character is displayed, until a certain period elapses from the start of the variation of the symbol (for example, one or more, or All decorative designs may be temporarily stopped, etc.), and the display/non-display of the navigation character may not be switched during execution of the super reach effect. The navigation character may be configured to be displayed/hidden switched, or may be configured to be displayed/hidden only while the symbol is stopped (while the special map is stopped).

Although the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (ball game machine) has been described in detail above, the gaming table of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) can be used. It can also be applied to a rotating-game machine (slot machine) used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described above is a pachinko machine (1 type+1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1, 2, 3, 3 types, 1+2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot or ball) More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the reel is rotated by operating the start lever, the winning combination is internally determined by internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, a winning combination is achieved, and when a winning combination is achieved, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) in which a player is given a privilege. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are launched into the game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the enclosed balls are won in a predetermined entry area. It may be an enclosed ball type gaming table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has been awarded to the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won a prize to the game area again.

As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of gaming machines, and will be described more specifically below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 127 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 127, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium shot from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 is discharged from the game area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, ball rental, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 42 are not provided.

FIG. 128 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 128), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed, and the slot machine 1000 has It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member at an equal number of intervals, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame member to form each reel 1010 to 1012. .. The symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 by the player, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A back light (not shown in FIG. 128) for illuminating each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged on the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each design so that the individual designs can be uniformly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012 inside the slot machine 1000. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotation direction of the symbol on the reel is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that shows the pay line 1014 that is activated. The winning line to be activated is predetermined according to the number of medals bet as the game medium. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one bet on a medal is bet, the horizontal pay line on the middle row is valid, and when two bets are placed on a medal, an upper horizontal pay line and a lower horizontal pay line are added. When 3 coins are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines to which the rightward winning line and the rightward winning line are added are valid as winning lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one bet is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right line. Five lines of the downward winning line and the rightward winning line may be valid as the winning line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp for informing that the game medal can be inserted by the player. The re-play lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (there is no need to insert medals) when a re-play, which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a production lamp.

The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards. When the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three pieces are put in. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, a game start notification is given to inform that the game can be started. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

The medal slot 1034 is a slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, and an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display device 1026 is a display device for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of paid-out medals during a bonus game) by numerical values. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination.

The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which one of a plurality of types of winning combinations has been won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively disadvantageous state.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing the medal when the inserted medal is jammed to remove the medal. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and bets that have been bet, and discharging from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided on the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 is provided.

The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for raising the game. A rendering device 1080 is arranged above the front door 1002. This effect device 1080 is provided with a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and left doors 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated in the figure) disposed behind the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and the left doors 1063b are opened horizontally outside in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed on the front surface of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side) has a structure that appears. It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device need not be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effect images and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. It may be a display device or the like. In addition, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole of the display screen is visible to the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but it may be a square flat surface. It is also possible to provide a decoration (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks odd. Further, the display screen may have a curved surface.

In the slot machine 1000 described above, as the operating means, bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., as well as the operating key unit 1090 (an example of the first operating means and the third operating means) ) And effect button 1091 (an example of a second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, the display panel 1070 displaying the title of the device and the like can project toward the front side. A light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 128 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can be pushed in and functions as an operating unit (button) like the transmitting unit 191, and an example of the operating unit (for example, the first unit). It corresponds to one example of one operation means) and also corresponds to an example of movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a first decorative pattern display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative pattern display devices 208L to 208N, a second display device 208S, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a first icon [for example, a variation icon h0],
The first icon is an icon (hereinafter, referred to as a “fluctuation icon”) related to a symbol variable display [for example, the symbol variable display] being executed,
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a default (white) display mode],
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, iridescent display mode, etc.],
When the variable icon of the second display mode is displayed, it is easier to finally finalize and display the jackpot symbol mode than when the variable icon of the first display mode is displayed [for example, , High expectations for big hits],
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM],
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across the continuous variable display of symbols [for example, FIG. 87 (I1) to FIG. 87 (I12)],
The second icon is an effect that changes the variable icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effect shown in FIG. 87 (B-9) to FIG. 87 (B11)]. Is an icon that may be used for
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a lord, a display mode of a copanda],
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, iridescent kimono wearing mode, princess display mode, bancho display mode, robot Display mode] is an icon that may be displayed in
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Here, the variable icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area of the display unit, and the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area. .. Further, the variable icon and the second icon may be icons that may be simultaneously displayed in the icon display area. That is, the second icon may be an icon displayed simultaneously with the variable icon in the icon display area during the first period. Furthermore, the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed outside the icon display area. Alternatively, the icon display area may be a movable display area, or may be a display area that may be divided and moved to different positions.

Further, "to straddle" means to interpose a period of stop display of symbols (variable stop period). Further, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed while the variable display of symbols is being displayed, or may be an icon that disappears once in the middle. Also, the icon may be continuously displayed during the stop display of the symbol, may be an icon that disappears once in the middle, or an icon that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be

Further, "the icon that may be displayed across the continuous variable display of symbols" is the "icon that is always displayed and that may be erased and then redisplayed". ..

Further, the second icon may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

The display means may be a means that always displays a plurality of types of displays.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only once in the symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second icon may be an icon displayed when a certain condition is satisfied. As an example of a certain condition mentioned here, there are n or more holdings, there is a holding for which pre-reading notice has been made, customization by the player has been made, a certain notice (for example, timer notice, (Conversation notice, etc.) is displayed, the second icon is a notice display for pre-reading notice, the second icon is stocked, and the degree of expectation of a big hit in the pattern change display being executed is It is possible to enumerate that it is high, that you have won the preliminary drawing, etc. That is, the certain condition may be all of the above-listed conditions. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of displays is a change effect display [for example, a treasure box icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button holding icon, meter displays MW and MG icons, a giant panda, a grandpa character. Conversation notice including the character display "Navi characters have changed", images of fusuma, fusuma images for wipe production, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 85 (A3-1) to FIG. (A6), FIG. 86). (A6-3-2) to the same figure (A6-3-4a), FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-1) to the same figure (ku 1-3-4), the meter effect and diagram shown in FIG. 101. 99 (shi 2-2-1) to the same figure (shi 2-2-3), FIG. 110 (a b 1) to (a b 2), FIG. 90 (6) to the same figure (8), FIG. 117 ( 9-2-1) etc.], the display may be used.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

That is, the change effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the second icon is displayed in the third display mode, and the change effect display is a display of the second icon. It is a notice display that the mode is changed from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

Further, the change effect display may be an icon that may be used for an effect that changes the display mode of the variable icon. Alternatively, on the contrary, the change effect display may be an icon that is not used for the effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon, and in this case, the change effect display is the display of the second icon. The icon may be used only for the effect of changing the mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon that always changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode when the change effect display is displayed.

Further, the change effect display may be a display that may be displayed even when the second icon is not displayed.

Also,
"When the display mode of the second icon does not change even when the change effect display is displayed [for example, Fig. 85 (3-2-1) to Fig. 85 (3-2-2), Fig. 93 ( 1-3-1) to FIG. 1-3-3b2, FIG. 110 (A4-2), and FIG. 110 (A6-2)] are also icons.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"The case where the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed is finally larger than the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. Is likely to be confirmed and displayed [for example, the expectation of a big hit is high],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed" means "the second icon of the third display mode is displayed and the second icon is “When the display mode does not change to the fourth display mode”.

Further, the state in which the second icon is displayed in the third display mode is, finally, a jackpot pattern mode than the state in which the second icon is displayed in the fourth display mode. It may be difficult to confirm and display.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon which may be a notice display about a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed [for example, Fig. 88 (U 20-1), Fig. 97 (Db 15-1)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "the second icon may be a notice display about the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed," means "the notice of the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed is the second icon. “Done by”.

Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a notice mode of a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a prefetching notice [for example, Fig. 93 (key 5-1) to Fig. 93 (key 13), Fig. 96 (core a11)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the phrase “the second icon may be a notice display of a read-ahead notice” may mean “a read-ahead notice is made by the second icon”.

Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a look-ahead notice display mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon that also functions as the variable icon. That is, in this case, two types of variable icons are displayed by the first icon and the second icon.

Further, the variable icon of the second display mode, and when both icons of the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, than when both icons are not displayed, Finally, the jackpot pattern mode may be easily confirmed and displayed.

Further, when the variable icon of the second display mode and both icons of the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, one of the both icons is displayed. The jackpot pattern mode may be finally determined and displayed more easily than when only the icon is displayed.

Further, when either one of the variable icon in the second display mode and the second icon in the fourth display mode is displayed, no icon is displayed. In the end, the jackpot pattern mode may be finalized and displayed more easily than in the case.

Further, the variable icon of the second display mode, and when both icons of the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, than when both icons are not displayed, Finally, the jackpot pattern mode may be easily confirmed and displayed.

Further, the variable icon in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon in the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) are displayed. The state in which the change icon is in a default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the second icon in a display mode (for example, the fourth display mode) different from the default display mode The jackpot pattern mode may be finally settled and displayed more easily than the state in which both icons are displayed.

Alternatively, on the contrary, the variable icon in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon in the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) The displayed state is the change icon in the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the fourth display mode). The jackpot pattern mode may be finalized and displayed more easily than the state in which both the second icons are displayed.

Further, the variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth display mode, and when the variable icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is always definitely displayed. May be. Further, the second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a sixth display mode, and when the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally obtained. It may be definitely displayed. Even if the variable icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the second icon may be displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. Good. Further, while the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the variable icon may be displayed in the one display mode or the second display mode. Good.

Further, the variable icon may be displayed in the fifth display mode and the second icon may be displayed in the sixth display mode. In this case, for example, an advantageous jackpot is confirmed (eg, jackpot confirmation with probability variation, jackpot confirmation for long rounds), rare reach (eg, full-rotation reach, etc.) is likely to appear, or other premier effects are available. It may be easy to do, or it may be easy to hit the revival. Alternatively, on the contrary, it may be difficult to hit the revival. In addition, the mode of the operating means may change (for example, the button pops out, rotates, is recessed, or the built-in lamp emits light in a rare light emission mode (for example, rainbow light emission mode that changes to seven colors)). .. In addition, you can get the privilege of production customization, increase the number of productions that can be selected during the big hit game, start special super reach, special big hit round (for example, the second attacker opens Round) may be started.

Further, the combination of the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the second icon may suggest the type of effect (for example, the type of super reach). For example, when the display mode of the variable icon is lord and the display mode of the second icon is swordsman, it may be suggested to develop into a swordsman reach in which the lord and swordsman duel. Alternatively, when the display mode of the fluctuation icon is a helmet and the display mode of the second icon is a lord, it is possible to function as a notice (normal notice) of the change only after two icons are displayed. May be configured.

Moreover, the jackpot reliability (expectation) may be different depending on the combination of the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the second icon. For example, the variation icon of the first display aspect, a combination of the second icon of the fourth display aspect, the variation icon of the second display aspect, the combination of the third display aspect of the The reliability of the jackpot (expectation) may be different from that of the second icon combination.

Also,
In the case where the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the change icon is the first icon when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. It is easy to change from one display mode to the second display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the probability that the variable icon of the first display mode changes to the second display mode is determined by the variable icon of the first display mode by the second icon of the fourth display mode. The case of changing to the second display mode is more than the case of changing the variable icon of the first display mode to the second display mode by the second icon of the third display mode. It may be high.

Here, "more than when the second icon in the third display mode is displayed" means that the variable icon is changed from the first display mode to the second icon in the third display mode. Than in the case where the effect of changing to the second display mode is performed.”

Further, when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the variable icon may be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail. Further, when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, the variable icon does not necessarily change from the first display mode to the second display mode, It may change.

Further, when the second icon of the sixth display mode is displayed, the variable icon is the fifth icon when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed. The display mode may be changed easily.

As described above, when the display mode of the second icon is changed, the display mode of the variable icon may be easily changed, and the display mode of the variable icon is always changed. Good.

Furthermore, the variable icon in a display mode that is likely to change may differ depending on the display mode of the second icon. Further, the notice that is likely to appear (pseudo consecutive notice, timer notice, prefetch notice) may change depending on the display mode of the second icon.

Also,
There is a case where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 91, the example shown in FIG. 92 (Ci 1) to FIG.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, by displaying a plurality of the second icons, a big hit may be easily made, or the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon may be easily changed.

In addition, a combination of a plurality of the second icons (a combination of the second icon of the same display mode, a combination of the second icon of a different display mode), it is easy to hit the jackpot, the hold icon or the variable icon The display mode of may change easily, or the notice that is likely to appear (pseudo consecutive notice, timer notice, prefetch notice) may change.

Also,
“Providing an operation means [for example, a chance button 136 or the like] provided at a position where the player can operate,
The second icon is an icon in which the display mode is changed when the operation unit is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 92(1-1) to 92(7)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, for example, there may be a case where the third display mode is changed to the fourth display mode in response to an operation of the operation unit.

Further, the second icon is a display mode relating to the operating means, and the display mode may change according to the operation of the operating means. The display mode relating to the operating means may be a display mode imitating the operating means, or a display mode prompting to operate the operating means (operation promotion display mode), It may be a display mode relating to the operation valid period of the operating means (more specifically, a display mode of the remaining period of the operation valid period (remaining period display mode)), or a display mode reminiscent of the operating means. It may be present, a combination of these display modes may be used, or a display mode including at least one of these display modes may be used.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a meter display, and the operation of the operation means is accepted according to the state of the meter display, and when the operation of the operation means is accepted, the second icon is displayed. The display mode of may change.

Further, when the operation means is operated in a so-called back button state in which a notification for operating the operation means is not issued even during the operation valid period of the operation means, the display mode of the second icon May change.

Further, the display mode of the second icon may change according to the change of the effect mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon whose display mode can be changed by a customization operation by the player.

Also,
"The third display mode is a display mode selected by the player [for example, character selection of 73(b)],
The fourth display mode is a display mode that is not selected by the player [for example, the display mode of the length shown in FIG. 89 (e 4-3)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the third display mode may be a display mode that the player can select, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode that the player cannot select. It may be a display mode that can be selected by a person.

Also,
“When the display mode of the second icon changes without any other display effect [for example, FIG. 89 (e 1) to FIG. 89 (e 3-1 ), FIG. )-(7) in the figure],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the second icon may change without being accompanied by another display effect" means that "the display mode of the second icon is changed by the effect of the second icon". May change.”

Also,
“The variable icon is an icon that has a case where the display mode changes without being accompanied by other display effects [for example, FIG. 100 (s 3) to FIG (s 4)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "the variable icon may change the display mode without being accompanied by another display effect" means that the variable icon display mode may change depending on the variable icon effect. It may be.

Also,
"One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a third icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, etc.],
The third icon is an icon corresponding to the number of holding balls (hereinafter referred to as "holding icon"),
The hold icon includes a plurality of types of display modes [for example, icons A to G for hold display selection in FIG. 73(b), FIG. 88 (v2), same figure (v3), same figure (v12), Default display mode, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, etc.]
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode, or the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode. May be.

Also,
“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a first decorative pattern display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative pattern display devices 208L to 208N, a second display device 208S, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a first icon,
The first icon is an icon related to the hold display [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24, variable icon h0, etc.],
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a default (white) display mode],
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, iridescent display mode, etc.],
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM],
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across the continuous variable display of symbols [for example, FIG. 87 (I1) to FIG. 87 (I12)],
The second icon is an effect that changes the first icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effects shown in FIG. 87 (B-9) to (B11)). Etc.] is an icon that may be used for
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a lord, a display mode of a copanda],
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, iridescent kimono wearing mode, princess display mode, bancho display mode, robot Display mode] is an icon that may be displayed in
The second icon is an icon that may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“When the display mode of the second icon changes without any other display effect [for example, FIG. 89 (e 1) to FIG. 89 (e 3-1 ), FIG. )-(7) in the figure],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained. Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only once in the symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of displays is a change effect display [for example, a treasure box icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button holding icon, meter displays MW and MG icons, a giant panda, a grandpa character. Conversation notice including the character display "Navi characters have changed", images of fusuma, fusuma images for wipe production, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 85 (A3-1) to FIG. (A6), FIG. 86). (A6-3-2) to the same figure (A6-3-4a), FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-1) to the same figure (ku 1-3-4), the meter effect and diagram shown in FIG. 101. 99 (shi 2-2-1) to the same figure (shi 2-2-3), FIG. 110 (a b 1) to (a b 2), FIG. 90 (6) to the same figure (8), FIG. 117 ( 9-2-1) etc.], the display may be used.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"When the display mode of the second icon does not change even when the change effect display is displayed [for example, Fig. 85 (3-2-1) to Fig. 85 (3-2-2), Fig. 93 ( 1-3-1) to the same figure (1-3-3b2, FIG. 110 (A4-2), FIG. 110 (A6-2))],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon which may be a notice display about a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed [for example, Fig. 88 (U 20-1), Fig. 97 (Db 15-1)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon which may be a notice display of a prefetching notice [for example, Fig. 93 (Ka11)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
There is a case where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 91, the example shown in FIG. 92 (Ci 1) to FIG.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“Providing an operation means [for example, a chance button 136 or the like] provided at a position where the player can operate,
The second icon is an icon in which the display mode is changed when the operation unit is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 92(1-1) to 92(7)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“The first icon is an icon that has a case where the display mode changes without being accompanied by other display effects [for example, FIG. 100 (s 3) to (s 4)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the first icon may change without being accompanied by other display effects" means that "the display mode of the first icon is notified by the first icon. May change.”

Also,
"The "icon related to the hold display" described above is "the icon of the concept that includes both the hold icon and the floating icon",
The hold icon is an icon representing an undigested hold [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24],
The variable icon is an icon [eg, a variable icon h0] that represents a completed hold,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"The "icon related to the hold display" above is the "hold icon",
The hold icon is an icon representing an undigested hold [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, the above-mentioned "icon regarding the hold display" is a "fluctuation icon", and the variation icon may be an icon [for example, a variation icon h0] representing the already-held digest. Good.

Also,
“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Direction means [for example, the decorative design display device 208, the first decorative design display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative design display devices 208L to 208N, the second display device 208S, a speaker 120, a game board lamp 442, a game underframe lamp 452, a thousand box box accessory 224H, etc.],
Operation means [for example, chance button 136, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operation means, etc.],
Equipped with
The production means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of production,
One type of production of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One type of production of the plurality of types of production is a second production,
When the operation means is operated during the first period [for example, the operation effective period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect [for example, "Summer vacation is still in effect in FIG. 118(A11)" is performed. "Response display of ~" may be executed.
In the auto button mode, if the first time [eg, the auto button function activation time (time from the time immediately before FIG. 118 (A6) to the time immediately before (A11) in FIG. 118)] has elapsed from the start of the first period, The first production may be executed,
When the operation means is operated during the second period in the non-auto button mode [for example, the operation effective period (the period of FIG. 118(A8-1) to FIG. 118(A14)]), the second operation is performed. [For example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode, a response display in which the continuous hit meter RHM in FIGS. 119(Aa5-5-6) to (Aa5-5-7) in FIG. 119] is executed. Sometimes,
In the auto button mode, the second effect is not executed even if a second time [for example, the auto button function activation time] has elapsed since the second period was started [for example, FIG. Of the continuous hammer meter RHM in FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-2) and FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-4)],
In the automatic button mode, when the operation of the operation means is performed before the second time elapses after the second period is started, the second effect is executed. And
It is configured such that the state of the operating means can be changed from one of the first state and the second state [for example, white lighting] to the other state [for example, special color (blue) lighting],
When the state of the operation means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the auto button mode [for example, FIG. 118 (A8-1) to FIG. A14) etc.],
A game table characterized by that. "
I explained.

According to the invention of this description, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the operation means. More specifically, since the state of the operating means may change during the second period in the auto button mode, the sight line is guided to the operating means to prompt the operation of the operating means. May be possible.

Here, the auto button mode is a mode in which an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means may be performed even if the operation means is not operated. The non-auto button mode is a state in which the auto button mode is not set.

The operation of the operation means may be accepted (not invalidated) during the auto button mode, may be accepted or may not be accepted, or may not be accepted at all. The case of accepting and the case of not accepting may be accepted in the effect of A and not accepted in the effect of B, or may be accepted in the period of A and not accepted in the period of B. Further, the operation of A operating means (for example, chance button 136) is accepted, but the operation of B operating means (for example, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operating means, etc.) is not accepted. Good.

Further, during the period of the second period, effect means other than the operation means (for example, display by the display means, movable means, light emitting means, etc.) may be configured to change.

Also,
“When the state of the operating means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the non-auto button mode [for example, in the case of FIG. 120 (Aa8-3)] ],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

By doing so, the state of the operating means may change during the period of the second period in the non-auto button mode, so that it is possible to induce the operating means to direct the line of sight and prompt the operation of the operating means. Sometimes you can. Further, regardless of whether or not the automatic button mode is set, the second effect is not executed unless the operation means is operated during the period of the second period, and the motivation to operate the operation means is improved. May be possible.

Also,
"In some cases, at least a part of the first period overlaps with at least a part of the second period [eg, immediately before FIG. 118 (A8-1) to FIG. 118 (A11), FIG. (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 120 (Aa8-2-1)],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Also,
“A period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period in the auto button mode overlap [for example, in FIG. 118 (A8-1) to FIG. In the period until immediately before, in FIG. 119 (Aa5-2-2) and FIG. 120 (Aa8-2-1)], when the operation unit is operated, the first effect and the second effect are changed. At least one of the effects is executed [for example, FIG. 120 (Aa8-2-3) to FIG. 120 (Aa8-2-4)],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Here, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. Good.

In addition, when the operation unit is operated before the first time elapses after the first period starts, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. However, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed.

For example, when two button displays are displayed in the auto button mode, one of the button displays has the function of the auto button mode, a response display is displayed according to the button operation, and the other button display is auto. The function of the button mode does not work, and there is a sense of discomfort that the user has to operate the button by himself, which may improve the interest of the game.

Also,
“When the operation means operates in a period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period in the non-auto button mode overlap, And at least one of the second effect is executed,
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Here, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. Good.

Also,
“If the operation means is not operated during the first period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect is not executed,
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

The first effect may be executed even if there is no operation before the first period ends.

Also,
“If the operation means is not operated during the second period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the second effect is not executed,
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

In addition, even if there is no operation until the second period ends, the second effect may be executed.
"The rendering means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N (all Included), second display device 208S, etc.],
The plurality of types of presentation is a plurality of types of display,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a response display,
The response display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated,
The first effect is a first response display of the response effects [for example, a response display of "Summer vacation is still ~" in FIG. 118(A11)),
The second effect is a second response display of the response effects [for example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of display is an operation display,
The operation display is a display related to the operation of the operation means,
When the first operation display [for example, the button effect image (button image 136a and remaining time display meter MT) shown in FIG. 118(A5-1) or the like] is displayed as the operation display, When the operation means is operated, the first response display may be displayed,
When a second operation display [for example, a button image 136a shown in FIG. 118(A8-1)] is displayed as the operation display, when the operation unit is operated, The second response may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

The operation display may be a display including an image [for example, a button image 136a] showing the appearance of the operation means, or a display for prompting the operation of the operation means [for example, the remaining time display meters MT, PUSH]. Character display, “press” character display, display of arrow indicating operation direction, and the like].

Also,
"At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect for a symbol variation display being executed [eg, a notice effect for a big hit in the symbol variation display (normal notice)],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Note that both of the first effect and the second effect may be the same, only the first effect may be the same, and only the second effect may be the same. May be.

Also,
"At least one of the first effect and the second effect, the effect of the symbol variation display that is being executed is terminated, and then the effect of the symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation that is started next It is a display, a symbol fluctuation display that is started next, or a notice effect (prefetching notice) about a big hit in the symbol fluctuation display that is started next next].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Note that both of the first effect and the second effect may be the same, only the first effect may be the same, and only the second effect may be the same. May be.

Also,
“The first period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as “first operation valid period”),
The second period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as “second operation valid period”).
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

A meter display showing the operation valid period of at least one of the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period [for example, display of the remaining period meter MT shown in FIG. 118(A5-1)] ] May be displayed during the auto button mode. The remaining period meter MT may be added to the button holding icon shown in FIG. 118 (A8-1).

Further, the meter display may be a display by a gauge (a bar display that increases or decreases), or may be a display that changes in the shade of the display color with the passage of time and is grayed out when the remaining period is exhausted. Good.

Alternatively, on the contrary, the meter indicating the operation valid period may be displayed only in the non-auto button mode and may not be displayed in the auto button mode. For example, the remaining period meter MT is omitted from the old conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 118 (A5-1) in the auto button mode, and conversely, the button shown in FIG. 120 (Aa8-3) in the non-auto button mode is displayed. The remaining period meter MT may be added to the hold icon.

Further, regardless of whether the meter is in the automatic button mode or not, when the meter indicating the operation valid period is displayed [for example, the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 118 to 120] is not displayed [for example, FIG. 118 to FIG. Button change icon or button hold icon shown in 120].

Also,
"The operation means is means for performing a performance operation [e.g., light emission, vibration, etc.,
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

In addition, the first state is a state in which the effect operation is not performed [for example, a light-off state, a white lighting state, a vibration stop state], and the second state is a state in which the effect operation is performed [for example, Lighting state, blue lighting state, vibration state].

Further, the first state may be a state in which the operating means is stopped.

Further, the effect producing means may be one in which an effect producing movable means [for example, a vibrator] is provided, and the producing operation may be an operation [for example, vibration] performed by the producing movable means. Good.

In addition, the second state is a state of being deformed (for example, protruding or dented), or a state in which the effect movable means is operating [for example, an advancing state, a retreating state, a vibrating state, a rotating state, a curing state. Etc.].

The operating means may be a means provided with a light emitting means.

The light emitting means is a means capable of executing a driving operation such as lighting, blinking, or turning off,
The first state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the driving operation in a first mode,
The second state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the drive operation in a second mode,
The first aspect and the second aspect may be different aspects.

The first aspect may be an off state, and the second aspect may be an on state.

The first mode may be a mode of lighting in a first color, and the second mode may be a mode of lighting in a second color.

The second aspect may be a blinking aspect.

Also,
"The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Also,
“The gaming table is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Direction means [for example, the decorative design display device 208, the first decorative design display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative design display devices 208L to 208N, the second display device 208S, a speaker 120, a game board lamp 442, a game underframe lamp 452, a thousand box box 224H, etc.].
The production means is a means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of production,
One type of production of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
The first effect refers to an effect selected by the player [for example, (b) in FIG. 73 (b) effect by each option of character selection, (c) effect by each option of holding frame selection, ( e) production by each option of hold display selection, (f) production by each option of background display selection, music output production of music title shown in FIG. 111]
One kind of effect of the plurality of kinds of effects is a second effect [for example, effect by the navigation character YM, music output effect, hold frame UI effect, hold effect, background effect,].
During execution of the first effect, when a third effect [for example, a change notice by the treasure box icon I1, a music change notice, a wipe effect, a background change notice, etc.] is executed, When changing to the second effect [For example, FIG. 109 (a a3-1) to the same figure (a a6-1), FIG. 112 (a11) to the same figure (a15-1), and FIG. 116 are shown. For example, when the player selects the background A in FIG. 90(1), the background change notices of FIG. 6(6) to FIG. 7(7) (wipe-in and wipe-out of the fusuma image for wipe production) ), changes to the background of the pre-reading notice displayed in FIG. 8(8) to FIG. 21(21), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Here, the third effect may be one kind of effect of the plurality of kinds of effects and may be an effect executed by the effecting means. Alternatively, the third effect may be an effect which is not executed by the effecting means (for example, display means) but is executed by another effecting means (for example, sound output means) different from the effecting means. ..

Further, the first effect may be a customizable effect that can be selected in a demonstration mode in which the symbol variation display is shifted until a certain time is started, or an effect that can be selected even during execution of the symbol variation display. Good. Further, the first effect may be a super reach effect or a round effect during a big hit game that can be selected by the player.

Further, the third effect may be, for example, an effect of notifying the remaining time until the simultaneous effect such as the island simultaneous effect is started.

Display means (for example, liquid crystal display device, dot matrix display device, 7-segment display device, organic EL display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, projector, etc.) , Light emitting means, sound output means, movable means and the like can be listed. In addition, a light guide plate that receives light from the side and emits light toward the front, and a POV display that can display a pattern by an afterimage effect can be listed as examples. As the rendering means, all of those listed above may be used. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied.

Further, the production means may be a device that produces a light emission production, and in this case, the light emission mode (color, lighting pattern, light emission display displayed by the light emission color, etc.) may be different depending on the mode. ..

Also,
"The rendering means is an image display means (for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). ), the second display device 208S, etc.],
The first effect refers to a first effect display [for example, effect display by each option of (b) character selection in (b) of FIG. 73 or (c) effect display by each option of holding frame selection, (e). Effect display by each option of the hold display selection, (f) effect display by each option of the background display selection, and the song name shown in FIG. 111 displayed in the song name display portion MN of FIG. 112].
The second effect is a second effect display [for example, effect display by the navigation character YM, effect display by the holding frame UI, song title display portion MN “Distance” in FIGS. 112 (A13) to (A14). 112 (B15-1), the song title display portion MN "Tokeke DREAM"].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the rendering means may be a plurality of image display means.

Also,
"The third effect refers to a third effect display [for example, a treasure box icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button holding icon, meter display MW and MG icons, a huge panda, a grandpa character "Navi character Conversation notice including character display of "change", fusuma image, fusuma image for wiping effect, character C11, etc. of the length of Fig. 112 (a11) to Fig. 112 (a15-1)].
The third effect display may be performed by the image display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where at least a part of the third effect display overlaps with at least a part of the first effect display. That is, there may be a case where only a part of the third effect display overlaps only a part of the first effect display, or only a part of the third effect display and the first effect display. May be overlapped with each other, all of the third effect display may be overlapped with only part of the first effect display, and all of the third effect display may be overlapped. There may be a case where all of the first effect displays overlap. Further, at least part of the third effect display may overlap with at least part of the first effect display from the front side (player side), or conversely, the first effect display. There may be a case where at least a part of the above is overlapped with at least a part of the third effect display from the front side (player side).

Further, the image display device displays a variable display of the decorative design, a stop display of the decorative design, an icon corresponding to the number of reserved balls (holding icon), and an icon related to the variable display of the running pattern (fluctuation icon). There are cases where The third effect display may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the variable display of the decorative design, or closer to the first effect display than the stop display of the decorative design. May be displayed on the screen, may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the hold icon, or may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the variable icon. It may be done.

Also,
"Even if the third effect is not executed, the first effect may be changed to the second effect [for example, FIG. 89 (e 1) to FIG. 89 (e 3-1), FIG. 92(ku2-1) to FIG. 92(ku7)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where the player is provided with an operation unit provided at a position where the player can operate, and the first effect may be changed to the second effect when the operation unit is operated. ..

Further, the change from the first effect to the second effect may be a change in the effect mode, the first effect corresponds to the effect mode set by the player, and the effect mode is changed. Even if the change is made in response to the operation of the operation means, for example, the change is made in response to the start of execution of the prefetching notice (rush into the prefetching mode (corresponding to the second effect display)). Good.

Also,
“When the first effect is changed to the second effect due to the execution of the third effect [for example, in the case of FIG. 109 (a a4-1) to FIG. 109 (a a6-1)] ], the third effect is not executed and the first effect is changed to the second effect [for example, in FIG. 89 (e 2) to the same figure (e 4-1)). In the end, it is easier to shift to a state that is advantageous to the player [for example, a big hit game state, a big hit game state with a large number of balls, a probability variation state, an electric support state],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the third effect is executed, it may be configured to always shift to a state advantageous to the player. Alternatively, on the contrary, even if the third effect is executed, it may not be possible to shift to a state advantageous to the player.
Further, as the advantageous state, if the symbol variable display is being displayed, a big hit game state can be cited. Further, it may be in a super reach state or a pseudo continuous production state. On the other hand, as the advantageous state, if the big hit game is being executed, the probability change state or the electric support state after the end of the big hit game can be mentioned. Further, it may be in a round promotion state in which the number of rounds apparently increases.

Also,
“Providing an operation means [for example, a chance button 136 or the like] provided at a position where the player can operate,
There is a case where the first effect is selected when the operation means is operated [for example, a case of FIG. 76(37) to FIG. 76(50)].
When the operation means is operated, the third effect may be executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"While the third effect is executed during execution of the first effect, the first effect is not changed to the second effect [for example, FIG. 85 (3-2-1)- The same figure (3-2-2), FIG. 93 (K 1-3-1) to FIG. 93 (K 1-3-3b2), FIG. 110 (A4-2), and FIG. 110 (Aa6-2). Case]
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

For example, when the production means is a display means, the first production display may not be changed to the second production display even if the third production is executed. When the means is a light emitting means, there is a case where the first light emitting effect is not changed to the second light emitting effect even if the third effect is executed, and the effect means outputs a sound. In the case of a means, even if the third effect is executed, it may not be changed from the first sound output effect to the second sound output effect, and the effect means is a movable means. In some cases, even if the third effect is executed, the first action effect may not be changed to the second action effect.

On the contrary, when the third effect is executed during the execution of the first effect, the first effect may be changed to the second effect without fail.

Also,
"The second effect is one of the effects selectable by the player,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

On the contrary, the second effect may be an effect that cannot be selected by the player.

Also,
“A sound output unit capable of outputting music [for example, a speaker 120] is provided,
The rendering means is a display means (for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, Second display device 208S, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a music display [for example, the music title display portion MN in FIG. 112 (a15-1), the figure (b16) to the figure (b18), etc.],
The music display is a display [for example, display of a song name or lyrics] about the music output by the sound output means,
The first effect is a first music display [for example, "Mega Giga Summer"],
The second effect is a second music display [for example, "Todoroke DREAM"],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“The first effect is an effect in which a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM] is displayed in a third display mode [for example, a default display mode],
The second effect is an effect in which the second icon is displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a kimono of blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, iridescent]. Is
The second icon is an icon having a case where it is displayed across consecutive symbol variable displays [for example, in the case of FIG. 109 (a1) to (a2)].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "crossing over" is to interpose the period (variation stop period) of stop display of symbols. Further, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed while the variable display of symbols is being displayed, or may be an icon that disappears once in the middle. Also, the icon may be continuously displayed during the stop display of the symbol, may be an icon that disappears once in the middle, or an icon that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be

Also,
"The rendering means is a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. , Second display device 208S, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One type of icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
One type of icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon,
One type of icon among the plurality of types of icons is a third icon,
The first icon is an icon (hereinafter, referred to as “fluctuation icon”) related to the symbol variation display being executed [for example, variation icon h0],
The second icon is an icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM] that may be displayed across successive symbol variable displays,
The third icon is an icon (hereinafter, referred to as “holding icon”) corresponding to the number of holding balls (for example, holding icon h11),
The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The variable icon is displayed in an icon display area [for example, a variable icon display area CIS in a hold frame UI having a hold icon display area HIS, a change icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS] in the display means. Sometimes it is an icon,
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the effect icon display area DIS of the holding frame UI],
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the hold icon display area HIS of the hold frame UI],
The first effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a first mode [for example, "holding frame D"],
The second effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a second mode [for example, "holding frame R"],
The first aspect and the second aspect are different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the icon display area may be an area in which an area icon is displayed, an area in which a hold frame is displayed, or an area in which a user interface (UI) is displayed. May be The area icon may be a base icon, a stage icon, a frame icon, or the like. Further, the area icon may be composed of a plurality of icons. The icon display area may be an area including a hold icon display area, a variable icon display area, and a second icon (for example, a navigation character icon) display area.

Further, the third effect may be an effect that switches the mode of the icon display area. Further, the third effect may be an effect in which a display overlapping the front side is displayed in the icon display area.

Also,
"One type of production of the plurality of types of production is a fourth production,
The fourth effect is a notice effect [for example, a telop display trp shown in FIG. 104] that the third effect is executed before the third effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
[The third effect is a notice effect about a big hit in a pattern variation display being executed [eg, a notice of a normal notice by the color of the treasure box icon, a big hit confirmation (or a big hit rich) notice by the bancho character C11]. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"The third effect is an effect of a pre-reading notice [for example, an effect of a pre-reading notice in the color of the treasure box icon],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“The gaming table is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

It should be noted that what is described as a variable display of a decorative pattern above may be a variable display of a design (more specifically, a special drawing), and a description that is displayed as a stop display of a decorative pattern means that the design (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

Further, in the above, "may be" may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", etc. It may be replaced with "always do ○○".

Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of each of the embodiments, the examples, the modified examples, the various examples, and the supplementary notes described above, the constituent requirements of the other embodiments, the examples, and the It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, additional notes, and the like. That is, as long as there is no factor that hinders application, constituent elements included only in the description of the embodiment, the example, the modification, the various examples, the supplementary notes, etc. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, and supplementary notes, it is established as one cohesive technical idea.

Next, an example of effects that can be applied to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 described above will be described.

In the example of the effect described below, a display means (for example, any one or two or all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 or the like). , A notice icon, a notice display, a mini game A icon, a mini game B icon, a hold icon, a change icon, and an icon change notice display are displayed. First, these will be described in order.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing various notice icons and various notice displays.

In FIG. 129(a), five types of notice icons are shown. Of these five types of notice icons, four types are box-shaped icons and the remaining one type is an operation means type (button type) icon.

There are four types of box-shaped icons, namely, a box icon, a red box icon, a gold box icon, and a rainbow box icon having different colors, and two types of modes (mode a and mode d) are prepared for each. Mode a is a display mode in which the box is closed, and mode d is a display mode in which the box is open.

In the above description and the following description, the type and display mode may be different depending on the color and the display method. For example, the color of the first type and the first display mode is white, and the color of the second type and the second display mode is also white, but the display method of the second type and the second display mode blinks (white and Alternate display with another color (for example, background color or black). The first type and the first display mode correspond to the default type and display mode. The color of the third type and the third display mode is blue, the color of the fourth type and the fourth display mode is green, the color of the fifth type and the fifth display mode is red, and the sixth type and the fifth display mode. The color of the six display modes is gold, and the color of the seventh type and the seventh display mode is rainbow. When various icons and various displays may be prepared in first to seventh types and display modes, and when the light emitting means such as various LEDs can emit light in the first to seventh display modes. There is. Of the first to seventh types and display modes, the type and display mode having a larger number (the seventh number is the largest) may or may not be the display mode advantageous to the player. For example, the larger the number or the display mode, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit may be, or it may indicate that a certain effect is more likely to be started. In the following description, the change from the nth display mode to the (n+1)th display mode may be referred to as one step up or one step up. In addition, changing from the nth display mode to the (n+m)th display mode may be referred to as raising or promoting the display mode by m steps. Further, a display mode in which the number of n is relatively large may be referred to as an upper display mode, and a display mode in which the number of n is relatively small may be referred to as a lower display mode. It should be noted that both n and m are natural numbers of 1 or more (the same applies in the following description).

Although there is only one type of button type icon (button icon), four types of modes (mode a, mode b, mode c, mode d) are prepared. Aspect a is a display aspect including only button images simulating the chance button 136 shown in FIGS. Modes b and c are display modes in which a remaining time display meter indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is added below the button image. The mode a is a mode in which there is no remaining time display meter in the modes b and c, and therefore, even if the chance button 136 is operated, it is invalid. In mode b, the remaining time display meter is full display (display in which the valid operation period is all remaining), and in mode c, the remaining time display meter is 0 display (display in which no valid operation period remains). ). That is, the mode b is a mode before starting the time counting (countdown) of the operation valid period or immediately after starting the time counting. The mode c is a mode at the time when the operation valid period has passed without operating the chance button 136 or after the time has passed. When the clocking of the operation valid period is started, the meter of the third display mode starts to decrease with the passage of time. Aspect d is a display aspect of an effect image (here, a smoke image) that hides the button image and the operation valid period display. Note that the button icon may have a plurality of types of icons of different types, like the box-shaped icon. For example, there may be default button icons, red button icons, gold button icons, and rainbow button icons in different colors.

In addition, the types of the notice icon and the button icon are not limited to only colors, and there may be icons of different sizes and shapes, and any two or more of a plurality of elements such as the size, shape, and color of the icon. May be combined. For example, No. In addition to the one box icon, there may be different types of icons such as a treasure box icon and a thousand box icon imitating the thousand box effect 224H shown in FIG. Further, the icon size may be increased as the reliability increases (for example, the gold box icon is larger than the red box icon). Also, the shape of the box may differ between the red box icon and the gold box icon box.

The notice icon may be displayed by changing the display position from the display position where the display is first started. That is, there is a case where the display moves from the first position to the second position and is continuously displayed (stock) at the second position. The second position is the stock display position. The display may be continued (stock) without changing the display position. Aspect a is the aspect at the start of stock, but also the aspect at the start of display. Mode d is a mode in which the notice icon is used. That is, when the notice icon shown in FIG. 129(a) is used in the presentation, the display mode changes to mode d. The box-shaped icon is used at a predetermined timing and changes to the mode d. The button icon is used when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, and changes to the mode d. However, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the button icon always changes from the form c to the form d after the operation valid period elapses. Good. Further, when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the button icon does not have to change to the mode d. In that case, the button icon may be deleted, may continue to be displayed as it is in the mode a, or the display in which only the remaining time display meter of the mode b or the mode c is hidden (the peripheral edge portion is the mode a (A different display from) may be displayed, and it may be configured such that a notice display described later is not displayed although it changes to the mode d. When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the mode c may be displayed once and then the mode d may be displayed.

The appearance rate and the reliability are different for each type of notice icon. The appearance rate is easily displayed in the order of A, B, C, and D. In other words, it means that A is most likely to be displayed (displayed frequently). Although not shown in FIG. 129(a), E indicates that it is most difficult to be displayed (display frequency is low). The reliability represents the reliability of the big hit, and is the reliability of the big hit in the pattern variation display where the icon is used (reliability of the normal notice), or the reliability of the big hit in the pattern variation display of the prefetch target (prediction notice Reliability). This reliability is likely to be a big hit in the order of accuracy, A, B, C, D, E, F. That is, the winning probability is the one that is most likely to be a big hit (always a big hit = reliability is 100%), and the F is the most difficult to hit. The reliability represented by the first type or the first display mode described above is F, the reliability represented by the second type or the second display mode is E, and the reliability represented by the third type or the third display mode is D. The reliability represented by the fourth type and the fourth display mode is C, the reliability represented by the fifth type and the fifth display mode is B, and the reliability represented by the sixth type and the sixth display mode is It becomes A, and the reliability represented by the seventh type and the seventh display mode is accurate. The reliability F may be 0% or higher than 0%. If the reliability F is 0%, it cannot be said that a big hit is announced, but in this specification, a case where the reliability F is 0% may be referred to as a notice.

In FIG. 129(b), 31 types of notice icons are shown. The description of these 31 types of notice icons is as described in the outline of the effect contents in the figure. However, in this description, “always performed” means that in the modified example, “may not be performed”. It may be." In addition, descriptions such as "may be" and "may be" can be read as "must be" in the modified example.

In addition, the "VS swordsman reach" described in "Outline of production contents" is the swordsman reach shown in FIG. 15, FIG. 70, FIG. 85, etc., and the "all-members gathering reach" is shown in FIG. 91 (or 3-5). It is a super reach (not shown) that develops from (3). In addition, the symbol variation display in which the super reach is performed may be more likely to be a big hit in the case where the “all-members reach” is performed than in the case where the “VS swordsman reach” is performed. The "thousand box (character)" becomes the thousand-box box 224H shown in FIG. 67 and the like, and the "family crest (character)" becomes the family crest character 224E shown in FIG. 67 and the like.

Further, the 31 types of notice icons shown in FIG. 129(b) may also function as a notice display. The notice display is a display that is started when the notice icon is used. For example, the box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 129(a) may change to the mode d and a notice display may appear from the inside. In this case, it is not possible to know what kind of notice display will appear until the box-shaped icon changes to the mode d. In other words, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display is not set in advance to a one-to-one relationship or a many-to-one relationship, but is a one-to-many or many-to-many relationship. However, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display may be predetermined to be a one-to-one relationship or a many-to-one relationship. For example, if the red box advance notice icon and the red change advance notice display (No. 7) are set in advance in a one-to-one relationship, and the red box advance notice icon is displayed, then the red box advance notice must be displayed. It may be decided that the icon will change to the mode d and the red notice display will appear from the inside, or the case where the red box notice icon changes to the mode d and that of the mode a without change. It may disappear as it is, and when the mode d is changed, the red notice display may appear. In addition, as a box-shaped icon that is a notice icon, a transparent box-shaped icon that allows you to see the contents is prepared, and you can see that this transparent box-shaped icon contains one or more types of notice displays. May be. If only one type of notice display is included, the player can know in advance the type of notice display that appears when the mode d changes, but if there are multiple types of notice display, know I can't. When a plurality of types of notice displays are included, the roulette may be displayed in a transparent box. In addition, there is a possibility that "a notice icon may be displayed when it is used" due to "a notice icon in a form in which it is not known what kind of notice display will appear" such as a box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 129(a). You may give a notice of "A notice display". For example, if the box's advance notice icon is displaying (superior) in a balloon or the like, the advance notice of the "super hot" may always be displayed when the box's advance notice icon is used, It may or may not be displayed. In addition, if the box's advance notice icon displays "Geki Atsu" and "?" in the balloon or roulette display (preliminary notice), if the box's advance notice icon is used, "Geki Atsu" and "?" Either one of them may be necessarily displayed, or both may not be displayed, and a different notice display than the displayed one may be displayed. As described above, the plurality of options may be announced in advance by the notice icon (and/or a notice different from the notice icon), and one or a plurality of notice displays may be displayed.

If the icon shown in FIG. 129(b) is a notice icon, it means that the relation between the notice icon and the notice display is predetermined to be one-to-one, and if the notice icon changes to the mode d, The notice icon functions as a notice display. The difference between the notice icon and the notice display is that the notice icon corresponds to the notice of a certain notice, and the notice display corresponds to the notice. That is, the notice icon corresponds to the notice of the notice display.

In the description of the effect contents in FIG. 129(b), "in the displayed change" means that the icon is functioning as a notice display, and the icon functions as a notice icon. If it is, read it as "In the fluctuation that the notice icon was used." That is, the notice display is used in the displayed symbol variation display, while the notice icon may be carried over to the symbol variation display started after the displayed symbol variation display.

In FIG. 129(b), mode A and mode B are shown. However, when functioning as a notice display, only mode A is used, and when functioning as a notice icon, mode A is stocked. The state B is a state in which the notice icon is used, and the mode B is a mode in which a circle mark is added to the mode A. Even if the notice icon is used once, it may not disappear and can be used again. In this case, after changing from the mode A to the mode B, the mode returns to the mode A again. However, during the period displayed in the mode B, the notice icon cannot be used, and after returning to the mode A, it can be used. Become. Further, although there are notice icons (No. 1, 27 to 31) for which aspect B is not prepared, these notice icons are icons that disappear when used.

The 31 types of notice icons or notice displays shown in FIG. 129(b) include different color icons and different color displays, and the reliability of the jackpot varies depending on the displayed color as described in the above display mode. That is, the reliability of the big hit is higher in the “red change” (No. 8) of the red color (fifth display mode) than in the “change” (No. 7) of the default color represented by “de”. ..

Although the appearance rate is also shown in FIG. 129(b), this appearance rate is the same as the appearance rate described in FIG. 129(a). In addition, No. The appearance rate of 16 "High-precision notice in XX" varies depending on the contents of XX. For example, the appearance rate of “preliminary notice of change in pending icon high probability” or “preliminary notice of icon stock high accuracy confirmation” is B. The "previous notice icon stock high-probability notice" may be displayed only during execution of the notice icon stock effect, or may be displayed before the notice icon stock effect is started. In addition, the appearance rate of the “super hot production high-precision middle notice”, “timer notice high-precision middle notice”, and “feature action high-precision middle notice” becomes C. However, the appearance rate may be the same or different in the contents of ○○. In this "XX high-probability notice", XX is more likely to be executed when it is displayed, but XX may be executed if it is displayed.

In addition, No. 2 “Chance” icon or No. If the "red chance" icon of 3 is functioning as a notice display, the reach effect may not occur even if another "notice" is announced as a "chance". When the "chance" is announced by the icon, the normal reach effect may be generated without fail. In addition, other notice productions (for example, notice productions that appear frequently such as conversation notices), notice productions that appear more frequently than the notices given by the notice display, and notice productions that are displayed when the symbol variation display is a shortened variation. "Chance" or "Red Chance" icon rather than "Chance" (including cases of inconclusive notice such as "Chance?" or "Chance!?") When the announcement is made, the reach effect (which may be the normal reach effect or the super reach effect may be generated) is more likely to occur, or in both cases. There is no difference and the occurrence probabilities may be the same.

The advance notice icon described with reference to FIG. 129 is an icon that may be displayed as a result of the effect of the mini game. A mini game is a type of presentation display, and two types of mini games are prepared. Two types of mini-games are available: a mini-game (Mini-game A) to announce Yoshimune's treasure and a mini-game (Mini-game B) to announce Janken battle. A dedicated icon is used in each mini game. The mini game is automatically started if the starting conditions are set, and the result of the mini game is determined according to the result of the judgment or the result of the look-ahead.

FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a mini game icon.

In FIG. 130(a), four types of mini game A icons are shown. Each of these four types of mini game A icons includes an image of a box icon (box image) shown in FIG. 129(a). The “box” icon includes a white box image in the first display mode, that is, a white box notice icon. The “red box” icon includes a red box image in the fifth display mode, that is, a red box notice icon. The "gold box" icon includes a gold box image in the sixth display mode, that is, a notice icon of the gold box. The "rainbow box" icon includes a rainbow-colored box image in the seventh display mode, that is, a rainbow box notice icon. Of these four types of icons, the remaining three types of icons except the “rainbow box” icon have four modes (modes a to d), and the “rainbow box” icon has these four modes. Only two of the two aspects (aspect c, aspect d) are prepared. Modes a to c are modes in which the respective notice icons are placed on the carpet and the meter display of hit points (HP) is displayed thereon. In the mini game A, a character of Yoshimune attacks the carpet, and if the attack is effective, the hit points (HP) decrease, and when the HP becomes 0, a treasure (preliminary icon) can be acquired. In the meter display of mode a, the gauge of the third display mode (blue) is in a full state, and HP is 100 points. In the meter display of mode b, the gauge of the fourth display mode (green) is in a half state, and HP is 50 points. In the meter display of mode c, the gauge of the fifth display mode (red) is slightly displayed, and HP is 10 points. The mode d is a mode that is displayed after the HP becomes 0, and the carpet display disappears, the meter display also disappears, each notice icon is displayed, and the notice icon is acquired under the notice icon. This is a mode in which the characters “Get!!” are displayed.

In the mini game A, four types of icons for the mini game A are started to be displayed in any mode. That is, when the display is started in the mode a, the remaining HP at the display start (at the time of appearance) is 100/100, and when the display is started in the mode b, the remaining HP at the start of the display is 50. Thus, when the display is started in the mode c, the remaining HP at the start of display is 10/100. 130(a) shows the appearance rate for each aspect, the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 129(a). The icon for mini game A in the rainbow box has only a few HP left from the start of display, and you can always get the treasure (preliminary icon), but for other icons, you must acquire the treasure (preliminary icon). In some cases, you can, and in others, you cannot. In addition, the icon for the mini game A of the rainbow box may be able to acquire the notice icon during the variable display of the display that has been started, or in the variable display that is started next to the variable display. In some cases, the notice icon may be acquired. However, the notice icon may be acquired without fail during the variable display of the symbols which is started to be displayed, or may not be acquired unless the variable display is started next.

FIG. 130B shows the relationship between the number of remaining HP points at the start of the variable display of symbols and the probability of acquisition of the notice icon. The icon for the mini game A may be displayed across the continuous symbol variable display. That is, there is a case where the symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display which has been started is carried over and displayed. The meter display in the mode when the display of the mini game A icon is started is decreased by 10 points each time an effective attack on the carpet is determined. Therefore, the icon for the mini game A in the rainbow box can acquire the notice icon once a valid attack is determined.

If the number of remaining HP points is 60 points or more at the time of disclosure of the symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display in which the display of the icon for the mini game A is started, the meter display is in the third display mode (blue). ), there is a 10% probability that the notice icon can be obtained during the started symbol fluctuation display. If the number of remaining HP points is 30 points or more and 50 points or less at the start of the symbol variation display, the meter display is displayed in the fourth display mode (green), and the notice icon is acquired during the started symbol variation display. The probability of being able to do is 50%. When the number of remaining HP points is 10 points or 20 points at the start of the symbol variation display, the meter display is displayed in the fifth display mode (red), and the notice icon is acquired during the started symbol variation display. The probability of being able to do is 100%.

In FIG. 130(c), two types of opponent icons for mini game B are shown. One of the two types of opponent icons for the mini game B is a swordsman character icon, and the other type of icon is a panda character icon. The appearance rate of the swordsman character icon is A, and the appearance rate of the panda character icon is B. The alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 129(a). Therefore, the swordsman character icon is more likely to appear than the panda character icon. In the Janken Showdown mini-game B, the icon of a certain character and the icons of these opponents make a rock-paper-scissors showdown, and when a certain character wins (when the opponent loses), a notice icon is displayed. If a certain character is defeated (when the opponent wins), on the contrary, the notice icon cannot be obtained.

In addition, modes a to f are prepared for each character icon of the opponent. The mode a is a mode before the start of the mini game, or a mode of waiting after the mini game is started. Aspect b is an aspect when a goo is played in a rock-paper-scissors confrontation, an aspect c is an aspect when a choki is issued, and an aspect d is an aspect when a par is issued. The mode e is a mode when the opponent character is defeated in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation (when a certain character wins), and the mode f is, on the contrary, when the opponent character wins the rock-paper-scissors confrontation ( When a certain character is defeated).

In FIG. 130(d), the degree of expectation of the notice icon in the mini game B is shown. Although a certain character is used in the above, in the mini game B, a character of the opponent, a character of a villager, a character of a grandfather, and a character of Yoshimune are used as a character (a character corresponding to the above-mentioned certain character) to compete with rock-paper-scissors. A character is prepared. Therefore, there are six battle cards as shown in FIG. 130(d), and the expectation of each is determined. A indicates that the degree of expectation of acquisition is 100%, B indicates that it is 80%, C indicates that it is 60%, D indicates that it is 40%, and E indicates 20%. F represents 10%, and G represents greater than 0% and less than 1%. The panda character icon is less likely to appear as an opponent character than the swordsman character icon, but the notice icon is more likely to be acquired than the swordsman character icon. Further, in the case of a match between Yoshimune and Panda, regardless of the type of the notice icon, the notice icon can be acquired with a probability of 100%. The notice icon of the rainbow box is selected only in the case of a big hit. The "-" display in FIG. 130(d) indicates that the notice icon of the rainbow box does not appear (acquisition expectation level 0%).

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a hold icon and a change icon.

The hold icon is an icon relating to the undigested symbol variation display, the variation icon is an icon relating to the digested symbol variation display, and both icons are icons relating to the symbol variation display. Here, "variation of XX hold" means "symbol variation display corresponding to XX hold". FIG. 131(a) shows each mode for each type of the hold icon and the change icon. ing. The description of each type of icon is as described in the remarks in the figure, but no. No. 1 is the default mode and No. 2 to No. 7 is a notice mode. That is, if it is the hold icon, it is in the form of advance notice, and if it is the variable icon, it is in the form of normal notice. The pre-reading notice hold icon may be displayed from the start of display (at the time of starting winning), may be displayed by changing at the start of symbol variation, or by changing depending on the effect during symbol variation display. It may be displayed. The variable icon in the normal notice mode may be displayed from the start of display (timing corresponding to the start of the symbol variation), or may be displayed by changing according to the effect during the symbol variation display.

The display form of the variable icon is determined according to the result of the hit/miss judgment, but even if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a loss, the display is set to a mode other than the default display mode. Performance may be executed. In addition, among the plurality of displayed hold icons, which display mode of which hold icon is to be displayed is determined according to the result of pre-reading, but when the result of pre-reading is lost. Even if there is, an effect that changes the display mode to a mode other than the default display mode may be executed. Also, the display mode may change for a plurality of hold icons.

No. 8 and No. Reference numeral 9 denotes an icon that may be displayed at or before the start of the button effect (for example, the button notice effect) or during the button effect. Here, No. The function (1) and the function (2) described in the remarks of “Button A” in 8 will be supplemented. When the button A icon has the function (1), the display mode of the button A icon is displayed until the pattern variation display corresponding to the button A icon is started even if the chance button 136 is operated. Is configured not to change from blue to rainbow, and the operation valid period is started after (or immediately after or at the same time) the symbol variable display corresponding to the button A icon is started, and the operation valid period ends. If the chance button 136 is operated before the operation is performed or the operation valid period ends, the display mode of the button A icon is changed to any of blue to rainbow. Note that the display mode of the button A icon may be configured not to change when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period. When the button A icon has the function of (2), before the symbol variable display corresponding to the button A icon is started after the button A icon is displayed (that is, before the symbol variable display corresponding to the button A icon is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated by the time of (variation display of symbols), the display mode of the button A icon is configured to change from blue to rainbow. Here, when the button A icon has the function (2), the display mode of the button A icon does not change even if the chance button 136 is operated while the symbol is stopped. It may not change, and may be configured to change. Further, when the button A icon has the function (2), the operation valid period may be set even during the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the button A icon. That is, it may include the same function as the function (1). , No. Regarding the function (1) and the function (2) described in the remarks of “Button B” of No. 9, the No. This is the same as the function (1) and the function (2) described in the remarks for “Button A” in 8.

No. Reference numeral 10 denotes an icon that may be displayed at or before the start of the timer effect (for example, the timer notice effect) or during the timer notice effect.

No. Numeral 11 indicates the time before or before the start of the promotion effect of the target hold in FIGS. 168 (Ec1) to (Ec8) and FIG. 168 (Ec5-2-1) to (Ec5-2-5) described later, or It is an icon that may be displayed during the promotion production.

No. 12 is displayed at the time of or before the start of the effect of the roulette hold (N option hold) in FIG. 163 (A1-2-1) to (A1-2-12) described later, or during the effect. There is an icon. In the roulette icon of this example, the roulette icon itself changes to stop roulette, but the roulette icon itself may change to stop roulette. The icon may change and the icon different from the roulette icon may change.

No. 13 is an icon that may be displayed at or before the start of the meter effect, or during the meter effect, and the meter decreases until the hold icon is consumed and the variable icon disappears. If the production is performed and the meter display becomes 0, it is successful and some change or something occurs. That is, the meter display is of a decreasing type. If the meter display does not finally reach 0, both the Echigoya image and the HP meter image are displayed as they are, and the HP meter image shows the final remaining HP. ing. Further, in the case of the hold icon, an effect of reducing the meter display may be performed even in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon, and the meter display may be 0. Further, in the case of the hold icon, an effect that the meter is reduced may be performed in one or a plurality of symbol variation displays, and a variation in which the meter is reduced and a variation which is not performed may be performed. Even when displayed as a hold icon, the effect of actually reducing the meter may be performed only in the variable display of symbols corresponding to the hold icon. Also, in the above description, the meter display is of the decreasing type, but may be of the increasing type. If the type is increasing, it is successful if the meter display is full within the valid period.

No. 14-No. Reference numeral 16 denotes an icon displayed in the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice of the mini game A described with reference to FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b). That is, it is an icon that may be displayed at or before the start of the mini game A, or during the mini game A. Use this icon to attack a carpet with a notice icon. Aspect a is a standby pose, aspect b is a ready pose, and aspect c is a pose in which an arrow is fired. No. 17-No. Reference numeral 19 denotes a certain icon displayed in the rock-paper-scissors competition announcement of the mini game B described using FIG. 130(c) and FIG. 130(d) (a character that confronts the character icon of the opponent shown in FIG. 130(c)). Icon). That is, it is an icon that may be displayed at or before the start of the mini game B, or during the mini game B. The mode a is a mode before the start of the mini game, or a mode of waiting after the mini game is started. Aspect b is an aspect when a goo is played in a rock-paper-scissors confrontation, an aspect c is an aspect when a choki is issued, and an aspect d is an aspect when a par is issued. The mode e is a mode when the player is defeated in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation (when the opponent character wins), and the mode f is, on the contrary, when the player is defeated in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation (when the opponent character is defeated). It is a mode of. In addition, No. 14-No. The icon 19 corresponds to a white blinking icon.

No. 1 shown in FIG. Nos. 14 to 16 are icons dedicated to the mini game A. Since 17 to No. 19 are the icons dedicated to the mini game B, if these dedicated icons appear, the player knows that the mini game is started, and these dedicated icons are the notices of the mini game. Also works as.

Although the appearance rate and the reliability are also shown in FIG. 131(a), the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 129(a), The symbol representing the reliability here is also the same as the symbol representing the reliability described in FIG. 129(a).

In addition to the types shown in FIG. 131(a), there are also types of hold icons and variable icons.

131(b) shows an icon change notice display. The icon change notice display is a display used for an effect of changing the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. That is, it is a display that appears in a change animation that changes the form of the icon. Further, the display is also used for an effect in which an attempt to change the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon fails. That is, it is a display that appears in a non-changing animation in which the change of the icon form fails and the icon form does not change. The description of the icon change notice display of each type is as described in the remarks in the figure.

No. 1-No. Aspect a in each display of 16 is a manner at the time of starting the change animation (a manner at the time of starting the display of the icon change notice display and a default manner), and a manner b is a manner at the time of changing the icon. In addition, No. 11-No. The mode c in each display of 15 is a mode when the mode change of the icon is successful, and is a mode that may be displayed by a change animation. On the other hand, No. 11-No. The mode d in each display of 15 is a mode when the mode change of the icon has failed, and is a mode that may be displayed in a non-changing animation. No. The display of 17 is a display of the huge panda displayed in FIG. 99 (shown 2-2-1) to FIG. 99 (shown 2-2-3), and the aspect does not change from the appearance time to the change time.

The appearance rate of each type of display is shown in FIG. 131(b), but the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 129(a). Also, in FIG. 131(b), the types of icons that change the form are also described. That is, No. 1-No. Each display of 10 may change the mode of the variable icon or may change the mode of the hold icon. On the other hand, No. 11-No. Each display of No. 16 changes only the mode of the variable icon, and No. The display of 17 pandas changes only the mode of the hold icon. In addition, No. 11-No. Each display of 16 may be changed so that only the mode of the hold icon is changed, or the mode of the variable icon may be changed or the mode of the hold icon may be changed. Good. In addition, No. The display of the panda 17 may be changed so that only the mode of the variable icon is changed, or the mode of the hold icon may be changed, or the mode of the variable icon may be changed. May be.

In addition, No. 1-No. Each display of the balloon system of No. 3 and No. 3 4 to No. 6 bomber system displays and No. 6 7-No. Each display of 10 flying boats, and No. 10 12-No. Each of the 15 Yoshimune system displays has a different color. The color difference here is the same in some cases, depending on the displayed color, the success probability of the icon aspect change, that is, the probability when there is no icon aspect change and the probability when there is (icon change rate) are the same. In some cases. Further, even when the mode of the icon is changed, the number of icons whose mode is changed may be different depending on the displayed color. In FIG. 131(b), the "icon change ratio" is shown as the success probability of the change of the aspect of the icon, and the "probability of the number of changing icons" is also shown as the probability of the number of icons whose aspect is changed. For example, No. 4 to No. In each of the 6 bomber system displays, the default color display (No. 4) represented by “de” is more likely than the other color displays (No. 5, 6) to have a higher probability of success in changing the aspect of the icon. Is high. However, in the default color bomber display (No. 4), the display mode of the icon can be raised only by one step. That is, the nth display mode is changed to the (n+1)th display mode. For example, when changing the mode of the hold icon in the white blinking mode (second display mode), it is changed to the blue mode (third display mode), and the hold icon in the blue mode (third display mode) is changed. When changing the mode, the mode is changed to the green mode (fourth display mode). However, only when changing the mode of the hold icon of the default mode (first display mode), the mode is changed to the blue mode (third display mode). On the other hand, the red (fifth display mode) bomber display (No. 5 “red bomber”) changes the mode regardless of the mode of the hold icon when the bomber display is started. , And is always changed to the same display mode (fifth display mode) as itself. That is, the n-th display mode is always changed to the fifth display mode. For example, when the default icon (first display mode) or the blue icon (third display mode) is used, the red mode (fifth display) is used to change the mode. Be sure to change the mode). In addition, when the bomber display in gold (6th display mode) (No. 6 “gold bomber”) is changed regardless of the mode of the hold icon when the bomber display is started, , And is always changed to the same display mode (sixth display mode) as itself. That is, the n-th display mode is always changed to the sixth display mode. For example, if the default icon (first display mode) or the green mode (fourth display mode) is used for changing the mode, a gold mode (sixth mode) Be sure to change the mode). Further, the “red bomber” display (No. 5) has a higher probability of success in changing the aspect of the icon than the “gold bomber” display (No. 6). That is, No. 4 to No. In the display of the bomber system of 6, the higher the display mode, the lower the success probability of changing the mode of the icon, but it is easier to make a big hit with the variable display of symbols corresponding to the changed icon. In addition, No. 1-No. The same applies to the display of the balloon system of 3. However, in the display of the bomber system, in the display of the default color (No. 4), the success probability of the change of the icon form is 100%, and if the bomber of the default color is displayed, the form of the icon will always change To do. Moreover, the default color bomber changes the mode of the two icons with a probability of 5% if two or more icons are displayed at the start of the pattern variation display in which the default color bomber is displayed. For example, the form of the variable icon and the form of one hold icon may change, or the form of the two hold icons may change. In addition, when the number of icons becomes two after the variation display of the default color bomber is started, the default color bomber does not change the two icons, but the default color bomber If the second icon is displayed between the start of the variable design display and the display of the bomber in the default color, the two displayed icons may change. It may be. About this note, No. 7-No. Display and/or No. 10 of the flying boat system. It is also applicable to the display of 17 "pandas". On the other hand, in the balloon system display, in the display of the default color (No. 1), the success probability of the icon mode change is 30%, and when the icon mode changes, the mode is limited to one icon. Change.

In addition, No. 7-No. In each display of the 10 flying boats, regardless of the display mode (display color), the success probability of changing the mode of the icon is 100%, and if the flying boat is displayed regardless of the color, the mode of the icon is Be sure to change. Moreover, the default-colored flying boat (No. 7) has a 50% probability that two or more icons are displayed at the start of the pattern variation display in which the default-colored flying boat is displayed. Change the form of the icon. However, also here, the flying boat of the default color can raise the display mode of the icon by only one level. On the other hand, the flying boats (No. 8 to No. 10) other than the default color always change the display mode of one certain icon to the same display mode as itself. Therefore, No. 7-No. In the display of 10 flying boats, the higher the display mode, the easier it is to hit big with the variable display of symbols corresponding to the changed icon. Note that the timing at which two or more icons are displayed is not limited to the start time of the variable display in which the flying boat of the default color is displayed, and may be the time when the flying boat of the default color is displayed. (The same applies below).

Furthermore, No. 12-No. In the display of Yoshimune of No. 15, both the default color display (No. 12) and the display of red (No. 13 “Akayoshimune”) represented by “de” have a success probability of 50 of the variation of the variation icon. %. The change target of Yoshimune's display is limited to the variable icon, and since only one variable icon is displayed, the mode of two or more icons is not changed. Further, in the gold display (No. 14 “Kanayoshimune”), the success probability of the variation icon mode change is 25%, which is lower than the display of “Akayoshimune”. However, in the rainbow display (No. 15 “Nijiyoshimune”), the success probability of the variation of the variation icon is 100%, which is higher than the “Kinyoshimune” display. Even in the display of Yoshimune, Yoshimune (No. 13 to No. 15) other than the default color changes the display mode of the variable icon to the same display mode as itself.

In the display of the guard length (No. 16), the success probability of changing the mode of the variable icon is 100%, and when the display of the bank length is displayed, the mode of the variable icon is necessarily raised by one step.

In the panda display (No. 17), the success probability of the mode change of the hold icon is 100%, and when the panda display is displayed, the mode of the hold icon is necessarily raised by one step. Moreover, if two or more hold icons are displayed at the start of the variable display in which the panda is displayed, the mode of the two hold icons is changed with a probability of 50%. In the example shown in FIG. 131(b), only a maximum of two icons are changed, but three or more icons may be changed, and regardless of the number, all displayed icons are displayed. There may be a case where the hold icon of, or all the displayed icons are changed.

Subsequently, effects using various icons and displays described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 131 will be described using specific examples.

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which the notice icon is stocked by winning the mini game B, and the notice display is displayed and the display mode of the variable icon is changed by using the stocked notice icon. Is.

In FIG. 132, the normal state (non-probably changed state and non-electric power saving state (non-time saving state)) is a production example in the normal state also in the subsequent production examples unless otherwise specified. Further, FIG. 132 shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N shown in FIG. 3, but this first decorative symbol display device 208L is the decorative symbol shown in FIG. It may be the display device 208 (the same applies to the subsequent figures).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative design (fifth design) is variably displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (A1), the holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132(A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on each of the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of these special diagrams 1 are all No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the change icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Note that the background screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 132(A1) is solid white, but this solid white color means that the background screen is omitted in the drawing. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but in the case of solid white, it means that the background screen is omitted as in the case of FIG. 132(A1).

In FIG. 132 (2), there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230 shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 44, and the number of reservations of special figure 1 is increased by one, resulting in a total of three. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3".

In FIG. 132 (A3-1), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. The third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by an increasing animation in the default display mode, but the third hold represented by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold for the prefetching notice. In FIG. 132 (A3-1), both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which have been the default display modes so far, are the same as No. 131 in FIG. The icon has changed to the icon a of the type of villager described in 17. In addition, here, the icon of the default display mode is changed to the icon of the mode a of the type of villager, but the display mode of the prefetch notice (for example, the blue display mode described in No. 3 of FIG. 131(a) or The icon of the green display mode described in No. 4) may be changed to the icon of the type of villager. In this case, the upper display mode (for example, the green display mode of the fourth display mode) is lower than the lower display mode (for example, the blue display mode of the third display mode) than the icon of the villager type. Also, the icon of the old type is likely to be displayed, and the display mode above (for example, the red display mode of the fifth display mode) is more likely to be the icon of the Yoshimune type. Further, the third hold icon h13 representing the target hold of the prefetching notice is the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 may also be changed to a villager type icon. Further, only the first hold icon h11 may be changed to the villager type icon, or only the second hold icon h12 may be changed to the villager type icon. That is, the number of icons that change into villager type icons may be one or more. By changing the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 to the villager type icons, the mini game (specific mini It may be announced that a game (mini game B in this example) or an unspecified mini game (mini game A, mini game B, or another mini game in this example) is to be played. In addition, the mini game is started at the same time as or after (or immediately after) the start of the symbol variation display (in this example, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11) for starting the mini game B. The icon to be performed may be configured to change.

In FIG. 132 (A4), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”- The "decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also shows the combination of the missing decorative patterns ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7").

In FIG. 132 (5), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (A5), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started and the first upper decorative symbol is displayed. In the 2-holding number display, the holding number in Toku-zu 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”. Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, which has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B is started and the effect image EF1 is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 132 (5), the movement animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager character that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, and is displayed on the second stage hs2 so far. The second hold icon h12 of the character of the villager has started moving toward the first stage hs1 and has been displayed on the third stage hs3 until now. The hold icon h13 has started moving toward the second stage hs2. The animation of the appearance of the opponent icon and the movement animation of the hold icon may be started at the same time, the animation of the appearance of the opponent icon may be started first, or conversely, the movement of the hold icon may be started. The animation may be started first.

Also in FIG. 132 (6), the first decorative pattern in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the movement animation of the hold icon ends, and as the variable icon h0, the mode a of the type of villager (a mode of standby) Icon is displayed. The villager character with the variable icon h0 is executing the standby animation (default animation). In addition, the appearance animation of the opponent icon also ends, the effect image EF1 disappears in the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and the opponent icon TI has a mode a ( The (standby mode) icon is displayed, and the panda character of this opponent icon TI is also executing the standby animation (default animation). On the right side of the opponent icon TI, an appearance area AS that is a first area is displayed in a frame. In the appearance area AS, a character display of "prize" is displayed, and a notice icon YI that can be obtained when winning the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is displayed. That is, the display start position of the advance notice icon YI is a position within the appearance area AS. From a different point of view, it can be said that the first area is a notice area for giving notice of icons that can be acquired in the mini game B. In the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 132(A6), the No. shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is displayed. Further, a stock area SS, which is a second area, is provided on the appearance area AS, which is an area surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 132(A6). In this example, the appearance area AS and the stock area SS overlap. The appearance area AS and the stock area SS may not be overlapped with each other. Also, the appearance animation of the opponent icon TI and the movement animation of the hold icon may end at the same time, the appearance animation of the opponent icon TI may end earlier, or conversely, the hold icon. The moving animation of may end first. Further, the appearance of the opponent icon TI and the appearance of the notice icon YI may be simultaneous, the opponent icon TI may appear first, or, conversely, the notice icon YI may appear. It may appear first.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (7), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the rock-paper-scissors competition of the mini game B is then started. In the mini game B, if the villager character with the variable icon h0 and the panda character with the opponent icon TI have a rock-paper-scissors battle, and the villager character with the variable icon h0 wins, the notice icon displayed in the appearance area AS. You can get YI. The rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B may be started at the same time as the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or may be started when the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. The rock-paper-scissors confrontation here is villagers vs. pandas, and since the prize is the “box” notice icon YI, according to the acquisition expectation degree shown in FIG. 130(d), there is a probability of C (60%). Can be earned. That is, there is a 60% chance that the villager will win.

In FIG. 132 (A8-1), a rock-paper-scissors show-up animation is performed by the villager character with the variable icon h0 and the panda character with the opponent icon TI, and the variable icon h0 shows the mode b (goo of the villager type). It has been changed to an icon). On the other hand, the opponent icon TI has been changed to an icon of a mode c of the panda type (a mode when the player sneaks out). As a result, the villager character with the variable icon h0 wins. The first hold icon h11 is an icon of the villager type mode a (standby mode), and the standby animation is executed.

In FIG. 132 (A9-1), the change icon h0 changes to an icon of a mode f (a mode when winning) of the villager, and an opponent icon TI is a mode e of a panda type (when defeating). 132A), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132(A9-1) executes an animation celebrating that the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won. Although the standby animation is continued in the first hold icon h11, when a mini game result is obtained, an animation corresponding to the result may be executed. That is, even if the hold icon is changed to the icon of the same character as the variable icon h0, it is executed only for the animation celebrating the victory of the mini game, the animation mourning the loss, or the animation celebrating the victory of the mini game. May be. In addition, an animation corresponding to the result of the mini game may be similarly executed with the hold icon that is changed to an icon of a different character than the variable icon h0.

In FIG. 132 (10), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started by the victory of the villager character of the variable icon h0. That is, the No. shown in FIG. 129(a) displayed in the appearance area AS. The "box" notice icon 1 of 1 goes out of the appearance area AS, is once displayed in a large size, moves to a certain position (stock position) in the stock area SS, and is displayed at that certain position (stock display). (See FIG. 132 (11)). In FIG. 132 (12), the animation of celebrating the victory of the villager character of the variable icon h0 continues, but the lost opponent icon TI is the icon of the mode a (standby mode) of the panda type. And the panda character is performing a stand-by animation (the default animation).

In FIG. 132 (a13), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration 4”- The "decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative design on the upper left also shows the same combination of the missing decorative designs.

In FIG. 132 (14), the stop animation is being displayed (the final display is being performed), and in the variable icon h0, the erasing animation is started while the animation celebrating the victory of the villager character is continued, and the variable icon h0 is displayed. The villager character disappears into the pedestal hs0. Also in FIG. 132 (A15), the stop icon is being displayed (during confirmation display), and the change icon h0 is completely disappeared.

The mini game B may end at the same time as the end of the variable display of the symbols, the end of the variable display of the first decorative symbols, or the end of the final display of the first decorative symbols. May be.

In FIG. 132 (A16), the hold, which has been the first hold until now, is consumed, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (A16), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started and the first upper right symbol is displayed. In the 2-holding number display, the holding number in Toku-zu 1 is decreased by 1 and becomes “1”. In addition, in FIG. 132 (A16), the moving animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager character that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, and is displayed on the second stage hs2 so far. Further, the second hold icon h12, which is the default display mode but is held in advance of the advance notice subject, has started moving toward the first stage hs1.

Also in FIG. 132 (A17), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the hold icon ends, and as the variable icon h0, the mode a of the type of villager (a mode of standby) Icon is displayed. Further, in this example, the opponent who has previously competed is displayed as it is, and the opponent icon TI becomes the icon of the panda character. Therefore, it becomes a villager vs. a panda. However, the character of the opponent may change for each confrontation (every symbol variation display). Further, in this example, the battle is performed with the character (the villager's character) whose hold icon first changed, but the character may change each time the hold is exhausted (every shift movement). For example, there may be a case where the villager changes to the old man, the old man changes to Yoshimune, the villager changes to Yoshimune, or the old man changes to the villager. As described with reference to FIG. 130(d), if the Yoshimune vs. Panda confrontation is reached, the notice icon can be obtained with a 100% probability regardless of the type of the notice icon. Further, in the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 132 (A17), the No. shown in FIG. The "red box" notice icon YI of 2 appears.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (18), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central area, and the rock-paper-scissors competition of the second mini game B is also started. Since the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation is a villager vs. panda, and the prize is the notice icon YI of “red box”, the probability of D (40%) is obtained according to the degree of expectation of acquisition shown in FIG. 130(d). Can be obtained at. That is, the probability is lower than that of the first time and the villagers win with a 40% probability.

In FIG. 132 (A19-1), a rock-paper-scissors showdown animation is performed by the villager character with the variable icon h0 and the panda character with the opponent icon TI, and the variable icon h0 shows the mode b (goo of the villager type). It has been changed to an icon). On the other hand, the opponent icon TI has changed to an icon of the mode d of the panda type (mode when the par is played). As a result, the panda character with the opponent icon TI wins.

In FIG. 132 (A20), the change icon h0 changes to a villager type mode e (mode when defeated), and the opponent icon TI is a panda type mode f (mode when winning). ) Icon, and on the pedestal hs0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (21), the display mode of the villager character and the replacement animation of the default display mode are started. .. That is, the villager character, which has been the display mode of the variable icon h0, is gradually disappearing, and at the same time, the icon of the default display mode gradually appears. In other words, the replacement animation is a change animation of the display mode of the variable icon h0. Also, the opponent icon TI gradually disappears from the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, since the player has lost the Janken confrontation, the "red box" notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS cannot be acquired, and in FIG. 132 (21), the appearance icon AS appears along with a frame surrounding the appearance area AS. The area AS itself is gradually faded out to the right end of the screen, and the notice icon YI of “red box” is gradually disappeared from the screen. In FIG. 132 (A22), the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS displays the variable icon h0 in the default display mode, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. Absent.

In FIG. 132 (A23), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”- The "decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative design is also stopped and displayed with the same combination of lost decorative designs.

In FIG. 132 (A24), the pre-reading notice target suspension, which has been the first suspension until now, is exhausted, and the symbol variation display as the pre-reading subject variation is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (A24), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started variable display, and the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS has a default display mode. The variable icon h0 of is displayed. It should be noted that there is no single hold icon, and “0” is displayed for both the second hold number displays of special figure 1 and special figure 2.

In FIG. 132 (A25), a conversation notice as a normal notice is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It should be noted that, while other effects have not been performed while the mini game B is being performed, even during the period when the mini game B is being performed, other effects such as a conversation notice may also be performed. Good. The conversation notice here is the same as the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 69(10) to 69(12). That is, when the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed in the central area. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Moreover, the conversation image CI1 of this lord is overlapped with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design is not overlapped. On the other hand, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not overlap the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the notice icon YI is displayed in the foreground. That is, the notice icon YI continuously displayed in the stock area is overlapped from the front side with a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord, although it is displayed before the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

Even in the display of the notice effect performed using the entire screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the effect display of super reach, etc.), the notice icon YI does not overlap the notice display and is in stock. It may continue to be displayed. On the contrary, the display of the notice effect performed using the entire screen may be overlapped and may be temporarily hidden. For example, if the notice icon YI is a notice effect display to be used, the notice icon YI is continuously displayed in stock without being overlapped. Further, in the screen for user customization in which the design is changing as shown in FIG. 78 (93), the notice icon YI may be overlapped by the bar display VB for volume adjustment, or conversely, the volume adjustment may be performed. May be overlapped with the bar display VB. The notice icon YI may be overlapped by the display relating to various errors and the display relating to the warning described with reference to FIGS. You can wrap it. For example, when the importance of the error or the warning is low or the relation with the wrongdoing is low, the display of the notice icon YI has priority, and the notice icon YI is not overlapped but is continuously displayed in stock. Good.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (A26), the conversation notice is updated. In the conversation notice, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the grandfather's conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136, and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed by. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (A26), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative pattern is hidden by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, but the notice icon YI displayed in stock is displayed in front of the grandpa's conversation image CI2 and hidden by the grandpa's conversation image CI2. It has not been.

Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 132 (27) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed after the operation valid period was started.

The timing of FIG. 132 (A28) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a sequel to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 132 and a diagram showing a modification of the example of the effect.

In FIG. 133 (A29) continued from FIG. 132 (A28), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, the grand conversation image CI2 is changed from the operation promotion notification image to the reach effect. It has changed to the display of the letters "Reach!" to announce that it will be started. The notice character display such as "Let's reach!" may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. It may be displayed even when it is done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 133 (A30-1), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol becomes easy to see. There is.

In FIG. 133 (A31-1), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the reach state is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 133 (A32), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is changed to the mode d in which the box is open when used, and the box icon An animation in which the notice YH pops out from the inside is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 7 is a red notice display of "red change", and the "red change" notice display is a notice for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, or the like is changed in two steps. It should be noted that before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of giving advance notice of the opening of the box (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattling) may be performed. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not be actually opened.

In FIG. 133 (A33), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the red “red change” notice display YH is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 133 (A34), the variable icon change animation using the notice display YH is started. In FIG. 133 (A34), the notice display YH of “red change” is changed to the light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 133 (A35), the light ball YHb flies toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. In FIG. 133 (A36), the variation icon change animation ends, and the variation icon h0, which has been the default display mode before the animation starts, is displayed in No. 131 in FIG. It has changed to the blue display mode described in 3. That is, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the normal notification display mode.

On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 133 (A37), the display of the normal reach effect is displayed. The variable icon h0 that has changed to the blue display mode continues to be displayed. In FIG. 133 (A38), the normal reach effect ends, and "decoration 5" that is not "decoration 6" swings in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the decorative symbols and the lost symbols is fluctuating and fluctuating.

In FIG. 133 (A39), the combination of “decoration 6”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6” is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 133 (A40), it is fixedly displayed. The variable icon h0 changed to the blue display mode continues to be displayed until the fixed display is started, and disappears when the fixed display is started. The change icon h0 may disappear before the confirmation display.

Subsequently, a modified example of the effect examples shown in FIGS. 132(a1) to 133(a40) described above will be described. Hereinafter, the description will be centered on the differences from the effect examples described so far, and the description of the overlapping points may be omitted.

The first modification is the same until FIG. 132 (A7), and as shown in FIG. 133 (A8-2-1) instead of FIG. 132 (A8-1), in the first modification , The character of the villager with the change icon h0 is the mode b when the goo is put out, whereas the character of the panda with the opponent icon TI is the mode d when the par is put out, and the villager with the change icon h0 is the Will lose the character. In FIG. 133 (A8-2-2), the change icon h0 changes to a villager type mode e (mode when defeated), and the opponent icon TI is a panda type mode f (win). The state is changed to the icon of (the mode when it is done), and a defeat production (an animation that makes you sad about losing) is being performed.

In FIG. 133 (A8-2-3) in which the first decorative symbol is being displayed in a changing manner, the notice icon YI displayed in the appearing area AS is the appearing area because the villager character of the changing icon h0 has lost. After disappearing from the AS, both the villager character with the variable icon h0 and the panda character with the opponent icon TI are performing the standby animation (default animation). As a result, the notice icon YI is not displayed in the stock area SS.

In FIG. 133 (A8-2-4), the variable display of the symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative patterns of the lost is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 132 (A8-2-5), the combination of the decorative patterns of the lost is stopped. The villager character, which is being displayed (confirmed display) and has the variable icon h0, gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0 by the erasing animation. Also in FIG. 133 (A8-2-6), the stop icon is being displayed (during confirmation display), and the variation icon h0 is completely disappeared.

After that, as in FIGS. 131 (a16) to 132 (a19-1), the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation is performed, and the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 loses even in the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation. In FIG. 133 (A8-2-7), as in the case of FIG. 133 (A8-2-2), the defeat effect of the character of the villager of the change icon h0 is performed. In FIG. 133 (A8-2-8), as in FIG. 132 (A21), the replacement animation of the display mode of the villager character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. Go Further, the notice icon YI of “red box” is gradually disappearing from the screen together with the appearance area AS. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 133 (A8-2-9), after the variable display of the symbols is finished and the combination of the decorative decorative patterns that have been lost is stopped and displayed, the prefetch is shown in FIG. 133 (A8-2-10). The symbol fluctuation display, which is the target fluctuation, has been started.

The first modified example described above is an example in which the mini game B is a so-called gasse.

Next, the second modification will be described. In FIG. 133 (A22), when the stocked notice icon YI is used, the notice icon YI is changed to the mode d (the box is opened), but in the second modification, the chance button 136 is operated. Will be involved.

The second modification is the same up to FIG. 133 (A 31-1), and FIG. 133 (A 31-2-1) is the same as FIG. 133 (A 31-1) when the reach effect is started. Is. When the reach effect is started, in this second modified example, as shown in FIG. 133 (A 31-2-2), an operation promotion notification image is displayed on the left side of the stocked notice icon YI. The operation promotion notification image here is also an image prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of a meter MT and. Note that the timing of FIG. 133 (A 31-2-2) is before the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed before the start of the operation valid period. May be displayed at the same time as the start of.

The operation valid period starts at the timing of FIG. 133 (A 31-2-3), and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 133 (A 31-2-4) shows a certain amount after the operation valid period starts. It is shown in a display mode when time has elapsed.

The timing of FIG. 133 (A 31-2-5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, in FIG. 133 (A 31-2-6), the notice icon YI, which is the mode a which is the display mode in which the box is closed, is An animation (box opening animation) in which the advance notice display YH pops out of the box is displayed by changing to the open display mode d. The subsequent examples are the same as the examples after FIG. 133 (A33).

Here, the operation promotion notification image composed of the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT may be hidden after the remaining time display meter MT becomes 0, or may not be displayed at the time of operating the chance button 136. It may be displayed. Also, the deletion animation of the operation promotion notification image may be started or executed at the same time as the box opening animation, the deletion animation may be started or executed first, or the box opening animation may be started first. It may be executed.

Note that the change of the notice icon YI to the mode d, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed when the valid period has elapsed. Further, in the configuration that is executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136, the box opening animation may be changed depending on whether the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Good. Alternatively, the box opening animation may be the same animation regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period. Furthermore, the change of the notice icon YI to the mode d may be executed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a third modified example to a sixth modified example of the effect examples of FIGS. 132(a1) to 133(a40).

In the third modification, the notice icon YI is not the “box” icon but the No. shown in FIG. 129(a). It is the icon of the "button" of No. 5. This "button" icon may be displayed in the appearance area AS from the beginning, may be an icon changed from another icon in the appearance area AS, or may be an icon changed from another icon in the stock area. It may be a changed icon.

The "button" notice icon YI shown in FIG. 134 (A31-3-1) is an icon of the mode a indicating that even if the chance button 136 is operated, there is no remaining time display meter. .. That is, it is the mode of only the button 136a.

In FIG. 134 (A 31-3-2), the form of the “button” notice icon YI is changed to the form b in which the remaining time display meter MT is added. However, the remaining time display meter MT is in full display, which is before the start of the operation valid period. The remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed.

In FIG. 134 (A 31-3-3), the operation valid period is started, and in FIG. 134 (A 31-3-4), the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced.

The timing of FIG. 134 (A31-3-5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, in FIG. 134 (A 31-3-6), the form of the “button” notice icon YI is the display form of the effect image (smoke image). The effect image (smoke image) disappears and the red “red change” notice display appears in FIG. The change in the form of the notice icon YI after the chance button 136 is operated is the display of an animation (animation after operation). The subsequent examples are the same as the examples after FIG. 133 (A33).

The change of the "button" notice icon YI to the display mode of the effect image (smoke image) may be performed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may be executed even when the operation valid period elapses without executing. Further, in the configuration that is executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136, the post-operation animation may be changed depending on whether the chance button 136 has been operated within the operation valid period. Good. Alternatively, the post-operation animation may be the same animation regardless of whether the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period. Furthermore, the change of the notice icon YI to the mode d may be executed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period.

In the fourth modified example, the notice display changes the display mode of the hold icon instead of the variable icon in parallel with the progress of the mini game.

The fourth modification is the same until FIG. 132 (A 18), and FIG. 134 (A 19-2-1) is the same as FIG. 132 (A 19-1) in the rock-paper-scissors showdown of the mini game B. The panda character with the opponent icon TI has won. In FIG. 134 (A 19-2-2), while the mini game B is still continuing, the notice icon YI displayed in stock is used. That is, the notice icon YI of the form a in which the box is closed is changed to the form d in which the box is open, and an animation in which the notice YH pops out of the box is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 6 is a notice display of "change" in the default color of 6, and is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the hold icon change animation using the notice display YH is started.

In FIG. 134 (A 19-2-3), as in the case of FIG. 132 (A 20), the defeat effect of the character of the villager of the change icon h0 is performed. Further, in FIG. 134 (A 19-2-3), the notice icon YI used in the middle of the mini game B disappears in the middle of the mini game B, and the default icon “change” is displayed by the hold icon change animation. As shown in FIG. 133 (A34), the notice display YH of No. changes to a light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c, and the light ball YHb represents the first hold icon h11 representing the hold of the prefetching notice object. It flies toward the eye and hits the first hold icon h11.

In FIG. 134 (A 19-2-4), the holding icon change animation ends while the losing character of the villager character continues in the mini game B, and the first holding icon that is the default display mode before the animation starts. The display mode of h11 is No. 1 in FIG. The display mode is changed to the white blinking display mode described in 2. That is, the display mode of the hold icon h11 representing the hold of the pre-reading notice target is changed to the display form of the pre-reading notice. After that, as in FIG. 132 (A21), the replacement animation of the display mode of the villager character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. Further, the notice icon YI of “red box” is gradually disappearing from the screen together with the appearance area AS. Eventually, the symbol variation display is ended, and after the combination of the missing decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, the symbol variation display which is the prefetch target variation is started.

In the fifth modified example, the notice display changes the combination mode of the stop symbols of the first decorative symbol.

The fifth modification is the same up to FIG. 132 (A18), and FIG. 134 (A19-3-1) is the same as FIG. 132 (A19-1) in the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B. The panda character with the opponent icon TI has won. In FIG. 134 (A 19-3-2), the notice icon YI displayed in stock is used while the mini game B is still continuing. That is, the notice icon YI of the form a in which the box is closed is changed to the form d in which the box is open, and an animation in which the notice YH pops out of the box is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. It is a look-ahead notice display of "chance eyes" of 12, and is once displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The "look-ahead" look-ahead notice display here is a display for giving notice of the occurrence of a look-ahead notice in which the combination of chance eyes is fixedly displayed when the first decorative symbol is fixedly displayed thereafter.

In FIG. 134 (A 19-3-3), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of the “chance eye” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. As shown in FIG. 134 (A 19-3-4), the notice display YH of the “chance eye” is displayed on the right symbol display area 208c for a while after the box of the notice icon YI is opened (after it appears). Displayed in. On the other hand, since the game of losing the rock-paper-scissors game is lost, the replacement animation of the display mode of the villager character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. Further, the notice icon YI of “red box” is gradually disappearing from the screen together with the appearance area AS. In FIG. 134 (A 19-3-5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol changes from high speed change to low speed change. In this example, the variation display of the first decorative pattern is changed at a low speed, and then the chance eye digestion effect is started, but the chance eye digestion effect is started immediately after the notice display YH of the “chance eye” appears. May be done. As shown in FIG. 134 (A 19-3-6), since the variable display of the first decorative symbol becomes a low-speed variation, the notice display YH of the “chance eye” is the light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c. Has changed to. In FIG. 134 (A 19-3-7), the light ball YHb flies toward the first decorative pattern that is changing at a low speed, and hits the decorative pattern in the middle pattern display area 208b. In FIG. 134 (A 19-3-8), the effect image EF2 is displayed on all the three decorative symbols that are changing slowly, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 134 (A 19-3-9). , The first decorative pattern is shaking and fluctuating in "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" which is the chance. The chances of "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" are "decoration 2"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 6" and "decoration 3"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7". Similar to the chance item, the pre-reading target variation (next symbol variation display) is a weak chance item that is relatively hard to hit big, and a strong chance item that is relatively easy to hit is “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”. -"Decoration 1", "decoration 3"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 8", "decoration 4"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 8". In FIG. 134 (A 19-3-10), an effect image EF3 for notifying that the chance eyes of “decoration 1”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 5” are stopped and displayed is displayed, and in FIG. In 3-11), the chances of "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" are stopped and displayed.

In the sixth modified example, No. 1 in FIG. The notice display YH of "Chance" of 2 is an example in which the look-ahead notice that the pending change symbol is temporarily stopped is combined with the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 134 (A 19-4-1) shows a state in which the panda character of the opponent icon TI has won in the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B. In FIG. 134 (A 19-4-2), the reach effect is started with the first decorative symbol, and “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c. It should be noted that the display mode of the villager character has changed to the default display mode since the player has lost the rock-paper-scissors confrontation, and the opponent icon TI has disappeared. Further, the notice icon YI of “red box” disappears along with the appearance area AS. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 134 (A 19-4-3), the notice icon YI is used in the reach state, and the notice display YH of “chance” appears. That is, the "chance" notice display YH has appeared after the start of the reach, and the "chance" notice display YH here is a normal notice that increases the reliability of the jackpot in the currently displayed symbol variation display. Equivalent to a kind of. The currently displayed symbol variation display is a symbol variation display one time before the symbol variation display of the look-ahead notice subject variation, and the "chance" notice display YH is different from the symbol variation display of the look-ahead notice subject variation. It corresponds to a normal notice about the variable display of symbols. After the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed, the used notice icon YI disappears as shown in FIG. 134 (A 19-4-4). The notice icon YI may disappear with an erasing animation, or may disappear in an instant without using the erasing animation. Further, in FIG. 134 (A 19-4-5), the advance notice display YH of “chance” disappears in the reach state.

Then, in FIG. 134 (A 19-4-6), the pending change symbol HHZ is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The hold change symbol HHZ has a red symbol and a blue symbol, and when the red hold variable symbol is temporarily stopped, the display mode of any of the displayed hold icons (here, the first hold icon h11) is displayed. When the blue hold pending change pattern is temporarily stopped by two steps, the display mode of the hold icon is promoted by one step. In FIG. 134 (A 19-4-6), the blue pending change pattern HHZ is temporarily stopped, and after that, the pending change animation as shown in FIG. 116 (D17) is started, and in the default display mode. The certain first hold icon h11 changes to the second display mode (white flashing display mode). In addition, the pending change symbol HHZ is a look-ahead notice regarding the first pending icon h11.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing seventh to tenth modified examples of the effect examples of FIGS. 132(a1) to 133(a40).

The seventh modification is the same up to FIG. 133 (A30-1), and FIG. 135 (A31-4-1) is the prefetching advance notice target variation, like FIG. 133 (A31-1). The reach effect has been started with the variable display of symbols. In FIG. 135 (A 31-4-2), the notice icon YI is used after the start of the reach, and the notice icon YI in FIG. The notice display YH of "Chance" of 2 appears. The "chance" notice display YH that appears here is a normal notice that increases the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display, which was the look-ahead announcement variation. It should be noted that after the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed, the used notice icon YI disappears as shown in FIG. 135 (A 31-4-3).

The eighth modification is an example in which one of the hold icons changes to the opponent icon TI. That is, as shown in FIG. 135 (A 3-2-1), when a hold (third hold) that is a target for prefetching notice is won, a hold icon indicating a hold prior to the hold for prefetching notice is an opponent. It changes to the icon TI. In addition, the hold icon representing the hold prior to the look-ahead notice target hold also changes for the character (here, a villager character) who fights the character of the opponent icon TI. In the eighth modified example, the first hold icon h11 is changed to the opponent icon TI. That is, the icon has changed to the type of panda character. Also, the second hold icon h12 has changed to an icon of the type of villager character. In FIG. 135 (A 3-2-2), the variable display of symbols is finished, and in FIG. 135 (A 3-2-3), the movement animation of the hold icon is started and the right base of the effect icon display area DIS is started. The effect image EF1 is displayed on the icon bIr. As a result, as shown in FIG. 135 (A 3-2-4), the variable icon h0 becomes the opponent icon TI, and the first hold icon h11 causes the character (here, villager) who fights the character of the opponent icon TI. Character) is an icon. An appearance area AS surrounded by a frame appears in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and a notice icon YI that can be acquired when winning the rock-paper-scissors competition of the mini game B is displayed therein. Has been done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (A 3-2-5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is also started. In FIG. 135 (A3-2-6), a rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is performed by the panda character of the opponent icon TI which is the variable icon h0 and the villager character of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Villager character wins. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (A3-2-7), an animation to celebrate the victory of the villager character of the first hold icon h11 has started, and the subsequent same FIG. In 2-8), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started. In FIG. 135 (A3-2-9), the notice icon YI is displayed at the stock position.

In FIG. 135 (A3-2-10), the mini game B ends, and at the first stage hs1 of the hold icon display area HIS, the display mode of the villager character and the replacement animation of the default display mode are started. There is. Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the replacement animation of the panda character icon and the variable icon in the default display mode is started. Each of the replacement animations here may be an animation that returns to the display mode before changing to a villager character or a panda character, or a different display mode from the display mode before the change. It may be a replacement animation. For example, the display mode before the change may be the default display mode, or the display mode may be replaced with the display mode of the prefetch notice or the normal notice. In FIG. 135 (A3-2-11), both the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode. Further, the notice icon YI remains displayed in stock. This notice icon YI is a notice icon in which the hold to be the second hold in FIG. 135 (A 3-2-11) is a prefetch notice target, and is used during execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold. .. However, it may be used in the currently displayed symbol variation display, or may be used during execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold, which was the icon of the villager character.

The ninth modification is the same as the eighth modification halfway. That is, FIG. 135 (A 3-2-7) is the same, and FIG. 135 (A 3-2-8b1) is also the same as FIG. 135 (A 3-2-8). In this ninth modified example, the notice icon YI that has come out of the appearance area AS is once displayed in a large size, and then moves to the hold icon display area HIS without moving to the stock area SS, and the default display mode until then is displayed. That is, the second hold icon h12 representing the target hold of the prefetch notice is replaced and the stock display is performed in the hold icon display area HIS (FIG. 135 (A 3-2-8b2) to FIG. -2-8b3)). It should be noted that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 can be considered to have changed to the display mode of the advance notice icon YI. Further, the notice icon YI that has emerged from the appearance area AS may be moved into the stock area SS and then to the hold icon display area HIS. The hold icon display area HIS may also serve as the stock area SS.

In FIG. 135 (A3-2-8b4), the notice is released and the notice icon YI replaced by the second hold icon h12 becomes the change icon h0 and is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the change icon display area CIS. ing. In FIG. 135 (A 3-2-8b5), the notice icon YI that is the change icon h0 is used on the pedestal hs0 and changes to the mode d in which the box is opened. The notice display YH of "Chance" of 2 appears. In FIG. 135 (A 3-2-8b5), since the reach has not started yet, the notice display YH of the “chance” here indicates that the reach effect more than the normal reach is performed in the currently displayed symbol variation display. The notice will be displayed.

The notice icon YI is moved to the pedestal hs0 and is replaced with the change icon h0 while being displayed in the appearance area AS or once displayed in the stock area SS and during the variable display of the symbol for the pre-reading notice pending. Alternatively, it may be moved to the hold icon display area HIS and replaced with the hold icon of the read-ahead notice subject hold during the symbol variation display or the stop display before the symbol change display of the read-ahead notice subject hold.

Further, the notice icon YI may be used in the state of the hold icon, and the notice display YH of the prefetch notice may appear. In this case as well, the notice icon YI remains displayed in the appearance area AS, or once is displayed in the stock area SS, and then is displayed in the symbol variation display or the stop display before the symbol variation display of the prefetching notice object pending. During this, the hold icon may be moved to the hold icon display area HIS and replaced with the hold icon of the prefetching notice target hold.

The tenth modification is also the same as the eighth modification halfway. That is, FIG. 135 (A 3-2-7) is the same, and FIG. 135 (A 3-2-8c1) is also the same as FIG. 135 (A 3-2-8). In this tenth modification as well, the notice icon YI that has emerged from the appearance area AS is once displayed in a large size, and then moves to the hold icon display area HIS without moving to the stock area SS. Then, in the tenth modification, the notice icon YI is replaced with the first hold icon h11 that is the icon of the villager who played the mini game B. That is, a hold icon different from the hold icon representing the prefetching notice target hold is replaced. In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be acquired, and in that case, the reserved icons may be replaced with the number of reservation icons. That is, one notice icon YI may be replaced with one hold icon. Alternatively, a plurality of notice icons Yi are collectively replaced with one hold icon, and a plurality of notice icons replaced with the hold icons are shown with numbers representing the plurality of numbers, or the hold icons are The plurality of notice icons replaced with may be displayed in a color representing the number of the plurality of notice icons. Furthermore, the notice icon YI may be replaced with the change icon h0.

In FIG. 135 (A3-2-8c3), the character "I did it" in the animation celebrating the victory of the mini game remains, but the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced with the notice icon YI. ing. The panda character of the opponent icon TI, which is the variable icon h0, is still in the mode e, and the character “I did it” disappears at the timing of changing to the mode a. In addition, the character "Yatane" may disappear at the same time when the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced with the notice icon YI, or before the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced with the notice icon YI. It may disappear. For example, it may disappear at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (3-2-8c2).

In FIG. 135 (A3-2-8c4), the notice icon YI replaced with the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon h0 and is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the change icon display area CIS. The symbol variation display performed in FIG. 135 (3-2-8c4) is a symbol variation display prior to the target variation of the prefetching notice. During execution of this variable display of symbols, the animation of stocking the notice icon is started. The variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 135 (3-2-8c4) is the notice icon YI, but is not the notice icon used for the subject change of the prefetch notice. The animation started here is an animation of stocking the notice icon used in the target change of the prefetch notice. The variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 135 (A3-2-8c4) functions as a stock confirmation icon of the notice icon used in the subject variation of the prefetch notice.

In FIG. 135 (A3-2-8c5), the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes, and the effect image EF4 is displayed to inform that the notice icon used in the subject change of the prefetch notice is stocked. It should be noted that some icon is beginning to appear faintly behind the effect image EF4. In FIG. 135 (A 3-2-8c6), the effect image EF4 jumps out of the variation icon h0 and moves to the stock area SS. On the other hand, the variable icon h0 has changed to the default display mode. This default display mode is a display mode when the variable icon h0 is started to be displayed as a hold icon (third hold icon h13). That is, although the display mode has changed variously after the start of display, the display mode before the change is restored. The display may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode before the change.

In FIG. 135 (A3-2-8c5), the effect image EF4 is displayed in the stock area SS as the notice icon YI used in the target change of the prefetch notice.

Note that the notice icon YI displayed as the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 135 (A3-2-8c3) may be used before it becomes the variable icon. Further, an animation for moving the notice icon YI displayed as the first hold icon h11 to the second hold icon h12 representing the prefetching notice target hold is performed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the notice change of the notice icon YI is performed. The display may be announced in advance. After FIG. 135 (A3-2-8c7), it continues to FIG. 132 (A22).

FIG. 136 is a diagram showing another modified example of the effect examples of FIGS. 132(a1) to 133(a40).

In the eleventh modification, the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are areas dedicated to the mini game. This eleventh modification is the same until FIG. 132 (A2), and in FIG. 136 (A3-3-1), the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS disappears, and the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon. The display area DIS is connected. Hereinafter, the area in which the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are connected is collectively referred to as a mini game dedicated area MGS. In the mini-game dedicated area MGS shown in FIG. 136 (A 3-3-1), the appearance area AS that is the first area is displayed in a frame. In the variable icon display area CIS of the mini game dedicated area MGS, the panda character of the opponent icon TI is displayed in the mode a. Here, the variation icon h0 corresponding to the currently displayed symbol variation display is changed to the panda character of this opponent icon TI. In addition, at the back of the appearance area AS, there is provided an entrance/exit through which a character enters and leaves.

In FIG. 136 (A3-3-2), the variable display of symbols is finished, but the panda character with the opponent icon TI continues to be displayed by the standby animation. That is, in this example, when the variable icon h0 changes to the opponent icon TI, the variable icon h0 continues to be displayed as the opponent icon TI even if the corresponding symbol variable display ends. In other words, the icon of the panda character plays the roles of both the changing icon h0 and the opponent icon TI during the variable display of symbols, but when the variable display of the symbol ends, it plays the role of only the opponent icon TI. It will be. The panda character icon only plays the role of the opponent icon TI, and the variable icon h0 may be erased.

In FIG. 136 (A3-3-3), the variable display of symbols is started, and the first hold icon h11, which is the villager's character icon displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, is directed toward the mini game exclusive area MGS. Start moving. In FIG. 136 (A3-3-4), the character icon of the villager, which has been the first hold icon h11 until now, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area CIS of the mini game dedicated area MGS. .. On the other hand, the icon of the panda character, which was the variable icon in the previous symbol variable display, continues to be displayed as the opponent icon TI, and the rock-paper-scissors confrontation between the villager and the panda is started (Fig. 136 (3-3-5). )). When the rock-paper-scissors confrontation is started, the notice icon YI appears in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI may appear at the same time as the start of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation, or the warning icon YI may appear before the start of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation.

In FIG. 136 (A3-3-6), the villager character of the variable icon h0 wins, and in FIG. 136 (A3-3-7), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is displayed. Has been started. Also, an animation has been launched to celebrate the victory in the rock-paper-scissors showdown. In FIG. 136 (A 3-3-8), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, and in FIG. 136 (A 3-3-9), the animation celebrating the victory in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation ends. When this animation ends, as shown in FIG. 136 (A3-3-10), the icon of the character of the villager, which is the change icon h0, exits from the entrance provided at the back of the appearance area AS, and then the pattern. The variable display ends (FIG. 136 (A3-3-11)). The icon of the villager character, which is the variation icon h0, may exit from the doorway provided at the back of the appearance area AS after the symbol variation display ends. On the other hand, the icon of the panda character, which is the opponent icon TI, continues to be displayed until all the rock-paper-scissors battles are completed. However, there may be a case where the icon of the swordsman character is replaced on the way. The exit timing of the icon of the villager character may be the same as the symbol variable display. If the rock-paper-scissors showdown continues after this, the icon of the villager's character may be displayed in stock in the mini-game exclusive area MGS until all the rock-paper-scissors battles are completed without leaving. The opponent icon TI and/or the exiting variable icon h0 of the character may enter from the entrance/exit. Also, an animation may be performed in which the opponent icon TI exits when the mini game ends.

In the modification shown in FIG. 136 (A 9-2-1) and FIG. 136 (A 9-2-2), the change icon h0 is the No. 1 in FIG. It is an icon of the character of Yoshimune shown in FIG. 19, and the opponent icon TI is an icon of the character of panda. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 130(d), there is a 100% probability of winning the rock-paper-scissors confrontation, and in this example, the notice icon of "rainbow box" that confirms the big hit is displayed in the appearance area AS. In FIG. 136 (A 9-2-2), the symbol variation display is finished with the notice icon of “rainbow box” being displayed in stock. The notice icon of "rainbow box" has a high reliability of the jackpot and functions as a prefetch notice. Note that the "rainbow box" notice icon may function as a notice of the change.

In addition, in the box-shaped notice icon, it is advantageous for the player that the notice display (item) inside the box is "red box" rather than "box" (for example, a notice that easily develops into super reach) It is a display or a notice display with high reliability of a big hit), and the "gold box" is more advantageous to the player than the "red box". Therefore, if only the box-shaped notice icon is displayed, and whether the notice display actually appears or not depending on the color of the box-shaped notice icon, how advantageous the notice is if the notice display appears. Whether it is a display can be estimated in advance. Also, as described with reference to FIG. 129(a), the reliability of the big hit is determined by the color of the box-shaped notice icon. Therefore, the color of the box-shaped notice icon is easy to hit the jackpot and game. This shows both the ease of obtaining the notice display advantageous to the user. It should be noted that depending on the display mode of the notice icon, only the ease with which an advantageous notice display is obtained may be shown, or only the ease with which a jackpot is hit may be shown.

The modification shown in FIG. 136 (A3-4) is an example in which the hold icon of the prefetching notice target hold may also be used for the mini game. That is, in FIG. 136 (A3-4), the third hold icon h13 representing the look-ahead notice target hold has also changed to a villager character icon, and participates in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation. As a result, if you win the rock-paper-scissors confrontation, you may obtain the notice display used during the execution of the symbol variation display of the look-ahead notice object pending. Further, the hold icon representing the hold behind the prefetching notice target hold may be changed to an icon that allows participation in the mini game. In this case, if the hold icon of the prefetching notice pending is changed to a fluctuation animation and a mini game is played, until the mini game ends, or until the variable display of the prefetching notice pending is finished, It may be in the form of an icon that allows participation in the game, and thereafter, the original display form may be restored. Further, after the mini game (for example, mini game B) is finished, the icon does not change to a dedicated icon that can participate in the mini game (for example, mini game B), but a new mini game (of the same type) Even if the icon changes to a dedicated icon that can participate in a mini game (for example, mini game B) or a different type of mini game (for example, mini game A) Good.

The modification shown in FIG. 136 (3-5) is an example in which the hold icon displayed as an icon that can participate in the mini game is not limited to one type of icon. That is, in FIG. 136 (A3-4), the first holding icon h11 is displayed as an icon of the type of the grandfather, and the second holding icon h12 is No. shown in FIG. 131(a). It is displayed with icons of 18 kinds of villager characters.

In the modification shown in FIG. 136 (A3-6), the hold icon that is displayed first as an icon that enables participation in the mini game is displayed as an icon that can also participate in the mini game. In addition, it is an example in which at least a part of the hold icon to be digested later may overlap. That is, in FIG. 136 (A3-6), the first hold icon h11 is No. 1 shown in FIG. 19 Yoshimune character type icons are displayed, the second hold icon h12 is also displayed as the same Yoshimune character type icon, and the hind legs of the Yoshimune character icon that is the first hold icon h11 are 21 The hold icon h12 overlaps the front leg of the Yoshimune character icon.

Further, the relationship of this overlap may be reversed, or a hold icon having a high reliability of a big hit may be displayed in front. Further, the displayed hold icon may indicate the degree of expectation of the prefetch target variation. For example, when two holding icons of the Yoshimune character are displayed, it may be easier to make a big hit with the change in the prefetch target when two holding icons are displayed.

The modification shown in FIG. 136 (A31-5-1) to FIG. 136 (A31-5-3) is an example in which the cursor CS is used for the notice icon YI displayed in stock. FIG. 136 (A31-5-1) is in the same state as FIG. 133 (A31-1), and in FIG. 136 (A31-5-2), the notice of the mode a in which the box is the closed display mode. The display of the cursor CS points to the icon YI. The display of the cursor CS is a display for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used. After FIG. 136 (A 31-5-3), FIG. 133 (A 33) follows. When the cursor CS indicates, the notice icon YI may be always used or may not be used. In addition, an effect that gives advance notice that the box will open (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattlingly) may be used in combination with the display of the cursor CS. Furthermore, a second modification will be shown. As shown in FIG. 133 (A 31-2-2), the display of the operation promotion notification image may be used in combination.

In FIG. 136 (A 31-5-3), the display of the cursor CS disappears, the box opening animation is displayed instead, the mode changes to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is displayed from inside the box. It's popping out.

136 (A 30-2-1) to FIG. 136 (A 30-2-4) are examples in which an effect is given to give advance notice that the box will open. FIG. 136 (A30-2-1) is the same state as FIG. 133 (A30-1), and in FIG. 136 (A30-2-2), the box icon displayed as the notice icon YI is An animation production that vibrates rattlingly is being executed. This animation effect fuels the possibility that the notice icon YI may be used. It should be noted that this animation effect is started before the first temporary stop is performed in the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Note that it may be started at the same time as the first temporary stop, or may be started after the first temporary stop. Further, this animation effect may be started before the reach effect is started, may be started at the same time as the reach effect, or may be started after the reach effect is started. Furthermore, this animation effect may be an animation that is always executed when the box-shaped notice icon is used, or an animation that may not be executed. In addition, this animation effect may be executed across the continuous symbol variable display. That is, it may be executed even while the symbol fluctuation is stopped, or may be temporarily stopped while the symbol fluctuation is stopped, and this animation effect may be started when the symbol fluctuation display is restarted. Alternatively, this animation effect may be started and ended within the period of one symbol variable display and not executed across consecutive symbol variable displays.

Although it is in the reach state in FIG. 136 (A30-2-3), the animation effect in which the box icon vibrates rattlingly continues, and during this reach state, this animation effect is switched to the box opening animation effect. The notice icon YI shown in FIG. 136 (A30-2-4) has changed to the mode d, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is popping out from the box. Then, it continues to FIG. 133 (A33).

The effect that gives advance notice of the box opening may be executed across the reach effects as in this example, or may not be executed across the reach effects. Also, if an effect that gives advance notice of the opening of the box is executed, the box of the notice icon YI may or may not always be opened.

The modification shown in FIG. 136 (A30-3-1) to FIG. 136 (A30-3-4) is an example in which a modification of the effect of giving advance notice of the box opening is executed. In this example, the animation effect in which the box icon vibrates rattlingly indicates whether the timing of using the notice icon YI is near or far depending on the magnitude of the vibration. That is, as shown in FIG. 136 (A30-3-2), if the vibration is weak, the timing when the advance notice icon YI is used is far, and when the timing when the advance notice icon YI is used is near, the state shown in FIG. -3-3) It changes to strong vibration. In other words, the vibration increases as the use timing approaches. In FIG. 136 (A30-3-4), the box of the notice icon YI opens when the vibration becomes maximum, and the notice display YH pops out from the inside. Then, it continues to FIG. 133 (A33).

The degree of vibration may indicate the reliability of the advance notice icon YI being used or the advantage of the advance notice display contained therein. That is, the vibration may be increased as the reliability and the advantage are higher.

FIG. 136 (A30-3-4') shows an example in which the box of the notice icon YI has not opened even though the vibration is maximized. As described above, in the animation effect in which the icon of the box vibrates rattlingly, there is a case where the effect of gasse is performed. When the lost decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the notice icon YI disappears.

Next, an example in which a plurality of notice icons are stocked will be described.

FIG. 137 shows a case in which a plurality of notice icons are stocked by winning in the mini game B, and a notice display is displayed by using a plurality of the notice icons stocked to change the display mode of the variable icons. FIG.

The explanation here will be focused on the difference from the effect examples of FIG. 132 (A1) to FIG. 133 (A40) in which only one notice icon was stocked.

In FIG. 137 (I 1-1), as in FIG. 132 (A 4 ), the variable display of symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols. (“Decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also shows the same combination of the lost decorative patterns. Both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 137 (I 1-1) are No. 1 in FIG. The icon has changed to the icon a of the type of villager described in 17. Further, the third hold icon h13 representing the target hold of the prefetching notice is the default display mode.

In FIG. 137 (YES 2) after the symbol variable display is started, the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is the same as in FIG. 132 (7), and the mode a of the panto type as the opponent icon TI. Icon is displayed, and a notice icon YI of “box” is displayed in the appearance area AS which is the first area. Further, a stock region SS that is a second region is provided on the appearance region AS, and is a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 137 (1-2). The stock area SS in this example is provided with a first stock position SS1, a second stock position SS2, and a third stock position SS3, and a part of the third stock position SS3 overlaps with a part of the appearance area AS. ing.

In FIG. 137 (I3), the rock-paper-scissors-confrontation animation of the mini game B is performed and the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won, as in FIG. 132 (A8-1). In FIG. 137 (I4), an animation is performed to celebrate the victory of the villager character with the variable icon h0. In FIG. 137 (I5), the animation is displayed in the appearance area AS. No. shown in. The notice icon YI of "box" of No. 1 is displayed at the first stock position SS1 (see FIG. 137 (I2)) in the stock area SS.

In FIG. 137 (I6), as in FIG. 132 (A15), the variable display of symbols is finished, the combination of the decorative symbols that have been lost is being stopped (is being displayed for confirmation), and the variable icon h0 is also disappeared.

In FIG. 137 (7) after the symbol variable display is started, the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is started. Further, in the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 137 (7), No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is displayed. In FIG. 137 (I 8), the rock-paper-scissors showdown animation of the mini game B is performed, and the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 is winning for the second time. In FIG. 137 (I 9), an animation is performed to celebrate the victory of the villager character with the variable icon h0. In FIG. 137 (I 10), the animation is displayed in the appearance area AS. No. shown in. The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed in a large size. In the subsequent FIG. 137 (I11), the second “box” notice icon YI is displayed at the second stock position SS2 (see FIG. 137 (I2)) in the stock area SS. In other words, the newly stocked notice icon YI is displayed below the previously stocked notice icon YI. The distance between the first stock position SS1 and the second stock position SS2 is less than the height of one notice icon. Note that the first stock position SS1 and the second stock position SS2 may not be provided, and stock may be carried out randomly in an empty area. Further, if the first notice icon YI (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1) is used before the third notice icon YI is stocked (released from the stock area SS). In the case of), the third notice icon YI may be stocked at the first stock position SS1.

In FIG. 137 (I12), as in the case of FIG. 132 (A23), the variable display of symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols that have been lost is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 137 (I13), the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target variation is started, as in FIG. 132 (A24), and in FIG. 137 (I14-1), as in FIG. The conversation notice as is started. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 137 (I 14-1), the palace's conversation image CI1 is displayed in the central area. The two notice icons YI in the stock area SS overlap with a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord from the front side. After the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 137 (I15), the first notice icon YI previously stocked (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1) is displayed. The first notice icon YI used is changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of “reach” is popping out from the box. The notice display YH of this "reach" also overlaps a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord from the front side. The notice display YH of "reach" at this timing is a display that gives a notice that the reach effect more than the normal reach is performed in the currently displayed symbol variation display.

In FIG. 137 (16), the conversation announcement is updated as in FIG. 132 (26). In the conversation notice, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the grandpa's conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather's character is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 132 (A26), the operation valid period is not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. The first notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, is not yet deleted in FIG. 137 (YES 16), but is deleted in FIG. 137 (YES 17). The notice display YH of "reach" is still displayed. Even in the same figure (17), the operation valid period has not started. As described above, the first notice icon YI may be deleted before the start of the operation valid period, but may be deleted at the same time as the start of the operation valid period, or may be deleted after the operation valid period is started. May be.

Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 137 (18) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed after the operation valid period was started.

The timing of FIG. 137 (19) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing.

In FIG. 137 (yes 20), as in FIG. 132 (yes 20), in response to the chance button 136 being pressed within the operation valid period, the old conversation image CI2 is changed from the operation promotion notification image to the current row. It is changing to the character display of "Reach!" which announces that the reach production will start with the displayed pattern variation display. Therefore, the same thing (that the reach production is started by the currently displayed symbol variation display) is also announced by a notice (here, the grandpa's conversation image CI2) different from the notice display YH of "reach". Will be there. Further, when two types of notices are given in this way, one notice may be a notice with higher reliability than the other notice. Alternatively, the advance display YH of the “reach” displayed first may be used to notify the normal reach occurrence, and the conversation notification displayed subsequently may be used to notify the super reach occurrence. By giving such a time-series notice, it may appear that the production (reach type) is promoted. On the other hand, on the contrary, it is possible to give notice of the occurrence of super reach by the notice display YH of the “reach” displayed first, and give notice of the occurrence of normal reach in the conversation notice displayed later. ) May appear to be demoted. However, since it is a notice about reach production within the same fluctuation, whichever comes first may be better. In addition, for example, when the notice YH announces "reach" and the conversation notice displays "continue" for announcing the pseudo continuous production, the pseudo continuous notice after the reach occurs (for example, the pseudo continuous symbol stops. ) Occurs, and it is possible to give a notice until the pseudo continuous production is started.

In addition, even if a pseudo-announcement is made twice by the notice display YH and another notice within one break in the symbol variation display (the period from the start of the symbol variation to the temporary suspension of the pseudo-association), the pseudo-association is 1 It may be configured to be performed only once (that is, the temporary stop is performed once), or may be configured to generate the pseudo-repetition (temporary stop is generated) by the number of times the notice is given.

In this way, by combining the notice display YH and the notice by another effect, promotion effect and demotion effect can be performed within one symbol variation display. For example, in the pseudo continuous production, the promotion production can be performed as the number of pseudo continuous productions increases. For example, the third display mode may be announced in the first variation of the pseudo consecutive number, and the fifth display mode may be announced in the second variation of the pseudo consecutive number. It should be noted that the third display mode may be announced in the second pseudo mode change, and further, the second display mode may be announced in the second pseudo mode change as the demotion effect. Good. Further, in the case of the pseudo continuous production, in the one-time symbol variable display, the notice of the third display mode may be given first, and then the notice of the fifth display mode may be given next, or conversely, first. Alternatively, the fifth display mode may be announced first, and then the third display mode may be announced.

Note that the advance notice character display such as "Reach!" in the old conversation image CI2 is displayed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. However, it may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136.

In FIG. 137 (I22), as in FIG. 133 (A30-1), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative pattern becomes easy to see. There is. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may disappear at the same time, the conversation image CI1 of the lord displayed on the back side may disappear first, or the conversation image CI1 displayed on the front side. The conversation image CI2 of 1 may disappear first.

In FIG. 137 (I23), the reach effect is started as previously announced, and the “decoration 6” is fluctuatingly fluctuated in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, in the reach state, the second stocked notice icon YI is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 137 (I 24), the box of the notice icon YI opens, and the notice display YH of “change” pops out from the inside. In this example, the notice icons YI are used in the order in which the notice icons YI are stocked, but the notice icons YI may be used regardless of the stock order. For example, the notice icon YI in which the notice display YH having a high advantage appears may be used earlier or may be used later. Further, a higher reliability depending on the type of the notice icon YI may be used earlier or may be used later. Further, here, the notice display YH of the "change" that has appeared appears on the right pattern that is temporarily stopped (here, it overlaps with the "decoration 6", and it is more difficult to see than when it does not overlap. The notice display YH of “change” overlaps the right pattern from the front side. This is not the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 but at the second stock position SS2. It is related to the notice display YH released from the notice icon Y2 that has been stocked.

In FIG. 137 (i25), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the “change” notice display YH is still displayed. In the subsequent Fig. 137 (26), the variable icon change animation using the advance notice display YH is started. In FIG. 137 (26), the advance notice YH of “change” is changed to the light ball YHb while being overlapped with the temporarily stopped right symbol. In FIG. 137 (I27), the light ball YHb flies toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. In this case as well, the position of the notice icon YI from which the notice display YH has been released affects, and the light ball YHb changes at a position different from the example shown in FIG. 133 (A34) to FIG. It flies toward the change icon h0 along the trajectory. However, even if the position of the notice icon YI from which the notice display YH is released is different, the notice display YH is released to the same position (for example, the position of the “change” notice display YH shown in FIG. 133 (A32)), It may be changed to the light ball YHb at the position and fly toward the variable icon h0 on the same trajectory.

In FIG. 137 (i 28), the display mode of the variable icon h0, which was the default display mode before the animation started after the change icon change animation ended, is No. The display mode is changed to the white blinking display mode described in 2. That is, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the normal notification display mode. Then, it continues to FIG. 137 (I 16).

In the example shown in FIG. 137, the notice display YH of “reach” is displayed to announce that the reach effect will be performed, and the reach effect is actually started, but from the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is not started. Also, in the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is started, the jackpot symbol aspect is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed, which results in that, as a result, the symbol variation display in which the notice display YH of "reach" is not displayed, The symbol variation display in which the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed makes it easier to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol mode.

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 137 and an effect example of the mini game A of Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice.

In the modification shown in FIGS. 138(I14-2-1) to (I14-2-3), the state shown in FIG. 138(I14-2-1) is shown in FIG. 137(I14-1). 138 (I 14-2-2), the display of the cursor CS points to the notice icon YI to be used. Here, the display of the cursor CS points to the notice icon YI which is stocked at the first stock position SS1 (see FIG. 137 (I2)). The display of the cursor CS also overlaps with the conversation image CI1 of the lord from the front side.

In FIG. 138 (I 14-2-3), the display of the cursor CS disappears, and the box of the notice icon YI which has been stocked at the first stock position SS1 that the display of the cursor CS was pointing up to then opens and the box The notice display YH of "reach" is popping out from the inside.

The box of the notice icon YI may be opened by operating the chance button 136. In this case, the operation promotion notification image that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 may be displayed, or may be the back button that is not displayed. Further, the display position of the cursor CS is operated by the up and down keys of the cross key 181a so that the player can select the notice icon YI, and the notice icon YI selected by the cursor CS is opened by operating the chance button 136. You may Alternatively, the notice icon YI that is not used may be indicated by the cursor CS. Further, the cursor CS may be displayed or not displayed. In this case, when the cursor CS is displayed, it may be easier to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol, or conversely, it is difficult to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol. Yes, there is no difference between the two. Then, it continues to FIG. 137 (I 16).

In the modification shown in FIG. 138(I 14-3-1) to FIG. 138(I 14-3-1), the state shown in FIG. 138(I 14-3-1) is shown in FIG. 137(I 14-1). 138 (I 14-3-2), two displays of the cursor CS are displayed, and both of the notice icons YI are pointed to. As a result, it is not known which of the notice icons YI is used first.

In FIG. 138 (I 14-3-3), both of the displays of the two cursors CS disappear, the box of the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 opens, and the notice of “reach” is displayed from the box. The display YH is popping out.

In the modification shown in FIGS. 138(I14-4-1) to (I14-4-3), the state shown in FIG. 138(I14-4-1) is shown in FIG. 137(I14-1). 138 (I 14-4-2), two displays of the cursor CS are displayed, and both of the notice icons YI are indicated. In this example, as shown in FIG. 138 (I 14-4-3), after both the displays of the two cursors CS disappear, the notice icons YI of the two cursors CS which the display of the two cursors are pointing up to then are displayed. The box opens, and the notice display YH of "reach" pops out from the box of the notice icon YI that was stocked at the first stock position SS1 and is stocked at the second stock position SS2 (see Fig. 137 (2)). The notice display YH of "change" is popping out from the box of the notice icon YI that was displayed. The boxes of both the notice icons YI may be opened at the same time, may be opened in the stock order, and the notice display YH having a high advantage may be opened first or later. Further, a higher reliability depending on the type of the notice icon YI may be opened earlier or may be opened later. After that, the notice display YH of “reach” is erased as shown in FIG. 137 (yes 20), while the notice display YH of “change” as shown in FIG. 137 (yes 26) is changed to the temporarily stopped right symbol. It changes to a light ball YHb in the overlapping state. After that, the variation icon change animation ends, and the display mode of the variation icon h0, which is the default display mode before the animation starts, is the same as No. 1 in FIG. The display mode is changed to the white blinking display mode described in 2. It should be noted that the end of the variable icon change animation may precede the deletion of the "reach" notice display YH, may be deleted at the same time, or may be deleted later.

The modified examples shown in FIG. 138 (I 1-2-1) to FIG. 138 (I 1-2-4) are examples for explaining the maximum stock number of the notice icon YI.

In FIG. 138 (I 1-2-1), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is four, which is the upper limit, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Of these hold icons, for example, the third hold is the look-ahead notice target hold, and all the first hold icons h11 to third hold icons h13 are icons that can participate in the mini game (village character icon). Has changed to. The maximum stock number of the notice icon YI is “3” (maximum reserved number −1), which is less than the maximum reserved number of 4 in special figure 1 or special figure 2. However, the number may be the same as the maximum reserved number of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, or may be the same as the total number of the maximum reserved number of the special figure 1 and the maximum reserved number of the special figure 2. Alternatively, the number may be one less than the total number (for example, 8). Further, it may be larger than the maximum holding number or may be larger than the total number.

In FIG. 138 (No. 1-2-2), the mini game B is further won in the state where two notice icons YI have already been acquired. As a result, as shown in FIG. 138 (No. 1-2-3), the third notice icon YI comes out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed in a large size. In this state, the third enlarged and displayed notice icon YI overlaps the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2 from the front side. As a result, the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2 becomes difficult to be seen for a moment. However, by setting the position of the notice icon YI coming out of the appearance area AS to a position separated from the second stock position SS2, the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2 is prevented from overlapping. You can also

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 138 (1-2-2), the first stock position SS1, the second stock position SS2, and the third stock position SS3 (FIG. 137) provided in the stock area SS. A notice icon YI is displayed for each of them. A part of the notice icon YI displayed at the third stock position SS3 shown in FIG. 138 (I 1-2-4) overlaps a part of the appearance area AS from the front side.

On the other hand, a part of the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 138 (I 1-2-4') overlaps with a part of the notice icon YI displayed at the third stock position SS3 from the front side, and the third stock The lower half of the notice icon YI displayed at the position SS3 is difficult to see.

Note that the stock area SS may be provided at a position that does not overlap the appearance area AS so that the stock area SS does not overlap the appearance area AS or the appearance area AS. For example, the stock region SS may be provided in the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

The example productions shown in FIG. 138 (1) and subsequent figures are step-by-step illustrations of the example productions of the mini game A of Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice.

In FIG. 138 (1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed as in FIG. 132 (1). Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of these special diagrams 1 are all No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

In FIG. 138 (U2), as in FIG. 132 (A2), there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230 shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. Become one In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 138 (U2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3".

In FIG. 138 (3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. The third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by an increasing animation in the default display mode, but the third hold represented by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold for the prefetching notice. In FIG. 133 (3), both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which have been the default display modes so far, are the same as No. 131 in FIG. The icon has changed to the mode a of the kind of Yoshimune (bow) described in 14. The change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 may be performed before the third hold icon h13 of the target hold of the prefetching notice is displayed in an increased manner or simultaneously with the increased display. Alternatively, it may be performed after the increase display. More specifically, the change of the display mode of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 (change of the hold icon) may be completed before the increase animation of the third hold icon h13 is started. The change of the hold icon may be completed at the same time when the increase animation is started, or the change of the hold icon may be completed after the increase animation is started. Further, when the change of the hold icon is performed by the change animation, the change animation may be started before the increase animation is started, or the change animation may be started at the same time as the increase animation. However, the change animation may be started after the increase animation is started. In addition, by changing the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 to the icon of the Yoshimune (bow) type mode a, in the variable display of symbols corresponding to the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively. A mini game (a specific mini game (mini game A in this example) or an unspecified mini game (mini game A, mini game B, or other mini game in this example) is to be played. You may give a notice. In addition, the mini game is started at the same time as or after the start of the symbol variation display (in this example, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11) for starting the mini game A (may be immediately after). The icon to be performed may be configured to change.

In FIG. 138 (v 4), the variable display of symbols is finished, and the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 138 (5), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 138 (5), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started and the upper right symbol is displayed. In the 2-holding number display, the holding number in Toku-zu 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”. Also, in the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, which has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon shown in FIG. 130(a) is started, and the icon AI is slightly displayed at the right end of the screen. 'Begins to be displayed. In addition, in FIG. 138 (v 5), the moving animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (yumi), which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 until now, starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, and is on the second stage hs2 so far. The second hold icon h12 of the displayed Yoshimune (bow) character has started moving toward the first stage hs1 and has been displayed on the third stage hs3 until now, although it is the default display mode The third reservation icon h13 of the notice target reservation has started moving toward the second stage hs2. Here, when the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow) starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, the pedestal hs0 is lowered a little. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the mini game A icon and the movement animation of the hold icon may be started at the same time, or the appearance animation of the mini game A icon may be started first, or vice versa. The animation of moving the hold icon may be started first.

Even in FIG. 138 (6), the first decorative pattern in the central region is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the hold icon ends, and the variation icon h0 is changed to a mode a (waiting) of the Yoshimune (bow) type. Icon) is displayed. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of the change icon h0 is executing the standby animation (default animation). On the other hand, the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A continues, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is on the carpet and in the white box image in the first display mode (see FIG. 129(a)). The icon AI′ displaying the notice icon YI) of the mode “a” of No. 1 shown is displayed. This icon AI' is different from the icon AI for the mini game A shown in FIG. 130(a).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 138 (7), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Also, in FIG. 138 (7), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and in this appearance animation, the meter display MTh of the hit point (HP) is additionally displayed in the icon AI′. It However, the meter display MTh additionally displayed here is an empty state (state of 0).

In FIG. 138 (8), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and here, the hit point (HP) is added to the empty meter display MTh added earlier as a part of the appearance animation. The displayed animation is executed. In FIG. 138 (e 8), the blue gauge gag is beginning to be seen, though slightly. As described with reference to FIG. 130B, the color of the gauge changes according to the number of HP points. Since the animation here is a blue gauge from the beginning, it can be seen at the stage of looking at the gauge color that the number of HP points is 60 or more. In addition, as shown in FIG. 130(a), the mini game A icon AI has a mode a in which the gauge is full, a mode b in which the gauge is half, and a mode c in which the gauge is only slightly. Since there is only mode d, it can be expected that the gauge will increase to the full state when the blue gauge gag is seen. Here, after the display of the HP is completed (after the increase of the gauge stops), the color of the gauge may be changed to a color according to the number of points of the HP, or as the gauge increases, The color of the gauge may be represented by a color corresponding to the number of points at that time. In FIG. 138 (v 9), the blue gauge gag has increased to half, and in FIG. 138 (v 10), the blue gauge gag has increased to full. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100, and this completes the appearance animation of the mini game A icon. After all, in this example, the “box” icon of the mode a has appeared as the icon AI for the mini game A.

In FIG. 138 (11), the form of the Yoshimune (bow) character of the variable icon h0 is changed to the form b holding a bow, and the form of the Yoshimune (bow) character of the first hold icon h11 is also changed. It changes to a mode b with a bow, which is slightly different from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0. In FIG. 138 (12), both the Yoshimune (bow) character of the variable icon h0 and the Yoshimune (bow) character of the first hold icon h11 have fired an arrow and changed to the mode c.

In FIG. 138 (13), an arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0, which is close to the icon AI for the mini game A, is stuck in the carpet, and Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11. The arrow fired by the character is flying towards the carpet. In FIG. 138 (v 14-1 ), the arrow fired by the Yoshimune (bow) character of the 1-hold icon h11 is also stuck in the carpet, and both arrows hit the carpet beautifully.

139. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing, in stages, the continuation of the example of the production of the mini game A of the announcement of the Yoshimune treasure.

In FIG. 139 (U 15-1) following FIG. 138 (U 14-1), damage calculation is performed, and the damage is 60 points due to the two arrows sticking. In FIG. 139 (U 15-1), the damage point notification (the number “60”) is displayed, and in FIG. 139 (U 16), the blue gauge gag that has been full (100 points) is reduced. Have begun. When the gauge gag starts to decrease, the damage point notification display begins to fade and gradually disappears. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 139 (C17), the gauge gag has decreased to the remaining 40 points. The color of the gauge gag changes from blue until then, to green, when it reaches 50 points or less. The damage calculation may be started at the stage when the arrow pierces the carpet. That is, the damage calculation may be started and the gauge gag may be decreased at the timing shown in FIG. 138 (13) when the first arrow hits the carpet.

Both the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 that fired the arrow and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 continue to be displayed in the mode c, but are changed to the standby mode a. May be.

In FIG. 139 (e 18), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration 4”- The "decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative design on the upper left also shows the same combination of the missing decorative designs.

In FIG. 139 (v 19), the variable icon h0 is being displayed in a stopped state (during confirmation display), and the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 has started. Disappears. Also in FIG. 139 (v), the stop icon is being displayed (the final display is being made), and the change icon h0 is completely disappeared.

In FIG. 139 (21), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (e21), the first decorative symbol remains stopped and displayed, but in the second upper decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 that has fired the arrow changes from the mode c to the mode a of standby (default) when the symbol variable display is started. Then, in FIG. 139 (v 22), the moving animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (Yumi), which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far, is displayed in the variable icon display area. The CIS pedestal hs0 starts to move, and the second holding icon h12 of the pre-reading notice target holding, which has been displayed on the second stage hs2 until now, in the default display mode, is headed to the first stage hs1. The movement has started. Further, in the second hold number display at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (v22), the hold number in the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 to "1".

In FIG. 139 (23) also, the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the hold icon ends, and the icon of the Yoshimune (bow) character is displayed as the variable icon h0. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (e24), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the same figure (e25), the mode of the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0. Has changed to the state b with a bow. In FIG. 139 (26), the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0 shoots an arrow and changes to the mode c. In FIG. 139 (e27), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 is stuck in the carpet, and damage calculation is performed. In the same figure (e28), damage point notification (“40 In the same figure (29), the green gauge gag, which had 40 points remaining, started to decrease, and when the number of points was 20 points or less, it changed from green to red until then. ing. Also, when the gauge gag starts to decrease, the damage point notification begins to fade and gradually disappears. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 139 (v30), the gauge gag has disappeared to 0 points. In this way, the number of hit points (HP), which was 100 points at the beginning of the mini game A, has been successfully reduced to 0 points, and a treasure (preliminary icon) can be obtained. The number of damages given may exceed the number of remaining HP points.

In FIG. 139 (v31), the mini game A icon AI whose meter display MTh has become 0 is covered with the effect image EF5, and in FIG. 139 (v), the effect image EF5 disappears, and the mini game A of aspect d is displayed. For use icon AI is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 139 (v 33), when the icon AI for mini game A of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see (v) of FIG. 32), for mini game A of aspect d The icon AI is No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of the mode a of "box" of 1 is changed to the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is displayed in the stock area SS, as shown in FIG. 139 (34).

Eventually, in FIG. 139 (v), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”). "-"Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative design on the upper left also shows the same combination of the lost decorative designs.

In FIG. 139 (e 36) to FIG. 37 (e 37), the stop icon is displayed (confirmed display), the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is started, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 is It gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0. Further, here, the pedestal hs0, which has been slightly lowered until then, is rising toward the original height. Also in FIG. 139 (v), the stop display is being performed (the confirmation display is being performed), the change icon h0 completely disappears, and the pedestal hs0 has returned to the original height. The notice icon YI stocked in the stock area SS is displayed without being used. Thereafter, it continues to FIG. 132 (A24). In this example, the hit points are not recovered (for example, the remaining hit points are 40 in FIG. 139 (U17), and the remaining hit points are 40 in (U21) to (U24) in FIG. 139). , Hit points may be recovered. For example, the hit points may be recovered when the next symbol variable display is started.

FIG. 140 is a diagram showing the first modification to the third modification of the effect example of FIGS. 138(u) to 139(u).

The first modified example is an example of one-time acquisition of the notice icon, and is the same up to FIG. 138 (14-1). In FIG. 140 (U 15-2-1), the damage point notification should normally be displayed, but it is not displayed here, and in FIG. 140 (U 15-2-2), the meter display MTh is full. The mini-game A icon AI of the state a is covered with the effect image EF5, and in FIG. 15C, the effect image EF5 disappears and the mini-game A icon AI of the state d is displayed. There is. That is, the display of the damage point notification and the animation display in which the gauge gag is decreasing are omitted, and the icon AI for the mini game A of the mode d is displayed all at once. Of the damage point notification display and the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases, only the damage point notification display may be omitted, or only the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases may be omitted. ..

As shown in FIG. 140 (C 15-2-4), when the mini game A icon AI of the mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see (C 15-2-3) of the figure), the mode The icon AI for the mini game A of d is the No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of the mode a of the "box" of 1 is changed to the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is displayed in the stock area SS as shown in FIG. 140 (15-2-5).

Eventually, in FIG. 140 (U 15-2-6), the variable display of symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decoration 6”). -"Decoration 4"-"decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative design on the upper left also shows the same combination of the missing decorative designs.

In FIG. 140 (15-2-7), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (15-2-7), the first decorative symbol is still displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 that has fired the arrow changes from the mode c to the mode a of standby (default) when the symbol variable display is started. Then, in FIG. 140 (15-2-8), the moving animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow) that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 until now is The second hold icon h12, which has started to move toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS and has been displayed on the second stage hs2 until now, which is the default display mode, but which is the read-ahead notice target hold, is the first stage. The movement has started toward hs1. Further, in the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is restarted, and the icon AI′ is starting to be slightly displayed at the right end of the screen.

Also in FIG. 140 (15-2-9), the first decorative pattern in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the hold icon ends, and the variable icon h0 is of the Yoshimune (bow) type. The icon of mode a (mode of standby) is displayed. Further, in the second hold number display at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (15-2-9), the hold number of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 to "1". Furthermore, the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A continues, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is on the carpet and is a white box image in the first display mode (see FIG. 129(a)). The icon AI′ displaying the notice icon YI) of the mode “a” of No. 1 shown is displayed. In FIG. 140 (15-2-10), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and in this appearance animation, the meter display MTh of the hit point (HP) is additionally displayed in the icon AI′. To be done. However, the meter display MTh additionally displayed here is an empty state (state of 0). In FIG. 140 (15-2-11), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued. Here, hit points are added as part of the appearance animation to the empty meter display MTh added earlier. The animation in which (HP) is displayed is executed, and the blue gauge gag increases to full. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100, and this completes the appearance animation of the mini game A icon. After all, here too, the "box" icon of the mode a has appeared as the icon AI for the mini game A.

In FIG. 140 (15-2-12), the character mode of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the bow-holding mode b, and then the first hold icon h11 of Yoshimune ( Bow) is fired from the character. In Fig. 140 (15-2-13), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 is stuck in the carpet, and here again, the damage point notification display and the gauge gag are reduced. In FIG. 140 (U 15-2-14 ), the mini-game A icon AI of the mode a in which the meter display MTh is full is covered with the effect image EF 5, and the animation display is omitted. In 15-2-15), the effect image EF5 disappears, and the icon AI for the mini game A of aspect d is displayed all at once.

As shown in FIG. 140 (U 15-2-16), when the mini-game A icon AI of the mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see FIG. 15U 2-3), the mode The icon AI for the mini game A of d is No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of the mode a of the "box" of No. 1 is changed to the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed as shown in Fig. 140 (15-2-17). It is displayed under the notice icon YI previously stocked in 5). In this way, the one notice icon is successfully acquired in succession, and two notice icons YI are stocked.

In the second modified example shown in FIG. 140 (U 15-2-2b1) to FIG. 140 (U 15-2-2b5), the process is the same up to FIG. 138 (U 14-1). The modification here is also an example of one-time acquisition of the notice icon, but in this example, the display of the damage point notification and the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases are executed without omission. In FIG. 140 (15-2-2b1), the damage point notification (red number “100”) is displayed. Also, in FIG. 140 (15-2-2b2), the blue gauge gag that was in a full state (100 points) started to decrease, the gauge gag decreased to the remaining 50 points, and the color of the gauge gag remained until then. Changes from blue to green, and the green gauge gag continues to decrease. When the gauge gag starts to decrease, the damage point notification display begins to fade and gradually disappears.

The notice may be given by displaying the damage point notification or the color of the carpet. For example, if the display color of the damage point notification is rainbow, even if the notice icon on the carpet is not the "rainbow box" notice icon, you can get the "rainbow box" notice icon. From the characteristics of the notice icon of "rainbow box", the big hit of the pre-reading target fluctuation is decided. Alternatively, when the display color of the damage point notification is iridescent, the symbol variation display may be a big hit confirmation. Alternatively, when the display color of the damage point is a specific color (for example, red), the probability of acquiring the notice icon may be higher than when the display color is the default color. Alternatively, the symbol variation display when the display color of the damage point is a specific color (for example, red) may be more likely to be a big hit than the symbol variation display when the display color is the default color. The same may be applied to the case of carpet color.

In FIG. 140 (15-2-2b3), the green gauge gag continues to decrease, the gauge gag decreases to the remaining 20 points, and the color of the gauge gag changes from the previous green to red, and the red gauge. gag continues to decrease further. Moreover, the display of the damage point notification is almost disappearing.

In FIG. 140 (15-2-2b3), the green gauge gag continues to decrease, the gauge gag decreases to the remaining 20 points, and the color of the gauge gag changes from the previous green to red, and the red gauge. gag continues to decrease further. Moreover, the display of the damage point notification is almost disappearing. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 140 (15-2-2b4), the gauge has decreased to 0 points and the gauge gag has disappeared.

When the meter display MTh becomes 0, the icon AI for the mini game A is covered by the effect image EF5 as shown in FIG. 140 (U 15-2-2b5), and thereafter, FIG. 140 (U 15-2-3) and the like. It becomes the same as, and the notice icon YI can be obtained.

FIG. 140 (U 15-3-1) to FIG. 140 (U 15-3-3) in the third modified example, FIG. 140 (U 15-2-1) to FIG. 140 (U 15) in the first modified example. -2-3). In the third modified example, the next mini game A icon AI appears earlier than in the first modified example, and the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is restarted without waiting for the start of the next change. That is, as shown in FIG. 140 (step 15-3-4), when the mini game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS, the mini game A icon AI The appearance animation is started again, and the icon AI' is starting to be displayed slightly at the right end of the screen. Then, in FIG. 140 (step 15-3-5), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is white on the carpet in the first display mode. An icon AI′ displaying a box image (the notice icon YI of the mode “a” of “box” of No. 1 shown in FIG. 129(a)) is displayed. The stock display of the notice icon YI and the entire display of the icon AI' may be the same, the stock display may be earlier, or conversely, the whole display may be earlier. The meter display MTh is added to the icon AI' only after the next change is started.

Eventually, in FIG. 140 (15-3-6), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decoration 6”). -"Decoration 4"-"decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative design on the upper left also shows the same combination of the missing decorative designs.

FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a continuation of the third modified example of the effect examples of FIGS. 138(u1) to 139(u38), and the middle of the fourth modified example to the fifth modified example.

In FIG. 141 (U 15-3-7), which is a continuation of the third modification, the variable icon h0, which was the icon of the Yoshimune (bow) character, is completely displayed (stopped display) (completely displayed). There is.

In FIG. 141 (U 15-3-8) in which the next symbol variation display is started, the HP meter display MTh of the HP in an empty state is additionally displayed in the icon AI′, and the subsequent FIG. 141 (U 15-3-9). In (), the animation in which HP is displayed on the empty meter display MTh is executed, and the blue gauge gag increases to the full tank. After that, the flow is the same as that of FIG. 140 (15-2-12).

141 (U 15-4-1) to FIG. 14 (U 15-4-5) in the fourth modified example, FIG. 140 (U 15-3-1) to FIG. 14 (U 15) in the third modified example. -3-5). In the fourth modified example, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is executed a plurality of times within one symbol variable display, and a plurality of mini game A icons AI appear. The number of appearances of the mini-game A icon AI may be the maximum stock number of the advance notice icon YI, may be less than the maximum stock number, or may exceed the maximum stock number. However, if the maximum number of stocks is exceeded, the previously announced notice icon YI is used or a mini game A of Gase is performed before the new notice icon YI is acquired, and the new notice icon YI is added. Cannot be earned.

In FIG. 140 (15-4-6), in the symbol variation display that has already acquired one advance notice icon YI, a new icon AI′ is additionally displayed with the HP meter display MTh of the empty state, and continues. In FIG. 140 (15-4-7), the animation in which HP is displayed on the empty meter display MTh is executed, and the blue gauge gag is increased to the full tank. The pattern variation display is still continuing, and in FIG. 140 (U 15-4-8), the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0, which was the mode c so far, is also the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11. The characters of () also change to the form b with a bow, and aim at the carpet of the new icon AI for the mini game A. In the fourth modified example, it is possible to make a plurality of attacks in one symbol variation display. For example, the same mini-game A icon AI can be attacked multiple times. However, even if the attack can be performed a plurality of times, the same mini-game A icon AI may be allowed to attack only once.

Eventually, an arrow is fired from each of the two characters, and in FIG. 140 (U 15-4-9), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 is also Yoshimune of the first hold icon h11 ( The arrow fired from the character (bow) was also stuck in the carpet, the damage was calculated, the damage point notification (the number "40") was displayed, and the tank was full (100 points). The blue gauge gag is beginning to decrease in the same figure (U-15-4-10). In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 140 (15-4-11), the color of the gauge gag remains blue and decreases to 60 points. Here, before the meter display MTh decreases to 0 points, as shown in FIG. 140 (step 15-4-12), the symbol variation display ends, but the meter display MTh becomes 0 points, It is also possible to acquire the second notice icon YI. Further, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 subsequent to FIG. 140 (step 15-4-12), the mini game A is continuing and it is possible to obtain the second notice icon. .. It should be noted that the number of advance notice icons YI that can be acquired can be set in various ways based on the maximum number of stocks, as described above regarding the number of appearances of the mini-game A icons AI. That is, the number of advance notice icons YI to be acquired may be the maximum stock number, may be less than the maximum stock number, or may exceed the maximum stock number.

The fifth modified example is an example in which a dedicated area for the mini game A is prepared.

In the first decorative design display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (1-2-1), the background screen, which has been omitted in the drawings so far, is displayed. This background screen is a sea background screen. In this FIG. 141 (U 1-2-1), as in FIG. 138 (U 1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed. Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of these special diagrams 1 are all No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

In FIG. 141 (U 1-2-1), as in FIG. 138 (U 2), there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230 shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. , There are 3 in all. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (1-2-1), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as “3”.

In FIG. 141 (1-2-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. The third hold icon h13 is a hold icon in a display mode not shown in FIG. 131(a). That is, it is a display mode (VS display mode) in which VS is displayed as a character, and is a display mode for notifying that the mini game A is to be performed in the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold prior to the hold of the hold icon in this display mode. Is. That is, if the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the VS display mode, the mini game A is executed in the symbol variable display corresponding to the first hold and/or the second hold. It should be noted that when the VS display mode of the hold icon is displayed, the mini game A may or may not always be executed. Note that the hold of the hold icon in the VS display mode is the target hold of the prefetching notice, and the VS display mode is also a kind of the display mode of the prefetching notice.

In FIG. 141 (U 1-2-4), the variable display of the symbols is finished, and the combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 141 (U 1-2-5), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (1-2-5), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started. In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Toku-zu 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”.

Also in FIG. 141 (U 1-2-6), the first decorative pattern in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but in FIG. 141 (U 1-2-6), the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A is displayed. Has started. That is, when the exclusive area appearance animation of the mini game A is started, the flame effect image EF6 is displayed in the effect display area 208d where the hold frame UI was displayed, and the hold icon is also covered by the effect image EF6. Has been done. In FIG. 141 (1-2-7), the effect image EF6 of flame becomes thin, and the icons and the like in the back of the effect image EF6 are beginning to appear faintly.

In FIG. 141 (U 1-2-8), the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A ends, the flame effect image EF6 disappears completely, and the effect display area 208d replaces the hold frame UI with the mini game. The dedicated area MSS of A appears. Two Yoshimune (yumi) icons YMI1 and YMI2 are displayed in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A shown in FIG. 141 (U 1-2-8). Both of these two icons YMI1 and YMI2 are displayed in mode a (standby mode). Further, at the right end of the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A, an icon AI′ having a notice icon on the carpet is displayed, and further, a dedicated area for the meter display MTh of hit points (HP) is provided and dedicated to that area. A meter display MTh is displayed in the area. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 141 (1-2-8), the blue gauge gag is full. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (1-2-9), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the mini game A is started in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. It should be noted that the mini game A may be started at the same time when the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, or the mini game A may be started after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, or the first decorative symbol. The mini game A may be started before the variable display of the symbols is started. When the mini game A is started, the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A is once covered with the mini game opening image. The mini game opening image is a translucent image, and the match card of the mini game is displayed in characters (here, “Yoshimune” VS “carpet”).

In FIG. 141 (U 1-2-10), the mini game opening image disappears, and in FIG. 141 (U 1-2-11), the two icons YMI1 and YMI2 of Yoshimune (bow) which have been the mode a so far are displayed. The characters change into a mode b in which they both hold a bow, and aim at the carpet of the icon AI for the mini game A. Here, the greater the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons, the higher the possibility that the mini game A will be played even in the next variation. In this example, since two Yoshimune (bow) icons are displayed, it is more likely that the mini game A will be executed even in the next change, as compared with the case where only one Yoshimune (bow) icon is displayed. .. The number of Yoshimune (bow) icons may represent the degree of expectation that the notice icon Yi can be acquired. That is, the greater the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons, the higher the degree of expectation that the notice icon Yi can be acquired.

Alternatively, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons may correspond to the number of hold icons before the hold icon in the VS display mode. That is, if the number of the hold icons before the hold icon in the VS display mode is three, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons also becomes three, and as in this example, before the hold icon in the VS display mode. If the number of the hold icons is 2, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons is also 2. Further, the number of confrontations that can be confronted is determined according to the number of holding icons before the holding icon in the VS display mode, such as one carpet or one attack against one Yoshimune (bow) icon. The number of times may be displayed in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A.

Eventually, an arrow is fired from each of the two icons YMI1 and YMI2, and in FIG. 141 (U1-2-12), two arrows are stuck in the carpet, damage calculation is performed, and damage point notification (“ The number “40”) is displayed, and the blue gauge gag that was in a full state (100 points) is beginning to decrease in FIG.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a sequel to the fifth modified example of the effect examples of FIGS. 138(u1) to 139(u38) and an effect example in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted.

In FIG. 142 (U-1-2-14), which is a continuation of the fifth modified example, a semi-transparent notice image such as “following the next change” is displayed because one attack has ended while one symbol fluctuation display is being performed. Is displayed. The dedicated area MSS of the mini game A is once covered with this preview image. Note that this advance notice image may not be displayed in some cases.

In FIG. 142 (U 1-2-15), the notice image disappears, and in FIG. 142 (U 1-2-16), the variable display of the pattern ends, and the combination of the decorative patterns with a loss (“decoration 6”-“decoration”) 4"-"decoration 1") is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 142 (U 1-2-17) is in the stop display (confirming display), the sticked arrow disappears from the carpet, and in the same FIG (U 1-2-18), the first decoration in the central region is also displayed. Although the symbols are still stopped and displayed, the hold, which was the first hold until now, is exhausted, and the variable display of the symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (1-2-18), the variable display is started in the upper left second decorative symbol.

After that, an arrow is fired from each of the two icons YMI1 and YMI2, and in FIG. 142 (U 1-2-19), two arrows are stuck in the carpet, and as shown in FIG. 142 (U 1-2-20). In the meter display MTh shown, the point has decreased to 0 points and the gauge gag has disappeared. When the meter display MTh becomes 0, the mini game A icon AI is covered with the effect image EF5 as shown in FIG. In Fig. 142 (1-2-2), the effect image EF5 disappears and the mini-game A icon AI of the mode d is displayed. When the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see (1-2-2) in FIG. 142) as shown in FIG. 142 (1-2-2). , The icon AI for the mini game A of the mode d is No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of the mode a of “Box” 1 is changed to the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is displayed in the stock area SS as illustrated in FIG. 142 (1-2-24). When the stock of the notice icon YI is completed, the exclusive area disappearing animation of the mini game A is started. That is, when the dedicated area disappearing animation of the mini game A is started, the flame effect image EF6 gradually appears in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. In FIG. 142 (U 1-2-24), the exclusive area MSS of the mini game A is covered with the semi-transparent flame effect image EF6, and in FIG. 142 (U 1-2-25), the flame effect. It is covered by the image EF6. Note that the dedicated area disappearing animation of the mini game A may be started before the stocking of the notice icon YI is completed. For example, the dedicated area disappearing animation of the mini game A may be started immediately after the icon AI for mini game A of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS. Further, the exclusive area disappearing animation of the mini game A may be started at the same time when the stock of the notice icon YI is completed.

In FIG. 142 (1-2-26), the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A ends, the flame effect image EF6 disappears completely, and the effect display area 208d appears the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. Reverts to the previous configuration. That is, the hold frame UI is displayed, and the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS displays the variation icon h0 in the default display mode. The variable icon h0 in the default display mode corresponds to the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 141 (U 1-2-3) to FIG. 141 (U 1-2-5). Further, on the first stage hs1 of the variable icon display area CIS, the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. The first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is the third hold icon h13 displayed in the VS display mode shown in FIGS. 141 (U 1-2-3) to (U 1-2-5). Equivalent to. The first hold icon h11 corresponding to the third hold icon h13 that was displayed in the VS display mode may be displayed in the VS display mode as it is, or any one of the blue to iridescent icons. It may be displayed in a form.

Note that the hold (fourth hold) after the third hold icon h13 that was displayed in the VS display mode is the target hold for the prefetching notice, and is stocked as shown in FIG. 142 (1-2-2). The notice icon YI being displayed may be used during the fourth pending symbol variation display. In addition, the second hold icon h12 may be displayed in the VS display mode, and the mini game may be played until the second hold symbol variation display is displayed.

Eventually, in FIG. 142 (1-2-27), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”). -"Decoration 4"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative design on the upper left also shows the same combination of the missing decorative designs.

Next, an example of an effect in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted will be described.

In FIG. 142 (e 1-1), the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d is displayed. The variable icon h0 is an icon of a Yoshimune (bow) character, but the first hold icon h11 is an icon in a default display mode. In this modified example as well, the hold of the first hold icon h11 becomes the prefetching notice target hold. In addition, the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS.

In FIG. 142 (e2), the notice icon YI changed from the mini game A icon AI of the mode d is stocked in the stock area SS. The notice icon YI stocked here is No. 1 shown in FIG. It is the notice icon of the aspect a of the "box" of 1. Further, the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the decorative symbols with a loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 7”). The display is stopped, and the second decorative design on the upper left also displays the same combination of the lost decorative designs. Furthermore, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the change icon h0 has disappeared.

In FIG. 142 (e3), the hold, which has been the first hold until now, is exhausted and the variable display of symbols is started. The symbol variation display started here is a symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the stock area SS is used. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (E3), the first decorative symbol remains stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started. Then, the moving animation of the hold icon is started, and in FIG. 142 (e4), the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (yumi), which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far, is displayed as the variable icon h0. ing. The character of Yoshimune (bow) who has become the variable icon h0 has changed from the mode c to the mode a of the standby (default).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (e5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, a mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is started. The mini game here is a little different from the mini game A described so far, and the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI in which the target icon hangs on the parachute appears. In FIG. 142 (e6), the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI whose target icon hangs on the parachute is descending from the upper right of the screen, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 shown in the same figure (e7) is , The character changes to b with a bow and is aiming for the target icon, and eventually a character of Yoshimune (bow) fires an arrow. In FIG. 142 (e8), the arrow fired from the Yoshimune (bow) character hits the target icon, and the promotion of the notice icon YI displayed in stock is confirmed. In FIG. 142 (e 9), the letters “Lv.UP” for notifying the promotion confirmation are displayed next to the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI. It should be noted that the arrow fired from the Yoshimune (bow) character of the variable icon h0 may always hit the target icon of the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI, or may not hit it. ..

In FIG. 142(e10), the notice icon YI which is displayed in stock is covered with the effect image EF7, and when the effect image EF7 disappears, the notice icon YI changes to the No. shown in FIG. 129(a) so far. No. 1 shown in FIG. It has been promoted to the "red box" notice icon 2 (Fig. 142 (e11)).

Eventually, the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI disappears as shown in FIG. 142 (e12), and in the same figure (e13), the promoted notice icon YI is used. That is, when used, the notice icon YI of “red box” in the form a in which the box is closed is changed to the form d in which the box is open and the notice display YH is displayed in the box. A pop-up animation is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 7 is a red notice display of "red change", which is a notice for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, etc. will be changed in two steps.

In FIG. 142 (e 13 ), the used notice icon YI disappears and the variable icon change animation using the red “red change” notice display YH is started. In FIG. 142 (e 14), the red “red change” notice display YH has changed to a light ball YHb.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect of promoting the stocked notice icon YI and a modification of the example of the effect.

In FIG. 142 (e15) continuing from FIG. 142 (e14), the light ball YHb in which the red “red change” notice display YH has changed is aimed at the variable icon h0 which is the icon of the Yoshimune (bow) character. When it flies and hits the variation icon h0, the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image EF8, and the effect image EF8 disappears, the variation icon h0 changes to the No. 1 shown in FIG. It has changed to the "green" variation icon of 4 (Fig. 142 (e16)).

In this example, the mini game for promoting the stock-displayed notice icon YI has been performed, but a mini-game for further obtaining the notice icon may also be performed. Alternatively, in the variable display in which the notice icon YI is used, the mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may not be performed, and only the mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be performed.

Further, in this example, a dedicated icon such as the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI appears, but the hold icon may change to the notice icon promotion icon, or the change icon may change to the notice icon promotion icon. It may be. Furthermore, an icon for obtaining a notice icon, such as the mini-game icon AI, may change to an icon for promoting a notice icon. Further, the appearance of the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI serves as a notice that the notice icon may be promoted, and the mini game itself that promotes the notice icon YI also notifies that the notice icon may be promoted. It corresponds to the production. In this case, the variation icon h0 is used to execute the effect of giving a notice that the notice icon may be promoted. However, even if a notice other than the change icon h0 or the hold icon is used, the notice may be given. Good, or be sure to give a notice.

Next, a modified example of the effect example in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted will be described.

In FIG. 143 (e 1-2-1), the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d is displayed. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both Yoshimune (bow) character icons. The hold of the first hold icon h11 becomes the look-ahead notice hold. In addition, the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS.

In FIG. 143 (e 1-2-2), the variable display of symbols continues, and the notice icon YI of the mode “a” of the “box” which is changed from the icon AI for the mini game A of the mode d is stocked in the stock area SS. Has been done.

In FIG. 143 (e 1-2-3), there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230 shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 143 (e 1-2-3), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as “2”.

In FIG. 143 (e 1-2-4), the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the second stage hs2. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 representing the increased second hold is the display mode of the Yoshimune (bow) character. If a mini-game for acquiring the notice icon is played in the currently displayed symbol variation display, the Yoshimune (bow) character of the second hold icon h12 may not be used, or the opposite. It may be used for. That is, during the variable display of symbols with an increase in hold, use of the increased hold icon may or may not be prohibited from being used in the mini game for acquiring the notice icon.

In FIG. 143 (e 1-2-5), the variable display is finished without using the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is lost in the central area. The combination of the decorative patterns ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also stops and displays the same combination of the lost decorative patterns. Furthermore, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the change icon h0 has disappeared.

In FIG. 143 (e 1-2-6), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. The symbol variation display started here is a symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the stock area SS is used. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 143 (e 1-2-6), the first decorative symbol remains stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started. Then, the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and in FIG. 143 (e 1-2-7), the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far is the default display mode. The variable icon h0 is displayed as it is.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 143 (e 1-2-8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is also started in this modification. In FIG. 143 (e1-2-9), the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI in which the target icon hangs on the parachute is descending from the upper right of the screen, and this modification shown in the same figure (e1-2-10). In the example, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 changes to the state b holding a bow and aims at the target icon. In FIG. 143 (e 1-2-11), an arrow is fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the hold icon, and in the same figure (e 1-2-12), the fired arrow heads toward the target icon. Flying In FIG. 143 (e 1-2-13), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) hits the target icon, and the promotion of the notice icon YI displayed in stock is confirmed. In FIG. 143 (e 1-2-14), the letter “Lv.UP” for notifying the promotion confirmation is displayed next to the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI, and FIG. 143 (e 1-2-15) Then, when the notice icon YI displayed in stock is covered with the effect image EF7 and the effect image EF7 disappears, the notice icon YI has been promoted from the "box" so far to the "red box" notice icon. (FIG. 143 (e 1-2-16)).

In FIG. 143 (e 1-2-17), the reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI promoted to “red box” is used in the reach state. That is, as shown in FIG. 143 (e 1-2-18), the box of the notice icon YI opens, and from the inside, the No. shown in FIG. The notice display YH of "VS Swordsman Reach" of 19 comes out. The notice display YH of "VS swordsman reach" is a face icon of a swordsman character, and is a display for notifying that the super reach effect of the VS swordsman reach will be performed by the displayed variation. In FIG. 143 (e 1-2-19), the used notice icon YI disappears, but the notice display YH of “VS Swordsman Reach” is still displayed.

In FIG. 143 (e 1-2-20), the notice display YH of “VS swordsman reach” has disappeared, but at the same time that the notice display YH disappears, the super reach effect of VS swordsman reach is started as the notice. .. When the notice display YH of "VS Swordsman Reach" is displayed, the super reach effect of VS Swordsman Reach may or may not be started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 143 (e 1-221), the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and the first decoration shown in the same figure (e 1-2-22) continues. On the pattern display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed. It should be noted that when the super reach effect is started, all the reservation frame UIs are hidden (disappeared) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variation icon h0 does not disappear and remains displayed on the remaining top plate. Further, the second decorative design and the second hold number display are also continuously displayed. The entire hold frame UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire hold frame UI may be continuously displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be erased or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 143 (e 1-2-23), “decoration 5” as a medium symbol is displayed in large size together with the scene where Yoshimune is defeated. In the subsequent FIG. 143 (e 1-2-24), the same effect as the wipe effect described with reference to FIG. 86 (a 14-2-4) to FIG. 86 (a 14-2-5) is performed. As shown in (E 1-2-24), the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L once becomes the wipe display of the same color with no pattern. By this wipe display, the variable icon h0 disappears, but the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. The variable icon h0 may be displayed.

In 143 (e 1-2-25), the background is returned to the normal background by wiping out, and the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the character of Yoshimune (bow), is also returned to the default display mode. .. However, the first hold icon h11 may be in the display mode of the Yoshimune (bow) character until it is consumed, or the display mode may be changed at another timing.

In 143 (e 1-226), the display is stopped with a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 6”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6”.

It should be noted that in this modification as well, a mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may be performed together. Alternatively, in the variable display in which the notice icon YI is used, the mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may not be performed, and only the mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be performed.

Also in this modified example, the hold icon may be changed to the notice icon promotion icon, or the change icon may be changed to the notice icon promotion icon. Furthermore, an icon for obtaining a notice icon, such as the mini-game icon AI, may change to an icon for promoting a notice icon. Further, the appearance of the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI serves as a notice that the notice icon may be promoted, and the mini game itself that promotes the notice icon YI also notifies that the notice icon may be promoted. It corresponds to the production. Then, in this modified example, the hold icon is used to execute the effect of notifying that the notice icon may be promoted. You may choose to give a notice.

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect in which the notice display YH of the button appears from the notice icon YI.

In FIG. 144 (a1), the symbol variation display, which is the variation of the prefetch target, is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 144 (a1), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started variable display, and the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS has a default display mode. The variable icon h0 of is displayed. It should be noted that there is no single hold icon, and “0” is displayed for both the second hold number displays of special figure 1 and special figure 2. Further, two notice icons YI are displayed in stock.

In FIG. 144 (a2), the first notice icon YI previously stocked (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position) is used, and the first notice icon YI opens the box. The display mode is changed to the display mode d, and the No. shown in FIG. The notice button YH of “button” 21 is popping out. This "button" notice display YH is a button image that imitates the chance button 136, and is a display that changes the displayed symbols to give a notice that the button effect will be performed. Even if it is done, the button effect may not be actually performed.

In FIG. 144 (a3), the first notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, is deleted, but the notice display YH of the “button” remains displayed. In the subsequent FIG. 144 (a4), the notice display YH of the “button” changes to a light ball YHb, and as shown in the same drawing (a5), the light ball YHb is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It flies to the right end portion of the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 144 (a6), the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed at the right end portion thereof. Further, a character "preparing" indicating that the button operation is not yet accepted is displayed on the button image icon 136aI. Therefore, the display of the button image icon 136aI and the character "preparing" is also a display indicating that the button effect is stocked, and the button effect is performed in the currently displayed symbol variation display. It is also a display for announcing.

In FIG. 144 (a7), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 144 (a8), the "decoration 6" that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a before the super reach effect is moved to a position below the second decorative symbol, and is swinging in the right symbol display area 208c. The fluctuating “decoration 6” moves to below the second hold number display. Next, the button image icon 136aI and the character "preparing" that have been displayed in the lower right corner until now are moved to the lower left corner before shifting to the super reach effect. In FIG. 144 (a9), the button image icon 136aI and the variation icon h0 overlap each other during the movement. That is, the button image icon 136aI passes behind the variable icon h0. As a result, the variable icon h0 overlaps part of the button image icon 136aI from the front side. Note that the button image icon 136aI may pass through the labor side of the variable icon h0 so that a part of the button image icon 136aI overlaps the variable icon h0 from the front side. Alternatively, the button image icon 136aI and the character "in preparation" may be moved so as not to overlap the variable icon h0. Alternatively, the button image icon 136aI and the character “in preparation” may not be moved, and the button image icon 136aI may be moved to the moving position instantaneously without performing the animation. That is, the display position may be instantaneously switched. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 144 (a9) disappears. In FIG. 144 (a10), the button image icon 136aI in the default display mode and the characters “in preparation” have been moved to the lower left corner.

Eventually, super reach production was started, and VS swordsman reach was started here. The image of the enemy swordsman is greatly displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 144 (a11), and the main character is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same figure (a12). An animation of a duel scene between Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed.

In the middle of the duel scene animation, as shown in FIG. 144 (a13), the second notice icon YI (the notice icon YI stocked in the second stock position) that was stocked later and remains until now is displayed. No. shown in FIG. 129(b) is used. Twenty “UP” notice display YH is popping out. This "UP" notice display YH is a displayed variable display, and is a display for notifying that the effect will be promoted. When the "UP" notice display YH is displayed, the effect is always promoted. You may or may not be promoted. When the notice display YH of "UP" is displayed, the notice display YH is immediately used, and as shown in FIG. 144 (a14), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI is started. That is, when this promotion animation is started, the button image icon 136aI in the default display mode (first display mode), which was displayed in the lower left corner, is displayed together with the characters "preparing" and the flame effect image EF6'. It is covered by and is difficult to see. In FIG. 144 (a15), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI ends, the flame effect image EF6′ disappears, and the button image icon 136aI is promoted to the button image icon 136aI in the fifth display mode (red). There is.

The animation of the duel scene continues while the cut-in image CI3 and the like are displayed (FIG. 144 (a16)). In FIG. 144 (a17), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI has started again. The button image icon 136aI is promoted for the second time without any notice. However, the promotion may be announced by other notice, may be given notice, or may not be given notice. In FIG. 144 (a17), the button image icon 136aI in the fifth display mode (red) is covered with the effect image EF6' of flame again together with the characters "preparing", making it difficult to see. In FIG. 144 (a18), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI ends, the flame effect image EF6' disappears, and the button image icon 136aI is promoted to the lever image icon 139aI. Although neither the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 nor the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 has an operation lever, the operation lever is provided at a position where the player can operate. Further, instead of the operation lever, a transparent portion 191 that is rotatable in the front-rear direction shown in FIG. 10 or the like, or a second chance button 137 may be used.

In FIG. 144 (a19), the cut-in image CI3 has disappeared, the animation of the duel scene is approaching the end, and the time to start button production is approaching. In FIG. 144 (a20), the animation in which the lever image icon 139aI is gradually enlarged is started. The lever image icon 139aI becomes the lever image 139a by this animation. When this animation is started, the character "in preparation" disappears, and after the figure (a21), the lever image 139a is once enlarged to the maximum in the figure (a22). Then, in FIG. 144 (a23), the lever image 139a becomes slightly smaller, and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (a23), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the lever is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 144 (a24)). The button performance here is a kind of final judge performance. The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 144 (a25) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period.

The timing of FIG. 144 (a26) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the operation lever 139 at this timing. Then, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 70, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 144 (a27), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and the display shown in FIG. The first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect image and the left pattern and the right pattern etc. of the first decorative pattern are overlapped by the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral part. It is difficult to visually recognize the object 224Gd as compared with the case where the object 224Gd is not overlapped. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. Further, the thousand box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 67 operates and moves downward, and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd. In addition, the light guide plate IL emits light. The effect production by the thousand box effect 224H shown in FIG. 67 is a big hit confirmation effect.

It should be noted that the production using various types of accessory in FIG. 144 (a27) may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be executed when the time has elapsed.

After that, the various accessories return to the initial position, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the display of the effect image is switched to the display of the final judgment result on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 144 (a28), "decoration 6" as a medium symbol is displayed in large size together with the scene in which Yoshimune has won. After this, the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 145 is a diagram showing, in stages, a production example in which the number of executions of button production is stocked.

In FIG. 145 (Ob1), the super reach effect of VS swordsman reach is started, and the image of the enemy swordsman is greatly displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 145 (Ob1). Further, two notice icons YI are displayed in stock. An animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 145 (Ob2). In addition, the first notice icon YI previously stocked (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position) is used, and the first notice icon YI is a display mode in which the box is opened. It changes to d and the notice display YH of the "button" is popping out from the box. The "button" notice display YH in this example of performance is a display for giving notice that the "button" notice display YH itself is stocked.

In FIG. 145 (b3), the first notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, is deleted, but the notice display YH of the “button” remains displayed. In the subsequent FIG. 145 (Ob4), the advance notice display YH of the “button” changes to the light ball YHb, and as shown in the same FIG. (Oa5), the light ball YHb changes to the effect icon display area DIS. It flies to the right end part of the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 144 (a6), the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed at the right end portion thereof. Further, the character "x1" representing the number of stocks is displayed on the button image icon 136aI. One button effect is executed for one stock. Here, the button image icon 136aI is stocked, but in short, it means that the number of executions of the button effect is stocked.

In FIG. 145 (b7), the second stocked notice icon YI (the notice icon YI stocked in the second stock position) that was later stocked is used, and the notice display of the “button” is again displayed from the box. YH is popping out. In FIG. 145 (b8), the second notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, is deleted, and the notice display YH of the “button” is changed to the light ball YHb, and the light ball is changed. YHb flies toward the button image icon 136aI displayed in the lower right corner and hits the button image icon 136aI. In FIG. 145 (b9), the stock number on the button image icon 136aI is “×3”. This means that when the light ball YHb hits the button image icon 136aI in FIG. 145 (b8), two button image icons 136aI are stocked. As described above, the "button" notice display YH is a display for notifying that the "button" notice display YH itself is stocked, and the number of the "button" notice display YH displayed It is not announced in advance whether the button image icon 136aI will be stocked, and thus, a plurality of button image icons 136aI may be stocked for a single "button" advance notice display YH. For example, a maximum of 10 button image icons 136aI may be stocked for one advance notice YH of the “button”. However, it may be configured such that only one button image icon 136aI is stocked for one notice display YH of the “button”. Further, the number of stocks of the button image icon 136aI may be determined according to the display mode of the “button” advance notice display YH. For example, in the notice display YH of the “button” in the first display mode, the stock number of the button image icon 136aI is 1, but in the notice display YH of the “button” in the fifth display mode, the stock number of the button image icon 136aI. May be 5. The maximum stock number of the button image icon 136aI is, for example, 10. In other words, the maximum number of executions of the button effect is 10 times.

In FIG. 145 (b10), the effect image EF9 is added to the button image icon 136aI, and it is announced that the button effect will start. In FIG. 145 (b11), a large button image 136a is displayed. The stock number on the button image icon 136aI has been reduced from “×3” to “×2” at this stage. Then, in FIG. 145 (b12), the button image 136a is slightly smaller, and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 145 (b12), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Eventually, the button effect starts and the operation valid period starts (FIG. 145 (b13)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 145 (b14) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation valid period started.

The timing of FIG. 145 (b15) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, in the same manner as the example shown in FIG. 69, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 145 (b16), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the non-display screen, and at the same time as shown in FIG. The first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the light guide plate IL is also emitting light.

It should be noted that the effect using various types of accessories in FIG. 145 (b16) may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be executed when the time has elapsed.

In FIG. 145 (b17), each of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd returns to the initial position, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the super reach is achieved. Promotion of the production is being carried out. In other words, it is announced that Panda will participate in the VS Swordsman Reach to help Yoshimune, the main character. Thus, in FIG. 145 (b18), the animation of the duel scene continues with the panda participating in the battle, and in FIG. 145 (b19), the effect image EF9 is added again to the button image icon 136aI, and the second button is pressed. It is announced that the production will start. In FIG. 145 (b20), the second button effect is started, the button image 136a is displayed, and the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed, and a little time has passed since the operation valid period started. ing. Further, the number of stocks on the button image icon 136aI is reduced from “×2” to “×1”.

The timing of FIG. 145 (b21) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as shown in FIG. 145 (b22), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the gold cut-in image GCT described as "Go!!Go!!" in the sixth display mode (gold). It is foretold that the expectation of a big hit is quite high.

Note that the gold cut-in image GCT in FIG. 145 (b22) may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 has been operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. If it does, it may be executed.

In FIG. 145 (b23), the gold cut-in image GCT disappears and the animation of the duel scene returns, and in the following FIG. 145 (b24), the animation of the duel scene is about to end. In FIG. 145 (b25), the final judge effect is started, and a large default button image 136a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as a part of this final judge effect. Then, in FIG. 145 (b26), it is announced that the effect image EF9 is added to the button image icon 136aI three times and the third button effect is started. In FIG. 145 (Ob27), the promotion effect of the button image 136a is performed, the effect image EF10 is added to the larger default button image 136a, and in the same diagram (Ob28), the button of the fifth display mode (red). It has been promoted to image 136. By being promoted to the button image 136 of the fifth display mode (red), the expectation of the big hit is further increased. In addition, at the stage of FIG. 145 (b27), the display of the button image icon 136aI and the stock number has disappeared.

FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect in which the number of executions of the button effect is stocked, and another example of the effect.

In FIG. 146 (Ob29) subsequent to FIG. 145 (Ob28), the button image 136a of the fifth display mode (red) is slightly smaller, and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. There is. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 146 (b29), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 146 (b30)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 146 (b31) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation valid period started.

The timing of FIG. 146 (b32) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 70, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 144 (a27), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and the display shown in FIG. The first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect image and the left pattern and the right pattern etc. of the first decorative pattern are overlapped by the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral part. It is difficult to visually recognize the object 224Gd as compared with the case where the object 224Gd is not overlapped. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. Further, the thousand box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 67 operates and moves downward, and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd. In addition, the light guide plate IL emits light. The effect production by the thousand box effect 224H shown in FIG. 67 is a big hit confirmation effect.

It should be noted that the production using various types of accessories in FIG. 146 (b33) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be executed when the time has elapsed.

After that, the various accessories return to the initial position, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the display of the effect image is switched to the display of the final judgment result on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (b34), "decoration 6" as a medium symbol is displayed in large size together with the scene in which Yoshimune has won. After this, the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed.

In this example, when one button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is consumed (used), as shown in FIG. 145 (b12), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed. The operation promotion notification image including is displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 146 (b30), the button of the button image 136a displayed as the operation promotion notification image may be promoted, but one button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is consumed. When (used), the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed without fail, or the button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen may be displayed. The button of the button image 136a displayed as the operation promotion notification image when it is completely consumed (used) may be configured to be promoted without fail. Further, in this example, when one button image icon 136aI is consumed (used), one operation promotion notification image is displayed, but when one button image icon 136aI is consumed (used), the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Two or more images may be displayed or one image may be displayed, or two or more images may be displayed. Here, the emission color of the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light may be upgraded in accordance with the promotion of the button image 136a of the operation promotion notification image. Alternatively, the button image 136 of the operation promotion notification image may not be promoted, and only the emission color of the chance button lamp 138 may be promoted. The emission color of the chance button lamp 138 may change from the default color to red when one stocked button image icon 136aI is consumed, and from red to gold when two of the stocked button image icons 136aI are consumed. In the case of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 is used, but in the case of operating means different from the chance button 136 (for example, the operating lever 139 etc.), the emission color of the light emitting means that causes these operating means to emit light. Will be promoted.

In this example, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed as the operation promotion notification image, but only the button image 136a may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image, and the remaining time is displayed as the operation promotion notification image. Only the display meter MT may be displayed, and character representations such as “press button”, “PUSH”, “continuous hit”, and “long press” may be displayed as the operation prompting notification image (even if the character representation indicates an operation method. ) And a button image 136a may be displayed, only the character notation may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image, or the character notation and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image. The character notation, the button image 136a, and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image. Further, as the operation promotion notification display, an image simulating the shape of the operating means (for example, button display 136a), an image showing the elapse of the operation valid period of the operating means and/or the remaining time of the operation valid period (for example, remaining time). Time display meter MT), character display related to operation (for example, “press button” or “PUSH”, “continuous hit”, “long press”) and image display other than the above (for example, one or a plurality of “shapes of operating means”) Character image display different from the image imitating the above (By displaying the character image as the operation promotion notification display, the displayed variable display may be more likely to be a big hit eventually than when it is not displayed.)" and the like. ), one or more image displays may be displayed.

146 (c1) to (c7) of FIG. 146 are diagrams showing a first example in which the mini game is started in response to the button operation in stages.

In FIG. 146 (c1), the first decorative pattern in the central area is stopped and displayed, but the movement animation of the hold icon ends, and the variation icon h0 is the icon of the mode a (standby mode) of the type of villager. Is displayed. Also, as the first hold icon h11, the icon of the mode a (standby mode) of the type of villager is displayed. Further, although the second hold icon h12 is also displayed, this second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode. In the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, an icon of the mode a (standby mode) of the type of panto shown in FIG. 130(c) is displayed as the opponent icon for the mini game B. The panda character with the opponent icon TI also executes the standby animation (default animation). Further, in the appearance area AS, No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (c2), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the rock-paper-scissors competition of the mini game B is then started. In this example, the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is performed by operating the chance button 136. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (c3), between the icon of the villager character, which is the variable icon h0, and the icon of the panto character, which is the opponent icon, which is scheduled to perform a rock-paper-scissors battle, An operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 146 (c3), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 146 (c4)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 146 (c5) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation valid period started.

The timing of FIG. 146 (c6) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, according to the operation of the chance button 136, the rock-paper-scissors showdown is started, and the rock-paper-scissors show-up animation is performed. In FIG. 146 (c7), the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won. Then, it continues to FIG. 132 (a 9-1).

It should be noted that the start of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. That is, the mini game may be started only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the mini game is started even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period. May be configured such that it is easier to win the mini game, that is, it is easier to obtain the notice icon YI when the player operates the device within a valid operation period than when the player does not operate it.

FIG. 146 (o d1) to FIG. 146 (o d7) are diagrams showing a second example in which the mini game is started in response to a button operation in stages.

146 (o d1) to (o d2) are the same states as FIG. 146 (o c1) to (o c2) except that the notice icon YI is stocked.

In FIG. 146 (d3), the stocked notice icon YI is used, and the notice display YH of “button” appears from the inside. Although the used notice icon YI disappears in FIG. 146 (d4), the notice display YH of the “button” is still displayed, and the notice display YH of the “button” is displayed in FIG. 146 (d5). It moves toward between the icon of the character of the villager, which is the variable icon h0, and the icon of the character of Panta, which is the opponent icon, which is scheduled to have a rock-paper-scissors confrontation. In FIG. 146 (d6), the notice display YH of the “button” is located between the icon of the character of the villager who is the variable icon h0 and the icon of the character of Panta who is the opponent icon.

In FIG. 146 (d7), the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed on the advance notice display YH of the “button”. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 146 (d7), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the subsequent steps are the same as in FIG. 146 (c6) and the like.

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon YI can be seen before the emission.

In FIG. 147 (or a1), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”- The "decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also shows the same combination of lost decorative patterns. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 147 (or a1) is No. 1 in FIG. The icon has changed to the icon a of the type of villager described in 17. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 indicating the target hold of the prefetching notice is the default display mode.

In FIG. 147 (or a2), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 147 (or a2), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started and the upper right is displayed. In the 2-holding number display, the holding number in Toku-zu 1 is decremented by 1 and becomes “1”. Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, which has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B is started and the effect image EF1 is displayed. Also, in FIG. 147 (or a2), the moving animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager character, which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far, starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, and is displayed on the second stage hs2 so far. The second hold icon h12 in the default display mode has started moving toward the first stage hs1.

Also in FIG. 147 (or a3-1), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the movement animation of the hold icon ends, and the variation icon h0 is used as a variation icon h0. Aspect) icon is displayed. The villager character with the variable icon h0 is executing the standby animation (default animation). In addition, the appearance animation of the opponent icon also ends, the effect image EF1 disappears in the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and the opponent icon TI has a mode a ( The (standby mode) icon is displayed, and the panda character of this opponent icon TI is also executing the standby animation (default animation). Further, in the appearance area AS, the No. shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of "change" of 6 is displayed. In addition, No. shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 133 and the like, the “change” 6 is the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI, but here, it is treated as the notice icon YI. Strictly speaking, in the case of the notice display YH, there is no frame display surrounding the changed character, but in the case of the notice icon YI, there is the frame display. Since the "change" notice icon YI is displayed with the default color "change" characters, the player selects from the notice icon won by winning the rock-paper-scissors confrontation when the appearance area AS is displayed. The notice display YH to be released is known.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 147 (or a4), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central area. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the rock-paper-scissors competition of the mini game B is then started. In FIG. 147 (or a5), a rock-paper-scissors competition animation is performed by the villager character of the variable icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, and the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won.

In FIG. 147 (or a7), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started by the victory of the villager character of the variable icon h0. That is, the "change" notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS exits from the appearance area AS, is temporarily displayed in a large size, and moves to the stock area SS as shown in FIG. 147 (or a8). , Displayed in stock. The notice icon YI thus stock-displayed is also displayed with the character "change" of the default color.

On the pedestal hs0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 147 (or a9), the display mode of the character of the villager and the replacement animation of the default display mode are started. Also, the opponent icon TI gradually disappears from the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, the empty appearance area AS gradually fades out to the right end of the screen. In FIG. 147 (or a10), the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. Absent.

In FIG. 147 (or a11), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”- The "decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also shows the same combination of lost decorative patterns.

In FIG. 147 (or a12), the pre-reading notice target suspension, which has been the first suspension until now, is exhausted, and the symbol variation display that is the pre-reading subject variation is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 147 (or a12), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started variable display, and the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS has a default display mode. The variable icon h0 of is displayed. Further, the notice icon YI of "change" has been displayed in stock so far.

In FIG. 147 (or a14), the variable icon change animation using the "change" notice icon YI that has been displayed in stock until then is started. In this variation icon change animation, as shown in FIG. 147 (or a14), the effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used is added to the notice icon YI of "change". The "change" notice icon YI corresponds to the "change" notice display YH when the effect image EF11 is added. In FIG. 147 (or a15), the “change” notice icon YI (“change” notice display YH) to which the effect image EF11 is added flies toward the change icon h0 and hits the change icon h0. .. In FIG. 147 (or a16), the variation icon change animation ends, and the variation icon h0, which has been the default display aspect before the animation starts, is displayed in No. 131 of FIG. The display mode is changed to the white blinking display mode described in 2.

In this example, it may be considered that the “change” notice icon YI itself collides with the change icon h0.

The example shown in FIG. 147 (or a3-2) is an example in which the notice icon YI of the same type is displayed in the appearance area AS. Here, three "change" notice icons YI are displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 147 (or a3-3) is an example in which different types of notice icons YI are displayed in the appearance area AS. Here, the "red change" notice icon YI, the "super hot" notice icon YI, and the "SP" notice icon YI are displayed. The types are not limited to all different types, and may be different types. For example, the notice icon YI of "change", the notice icon YI of "change", and the notice icon YI of "SP" may be displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 147 (or b) is an example in which a plurality of advance notice icons YI of the same type (here, advance notice icons YI of “change”) are stocked in the stock area SS.

The example shown in FIG. 147 (or b) is an example in which a plurality of different types of notice icons YI( are stocked in the stock area SS. Here, the notice icon YI of “red change” and “super hot”. The notice icon YI and the notice icon YI of "SP" are displayed. Note that the notice icons YI are not limited to all different types, and may be different types. The "change" notice icon YI and the "SP" notice icon YI may be displayed, and the "box" notice icon YI and the "red box" notice icon YI shown in FIG. The "button" notice icon YI may be stocked, or the "box" notice icon YI, the "box" notice icon YI, and the "gold box" notice icon YI may be stocked. , May be stocked.

In each of the examples shown in FIGS. 147 (or d), FIG. 147 (or e), and FIG. 147 (or f), the box-shaped notice icon YI shown in FIG. Is an example in which a plurality is displayed. The example shown in FIG. 147 (or d) is an example in which three notice icons YI of “box” shown in FIG. 129(a) are displayed in the appearance area AS. That is, the same type of box-shaped icon is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 147 (or e), the notice icon YI of “box”, the notice icon YI of “box”, and the notice icon YI of “red box” are displayed in the appearance area AS. Is. That is, box-shaped icons of the same type and box-shaped icons of different types are displayed in combination. In the example shown in FIG. 147 (or f), the notice icon YI of “box”, the notice icon YI of “red box”, and the notice icon YI of “gold box” are displayed in the appearance area AS. Is. That is, all different types of box-shaped icons are displayed.

Here, the example shown in FIG. 147 (or a3-2), (or a3-3), (or d), FIG. 147 (or e), or FIG. 147 (or f) appears if the mini game succeeds. This is an example in which all the notice icons YI displayed in the area AS can be acquired. It should be noted that if the mini game succeeds, any one or two of the notice icons YI displayed in the appearance area AS may be configured to be obtainable. In addition, a roulette notice that sequentially displays the notice icons YI that can be acquired in the appearance area AS is given, and the roulette is displayed before the mini game is started/while the mini game is being executed/after the mini game is successful. It may be configured such that the notice icon that can be stopped and acquired (or acquired) is confirmed.

Next, an example of production in which one stocked notice icon is used multiple times will be described.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of effect in which one stocked notice icon is used a plurality of times.

In FIG. 148 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. The first hold represented by the first hold icon h11 is the target hold for the prefetch notice. Also, the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS displays the variable icon h0 in the default display mode, and nothing is displayed in the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 148(a2), the appearance animation of the icon change notice display shown in FIG. 131(b) is started for the right base icon bIr, and the smoke-like effect image EF12 is displayed. In FIG. 148(A3), the appearance animation of the icon change notice display ends, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is displayed with the No. 1 shown in FIG. 131(b). An icon change notice display IYH of 16 “bancho” is displayed. The icon change notice display gives notice that the notice icon YI will be acquired or that the display mode of the icon will change. The “bancho” icon change notice display IYH here is a display for giving notice that the notice icon YI will be acquired, and in FIG. 148 (a 4), the icon change notice display IYH's character is “box”. It is notified that the notice icon YI has been acquired, and the notice icon YI of “box” is displayed in the stock area SS in FIG. That is, in this example, the notice icon YI is acquired without playing the mini game. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 148 (A6), after the variable display of the symbols is finished and the combination of the decorative symbols that have been lost is stopped and displayed, in the same diagram (A7), the variable display of the pre-reading target is displayed. Has been started.

When the symbol variation display which is the variation of the prefetching is started, the notice icon YI stocked in the previous symbol variation display is used as shown in FIG. 148 (A8-1), and the box is closed. The notice icon YI of a certain mode a is changed to a mode d that is a display mode in which the box is opened, and an animation in which the notice display YH pops out of the box is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 6 is a notice display of "change" of the default color of 6, which is a notice for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, etc. is changed by one step.

In the example of performance until now, when the notice icon YI was used once and changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box was opened, it was erased as it is. However, in this example of effect, FIG. 148 (A 9) is displayed. As shown, the notice icon YI changes from the display mode in which the box is open to the display mode in which the box is closed and is not erased. The fact that the box of the notice icon YI has returned to the closed state means that the box may be reopened in the symbol variation display in which the box is opened, that is, in the symbol variation display which is the currently pre-reading variation. It means that you have foretold. Even when the box of the notice icon YI returns to the closed state, the box may not be reopened or may be reopened without fail. Further, even if it is not opened continuously (even if it is not opened immediately), it may be opened while the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target variation continues. Alternatively, it may be opened again during a specific period (for example, a specific period spanning continuous symbol variable displays) irrespective of the symbol variable display that is the prefetch target variation. Furthermore, although it has been described here that the reopening is performed, the reopening may be closed and the reopening may be performed more than twice.

In FIG. 148(A10), the notice display YH of “change” released from the notice icon YI is used, and the display form of the variable icon, which has been the default display form (first display form) so far, blinks white. The display mode (second display mode) has changed.

Further, in FIG. 148 (a11), the notice icon YI that has once returned to the closed display mode a is changed to the opened display mode d again, and the second notice is displayed in the box. The notice display YH is released. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. This is a notice display of "reach" of 17, and the notice display of "reach" is a displayed variable display, and is a display for notifying that normal reach or more or reach-inspiring production is performed. In this way, there is a case in which a type of notice display different from the type of the first (previous) notice display YH appears. However, the same type of notice display YH may appear continuously. Further, it may be configured such that only a notice display of a type different from the type that appeared last time or once appears, or only a notice display of the same type as the type of the first notice display YH appears. May be. It should be noted that the "reach" notice display may notify that the normal reach will be performed. In that case, when the "reach" notice display is performed, the normal reach occurs in the symbol variation display in which the notice display is displayed. It will be decided to do.

In FIG. 148(A12), the notice icon YI changes to the mode a, which is the display mode in which the box is closed again, and is not erased. Further, although the notice display YH disappears after a certain fixed display period has elapsed after the appearance (Fig. 148 (A13)), if the notice display YH of "reach" is given, when the reach effect is performed, It may continue to be displayed until the reach effect is started.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 148 (A 14 ), the reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c. In this example, the reach effect is always performed when the “reach” notice display YH appears, but the reach effect is not always performed just because the “reach” notice display YH appears. Alternatively, even if the notice display YH of “reach” appears, the reach effect may not be performed and the variable display of symbols may end. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 148 (A15), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the notice icon YI changes to the opened display mode d again, and the notice display YH, which is the third from the box, is released (FIG. 148 (A16)). The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. This is a notice display of "chance" in the default color of 2. When the notice display of the "chance" of the default color is displayed during the reach, it is a display that gives a notice of an increase in the reliability of a big hit by the variation. Also here, the type of the notice display different from the type of the second (previous) notice YH appears. This is because the reach effect has already been started, so the notice display YH of "reach" cannot be made to appear again. If there is no such situation, even if the notice display YH of the same type appears. Good. Note that the notice display YH of "reach" may be displayed again during the execution of the reach effect. For example, if the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed again during the normal reach, it may be announced that the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed. It may or may not evolve into reach, and may or may not evolve into super reach. In addition, when the "Leach" notice display YH is displayed during execution of Super Reach A, which has a lower reliability for jackpots than Super Reach B, it is announced that Super Reach A will develop into Super Reach B. However, in that case, it may develop into the super reach B without fail, and it may or may not develop into the super reach B. Further, in the reach effect, the notice display that appears may be limited. In this example, an upper limit is set for the number of notice displays YH appearing from the same notice icon YI (for example, up to 5), and the notice display YH appears within the range. .. As described above, although the upper limit is set, the larger the number of notice displays YH coming out from the same notice icon YI, or the kind of notice display YH coming out from the same notice icon YI is. The larger the number, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, the conversely may be lower, or the reliability of the jackpot may be independent of the number or type. In this example, the upper limit number of the notice display YH that appears from the same notice icon YI is configured to be larger than the maximum stock number of the notice icon YI, but the same number may be used. On the contrary, the maximum stock number of the notice icon YI may be configured to be larger than the upper limit number of the notice display YH appearing from the same notice icon YI.

As shown in FIG. 148(A17), in this example, the notice icon YI that has emitted the third notice display YH disappears without returning to the closed display mode a. The notice icon YI may be configured to disappear without fail when opened once during the reach. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the notice display YH is always deleted when the notice display YH is released up to the upper limit number. Further, even if the notice display YH is released up to the upper limit number, the notice display YH may continue to be displayed without disappearing. This is the same even if the notice display YH is not emitted up to the upper limit number. Further, the display mode may be returned to the closed display mode a and may be continuously displayed without being opened again, or may be continuously displayed as the open display mode b.

In FIG. 148 (A 18 ), the normal reach effect ends, and “decoration 5” that is not “decoration 6” swings in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the decorative symbols and the lost symbols is fluctuating and fluctuating.

In FIG. 148(A19), the combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 148(A20), it is fixedly displayed. The variable icon h0 changed to the blue display mode continues to be displayed until the fixed display is started, and disappears when the fixed display is started. The change icon h0 may disappear before the confirmation display.

In the example described here, the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed to notify that the reach effect is performed, and the reach effect is actually started, but rather than the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is not started, In the variation display in which the reach effect is started, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed. As a result, this means that the “reach” is displayed more than in the variation display in which the notice display YH of the “reach” is not displayed. In the symbol variable display in which the notice display YH of “” is displayed, the final jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be finalized and displayed. Also, first, the notice display of "change" is released in FIG. 148 (A8-1), and the notice display of "reach" is released in the second time (A11). , "Change" notice display may be released, or "Red change" notice display (No. 7 notice display shown in FIG. 129(b)) of the same type as "Change" notice display is released. May be.

Next, an example in which a plurality of the same type of notice display YH are released from the same stocked notice icon YI will be described.

The same is true up to FIG. 148(A7), and when the symbol variation display as the prefetch target variation is started, the stocked notice icon YI is used as shown in FIG. 148(A8-2-1). Then, the display changes to the display mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. This is an advance notice display for "Oval" of 27. If a predetermined number (here, 3) of advance notices can be collected, a super reach effect or the 1000-box box product described in FIG. 144 (a27) etc. Although there is a display that gives notice that production will be performed, it may not be possible to collect a predetermined number. In addition, even if a predetermined number of sheets are collected, there may be a case where neither the super reach effect nor the production of a thousand-box box is performed. However, if one sheet appears, a predetermined number of sheets may be surely collected, and if a predetermined number of sheets are collected, at least one of the super reach production and the production of a thousand box box product may be performed without fail. When the notice display YH of "Oval" appears, it is stock-displayed in the region (Oval stock region KS) next to the second decorative symbol display (Fig. 148 (A8-2-2)). This small-sized stock area KS is an area different from the stock area SS (see FIG. 148 (5)) in which the notice icon YI is stocked, and these two areas do not partially overlap. However, these two areas may at least partially overlap with each other or may be completely the same area. Further, the stocked notice icon YI and the stocked "oval" notice display YH do not overlap, but at least a part of them may overlap, or all of them may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 148 (A8-2-2), the notice icon YI that has emitted the notice display YH of “Oval” returns to the state b which is the closed display mode, and the same figure (A8-2-3). In ), the variable display of symbols is continued. In addition, the notice display YH of "small size" may be configured so that only one sheet can be stocked in one symbol variation display.

In FIG. 148 (A8-2-4), the notice icon YI that has once returned to the closed display mode a is changed to the opened display mode d again, and two icons are displayed from the box. Noticeable notice display YH is released. The notice display YH released here is not the notice display YH of "Oval", but the No. shown in FIG. 129(b). 7 is a notice display of "red change", and the notice display of "red change" is a display that gives notice that the display mode of the hold icon, the change icon, etc. is changed in two steps. In FIG. 148 (A8-2-5), the notice icon YI changes to the mode a, which is the display mode in which the box is closed again, and is not erased. Further, the notice display YH of “red change” is used, and the display mode of the variable icon, which has been the default display mode (first display mode) until now, is changed to the blue display mode (third display mode). There is.

In FIG. 148 (A8-2-6), the notice icon YI is changed to the opened display mode d again, and the notice display YH which is the third from the box is released. Here, two "oval" notice displays YH are released all at once. As described above, a plurality of advance notice displays YH may be released in one release. However, only one may be released in one release. In FIG. 148 (A8-2-7), the notice display of these two “Oval” is displayed in stock in the Oval stock area KS, and the Oval stock area shown in FIG. 148 (A8-2-7). In the KS, three "oval" notice displays YH, which are the predetermined number, are stocked. In this example, the notice display YH of "small size" is emitted from one notice icon YI a plurality of times (twice in this example), but the notice display YH of "small form" is emitted only once from one notice icon YI. It may be configured not to be released. Further, it may be configured such that only the "oval" notice display YH is not emitted from one notice icon YI.

FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example in which a plurality of the same type of advance notice display YH are released from the same stocked advance notice icon YI, and other effect examples.

In FIG. 149 (A8-2-8) subsequent to FIG. 148 (A8-2-7), three “Oval” advance notice displays YH, which are the predetermined number, are stocked in the Oval stock area KS. , These three "oval" notice displays YH are used. That is, when the predetermined number of three "oval" notice displays YH are accumulated, they are used immediately. In this case, No. 1 shown in FIG. In the form of the notice display YH of 28 "three oval sheets", it is re-displayed relatively large in the center of the screen. No. 28, "3 oval-sized" notice display YH is a display for giving notice that super-reach A, super-reach B, VS swordsman reach, or super-reach more than everyone's collective reach will be performed. However, even if the notice display YH of "3 oval sheets" is displayed, the super reach effect may not be performed, or if the notice display YH of "3 oval sheets" is displayed, the super reach effect is always displayed. May be done.

It should be noted that it is not used immediately when the predetermined number of "orange" notice displays YH are accumulated, but after the state of stocking the three "orange" notice displays YH continues. And may be used. Further, the "small size" notice display YH can be stocked across the variable display of symbols, and it is possible to stock up to the variable display of the pre-reading target, but 3 sheets are accumulated before the variable display of the pre-reading target. If there is not, the notice display YH of "small size stocked until then" is erased from the small size stock area KS at the time when the variable display of the pattern to be read ahead ends. Alternatively, it may be used separately without storing three pieces. It should be noted that the stock of the "orange" notice display YH may be configured not to straddle the symbol variation display, and in that case, when the symbol variation display in which the "orange" notice display YH is stocked ends, " It is configured such that the notice display YH of "small size" is deleted.

In addition, No. shown in FIG. Each of the 30 "character stock" notice displays ("Den", "Grandpa", "Princess") is similar to the "Oval" notice display described here. The area for stocking the advance notice display of the character may be provided as an area different from the oval stock area KS, or may be provided in common with the oval stock area KS.

No. 1 shown in FIG. No. 27 “Oval” or No. Each icon of "Character Stock" of 30 ("Den", "Grandpa", "Princess") is stocked in each stock area (Oval stock area KS or character stock area not shown) after being displayed as a notice YH. By doing so, it functions as a notice icon. Note that the advance notice icon YI may be released from the advance notice icon YI and the advance notice icon YI may be stocked. That is, the advance notice icon YI may be stocked without the advance notice display YH.

In FIG. 149 (A8-2-9), the notice display YH of “3 small sheets” disappears and the reach effect is started. That is, the "decoration 7" fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Then, in FIG. 149 (A8-2-10a), the super reach effect of the VS swordsman reach has started as previously announced, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman. Animation is displayed. Even if the super reach effect is started, the stock display of the notice icon YI continues in the stock area SS, but it may disappear when the super reach effect is started.

Also in FIG. 149 (A 8-2-11) during the super reach effect, the notice icon YI is changed to the opened display mode d again, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. It is a notice display of "Gekiatsu" in 4. The notice display of "Gekiatsu" displayed after the reach production is started is equivalent to a type of normal notice that considerably increases the reliability of the big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display.

In FIG. 149 (A8-2-12), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed display mode a, but the notice display YH of “Gekiatsu” is displayed. However, in this example, after passing through FIG. 149 (A8-2-13), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same diagram (A8-2-14) has a scene in which Yoshimune is defeated, along with a middle symbol. The “decoration 6” is displayed in large size, and thereafter, the combination of the decorative patterns with the missing “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 149 (A8-2-10b1) to FIG. 149 (A8-2-10b11) are diagrams showing an example in which the notice icon YI is used across the wipe effect during the super reach effect.

149 (A8-2-9) is the same, and FIG. 149 (A8-2-10b1) is in the same state as FIG. 149 (A8-2-10a). On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 149 (A8-2-10b2), "decoration 6" as a medium symbol is displayed in large size together with the scene where Yoshimune is defeated, but in the stock area SS. , The notice icon YI in the closed state is still displayed in stock.

In FIG. 149 (A8-2-10b3), the wipe effect is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same diagram (A8-2-10b4), the display screen is once wiped in the same pattern with no pattern. Will be displayed. In this wipe display, the change icon h0 disappears, and the notice icon YI that has been displayed in stock also disappears, but the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. In FIG. 149 (A8-2-10b5), the wipeout is started, and the display at the back is gradually beginning to be seen. Here, the fluctuating first decorative pattern (“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”) is beginning to be seen. In the subsequent FIG. 149 (A8-2-10b6), the lower half of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS is beginning to be seen. The player has begun to see the notice icon YI, so that the notice icon YI is further emitted from the notice icon YI after the wipeout is completed (after the wipe effect is finished), or as shown in FIG. I expect the advance notice icon YI itself to be promoted. In addition, at the stage of wipeout, the notice icon YI may remain disappeared and may not be displayed again. The notice icon YI that is in stock may be displayed even while the wipe effect is being executed. The notice icon YI displayed in stock during the execution of the wipe effect may be used and the notice display YH may be released. However, whether or not the notice icon YI is displayed in stock during the execution of the wipe effect. In any case, the notice icon may be configured not to be used. Further, although the notice icon YI described here is the notice icon YI that has been used once or more, the same is true for an unused notice icon YI (for example, the notice icon YI in FIG. 132 (11) or the like). Yes (the same applies below).

In FIG. 149 (A8-2-10b7), the wipeout is performed and the background is returned to the normal background, but the variable icon h0 remains in the third display mode (blue). Further, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" fluctuates. Furthermore, in the stock area SS, a closed notice icon YI is displayed. Although the advance notice icon YI itself has not been promoted, for example, it may be promoted from the type of “box” to the type of “red box”.

In FIG. 149 (A8-2-10b8), the notice icon YI is changed to the opened display mode d again, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. It is a notice display of "iron plate" of 5. The notice display of the "iron plate" is a symbol variation display of the look-ahead target, that is, a symbol variation display that is currently being performed, and is a display that announces that the big hit is confirmed. Here, there may be a case where the advance notice display of "change" is released and the change icon YI is promoted by one stage, which leads to a revival effect described later. Alternatively, even if the variable icon has a default display mode, the advance notice display of “red change” may be released, which may lead to a later-described revival effect. Further, the release of the notice display at the same time as the shaking change may be confirmed as a big hit.

In FIG. 149 (A8-2-10b9), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed display mode a, but the notice display YH of “iron plate” is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 149 (A 8-2-10b10), a revival effect is started, and in the same figure (A 8-2-10b11), “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“ The combination of the jackpot decorative patterns of "decoration 7" is displayed shaking. After that, this combination is confirmed and displayed as it is.

The advance notice icon YI may be carried over to the next change. Further, even if the notice icon is displayed across the wipe effect as in this example, the notice icon may not be used and may be hidden at the end of the symbol variation display. Further, the notice icon YI may be carried over to the big hit production or the game state after the big hit is finished, or such carry-over may be prohibited. As described above, the same applies to the unused notice icon YI (for example, the notice icon YI in FIG. 132 (11)).

FIGS. 149(A1-2-1) to (A1-2-6) are diagrams showing another example in which the notice icon YI is used across the wipe effect during the super reach effect.

In FIG. 149 (A1-2-1), as in FIG. 148 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. It is displayed. The first hold represented by the first hold icon h11 is the target hold for the prefetch notice. Also, the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS displays the variable icon h0 in the default display mode, and nothing is displayed in the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS.

After this, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 148(a2) to (a7) and 148(a8-2-1) to (a8-2-11) are performed, and FIG. In (A1-2-2), the state is the same as the state shown in FIG. 149 (A8-2-10b1). Then, the wipe effect is started through the same state as the state shown in FIG. 149 (A8-2-10b2) (FIG. 149 (A1-2-3)). The wipe effect here is the same as the wipe effect shown in FIG. 149 (A 8-2-10b3) to FIG. 149 (A 8-2-10b6).

In FIG. 149 (A1-2-4), the wipe effect has ended and the background has returned to the normal background, but the variable icon h0 remains in the third display mode (blue). Further, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" fluctuates. Furthermore, in the stock area SS, a closed notice icon YI is displayed. Note that the notice icon YI may remain disappeared at the stage of wipeout, and may be redisplayed when the next fluctuation starts, or may be redisplayed during the big hit game. The notice icon YI displayed during the big hit game may be prohibited from being used, or may be used in the same manner as during the symbol variation display. In the first place, the display of the notice icon YI may be restricted (prohibited) so that it is not displayed during the big hit game.

In FIG. 149 (A1-2-5), the notice icon YI is changed to the opened display mode d, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is a notice display of "red change". The notice display of "red change" here is No. 1 shown in FIG. Unlike the notice display of "red change" in No. 7, this is a notice for notifying that the display form is the same as the display form of itself.

In FIG. 149(1-2-6), there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 is the same as the display mode of the notice display of “red change” (in the fifth display mode). It has changed to a certain red display mode). In other words, here we have been promoted to four levels. In this example, the combination of lost decorative patterns of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is fixedly displayed as it is without performing the revival effect.

According to this example, the notice icon YI is used as a further look-ahead notice instead of the current design change display which was the design change display of the look-ahead target. As a result of the look-ahead, the design variation display that is behind the current design variation display has a higher expectation of a big hit (for example, if the variation of the variation time is long, it is a variation of the big hit. May be) as in this example. In this example, the display mode (here, the fifth display mode) above the variation icon (see FIG. 149(1-2-6)) in the third display mode (the display mode of “blue”) that has been lost is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed to. However, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed to a display mode (third display mode) equivalent to the display mode of the variable icon that causes a loss, or the display mode of the variable icon that causes a loss may be changed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed to the lower display mode (for example, the second display mode). In addition, the variation icon of the loss variation may be as in this example when the display icon is in the third display mode or more, and may be as in this example when the display icon is in the third display mode or less. In addition, the case may be as in this example regardless of the display mode of the variation icon of the loss variation. Further, the pre-reading notice is not limited to the change in the display mode of the hold icon, and other pre-reading notice may be given (for example, chance, pre-reading background change (red stage change), etc.).

It should be noted that although the "red change" notice display is emitted here, the "change" notice display may be emitted in some cases. Further, a notice display for notifying that the change icon h0 is changed to a display mode above the display mode (for example, one or more steps) (for example, green above the blue in this example) is released. Good.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

In FIG. 150 (A1-3-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both of these hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. Further, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is also displayed. Nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS.

After that, in FIG. 150 (A1-3-2) showing the state in which the design variation is being displayed in the state where the hold is exhausted and the special figure is no longer held, two notice icons YI are stocked in the stock area SS. There is. In FIG. 150 (A1-3-3), the previously stocked first notice icon YI is used, and the first notice icon YI is changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. , The notice display YH of "red change" is emitted from the box. In FIG. 150 (A1-3-4), the notice icon YI has returned to the mode a in which the box is closed, and the notice display YH of “red change” is used, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the following manner. The display mode is changed to the third display mode (“blue” display mode).

Subsequently, in FIG. 150 (A1-3-5), the second notice icon YI that is stocked later is used, and the second notice icon YI is displayed in the mode d in which the box is opened. It changed and the notice display YH of "reach" was emitted from the box. In FIG. 150 (A1-3-6), the second notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of “reach” is displayed. In the same figure (A1-3-7), “reach” is displayed. The notice display YH disappears, the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 150 (A1-3-8), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During the normal reach effect, the remaining notice icon YI changes to the open display mode again, and the notice display YH, which is the second notice from the box, is released (FIG. 150 (A1-3-9)). ). The notice display YH released here is a notice display of the default color “chance”. In FIG. 150 (A1-3-10), the first notice icon YI also disappears and the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed.

In FIG. 150 (A1-3-11), the normal reach effect ends, and “decoration 5”, which is not “decoration 6”, swings in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the decorative symbols and the lost symbols fluctuates, and then is fixedly displayed.

In the example described above, the notice icon YI is used in the stock order, but the notice icon YI may be used regardless of the stock order. Further, the number of times the notice icon YI was used was twice for the notice icon YI that was previously stocked, whereas it was only once for the notice icon YI that was stocked later. As described above, the number of times of use may be different depending on the notice icon YI, but may be the same. If the number of times the notice icon YI is used is the same, the number of uses may be the same during the period from the stocking of one notice icon to the use of all the plurality of notice icons. For example, if the previously announced notice icon is used twice, the later-stocked notice icon is also used twice, and if the previously-stocked notice icon is used three times, it is later stocked. The notice icon given is also used three times. In this way, the number of times of using other icons may be adjusted. Also, the number of times of use may be predetermined. In this case, no matter how many pieces are stocked, any notice icon is always used a predetermined number of times. Further, the previously stocked notice icon YI may be configured to use the notice icon YI more times than the previously stocked notice icon YI, or conversely may be configured to be less frequently used. ..

Also, the maximum number of times of use may be predetermined or may change. When the maximum number of times of use changes, it may change depending on the game state (normal state, electric support state (time saving state), probability variation state), or the maximum number of times of use increases in a certain prefetch zone state. Good. Further, in a certain game state (for example, a normal state, but may be a power support state (time saving state) or a probability change state), the notice icon may not be stocked.

FIG. 150 (A1-4-1) to FIG. 150 (A1-4-11) are diagrams showing, in stages, another example in which a plurality of advance notice icons YI are stocked.

FIG. 150 (A1-4-1) to FIG. 150 (A1-4-4) are in the same state as FIG. 150 (A1-3-1) to (A1-3-4). In FIG. 150 (A1-4-5), the previously stocked first notice icon YI is continuously used. As a result, the notice display YH of "reach" is released. In FIG. 150 (A1-4-6), the first notice icon YI used continuously disappears, and the notice display YH of “reach” is displayed. ), the notice display YH of “reach” disappears and the reach effect is started. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 150 (A1-4-8), the display of the normal reach effect is started, and during this normal reach effect, it is not used until now, The second notice icon YI stocked from is used, and the notice display YH of the default color “chance” is released (FIG. 150 (A1-4-9)). In FIG. 150 (A1-4-10), the remaining notice icon YI also disappears, and the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed.

In FIG. 150 (A1-4-11), the normal reach effect ends, and the combination of the missing symbols of the decorative symbols fluctuates, and then the confirmation display is performed.

As in this example, the notice icon YI may disappear in the stock order. That is, it may be configured such that, when the previously stocked notice icon YI is used up, the next stocked notice icon YI is started to be used.

FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example in which the notice icon YI emitted from the notice icon YI is used a plurality of times in a state where the notice display YH is known before the release.

151 (a1) to 151 (a3) are the same states as FIGS. 148 (a1-1) to 148 (a3), and in FIG. 151 (a4), the effect icon display area DIS is displayed. On the right base icon bIr, a “bancho” icon change notice display IYH is displayed. The "bancho" icon change notice display IYH here is also a display for giving notice that the notice icon YI will be acquired, but like the effect example described with reference to FIG. 147, No. 129 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of "change" of 6 is displayed. That is, the icon change notice display IYH of “bancho” is No. 1 shown in FIG. It is displayed that the notice icon YI of 6 "change" is acquired, and the player can see the display (by reading the characters) and the notice display YH released from the notice icon can be "change". Recognize that it is a notice display of.

In FIG. 151 (a5), the “change” notice icon YI has moved to the stock area SS, and is displayed in the stock area SS in FIG. 151 (a6). Eventually, as shown in FIG. 151 (a7), after the variable display of the symbols is finished and the combination of the decorative symbols that have been lost is stopped and displayed, in the same figure (a8), the variable display of the prefetch target is displayed. Has been started.

When the symbol variation display that is the variation of the prefetch target is started, the conversation notice as the normal notice as described with reference to FIG. 132 is started. A detailed description is given to the above description. Briefly described here, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (a9), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in the central area. This display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not overlap the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the notice icon YI is displayed in the foreground. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (a10), the conversation notice is updated, and the old conversation image CI2 is displayed in which the operation promotion notice image including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. Is displayed. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (a10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding thereto is not performed. In addition, the old conversation image CI2 is displayed at a position displaced from the stock-displayed notice icon YI, and the two do not overlap.

Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 151 (a11) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed after the operation valid period was started.

The timing of FIG. 151 (a12) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 151 (a13), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, the old conversation image CI2 gives a notice from the operation promotion notification image that the reach effect will start. Reach it!" The notice character display such as "Let's reach!" may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. It may be displayed even when it is done.

Further, the variable icon change animation is started in a state where the old conversation image CI2 that has been changed to the character display of "REACH!" is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 151 (a14), the effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI is about to be used is added to the "change" notice icon YI. In FIG. 151 (a15), a light ball flies from the stock area SS toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. The variation icon h0 that the light ball hits changes to the second display mode (white flashing display mode).

The display of “change” displayed in the stock area SS of FIG. 151 (a15) corresponds to the notice display YH, and in FIG. 151 (a16), the notice display YH of “change” is shown in FIG. 129(b). Is changed to the mode b shown in FIG. That is, it has been changed to a mode showing that it has been used. During the mode b, the notice display YH cannot be used as the notice icon YI.

In FIG. 151 (a17), the notice display YH of the mode b is changed to the notice icon YI, and the notice icon YI can be used again. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (a18), the palace's conversation image CI1 and the grandpa's conversation image CI2 are erased, the conversation notice is finished, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible.

In FIG. 151 (a19), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (a20), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the variable icon change animation is started, the effect image EF11 is added again to the notice icon YI (FIG. 151 (a21)), and in FIG. 151 (a22), the light from the stock area SS is displayed. The ball flies toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. The variation icon h0 hit by the ball of light has now changed to the third display mode (blue display mode).

The display of “change” displayed in the stock area SS of FIG. 151 (a22) corresponds to the notice display YH, and in FIG. 151 (a23), the notice display YH of “change” is shown in FIG. 129(b). Although it has changed again to the mode b shown in (a), it is returned to the notice icon YI in the figure (a24), and it can be used again. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (a24), the super reach development effect is displayed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same diagram (a25), the VS swordsman reach is displayed. Super reach production has started, and the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size. An animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (a26). Even when the super reach effect is started, the change icon h0 is displayed and the notice icon YI is displayed in stock in the stock area SS. As shown in FIG. 151 (a a 27 ), the variation icon change animation is started in the middle of the duel scene animation, the effect image EF 11 is added to the notice icon YI again, and in FIG. 151 (a a 28 ), the stock area is displayed. A light ball flies from the SS toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of effect and the like continued from FIG. 151.

In FIG. 152 (a a 29) following FIG. 151 (a a 28 ), in the fluctuation icon change animation, the fluctuation icon h0 hit by a ball of light changes to the fourth display mode (green display mode). .. Further, the notice display YH of "change" is changed to the mode b again, but in FIG. 152 (a30), it is returned to the notice icon YI and can be used.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (a31), the scene "Yoshimune is defeated" and "Decorative 5" as a medium symbol are displayed in large size, but the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. Is still in stock.

Then, the wipe effect is started again here (FIG. 152 (a32)), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (a33), the display screen temporarily becomes the wipe display of the same color with no pattern. In this wipe display, the change icon h0 disappears, and the notice display YH that has been displayed in stock also disappears. In FIG. 152 (a34), the wipeout starts, and the display at the back gradually starts to be seen. Here, the fluctuating first decorative pattern (“decoration 6”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6”) is beginning to be seen. In the subsequent FIG. 152 (a35), the lower half of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS is beginning to be seen.

In FIG. 152 (a36), the background has returned to the normal background after being wiped out, but the variable icon h0 remains in the fourth display mode (green). Further, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" fluctuates. Further, a notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS.

In FIG. 152 (a37), the notice icon YI disappears. The notice icon YI may disappear before the wipe effect, may remain in the wipe-out stage and may not be displayed again, or may disappear at the same time as the wipe effect ends. May be present, may not disappear until the super reach effect is finished, or may not disappear until the final confirmation is displayed. The notice icon YI that is in stock may be displayed even while the wipe effect is being executed. The notice icon YI displayed in stock during the execution of the wipe effect may be used and the notice display YH may be released. However, whether or not the notice icon YI is displayed in stock during the execution of the wipe effect. In any case, the notice icon may be configured not to be used.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (a38), the first decorative symbol is definitely displayed in the combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6".

Next, an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked will be described.

The same is true up to FIG. 151 (a6), and thereafter, by the time before the symbol variation display ends, the No. shown in FIG. No. 21 "button" notice icon YI and No. 21. After the notice icon YI of "REACH" in 17 is continuously stocked, as shown in FIG. 151 (Ib1), the variable display of the symbols is finished and the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost is stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 151 (b2), the symbol variation display as the prefetch target variation is started. In this example, a plurality of notice icons that can recognize what the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon is, just by looking at the display or reading the character, are changed to the next variation (prediction target variation pattern). (Variable display).

In the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target variation, the same conversation notice as the conversation notice that has been described many times up to now, such as in FIG. 151 (a9) to (a17), is started (FIG. 152 (ab3)). ). Here, the explanation of the conversation notice is minimized, and the notice icon YI that is stocked is explained. In FIG. 152 (b4), the notice icon YI of “change”, the notice icon YI of “button”, and the notice icon YI of “reach” are the three notice icons YI of “button”. , The notice image YI of "reach" is added with an effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used. In FIG. 152 (b5), the effect image EF11 disappears from each, and the notice display YH of the “button” of the mode b and the notice display YH of the “reach” of the mode b are obtained. Here, in the stock area SS, the circle marks of the aspects b partially overlap each other, but they may be displayed so as not to overlap each other. In addition, the stocked order may be overlapped in the earlier order, or conversely, the stocked order may be overlapped in the earlier order. In FIG. 152 (b5), since the notice display of “button” is used, the button effect is executed during the conversation notice. That is, the operation promotion notification image composed of the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. In FIG. 152 (b6), the notice display YH of the “button” and the notice display YH of the “reach” have both returned to the notice icon YI and can be used again.

Then, the chance button 136 is operated within the valid operation period ((b7) in FIG. 152.) Then, since the notice display of "reach" is used from the operation promotion notification image, the reach effect is started. It has been changed to the display of "Reach!"

When the conversation notice ends, in FIG. 152 (b10), the first stop of the left symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol. When the first stop is performed, the effect image EF11 is added to the "reach" notice icon YI. The effect image EF11 may be added to the "reach" notice icon YI before the first stop is performed, at the same time as the first stop is performed, or the first stop. May be added before the second stop is performed (that is, before the reach state is generated). In FIG. 152 (b11), the effect image EF11 disappears, and the notice display YH of “reach” of aspect b is displayed. In FIG. 152 (b12), the second stop of the right symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol, and the reach state is reached. ing.

When the reach state is reached, the variation icon change animation is started this time, and the effect image EF11 is added to the “change” notice icon YI as shown in FIG. 152 (b13). Then, in FIG. 152 (b14), the ball of light flies toward the fluctuation icon h0 and hits the fluctuation icon h0. In FIG. 152 (b15), the fluctuation icon h0 in which the ball of light hits the second icon It has changed to a display mode (white flashing display mode). In addition, although the notice display YH of "change" has changed to the mode b again, in FIG. 152 (a16), the notice icon YI has returned to the notice icon YI and can be used.

On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (b17), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the variation icon change animation is started again, and the effect image EF11 is added again to the “change” notice icon YI (FIG. 151 (b18)).

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

In FIG. 153 (Ib19) continued from FIG. 152 (Ib18), a ball of light flies toward the fluctuation icon h0 and hits the fluctuation icon h0. In FIG. 153 (Ib20), the fluctuation of the light ball hits. The icon h0 has changed to the third display mode (blue display mode). Further, although the notice display YH of "change" has changed to the mode b again, in FIG. 153 (b21), the notice icon YI has returned to the notice icon YI and can be used. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 153 (b21), the super reach development effect is displayed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same diagram (b22), the VS swordsman reach is displayed. Super reach production has started, and the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size. An animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 153 (b23). Even if the super reach effect is started, the change icon h0 is displayed, and the three notice icons YI are still displayed in stock in the stock area SS. As shown in FIG. 153 (b24), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button” in the middle of the duel scene animation, and in the succeeding FIG. 153 (b25), the first decorative symbol display. On the device 208L, an operation promotion notification image including a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 153 (b25), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Further, although the notice display YH of the “button” is changed to the mode b again, after that, the notice icon YI is returned to and usable. Eventually, the button effect is started, and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 153 (b26)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 153 (b27) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed after the operation valid period starts.

The timing of FIG. 153 (b28) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. The button operation here is an operation for recognizing whether or not the lord's cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 70(32) appears. In this example, the lord's cut-in image CI3 does not appear and the cut-off image CI3 of the duel scene is displayed. The animation only progresses (FIG. 153 (b21) to FIG. 153 (b31). Note that the variation icon change animation is started according to the button operation, and the effect image EF11 is added to the “change” notice icon YI. Therefore, the display mode of the variable icon may change.

In FIG. 153 (b32), the effect image EF11 is added again to the “button” notice icon YI, and in the subsequent FIG. 153 (b33), the chance button 136 is imitated on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An operation promotion notification image composed of a button image 136a and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. Eventually, the button effect is started, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 153 (b34) is in the display mode when a little time has passed after the operation valid period was started. It is shown. Further, although the notice display YH of the “button” has changed to the mode b again (FIG. 153 (b33)), after that, the notice icon YI is returned to be usable.

The timing of FIG. 153 (b35) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. The button effect here is the final judge effect, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 153 (b36), the scene in which Yoshimune is defeated, and "decoration 5" as the middle symbol is displayed in a large size. ing. After that, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the wipe effect performed after FIG. 152 (a32) is performed, and the notice icon YI is erased as shown in FIG. 152 (a37). The combination of the missing decorative designs of "-" decoration 5"-"decoration 6" is confirmed and displayed.

The display of the final judge screen shown in FIG. 153 (b36) may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed in some cases.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the roulette effect for the advance notice icon stock.

The state shown in FIG. 154 (C1) is a state in which there is no suspension of special symbols, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not perform variable display of decorative symbols. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 154 (c), the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is provided with the roulette RLT for the notice icon stock. This roulette RLT is divided into a left area and a right area, and the name (icon name) of any one of the various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 129(b) stops in the left area. .. On the other hand, a cross mark, a question mark, or a surprise mark stops in the right area. In addition, there are multiple area colors (for example, white, blue, green, red, and gold) for both left and right areas, and you can use them by combining icon names and marks. To be done. In the roulette display RLT shown in FIG. 154 (c), the icon name of "change" is displayed on the green background in the left area, and the cross mark is displayed on the white background in the right area. Icon YI cannot be acquired. That is, when the cross mark is displayed, the notice icon cannot be acquired.

After that, there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 44, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 154 (C2), the first decorative symbol in the central area is stopped and displayed. However, in the upper left second decorative design, the variable display is started. Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the animation of increase of the variable icon is started, and the pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 154 (C3) displays the variable icon h0 in the default display mode.

When the symbol variable display is started, the roulette display (variable display) is also started in the roulette RLT for the notice icon stock (FIG. 154 (C4)). Here, the roulette display is started before the start of the variable display of the first decorative pattern, but the start of the roulette display may be the same as the start of the variable display of the first decorative pattern, or the first decoration. It may be after the start of variable display of symbols.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 154 (c), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central area. After the variable display of the first decorative pattern is started, the variable display of the left area of the roulette RLT is stopped, and the icon name of "reach" is displayed on the green background (FIG. 154 (C5)). On the other hand, the variable display in the right area continues. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 154 (C 7-1), the variable display in the right area is also stopped and the question mark is displayed on the green background. With this combination, the notice icon "reach?" can be obtained, and the notice icon YI of "reach?" is stocked in the stock area SS shown in FIG. 154 (C8). The notice icon YI of "reach?" is a weak notice icon to the extent that reach production may be performed, and the reach production is often not performed than when the notice icon YI of "reach" is used. ..

It should be noted that when the notice icon YI of “reach?” is acquired, the display of the roulette RLT may be turned off, but in this example, the display is continued. In this example, the display of the roulette RLT straddles the variable display in the left region and the variable display in the right region, but the display of the roulette RLT shows the variable display in the left region and/or the right region. You may straddle the variable display in the state in which it is performed. Further, during the stop display of the symbols, the display of the RLT (the state where the variable display of the left area and/or the right area is being performed or the state where the variable display of the left area and/or the right area is stopped) is not displayed. It may be configured as follows.

In FIG. 154 (c 9-1), the first stop of the first decorative symbol is performed, and “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped on the left symbol. In this symbol variation display, the notice icon YI of "reach?" is not used, and the reach effect is not performed, but in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 154 (C10), "decoration 6"-" The combination of the decorative patterns of the decoration 4”-“decoration 1” that is lost fluctuates, and in FIG. 11C, the combination is definitely displayed. Here, since there is no subsequent hold, when the confirmation display is performed, the notice icon YI of "reach?" disappears. However, if there is a subsequent hold, it may be carried over to the next change, or it may be carried over without fail. Alternatively, even if there is a subsequent hold, it may not be carried over.

Note that the number of times the roulette is changed is one here for one symbol variation display, but it may be changed multiple times. In addition, the symbol variation display of the look-ahead target variation and the symbol variation display before that may be provided with a difference in the number of times the roulette is varied in one symbol variation display, for example, the symbol variation display of the look-ahead variation However, the number of fluctuations of the roulette may be increased or, on the contrary, decreased, as compared with the previous symbol fluctuation display. For example, in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display of the prefetch target variation, the roulette display may be performed once as the prefetching notice, and in the symbol variation display of the prefetching subject variation, the roulette display may be performed three times as the normal notice. However, the number of times may not be fixed, and may be zero.

Further, the notice icon YI may be stocked by a production different from the roulette display described here (for example, a mini game such as rock-paper-scissors competition), or the notice icon YI may be displayed while the roulette display is being performed. It is not necessary to perform a production such as a mini game that can obtain the. Further, in the variable display in which the roulette display is performed or is performed, the effect such as the mini game in which the notice icon YI can be acquired may not be performed.

Next, the reach agitation effect will be described.

The same is true up to FIG. 154 (c 8), and in FIG. 154 (c 9-2-1), the effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI is about to be used is added to the notice icon YI of “reach?”. Has been added. In the subsequent FIG. 154 (C9-2-2), the reach flairing effect is started, and the flair fluctuation is performed in the first decorative design. That is, here, the left symbol and the right symbol in the first decorative symbol are switched to the low speed fluctuation, the left symbol rotates upward, the right symbol rotates downward, and an effect of temporarily stopping at the vertical center position is executed. (FIG. 154 (C9-2-3). However, as shown in FIG. 154 (C9-2-4), the provisional stop is not performed, and the reach flairing production ends in failure. The effect image EF11 is Although it disappears when the reach agitation effect is started, it may be continuously displayed on the notice icon YI of "reach?" during the reach agitation effect. The notice icon YI of "reach?" shown has a circle indicating that it has been used, but this circle disappears immediately and the notice icon YI becomes reusable. In the first decorative pattern in 9-2-5a), all three decorative patterns change slowly, and in the same figure (C 9-2-6a), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 8". The combination of the decorative patterns of the loss is fluctuating, and the combination is fixedly displayed (FIG. 154 (9-2-6a)), but the notice icon YI of "reach?" is displayed before the decorative pattern is fixedly displayed. To be hidden.

In this example, the notice image YI is added with the effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used, but the mode of the notice icon YI itself changes before the use is started or when the use is disclosed. You may. For example, the notice icon YI itself may become large, or the notice icon YI itself may change its color. In addition, during use, the original form may be restored, or the form may remain unchanged.

Next, another example of the reach fueling effect will be described.

FIG. 154 (C9-2-4b) is the same state as FIG. 154 (C9-2-4a), and is a state after the reach tilting production has failed. In this example, all the three decorative symbols do not change to low speed as they are, but instead switch to high speed fluctuation (Fig. 154 (C9-2-5b)), which is shown in the notice icon YI of "Reach?". In FIG. 154 (C9-2-6b) in which the red circle disappears, the effect image EF11 is added again to the notice icon YI of “reach?” In the following FIG. 154 (C9-2-7b), Inflammation fluctuation is restarted in the first decorative symbol, and here, each of the left symbol and the right symbol in the first decorative symbol starts moving toward the middle symbol that continues to change at high speed, without passing through the middle symbol. , In front of the middle symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are each enlarged and displayed (Fig. 154 (c 9-2-9b)), and then a temporary stop is performed and the reach state is established (Fig. 154 (c 9- 2-10b)), and finally, the reach twisting production has been successful. Incidentally, FIG. 154 (C 9-2-2) to the same figure (C 9-2-4a) or the same figure (C 9-). 2-4b) and the leech-inspiring effect shown in FIG. 9 (C9-2-5b) to (C9-2-9b) or (C-9-2-9b') in FIG. May be a series of reach-inspiring productions.

Next, an example will be described in which in the reach agitation effect, the agitation fluctuation fails even though the agitation fluctuation is restarted.

As shown in the previous FIG. 154 (C 9-2-8b), each of the left symbol and the right symbol starts moving toward the middle symbol that continues to change at high speed, and FIG. 154 (C 9-2-9b′). In 1), both the left symbol and the right symbol pass through the middle symbol to each other, and the enlarged display in front of the middle symbol as shown in (Fig. 155 (C9-2-9b)) is not performed, and eventually, No temporary stop is performed, and all three decorative symbols change slowly (Fig. 154 (C9-2-9b'2)), and in the same figure (C9-2-9b'3), "decoration 7 The combination of the missing decorative patterns of "-"decoration 7"-"decoration 8" fluctuates and is fixedly displayed by the combination.

The effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of "reach?" each time a new fluctuation is started. However, the reach distortion effect is included as a series of effects, and the effect image EF11 is initially displayed. The notification icon YI of "reach?" may be added only once.

FIG. 155 is a diagram showing another effect using the roulette RLT for the notice icon stock and an example of effect accompanied by button operation.

FIG. 155 (C9-2-4c) is an example continuing from FIG. 154 (C9-2-3), and shows a successful example of reach fanching effect. Here, the left symbol and the right symbol are aligned in the vertical center, before the temporary stop, each of the left symbol and the right symbol is enlarged and displayed (FIG. 155 (C9-2-4c)), and then the temporary stop is performed. , Reach state is established (FIG. 155 (C 9-2-5c)).

Also, FIG. 155 (C 7-2-1) is an example continued from FIG. 154 (C 6), and in this FIG. 155 (C 7-2-1), the right area of the roulette RLT is displayed with a red background. The exclamation mark is displayed. The result is a combination of the "reach" icon name on a green background and a surprised mark on a red background. With this combination, it is possible to obtain the notice icon YI of "reach" having higher reliability than the notice icon YI of "reach?". In addition, a combination of the icon name of "reach" on the red background and the question mark on the green background may be set so that only the notice icon YI of "reach?" can be acquired, or the notice icon YI of "reach" is acquired. May be obtained. In addition, if you reach the "Reach" icon name on the red background and the surprise mark YI on the red background and get the "Leach" notice icon YI, you will be surprised at the "Reach" icon name on the green background and the red background. The symbol variable display using the “reach” notice icon may be configured to be a big hit more easily than when the mark is displayed and the “reach” notice icon YI is acquired. Also, if you reach the "REACH" notice icon YI by displaying the "REACH" icon name on the red background and the question mark on the green background, the "REACH" icon name on the green background and the question on the red background The symbol variable display using the “reach” notice icon may be configured to be a big hit more easily than when the mark is displayed and the “reach” notice icon YI is acquired. That is, the background color in which the icon name is displayed is more related to the jackpot reliability than the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed. Therefore, if you reach the "Reach" notice icon YI with the "Reach" icon name on the red background and the surprise mark on the green background, you will be surprised at the "Reach" icon name on the green background and the green background. The symbol variation display using the "reach" notice icon is more likely to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the "reach" notice icon YI is acquired. In addition, when the "reach" icon name is displayed on the red background and the exclamation mark is displayed on the green background and the "reach" notice icon YI is acquired, and when the "reach" icon name is on the red background and the exclamation mark is on the green background. In the case where the notice icon YI of "reach" is displayed and is acquired, the symbol variation display using the notice icon of "reach" is likely to be a big hit. However, the background color in which the icon name is displayed and the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed may have the same relationship with the reliability of the big hit. Alternatively, the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed may be more related to the jackpot reliability than the background color in which the icon name is displayed.

Note that the color names in the above description can be represented by display modes. That is, "red" is the fifth display mode and "green" is the fourth display mode (the same applies in the following description).

Also, FIG. 155 (C7-3-1) is also an example continued from FIG. 154 (C7), and in this FIG. 155 (C7-3-1), the left area of the roulette RLT has a red background. The icon name of "reach" is displayed, and in the right area, a surprise mark is displayed on a red background. With this combination, the notice icon YI of “reach” may be acquired for the first time. In other words, if the background color is neither the left area nor the right area on the red background, the notice icon YI of "reach" cannot be acquired, and if one of them is the green background, the "reach?" It becomes the notice icon YI. Further, in this case, the red background may be configured such that the red background stops first and the red background stops more easily than the green background stops, or the probability is the same. May be

Also, FIG. 155 (C7-4-1) is another example continuing from FIG. 154 (C7), and in this FIG. 155 (C7-4-1), the left area of the roulette RLT is The box icon 129(a) is displayed, and the stock number is displayed in the right area. In this example, one "box" icon shown in FIG. 129(a) can be acquired. The stock number is 0 to 3. Further, either a “box” or a cross mark may be displayed in the left area, and colors (white, red, gold, rainbow) may be displayed in the right area. In this case, for example, if it is a cross mark and a rainbow, the box-shaped notice icon YI cannot be acquired, and if it is "box" and red, the "red box" notice icon YI can be acquired. it can.

Also, FIG. 155 (C7-5-1) is another example continuing from FIG. 154 (C5), and in this FIG. 155 (C7-5-1), the left area of the roulette RLT is (Sixth display mode) The icon name of "reach" is displayed on the background, and the surprise mark is displayed on the gold background in the right area. With this combination, as shown in FIG. 155 (C 7-5-2), a gold “reach” notice icon YI can be obtained. The gold "reach" notice icon has higher reliability than the normal "reach" notice icon. Alternatively, the reliability of the big hit may be high.

Even if both the left area and the right area have a gold background in this way, only the same notification icon that can be acquired when both the left area and the right area have a red background can be acquired. Even if it is not possible, the gold background may be more likely to hit the red background than the red background with respect to the change of the prefetch target.

Further, the display of the roulette RLT and the stocked notice icon YI may be inconsistent. For example, the display of the roulette RLT is "reach" and "?", but the notice icon YI is the notice icon of "reach", or the display of the roulette RLT is "reach" and "!". The notice icon YI may be a "SP" notice icon indicating super reach, or the notice icon YI may be a green icon even though the background of the roulette RLT is a gold background. Such a contradiction may be that final jackpot symbols may be more easily finalized and displayed, or conversely, the lost symbols may be more easily finalized and displayed, than when no contradiction occurs. In addition, when the background of the roulette RLT is a gold background and the advance notice icon YI is a green icon, the jackpot may be confirmed.

Further, the roulette wheel may be changed again. For example, even if the display of the roulette RLT is stopped at "reach" and "x", the combination of "reach" and "!" may be finally obtained by changing the right area again. Further, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at "reach" and "?", the combination of "SP" and "?" may be finally obtained by changing the left area again. Further, even if the display of the roulette RLT is stopped by the "box" icon and "x1" shown in FIG. 129(a), both areas are changed again and finally the "red box" icon and the "box" are displayed. It may be a combination of “×2”. Furthermore, even when only one of the left area and the right area is changing and the other is stopped, the other stopped may be changed again.

Although the roulette effect has been described above, in the example here, the icon names are all “reach”, but the same applies to the names of various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 129(b). However, depending on the icon name, only the question mark, or the question mark or cross mark is displayed on the green background color, or only the exclamation mark or only the exclamation mark or cross mark is displayed on the red and gold background colors. Good. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 or No. 23 or No. The icon name of the notice icon that leads to the big hit confirmation such as 24 may not be combined with the question mark. That is, only the combination of “patrol lamp” and “cross mark” or the combination of “patrol lamp” and “surprise mark” may be displayed. In addition, the icon name of the notice icon that leads to a relatively high reliability of the jackpot (for example, No. 3 "red chance", No. 4 "super hot" or No. 5 "iron plate" icon In the case of (first name), it may be combined with only "surprise mark". Further, the icon name of the notice icon that leads to the jackpot confirmation may be iridescent (seventh display mode) in both the background color of the icon name and the background color of the mark (symbol).

Further, the mark (symbol) may be announced by the background color of the icon name of the notification icon (for example, the icon name of “iron plate” of No. 5) that leads to the determination of the big hit. For example, if the background color of the "iron plate" that stopped earlier was green, it would be a warning that the cross mark might be stopped, and if it was rainbow color, the stop of the surprise mark was confirmed. Good.

Furthermore, the icon name (left area in this example) may always stop first, or conversely, the mark (right area in this example) may always stop first. Further, when it is not known which will stop first, if the mark stops first, the cross mark may not stop.

Further, when the notice icon is stocked in the roulette effect, the notice icon may be used without fail.

Next, an example of effects accompanied by button operation will be described.

In FIG. 155 (a1), the pattern change display of the look-ahead target is displayed in a state where there is no special figure pending, and only one notice icon YI of “box” is stocked in the stock area SS. .. In FIG. 155 (a2), an operation promotion notification image is displayed on the left side of the stocked notice icon YI. The operation promotion notification image here is also an image prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of a meter MT and. Note that the timing of FIG. 133 (A 31-2-2) is before the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed before the start of the operation valid period. May be displayed at the same time as the start of.

The operation valid period starts at the timing of FIG. 155 (d3), and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 155 (d4) shows the display mode when a little time has passed after the operation valid period started. Indicated by.

The timing of FIG. 155 (a5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the opportunity button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, in FIG. 155 (d6), after the notice icon YI is covered with the effect image EF13, as shown in FIG. The effect image EF13 disappears, and the notice icon YI, which was the mode a in which the box is closed, is changed to the mode d in which the box is displayed, and a notice "YH" is displayed in the box. The animation that pops out (box opening animation) is displayed.

Note that the change of the notice icon YI to the mode d, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed when the valid period has elapsed.

In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 155 (a8), the notice icon YI changes from the display mode d in which the box is open to the display mode a in which the box is closed and is not erased. In FIG. 155 (d9), the notice display YH of “red change” emitted from the notice icon YI is used, and the display mode of the variable icon that has been the default display mode (first display mode) is blue. The display mode (3rd display mode) has been changed.

In FIG. 155 (d11), the operation promotion notification image is displayed again on the left side of the stocked notice icon YI, after which the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter shown in FIG. 155 (d11) is displayed. MT is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation valid period started.

The timing of FIG. 155 (d12) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, in FIG. 155 (a13), the notice icon YI is changed to a mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed from the inside. Has been released. In FIG. 155 (a14), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed mode a.

In this example, the operation promotion notification image is displayed each time, but the operation promotion notification image may not be displayed and so-called back button effect may be performed.

FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example in which the display mode of the “button” advance notice icon YI is changed according to the button operation, and other examples.

In FIG. 156 (Eb1), the super reach effect of VS swordsman reach is executed, and the animation of the duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, in FIG. 156 (Db1), No. 1 illustrated in FIG. 21 "button" notice icon YI is stocked. In FIG. 156 (Db2), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and in FIG. 156 (Db3), the effect is large in the central area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The button image 136a is displayed, and then the button image 136a becomes slightly smaller, and the remaining time display meter MT is added (FIG. 156 (d4)). In addition, in this example, the character “repeatedly hit” that requires continuous operation of the chance button 136 and the confrontation meter MTV indicating the superiority or inferiority of Yoshimune and Kengo are also displayed. The confrontation meter MTV has a blue meter on the Yoshimune side (left side) and a red meter on the swordsman side (right side). When the display of the confrontation meter MTV is started, the blue meter is half and the red meter is half. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (d4), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the display corresponding thereto is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 156 (Eb5)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 156 (d6) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed after the operation valid period starts. Although the confrontation meter MTV is overlapped by a part of the fluctuation icon h0, the confrontation meter MTV may be displayed so as to overlap the fluctuation icon h0, and the confrontation meter MTV is confronted at a position where it does not overlap. The meter MTV may be displayed.

The timing of FIG. 156 (d7) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (d8), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the "button", and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. However, the effect image EF11 here does not notify that the advance notice icon YI will be used.

Since the continuous hitting operation is required, the player operates the chance button 136 also at the timing of FIG. 156 (d9). Then, also in FIG. 156 (d10), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. This effect image EF11 disappears immediately (FIG. 156 (d11)), and the player operates the chance button 136 at the timing of FIG. 156 (d12). Then, also in FIG. 156 (d13), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. If the interval between button operations by the player is shortened, the effect image EF11 is added to and deleted from the notice icon YI at high speed, and the effect image EF11 appears to be constantly lit.

The blue meter of the confrontation meter MTV increases according to the number of times the chance button 136 is operated. However, in this confrontation meter MTV, when the operation effective period is started, the red meter of the swordsman automatically increases with the passage of time. If the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit so as not to lose the increasing speed of the red meter, the increase of the blue meter will win the increase of the red meter, and the blue meter will increase. When everything becomes the blue meter as shown in FIG. 156 (Db13), the Yoshimune cut-in image CI3 appears as shown in FIG. 156 (Db13). On the other hand, when all of them are red meters, a cut-in image of a swordsman (not shown) appears here.

The timing at which the effect image EF11 is added to the “button” notice icon YI may be set every time the opportunity meter 136 is operated once, and every time the confrontation meter MTV increments the blue meter by one scale.

Next, an example in which the stock number of the notice icon YI is displayed will be described.

FIG. 156 (Oa1) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 132 (A9-1), in which the icon of the villager character of the variable icon h0 wins the icon of the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 156 (Oa2), the stock icon of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started by the victory of the villager character of the change icon h0. That is, the No. shown in FIG. 129(a) displayed in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed in a large size. At this stage, the display of the stock number (here, “stock×1”) is started between the second decorative symbol and the second retained number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, when the advance notice icon YI reaches the stock area SS, the display of the number of stocks is started, and it is unclear how many advance notice icons could be acquired only by looking at the appearance area AS. Can display the stock number before the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS to know the acquired number. In FIG. 156 (Oa3), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. In FIG. 156 (Oa3), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS.

After that, in FIG. 156 (a4), which shows the state in which the symbol variation is being displayed in the state where the hold is exhausted and the special figure is no longer held, one notice icon YI is stocked in the stock area SS, and the stock number is Is also displayed as "stock x 1".

In FIG. 156 (a5), the reach effect is started, and the "decoration 6" fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the reach state is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 156 (a6), the notice icon YI has changed to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the "change" notice display YH has been emitted from the box. Since the notice icon YI is used in this way, the stock number display temporarily changes to “stock×0” (FIG. 156 (a6)), and then the stock number display itself disappears (FIG. 156). (Oa7)). Then, it continues to FIG. 133 (A33). If the same notice icon YI is repeatedly used, the display of the stock number does not change, and in this case, “stock×1” continues to be displayed. Even if the same notice icon YI is repeatedly used, if it is used once, the stock number display may be once changed to “stock×0” and immediately returned to “stock×1”. .. It should be noted that when the stock number of the advance notice icon becomes 0, “stock×0” may not be displayed and the stock number display itself may be erased as shown in FIG. 156 (a7).

Further, a plurality of stock areas SS may be provided. In the example shown below, two stock areas SS are provided, a first stock area SSR on the right side and a second stock area SSL on the left side.

FIG. 156 (Ob1) is also in the same state as that shown in FIG. 132 (A9-1), in which the icon of the villager character of the variable icon h0 wins the icon of the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 156 (Oa2), the stock animation of the notice icon YI has started, and the notice icon YI of “box” has left the appearance area AS and is once displayed in a large size. After that, one advance notice icon YI of “box” is stocked in each of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side (FIG. 156 (Oa3). An animation in which the “box” notice icon YI splits may be displayed, but may be displayed momentarily in each of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side. The number of the notice icons YI acquired is only one.

156 (Ob4) showing the state of symbol variation display in the state where the holding is exhausted and the special figure is not held, the left first stock area SSL and the right second stock area SSR are also shown in FIG. 156 (Ob4). Also, the "box" notice icons YI are stocked one by one.

In FIG. 156 (Ob5), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the reach state is used. At this time, only one of the two notice icons YI may be used. In addition, an effect of telling which of the notice icons YI is used (which box opens) or an effect of giving a notice may be performed. Here, both notice icons YI are used at the same time. That is, as shown in FIG. 156 (Ob6), both of the notice icons YI are changed at the same time to the mode d in which the boxes are opened, and the "change" notice display YH is released from each box. Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (a7), the two notice icons YI disappear at the same time.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of the effect that continues from FIG. 156 and an example of displaying the same notice icon in a plurality of modes.

In FIG. 157 (Ob7) subsequent to FIG. 156 (Ob7), the advance notice display YH of “change” emitted to each of the left and right is changed to a light ball YHb. Therefore, one ball YHb of light is displayed on the left and one on the right. In FIG. 157 (Ob9), both the left light ball YHb and the right light ball YHb fly toward the variation icon h0 and become one at the variation icon h0 to display the variation icon h0. An animation that changes is displayed. The variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 157 (Ob10) has changed from the first display mode to the third display mode. This is changed by two stages because it is based on two notice icons YI. It should be noted that only one step may be changed. Then, it continues to FIG. 133 (A37).

The reliability of the big hit may differ depending on how the notice icon YI is stocked. That is, normally, stock is sequentially carried out from a fixed position in the stock area SS. For example, the stocks are stocked in the order of the first stock position, the second stock position, and the third stock position. However, contrary to this order, the stocks may be stocked in the order of the third stock position, the second stock position, and the first stock position. In such an irregular case, In comparison, the reliability of the big hit may be higher, or on the contrary, may be lower. Also, while it is normally stocked in both the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side, irregularly, only one stock area (for example, the second stock area SSL on the left side is stocked. It may be stocked only in ). Even in such an irregular case, the reliability of the big hit may be higher than that in the normal case, or on the contrary, may be lower. Furthermore, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on which of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side is stocked. For example, if the first stock area SSR on the right side is normal or prioritized, and if it is stocked on the second stock area SSL on the left side, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher. Or vice versa.

Even if the acquired notice icon YI is a “white” notice icon, when displaying the notice icon YI in white in the respective areas SSL and SSR, the case where both notice icons YI in white are displayed. The white notice icon YI and the red notice icon YI may be displayed in some cases. In the latter case, the notice display YH released from the obtained notice icon YI may be expected. For example, when both of the white notice icons YI are displayed, the No. shown in FIG. Although the notice display of the "change" of the default color of 6 is released, when the white notice icon YI and the red notice icon YI are displayed, the No. 6 shown in FIG. There may be a case where the red “red change” notice display 7 is emitted.

157(Oc1) to FIG. 157(Od) are diagrams showing an example in which the same notice icon is displayed in a plurality of modes.

On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 157 (Oc1), a background screen, which has been omitted from the drawings so far, is displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (1-2-1). As with, the background screen of the sea is displayed. In FIG. 157 (Oc1), a “base length” icon change notice display IYH is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and this “bank length” icon change notice display IYH is shown in FIG. 129(b), the icon change notice display IYH of "bancho" shown in FIG. It is displayed that the notice icon YI of "change" of 6 has been acquired.

In FIG. 157 (Oc2), the notice icon YI of “change” has moved to the stock area SS, and is displayed in the stock area SS in FIG. 157 (Oc3). Further, in this example, a band icon OBI is displayed on the left side of the background screen, and the name (here, “change”) of the notice icon YI acquired is also displayed on the band icon OBI. Therefore, in this example, the display relating to the acquired notice icon YI is displayed at two places. Since the band icon OBI is an icon displayed on the background screen, any display (for example, the display of the first decorative symbol or the display of the second decorative symbol, or the second hold icon h12 to the second unillustrated here) 4 hold icon h14) and the like).

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 157 (Oc4), after the pattern variation display is finished and the combination of the decorative symbols that have been lost is stopped and displayed, in the same figure (Oc5), the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target variation is displayed. Has been started. When the symbol variation display, which is the variation of the prefetch target, is started, the notice icon YI is used. In FIG. 157 (Oc6-1), the variable icon change animation using the notice icon YI is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 157 (Oc6-1), the effect image EF11 is added to the “change” notice icon YI. In FIG. 157 (Oc7), the stocked “change” notice icon YI is displayed. Disappear. Subsequently, in FIG. 157 (Oc8), a light ball flies from the stock area SS toward the variation icon h0 and hits the variation icon h0. The variation icon h0 hit by the ball of light changes to the second display mode (white flashing display mode), as shown in FIG. 157 (Oc9). On the other hand, no effect is performed with the belt icon OBI, and no change has occurred in the display of the name of the acquired notice icon YI displayed on the belt icon OBI. However, some kind of animation such as a variable icon change animation may be executed even in the band icon OBI, and some change (for example, blinking display, display color change, etc.) may occur in the display of the name of the acquired notice icon YI.

Although the notice icon YI in the stock area SS has disappeared promptly with use, the band icon OBI is at least displayed until the change icon h0 actually changes, as shown in FIG. 157 (Oc10). In addition, the change icon h0 disappears after the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 157 (Oc6-2-1) and thereafter, the notice icon YI of "change" is reused. In the same figure (Oc6-2-1) continuing from FIG. 157 (Oc6-1), the notice icon YI that has been used until now is the notice display of the "change" of the mode b shown in FIG. 129(b). Although it has changed to YH, in the same figure (Oc6-2-2), it returns to the notice icon YI and is usable. In FIG. 157 (Oc6-2-3), the reach effect is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (Oc6-2-3), the normal reach effect display is displayed. When the normal reach effect is started, the background screen of the sea is switched to the background screen of the normal reach effect, and accordingly, the band icon OBI displaying the name of the notice icon YI acquired disappears. On the other hand, the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS continues to be displayed even during the normal reach production.

In FIG. 157 (Oc6-2-5), the normal reach effect ends, the background screen of the sea is displayed again on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the band icon displaying the name of the notice icon YI is displayed. The OBI display has also been restored. In this way, the display of the band icon OBI on which the name of the notice icon YI is displayed is displayed across the reach effect. After that, during the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative pattern, in other words, the display of the band icon OBI disappears before the confirmed display shown in FIGS. 157 (Oc6-2-7) to (Oc6-2-8) is performed. .. The notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS also disappears. In this example, there is no subsequent hold, and it can be seen that the display relating to the notice icon YI (display of the band icon OBI, display of the notice icon YI of the stock area SS) has disappeared, but there is a subsequent hold. Also, before the confirmation display, the display relating to the notice icon YI (display of the band icon OBI, display of the notice icon YI of the stock area SS) may disappear, or conversely, when there is a subsequent hold, the notice is given. The display regarding the icon YI may be continuously displayed until the confirmation display.

FIG. 157 (Od) is a diagram showing a case where a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked. In this example, in addition to displaying the notice icon YI in the stock area SS, display using the band icon OBI is also performed. That is, one notice icon YI is displayed with one belt icon OBI.

In the examples so far, the band icon OBI is displayed as the background display, but in the example shown in FIG. 158 (e), the band icon OBI narrows the display area of the first decorative symbol. The display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the belt icon OBI.

In the example shown in FIG. 158 (of), three notice icons YI, which are the maximum stock numbers, are stocked, and three belt icons OBI are displayed. Therefore, the display area of the first decorative symbol is 1 It is narrowed to about /4, and the first decorative symbol is overlapped by the notice icon YI displayed in stock. However, the first decorative symbol may be prioritized and the first decorative symbol may overlap the notice icon YI. The second hold number display does not overlap the band icon OBI. Further, both the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are visible. In this example, the first decorative pattern, the background display, the display of the hold frame UI, the variable icon h0, and the hold icon are narrowed, but the display of the second decorative pattern, the second hold number display, and the stock are displayed. The display of the notice icon YI is not narrowed. As an example of the display narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI, the first decorative symbol, the background display, the display of the hold frame UI, the variable icon h0, the hold icon, various notice displays (for example, the above-mentioned conversation notice (the conversation of the lord It is possible to enumerate the image CI1, the old conversation image CI2, the mini game, the icon change notice, the timer notice effect, the meter display (the white meter MW described above, the meter display MD described later, etc.), etc. That is, the band icon OBI. The display narrowed by the display may be all of those listed above, while some of the above may not be applicable, and the display not narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI. As an example, the display of the second decorative pattern, the second hold number display, the stocked notice icon YI, the bar display VB for volume adjustment, the display of the mode name set to ON in the production customization (for example, the above-mentioned upper right corner of the screen). Frame RW and a mode name displayed in the frame RW), various error displays (displays related to various errors and warnings described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 126), menu icon MI, volume adjustment icon VI, And the brightness adjustment icon BI, the display of the "current Daitomo mode level (here, level 1) and experience value (EXP) (here, 0)" of FIG. 84(e1), display of simultaneous production, etc. are listed. That is, as the displays that are not narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI, all of the above-listed ones may be used, while some of the above-listed ones may not be applied.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of an effect by a configuration in which the display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Up to now, the description centering on the first decorative symbol display device 208L has been described, but the contents displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed (same in the following description). Further, the arrangement of the display means is not limited to the horizontal arrangement, and the same arrangement may be applied in the vertical arrangement. In other words, it is not the case that the technology described in this specification cannot be applied simply because the hardware configuration is different, and from a technical idea, even if the display units are arranged side by side, they can be arranged vertically. Even if there is, it is applicable. Hereinafter, as an example of the vertical arrangement of the display means, an example in which the display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L will be described. Here, the display means arranged below is referred to as a fourth display means 208M' for description.

In FIG. 158 (a1), the fourth display means 208M' arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. The fourth display unit 208M' shown in FIG. 158 (a1) is in the initial position. This fourth display means 208M' is surrounded by a frame fm around the display screen, and the upper edge of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M' at the initial position is the lower end portion of the first decorative pattern display device 208L. It overlaps from the front side. The fourth display means 208M′ is arranged on the front side (player side) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and overlaps the central portion of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side at the operating position ( It is possible to move from the initial position toward the position (refer to the position of the fourth display means 208M′ in FIG. 158 (a2′)). That is, the fourth display means 208M' is also a movable means capable of moving up and down. In addition to the lifting operation, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be movable in the left-right direction. As a modification of the fourth display means 208M', the fourth display means 208M' may be fixedly arranged at the initial position.

On the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 158 (kaa1), a holding frame UI′ having a configuration similar to the holding frame UI previously displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. Has been done. This hold frame UI' also has a hold icon display area HIS&', a variable icon display area CIS', and an effect icon display area DIS'. The pedestal hs0' is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS'. The hold icon display area HIS' is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS', and four stages (first stage hs1' to fourth stage hs4') are arranged on the left base icon bIl'. The effect icon display area DIS' is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS', and the right base icon bIr' is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS'.

In addition, in the fourth display unit 208M' shown in FIG. 158 (Ka1), the holding icon of Toku-zu 1 is displayed on each of the first stage hs1' and the second stage hs2'. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of these special diagrams 1 are all No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, in the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS'. The display mode of the change icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

Further, a background screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 158 (ka1). This background screen is a sea background screen. On the other hand, although the background screen of the fourth display means 208M′ is solid white, this solid white color indicates that the background screen is omitted in the drawing. The first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. Then, the first decorative pattern (third pattern) is changing at high speed. The state of FIG. 158 (a1) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 132 (a1).

In FIG. 158 (Ka2), there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230 shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 44, and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased by one, resulting in a total of three. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 158 (k2a), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3". The fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 158(k2a) displays the first hold, which has been the default display mode so far, in accordance with the increase in the hold of this special map or regardless of the increase in the hold of this special map. Both the icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are No. 1 in FIG. The icon has changed to the icon a of the type of villager described in 17. Further, the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3'. The third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by an increasing animation in the default display mode, but the third hold represented by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold for the prefetching notice. The state of FIG. 158 (a2) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 132 (a3-1).

In the right base icon bIr′ of the effect icon display area DIS′ in the fourth display unit 208M′ shown in FIG. 158 (a3), as the opponent icon TI, the mode a of the panto type shown in FIG. 130(c) ( A standby mode icon is displayed. In the upper left corner, the appearance area AS is displayed surrounded by a frame, and the inside of the No. shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is displayed. The state of FIG. 158 (a3) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 132 (a6).

On the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 158 (Ka4), the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B is performed, and the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 has won the panda character with the opponent icon TI, and appears. The stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the area AS has started. That is, the notice icon YI of “box” displayed in the appearance area AS is once displayed in a large size after exiting from the appearance area AS. The state of FIG. 158 (a4) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 132 (a10).

The fourth display means 208M' is also provided with a stock area SS in which the notice icon YI is stocked, and the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. Icon YI is displayed. The state of FIG. 158 (a5) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 132 (a11).

In FIG. 158 (a6), the state in which the variation of symbols is being displayed is shown in the state where the suspension of the reservation has progressed and the suspension of the special figure has disappeared. The symbol variation display performed here is a symbol variation display which is a pre-reading subject variation. Note that neither the panda character of the opponent icon TI nor the appearance area AS have disappeared. The variable icon h0 is in the default display mode. The state of FIG. 158 (a6) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 132 (a24).

In FIG. 158 (Ka7), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is changed to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of “reach” is released from the box. In the figure (Ka8), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed. The notice display YH disappears after a certain fixed display period has elapsed after the appearance, and the notice display YH of “reach” disappears in FIG. 158 (Ka 9). After that, the reach effect may or may not be performed. When the reach effect is performed, the notice display YH of “reach” may be continuously displayed until the reach effect is started.

Next, modified examples will be described. The same is true up to FIG. 158 (Ka4), and in FIG. 158 (Ka5'), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the stock animation of the notice icon YI here, the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS of the fourth display unit 208M′ moves from the fourth display unit 208M′ to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The animation is played. At this time, there is a period in which the notice icon YI is displayed across the fourth display unit 208M' and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, it does not straddle the fourth display means 208M' and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is an animation that jumps from the fourth display means 208M' to the first decorative symbol display device 208L at once (moves momentarily). Good.

The fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 158 (k2a) has moved from the initial position shown by the dotted line to the operating position, and covers the central area of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. There is. The fourth display means 208M′ may move from the initial position before the start of the mini game, at the same time as the start of the mini game, during the mini game, or in the mini game. You may move after the mini-game only if you win the game. Further, before the result of the mini game comes out, it may move as a notice of the result of the mini game. In this case, moving may be easier to win the mini game, or may be more difficult to win, rather than not moving. The fourth display means M′ may be configured to be in a stationary state at the operating position across one or a plurality of symbol variable displays during execution of the mini game. Here, when a mini game is performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays, from the operation position to the initial position (or the end position of each symbol variable display after the result of the mini game in the symbol variable display comes out (or The fourth display means M′ may be configured to move to a position different from the operating position and the initial position). Further, the fourth display means M'is configured so as not to move from the operating position during the symbol stop display (that is, to be stationary at the operating position). However, the fourth display means M'may move from the operating position during the symbol stop display. Further, the fourth display means M′ is at least a part of the period during which the symbol variable display is fixedly displayed, or the entire period, even while moving between the initial position and the maximum movement position. In, it is configured to maintain a stationary state. Note that the movement may be continued or may be stopped in the state of temporary stop in the simulated continuous production or in the state of swing fluctuation before confirmation display. Further, the stop operation may be performed as described above only when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being displayed on the fourth display means M'. Further, the fourth display means M′ may be configured to stop at the initial position, the maximum movement position, or a predetermined stop position in accordance with the timing of the fixed display of the symbol variable display.

FIG. 158 (cover b1) shows an example in which the initial position of the fourth display means 208M' is above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, the hold frame UI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the mini game is also played on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 158 (Kab1), the “bancho” icon change notice display IYH is displayed. Further, the background image is displayed on the fourth display unit 208M' shown in FIG. 158 (Cb1) without being shown. On the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 158 (Cb2), the name of the stocked notice icon YM (here, "change") is displayed as a band icon OBI'. That is, when the notice icon YM is stocked, its name is also displayed on the fourth display means 208M'. The display method is not limited to the band icon OBI', and may be the full screen.

In the example shown in FIG. 158 (cover b3′), a band icon OBI″ is displayed from the fourth display unit 208M′ to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the band icon OBI″ has a stock notice. The name (here, “change”) of the icon YM is shown. The name of the notice icon YM in the band icon OBI″ is displayed across the fourth display unit 208M′ and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Note that, also in the example shown in FIG. 158 (cover b3′), the band icon OBI is displayed while narrowing the display area of the first decorative symbol described with reference to FIG. 157 (e) and FIG. The method is applicable. That is, the portion of the band icon OBI″ displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L narrows the display area of the first decorative symbol. In addition, when the fourth display means 208M′ moves and the area overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208L is enlarged, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The display area may be similarly narrowed in accordance with the movement of the fourth display means 208M'.

The fourth display means 208M′ described above can be replaced with the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 or the like, can be replaced with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or other display means (for example, , A light guide plate IL, and a POV display 224I described later).

Next, an example of effect using another effect means will be described.

The state shown in FIG. 158 (Kc1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 132 (A7), and in the subsequent FIG. 151 (Kc2), the mini game exclusive accessory is provided on the left and right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 225 has appeared. The rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is performed not only by the display of the villager character of the variable icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, but also by the mini game exclusive accessory 225. In the mini-game exclusive accessory 225, the left side is the villager character with the variable icon h0, and the right side is the panda character with the opponent icon TI. The directing operation of the mini game exclusive accessory 225 may be started after the rock-paper-scissors show-up animation is started, may be started at the same time as the rock-paper-scissors show-up animation is started, or before the rock-paper-scissors show-up animation is started. It may be. In addition, when a mini game is won, an effect that excites the victory may be performed by the mini game exclusive accessory 225, or other movable effect means (for example, the fourth display means 208M′ or shown in FIG. 67). It may be performed by a movable effect using a thousand box box accessory 224H or the like, or may be performed by a light emitting effect by a light emitting means.

Further, other display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth display means 208M, the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I described later, etc.) is also associated with the mini game. Direction may be performed.

FIG. 158 (Cd1) to FIG. 158 (Cd5) are diagrams showing examples of effects using the POV display 224I.

In this example, a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as a production movable body described with reference to FIG. 68 is provided in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The POV display 224I is also called a versa writer, is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

The state shown in FIGS. 158 (d1) to (d3) is the same as the state shown in FIGS. 132(a7) to 132(d9-1), and in FIG. The state is the same as that shown in 132 (A9-1), that is, the state where the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B is performed and the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 158 (d4), a POV display 224I appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the POV display 224I has a picture of the notice icon YI won by winning the mini game and "GET". Is displayed. Here, even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible and the display area is visible. You may display the effect with. Further, the display area is more visible when the POV display 224I is in the accelerating state from the stationary state to the constant speed state or in the decelerating state from the constant speed state to the stationary state than in the constant speed state. It is easy, and the effect display may be performed in the display area even during acceleration or deceleration. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area only in the accelerating state or the decelerating state. In the accelerating state and the decelerating state, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is darkened so that the display of the POV display 224I is conspicuous. Good. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area in the state of accelerating, and at least the display area may be darkened when the constant speed state is reached.

In FIG. 158 (d5), the POV display 224I has returned from the position on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the initial position, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is easily visible. ..

159 is a diagram showing an example of effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 3 and the like.

The state shown in FIG. 159 (e1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 132 (a1). However, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208N. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 159 (e1) are in the initial positions of each other and are in the open state (spaced state), and the first decorative symbol display device. The 208L display screen is visible.

The state shown in FIG. 159 (e2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 132 (a3-1), and the state shown in FIG. 159 (e3) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 132 (a4). is there.

The state shown in FIG. 159 (e4) is a state in which the hold, which has been the first hold until now, is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. Although the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (e4) is still displayed as a stop, in the second decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The variable display is started, and in the second hold number display that is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the hold number in the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”.

In FIG. 159 (e5), the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B has started, and the effect image EF1′ is displayed separately on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, it is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 159 (e6), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been in the initial position until then, are starting to approach each other and are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlap at both ends of the first decorative symbol.

In FIG. 159 (e7), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in contact with each other and are completely closed, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is invisible. .. Since the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in contact with each other, the effect images EF1' that have been separated until now are displayed as one.

In Fig. 159 (e8), the effect image EF1' disappears, the villager character of the variable icon h0 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the panda of the opponent icon TI is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Character is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the appearance area AS is displayed surrounded by a frame, and inside the No. shown in FIG. 129(a). The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is displayed. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a display of the number of rock-paper-scissors competitions of the mini game B (here, "first time") is shown on the panda character of the opponent icon TI. It should be noted that the number of times displayed here indicates the current number of times of confrontation, but it may be a number of times display (for example, “three more times”) that gives a notice of how many times the rock-paper-scissors confrontation will be held thereafter. According to this example, the hold icon is hidden.

The state shown in FIG. 159 (e9) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 132 (3-7), and the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is started.

The state shown in FIG. 159 (e10) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 132 (a9-1), in which the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won the panda character of the opponent icon TI. ..

The state shown in FIG. 159 (e11) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 132 (10), the stock animation of the notice icon YI is started, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The notice icon YI is once displayed in a large size so as to straddle the device 208N. A part of the villager character of the variable icon h0 and a part of the panda character of the opponent icon TI are overlapped by a part of the notice icon YI that is displayed in a large size.

The state shown in FIG. 159 (e12) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 132 (11), and the notice icon YI is the first stock in the stock area SS provided in the third decorative pattern display device 208N. It is displayed at the position (stock display). In this example, the appearance area AS and the stock area SS are displayed on different symbol display devices, but they may be displayed on the same symbol display means.

In the state shown in FIG. 159 (e13), the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 disappears and the panda character with the opponent icon TI disappears because the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B in the symbol variable display that is currently being performed ends. Is waiting for a rock-paper-scissors showdown at the next change, and is executing a waiting animation. Although the variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L cannot be seen here, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N open and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. When the display screen becomes visible, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS′.

The state shown in FIG. 159 (e14) is a state in which the variable display of symbols is finished, and the panda character with the opponent icon TI still continues the standby animation. Eventually, when the next change is started, the villager character of the change icon h0 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, as the character of the variation icon h0, No. shown in FIG. No. 18 grandfather character or No. It may be the character of 19 Yoshimune. And the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation will be held.

It should be noted that neither the second decorative symbol display device 208M nor the third decorative symbol display device 208N is configured so as not to move from the operating position during the symbol stop display (that is, to be stationary at the operating position). However, both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be moved from the operating position during the symbol stop display. Further, both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving at least between the initial position and the maximum moving position, at least during the period in which the symbol variable display is fixedly displayed. It is configured to remain stationary for some or all of the periods. Note that the movement may be continued or may be stopped in the state of temporary stop in the simulated continuous production or in the state of swing fluctuation before confirmation display. Further, only when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being displayed on the second decorative pattern display device 208M, or only when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being displayed on the third decorative pattern display device 208N. Alternatively, the stop operation may be performed. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are stopped at the initial position, the maximum movement position, or a predetermined stop position in accordance with the timing of the fixed display of the symbol variable display. It may be configured as follows.

The state shown in FIG. 159 (e15) is displayed in the appearance area AS in the state of No. 129 shown in FIG. Although the "red box" notice icon YI of 2 is displayed, the villager character of the variable icon h0 is defeated by the panda character of the opponent icon TI in the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation. In the third decorative pattern display device 208N shown in FIG. 159 (e15), “second time” is displayed as a display of the number of rock-paper-scissors competitions of the mini game B on the panda character of the opponent icon TI. ..

In FIG. 159 (e16), it is informed that the rock-paper-scissors confrontation has ended by straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In Fig. 159 (e17), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that have been closed so far start to open, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is visible. In FIG. 159 (k e18), both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial positions, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The combination of lost decorative patterns of "4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed.

The second decorative pattern display device 208M and the third decorative pattern display device 208N described above can be replaced with the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 158, or other display means (for example, a light guide plate IL, which will be described later). POV display 224I, etc.).

Further, in the above description, the notice display of the “change” of the default color shown in FIG. 129(b) is a notice display that raises the level of the display mode by one step, and is the first display mode (default display mode). If it is displayed, it is announced that the display mode will change to the second display mode (white flashing display mode), and the display mode has actually changed to the second display mode (white flashing display mode). Only in the case where the display mode is the display mode (default display mode), it is possible to change the display mode to the third display mode (blue display mode) by setting the advance notice display by two steps. In addition, when the display mode is the second display mode (white flashing display mode) or more, the display is an advance notice that is raised by one step, and only one step is actually changed.

Note that the notice icon may be stocked by a notice different from the mini game during the execution of a certain mini game. The notice icon may not be stocked.

It should be noted that it is also possible to notify in advance that another mini-game may occur (for example, by a mini-game preparing display or a telop display that says "mini-game is highly accurate").

In addition, before the mini game is started or while the mini game is running, another notice that the notice icon is likely to be obtained (for example, by a telop display saying "Preliminary icon acquisition high probability") ). Here, the situation in which the notice icon is likely to be acquired indicates that the notice icon is more likely to be obtained than when the notice is not notified by another notice.

In addition, when the notice icons are stocked in a certain combination (for example, when a maximum of three notice icons can be stocked, a combination in which “box”, “red box”, “gold box” are stocked or “gold box”) May be configured so that the big hit is settled in the symbol variable display in which all the notice icons are exhausted. In this case, the notice icon may be used as an icon regarding the prefetch notice, or may be used as an icon regarding the normal notice.

It should be noted that there may be a case where the advance notice of the change is given in the mini game that obtains the advance notice icon. For example, the carpet shown in FIG. 138 (13) is in a stationary state, but when an animation that the carpet escapes from the arrow is displayed, the animation is displayed, and the design being performed at that time is displayed. It corresponds to a notice (normal notice) about a big hit in a variable display. Moreover, if the display of this animation is a display with a low appearance rate, it may be a notice of a big hit confirmation.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 138 (13), when the carpet escapes from the arrow, an animation is displayed and the variation causes the super-reach effect, but the variation causes a loss. The mini game A may end. In this case, the Yoshimune (bow) icon that was the first hold icon h11 may be changed to the hold icon in the default display mode, or may remain the Yoshimune (bow) icon. When the icon of Yoshimune (bow) remains as it is, it becomes a hold icon corresponding to white blinking (second display mode level). Further, the change timing to the default display mode may be during the above-mentioned super reach (for example, during the wipe effect). Further, it may be displayed as the default change icon h0 at the start of the next change. Furthermore, the Yoshimune (bow) icon, which was the variable icon h0 when the animation that the carpet escaped from the arrow was displayed, may disappear during the super reach (for example, during the wipe production) or the super icon. It may disappear once during the reach (for example, during the wipe effect) and may be displayed again in the default display mode.

It should be noted that b notice (a <b) stock of advance notice icons is a big hit in the pattern variation display in which all advance notice icons are exhausted compared to a stock (a is an integer of 0 or more) It may be configured to be easy.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing in stage an example of an effect using the display of the icon change notice shown in FIG. 131(b).

In FIG. 160 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 160 (A2-1), No. 1 shown in FIG. The icon IHI of "Red bomber" of 5 appears at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. That is, the icon IHI of "red bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. In the icon change animation, while the "red bomber" icon IHI flies from right to left, a bullet is fired at the hold icon. The "red bomber" icon IHI may be temporarily stopped before the target hold icon. In addition, this pause may be a pause of a fake that impersonates the target icon. In addition, the icon IHI of "red bomber" is performing the animation which passes through the stock area SS mentioned above. Here, when the notice icon is stocked, the "red bomber" icon IHI may be overlapped by the stocked notice icon, and conversely, the notice is stocked by the "red bomber" icon IHI. The icons may overlap.

In FIG. 160 (A3-1), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. That is, the "red bomber" icon IHI includes a red bomber icon RBI and a red bullet icon BTI. The target here is the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 160 (A4-1), the bullet icon BTI overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. In FIG. 160(A5), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. In FIG. 160(A6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode (fifth display mode) which is the same display mode as the “red bomber”. It is in the process of changing, and the change is completed in FIG. In this example, the icon change animation is the animation up to immediately before FIG. 160(A2-1) to FIG. 160(A7). In this example, after the icon IHI of "red bomber" has disappeared from the screen, the change in the display form of the icon has been completed, but before the icon IHI of "red bomber" disappears from the screen, The display mode change may be completed, or the icon display mode change may be completed at the same time that the “red bomber” icon IHI disappears from the screen.

The red bullet icon RBI may always fire the red bullet icon BTI, or may fire the bullet icon BTI of another color. In this case, the color of the bomber may determine the change mode of the icon, or the color of the bullet may determine the change mode of the icon. Alternatively, when the gold bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, the change mode of the icon may be determined by the color of the upper side (here gold) or the lower side (here Then, the change mode of the icon may be determined by the color (red).

In FIG. 160 (A1'), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Of these two hold icons h11 and h12, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a green display mode (fourth display mode), and the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). It is displayed. Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 160(A2′), No. 1 shown in FIG. The icon IHI of "Bomber" of 4 appears (is displayed) on the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. In the icon change animation here, as in the previous example, the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14 (FIG. 160 (A5')). In this example, the icon IHI of "Bomber" is used as the icon change notice display, so the display mode is increased by one step with respect to the green display mode (fourth display mode). In FIG. 160(A7), the first hold icon h11 that was in the green display mode (fourth display mode) is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode). In the icon change animation by the "Bomber" icon IHI, if it is the hold icon in the default display mode (first display mode), skip the white blinking and promote it to blue only for the first attack. However, in the second and subsequent attacks, you can only raise it one step at a time, so in order to promote it to the hold icon in the red display mode (fifth display mode), you need three total attacks (default color → blue → (Green → red) is required. Note that the first attack may be configured to raise only one step (that is, default color→white blinking).

FIG. 160(A3-2-1) is a modified example continuing from FIG. 160(A2-1), and the icon change animation using the “red bomber” icon IHI has started. In this icon change animation, the target is the variable icon h0 displayed in the default display mode. In FIG. 160 (A3-2-3), the bullet icon BTI hits the variation icon h0, and the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image EF14. In FIG. 160 (A3-2-4), the variation icon h0 is red. Has changed to the display mode (5th display mode).

Although the example here uses the icon IHI of “red bomber”, the variation icon h0 is also used in the icon change animation using the icon IHI of “bomber” shown in FIG. 160(A2′). May be targeted. In this case, if the target is the variable icon h0 displayed in the default display mode, the variable icon h0 changes to the blue display mode, but the target is the variable icon h0 displayed in the green display mode. If there is, the change icon h0 changes to a red display mode.

FIG. 160 (A4-2-1) is a modified example continuing from FIG. 160 (A2-1), and the icon change animation using the icon IHI of “red bomber” has started. In this icon change animation, as shown in FIGS. 160 (A4-2-1) to (A4-2-3), the red bomber icon RBI is fired after the red bullet icon BTI is fired. Until the change of the display mode of the (here, the first hold icon h11) is completed, the display is paused before the target hold icon. And, as shown in FIGS. 160 (A4-2-4) to (A4-2-6) in FIG. 160 (A4-2-4) to FIG. 160 (A4-2-6), the red bomber icon RBI is directed toward the left end of the screen. Fly away.

FIG. 160(A2-2-1) is a modification example continuing from FIG. 160(A1-1). However, in this modification, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a white flashing display mode (second display mode). The white blinking display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the display mode may change after the display is started. That is, the second display mode (white blinking display mode) is more likely to change the display mode after the display is started than the first display mode, and is more likely to be changed after the display is started than the third display mode. May be When the icon change notice display shown in FIG. 131(b) is displayed while the icon of the second display mode (blinking white display mode) is displayed (for example, the icon IHI of “red bomber” is displayed). When it appears), attention is focused on the icon in the second display mode (white flashing display mode).

In FIG. 160 (A2-2-2), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first holding icon h11, and the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11. In the drawing (A2-2-4), The first hold icon h11 has changed to a red display mode (fifth display mode).

Note that the icon in the second display mode (white flashing display mode) does not change, but another icon (in this case, the second hold icon h12 that is the icon next to the first hold icon h11, or The variable icon h0) may change, or other icons may change along with the icon in the second display mode (white flashing display mode). Further, even if the icon in the second display mode is displayed, there may be a case where the change in the display mode of the icon does not occur (in the case of a goose effect). Alternatively, on the contrary, when the icon in the second display mode is displayed, the display mode of the icon may be changed without fail. When the icon of the second display mode is displayed, the icon next to the icon of the second display mode (for example, the second hold icon if the icon of the second display mode is the first hold icon. It may be an icon.) It may be announced that the state is easily changed. Here, based on the first hold icon h11 in the second display mode (white flashing display mode), only the adjacent icon (the second hold icon h12 or the variable icon h0) may change, or Although it has been described that the hold icon h11 and the icon next to the hold icon h11 may be changed, the display icon may not be a versatile display mode such as the second display mode, but may be another mode (for example, a tank mode). In the case of a tank, it may be announced that the icon of the tank's main gun may change. Also, instead of the mode of the tank, No. 1 shown in FIG. The display mode of the type of “timer” of No. 10 may be used. No. 8 “button A” type display mode or No. The display mode may be the type of “button B” of 9.

FIG. 161 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG.

FIG. 161(A3-3-1) is a modified example continuing from FIG. 160(A2-1), and is an example in which the icon change animation is not started even if the icon “HIGH RED BOMBERS” IHI appears. That is, in this example, the icon-invariant animation using the icon IHI of "red bomber" is started. In the icon-invariant animation here, the bullet icon BTI is not fired, and the red bomber icon RBI simply flies over the holding frame UI (FIG. 161 (A3-3-1) to FIG. (A3-3-3)). Therefore, the mode of all the hold icons displayed is not changed. Further, the mode of the variable icon h0 has not changed, either. In the icon unchanged animation, the "red bomber" icon IHI may be hidden on the way.

Even when the red bomber icon RBI passes through as in this example, compared to the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear, all the hold icons (the default display mode hold (Including the icon) may be a pre-reading notice with a high degree of reliability of the big hit. Similarly, the variation icon h0 may be a regular notice with a high jackpot reliability. Or, if the displayed icons include the hold icons in the pre-reading advance notice display mode such as the white blinking display mode, those hold icons are compared with the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear. If the display mode of the variable icon is a normal notification display mode, the variable icon may have a red bomber icon RBI as compared with the case where the red bomber icon does not appear. , Ordinary notice with high reliability of jackpot may be used.

FIG. 161 (A3-4-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 160 (A2-1), and the icon unchanged animation is also executed here. In this icon unchanged animation, the red bomber icon RBI fires the red bullet icon BTI, but the bullet icon BTI does not hit any of the icons h0, h11, h12. That is, the red bullet icon BTI fired from the red bomber icon RBI flies over the hold icon as shown in FIGS. 161 (A3-4-2) to (A3-4-4). Then, although it disappears outside the screen or overlaps with the hold icon or the variable icon, it may be slid out as it is. Further, the fired bullet icon BTI may overlap the icon different from the target icon, but may fly off the screen without generating the effect image EF14. Furthermore, the shot bullet icon BTI is a locus that overlaps the hold icon if the hold icon is displayed, but since the hold icon is not displayed (the dotted line in FIG. 161 (A3-4-3)). In some cases, the player may fly off the screen through a trajectory that does not overlap (do not hit) the hold icon. .. In this FIG. 161, (A3-4-4), the mode of all the hold icons displayed has not changed.

Note that in FIG. 161 (A3-4-3), the red bomber icon RBI jumps out of the screen earlier than the bullet icon BTI, but the reverse is also possible, and the same may be true. May be

Further, the example illustrated in FIGS. 161(A3-3-1) to (A3-3-3) and the example illustrated in FIGS. 161(A3-4-1) to (A3-4-4) are This is an example of using the icon IHI of "red bomber", but the icon invariant animation using the icon IHI of "bomber" shown in FIG. 160(A2') may be executed. Further, No. 1 shown in FIG. There may be a case where an icon change animation or an icon non-change animation using the "gold bomber" icon of No. 6 is executed.

There is also a case where a bullet icon BTI is fired at the target of the variable icon h0, but the variable icon h0 is not hit and neither of the holding icons h11 and h12 is hit.

Also, even if the icon change notice display of the "Bomber" icon IHI or the like is displayed, the animation using the icon change notice display is not performed, and the displayed icon change notice is displayed as it is still. After that, it may disappear. In addition, even if the icon change animation is not performed by the "red bomber" icon IHI or the icon unchanged animation is not performed by the "red bomber" icon IHI, the "red bomber" The icon IHI of “red bomber” is displayed more easily than the icon IHI of “” is not displayed. It may be configured, and the easiness of changing the display mode of the "red" may be the same as that when the icon IHI of the "red bomber" is not displayed.

Further, even if the hold change due to the display of the icon change notice fails, the hold (the hold of the first hold icon h11 in this example) for which the hold change is attempted is not the hold change target (this hold). In the example, the second holding icon h12 may be held more easily than the big holding). Further, even if the hold icon has the same display form (for example, the hold icon in the white blinking display form (second display form)), it fails to change from white blinking to blue and remains in white blinking. The icon may be a look-ahead notice having a higher reliability of the big hit than the white-blinking hold icon that was not the target of the hold change. Similarly, the variation icon h0 may be a regular notice with a high jackpot reliability.

FIG. 161 (A3-5-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 160 (A2-1), but here, it looks like an icon-invariant animation, and finally the icon change hit by the bullet icon BTI. This is an example of animation. That is, although the same scene (FIG. 161 (A3-5-2)) as the previous icon unchanged animation scene (FIG. 161 (A3-4-2)) is displayed, the bullet icon BTI returns and the first scene is displayed. It hits the hold icon h11 (in FIG. 161 (A3-5-3), the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. After that, it is the same as in FIG. 160 (A7). In the change animation, the same scene as in the icon unchanged animation is played halfway, and the trajectory of the bullet icon BTI also partially coincides with the trajectory of the bullet icon BTI in the icon unchanged animation. You may come back through to hit the target icon, or the bullet icon BTI may disappear from the screen and then come back and hit the target icon, as shown in FIG. 161 (A3-5-4). After that, it continues to FIG. 160 (A7).

FIG. 161 (A3-6-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 160 (A2-1), but here, the button image is added to the display of the icon change notice, and it becomes a composite effect with the button effect.

First, the red bomber icon RBI appears, and the icon change animation or icon unchanged animation is started. Then, the red bomber icon RBI pauses before the target hold icon (FIG. 161 (A3-6-1)). Then, the button image 136a is added to the red bomber icon RBI (FIG. 161 (A3-6-2)). Although the remaining time display meter MT showing the remaining time of the operation valid period is not added here, it may be added. Further, the operation valid period may start from the time when the button image 136a is added, or may start after a while.

The timing of FIG. 161 (A3-6-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, in FIG. 161 (A3-6-4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. The bullet icon BTI may be fired on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be executed when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. .. Further, the bullet icon BTI may be fired only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Furthermore, the bullet icon BTI is fired regardless of whether the chance button 136 is operated, but when the chance button 136 is not operated, compared to when the chance button 136 is operated, It may be difficult to hit the target icon, or if the chance button 136 is not operated, the target icon may never be hit. If the bullet icon BTI does not hit the target icon, another icon change animation or icon non-change animation may be performed.

FIG. 161 (A3-7-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 160 (A2-1), but here, the first hold icon h11 is a button image mode. That is, No. 1 shown in FIG. It is the icon of “Button A” of No. 8. The icon of "button A" is an icon for notifying that an icon change will be announced by button operation. In the subsequent FIG. 161 (A3-7-2), the button image 136a is added to the red bomber icon RBI, as in FIG. 161 (A3-6-2). Although the remaining time display meter MT is not added here as well, it may be added.

The timing of FIG. 161 (A3-7-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, in FIG. 161 (A3-7-4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. The bullet icon BTI flies toward the first hold icon h11 that is the icon of the "button A" (FIG. 161 (A3-7-5)). Subsequently, in FIG. 161 (A3-7-6), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. In FIG. 161 (A3-7-7), the first hold icon h11, which is the icon of the “button A”, is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

FIG. 161(A3′-2-1) is a modification example continuing from FIG. 160(A2′). That is, the first hold icon h11 has a green display mode (fourth display mode), and the second hold icon h12 has a default display mode (first display mode). In this modification, the white bomber icon WBI fires a plurality of white bullet icons BTI, as shown in FIG. 161 (A3'-2-1). The plurality of bullet icons BTI may be fired at the same time, or may be fired one by one. Here, two white bullet icon BTIs are fired at the same time. The two bullet icons BTI partially overlap each other. The target icon here may be a single icon or a plurality of icons. In other words, one bullet icon BTI may attack one holding icon, and a plurality of bullet icons BTI may attack one holding icon. In this example, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are target icons. A bullet icon BTI aiming at the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the front, and a bullet icon BTI aiming at the first hold icon h11 is displayed at the back side. Note that this relationship may be reversed. Further, a plurality of bullet icons BTI may not be overlapped.

In FIG. 161 (A3′-2-3), the bullet icons BTI and BTI hit the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 one by one, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 are also hit. Is also covered with the effect image EF14. In FIG. 161 (A3-7-7), the first hold icon h11 that was in the green display mode (fourth display mode) changes to the red display mode (fifth display mode), and the default display mode ( The second hold icon h12 that was the first display mode) is changed to the blue display mode (third display mode).

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing a modified example such as the effect example shown in FIG. 160.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 162(A3-2-1) to (A3-2-4) are the example productions shown in FIG. 161(A3′-2-1) to FIG. 161(A3′-2-4). It is a modified example of. Here, the icon IHI of "Red bomber" has appeared. Further, the first hold icon has a white blinking display mode (second display mode). In FIG. 162 (A3-2-1), the red bomber icon RBI fires two red bullet icons BTI. Of the two fired bullet icons BTI, one hits the first hold icon h11 and the other hits neither icon (FIG. 162 (A3-2-3)). That is, the hold icon for which the pre-reading notice is given hits, and the hold icon (the second hold icon h12) for which the pre-reading notice is not made hits. In FIG. 162 (A3-2-3), only the first holding icon h11 on the hit side is covered by the effect image EF14, and in the subsequent FIG. 162 (A3-2-4), the effect image EF14 disappears and Only the 1-hold icon h11 has changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

Note that the bullet icon BTI may hit the hold icon for which the prefetching notice has not been given. Further, the bullet icon BTI may hit only the hold icon for which the prefetching notice has not been given. Alternatively, the bullet icon BTI may always hit the hold icon for which the prefetching notice has not been given. Alternatively, on the contrary, the bullet icon BTI may always hit the hold icon for which the prefetching notice is given.

Here, the red bullet icon BTI hits the holding icon (holding icon in the first display mode) for which the pre-reading notice has not been given, and the pre-reading notice in the white blinking display mode (second display mode) has been given. If the bullet icon BTI does not hit the reserved icon, the hold icon for which the pre-reading notice has not been given has a higher expectation of a big hit than the hold icon for which the pre-reading notice has been given so far. It has changed to a hold icon. In this way, for icons having different display modes, which of the icons changes to a red display mode, all of the icons change to a red display mode, or a plurality of red bullet icons BTI are displayed. Various patterns are conceivable, such as whether one icon does not change while being fired, and it may function effectively as a stirrer production.

The bullet icon BTI may be configured so that the bullet icon BTI is more likely to hit, that is, the pending icon is changed more easily than the pending icon for which the pre-reading notice is not given. Further, the variable icon may be configured to hit the bullet icon BTI more easily than the hold icon, that is, to change the hold icon more easily.

Furthermore, the firing of a plurality of bullet icons BTI can also be applied to the "gold bomber" icon shown in FIG. 131(b).

FIG. 162 (A3-8-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 160 (A2-1), but here, the red bomber icon RBI pauses immediately above the change icon h0. Then, with the pause, the red bomber icon RBI does not fire the bullet icon BTI, and the pattern variation display ends (FIG. 162 (A3-8-2). And the next symbol variation display is Even if started, the red bomber icon RBI remains paused right above the variation icon h0, that is, the red bomber icon RBI here is displayed across successive symbol variation displays. When the next variation starts, the red bomber icon RBI fires a red bullet icon BTI toward the first hold icon h0 as shown in FIG. 162 (A3-8-4). In this way, when the symbol variation display is straddled, the icon change may always be successful, or even when the symbol variation display is straddled, it may fail. , When crossing the pattern variable display, the hold icon may change icon and the change icon may not change icon, or vice versa, the change icon may change icon and the hold icon may not change icon. May be.

FIG. 162 (A3-9-1) to FIG. 162 (A3-9-5) are modifications of FIGS. 161 (A3-8-1) to 161 (A3-8-4). This example is an example in which the icon IHI of "red bomber" flies away without performing the effect of firing the bullet icon BTI even in the case of the symbol variation display after straddling the continuous symbol variation display.

In addition, in the symbol variation display after straddling the continuous symbol variation display, whether to hit or not (whether the icon changes or not), the effect of firing the bullet icon BTI is always performed. May be.

FIG. 162 (A3-10-1) is also a modification example continuing from FIG. 160 (A2-1). In this example, the pre-reading target variation suspension is the second suspension represented by the second suspension icon h12 shown in FIG. 162 (A3-10-1). The red bomber icon RBI, which is in front of the hold icon and paused right above the fluctuation icon h0, fires a red bullet icon BTI targeting the second hold icon h12, but does not hit (Fig. 162 (A3-10-2)), and the symbol variation display ends (FIG. 162 (A3-10-3)). Then, even when the next symbol variation display is started, the red bomber icon RBI is temporarily stopped immediately above the variation icon h0 (FIG. 162 (A3-10-4),) of the prefetch target variation. A red bullet icon BTI is fired at the target of the first hold icon h11 to be held, but it does not hit here either (FIG. 162 (A3-10-5)), and the symbol variation display ends (FIG. 162 ( A3-10-6)). This time, the hold that was the change in the prefetching target is consumed, and the change display of symbols is started. That is, the symbol variation display started here is the variation of the pre-reading target, and the red bomber icon RBI performs somersault to make the variation icon h0 the target icon, before the variation icon h0. Returning to the position of, the red bullet icon BTI is fired at the change icon h0 as a target (FIG. 162 (A3-10-8)), and fly away toward the left end of the screen. The bullet icon BTI fired here hits the variation icon h0, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14 (FIG. 162 (A3-10-10)). Although not shown, the change icon h0 changes to a red display mode (fifth display mode) when the effect image EF14 disappears.

It should be noted that FIG. 162 (A3-10-9') is a modified example continuing from the same figure (A3-10-8), but there is a case where the final change does not hit the target. As a result, all three failed. It should be noted that, in this example, the icon unchanged animation by the red bomber icon is performed multiple times for the same icon, but the icon unchanged animation by the red bomber icon is performed multiple times for different icons. May be. Also, the icon change animation may be performed multiple times for the same icon or multiple times for different icons.

FIG. 162 (A2-3-1) is an example continued from the symbol variation display 160 (A1-1), but a plurality of icon change notice displays may appear. That is, in FIG. 162 (A2-3-1), three types of bomber icons IHI, which are all types such as “bomber”, “red bomber”, and “gold bomber”, have appeared. It should be noted that the types of display of the icon change notice that appear may all be different as in this example, or may be all the same. In addition, systems such as a bomber may or may not be aligned (for example, "red balloon", "gold bomber", "red flying boat").

In this way, when the icon IHI of a plurality of bombers appears, the icon change effect may be performed on all aircraft, but as shown in FIG. 162 (A2-3-2), one bomber is used. Icon (here, the icon of "red bomber") IHI may perform the icon change effect, or the icons IHI of a plurality of bombers forming a part may perform the icon change effect. Good.

In FIG. 162 (A2-3-3), the variable icon, which is the default display mode, is changed to the red display mode, which means that the icon change effect has been successful. However, it may fail. Further, when the icon change effect is performed by the icons IHI of a plurality of bombers, a plurality of icons may change, or only one icon may change.

In addition, it may be the icon of "Bomber" or the No. shown in FIG. In the case of the icon of "Flying boat" of 7, it is possible to change two icons with one aircraft.

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a modification example such as the effect example shown in FIG.

In FIG. 163 (A1-2-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon h11 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 163 (A1-2-2), there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230 shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 44, and the number of the special figure 1 reservations is increased by one, resulting in a total of two. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 163 (A1-2-2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as “2”.

In FIG. 163 (A1-2-3), the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the second stage hs2. The second hold icon h12 is No. 2 shown in FIG. It is an icon in the display mode of 12 "roulette". This "roulette" display mode icon is displayed by switching the display mode of N selections selected from 2 to 5 selections (blue, green, red, gold, rainbow) in order and stopping at the roulette wheel. This hold icon itself changes to the display mode. In this example, there are three choices of blue, green, and red, and the display is switched and displayed in the order of “blue→green→red→blue→”. That is, in the second holding icon h12 in the display form of "roulette" shown in FIG. 163 (A1-2-3), the icon in the display form of "blue" is displayed, and in the same diagram (A1-2-4). In the second hold icon h12 in the "roulette" display mode, the icon in the "green" display mode is displayed, and the second hold in the "roulette" display mode shown in Fig. (A1-2-5). In the icon h12, an icon in the display mode of "red" is displayed. In the following drawings, it is indicated by an arrow mark indicating that the fluctuation is occurring. In FIG. 163 (A1-2-7), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration”). "1"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also shows the combination of lost decorative patterns ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7").

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 163 (A1-2-8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. The first hold icon h11 is an icon in the display form of "roulette". Further, the icon IHI of "red bomber" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is started. That is, the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, targeting the first hold icon h11.

In FIG. 163 (A1-2-10), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 160 (A1-2-11), the effect image EF14 disappears, and in the first hold icon h11, the icon in the display mode of “red” is visible. In the same figure (A1-2-12) following FIG. 160 (A1-2-11), the first hold icon h11 has changed to the display mode of “red”. Also, the "red bomber" icon IHI is about to disappear in the left corner of the screen. In addition, when the icon change animation is not performed by the "red bomber" icon IHI, or when the icon unchanged animation is not performed by the "red bomber" icon IHI, that is, when the "red bomber" is selected. Even when the animation used is not performed, the first hold icon h11 is configured to change to the “red” display mode more easily than when the “red bomber” icon IHI is not displayed. Alternatively, the easiness of changing the display mode of “red” may be the same as that when the icon IHI of “red bomber” is not displayed.

The example illustrated in FIGS. 163(A1-3-1) to (A1-3-7) is an example in which the telop effect described with reference to FIG. 104 is executed.

In FIG. 163 (A1-3-1), the symbol variable display is stopped and displayed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same diagram (A1-3-2), the first decorative symbol is displayed in the central area. Fluctuation display has started. In the subsequent FIG. 163 (A1-3-3), the telop effect is started. That is, the telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, the possibility that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change is displayed in characters, which corresponds to an example of the icon change notice display. In the telop display trp here, a character display such as "holding change highly accurate" continues to be flowed from right to left on the screen.

After the telop effect is started, as shown in FIG. 163 (A1-3-4), the icon IHI of “red bomber” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is displayed. Has been started. That is, while the telop effect continues, as shown in FIG. 163 (A1-3-4), a red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, targeting the first hold icon h11. When the icon (here, the icon IHI for "red bomber") is displayed as the icon change notice while the telop display trp such as "Hold change high accuracy" is displayed, "Hold change high accuracy" is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed more easily than in the state in which the telop display trp such as "medium" is not displayed.

In FIG. 163 (A1-3-7), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Eventually, when the effect image EF14 disappears, the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of “red”.

Next, an example in which the silhouette notice of the hold icon is executed will be described.

In FIG. 163 (A1-4-1), the variable display of symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration”). "1"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also shows the combination of lost decorative patterns ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7").

In FIG. 163 (A1-4-2), the hold, which has been the first hold until now, is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 163 (A1-4-3), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started, In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Toku-zu 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”. Further, the effect image EF15 is generated so as to cover the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS, and neither the hold icon nor the change icon is visible.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 163 (A1-4-3), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the effect image EF15 disappears, and the silhouette notice is started in the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS. That is, the hut sil appears in the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS. The inside of the hut sil is displayed in silhouette. In FIG. 163 (A1-4-3), the variation icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are displayed in silhouette display. In the silhouette display, the colors of the icons and the like are not the usual colors but the colors representing shadows. The silhouette notice started here is a notice indicating that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, or there is a hold icon that may change to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit. It may be a notice that suggests that there is.

After the silhouette notice is started, as shown in FIG. 163 (A1-4-4), the icon IHI of “red bomber” appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is started. It That is, as shown in FIG. 163 (A1-4-4), the red bomber icon RBI approaches the hut sil while the silhouette notice is being given. Eventually, the red bomber icon RBI passes while hazeing through the hut sil and fires a red bullet icon BTI while passing. The fired bullet icon BTI enters the hut and is displayed as a silhouette.

In FIG. 163 (A1-4-7), a state in which the bullet icon BTI is likely to hit the first hold icon h11 is displayed by silhouette display. Also, in FIG. 163 (A1-4-8), a state in which the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14 is displayed in silhouette display. Then, in FIG. 163 (A1-4-9), the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a silhouette display so that it can be seen that the display mode has changed to “red”. It should be noted that the silhouette may be displayed so that the display mode is not known until the silhouette notice is finished.

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example in which the silhouette notice of the hold icon is being executed and other effect examples.

In FIG. 164 (A1-4-10), the variable display of symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the decorative symbols with a loss (“decoration 6”-“decoration”). 4”-“decoration 1”) is stopped and displayed, and the upper left second decorative design is also stopped and displayed with the same combination of lost decorative designs.

FIG. 164 (A1-4-11) is in a stop display (during confirmation display), the change icon h0 disappears, and FIG. 164 (A1-4-12) is also in a stop display (during confirmation display). In the same figure (A1-4-13), the hold that has been the first hold until now, that is, the hold of the first hold icon that has changed to the display mode of "red" is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. .. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164 (A1-4-13), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started, In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Toku-zu 1 is decremented by 1 and becomes “1”. Further, in the hut sil, it can be seen that the movement animation of the hold icon is displayed in a silhouette display, and the first hold icon that has changed to the display mode of “red” is displayed at the position of the variable icon h0.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164 (A1-4-14), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region, and after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, The silhouette notice ends, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164 (A1-4-15) displays the variable icon h0 changed to the red display mode.

In addition, the production of the silhouette notice may itself be promoted by the production by the icon change animation using the icon IHI of "red bomber". For example, the hut sil may be promoted to become a house and the hold icon may be easily changed, or the color of the hut sil may be changed to red and the hold icon may be easily displayed in red. .. Then, the display mode of the hold icon may change after the silhouette notice ends (after the hut sil is hidden) or at the same time.

FIG. 164(B1-1) to FIG. 164(B8) are diagrams showing an example in which after the icon change notice display is displayed, the icon change notice display itself is promoted.

In FIG. 164 (B1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 164(B2), the icon IHI of the default color "Bomber", which is an icon change notice display, appears (is displayed) at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. In the icon change animation here, the icon IHI of "Bomber" is temporarily stopped on the change icon h0 as shown in FIG. 164(B3-1), and as shown in FIG. After the flashing of the change was displayed on the "Bomber" icon IHI, it was promoted to the "Red Bomber" icon IHI. In addition, in the case of promotion within the same bomber system (the icon IHI of "Bomber" is promoted to the icon IHI of "Bomber" or the icon IHI of "Red bomber" is There is a case where it is promoted to the "Bomber" icon IHI) or when it changes to a different system (the "Bomber" icon IHI is promoted to the "Flying boat" icon IHI or the "Bomber" icon IHI may be promoted to the “Red Flying Boat” icon IHI).

In FIG. 164(B6), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In FIG. 164(B7), the fired bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 164(B8), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of “red”.

FIG. 164 (B3-2-1) to FIG. 164 (B3-2-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted by the button effect.

FIG. 164(B3-2-1) is an example continued from FIG. 164(B2), and the state shown in FIG. 164(B3-2-1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 164(B3-1). is there. In FIG. 164 (B3-2-2), the button image 136a is added to the icon IHI of “bomber”, which is a display of the icon change notice. Although the remaining time display meter MT showing the remaining time of the operation valid period is not added here, it may be added. Further, the operation valid period may start from the time when the button image 136a is added, or may start after a while.

The timing of FIG. 164 (B3-2-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the valid operation period described above, in FIG. 161 (B3-2-4), a flashing display is displayed on the icon IHI of the “bomber” to indicate the change, and then “red”. It has been promoted to the icon "HIB" of "Bomber" (Fig. 161 (B3-2-5)). .. Then, continuing from FIG. 164 (B6), the display mode of the hold icon may not change. Note that the promotion of the “bomber” icon IHI is executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated. It may be performed, or may be performed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. Further, although the button image 136a is added on the icon "HIB" of the bomber, the button image 136a may not be added and may be executed as a so-called back button effect.

FIG. 164 (B3-3-1) to FIG. 164 (B3-3-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted by the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164 (B3-3-1), the notice icon YI is stocked in the stock area SS. In FIG. 164 (B3-3-2), the notice icon YI is used, the box changes to the opened state d, and from the box, the No. shown in FIG. 129(b) is displayed. The "UP" notice display YH of 20 is released, and in the figure (B3-3-3), the used notice icon YI disappears and the "UP" notice display YH is displayed. The advance notice YH of “UP” changes to a light ball YHb, and as shown in FIG. 164 (B3-3-4), the light ball YHb is temporarily stopped on the variation icon h0. It flies toward the "Bomber" icon IHI and hits the "Bomber" icon IHI. Then, in FIG. 164 (B3-3-5), the icon IHI for “bomber” is promoted to the icon IHI for “red bomber”. 164 (B3-3-6) is followed by FIG. 164 (B6), but the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted while failing to be promoted midway over a plurality of fluctuations.

FIG. 165 (B3-4-1) is an example that continues from FIG. 164 (B2). In this example, the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 165 (B3-4-1) is used to hold the change of the prefetch target. It is the second hold to represent.

The state shown in FIG. 165 (B3-4-1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 164 (B3-1), and the icon IHI of the default color "Bomber", which is a display of the icon change notice, is a variable icon. It is paused just above h0. Also, the state shown in FIG. 164 (B3-4-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 164 (B4), and the icon IHI of the “bomber” is flashed to incite the change. In this example, in FIG. 165 (B3-4-3) in which the promotion has failed and the flashing display has disappeared, the icon IHI of "Bomber" remains as it is. Eventually, in FIG. 163 (B3-4-3), the variable display of symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”- "Ornament 1"-"Ornament 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second ornamental pattern at the upper left is also stopped and displayed as a combination of missing ornamental symbols ("Ornament 4"-"Ornament 1-Ornament 7"). There is.

Then, even when the next symbol variation display is started, the icon "HIBON BOMBER" IHI remains paused right above the variation icon h0 (FIG. 165 (B3-4-5)). In the succeeding FIG. 165 (B3-4-6), the flashing display that fuels the change is again displayed on the icon IHI of the “bomber”, and this time the promotion was successful, and the flashing display disappeared. ), has been promoted to the icon IHI of "Red bomber". The red bomber icon RBI that has been successfully promoted fires a red bullet icon BTI toward the first hold icon h0, but as shown in FIG. 165 (B3-4-8), it does not hit here, In FIG. 165 (B3-4-9), the variable display of symbols is finished, and the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”) is stopped and displayed.

This time, the hold, which was the change in the prefetching target, is exhausted, and the symbol change display is started (FIG. 165 (B3-4-10)). That is, the symbol variation display started here is the variation of the pre-reading target, and the red bomber icon RBI performs somersault to make the variation icon h0 the target icon, before the variation icon h0. Returning to the position of, the red bullet icon BTI is fired at the change icon h0 as a target (FIG. 165 (B3-4-11)). After that, as shown in FIG. 160 (A3-2-2), the display mode of the variable icon may not change.

In this example, the promotion has succeeded the second time, but the production may end without the promotion being successful. Further, the icon IHI of “red bomber” may be further changed to the icon IHI of “gold bomber”. Further, in this example, the bullet icon BTI is fired after promotion, but the bullet icon BTI may be fired even before promotion. For example, the bullet icon BTI may be fired at the timing of FIG. 165 (B3-4-3).

FIG. 165 (B1-2-1) to FIG. 165 (B1-2-10) are diagrams showing an example in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted via the timer notice effect.

FIG. 165 (B1-2-1) shows that the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special map 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 are displayed. There is. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 165 (B1-2-2), the timer notice effect is started, and the timer notice display TYH is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. On the timer notice display TYH shown in FIG. 165 (B1-2-2), the remaining time (5 seconds in this case) up to the time which is the reference for the promotion effect start is displayed, and FIG. 165 (1-2). In 3), the countdown has started. The timer notice effect started here corresponds to a notice of promotion effect. After the timer notice effect is started, as shown in FIG. 165 (B1-2-4), the icon IHI of the default color "Bomber" which is a notice of the icon change is displayed, and is directly above the change icon h0. It flies up to and pauses (FIG. 165 (B1-2-5)), and enters the standby state. The timer notice display TYH shown in FIG. 165 (B1-2-6) has no remaining time (0 seconds), and in the subsequent figure (B1-2-7), the timer notice display TYH is a character of “attention”. Has been switched to. At the same time as the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH disappears (becomes 0 seconds), the promotion effect is started. Note that the promotion effect may be started (when there is a time lag) after the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH is exhausted.

In FIG. 165 (B1-2-8), the character “Attention” is displayed on the timer notice display TYH, and a flashing display that sparks a change is displayed on the icon IHI of the “bomber” that has been in the standby state until now. Is displayed. Eventually, the flashing display disappears, and in FIG. 165 (B1-2-9) where the flashing display disappears, the icon has been promoted to the “red bomber” icon IHI. It is easier to promote the icon change notice display itself via the timer notice effect than when not passing the timer notice effect. It should be noted that the display itself of the icon change notice may be promoted without fail when the timer notice effect is passed. In FIG. 165 (B1-2-10), the timer notice effect is finished and the timer notice display TYH is hidden. It should be noted that this timer notice display TYH may be used to give notice of the type in which the icon change notice display is promoted. For example, the character display of "red" may be performed instead of the character display of "attention".

It should be noted that when the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH is exhausted (0 seconds), the display of the icon change notice (for example, the icon IHI of “Bomber”) may appear. That is, the timer notice display TYH corresponds to a notice that the icon change notice may be displayed. Furthermore, the background color of the timer notice display TYH or the like may be used to give notice of the display color of the icon change notice that appears. For example, if it is a white background, the icon IHI of "Bomber" is announced, if it is a red background, the icon IHI of "Red Bomber" is announced, and if it is a gold background, it is "Gold". The appearance of the icon "HIB" of "Bomber" may be announced. However, such a notice may not be given.

In addition, although this example is an example in which the timer advance notice effect and the promotion effect are combined, both are independent, and after the timer advance notice effect is started, the icon "HIGH BOMBER" IHI appears and the timer advance notice display TYH Even if the remaining time is exhausted, the promotion effect may not be started, and another notice or effect corresponding to the timer notice display TYH may be started. In this case, the promotion effect of the icon "HIB" of the "bomber" is not related to the timer notice effect. Further, there may be a case where the timing when the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH is exhausted and the timing at which the icon "HIB" of the "bomber" is changed to be held coincidentally.

Next, an example in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted via the meter effect will be described.

FIG. 165 (B1-3-1) shows that the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special map 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 are displayed. There is. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed. Further, a meter display MD similar to the meter display shown in FIG. 101 or the like is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. In the meter display MD shown in FIG. 165 (B1-3-1), when the tank is full with 6 scales, 5 scales are already stored. When the meter display MD is full, the icon IHI of "Bomber", which is an icon change notice display, is promoted. It should be noted that this meter display MD may be a display that is constantly displayed, except for a specific state in which a super reach effect is being executed, or a display that is displayed when the display start condition is satisfied. May be

Eventually, in FIG. 165 (B1-3-2), the variable display of symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”- "Ornament 1"-"Ornament 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second ornamental pattern at the upper left is also stopped and displayed as a combination of missing ornamental symbols ("Ornament 4"-"Ornament 1-Ornament 7"). There is.

Then, even when the next symbol variation display is started, the meter display MD accumulated up to 5 scales is displayed on the right base icon bIr (FIG. 165 (B1-3-3)). When the next symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 165 (B1-3-4), the "red bomber" icon IHI appears at the right end of the screen. That is, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" displayed here is the No. 1 shown in Fig. 129(b). The "up" notice display YH of 20 is mounted, and in the same figure (B1-3-5), when passing over the meter display MD, the "up" notice display YH is dropped, The notice display YH of "up" is taken into the meter display MD. As a result, as shown in FIG. 165 (B1-3-6), the meter display MD becomes full, and in the subsequent figure (B1-3-7), the meter display MD is changed to the character display “promotion”. It's changing.

FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example in which the display of the icon change notice itself is promoted via the meter effect, and other effect examples.

In FIG. 166 (B1-3-8) subsequent to FIG. 165 (B1-3-7), the default color “bomber” icon IHI is changed in response to the meter display MD being full. In FIG. 166 (B1-3-9) in which the flashing flashing display is displayed and the flashing display disappears, the icon has been promoted to the “red bomber” icon IHI. The changed icon change notice display color matches the background color of the character display "promotion" on the meter display MD, and the icon change notice display is changed at the stage of FIG. 165 (B1-3-7). The changing display mode is announced in advance. Subsequently, the meter display MD shown in FIG. 166 (B1-3-10) has returned to the empty state. When the meter display MD is full, the display mode of the icon change notice display may be changed (promoted) without exception, or may not be changed (promoted) (failure).

FIG. 165 (B1-4-1) to FIG. 165 (B1-4-4) describe an example in which the icon change notice display appears when the meter display in the meter effect is full.

The meter display MD is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 165 (B1-4-1). The meter display MD is in a state where the scale is full at 6 scales and 5 scales are already stored. Further, in FIG. 165 (B1-4-1) during the variable display of the symbols, the advance notice display YH of “UP” is displayed. In the subsequent FIG. 165 (B1-4-2), the advance notice YH of “up” is taken into the meter display MD, and the meter display MD becomes full, and in the subsequent FIG. (B1-4-3), the meter is displayed. The display MD has changed to the display of "bombing" with a red background. Here, as the display of the icon change notice, it is announced that the icon of the bomber with the background color will appear. If you change the display to "Bombing" on the gold background, the "Gold bomber" icon may appear, and if you change to the "Bombing" display on the white background, the "Bomber" icon changes. It may be displayed. Further, it is not necessary to give a notice of the appearance of the icon change notice that appears, and even in this case, when the meter display MD is full, the "bomber" icon, the "red bomber" icon, Alternatively, the "gold bomber" icon may be displayed.

Then, in FIG. 166 (B1-4-4), the icon IHI of "red bomber" appears at the right end of the screen.

It should be noted that when the appearance notice of the icon change notice display is given by the meter display MD, the icon change notice display may or may not always appear.

FIG. 166(C1) to FIG. 166(C13) are diagrams showing an example in which the icon change notice display is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In FIG. 166 (C1), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. During the stop display, nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 166(C2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Even when the variable display of symbols is started, nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, but when the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, it is displayed in FIG. 166 (C3). As shown in the figure, a smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and in the figure (C4), the smoke image disappears, and in the effect icon display area DIS, No. 1 shown in FIG. Thirteen red “Ikayoshi” icons IHI are displayed. This "Akayoshimune" icon corresponds to the icon change notice display, and will be described below with the same symbols as those used for the "Red bomber" icon and the like. When the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is successfully changed, the icon display mode is changed to the same display mode as itself, that is, the red display mode (fifth display mode). Therefore, if the display mode of the hold icon is changed, it corresponds to the advance notice of advance notice, and if the display mode of the variable icon is changed, it corresponds to the normal notice of advance notice.

In FIG. 166(C5), the change effect of the change icon h0 using the icon AHI of “Akayoshimune” is started. That is, the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune", which has been the default mode (a) shown in FIG. 131(b), has been changed to the mode (b). That is, the icon IHI of "Akayoshi Mune", which was standing upright, faces the variable icon h0, holds the sword, and vibrates from the sword. Also in FIG. 166(C6), the wave is oscillated from the sword of “Akayoshimune”, but the display mode of the variation icon h0 remains the default, and in FIG. 166(C7), the icon IHI of “Akayoshimune” is Returning to the mode a, the change animation has ended. That is, the change effect here has failed. In FIG. 166 (C8), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is displayed on the right base icon bIr as the mode a.

In FIG. 166(C9), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even if the symbol variable display is started, the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is displayed on the right base icon bIr as the mode a, and is displayed across the continuous symbol variable display. In FIG. 166 (C10), a change animation is started as a change effect of the change icon h0 using the icon IHI of “Akayoshimune”. In FIG. 166 (C11), the variable icon h0, which has been the default display mode until then, is changed to the red display mode, and the normal notice is started. In FIG. 166 (C12-1), the icon IHI of “Akayoshimune” has changed from the aspect b to the aspect c, appealing that the change effect has been successful. If the change effect is successful, the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune", which was the display of the icon change notice, disappears from the right base icon bIr.

The icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" described above is the same as the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono shown in FIG. 87, FIG. 94, etc., and the effect example shown in FIG. 87, FIG. 94, etc. And are mutually applicable.

When the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is displayed, the display form of the icon may change to a red display form without fail, or it may fail like this example, but In some cases, it may be changed to a red display mode, or it may fail in the end.

FIG. 166 (C12-2) shows a state after the variation icon h0 cannot be changed to the red display mode and the change rendering finally fails, and the icon IHI of “Akayoshimune” is displayed. However, the change from the aspect b to the aspect d notifies that the change effect has failed.

Next, an example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 131B will be described.

In FIG. 166 (D1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 166 (D2), the icon of “red thundercloud” starts to be displayed small on the hold icons h11 and h12. This "red thundercloud" icon corresponds to the icon change notice display, and will be described below with the same reference numerals as those used for the "red bomber" icon and the like. The icon of "red thundercloud" is the same as the icon of "red bomber" and the icon of "Akayoshimune" when the icon is changed successfully. It is an icon for changing to a fifth display mode).

The "red thundercloud" icon grows into a large thundercloud by the growth animation after the display is started. There may be a case where a large thundercloud does not grow, and in this case, it may be displayed as a gusset, or a large thundercloud may surely grow.

The "red thundercloud" icon IHI shown in FIG. 166 (D3) has grown to cover the area from the variable icon display area CIS to the hold icon display area HIS from above, and the "red thundercloud" icon IHI The fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed below.

In FIG. 166 (D4), thunder has fallen from the “red thundercloud” icon IHI toward the first hold icon h11, and in the same figure (D5) that follows, the first hold icon h11 where the thunder has fallen is the effect image. In the figure (D6) in which the effect image EF16 is covered by the EF16 and disappears, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change, and the default display mode remains, and the change effect fails. The “red thundercloud” icon IHI drops lightning simultaneously or sequentially toward one or more icons of the hold icon or the variable icon, and when the change effect is successful, the display mode of the icon that has thundered is , The display mode changes to red. Note that in FIG. 166 (D6), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stopped and displayed, but the combination of lost decorative symbols is displayed, but the icon IHI of "Red thundercloud" is displayed. Has been done.

In FIG. 166 (D7), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is exhausted and the variable display of symbols is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the "red thundercloud" icon IHI is displayed, and this "red thundercloud" icon IHI is also displayed across the continuous symbol variation display.

FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 131(b) and another example of the effect.

In FIG. 167 (D8) subsequent to FIG. 166 (D7), the symbol variable display is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the combination of lost decorative symbols. Here, the special figure is no longer held and the next change is waiting for a prize. However, the "Red Thundercloud" icon IHI is still displayed.

When the first time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the state where the symbol variation display is not started after the stop symbol of the special symbol is confirmed and displayed in the state where the hold is 0, the symbol demonstration is started. (FIG. 167 (D9)). In this symbol demo, the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed continues to be displayed. Although not shown, the background screen continues to be displayed without being changed from the symbol variable display of FIG. 166 (D7). However, you may switch to the background screen of the symbol demo. Further, when the symbol demonstration is started, the display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is started. The display start timing of these icons MI, VI, BI may be before the start of the symbol demo, at the same time as the start of the symbol demo, or after the start of the symbol demo. A detailed description of these icons MI, VI, BI has been given with reference to FIG.

Also, as shown in FIG. 167 (D9), the icon IHI of “red thundercloud” is still displayed even during the symbol demonstration.

The display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is started in a state where the stop symbol of the special symbol is confirmed and the variable display of the symbol is not started after the hold is 0. Furthermore, when the second time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses in that state, the pattern demo is switched to the animation demo. When the animation demo starts, the background screen changes and the animation demo screen is displayed (FIG. 167 (D10)). When switching to the demo screen of this animation, the icon IHI of "Red thundercloud" disappears. On the other hand, in this example, even when the screen is switched to the animation demo screen, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are still displayed at the same positions as before the switching. However, when switching to the animation demonstration screen, the display positions of these icons MI, VI, BI may be changed or may be hidden.

The animation demonstration screen may be switched to when the first time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. In this case, at the same time as switching to the animation demo screen, the icon IHI of “red thundercloud” may be hidden, or the second time period may be displayed after switching.

Eventually, there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230 shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 44, the holding of special figure 1 is increased by one, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation demonstration screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 167 (D11). As a result, the icon IHI of the “red thundercloud” that has grown greatly is displayed again. However, the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" may not be displayed when the symbol demo or the animation demo is sandwiched.

In FIG. 167 (D8), the symbol fluctuation display started in FIG. 167 (D11) is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stopped and displayed, and the combination of lost decorative symbols is displayed. During the execution of the symbol variation display started in (D11), there is another ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the number of reservations in special figure 1 becomes 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. ing. Therefore, the next variation is started immediately, and after the symbol variation display here, the suspension of special figure 1 starts to accumulate, and the symbol variation display is continuously executed. During this period, as shown in FIG. 167 (D13), the icon IHI of “red thundercloud” continues to be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 167 (D14), the first stop is performed in the first decorative symbol, and the left symbol fluctuates. When the symbol variable display of the “red thundercloud” icon IHI is performed a predetermined number of times, the erasing animation is started. The count of the number of times here does not change even if the above-mentioned symbol demo or the above-mentioned animation demo is sandwiched. However, the number of times may be reset by sandwiching the symbol demo or the animation demo. The start timing of the deletion animation may be at the same time as the start of the next symbol variable display in which the symbol variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, after the start, or the first stop is performed. The timing may be different. In the deletion animation, the icon IHI of “red thundercloud” gradually becomes smaller and eventually disappears (FIG. 167 (D16)). In this example, after all, the change effect by the icon IHI of "Red thundercloud" is completed without success.

In this example, although not shown, lightning is dropped on any icon for each change. However, lightning may be dropped only when the icon is changed. Also, as the types of thundercloud icons, a default thundercloud icon and a gold thundercloud icon are also provided. However, the colors of clouds may be the same, and the types may be divided by the color of lightning. That is, the icon with a red thunder may change to red if the change effect is successful. In this case, it may be possible to focus on the thundercloud icon without knowing the type of display of the icon change notice until the thunder strikes. Further, it may be configured so that it is not possible to know which display mode will be changed only when the default color lightning strikes. For example, even if a default color thunder strikes the default color icon, it may change to red. On the other hand, in other colors (display mode), the color changes to the same color (display mode) as the color of lightning (display mode), so it also functions as a notice of the changing display mode.

FIG. 167 (Ea1) to FIG. 167 (Ea9) are diagrams showing an example of an effect in which the icon in the display form of “timer” and the display of the icon change notice are combined.

In FIG. 167 (Ea1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed with respect to the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. The first holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 shown in FIG. 10 is an icon in a display mode of “Timer” of 10. The icon in the display mode of "timer" is an icon that changes to the display mode of the fourth display mode or more when the timer becomes 0. However, it may not change even if the timer becomes 0, or may change without fail when the timer becomes 0. The mode of the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of "timer" shown in 167 (Ea1) is the mode a before the start of the countdown. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 167 (Ea2-1), No. 1 illustrated in FIG. An icon in a special mode in which the character "Timer" is added to the icon of "Bomber" in the default color of No. 4 appears at the right end of the screen. Hereinafter, this icon is referred to as the "timer-operated bomber" icon IHI. The icon IHI for "timer-only bomber" corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. The "timer-only bomber" icon IHI may appear when the hold icon or the variable icon is displayed in the "timer" display mode icon, and is displayed in the "timer" display mode icon. Even if it is done, it may not appear. However, when the icon of the display form of "timer" is displayed, it may be displayed without fail. In FIG. 167 (Ea2-1), the icon change animation using the icon IHI of the “timer-operated bomber” that has appeared has been started. Even if the icon change animation is started, the timer of the first hold icon h11 does not start the countdown, and the mode a is displayed as it is.

In FIG. 167 (Ea3), the bullet icon BTI of the default color is fired from the icon TBI of the bomber with the character "Timer". The target here is the first hold icon h11 in the display form of "timer". The bomber icon TBI with the word "Timer" does not target any icon other than the icon in the display form of "timer", but may do so. In this case, when the bullet icon BTI hits, the display mode of "timer" may be changed.

In FIG. 167 (Ea5), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 of “timer”, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 167 (Ea6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the mode a before the countdown is started to the mode b during the countdown. That is, the countdown is started only after the bullet icon BTI hits. In this example, the icon change animation is the animation up to immediately before FIG. 167 (Ea2-1) to (Ea6). It should be noted that the bullet icon BTI can be regarded as equivalent to the display of the icon change notice, and in that case, the display is started by being fired from the bomber icon TBI with the character of Timer attached, After that, the animation just before hitting and completing the change to the mode b corresponds to the icon change animation.

In FIG. 167 (Ea7), the mode of the first hold icon h11 of “timer” becomes a mode in which the timer becomes 0, and at the same time as the timer becomes 0, as shown in (Ea8) in FIG. The icon h11 is covered with the smoke image. In FIG. 167 (Ea8), the smoke image disappears, and the first hold icon that was the display mode of “timer” is changed to the green display mode (fourth display mode). The "timer" hold icon may start to operate even if the timer is not attacked by the "timer-operated bomber" icon IHI. In this case, it may be a look-ahead notice with a higher jackpot reliability than when the operation was started by the "timer-only bomber" icon IHI, or conversely, with a look-ahead notice with a low jackpot reliability. There may be, and the reliability of the jackpot may be the same. Also, the "timer" hold icon may start the timer without being attacked by the "timer-operated bomber" icon IHI, or conversely, the "timer-operated bomber" icon. The timer may not fire unless it is attacked by the IHI.

In FIG. 167 (Ea2-2-1), in the state where the icon of the display form of “timer” is displayed, not the icon IHI of “dedicated bomber for timer operation” but the general-purpose icon of “red bomber” IHI has appeared. In FIG. 167 (Ea2-2-2), the bullet icon BTI has been fired from the icon IHI of “red bomber”, and the fired bullet icon BTI becomes the first hold icon h11 in the display form of “timer”. Hit. Then, the countdown is started with the first hold icon h11 of "timer". In FIG. 167 (Ea2-2-3), the mode of the first hold icon h11 of “timer” becomes a mode in which the timer becomes 0, and at the same time as the timer becomes 0, the same figure (Ea2-2-4). As shown in, the first hold icon h11 is covered with the smoke image. In this example, when the timer becomes 0, it is determined that the display mode of the first hold icon changes to the same red display mode (fifth display mode) as the display mode of the "red bomber" icon IHI. .. In FIG. 167 (Ea2-2-5), the smoke image disappears, and the first hold icon that was the display form of “timer” has changed to the red display form (fifth display form).

FIG. 168 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a certain type of hold icon and an icon change notice display are combined.

FIG. 168(Eb1) to FIG. 168(Eb8) are diagrams showing an example in which a hold icon of a type of “bomb” not shown in FIG. 131(a) and an icon change notice display are combined.

In FIG. 168 (Ea1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is an icon of the type “bomb” not shown in FIG. 131(a). This "bomb" type icon is an icon whose display mode changes when the bomb explodes. In this respect, it is similar to the "timer" icon, but the "timer" icon does not count down. Since the display mode of the icon changes when it becomes 0, it is easy to understand the timing of the change of the display mode, while it is difficult to understand when the "bomb" explodes, and as a result, the timing of the change of the display mode. Both are different in that it is difficult to understand. The icon of the "bomb" type has a fuse, and it is necessary to ignite this fuse to fire the "bomb".

In FIG. 168 (Eb2), the icon IHI of “red bomber”, which is an icon change notice display, appears at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. In FIG. 168 (Eb3), the red bomber icon RBI equipped with the ignition icon CYI is gradually approaching the “bomb” first hold icon h11, and in the same figure (Eb4), the first hold icon h11. The ignition icon CYI is dropped toward the fuse of the bomb icon which is the icon h11. Note that the "red bomber" icon IHI may be an icon with a flamethrower fixedly arranged, and in this case, such icons as the bullet icon BTI and the ignition icon CYI are separated from the aircraft. Disappear. The first bomb holding icon h11 may or may not successfully ignite the fuse even if the ignition icon CYI is dropped. The squib of the bomb icon, which is the first holding icon h11 shown in FIG. 168 (Eb5), is ignited, and in FIG. 168 (Eb6), the squib is burning and becoming shorter. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 168 (Eb7-1), the first hold icon h11 of “bomb” explodes, and as shown in the same figure (Eb8), the first hold icon h11 of “red bomber” is displayed. The display mode has changed to the same red display mode as the display mode of the icon IHI.

FIG. 168(Eb7-2-1) is a modified example continuing from FIG. 168(Eb6). In FIG. 168(Eb6), although the squib is burning and shortening, FIG. 168(Eb7-2-1). Then, the fire of the squib was extinguished halfway. Therefore, the “bomb” first hold icon h11 does not explode, and the display mode does not change. The icon of the "bomb" that the fire of the squib has disappeared halfway continues to be displayed as it is. The mode of "bomb" in which the fire of the squib is extinguished halfway corresponds to the second display mode (display mode of "flashing white"). In FIG. 168 (Eb7-2-2), the symbol variable display ends, and in FIG. 168 (Eb7-2-3), the icon of the “bomb” in which the fuse has disappeared halfway is displayed as the variable icon h0. Has been done. Even if the squib disappears in the middle, the squib that disappeared in the middle may be ignited again due to a change after the next change. In FIG. 168 (Eb7-2-3) followed by FIG. 168 (Eb7-2-4), a combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the "bomb" icon (holding icon or variable icon) may not be attacked by the display of the icon change notice such as the "red bomber" icon IHI, or the fuse may be ignited naturally. Good. In this case, a pre-reading notice with a high jackpot reliability may be used, or conversely, a pre-reading notice with a low jackpot reliability may be used, compared with the case of being ignited by displaying the icon change notice. The reliability may be the same. Also, the "bomb" icon may always ignite the fuse if it is not attacked by the icon change notice display, or on the contrary, unless the attack is indicated by the icon change notice display, the fuse is ignited. You don't have to.

It should be noted that the icon (holding icon and/or variable icon) is changed to the No. shown in FIG. 2 to No. It may be announced that the icon will change to the 19 icon, the “bomb” icon described above, the VS display mode hold icon, and the “patrol lamp” icon described below.

168 (Ec1) to (Ec8) in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which combined the icon of "11" of 11 and the display of the icon change notice of the kind not shown in FIG. 131(b).

In FIG. 168 (Ec1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special map 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 are displayed. The first holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 shown in FIG. 11 is an icon in the display mode of “11”. In the icon of this "target" display mode, when the arrow is not pierced into the target icon, the mode a shown in FIG. 131(a) remains as it is, and the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display corresponding to the target icon. The degree is about the level of the second display mode (white flashing display mode), but when an arrow sticks to the target icon, it changes to the mode b shown in FIG. 131(a), and the symbol variable display corresponding to that target icon The reliability of the big hit in (6) rises to the level of the sixth display mode (gold color display mode). On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 168 (Ec2), the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute appears on the upper right of the display screen. The Yoshimune's icon YMP carrying this parachute is a kind of display of the icon change notice, but the icon change notice of a type not shown in FIG. 131(b) is displayed. In FIG. 131(b), the icon change animation is started, and Yoshimune in the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute is holding a bow and arrow and aiming at the target icon which is the first hold icon h11. At Ec3), the arrow icon YYI is fired. The fired arrow icon YYI hits the target icon that is the first hold icon h11, and in FIG. 168 (Ec5-1), the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. In the subsequent FIG. 168 (Ec6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes to the mode b shown in FIG. 131(a). In this example, the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variable display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 has risen to the level of the sixth display mode (gold display mode). In FIG. 168 (Ec7-1), Yoshimune's icon YMP carrying a parachute passes over the first hold icon h11, and eventually the icon TMP disappears from the display screen (FIG. 168 (Ec8)). ..

FIG. 168 (Ec5-2-1) is a modified example continuing from the same figure (Ec4), and in the same figure (Ec5-2-1), the fired arrow icon YYI is the first hold icon h11. In the same figure (Ec5-2-2) which has not hit the target icon, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is displayed as it is. And then, just as when hitting, the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute passes over the first hold icon h11 (FIG. 168 (Ec5-2-3)), and eventually that icon. The TMP disappears from the display screen (FIG. 168 (Ec5-2-4)). In this way, within one symbol variation display, if it fails once, it is not possible to try again and it ends as it is. However, the icon YMP of Yoshimune who carries a parachute again may appear in the next change, and a change effect aiming at the target icon may be executed, or a change effect may be executed by another effect. It should be noted that, even if one failure occurs in one time, the pattern change table may be able to be retried up to a predetermined number of times (for example, two times, three times including rechallenge...), or even one failure. It may be configured so that the player can always try again up to a predetermined number of times.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing another example of the effect using a bomber system icon as the icon change notice display.

169(Ed1) to FIG. 169(Ed5) are examples in which an icon of a type not shown in FIG. 131(a) and an icon change notice display of a type not also shown in FIG. 131(b) are combined. FIG.

In FIG. 169 (Ed1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special map 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is an icon of the type of “patrol lamp” not shown in FIG. 131(a). When the icon of the "patrol lamp" is activated, the reliability of the jackpot in the pattern variation display corresponding to the icon of the patrol lamp is the level of the seventh display mode (rainbow display mode), that is, the jackpot is confirmed. Rise to the level of. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 169 (Ed1), No. 1 illustrated in FIG. The icon of the dedicated mode in which the patrol lamp is attached and the character pat is attached to the icon of the "bomber" of the default color of No. 4 appears at the right end of the screen. Hereinafter, this icon is referred to as the "patrol lamp dedicated bomber" icon IHI. The icon IHI of the "patrol lamp dedicated bomber" corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. The "patrol lamp-operated bomber" icon IHI may appear when the hold icon or the variable icon is displayed in the "patrol lamp" display mode icon, and is displayed in the "patrol lamp" display mode icon. Even if it is done, it may not appear. However, when the icon of the display mode of “patrol lamp” is displayed, it may be displayed without fail. In FIG. 169 (Ed1), the icon change animation using the icon “IHI” of the dedicated “patrol lamp operation bomber” has started.

In FIG. 169 (Ed2), the bullet icon BTI of the default color from the icon PBI of the bomber to which the patrol lamp is attached and the character pat is attached targets the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of “patrol lamp”, Has been fired. In FIG. 169 (Ed3), the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11 of “patrol lamp”, and the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 169 (Ea4), the effect image EF14 disappears, the patrol lamp icon of the first hold icon h11 is activated, and it is informed that the first hold is a jackpot confirmation hold. It should be noted that the icon IHI for the "patrol lamp dedicated bomber" has jumped to the left side of the screen and is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 169 (Ea5).

FIG. 169(Fa1) to FIG. 169(Fa5) are diagrams showing an example in which the appearance notice of the display of the icon change notice is given using a movable accessory or the like.

In FIG. 169 (Fa1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at a high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 169 (Fa2-1), among the large-board behavior auditors arranged at the four corners of the first decorative pattern display device 208L described with reference to FIG. 67 and the like, the fourth large-board behavior arranged at the lower right. The accessory 224Gd starts to advance from the initial position toward the position where it overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side, and in accordance with the advance of the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A red effect image EF17 is displayed around the portion of the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd that overlaps. The operation of the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd is an operation of announcing that the display of the icon change notice will appear from the vicinity of the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd. The display gives a notice as to what color of the icon change notice display will appear. That is, the appearance of the icon change notice display itself is announced by the effect and the effect image EF17, the appearance position is indicated by the effect, and the display mode of the display that appears is notified by the effect image EF17.

It should be noted that the change in the display mode of the icon may be more likely to occur when the accessory is operated than when the accessory is not operated, but the likelihood of occurrence may not be changed. Further, the icon display mode may be configured to change easily in accordance with the number of the operated accessory, but the likelihood does not need to change.

In FIG. 169 (Fa3), the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd has moved to the maximum advance position, and in FIG. 169 (Fa4) the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd that has moved to the maximum advance position returns toward the initial position. Have begun. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 169(Fa2) to (Fa4), the display position of the effect image EF17 also changes in accordance with the movement operation of the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. When the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd that has moved to the maximum advance position starts retreating toward the initial position, the display of the "red bomber" icon IHI as the display of the icon change notice begins to appear behind it. In this way, when the icon IHI of "red bomber" appears, and after FIG. 169 (Fa5), the same effect as that after FIG. 160 (A3-1) is executed, but the display mode of the variable icon does not change. There may be

169(Fa2-2-1) to FIG. 169(Fa2-2-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the POV display 224I is used to give notice of the appearance of the icon change notice.

In FIG. 169 (Fa2-2-1) during the variable display of the symbols, the POV display 224I that has been hidden at the initial position until now appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and before the rotation operation. It is the state of.

In FIG. 169 (Fa2-2-2), on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the POV display 224I starts rotating operation, and when it reaches a constant speed rotation, the POV display 224I has a “red bomber” icon. The IHI is displayed, and the appearance of the "red bomber" icon IHI is announced.

In FIG. 169 (Fa2-2-3), the POV display 224I continues to rotate at a constant speed, and the icon IHI of "red bomber" is still displayed, but "Red bomber" is displayed on the back side. The icon IHI of has appeared. When the "red bomber" icon IHI appears, the POV display 224I stops rotating (Fig. 169 (Fa2-2-4)) and returns to the initial position (Fig. 169 (Fa2-2-5)). In this way, the icon IHI of "red bomber" appears, and after FIG. 169 (Fa2-2-5), the same effect as that after FIG. 160 (A3-1) is executed, but the display mode of the variable icon is changed. May not change.

Even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and in that display area. A performance display may be displayed. Further, the display area is more visible when the POV display 224I is in the accelerating state from the stationary state to the constant speed state or in the decelerating state from the constant speed state to the stationary state than in the constant speed state. It is easy, and the effect display may be performed in the display area even during acceleration or deceleration. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area only in the accelerating state or the decelerating state. In the accelerating state and the decelerating state, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is darkened so that the display of the POV display 224I is conspicuous. Good. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area in the state of accelerating, and at least the display area may be darkened when the constant speed state is reached. The notes described here are also applicable to the following examples of the POV display 224I.

Moreover, the end timing of the constant speed rotation of the POV display 224I and the appearance timing of the icon IHI of the "red bomber" may be earlier than the end timing of the constant speed rotation, or earlier than the appearance timing of the icon. Or both may have the same timing.

In addition, although the appearance notice using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, and fourth display shown in FIG. 158). The means 208M′, etc.) may execute the above-mentioned notice of appearance or another notice.

FIG. 170 is a diagram showing an example of various notices relating to the display of the icon change notice.

FIG. 170 (Fb1) to FIG. 170 (Fb9) are diagrams showing an example in which the success rate of the change in the display mode of the icon is notified in advance by using the accessory effect.

The state shown in FIG. 170(Fb1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 160(A1-1), and the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. The state shown in FIG. 170 (Fb2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 160 (A1-2), the icon IHI of “red bomber” appears, and the effect of changing the display mode of the icon is started.

In FIG. 170 (Fb3), the character effect is started before the red bomber icon RBI fires the bullet icon BTI. The accessory production here is the third large-board behavior accessory located at the lower left of the large-board behavior accessory located at the four corners of the first decorative pattern display device 208L described with reference to FIG. 67 and the like. 224Gc and the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd arranged at the lower right start advancing from their respective initial positions toward the position overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. This character effect is continued until just before the icon display mode is changed, but the function is as a notice until before the bullet icon BTI is fired. In this accessory production, the success rate of the change in the display mode of the icon is foretold according to how many large-panel behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Gd among the four large-board behavior auditors operate. That is, if all four work, there is a 100% chance of success, if three work, there is a 75% chance of success, if only two work, there is a 50% chance of success, and only one work. If not, it predicts that it will only succeed with a 25% chance.

It should be noted that, out of the four large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Gd, the success probability is highest when the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga operates, and the next success probability is high when the second large-board behavior auditor 224Gb operates. The third success probability 224Gd may have a third highest probability of success, and the fourth success behavior 224Ge may have a lowest probability of success. Alternatively, the probability of success can be announced in advance depending on the position from the initial position. For example, the success probability may increase as the position approaches the maximum advance position.

Further, when the accessory is operated, the icon display mode may be changed more easily than when the accessory is not operated, but the ease of occurrence may not be changed. Further, the icon display mode may be configured to change easily in accordance with the number of the operated accessory, but the likelihood does not need to change.

As shown in FIG. 170 (Fb8), the accessory production ends when the change in the display mode of the icon is completed.

FIG. 170 (Fc1) to FIG. 170 (Fc6) are diagrams showing an example of giving advance notice of promotion of the icon change advance notice display itself.

In FIG. 170 (Fc1), the icon IHI of the default color "Bomber" appears, and the effect of changing the display mode of the icon is started. Here, the notice production is started before the icon "HIB" of the "bomber" is temporarily stopped. Here, similarly to the effects shown in FIGS. 169 (Fa2-1) to (Fa4), the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd arranged at the lower right is the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the initial position. Starting to advance toward the overlapping position from the front side, and in accordance with the advance of the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is overlapped with the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd The effect image EF17 is displayed in the periphery. Here, the display mode of the effect image EF17 gives advance notice of the display mode in which the icon IHI of the default color "bomber" is promoted. Here, the red effect image EF17 is displayed, and in FIG. 170 (Fc5), it has been promoted to the “red bomber” icon IHI. Although FIG. 164 (B6) is continued after FIG. 170 (Fc6), the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

In this example, the operation of the fourth large-board behavior auditors object 224Gd is a kind of agitation effect regardless of the advance notice, but the promotion is more likely to occur when the auditors object operates than when it does not. It may have been done. However, the likelihood of occurrence does not have to change. Further, the promotion may be easily performed according to the number of the operated accessory. That is, it may be configured such that the greater the number of the operated accessory is, the easier the promotion is. However, here too, the likelihood of occurrence does not have to change.

FIG. 170 (Fd1) to FIG. 170 (Fd6) are diagrams showing an example of a change effect of the icon display mode using the POV display 224I.

In FIG. 170 (Fa1) during the variable display of the symbols, the POV display 224I that has been hidden at the initial position until now appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is the state before the rotation operation. .. It should be noted that the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of special figure 1 are displayed, and these two hold icons h11, h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode).

In FIG. 170 (Fd2), on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the POV display 224I starts rotating operation, and when it reaches a constant speed rotation, the POV display 224I displays “Red bomber icon RBI and default. The first hold icon h11 in the display mode is displayed.The rotation range of the POV display 224I completely overlaps the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12. Partially overlap.

On the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 170 (Fd3), a state in which the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI is displayed, targeting the first hold icon h11. The POV display 224I shown in Fd4) shows that the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14.

Then, the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 170 (Fd5-1) displays the red bomber icon RBI and the first hold icon h11 changed to the red display mode.

In this example, while the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the back side thereof may be visible or invisible. May be While the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the "red bomber" icon IHI and/or the effect image EF14 are displayed on the display screen portion behind the POV display 224I rotating at a constant speed. It may or may not be displayed.

In FIG. 170 (Fd6), the POV display 224I has stopped rotating, and on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first hold icon h11 in a red display mode and the second default display mode h11. The hold icon h12 is displayed, and the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed. However, the icon IHI of "red bomber" may be displayed.

The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change while the POV display 224I is performing a constant speed rotation operation, or may change at the same time when the POV display 224I stops the constant speed rotation operation. Alternatively, the POV display 224I may change after the constant speed rotation operation is stopped.

Although the example using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, and fourth display means 208M shown in FIG. 158). ', etc.) to display the above. That is, a part of the scene displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be enlarged and displayed on the POV display 224I. For example, the display on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 170 (Fd2) is shown in FIG. -1) corresponds to the enlarged display of the scene between the same figure (A3-1), and the display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 170 (Fd3) corresponds to the enlarged display of the scene shown in FIG. 160 (A3-1). May be. In this case, the enlarged display is not limited to the POV display 224I, but includes the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 158, the light guide plate IL, and the like. Alternatively, it may be used together with the POV display 224I. Further, such an enlarged display can be performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, the notice is related to the display of the icon change notice, but it can be applied to the notice notice of the notice icon. For example, the probability that the notice icon will appear may be expressed depending on how many large-board behavior auditors out of the four large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Gd operate. Higher).

FIG. 171 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and other display means.

The example shown in FIG. 171 (Fd5-2-1) to FIG. 171 (Fd5-2-2) is a modification of the previous FIG. 170 (Fd5-1) to FIG. 170 (Fd6). The display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 171 (Fd5-2-1) is a display of an icon change notice (the icon IHI of "red bomber") and a display showing the changed icon display mode. It does not show how the icon has changed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 171 (Fd5-2-1), it is slightly visible that the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image EF14.

In FIG. 171 (Fd5-2-2), the POV display 224I has stopped rotating, and the first decorative icon h11 in the default display mode and a red display are displayed on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second hold icon h12 of the aspect is displayed. In this example, the POV display 224I indicates that the target icon is unknown, but displays whether or not the change effect of the display form of the icon is successful. Then, when the POV display 224I displays the success of the effect of changing the icon display mode, the display mode of the target icon actually changes in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In addition, the display of the change of the display mode of the hold icon on the POV display 224I and the display of the change of the display mode of the hold icon on the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be performed at the same time, and conversely, the first decorative pattern. The POV display 224I may be performed after the display device 208L is performed first.

Further, in this example, although the target icon is unknown by the POV display 224I, it can also be used as a notice of whether or not the effect of changing the display mode of the icon is successful.

In the following, in FIG. 171, an example of an effect in the device configuration in which the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 158 are combined will be described, but as described in FIG. However, the technology described in this specification cannot be applied only because of the difference in the configuration, and the technical idea can be applied regardless of whether the display units are arranged side by side or vertically. Is.

171 (Fe1) to FIG. 171 (Fe6), the display in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is completed only in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display in the fourth display means 208M' is the fourth display means. It is a figure which shows the example which is completed only in 208M'.

The state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 171 (Fe1) is the same as the state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 158 (k1a), except for the difference whether the background screen is displayed or not. The same is true. The state of the fourth display unit 208M' shown in FIG. 171 (Fe1) is the same as the state of the fourth display unit 208M' shown in FIG. 158 (Ka1).

In the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 171 (Fe2-1), the tip part of the icon IHI of “red bomber” as the icon change notice display appears at the right end of the screen. On the fourth display means 208M′ shown, the icon change animation using the “red bomber” icon IHI is started. In the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 171 (Fe4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, and in the fourth display means 208M' shown in (Fe5) thereof, the bullet The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 171 (Fe6), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the red display mode. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 171 (Fe1) to (Fe6), the variable display of the decorative symbols is continuously performed.

171 (Fe2-2-1) to FIG. 171 (Fe2-2-6) are diagrams showing an example in which a part of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L enters the fourth display means 208M'.

FIG. 171 (Fe2-2-1) is a continuation of FIG. 171 (Fe2-1), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 171 (Fe2-2-1) displays an icon change notice. "Red bomber" icon IHI has appeared at the right end of the screen, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same figure (Fe2-2-2), an icon using the "red bomber" icon IHI The change animation has started and a red bullet icon BTI has been fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 171 (Fe2-2-3), the bullet icon BTI is the lower end region where the bullet icon BTI overlaps the upper edge portion of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M′ at the initial position. It is difficult to see for a moment because it is displayed in. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 171 (Fe2-2-4), the bullet icon BTI has moved to the display screen of the fourth display means 208M′ at the initial position, and the fourth display means 208M. The tip portion of the bullet icon BTI is displayed in ". It should be noted that the rear end portion of the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, although it is not visible because it is overlapped with the upper edge portion of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M′ at the initial position. .. However, it may not be displayed. In the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 171 (Fe2-2-5), the default display mode (first display) in which the tip portion of the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the pedestal hs0' of the variable icon display area CIS' (Aspect), the variable icon h0 partially overlaps. In this situation, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the fourth display means 208M'. In the fourth display unit 208M' shown in FIG. 171 (Fe2-2-6), the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the red display mode. On the other hand, the icon IHI of "red bomber" is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 171 (Fe2-2-6).

The variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is enlarged beyond the size of the display screen of the fourth display means 208M' and displayed across both the fourth display means 208M' and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be done. Moreover, the icon IHI of "red bomber" may be displayed across both the fourth display means 208M' and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

172 is a diagram showing an example of effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 3 and the like.

The state shown in FIG. 172 (Ff1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 160 (A1-1). However, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208N. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 172 (Ff1) are in the initial positions of each other, and are in the open state (the separated state), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display screen of is visible.

The state shown in FIG. 172 (Ff2) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 160 (A2-1), and here, the icon of the “red bomber” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N as the icon change notice display. IHI has begun to appear, and the entire icon IHI of “red bomber” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 172 (Ff4), the red bomber icon RBI is moving to the left, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in the same figure (Ff4) is red. Instead of the bomber icon RBI moving leftward, the third decorative symbol display device 208N itself has started moving leftward ((Ff5) to Ff6 in the same figure). That is, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved in accordance with the original movement display of the red bomber icon RBI. Eventually, the third decorative symbol display device 208N reaches the maximum movement position and cannot move further leftward. Then, this time, as shown in FIG. 172 (Ff7), the icon RBI of the red bomber has moved into the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, The tip portion of the red bomber icon RBI is displayed, and the rear portion of the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the back side, the entire red bomber icon RBI may be displayed.

In FIG. 172 (Ff8), the third decorative symbol display device 208N that has reached the maximum movement position has started moving toward the initial position, and about 2/3 of the red bomber icon RBI is the first decoration. The red bullet icon BTI is being fired from the red bomber icon RBI because it has been displayed on the symbol display device 208L and has reached the position before the target first hold icon h11. In FIG. 172 (Ff9), the bullet icon BTI overlaps the first holding icon h11 from the front side. Further, the entire red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 172 (Ff10), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. The red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In FIG. 172 (Ff11), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the red display mode. Further, the red bomber icon RBI is about to fly further left from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 172 (Ff12), the red bomber icon RBI is the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has disappeared from.

In the example described above, one image may be displayed across a plurality of display units, but the same image is not displayed on a plurality of display units. For example, although the same image is not partially displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may be displayed.

Even when the icon unchanged animation is performed, a red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M from the third decorative symbol display device 208N through the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Animation may be performed, but when the icon unchanged animation is performed, the red bomber icon RBI may be configured to be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, It may be displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

In FIG. 172 (Fg), on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as a display of a plurality of icon change notices, a "bomber" icon IHI, a "red bomber" icon IHI, and a "gold bomber" icon IHI. Is displayed. These bombers may start moving animations all at once as in the example shown in FIG. 162 (A2-3-1), but they are only displayed in stock and the moving animations are displayed one by one. It may be executed.

It should be noted that the hold icon or the change icon itself may also serve as the icon change notice display. In this case, the change icon itself gives a notice of change, or another icon different from the change icon (hold icon or change icon) is displayed. (Icon) will be announced in advance.

In addition, the display of the icon change notice, the notice display that notifies that any one of the pending symbol variation displays is performed in the symbol variation display, or that it is currently performed in the symbol variation display (icon A change notice preparation display) may be performed. As the icon change notice preparing display, for example, only the tip part of the "Bomber" icon IHI is visible at the right end of the screen, or the "Bomber" icon IHI appears, and it waits in a dedicated stock area (standby area). You can see the display. Alternatively, the telop display trp shown in FIG. 163 (A1-3-3) may be used for advance notice. In addition, a plurality of icon change notice preparing displays may be displayed. Further, when there are a plurality of types of icon change notice display, the icon change notice preparing display may be displayed for each display mode of the icon change notice display. Further, there may be a dedicated area for displaying the stock of the icon change notice preparation display. Further, at least a part (including the entire area) of the icon change notice preparing display may be displayed in a region overlapping with the icon change notice preparing display, or may be displayed in a non-overlapping region. ..

Also, as a notice of the change and/or a look-ahead notice before the notice of the change of the icon (the notice of the change of the icon due to another notice display such as the icon of "Bomber" or the notice of the change of the icon due to the changing icon itself) is displayed , “Icon whose display mode changes after the icon change notice (holding icon and/or variable icon)” changes to a display mode (for example, enlarged display mode) different from the display mode changed by the icon change notification By doing so, it may be announced that the icon will change according to the icon change notice, or the display form of the icon will change due to another display such as a cursor display on the "icon whose display form changes after the icon change notice". By displaying a display indicating that the icon is changed, it may be announced that the icon is changed by the icon change notification.

In addition, after an icon change notice (icon change notice due to other notice display such as "Bomber" icon or icon change notice due to changing icon itself) is displayed, it is notified that the change is a big hit. Execution of advance notice (preliminary display by various display devices such as liquid crystal display device, light emission (color and light emission pattern) by various lamps (frame lamp 122, panel lamp), advance notice sound by speaker, advance notice operation of operating means and various devices, etc.) In some cases, various notices described in this specification may be given. For example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 may change while the jackpot confirmation sound of the variation is output from the speaker 120. Alternatively, the icon change animation may be displayed while the jackpot confirmation sound is being output. However, the various types of advance notice may not be given during execution of the advance notice for notifying that the variation is a big hit. Further, there may be various types of advance notices that are given only during execution of advance notices that notify that the fluctuation is a big hit.

While various notices may not be given during execution of the island simultaneous production, they may be given in some cases. Further, there may be various notices that are given only while the island simultaneous production is being executed.

Further, depending on the effect background or effect mode, there may be various notices to be given and various notices not to be given. For example, on the background screen of the sea, an icon change notice (icon change notice due to other notice display such as "Bomber" icon or icon change notice due to changing icon itself) is displayed, but the background screen of the castle town Then, the display of the icon change notice may not be displayed. Further, the effect background may be selectable by the player, and in this case, it is also possible to select whether or not to display the icon change notice display.

As described above, the effect examples using the various icons and displays described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 131 or the icons and displays other than those icons and displays have been described, but at the end, the seven effect examples will be described. To do.

FIG. 173 is a diagram schematically showing seven example effects in which various icons and displays are used. In this FIG. 173, the manner in which the effect proceeds is shown stepwise from left to right in the figure. Further, FIG. 173 also shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N shown in FIG. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

173(1) and FIG. 173(2) roughly show an example of the effect of the mini game B described with reference to FIG.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 173(1), the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of these special diagrams 1 are all No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the change icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 173(1), the mini game window MGW dedicated to the mini game is displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS, and the mini game is displayed. A mini game B (rock-paper-scissors confrontation) is being held in Windu MGW. On the left side of the mini game Windu MGW, an icon of Yoshimune's character is displayed. The icon of the Yoshimune character is No. 1 which is a kind of the hold icon or the variable icon shown in FIG. The icon is the same as the icon of “Janken” of 19 and the icon of the character of Yoshimune of aspect a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 173(1). On the other hand, on the right side of the mini game Windu MGW, an icon of a swordsman character as an opponent is displayed as shown in FIG. 130(c). On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 173(1), the icon of the swordsman character of aspect a is displayed. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 173(1) has No. 1 shown in FIG. 173(a). The icon of the character of Yoshimune same as the icon of aspect c of 19 and the icon of the character of swordsman of aspect d shown in FIG. 130(c) are displayed. In other words, in this rock-paper-scissors confrontation, Yoshimune gave a choki and a swordsman gave a par, and the word "Yoshimune victory" is also displayed in the mini-game Windu MGW. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 173(1) includes No. 1 shown in FIG. 131(a). The icon of the character of Yoshimune that is the same as the icon of the mode f of 19 is displayed together with the character of "Victory of Yoshimune", and the icon of the character of Yoshimune is also displayed with a balloon with "Hold change". The display mode of the first hold icon h11 that was the display mode of No. of FIG. It has changed to the third display mode (blue display mode) described in 3.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 173(2), the mini game window MGW is not displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS, and the mini game B (rock-paper-scissors battle). Is performed on the left base icon bI1 arranged in the hold icon display area HIS. That is, the mini game B is played using the hold icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on each of the left side and the center of FIG. 173(2), the first hold icon h11 is the icon of the swordsman character as the opponent shown in FIG. 130(c), and the second The hold icon h12 is No. 1 shown in FIG. It is the icon of 19 "Janken".

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 173(2), the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the icon of the swordsman character of aspect a, and the second hold icon h12 is the character of Yoshimune of aspect a. It is displayed with the icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 173(2), the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the icon of the character of the swordsman of aspect d, and the second hold icon h12 is the character of Yoshimune of aspect c. It is displayed with the icon. In other words, in this rock-paper-scissors confrontation, the swordsman put out a par, and Yoshimune made a choki, which means Yoshimune won. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 173(2), the second hold icon h12 is displayed as an icon of the Yoshimune character of aspect f, and the icon of the Yoshimune character indicates “Hold change”. A written balloon is also displayed. The first hold icon h11 next to the icon has been the icon of a swordsman character until now, but the No. 1 icon in FIG. It has changed to the third display mode (blue display mode) described in 3. In the example shown in FIG. 173(2), the mini game B using the hold icon is played, and the display mode of the hold icon used for the mini game B is changed. That is, the hold icon displayed as the opponent icon becomes the prefetch target hold icon.

As described above, there may be a case where a mini game is played with a hold icon as shown in FIG. 173(2) and a case where a mini game is played in another area as shown in FIG. 173(1). Further, the example here is an example of the mini game in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed. However, even in the mini game in which various notice icons shown in FIG. 129 can be acquired or not. Good.

173(3) and (4) in FIG. A change example display BCH of 16 "bancho" roughly shows an example of an effect for giving a notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 173(3) and (4), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1, and the change icon h0 is the change icon. It is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the display area CIS. Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 173(3) and FIG. 174(4), both the first hold icon h11 and the variable icon h0 are No. 1 in FIG. It is displayed in the default display mode described in 1. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIGS. 173(3) and (4), on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS, No16 of FIG. 131(b). The change notice display BCH of the "bancho" of the mode a described in is displayed. Here, a balloon with "Hold change" is added to the change notice display BCH of the "bancho", and it is announced that the display mode of the hold icon will change.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 173(3), the change notice display BCH of “bancho” disappears from the right base icon bIr, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the third display mode. It changes to (blue display mode). The timing at which the "bancho" change notice display BCH disappears and the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be the same, or the "bancho" change notice display BCH disappears. It may be earlier, or conversely, the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be earlier.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 173(4), the change notice display BCH of “bancho” does not disappear from above the right base icon bIr, and the balloon added to the change notice display BCH of “bancho”. Has changed to a balloon that says "again", and it is announced that the display mode of the hold icon will change again. In addition, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the third display mode (blue display mode). It should be noted that the timing at which the balloon added to the change notice display BCH of "bancho" changes (the timing of the re-notification) and the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be the same. The timing of starting the advance notice may be earlier, or conversely, the timing of changing the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be earlier. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 173(4), the change notice display BCH of "bancho" disappears from the right base icon bIr, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the fourth display mode. It has changed to (green display mode). In this example, the display mode of the hold icon is changed twice in one symbol variable display, but the display mode of the hold icon is changed once in the symbol variable display. The display mode of the hold icon may change again. In addition, the display mode of the hold icon may change three times or more in one symbol variable display. Further, the “bancho” icon used as the change notice display BCH in FIG. 173 (4) is used again for the purpose of re-notice, but until the icon or display subject to the notice disappears (non The change notice display may be used multiple times until the display. For example, if the icon subject to advance notice is a hold icon, until the hold icon becomes a change icon, or until the change icon disappears, in other words, the pattern change display of the prefetch target change is started or the symbol The change notice display may be used and the display mode may be repeatedly changed until the variable display ends. Further, the icon or display subject to the notice may be the notice icon or the notice display, and the display mode of the notice icon or the notice display may be repeatedly changed until the notice icon or the notice display disappears. Further, even if the change notice display BCH is displayed, there may be a case in which none of the display modes of the hold icon and the variable icon changes. Further, even if the change notice display BCH of the “number” shown in the center of the symbol variable display 173(4) is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon may not change again. That is, the change notice display BCH of “bancho” does not have to be used again to change the icon to be noticed.

173(5) and (6) in FIG. By the change notice display of the bomber system of 4 and 5, the example of the effect for giving a notice of the change of the display mode of the hold icon is roughly shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 173(5) and (6), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of Toku-zu 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1, and the default display mode is changed. The icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 173(5), the first hold icon h11 is the No. 1 of FIG. 131(a). It is displayed in the fourth display mode (green display mode) described in No. 4. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 173(5), No. 1 of FIG. The default color "Bomber" icon IHI described in 4 has appeared, and the icon change animation using the "Bomber" icon IHI has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 173(5), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11 in the fourth display mode (green display mode), and the fired bullet The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 173(5), the first hold icon h11 changes to the fifth display mode (red display mode). There is. Since the change of the icon display mode by the default color "Bomber" icon IHI can be increased by only one stage, it cannot be changed to the fifth display mode icon unless it is the fourth display mode icon.

On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 173(6), the first hold icon h11 is the No. 1 of FIG. It is displayed in the first display mode (default display mode) described in 1. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L has No. 1 in FIG. The red "red bomber" icon IHI described in 5 has appeared, and the icon change animation using the "red bomber" icon IHI has started. Further, a tutorial display is displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. This tutorial display is a tutorial display about a change effect of the display mode of the icon using the change notice display, and may be displayed until the change effect is started, and may be hidden thereafter, or the bullet icon BTI is displayed. It may be displayed until it is fired, and then may be hidden, or may be kept displayed until the change of the display mode of the icon is completed or the change failure is confirmed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 173(6), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11 in the first display mode (default display mode), and the fired bullet is fired. The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 173(6), the first hold icon h11 changes to the fifth display mode (red display mode). There is. In the change of the icon display mode by the red (fifth display mode) "red bomber" icon IHI, regardless of the level of the icon display mode before the change, the icon should be changed to the fifth display mode. You can

In FIG. 173(7), a plate full tank error occurs in the state shown in FIG. 132(A12), and an error message (warning message) such as “Please remove the ball” is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L. Is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “error display EWM”). The error display EWM overlaps at least a part of the notice icon YI from the front side and hides at least a part of the notice icon YI. Note that the error display EWM may overlap the entire notice icon YI from the front side. Further, the error display EWM may overlap at least a part from the front side only after the advance notice icon YI is used (for example, the display of the mode d shown in FIG. 129(a)), or the advance notice icon may be displayed. Only before YI is used (for example, the display of the mode a shown in FIG. 129(a)), at least a part may overlap from the front side. Further, the error display EWM may overlap at least a part of the notice icon YI from the front side over the entire display period of the error display EWM, and a part of the period (for example, the error display EWM) may be displayed. The overlap may occur only during a certain period after the start).

On the contrary, the notice icon YI may overlap at least a part of the error display EWM from the front side (for example, when the error display EWM has a low degree of importance or has a low relationship with fraud). Alternatively, this may be limited to after the advance notice icon YI is used or before the advance notice icon YI is used. Also, the example shown in FIG. 173(7) relates to the notice icon, but the relation to the notice display is the same as that described here.

In FIG. 173(8), a dish full tank error occurs in the state shown in FIG. 160(A2-1), and an error display EWM such as “please remove the ball” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. The error display EWM does not overlap the effect of changing the icon display mode. That is, the error display EWM is displayed at a position deviated from the display position of the icon (red bomber icon RBI, bullet icon BTI, etc.) used for effecting the change in the icon display mode. More specifically, the error display EWM is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the change notice display. Further, the error display EWM does not overlap with a mini game (for example, an icon or display of a character appearing in the mini game).

However, the error display EWM is at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the icon (for example, at least a part of the change notice display) or at least a part of the mini game (for example, the icon or display of the character appearing in the mini game. May be overlapped from the front side, and may be overlapped over the entire display period of the error display EWM. Part of the period (for example, start of the error display EWM) There may be a case where they overlap only during a certain period later).

Further, although FIG. 173(7) and FIG. 178(8) are examples of the error display EWM such as “please pull out the ball”, the display and warning about various errors described with reference to FIGS. The same applies to the display regarding.

In the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 173, only one notice icon is displayed in the case of loss (in the case of gambling), and in the case of a big hit, the game is heaped up. It is configured to display a plurality of notice icons.

As described above, the description using FIGS. 129 to 173 can be combined with the simultaneous effect and the volume adjustment display (for example, the volume display bar display VB described above) described with reference to FIG. 123 and the like. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 167, it can be combined with the scene of customization by the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI.

In addition, in the description using FIGS. 129 to 173, the example is applied to a pachinko machine (ball game machine), but the game table of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game. It can also be applied to a spinning drum game machine (slot machine) that uses a ball (pachinko ball). That is, the pachinko machine 100 described above is a pachinko machine (1 type+1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1, 2, 3, 3 types, 1+2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot or ball) More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the reel is rotated by operating the start lever, the winning combination is internally determined by internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, a winning combination is achieved, and when a winning combination is achieved, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) in which a player is given a privilege. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are launched into the game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the enclosed balls are won in a predetermined entry area. It may be an enclosed ball type gaming table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has been awarded to the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won a prize to the game area again.

As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game machines, for example, the enclosed pachinko machine described with reference to FIG. 127. Further, the slot machine described with reference to FIG. 128 can also be applied.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N all, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N One or two, fourth display means 208M', light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc.],
The display means is a means in which the first icon may be displayed,
The first icon is an icon relating to symbol variable display [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, variable icon h0],
The display means is a means in which the second icon may be displayed,
The display means is means for displaying a notice icon [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 129(a), various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 129(b)],
The second icon is an icon of a different type from the notice icon [for example, the icon for mini game A shown in FIG. 130(a), the icon for mini game B shown in FIG. 130(c)]. The icon is not an icon that shows the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The display means is a means in which a performance display may be displayed,
The effect display is an icon of any one of the displayed first icons [for example, one or a plurality (all or a part of icons)] and an effect display in which the second icon is used. [For example, display of mini game A or B],
When the notice icon is displayed after the effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 132 (A11), FIG. 135 (A3-2-9), the same figure (A3-2-8c1), Figure (a 3-2-8c7), Figure 137 (i 11), Figure 139 (u 34), Figure 140 (u 15-2-17), Figure 142 (u 1-2-24), Figure 147 (or a8) etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to entertain the player by paying attention to the process of whether or not the notice icon is acquired, triggered by the display of the effect display using the two icons.

The first icon may be an icon that may be displayed in correspondence with the number of reservations. For example, it may be a variable icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds=0, a first holding icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds=1, and displayed corresponding to the number of holds=2 2nd second hold icon, 3rd 3rd hold icon displayed corresponding to the number of hold=3, 4th 4th hold icon displayed corresponding to the number of hold=4 It may be. Further, the notice icon may be an icon of a different type from the variable icon and the hold icon.

Here, the number of holdings is the number of the start of the variable display of symbols being held, and the first icon can be, for example, a changing icon in addition to the holding icon. The variation icon is an icon relating to a symbol variation display that is being executed, and is an icon that indicates that the digest has been held. That is, after the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold represented by the hold icon representing the undigested hold is started, the hold icon is displayed as the variable icon corresponding to the started symbol change display.

It should be noted that depending on the number of the displayed first icons, the hold number may be displayed, and depending on the number of the notice icons displayed, the hold number may not be displayed.

The effect display may be an effect display using any one of the displayed first icons and the second icon.

The notice icon may be displayed when the effect display is performed.

One of the icons may be one first icon or a plurality of first icons (for example, all or some of the displayed first icons).

The second icon may be a production icon (for example, a character icon), a hold icon, or a variable icon. More specifically, the icon for the effect may be an icon for notifying the start of the notice effect, may be an icon dedicated to the mini game, or may be an icon that doubles as a hold icon. However, it may be an icon that doubles as a variable icon.

An example of the effect display is an effect of a mini game using any one of the displayed first icons and the second icon. That is, the notice icon may be displayed as a result of the effect of the mini game using any one of the icons and the second icon.

The phrase "the notice icon may be displayed" means that the notice icon may not be displayed in some cases. Further, "the notice icon may not be displayed" may include that the notice icon may not be displayed and another display other than the notice icon may be displayed. It may not be included. This concept also applies to the following description.

Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed (stock) by changing the display position after the display is started, or may be continuously displayed (stock) without changing the display position. It may be. For example, the display means is provided with an appearance area in which the notice icon starts to be displayed and a stock area in which the notice icon is stocked, and the appearance area and the stock area are different areas (part of which overlaps each other). Good, but not all overlap). The stock area is a display area in which the notice icon is continuously displayed. The notice icon moves from the appearance area to the stock area, is used in the stock area, disappears in the stock area, and the display mode may change. Alternatively, it may go out of the stock area and disappear, or the display mode may change.

The effect display may be an effect (for example, a mini game) in which any one of the icons and the second icon is used at the same time, or any one of the icon and the second icon. An effect (for example, a mini game) in which one icon is used first and the other icon is used after that may be used.

Further, the notice icon may be always displayed or may be displayed by the display of the effect in which only one of the displayed first icons is used. .. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed or may be displayed by the display of the effect using only the second icon.

In addition, “a plurality of types of advance notice icons are prepared as the advance notice icon [for example, various advance notice icons YI shown in FIG. 129(a), various advance notice icons YI shown in FIG. 129(b)],
The display means is a means that may display a notice display,
As the notice display, a plurality of types of notice displays are prepared [for example, various notice displays YH shown in FIG. 129(b)],
One of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is the first advance notice [for example, No6. "Change notice"],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the second notice [for example, No. 17 Notice display of "reach"]
A certain notice icon [for example, No. When the "box 1 notice icon YI" is used, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 133 (A33), FIG. 138 (I14-4-3)]. ,
When the certain notice icon is used, the second notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 137 (yes 15), FIG. 138 (yes 14-2-3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, which notice display is displayed until the certain notice icon is used (whether the first notice display is displayed or the second notice display is displayed). Since it is not known, it may be possible to draw attention until the certain notice icon is used. That is, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display is not predetermined in advance, and the player cannot recognize which notice display is displayed only by looking at the type of the notice icon. You may continue to look at the notice icon with interest until the display is displayed.

Here, in the first place, it may be unclear that the notice display is displayed until the certain notice display is displayed. That is, the advance notice display may be displayed and the advance notice display may not be displayed, and it may be unclear which case it is. The fact that the notice display itself is unknown is, as a result, also unknown which type of notice display among the plurality of types of notice displays is displayed.

Further, as the notice icon, only one type of notice icon may be prepared. In this case, when the notice icon is used, a notice display of a plurality of types of notice displays may be displayed, and the notice display is displayed until the notice display is displayed. The fact itself may be unknown.

The display unit may be a unit capable of displaying, when the certain notice icon is used, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the certain notice icon used. That is, it is possible to have a mode in which, when the notice icon is displayed, it is possible to know which of the plurality of types of notice displays is displayed after the notice icon is used. In short, the relation between the notice icon and the notice display may be predetermined one-on-one.

Further, "when a certain notice icon is used" means, for example, a case where the certain notice icon is used in the presentation, and more specifically, the display mode of the certain notice icon is It may be a case where it changes, or a case where the certain notice icon disappears (when it is hidden) (the same applies to the following).

Further, the advance notice display may be displayed (stock) with the display position changed after the display is started, or may continue to be displayed (stock) without changing the display position. May be.

It should be noted that when a certain notice icon of the plurality of types of notice icons is used, one type of notice display of the plurality of types of notice displays (hereinafter, referred to as “certain notice display”) is displayed. In some cases, it may be unclear which type of advance notice display among a plurality of types of advance notice displays is displayed until the certain advance notice display is displayed.

Further, there may be a case where it is not announced that the first notice display will be displayed just by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display may be displayed. It may not be announced in advance. Alternatively, on the contrary, there may be a case where it is announced that the first notice display is displayed only by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display is displayed. It may be announced in advance.

Also, “When the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons may change [for example, in the case of FIG. 133 (A36). ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

That is, the first notice display may be a display that changes the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons. For example, the display mode of any one of the first icons is changed to the notification mode. In this case, the first notice display functions as a notice of the notice by the first icon.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to focus on the first icon even after the effect display is finished.

Here, "one of the displayed first icons" may be the first icon used for the effect display, or may be used for the effect display. It may not be the first icon. Further, any one of the icons may be a plurality of icons or one icon (for example, all or some of the displayed first icons).

Further, the first icon used for the effect display may be a display mode in which the effect display is being performed, or a display mode changed from the display mode in which the effect display is performed. .. For example, if the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display is different from the display mode before the effect display is used, the effect display is performed. After that, the display mode may be returned to the previous display mode, the display mode may be the same display mode without returning to the previous display mode, or the display mode in which the effect display is performed may be different. The display mode may change. Further, when the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display is the same as the display mode before the effect display is used, the effect display is performed. After that, the display mode may change, or the display mode may remain the same without changing. In any of the cases described above, when the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display may change.

When the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons may be changed without fail, or the displayed first icon may be changed. The display mode of any of the icons may not change. Further, the display mode of any one of the first icons being displayed is better when the first notice display is displayed than when the first notice display is not displayed. It may be easy to change.

Further, the effect display includes a plurality of kinds of effect display, and the effect display of any one of the first icons displayed is different from the effect display of a type that changes the display mode of the icon. The effect display of the type that does not change the display mode may have a higher application frequency, on the contrary, a lower application frequency, or both appearance frequencies may be the same. Furthermore, one kind of effect display of the plurality of kinds of effect display is the first effect display, and the case where the first effect display is displayed more than the case where the first effect display is not displayed. The display mode of any one of the displayed first icons may be changed more easily.

In addition, “the second notice display is a display for giving a notice regarding the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed [for example, a notice that the reach is performed],
The symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

That is, even if the second notice display is displayed, it does not always mean that the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed, and even in the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed, the final There may be a case in which the symbol aspect of the loss is fixedly displayed. On the contrary, if the second notice display (for example, a premiere notice) is displayed, the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed is finally surely confirmed and displayed as the jackpot pattern mode. May be.

The display unit is a unit that may display a third notice display, and the third notice display is a display for giving a prefetch notice (for example, a chance eye prefetch notice). It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern when the third notice display is displayed than when the third notice display is not displayed. That is, even if the third notice display is displayed, it does not always mean that the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed, and even in the symbol variation display in which the third notice display is displayed, the final There may be a case in which the symbol aspect of the loss is fixedly displayed. On the contrary, if the third notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display in which the third notice display is displayed may finally always definitely display the jackpot pattern mode.

In addition, “The first icon is displayed in a plurality of types [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 1-No. 19 types of display modes], an icon which is started to be displayed in one type of display modes,
One type of display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [eg, "default" display mode],
One type of display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, a display mode of "murajin" (janken), a display mode of Yoshimune (bow)],
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The first display mode may be a default display mode. Further, the second display mode may be a display mode used for the effect display. For example, it may be a display mode that may be used for the effect display or a dedicated display mode used for the effect display.

In addition, “the effect display is the first icon of the second display mode being displayed [for example, a hold icon or a variable icon of a display mode of “murajin” (janken), a display mode of Yoshimune (bow) Display of effect using [hold icon or variable icon] and the second icon [for example, panda opponent icon TI, mini game A icon AI] [for example, start from FIG. 137 (8-1). Janken Showdown Animation, Display of Yoshimune Treasure Shown in Figures 138 to 139]
The effect display is an effect display in which the first icon of the first display mode is not used,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "by displaying the first icon of the second display mode, it is foretold that the effect display will be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

It should be noted that just because it is announced that the effect display will be displayed does not mean that the notification icon is displayed during and/or after the effect display is displayed. That is, merely displaying the first icon in the second display mode does not give a notice until the notice icon is displayed during and/or after the production display is displayed.

Moreover, when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the effect display is displayed, and when the first icon is displayed in the first display mode, the effect display is displayed. However, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the advance notice icon is not notified only by displaying the first icon in the first display mode.

Here, when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the effect display may be always displayed, or conversely, the effect display may not be displayed.

It may be unclear whether or not the notice icon will be displayed thereafter, depending only on the display of the first icon in the second display mode.

The second icon may be displayed only when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode.

Here, the first icon and the second icon displayed in the second display mode may be simultaneously displayed, or the first icon displayed in the second display mode. May be displayed first, or the second icon may be displayed first.

The second icon may be displayed even if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed. Further, if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed, the second icon may not be displayed. Alternatively, even if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed, the second icon may be displayed.

The second icon may be always displayed only when the first icon displayed in the second display mode is displayed. Furthermore, when the first icon displayed in the second display mode is displayed, the second icon may also be displayed without fail.

Further, the second icon may or may not be displayed in a state where the first icon is not displayed. That is, the second icon does not have to appear as a single body, or conversely may appear as a single body.

In addition, “the display of the second icon may be started after the first icon is displayed in the second display mode [for example, an opponent started from FIG. 132 (5)]. Appearance animation of icon, Appearance animation of icon for mini game A started from FIG. 138 (5)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The “second icon” here is neither the hold icon nor the icon that also serves as the hold icon, the variable icon, or the icon that also serves as the variable icon. That is, the “second icon” may be a display mode used for the effect display (hereinafter referred to as “display mode for effect display”).

The display of the second icon may not be started after the first icon is displayed in the second display mode. Even in the case where "display of the second icon is not started" here, the display of the second icon is started before the first icon is displayed in the second display mode. Or the first icon may be displayed at the same time as being displayed in the second display mode.

The second icon may be displayed without fail when the display mode of the first icon changes (for example, when the display mode changes to the second display mode). Alternatively, the first icon in the second display mode may be displayed after the second icon is displayed.

When the second icon is the variable icon or the hold icon (including the case of also serving as the variable icon or the hold icon), the second icon is displayed after the first icon of the second display mode is displayed. The second icon may change from the third display mode (for example, the default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, the display mode for effect display), or it may be changed. Good. Further, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon is changed from the third display mode (for example, default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, performance display). The display mode) may change or may always change. Alternatively, at the same time that the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon is changed from the third display mode (for example, default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, performance display). The display mode) may change or may always change.

The timing at which the second icon is displayed is one pattern (for example, the first icon in the second display mode is displayed only after the first icon in the second display mode is displayed. There may be only before, or only at the same time when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed), or a plurality of patterns (for example, the first icon of the second display mode is displayed). A certain fixed combination of 2 or 3 after, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, and at the same time when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed) It may be.

The second icon may be displayed before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, or the first icon of the second display mode may be displayed. After that, the second icon may be displayed, or the second icon may be displayed at the same time when the first icon in the second display mode is displayed.

In addition, "the plurality of first icons in the second display mode may be displayed [for example, FIG. 132 (A3-1), FIG. 138 (U3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

There may be a case where only one of the first icons in the second display mode is displayed. In addition, a plurality of the first icons in the first display mode may be displayed, or only one may be displayed. Further, only one second icon may be displayed, or a plurality of second icons may be displayed.

Also, as the effect display, the first effect display may be displayed,
As the effect display, a second effect display may be displayed,
After the first effect display is displayed, the notice icon is displayed [for example, FIG. 132 (11)],
After the second effect display is displayed, the notice icon is not displayed [for example, FIG. 133 (A8-2-3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

That is, the second effect display is a so-called false effect display.

In addition, "a plurality of notice icons may be displayed [for example, FIG. 137 (I 11), FIG. 140 (U 15-2-17)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

For example, a plurality of notice icons may be displayed after the effect display is displayed once or a plurality of times. That is, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are stocked. For example, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are displayed when the effect display is performed only once, or 0 or 1 notice icon is displayed each time the effect display is performed. A plurality of notice icons may be displayed by the effect display being performed a plurality of times. Further, the notice icon may be displayed (stock) by an effect other than the effect display.

In addition, it may be easier to finalize and display the jackpot pattern mode finally when the second number of the notice icons is displayed than when the first number of the notice icons are displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Even when the second number of the notice icons are displayed, there may be a case where the symbol pattern of the final loss is finally confirmed and displayed. Alternatively, when the second number of the notice icons are displayed, the jackpot pattern mode may be finally definitely displayed.

Even if the advance notice icon is displayed in the second advance notice mode rather than the advance notice icon is displayed in the first advance notice mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be more easily finalized and displayed. Good.

In addition, “operation means operable by the player [for example, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.] is provided,
When the operation means is operated during the display of the effect display, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, the flow of FIG. 132 (A9-1) and subsequent steps following FIG. 146 (c7)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The notice icon may be displayed even if the operation unit is not operated, or conversely, the notice icon may be displayed only when the operation unit is operated.

During the display of the effect display, there may be a case where the operation means can be operated and a case where the operation means cannot be operated. When the operation means can be operated, the advance notice icon may be displayed more easily, or the opposite case. In addition, the notice icon may not be displayed easily. Further, the probability that the notice icon is displayed may be the same when it is possible and when it is not.

During the display of the effect display, a display (hereinafter, referred to as “operation display”) related to the operation unit may be displayed or may not be displayed. The operation display referred to here may be a display including an image simulating the operation means, may be a display of only the image, or a display prompting the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display). May be included in the display, may be only the operation promotion display, or may be a display including a display indicating the operation effective period of the operation means (operation effective period display), or the operation Only the valid period may be displayed. Further, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared as the display modes of the operation display, and the plurality of types of display modes include mode changes of the operation means itself (for example, color changes, protrusion amount changes, , A change in shape, a change in position, a change in posture, etc.) may be included.

In addition, it is equipped with "production moving means [for example, FIG. 158 (C1)],
It is configured such that the effect moving means may perform an effect operation after the effect display is started [eg, the mini game exclusive accessory 225 shown in FIG. 158 (c2)].
When the effect operation is performed, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, FIG. 158 (C2)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The effect movable means may be configured to perform an effect operation after the effect display is displayed. That is, it may be configured such that the production movable means may perform a production operation after the display of the production display is finished. Alternatively, the production movable means may be configured to perform a production operation while the production display is being displayed.

When the effect operation is performed, the notice icon may be displayed more easily than when the effect operation is not performed, but the notice icon may not be displayed even when the effect operation is performed. Good. Alternatively, the notice icon may be displayed without fail when the effect operation is performed.

When the effect operation is performed, a pre-reading notice may be started, or a normal notice (a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed when the effect action is performed) may be started. It may be. Further, when the effect operation is performed, the pre-reading notice may be started more easily than when the effect operation is not performed. However, when the pre-reading notice is not started even when the effect operation is performed, There may be Alternatively, when the effect operation is performed, the look-ahead notice may be displayed without fail. Further, when the effect operation is performed, the normal announcement may be easier to start than when the effect operation is not performed, but when the effect operation is performed, the normal announcement is not started. There may be Alternatively, when the effect operation is performed, the normal notice may be displayed without fail.

However, during the display of the effect display, the effect moving means may never perform the effect operation, or the effect moving means may perform the effect operation irrespective of the display of the effect display. It may be done.

In addition, “the notice icon is one of a plurality of notice modes [for example, “box”, “red box”, “gold box”, and “rainbow box” shown in FIG. 129(a)]. It is an icon that starts with
The notice icon displayed in the second notice mode [for example, "red box"] is more likely to be displayed than the notice icon displayed in the first notice mode [for example, "box"]. In the symbol variation display that is executed when the notice icon is used, the jackpot symbol aspect may be easily finalized and displayed [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 129(a)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

When the advance notice icon is used before the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “prediction subject change”) that is the subject of advance notice by the advance notice icon is started, the advance notice by the advance notice icon is a prefetch advance notice. In some cases, the notice may be a normal notice, but it may be unclear whether the notice was a look-ahead notice or a normal notice only by looking at the notice by the notice icon.

The notice icon may be used in the production by the end of the change of the notice subject. Also in this case, the notice by the notice icon may be used as the prefetch notice or the normal notice.

The advance notice icon may be displayed more easily in the first advance notice mode than in the second advance notice mode. In some cases, a certain display (display different from the notice display) may be easily displayed.

In addition, "the display means is a means in which a variable icon [for example, a variable icon h0] may be displayed,
The fluctuation icon is an icon related to the symbol fluctuation display being executed,
The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first icon is the variable icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The first icon may be an icon dedicated to the variable icon, or may be an icon that also serves as the variable icon.

In addition, “the display means is a means that may display a hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 of Tokushu 1],
The hold icon is an icon that represents the number of hold by the number displayed,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, "the first icon is the hold icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 42],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N all, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N One or two, fourth display means 208M', light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc.],
The display means is a means that may display a hold icon,
The hold icon is an icon displayed in correspondence with the number of holds [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 in Toku-zu 1],
The display means is a means in which a notice icon may be displayed,
The notice icon is an icon of a different type from the hold icon [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 129(a), various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 129(b)], and the display means is , A notice display [for example, a notice display YH] may be displayed,
As the notice display, a plurality of types of notice displays are prepared [for example, various notice displays YH shown in FIG. 129(b)],
When the advance notice icon is used, one type of advance notice display among the plurality of types of advance notice displays may be displayed [for example, FIG. 133 (A32), FIG. 142 (E13), FIG. 143 (e 1-2-18), FIG. 148 (a8-1), FIG. 148 (a8-2-1), FIG. 150 (a1-3-3), FIG. 151 (aa15), the same figure. (A28) etc.],
When the notice icon is used, the notice icon may not be displayed [for example, FIG. 133 (A35), FIG. 143 (E15), FIG. 143 (E1-2-20), etc.],
Even if the notice icon is used, the notice icon may not be hidden, and the notice icon may be used again in the presentation, and a certain notice display of the plurality of types of notice displays may be displayed [eg, 148 (a11), the same figure (a16), FIG. 148 (a8-2-4), the same figure (a8-2-6), FIG. 150 (a1-3-9), and FIG. (A28) etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to this gaming table, even after the notice icon is used, the display state of the notice icon can be paid attention to, which may entertain the player.

The “when the notice icon is used” means, for example, a case where the notice icon is used in the presentation, and more specifically, when the display mode of the notice icon is changed. It may be the case where the notice icon disappears (is hidden) (the same applies below).

If the notice icon is used once, the notice icon may be hidden, and even if the notice icon is used once, the notice icon is not hidden and the notice icon is rendered again. It may be used and a certain notice display may be displayed.

In addition, “a plurality of types of advance notice icons are prepared as the advance notice icon [for example, various advance notice icons YI shown in FIG. 129(a), various advance notice icons YI shown in FIG. 129(b)],
One of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is the first advance notice [for example, No6. "Change notice"],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the second notice [for example, No. 17 Notice display of "reach"]
A certain notice icon [for example, No. When the "box" notice icon YI] is used, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 148 (a8-1), FIG. 150 (a1-3-3). ), FIG. 151 (a15), the same figure (a28), etc.],
When the certain notice icon is used, the second notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 148 (a11) or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, before the advance notice icon is used, the fact that the advance notice display is displayed may not be given a advance notice.

Further, it may be configured such that, before the advance notice icon is used, no advance notice is given as to which type of advance notice display among the plurality of types of advance notice displays is displayed.

Further, there may be a case where it is not announced that the first notice display will be displayed just by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display may be displayed. It may not be announced in advance. Alternatively, on the contrary, there may be a case where it is announced that the first notice display is displayed only by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display is displayed. It may be announced in advance.

Further, it is configured such that, when a certain type of advance notice icon among the plurality of types of advance notice icons is used, a type of advance notice display associated with the certain type of advance notice icon is displayed [ For example, the various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 129(b) are associated with the various notice displays shown in FIG. 129(b) in a one-to-one relationship.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The plurality of types of notice display and the plurality of types of notice icons may be associated with each other.

The plurality of types of advance notice display and the plurality of types of advance notice icons are associated with each other on a type-by-type basis, may be associated one-to-one, or may be associated one-to-many. May be provided, or they may be associated in a many-to-many manner.

In addition, “the certain type of notice icon is not hidden even if used once, and the certain type of notice icon is used multiple times until the certain type of notice icon is hidden. A plurality of types of advance notices associated with different types of advance notice icons are displayed [for example, FIG. 151 (a15) and (a28), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second notice display is a display for giving a notice regarding the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed [for example, a notice that the reach is performed],
The symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, “the type of the notice display displayed when the notice icon is first used [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. The type of the notice display displayed when the notice icon YH of 27 “small size” is used N times (N is a natural number of 2 or more) [for example, the third time] is used. [For example, FIG. 148 (a8-2-2) and the same figure (a8-2-6)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

However, they may be different, and different types of notice displays may be displayed without fail. Alternatively, on the contrary, it may be the same.

In addition, “operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.],
The display means is a means in which an operation display may be displayed,
The operation display is a display including at least an image simulating the operation means [for example, an operation promotion notification image including a button image 136a and a remaining time display meter MT].
When the notice icon is used [for example, FIG. 152 (b4)], the operation display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 152 (b5)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.],
The display means is a means in which an operation display may be displayed,
The operation display is a display [for example, a display of an operation promotion notification image] including at least an image simulating the operation means [for example, a button image 136a],
The notice icon may be used after the operation display is displayed [for example, FIG. 133 (A 31-2-2), FIG. 155 (D a2)] [For example, FIG. 133 (A 31-2)). -6), FIG. 155 (a7)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The operation display may be a display of only an image imitating the operation means, or may be a display including a display for prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “operation promotion display”). The display may include a display indicating the operation valid period of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “operation valid period display”), the image and the operation promotion display only, or the image. Alternatively, only the operation valid period may be displayed. Further, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared as the display modes of the operation display, and the plurality of types of display modes include mode changes of the operation means itself (for example, color changes, protrusion amount changes, , A change in shape, a change in position, a change in posture, etc.) may be included.

In addition, “operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.],
When the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 133 (A 31-2-5), FIG. 155 (D a5)], the advance notice icon may be used [for example, FIG. 133 (A 31-2-6). ), FIG. 155 (a7)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.],
When the operation means is operated, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, the flow from FIG. 146 (c7) to FIG. 132 (a9-1) and thereafter],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "provided movable means [for example, family crests role product 224E, Senryo box role product 224H shown in FIG.
When the notice icon is used, as the notice display, a display for giving a notice that the effect moving means performs the effect operation [eg, No. shown in FIG. 129(b)]. No. 24, “Thousand Box Operation”. 25, "Crest monument operation"] may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The display for announcing that the effect moving means performs the effect operation is referred to as an effect operation notice display.

In addition, "a plurality of notice icons may be displayed [for example, FIG. 137 (I 11), FIG. 140 (U 15-2-17)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, it may be easier to finalize and display the jackpot pattern mode finally when the second number of the notice icons is displayed than when the first number of the notice icons are displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the notice icon is one of a plurality of notice modes [for example, “box”, “red box”, “gold box”, and “rainbow box” shown in FIG. 129(a)]. It is an icon that starts with
The notice icon displayed in the second notice mode [for example, "red box"] is more likely to be displayed than the notice icon displayed in the first notice mode [for example, "box"]. In the symbol variation display that is executed when the notice icon is used, the jackpot symbol aspect may be easily finalized and displayed [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 129(a)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 42],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N all, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N One or two, fourth display means 208M', light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
The display means is a means that may display a hold icon,
The holding icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holdings [for example, the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14 of Toku-zu 1],
The hold icon is displayed in the first icon display mode [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. No. 1 "default" icon display mode, or No. No. 2 shown in FIG. 163(A1-2-3) or the No. 2 shown in FIG. 131(a). 10 “Timer” display mode], which is an icon that may be displayed.
The hold icon is a second icon display mode [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 5 "red" icon display mode],
The variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is more variable than the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. , Finally, the jackpot pattern mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 131(a)],
It is configured to be able to execute a change effect [for example, "effect that changes the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon described in paragraph 1873"].
In the change effect, a first change animation using a certain display [for example, various icon change notice display shown in FIG. 131(b)] may be performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern,
The first change animation is an animation [for example, an icon change animation] that changes the mode of any one of the hold icons being displayed,
The certain display is the first mode [for example, No. shown in FIG. 131(b)]. No. 4 "Bomber" icon mode or the default color thundercloud icon mode described in paragraph 2482].
The certain display is the second mode [for example, No. shown in FIG. 131(b). No. 5 "red bomber" icon mode or "red thundercloud icon IHI mode" shown in FIG. 166 (D3), etc.
In the first change animation, the certain display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”) [eg, No. 1 shown in FIG. 131(b)]. 4 "Bomber" icon IHI, or the default color thundercloud icon described in paragraph 2482] may be used,
When the first change animation using the first display is performed, the mode of any of the held icons among the displayed held icons may be changed to the second icon display mode. Yes [for example, the display mode may be changed to a blue display mode other than the red display mode like the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 161(A3′-2-4), but in FIG. 160(A6′) As shown, it may change to a red display mode],
In the first change animation, the certain display of the second mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display”) [for example, the icon IHI of “red thundercloud” shown in FIG. 166 (D3) or the like, No. 1 shown in FIG. 5 "Red bomber icon IHI" may be used,
When the first change animation using the second display is performed, the mode of any of the hold icons displayed is changed to the second icon display mode [for example, FIG. 160(A6), FIG. 160(A4-2-3), FIG. 160(A2-2-4), FIG. 161(A3-5-4), FIG. 161(A3-7-7), and FIG. 162(A3-). 2-4), FIG. 164 (B8), FIG. 167 (Ea2-2-5), FIG. 170 (Fd6), FIG. 171 (Fe6), and FIG. 172 (Ff11), the display mode is always changed to red. ],
The first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive variable display of decorative symbols [for example, FIG. 165 (B3-4-3) to the same figure (B3-4-5). )],
It is configured so that the first display may be displayed in a certain period,
The certain period is a period in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and the number of reservations is 0.
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

A fourth change animation that uses the change notice display may be performed, and the fourth change animation may be an animation that changes the type and/or the aspect of the notice icon. A fifth change animation using the change notice display may be performed, and the fifth change animation may be an animation that changes the type and/or mode of the notice display.

When the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of any of the hold icons displayed is an icon other than the second icon display mode. The display mode (for example, one of the third to fifth icon display modes described later, or the sixth icon display mode) may be changed.

The m-th change animation using the n-th change notice display is the m-th change animation by the n-th change notice display, and the n-th change notice display in which the n-th change notice display appears. It is a change animation of m (both n and m are natural numbers of 1 or more, and the same applies below).

As the change notice display, a plurality of types of change notice displays are prepared, and one kind of the change notice displays of the plurality of types of change notice displays is the first change notice display. One type of the change notice display among the change notice displays is the second change notice display. The first change notice display may be displayed in the first change notice manner, or may be displayed in the second change notice manner. Alternatively, the second change notice display may be displayed in the first change notice mode or may be displayed in the second change notice mode. Furthermore, the first change animation may be executed more easily when the first change notice display is displayed than when the second change notice display is displayed.

Note that, here, the first change animation changes the mode of any of the hold icons among the displayed hold icons, but the change notice display indicates the mode of any of the hold icons. May be interpreted as changing.

Any one of the hold icons may be a plurality of hold icons or may be one hold icon, for example, all or some of the displayed hold icons, Good (the same applies below).

The mode before the change of any of the holding icons may be the first icon display mode, the third icon display mode, or the like. That is, the mode when the display of the change notice display is started in any of the hold icons is not limited to the default mode.

Also,
"A game table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means that may display a hold icon,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds,
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first icon display mode,
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second icon display mode,
The symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally more than the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode,
The display means is a means that may display a change notice display,
The first change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The first change animation is an animation that changes the mode of any of the held icons among the displayed held icons,
The change notice display is a display that may be displayed in the first change notice manner,
The change notice display is a display that may be displayed in the second change notice mode,
The change preview display displayed in the second change preview mode is used rather than the first change animation displayed in the first change preview mode. The first change animation is easier to change the mode of any of the held icons among the displayed held icons to the second icon display mode,
A game table characterized by that. "
May be

According to this gaming table, it is possible to infer what kind of mode (here, the second icon display mode) the mode of the hold icon may be changed by the mode of the change notice display, Sometimes it can entertain the player. For example, the mode of the change notice display is related to the mode after the change of the hold icon, and if the mode of the change notice display is a red mode (here, the second change notice mode), the hold It can be inferred that the mode after the change of the icon may also be the red mode (here, the second icon display mode).

In the first change animation in which the change advance notice display displayed in the second change advance notice mode is used, one of the hold icon modes among the displayed hold icons is There may be a case where it is changed to a mode other than the first icon display mode and the second icon display mode (for example, the sixth icon display mode, etc.), and rather than changing to the sixth icon display mode. May be easily changed to the second icon display mode.

In the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode, one of the hold icon modes among the displayed hold icons is set to the first change animation mode. There may be a case where it is changed to a mode other than the icon display mode and the second icon display mode (for example, the seventh icon display mode). This seventh icon display mode may be a mode of confirming the big hit (premier mode). That is, in the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode is used, the mode of any one of the holding icons is a pre-reading notice mode but a big hit confirmation. Although it is easy to change to a mode (for example, the second icon display mode) that is not so long, in the first change animation using the change notification display displayed in the second change notification mode, the big hit is confirmed. May be changed to the mode (premier mode). It should be noted that the jackpot confirmation mode (premier mode) may be always changed. Further, although the seventh icon display mode is not originally a mode for confirming a big hit, it may be treated as a form for confirming a big hit. In this case, the look-ahead notice is inconsistent with the normal time, and the contradiction becomes a premier and a big hit.

The second icon display mode may be different from the first icon display mode. The first icon display mode may be a default mode. The default mode is the mode most frequently displayed. The second icon display mode may be a look-ahead notice mode. Further, the first change animation is easier to be executed when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode than when it is displayed in the first change notice mode. Good.

In addition, “the hold icon is a third icon display mode [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. The display mode of the "blue" icon of 3]],
The variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is more variable than the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third icon display mode. , Finally, the jackpot pattern mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 131(a)],
When the first change animation in which the first display is used is performed by displaying the first display, the mode of any one of the hold icons is the third hold mode. It may be changed to an icon display mode [For example, it may be changed to a blue display mode (third display mode) like the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 161 (A3′-2-4). ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The third icon display mode may also be a look-ahead notice mode.

The symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third icon display mode is finally more than the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. The jackpot pattern mode may be easily confirmed and displayed.

The first change animation in which the first change advance notice display is used is one of the hold icons being displayed, and the third icon rather than the second icon display mode. The display mode may be easily changed. The probability of changing to the second icon display mode may be 0%.

In addition, “even if the first change animation using the second display is performed, the mode of all the held icons displayed is not changed to the third icon display mode [for example, FIG. A6), FIG. 160 (A4-2-3), FIG. 160 (A2-2-4), FIG. 161 (A3-5-4), FIG. 161 (A3-7-7), and FIG. 162 (A3-2-4). ), FIG. 164(B8), FIG. 167(Ea2-2-5), FIG. 168(Eb8), FIG. 170(Fd6), FIG. 171(Fe6), and FIG. 172(Ff11). No pending icon changed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "a first immutable animation using the certain display [for example, an icon immutable animation] may be performed,
Even if the first display is displayed, if the first non-changing animation using the first display is performed, the mode of all the hold icons displayed does not change,
Even if the second display is displayed, if the first non-changing animation using the second display is performed, the mode of all the hold icons displayed is not changed [eg, FIG. (A3-3-3), the display mode of all hold icons does not change as shown in FIG. 161 (A3-4-4)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “In the first unchangeable animation, a scene in which the aspect of any one of the displayed hold icons fails to be changed by the second display [for example, FIG. 161 (A3- 3-2) to (A3-3-3) scene, and FIG. 161 (A3-4-2) to (A3-4-4) scene] are included in the animation.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "A third change animation using the certain display may be performed,
The third change animation is the same animation as the first non-change animation [for example, FIG. 161 (A3-4-1) to FIG. 161 (A3-5-1) to FIG. (A3-5-2)],
The third change animation is a scene that finally succeeds in changing the mode of any of the displayed hold icons by the second display [eg, FIG. 161 (A3 -5-3) to the scene of (A3-5-4) in the figure] is included.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “The first change animation is a scene in which the aspect of any of the displayed hold icons is successfully changed by the second display [for example, FIG. 160 (A4-1 )-(A5) scene, etc.] is included in the animation.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

here,
"There may be a first non-changing animation that uses the change notice display,
The change notice display is a display composed of a plurality of change notice icons,
One of the plurality of change notice icons is a first change notice icon,
One of the plurality of change notice icons is a second change notice icon,
The first non-changing animation includes a scene (hereinafter, referred to as “first scene”) in which changing the mode of any one of the displayed hold icons has failed. Is an animation
The first scene is a scene that has failed using the second change notice icon,
The first change animation includes a scene (hereinafter, referred to as a "second scene") in which the aspect of any one of the displayed hold icons has been successfully changed. Animation,
The second scene is a successful scene using the second change notice icon.
A game table characterized by that. "
May be

In the first change animation, either one of the first scene using the first change notice icon and the second scene using the first change notice icon is displayed. It is an animation that may be displayed, the first immutable animation is also an animation that may be displayed in any one of the first scene and the second scene, The successful scene may be displayed more easily when the second scene is displayed than when the first scene is displayed. Alternatively, the ease of displaying the successful scene may not be different between the two cases.

In addition, the first change animation is an animation in which a second scene using the first change notice icon may be displayed, and the first change animation is the first change notice. The first non-change animation is an animation in which the first scene using the icon is never displayed, and the first non-change animation is the animation in which the first scene may be displayed. The change animation is an animation in which the second scene is not displayed. When the second scene is displayed, the successful scene is always displayed, and when the first scene is displayed. The failed scene may be displayed without fail.

Further, the first change animation is one of a first scene in which the first change notice icon is used and a second scene in which the first change notice icon is used. Is an animation in which the scene may be displayed, the first invariant animation is an animation in which the first scene may be displayed, and the first invariant animation is the second When the second scene is displayed, the successful scene is always displayed, and even when the first scene is displayed, the failed scene is always displayed. It may be in a mode not necessarily displayed.

There may be only one scene using the first change notice icon for the hold icon displayed at a certain position.

Also,
"A third change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The third change animation is the same animation as the first non-change animation until the middle,
The third change animation is a scene (hereinafter, referred to as a “third scene”) that finally succeeds in changing the mode of any one of the displayed hold icons. The included animation,
The third scene is a scene that finally succeeded using the second change notice icon,
A game table characterized by that. "
May be

The third change animation is an animation that makes the change of the mode of the hold icon unsuccessful and succeeds. The third change animation has a lower appearance frequency than the first change animation. However, on the contrary, it may be higher or the same.

Corresponding to the hold icon changed to the second icon display mode by the first change animation, rather than the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon changed to the second icon display mode by the third change animation There may be cases where the symbol variation display is more likely to be finalized and the final big hit symbol aspect is displayed (the reliability of the big hit (the degree of expectation) is higher), or conversely, the big jackpot symbol aspect is finally finalized. It may be difficult to be displayed (the reliability (expectation) of the big hit is low), or both may have the same reliability (expectation) of the big hit.

Also, "the first change animation in which the second display is used rather than the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold icon whose mode is changed by the first change animation in which the first display is used. Depending on the variation display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold icon whose mode has changed, the jackpot pattern mode may be more likely to be finally fixed and displayed [for example, if the change icon before the change has the same default display mode, , The first change animation using the first change notice display changes to the third display mode (the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 161 (A3′-2-4)), but the second change notice The first change animation in which the display is used changes to the fifth display mode (the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 161(A7), so the reliability shown in FIG. 131(a)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first display may be changed to the second display [for example, FIG. 164(B4) to FIG. 164(B5), FIG. 164(B3-2-1) to FIG. 2-5), FIG. 164 (B3-3-3) to the same figure (B3-3-5), FIG. 165 (B1-2-5) to the same figure (B1-2-9), and FIG. 165 (B1- 3-6) to FIG. 166 (B1-3-9)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The mode of the change notice display started to be displayed in the first change notice mode may change to the second change notice mode, or the change changed to the first change notice mode. There may be a case where the mode of the notice display further changes to the second change notice mode. Further, in the first change animation, there may be a case where the second change notice mode is changed, and before the first change animation is started, the second change notice mode is changed. May change to the second change notice mode, or may change to the second change notice mode after the first change animation ends.

It should be noted that the change notice display mode displayed in the first change notice mode does not change and remains displayed in the first change notice mode, as compared with the frequency when the change notice display mode changes to the second change notice mode. In this case, the frequency may be configured to be higher, but the relationship of this frequency may be reversed, or both frequencies may be the same.

The mode of the change notification display displayed in the first change notification mode may be configured not to change to another mode.

Even if the change notice display mode displayed in the second change notice mode does not change to the first change notice mode, or conversely, it may change. Good.

Even if the change notice display mode displayed in the second change notice mode (for example, red mode) is changed to the third change notice mode (for example, gold mode or rainbow mode) Good. Also, the change notice display mode displayed in the second change notice mode does not change and remains displayed in the second change notice mode, as compared with the frequency when the change notice display mode changes to the third change notice mode. In this case, the frequency may be configured to be higher, but the relationship of this frequency may be reversed, or both frequencies may be the same.

Compared to the case where the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode from the beginning, the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode. The first change animation for changing any of the displayed hold icons to the second icon display mode may be easily executed. Alternatively, on the contrary, the change notice display is displayed from the beginning in the second change notice mode more than when the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode. In this case, the first change animation for changing any of the displayed hold icons to the second icon display mode may be more easily executed. Furthermore, in both cases, there is no difference in the execution probability of the first change animation that changes any of the hold icons to the second icon display mode, and the execution probabilities may be the same.

The first change notice than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose form has been changed by the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the second change notice form from the beginning The pattern variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode has been changed by the first change animation in which the mode change notice display that has changed from the mode to the second change notice mode is finally used is the big hit symbol mode. There is a case where it is easy to be confirmed and displayed (the reliability of the big jackpot (expectation) is high), or, conversely, it is difficult to finally display the jackpot pattern mode (the reliability of the big jackpot (expectation) is low). ), the reliability (expectation) of the big hit may be the same in both cases.

Also, "the display means is a means in which a variable icon may be displayed,
The variable icon is an icon [for example, a variable icon h0] related to the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed,
There may be a second change animation using the certain display,
The second change animation is an animation [for example, an icon change animation] that changes the aspect of the variable icon,
If the second change animation using the first display is performed by displaying the first display, the mode of the displayed variable icon changes to the second icon display mode. May be
When the second change animation in which the second display is used is performed by displaying the second display, the mode of the displayed variable icon changes to the second icon display mode. [For example, FIG. 160 (A3-2-4)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the variable icon may be an icon representing a digested hold.

The variable icon can be regarded as an icon displayed in correspondence with the number of holds=0, and can be said to be a kind of hold icon in a broad sense, but it is limited here in distinction from the hold icon. However, the mode of the variable icon is common to the mode of the hold icon and is referred to as the nth icon display mode.

In addition, the "hold icon" described so far can be replaced with a "fluctuation icon", and the "first change animation" can be replaced with a "second change animation". The "icon" can be replaced with the "changing icon", and the "first change animation" can be replaced with the "second change animation". These things are the same in the following.

Further, the second change animation is more likely to be executed when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode than when the change notice display is displayed in the first change notice mode. May be According to this configuration, if the second change animation is executed, a big hit can be expected in the currently displayed symbol variation display, and if the first change animation is executed, after this, You can have a big hit expectation in the symbol fluctuation display to be started, and the player is interested in which change animation of the first change animation and the second change animation is executed, The interest of the game may improve.

In addition, there is a case where a second invariant animation [for example, an icon invariant animation] using the certain display is performed,
Even if the first display is displayed, if the second invariant animation using the first display is performed, the mode of the displayed variable icon does not change,
Even if the second display is displayed, the mode of the displayed variable icon does not change if the second invariant animation using the second display is performed [eg, FIG. 161 (A3 -3-3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The second non-changing animation here is an animation in which the aspect of the variable icon does not change, and if the variation of the aspect of the variable icon is regarded as successful, when the second change animation is displayed, It corresponds to success, and when the second immutable animation is displayed, it corresponds to failure.

In addition, “operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.],
The first aspect is an aspect [eg, an aspect shown in FIG. 164 (B3-2-2)] including a display [for example, the display of the button image 136a] regarding the operation means,
When the operation means is operated during the display of the first display, the first display may change to the second display [for example, FIG. 164 (B3-2-5). ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Depending on the first change animation, one of the hold icons may change to the eighth icon display mode, or may not change. Further, the variable icon may or may not change to the eighth icon display mode by the second change animation. The eighth icon display mode referred to here is a mode including a display relating to the operation means.

The operation means is means for setting an operation valid period, and a display (hereinafter, referred to as “operation display”) related to the operation means is displayed at least during the operation valid period, and within the operation valid period. When the operation means is operated, the mode of the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode according to the operation, and within the operation effective period. When the operation is not performed, the first change notice mode may be changed to the second change notice mode after the operation valid period has elapsed. Further, when the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes from the eighth icon display mode to the second icon display mode in response to the operation, and the operation is not performed within the operation valid period. In addition, after the operation valid period has elapsed, the eighth icon display mode may be changed to the second icon display mode.

However, when the operation is not performed within the operation valid period, the mode of the change notice display, the hold icon or the change icon changes to the second change notice mode or the second icon display mode. You don't have to. Alternatively, the change notice display may change to the second change notice mode or the second icon display form at a timing different from the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, and the change notice display may be the first change notice display. The display may be restarted in the change notice mode, or the hold icon or the variable icon may be restarted in the eighth icon display mode. Further, the change notice display may continue to be displayed in the first change notice mode until the operation is performed, and the hold icon or the change icon is the eighth icon until the operation is performed. The display may be continued in the display mode.

It should be noted that the operation display may be a display including an image simulating the operation means, may be a display of only the image, or may be a display urging operation of the operation means (operation promotion display). It may be a display including the display, only the operation promotion display, or a display including a display indicating the operation effective period of the operation means (operation effective period display), or the operation effective display. It may be only the period display. Further, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared as the display modes of the operation display, and the plurality of types of display modes include mode changes of the operation means itself (for example, color changes, protrusion amount changes, , A change in shape, a change in position, a change in posture, etc.) may be included.

Further, if the operation means is operated during the display of the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode, the mode of the change notice display is changed from the first change notice mode. The second change notice mode may be changed without exception. Alternatively, there may be a case where there is a change from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode and a case where there is no change (for example, the first change notice mode remains unchanged).

In addition, "The change notice display is a display that may be displayed across consecutive symbol variation displays [for example, FIG. 162 (A3-8-1) to FIG. 162 (A3-8-3), FIG. 162. (A3-9-1) to (A3-9-3) in the same figure],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The term "straddle" as used herein means that a symbol stop display period (fluctuation stop period) is sandwiched therebetween. Further, the change notice display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or a display that disappears once in the middle. Also, even during the stop display of the symbols, the display may be continuously displayed, may be a display that disappears temporarily, or a display that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be

"Display that may be displayed across consecutive symbol variable displays" is "display that is always displayed", but "display that may be erased and then redisplayed" is also included. For example, it may be erased once during the super reach effect and redisplayed when the super reach effect is finished.

In addition, “The change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of “Red thundercloud”] is a display that is displayed at least in a state where the number of holdings is 0 and the decorative design that is stopped and displayed is displayed [for example, FIG. 167 (D9)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The change notice display may be a display that is displayed only in a state where the number of holdings is 0 and the decorative design that is stopped and displayed is displayed, or a display that is also displayed in other states. May be.

In addition, “the certain display [for example, the icon IHI of “red thunder cloud”] is a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of variable display of decorative symbols,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The change notice display may be a display that disappears (a display that becomes non-display) when the symbol variation display of a predetermined number of times ends.

In addition, “When the certain display [for example, the icon IHI of “Red thundercloud”] temporarily disappears even during the predetermined number of variable display of the decorative pattern [for example, FIG. 167 (D10 When the demo screen of the animation shown in) is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

For example, the change notice display may or may not disappear temporarily during the whole or part of the super reach effect.

The change notice display may be, for example, a display of a navigation character (a character performing an explanation display or the like).

Further, the change notice display may be a display which is constantly displayed for a certain period. The certain period may be a period until the hold subject to the advance notice is exhausted, or a period until the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold subject to the advance notice is completed, or a predetermined number of times. It may be a period until the symbol variable display is finished (hereinafter the same).

The change notice display may be hidden while the symbols are stopped in a state where there is no hold or during the demo display. That is, a certain period does not include a period during which the symbol is stopped in a state where there is no hold or a demo display period. However, the change notice display may be displayed even when the symbol is stopped in the state where there is no hold.

The change notice display may be a display that may disappear once during a certain period.

In addition, “when the certain display is displayed, but the first change animation is not displayed [for example, when the first non-change animation, the second change animation, or the second non-change animation is displayed, , When the change notice display is hidden and remains hidden],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Even if the change notice display is displayed, the second change animation may not be displayed.

The change notice display may be displayed and the first invariable animation may be performed, and the first invariant animation may be the same animation as the first incomplete animation. Further, the change notice display may be displayed and the second invariant animation may be performed, and the second invariant animation may be the same animation as the second incomplete animation. As described above, the case where the first invariant animation is displayed corresponds to a failure, but it is partway through (for example, at least the first part, the first half part, or the scene of whether the mode of the hold icon changes or not). Since the same animation (excluding part), the player can first distinguish whether the display of the first change animation or the display of the first non-change animation has started. It may not be possible and the interest in the game may improve.

Even if the change notice display is displayed, the first change animation and the first non-change animation may not be displayed.

In addition, “Before the display of the first change animation is started, there may be a case where it is informed that the aspect of any of the held icons displayed is in a state where it is likely to change [eg, 163: Notification by telop display trp shown in (A1-3-3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The notification that the mode of any of the holding icons is in a state in which the mode is likely to change (hereinafter, referred to as “pre-change notification”) is provided when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode. You may be notified. For example, the second change notification mode may be a mode including the display of the change advance notification. That is, the change notice display may be a display that also serves as the advance change notification. Alternatively, the advance change notification may be performed separately from the advance change notification display. When the change notice display is performed, the first change animation may be executed more easily than when the advance change notification is not performed. That is, the form of any one of the displayed hold icons may be easily changed. On the contrary, it may be difficult to execute, or may be the same in easiness of execution.

Further, the advance change notification may be started or notified before the first change animation is displayed after the change advance notice is displayed. Alternatively, the advance change notification may be started or notified before the change advance notice display is displayed.

In addition, “the first change animation is an animation that may change the mode of any of a plurality of hold icons among the displayed hold icons [eg, FIG. 161 (A3′-2-1) to The same figure (A3'-2-4)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The first change animation is an animation including a scene in which the aspect of any of the plurality of hold icons being displayed is successfully changed, and the first unchangeable animation. May be an animation including a scene in which changing the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons has failed.

The first change animation and the first non-change animation may be executed at the same time, and the aspect of any one or a plurality of the hold icons displayed may change. In this case, a scene in which one or more hold icons are changed and a scene in which one or more hold icons are not changed may be displayed.

Also, the first change animation may be an animation that necessarily changes the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons. The first non-changing animation may be an animation that does not necessarily change the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons.

In addition, “When the second display is displayed, the first change animation is always executed [for example, No. with an icon change ratio of 100% shown in FIG. 8 "Red Flying Boat"],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

There may be a case where the first non-changing animation using the change notice display is performed. The first non-change animation here is an animation that does not change the mode of any of the hold icons among the displayed hold icons, and if the change of the mode of the hold icon is regarded as successful, then The display of the first change animation corresponds to success, and the display of the first non-change animation corresponds to failure.

Further, the first change animation is an animation including a scene in which the aspect of any one of the displayed hold icons is successfully changed, and the first unchanged animation is included. The animation may be an animation including a scene in which the aspect of any one of the displayed hold icons has failed to be changed.

In addition, "the hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth icon display mode,
The fourth icon display mode is a mode suggesting that the mode of the hold icon of the fourth icon display mode may change [for example, a display mode of "bomb" shown in FIG. 168 (Eb1) and the like. ],
The mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode may change to the second icon display mode in the first change animation in which the second display is used. [For example, FIG. 168 (Eb8)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "the holding icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth icon display mode,
The fifth icon display mode is a display mode indicating that the mode change in the hold icon of the fourth icon display mode has failed [eg, the fire of the fuse shown in FIG. 168 (Eb7-2-1) is in the middle. The display mode of the "bomb" that has disappeared]
The mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode may change to the fifth icon display mode in the first change animation in which the second display is used. [For example, the same figure (Eb7-2-1) continuing from FIG. 168 (Eb6)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode, in the first change animation using the change notification display displayed in the second change notification mode, The first icon display mode may be changed.

Further, the fourth icon display mode is a display showing the length of the remaining time until the mode of the hold icon is changed (for example, a digital clock display, an analog clock display, a bar display, etc. Or a display in which the size, length, color, etc. change). ← Dynamite is a display in which the length of the squib changes. Further, in the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode, the change notification display displayed in the second change notification mode was used. A display showing how the remaining time elapses when the first change animation is started (for example, a countdown display or a change in shape, size, length, color, or the like depending on the elapsed time). Display) may be performed.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 42],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of holding icons [for example, the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14 of Tokushu 1] [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, And all of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one or two of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the fourth display means 208M', the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I, etc.] A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of holding icons is a second holding icon [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 131(a)]. 5 "red" hold icon],
The display means has a certain display in the first mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”) [eg, No. 1 shown in FIG. 131(b)]. The display of the icon IHI of "Bomber" of 4 and the display of the icon of the thundercloud of the default color described in paragraph 2482] is a means capable of displaying the first animation,
The display means displays the certain display in the second mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”) [eg, No. 1 shown in FIG. 131(b)]. The display of the icon IHI of "red bomber" of 5 and the display of the icon of "red thundercloud" shown in FIG. 166 (D3) etc.] is a means capable of displaying a second animation,
In the first animation, when one of the displayed hold icons is changed to the second hold icon [eg, the second hold shown in FIG. 161 (A3′-2-4)] The icon h12 may be changed to a blue display mode other than the red display mode, but may be changed to a red display mode as shown in FIG. 160(A6′)].
The second animation changes one of the displayed hold icons to the second hold icon [for example, FIG. 160 (A6), FIG. 160 (A4-2-3), FIG. 160 (A2-2-4), FIG. 161 (A3-5-4), FIG. 161 (A3-7-7), FIG. 162 (A3-2-4), FIG. 164 (B8), and FIG. 167 (Ea2). -2-5), FIG. 170 (Fd6), FIG. 171 (Fe6), and FIG. 172 (Ff11) as shown in FIG.
The first display is a display that is present when the decorative symbol variable display is not performed [for example, FIG. 165 (B3-4-4)],
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, FIG. 162 (A3-10-7) to FIG. 162 (A3-10-9), FIG. 165 (B3-4-10) to the same figure (B3-4-11)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.
Also
“The first display may be changed to the second display to execute the second animation [for example, FIG. 164(B4) to FIG. 164(B8)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also
“The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period during which the decorative symbol variable display is being performed and the hold icon is not displayed [for example, FIG. 162 (A3-10 -7) to the same figure (A3-10-9), FIG. 165 (B3-4-10) to the same figure (B3-4-11)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of holding icons [for example, the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14 of Tokushu 1] [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, And all of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one or two of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the fourth display means 208M', the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I, etc.] A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of holding icons is a second holding icon [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 131(a)]. 5 "red" hold icon],
The display means has a certain display in the first mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”) [eg, No. 1 shown in FIG. 131(b)]. The display of the icon IHI of "Bomber" of 4 and the display of the icon of the thundercloud of the default color described in paragraph 2482] is a means capable of displaying the first animation,
The display means displays the certain display in the second mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”) [eg, No. 1 shown in FIG. 131(b)]. The display of the icon IHI of "red bomber" of 5 and the display of the icon of "red thundercloud" shown in FIG. 166 (D3) etc.] is a means capable of displaying a second animation,
In the first animation, when one of the displayed hold icons is changed to the second hold icon [eg, the second hold shown in FIG. 161 (A3′-2-4)] The icon h12 may be changed to a blue display mode other than the red display mode, but may be changed to a red display mode as shown in FIG. 160(A6′)].
The second animation changes one of the displayed hold icons to the second hold icon [for example, FIG. 160 (A6), FIG. 160 (A4-2-3), FIG. 160 (A2-2-4), FIG. 161 (A3-5-4), FIG. 161 (A3-7-7), FIG. 162 (A3-2-4), FIG. 164 (B8), and FIG. 167 (Ea2). -2-5), FIG. 170 (Fd6), FIG. 171 (Fe6), and FIG. 172 (Ff11) as shown in FIG.
The first display is a display that is present when the decorative symbol variable display is not performed [for example, FIG. 165 (B3-4-4)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of holding icons is the first holding icon [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 1 is the "default" hold icon],
The first hold icon is a hold icon displayed in a default display mode,
The second hold icon is a hold icon displayed in a certain look-ahead notice display mode [for example, a red display mode] among a plurality of types of look-ahead notice display modes,
The second animation changes the displayed first hold icon to the second hold icon [for example, FIG. 160 (A6), FIG. 160 (A4-2-3), FIG. 161 (A3). -5-4), FIG. 164 (B8), FIG. 170 (Fd6), FIG. 171 (Fe6), and FIG. 172 (Ff11) as shown in FIG.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of holding icons is a third holding icon [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 3 “Blue” hold icon],
The third hold icon is a hold icon displayed in a look-ahead notice display mode [for example, a blue display mode] that is different from the certain look-ahead notice display mode among the plurality of types of look-ahead notice display modes. And
The variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the second holding icon is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed as the jackpot pattern than the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the third holding icon [eg, the figure 131(a) shows the reliability],
The first animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first hold icon to the second hold icon,
In the case where the first animation changes the displayed first hold icon [eg, the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 161 (A3′-2-1)] to the third hold icon [ For example, the case shown in FIG. 161 (A3′-2-4)] is an animation,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first hold icon to the third hold icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a first immutable animation using the first display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second immutable animation using the second display,
Even if the first display is displayed, if the first immutable animation is displayed, all the displayed hold icons do not change to the second hold icon,
Even if the second display is displayed, if the second immutable animation is displayed, all the displayed hold icons are not changed to the second hold icon [eg, FIG. 161]. (A3-3-3), the display mode of all hold icons does not change as shown in FIG. 161 (A3-4-4)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second immutable animation is a scene in which any one of the displayed hold icons has failed to be changed to the second hold icon by the second display [for example, 161(A3-3-2) to FIG. 161(A3-3-3), and FIG. 161(A3-4-2) to (A3-4-4) scene]. It's an anime
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the display means can display a third animation using the second display [for example, icon change animation shown in FIG. 161 (A3-5-1) to (A3-5-4)]. Is a means
The third animation is halfway [eg, FIG. 161 (A3-5-1) to (A3-5-2) in FIG. 161] and the second unchanging animation [eg, FIG. 161 (A3-4-). 1) to the same figure (A3-4-2)],
In the third animation, a scene finally succeeded in changing any of the displayed hold icons to the second hold icon by the second display [for example, , FIG. 161 (A3-5-4) to FIG. 160 (A7)] are included in the animation.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “The second animation is a scene in which one of the displayed hold icons has been successfully changed to the second hold icon by the second display [for example, FIG. 160 (A4-1) to scene (A6)] is included in the animation.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first display may be changed to the second display [for example, FIG. 164(B4) to FIG. 164(B5), FIG. 164(B3-2-1) to FIG. 2-5), FIG. 164 (B3-3-3) to the same figure (B3-3-5), FIG. 165 (B1-2-5) to the same figure (B1-2-9), and FIG. 165 (B1- 3-6) to FIG. 166 (B1-3-9)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.],
The first aspect is an aspect [eg, an aspect shown in FIG. 164 (B3-2-2)] including a display [for example, the display of the button image 136a] regarding the operation means,
When the operation means is operated during the display of the first display, the first display may change to the second display [for example, FIG. 164 (B3-2-5). ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "If the first animation is not displayed even if the first display is displayed [for example, when the first immutable animation is displayed or when the change warning display remains stationary and is hidden. If you end up with],
Even if the second display is displayed, there is a case where the second animation is not displayed [for example, a case where the second immutable animation is displayed].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, before the display of the second animation is started, it may be notified that one of the displayed hold icons is in a state of being easily changed to the second hold icon. [For example, notification by telop display trp shown in FIG. 163 (A1-3-3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The following is a supplementary description including the ones described so far.

(Appendix R0-1)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
The display means is a means that may display a hold icon,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds,
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first icon display mode,
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second icon display mode,
The variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is more variable than the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. In the end, it is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode,
It is configured to execute change production,
In the change effect, a first change animation in which a certain display is used may be performed during the display of the variable display of the decorative pattern,
The first change animation is an animation that changes the mode of any of the held icons among the displayed held icons,
The certain display is a display that may be displayed in the first mode,
The certain display is a display that may be displayed in the second mode,
In the first change animation, the certain display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”) may be used,
When the first change animation using the first display is performed, the mode of any of the held icons among the displayed held icons may be changed to the second icon display mode. Yes,
In the first change animation, the certain display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”) may be used,
When the first change animation using the second display is performed, the mode of any of the hold icons displayed is changed to the second icon display mode,
The first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive variable display of decorative symbols,
It is configured so that the first display may be displayed in a certain period,
The certain period is a period in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and the number of reservations is 0.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-2)
The gaming table described in Appendix R0-1,
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third icon display mode,
The variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is more variable than the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third icon display mode. In the end, it is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode,
When the first change animation in which the first display is used is performed by displaying the first display, the mode of any one of the hold icons is the third hold mode. It may be changed to the icon display mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-3)
The gaming table described in Appendix R0-2,
Even if the first change animation using the second display is performed, the mode of all the held icons displayed is not changed to the third icon display mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-4)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R0-1 to R0-3,
There may be a first immutable animation using the certain display,
Even if the first display is displayed, if the first non-changing animation using the first display is performed, the mode of all the hold icons displayed does not change,
Even if the second display is displayed, if the first unchanging animation using the second display is performed, the mode of all the hold icons displayed is not changed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-5)
The gaming table described in Appendix R0-4,
The first non-changing animation is an animation including a scene in which the aspect of any of the displayed hold icons has failed to be changed by the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-6)
The gaming table according to supplementary note R0-4 or R0-5,
There may be a third change animation using the certain display,
The third change animation is the same animation as the first non-change animation until the middle,
The third change animation is an animation including a scene that finally succeeded in changing the aspect of any of the displayed hold icons by the second display. is there,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-7)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R0-1 to R0-6,
The first change animation is an animation that includes a scene in which the aspect of any of the displayed hold icons is successfully changed by the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-8)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R0-1 to R0-7,
Aspect by the first change animation in which the second display is used, rather than a variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the hold icon whose aspect is changed by the first change animation in which the first display is used The variation display of the decorative design corresponding to the hold icon that has changed may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-9)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R0-1 to R0-8,
The first display may change to the second display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-10)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R0-1 to R0-9,
The display means is a means in which a variable icon may be displayed,
The variable icon is an icon related to the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed,
There may be a second change animation using the certain display,
The second change animation is an animation that changes the aspect of the variable icon,
If the second change animation using the first display is performed by displaying the first display, the mode of the displayed variable icon changes to the second icon display mode. May be
When the second change animation in which the second display is used is performed by displaying the second display, the mode of the displayed variable icon changes to the second icon display mode. Will be
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-11)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note R0-10,
There may be a second immutable animation using the certain display,
Even if the first display is displayed, if the second invariant animation using the first display is performed, the mode of the displayed variable icon does not change,
Even if the second display is displayed, if the second invariant animation using the second display is performed, the mode of the displayed variable icon does not change,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-12)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R0-1 to R0-11,
It is provided with operation means provided at a position where the player can operate,
The first aspect is an aspect including a display regarding the operation means,
During the display of the first display, when the operation means is operated, the first display may change to the second display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-13)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes R0-1 to R0-12,
The certain display is a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of variable display of decorative patterns,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-14)
The gaming table described in Appendix R0-13,
The certain display is a display that may temporarily disappear even during the predetermined number of variable display of the decorative pattern.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-15)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R0-1 to R0-14,
Even if the certain display is displayed, the first change animation may not be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-16)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes R0-1 to R0-15,
Before the display of the first change animation is started, there may be a notification that the aspect of any of the hold icons displayed is in a state where it is likely to change,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-17)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R0-1 to R0-16,
The first change animation is an animation that may change the mode of any of a plurality of hold icons among the displayed hold icons,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-18)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R0-1 to R0-17,
When the second display is displayed, the first change animation is always executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-19)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R0-1 to R0-18,
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth icon display mode,
The fourth icon display mode is a mode that suggests that the mode of the hold icon of the fourth icon display mode may change,
The mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode may change to the second icon display mode in the first change animation in which the second display is used. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-20)
The gaming table described in Appendix R0-19,
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth icon display mode,
The fifth icon display mode is a display mode indicating that the mode change in the hold icon of the fourth icon display mode has failed,
The mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode may change to the fifth icon display mode in the first change animation in which the second display is used. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-21)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R0-1 to R0-20,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

It should be noted that what is described as a variable display of a decorative pattern above may be a variable display of a design (more specifically, a special drawing), and a description that is displayed as a stop display of a decorative pattern means that the design (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

Further, in the above, "may be" may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", etc. It may be replaced with "always do ○○".

Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of each of the embodiments, the examples, the modified examples, the various examples, and the supplementary notes described above, the constituent requirements of the other embodiments, the examples, and the It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, additional notes, and the like. That is, as long as there is no factor that hinders application, constituent elements included only in the description of the embodiment, the example, the modification, the various examples, the supplementary notes, etc. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, and supplementary notes, it is established as one cohesive technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Chance button 137u Up key 137d Down key 137l Left key 137r Right key 208 Decorative pattern display device 208L 1st decorative pattern display device 208M 2nd decorative pattern display device 208N 3rd decorative pattern display device 208M' 4th Display means 208
300 main control unit 400 first sub-control unit 500 second sub-control unit 600 payout control unit 1000 slot machine pd3 third design pd4 fourth design pd5 fifth design UI hold frame HIS hold icon display area bIl left base icon hs1 to hs4 First stage to fourth stage h1 to h4, h11 to h14, h21 to h24 Hold icon CIS variation icon display area hs0 pedestal h0,c variation icon YM navigation character I1 treasure box icon DIS effect icon display area bIr right base icon MW white Meter display MR Red meter display UpI White meter increase item UpIb Blue meter increase item UpIm Green meter increase item UpIr Red meter increase item UpIg Gold meter increase item MI Menu icon VI Volume adjustment icon BI Brightness adjustment icon VW Volume adjustment Window BW Brightness adjustment window VB Volume control bar display TI Opponent icon AI Mini game A icon YI Notice icon YH Notice notice IHI "Bomber" icon, "Red bomber" icon, etc. notice notice RBI Red bomber icon BTI Bullet icon EF1-EF17 Effect image AS Appearance area SS Stock area

Claims (12)

A gaming table having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icon is a second hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first animation using a certain display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second animation using the certain display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”),
The first animation is an animation that may change any of the displayed hold icons to the second hold icon,
The second animation is an animation that changes any of the displayed hold icons to the second hold icon,
The first display is a display that may be displayed during the period when the decorative pattern variable display is not performed,
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period in which the hold icon is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to claim 1,
The first display may be changed to the second display to execute the second animation,
A game table characterized by that. It is the game table according to claim 1 or 2,
The first display is a period during which a decorative symbol variable display is being performed, and is a display that may be displayed during a period in which the hold icon is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
The first hold icon is a hold icon displayed in a default display mode,
The second hold icon is a hold icon displayed in a certain look-ahead notice display mode among a plurality of types of look-ahead notice display modes,
The second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first hold icon to the second hold icon,
A game table characterized by that. The game machine according to claim 4 ,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon,
The third hold icon is a hold icon displayed in a display mode of a read-ahead notice different from the display mode of the certain read-ahead notice among the display modes of the plurality of types of the read-ahead notice.
Rather than the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the third hold icon, the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the second hold icon, the final jackpot pattern mode is easier to be finalized display,
The first animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first hold icon to the second hold icon,
The first animation is an animation that may change the displayed first hold icon to the third hold icon,
The second animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first hold icon to the third hold icon,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first immutable animation using the first display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second immutable animation using the second display,
Even if the first display is displayed, if the first immutable animation is displayed, all the displayed hold icons do not change to the second hold icon,
Even if the second display is displayed, if the second immutable animation is displayed, all the displayed hold icons do not change to the second hold icon,
The second immutable animation includes a scene in which any one of the displayed hold icons fails to be changed to the second hold icon by the second display. Is an animated cartoon,
A game table characterized by that. The game machine according to claim 6 ,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a third animation using the second display,
The third animation is the same animation as the second immutable animation until the middle,
The third animation includes a scene that finally succeeded in changing any of the displayed hold icons to the second hold icon by the second display. Is an anime
A game table characterized by that. The game table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The second animation is an animation including a scene in which one of the displayed hold icons has been successfully changed to the second hold icon by the second display. Is
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
It is provided with operation means provided at a position where the player can operate,
The first aspect is a display relating to the operating means,
During the display of the first display, when the operation means is operated, the first display may change to the second display,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
Even if the first display is displayed, the first animation may not be displayed,
Even if the second display is displayed, the second animation may not be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. The game table according to any one of claims 1 to 10,
Before the display of the second animation is started, there may be a notification that any one of the displayed hold icons is in a state in which it is likely to change to the second hold icon,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 11,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.